Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

"You can't fight me and the poison."

Pain. That was all the young woman could feel as she lay slumped on a rocky plateau. It coursed through her muscles, penetrated her bones, and left her unable to move.

Yet the woman refused to give up. Her name, was Korra.

"The poison has done its work. Now, the Avatar Cycle will be over," a voice cut through the air. The bald man in grey robes hovered weightlessly in the air, untethered to the ground, like some sort of ghost or malicious spirit. His name, was Zaheer.

Everything screamed in Korra to keep fighting. To not give up. To use whatever energy was left inside and then some. But there was nothing left. Her eyes still glowed brilliant white as the power of a thousand past lives filled her spirit, but the poison inside was ravaging her body, and it took everything in her just to stay alive. There was nothing more she could do.

With another motion the man manifested a sphere around her head, drawing the very air out her lungs. It felt like she was choking on hot coals as she struggled against it. The voice inside telling her not to give up slowly faded into nothingness as did her consciousness. Despite all her fighting, all her perseverance, and all her struggle, she couldn't fight against him.
But it wasn't over.

A great whirlwind swept towards her from the valley. It was the combined effort from the airbenders below, who stood around the mighty tempest in their orange and yellow robes, feeding the whirlwind as it grew bigger and bigger. Eventually, it reached the woman stuck on the rock plateau. The air pockets trapping her dissipated, and her limp body started to drag away in the wind.

But Zaheer wasn't going to give up just yet. In a grey blur he swooped in and caught his enemy, trying to flee so he could finish ending her life another time. But he couldn't get away. As the airbenders fought to save their friend, the man fought to escape their vortex.
Eventually, he and the woman were dragged into the thick of it, spinning and flailing around as they headed towards the earth.

In a last-ditch effort the man in grey seized the Korra's arm, holding on and pushing with everything he had to get away. But as he looked down, he saw her eyes light up once more. She had lost consciousness on the plateau, but now that her lungs were filled with air again she had one more burst of energy left inside. Zaheer reluctantly let go, though as he flew upwards, something caught his ankle and yanked him down. It was the metal chain, used to keep his prisoner in place, and now the instrument of his demise.

With a powerful heave, Korra pulled herself and Zaheer towards the earth. She slammed into the rock, bringing her captor down with her. Despite all Zaheer's efforts to poison and kill her, she had still bet him.

But it had come at a cost; The poison had seeped into every part of her body. With a cry escaping her lips, Korra fell to the ground.
Immediately the airbender leading her rescue ran over, placing a hand on her body and watching anxiously. Another joined Korra. She felt his familiar warm embrace, as he looked down with tear-filled eyes. "Korra, sweetheart. It's me, dad. Please hang on."

The words didn't sink in. Was she dying and passing into the afterlife? No, she could still feel the solid earth beneath her, so this meant her father was in fact alive. Her glowing eyes widened, and she reached up to touch his face, just to check it was really true. Though she couldn't hold out. Her head slumped, and her eyes closed slowly. And everything inside her gave out.

The next few seconds were a hazy blur, but when Korra finally came to, she felt something move through her body. She coughed up the metallic liquid, spluttering and nearly choking as the burning pain lined her throat. But once it was out, she could breathe again. Her body was in terrible pain, with numbness and tingling throughout her limbs and body, but she was no longer fighting against the poison. She watched Suyin draw the last of it out of her, and flung the poison away.

"Dad, you're alive," Korra formed a smile. Her body ached and stung, but she couldn't help feeling immense joy at seeing her father alive.

"I'm here for you," Tonraq reassured, pulling his daughter close. "And I'm never going to let you go."

It was finally over. The torture at the hands of Zaheer and the Red Lotus. The struggle against fighting the poison destroying her from the inside. The fear that she might be the last Avatar and the world would be thrown into chaos. She had fought with everything she had, and now, she could rest. Korra heaved a sigh and sunk into her father's arms.

The next week or so merged together in Korra's mind. It was filled with sleep, a lot of sleep, and visits from healers and loved ones. It had only been a week and Korra knew that it was unlikely she'd make a quick recovery, but still, there had been nothing the healers could do to get her walking again. Another week went by, bringing the same disappointments. She could see it in the faces of her healers, who wore solemn expressions as they told her the news that they didn't know what was wrong with her.

But it wasn't until the airbending ceremony where it hit home and finally became clear for Korra. Jinora, the new airbending master who had helped save Korra, stood alongside her father as he announced that the Air Nation would take up their nomadic lifestyle once more. They would be the protectors of the world, bringing balance and peace to the unstable Earth Kingdom. It was in that moment where it finally became clear to Korra; the world didn't need an Avatar anymore. It didn't need her anymore. And despite losing three of his comrades and being thrown in prison again, Zaheer and the Red Lotus had won.

One would have thought that after such a selfless display of courage and sacrifice from a being with such power, that the world would have changed and learnt from the Avatar's example. But alas, humanity did not. In the three years that followed they clung to their unjust ways, and the Avatar faded into distant memory.

Instead of giving the people freedom and life, the world leaders chose to support the pompous and self-centred Prince Wu as the next successor for the Earth Kingdom throne. Even after all my children sacrificed in overthrowing the previous earth monarch, it seems the common people will once again suffer under the powerful and elite.

But I write to you now, my children, to not lose hope. We must not forget why it is that we do what we do.

I have long foreseen a terrible future, a vision of a great calamity between humankind and spirit, that threatens the fabric of both the material world and the Spirit world. And this future will be brought about by the weakness and complacency of humankind. They worship those with power, forgetting that it was all of our ancestors who crawled out of the mud and found the strength to survive. And then there is the Avatar, the servant of Raava. The great spirit of order and peace belittled herself by bonding to a human form. This power was never meant to be wielded by a human, and up until the Avatar retired three years ago, the masses flocked to her because of this unworthy power.

Humanity cannot continue to worship these figureheads and do nothing for themselves. If we cannot prepare our strength and resolve for the destiny that lies ahead, we will all perish. Such a future is one that fills me with worry and dread.

But do not despair; for in this great calamity, there is chaos. And chaos, is the natural order of freedom.

--Grand Lotus

Chapter Text

It seemed like everything was in place; the fine sunny day with crystal-clear skies, the small crowd gathered outside the central station terminal. Even the flame atop Lord Zuko's statue seemed to burn brighter than usual for the occasion. Yet as Tenzin stood with his family at the front of the crowd, he couldn't help but notice that Asami Sato, the designer responsible for the celebrations, was nowhere to be seen.

The airbending master continued to watch while balancing his youngest Rohan on his shoulders. Along the steps to the terminal stood President Raiko, his attire looking as careful and pristine as ever, and not without his wall of heavily built bodyguards behind him. A representative from Asami's company Future Industries stood next to the president, and behind them was the recently improved rail station with its green tiled rooves and concrete pillars leading the way inside. Together with the help of the Republic City council, Future Industries had created a new station to accommodate the monorail network in the Earth Kingdom.

"And of course, my biggest thanks goes to Asami Sato, and to Future Industries. She brought our old central terminal into the modern era," President Raiko addressed the Future Industries representative with a nod. "Ladies and gentlemen, the world is entering a new age of peace and prosperity. Soon, Prince Wu will take his rightful place on the Earth Kingdom throne," as if on cue, several photographers flashed their cameras at the young, tanned prince, dressed in his finest bright-emerald jacket and golden apparel. For someone with a small stature he seemed to exude such confidence, with a wide grin and fingers pointed down the barrel of each camera. "And thanks to our updated rail system, Republic City and the Earth Kingdom will be united like never before!" Raiko concluded excitedly.

"Miss Sato sends her regards, and in her place, I shall do the honours," the Future Industries representative bowed before taking a pair of giant golden scissors to the red ribbon in front of them. More cameras flashed, and applause from the crowd filled the air.

After a few more minutes of photos and questions, much of the crowd had dispersed. Tenzin farewelled his family and made his way over to Chief of Police Lin Beifong, standing at the top of the station stairs. "Lin," Tenzin greeted.

"Hi Tenzin," Lin replied, her metal-plated armour clinking slightly as she shifted. She looked him up-and-down briefly, "So you haven't tried wearing one of those new wingsuits?"

Tenzin shook his head, "Not really for me, I guess. Far too revealing. And how does anyone keep warm?" he explained. "Though many of the Air Nation have adopted them." The suits mentioned were originally a project from Varrick Global Industries to complement their line of backpack paragliders, though they seemed to only work reliably with airbending.

Both Tenzin and Lin watched ahead as Prince Wu jovially explained something to President Raiko and another few officials. Raiko laughed enthusiastically in response, though it was unlikely he'd be paying that much attention to anything the prince was rambling about.

"It seems like Prince Wu and the president have fostered quite a friendship these past few years," Tenzin began.

Lin glanced back to Tenzin, "I'm sure Raiko would benefit from having Prince Wu in his pocket." She grunted and shook her head, "Or maybe I'm too cynical."

Tenzin stroked his beard, "I don't think you're entirely wrong about the president's intentions, but nonetheless, it is nice to be nearly living in a time of peace. It seems Kuvira and her forces really have driven much of the barbarian clans out of the Earth Kingdom."

Before they could continue their conversation, Raiko led Prince Wu over to the pair. "Tenzin, Lin," they exchanged greetings, "Thank you for coming to the opening of the central station. I hope that Miss Sato is keeping well."

"I hear that she is rather busy these days," Tenzin replied.

"Aw, what a shame," Prince Wu interrupted. "You know, I have a way with sophisticated women like Asami. I would've hit it off with her am I right Gun?"

A small, elderly man chimed in from behind Wu. He seemed to have trailed unnoticed behind the prince the entire time, though with Wu's ability to hog all the attention in his vicinity it wouldn't be hard for anyone to blend into the background around him. "Of course, Prince Wu," Grand Secretariat Gun further complimented.

"Say, how many wives can an Earth King even have?" Wu pondered out loud. It was almost as if he were doing the math in his head.

Gun coughed lightly, "That will be a matter for after you ascend to the throne, your highness."

Wu grumbled and cast his eyes down, though he quickly perked up again once another question popped into his head, "So, when are we heading to Ba Sing Se? We have a big coronation to plan right?" the excited prince exclaimed with his hands waving about.

"Don't get too ahead of yourself Prince Wu," Lin cut in bluntly, though somewhat respectfully, "we still need to retake Ba Sing Se first. That's why this upcoming Summit is being held in the first place." The Earth Kingdom Allied forces, led by the appointed interim leader Kuvira, had set out to bring stability and unity to the Earth Kingdom after the fall of the monarchy. Ironically, their presence had also prompted the many barbarian clans to band together as well for the first time in centuries. Currently, their largest faction were held up within the Upper Ring of Ba Sing Se, and any attempts to reclaim the capitol city had been unsuccessful.

The prince continued, "Well, it shouldn't take too long to take it back right? I mean how hard can it be to beat up a bunch of low-life barbarians." Wu laughed, though his expression grew more serious, "as long as it's safe for me when I travel to Ba Sing Se. I don't need to remind everyone of what happened to my great Aunt... Urgh... Ahh...," Wu imitated his late great-aunt dying and concluded his act with, "may she rest in peace."

Raiko chuckled politely, "I can assure you Prince Wu, Kuvira will have the Earth Kingdom pretty much stabilised once Ba Sing Se is taken back."

Wu didn't find much comfort with the president's words. "Uh... define 'pretty much'?"

Tenzin tried to intervene, "Well, the roving bandits would have mostly been dispersed with Be Sing Se reclaimed."

"Don't worry, the chance of you being assassinated' is close to zero," Lin didn't miss the opportunity to wind the spoilt prince up.

Wu stammered anxiously before his Grand Secretariat stepped in, "Anyways, I believe it's time for his royal highness to attend to other tasks on his itinerary."

"Oh yeah, we have a photo-op at the Earth Kingdom Embassy," Wu realised. With a quick goodbye, the prince strolled off towards his satomobile and driver. Prince Wu normally spent much of his time attending photo events or meeting with famous celebrities, though anything to do with the actual running of his nation was handled by the Grand Secretariat and officials.

Lin watched as the driver whisked Prince Wu away. "Do you really think he's ready to take the throne?" she asked Raiko.

The president tried to smooth things over, "We will be sending an experienced team of delegates to help him when he's in Ba Sing Se. But that can wait till after the summit."

Lin agreed. "It won't be as easy as Wu thinks it is to take Ba Sing Se back. From what Kuvira told us, the clans have all joined forces to keep their slice of the city protected. They've even hijacked some of the Allied Forces' tech and weapons."

"Which is why it will take a collective effort from all the world's powers to reclaim it," Raiko answered. He straightened his lavender jacket before turning to leave. "The summit dinner is in two days' time, so I'll see you both then?"

Lin nodded, watching the president leave. "I wish I had as much optimism as he does about Prince Wu leading the Earth Kingdom," she folded her arms, sighing deeply.

Tenzin seemed preoccupied with something but nodded in agreement. "Let's just see how Ba Sing Se goes first." He looked back to the steps where the announcement was just given, "I might stop in and visit Asami before heading back."

A few blocks away inside a factory alongside the docks, a pair duelled with wooden staffs. The figure on the left was a middle-aged man, clearly the teacher with his experience in staff combat. The one on the right was none other than Asami Sato, the owner of Future Industries, and designer of the refurbished central station. The central station that was opened in her absence.

The pair rested a moment after their bout, both readied for the next move. Sweat ran down Asami's forehead, and her raven-black hair was tied up neatly behind her head. Her teacher lunged forward again, striking several times before Asami blocked with the middle of her weapon. She then swung her staff around to strike her teacher's side but held back before making contact. Her teacher smiled. "Very good. You're picking up these moves rather quickly."

It was only now that Asami noticed a red-robed figure in the doorway. Tenzin smiled, "Sorry to interrupt."

"Oh, hey Tenzin," Asami greeted. "We should probably take a break anyway." She turned to her trainer and bowed, who returned the same gesture before leaving.

Asami's office wasn't exactly the most ideal place for training, but it at least had the space to accommodate them. There were a couple desks besides her main work one, each looking cluttered with papers, metal pieces, or wiring. Tenzin wondered how she managed to keep up with so many projects at once, but then realised, she probably wasn't keeping up.

Asami hung up her training staff as Tenzin spoke, "You know, there are a few airbending moves using glider staffs," he began. "I'd be happy to teach some if you'd like? I didn't realise you were interested in learning staff combat."

"Thank you, I'd be grateful. I haven't mastered much but I just wanted to learn a few moves for designing this," Asami cleared a patch of her worktable revealing a staff-looking weapon. "The electrified gloves are useful, but don't exactly have a great range. So, I thought I'd try designing an electrified staff," she elaborated while picking up her weapon, showing off the two ends with cables and battery packs attached. With a slight press of a trigger in the centre of the staff, the end lit up with blue electricity for just a second before shutting off unexpectedly. "Well, it still needs a bit of work," Asami admitted before setting the weapon back down. With the desk a little clearer she noticed her calendar with today's date circled. "Oh, the opening of the central station!"

"About twenty minutes ago," Tenzin informed. "Everyone was quite excited and happy to see Future Industries there, though I'm sure they would have rather seen the designer herself," Tenzin smiled. "I came by just to see how you've been?"

"I must've forgot about it. Just been busy, that's all," Asami confessed.

The airbending master couldn't shake the feeling like there were something beneath Asami's words. "We haven't seen a lot of you lately either. I know work can be encompassing and consuming at times, but taking a break every now and again isn't a bad idea."

Asami sighed, "Yeah I know. "But there's always something else to be working on; they don't call Republic City the 'city that never sleeps' for no reason, right?" Asami offered a quiet laugh. "How have you been Tenzin? How's Pema and the kids?"

"They're doing well, thanks." Tenzin paused a moment. He knew that she really did enjoy her work, but perhaps her overworking was a sign something else was going on. "You know, the city is indebted to all you've done over the past three years. If you ever needed to take a break from all the business, I'm sure people would understand. You've certainly earned it."

"I'm just doing what I can," Asami replied. "Everyone else seems to be busy too. Bolin's working with Kuvira in the Earth Kingdom, Mako picked up an investigations job working alongside the Fire Nation, and Korra...," she paused, "she's still recovering in the South Pole." After Zaheer's defeat, their old gang had gone their separate ways indeed. "I just want to contribute as well," Asami concluded.

It was becoming clearer to Tenzin why Asami had become buried in her work. "It will be nice to see them again at the summit," Tenzin offered.

"Yeah," Asami reflected. Even though these past three years had been productive with her company back in business, she couldn't help but dwell on the past when the four of them had all been together in Republic City. Life had been crazy, full of danger and facing the unknown, and although their group was not without conflict it had certainly felt like a family. She missed then deeply and couldn't help but worry over Korra as she tried to recover.

"Would you like to come to Air Temple Island for dinner tomorrow night? I know it's short notice, but I'm sure Pema and the kids would like to see you?" Tenzin offered.

Asami felt the urge to decline, knowing that she had several unfinished projects she needed to complete. But before answering, she realised just how cluttered her office had become. It wasn't really like her at all to leave things unorganised. "Yeah, maybe a break is exactly what I need," she admitted. "What should I bring?"

"Oh, don't worry about that," Tenzin shook his head, "Pema always knows how to go overboard. Just bring yourself."

"Thanks Tenzin." Asami looked around her office, "I suppose I should get the place cleaned up a bit, and myself."

Tenzin chuckled lightly before bidding farewell, a slight breeze picking up his cloak as he turned to leave.

Asami breathed out deeply, grabbing a towel to wipe the sweat from her forehead. The summit dinner was in two days' time, and she couldn't deny that something about meeting everyone again made her excited but also nervous. Either way, perhaps Tenzin was right; taking a break is exactly what she needed right now.

"Right," Asami muttered to herself, turning to the clutter in her office.

A soldier clad in deep green uniform marched his way through the monorail cabin. His attire incorporated metal plating over the shoulders, a tribute to the metal clan where their army originated from. Bolin continued past several other officers milling about. After trying to keep balance while the monorail took a corner, he managed to knock over a superior officer before lunging into the next cabin, offering only a quick apologetic grin before slamming the door behind.

Thankfully, the straight track ahead gave Bolin a chance to regain his confident composure. His boss wasn't exactly known for her approachability – not that she was harsh or mean – but more that she was the sort of perfectionist who would impose her own standards on others. Either way, Bolin continued to serve with a dedicated and well-meaning spirit. He approached the next door, stated his business to the guards, and proceeded into the meeting cabin.

"We just got some good news," Bolin began, "two more states have reported the barbarian clans have left their area." He added a salute.

Bolin handed the report to another man dressed in green. "Excellent, thank you Bolin," Baatar answered. Baatar may have adopted the shaved-sides-slicked-back haircut that all the soldiers of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces adorned, but he wasn't subordinate in ranking to Kuvira. "All that's left now is Ba Sing Se," he concluded.

"Haha that's great!" Varrick cackled while slapping his knee. "Zhu Li, dish out some of that 'celebration tea'," he ordered. Zhu Li saluted and quickly sought to providing the group with a special blend of ginseng tea she happened to have ready.

After serving the others, Zhu Li approached the woman facing a map board and offered a cup. "None for me thanks," she replied. Zhu Li bowed politely and ducked away. "I won't celebrate until the Earth Kingdom has been completely liberated from the barbarian clans." Their leader, Kuvira, turned back to face the room. Her uniform was certainly the best-kept out of all of them, and not a single dark strand of hair was out of place from her two braids connecting at the back. Everything about her seemed carefully organised and arranged, and her reluctance to celebrate their victories prematurely only strengthened what people said about her perfectionism.

There was a slight awkwardness in the room as the other four stopped sipping their tea, but any lingering tension was cut short by their train had grinding to a halt. The occupants lurched forwards and spilt ginseng all over themselves, while Kuvira kept her balance.

A soldier hurried into their meeting room. "Why have we stopped?" Kuvira questioned him.

"Apologies, but there are rocks on the track," the soldier began. "It's most likely barbarians. We'll send a team out to investigate."

"Call them off," Kuvira replied. "I can deal with them myself." She turned to Baatar and Bolin, "Be ready to restrain the assailants once I've taken them down." And with that, Kuvira waved her hands to open the skylight, brought down a ladder, and climbed onto the roof. The others got to work.

On the scraggly and pointed cliff tops either side of the tacks, two groups watched the monorail carts with anticipation. "So that's the 'Great Uniter'? Standing all alone? Pah!" scoffed one man, staring down a pair of binoculars at Kuvira atop the monorail roof. "She doesn't look so bad."

A large man behind him grunted, "Don't underestimate her. Only once we take her out will those other corrupt leaders back down and leave us alone."

"Yes Sir," the other man muttered quietly. Their barbarian commander here named Gombo was certainly intimidating with his war face paint resembling a skull, spiked metal shoulder pad, and muscular physique that could probably rip a satomobile to pieces. Or so his men would say. Even being a nonbender, they had faith he could take down the Earth Kingdom's so-called 'Great Uniter', especially one so brazen as to stand alone on top of a monorail cart against their entire group.

"Do you really think she'd be alone?" a scruffy firebender with messy hair asked. "There's probably a whole platoon of soldiers somewhere on the train."

"You two focus on diverting them away from the train. But should the opportunity arise, take Kuvira out." Gombo gestured to the firebender, Baraz, and his waterbending companion Ahnah. "The rest of you lot keep Kuvira occupied while I get to the roof from behind." He then nodded to Baraz, who shot a fire flare from his fist into the sky. The signal prompted the gang on the other side of the mountain to slide down on rock platforms. Their side did the same, while their leader jumped onto a satocycle and sped around the hill out of sight.

On the monorail roof, Kuvira had only a few seconds to observe her enemy. She counted twenty barbarians in total and judging by their tattered clothes and spiked body armour, they were part of the infamous Gombo's clan. She couldn't see the painted warrior himself but could only guess he would show up.

Kuvira side-stepped the first boulder. Another threw a rock towards her, and Kuvira took hold of it and swung it away. Even with several massive boulders being thrown at her, none of them came close to hitting Kuvira. In a few seconds, the barbarians would be close enough for her to launch her counterattack.

When she stood upright again, Kuvira shot slices of metal from her armour at the barbarians in front. Several tripped up as their legs or arms were bound in metal shackles, rolling down the hill the rest of the way. Kuvira fired more onto the other side of the valley, hearing another few cry out as they stalled on their earth platforms and tumbled down. Like a viper rat striking its prey, Kuvira's metal blades hit every target precisely where she intended.

Baraz and Ahnah made it down into the valley, and a member of their clan erected a massive wall for cover. "Spirits," Ahnah cursed. "How'd she land those shots?"

"Don't know, but we can't worry over it now," Baraz answered. "We have our orders."

Another hunk of earth was thrown Kuvira's way, and she swung the boulder over her shoulder and into an attack coming from behind. As the boulders collided in a cloud of dust, several metal shards whizzed through and bound an older man. The other next to him watched her comrade fall, but she too was incapacitated.

"Eleven...twelve," Kuvira counted how many had fallen as another couple barbarians went down. One of the captured happened to be a metalbender as well, and Kuvira promptly launched his body into the monorail cart using an earth pillar, knocking him out cold. Baatar was ready to apprehend the metalbender in platinum cuffs, waiting inside as Kuvira ordered. Even though he had seen Kuvira's abilities and was confident in her, facing off against the entire group made Baatar nervous nonetheless.

Forming a sturdy stance, Kuvira obliterated a boulder coming at her with an outstretched fist. With a quick pivot, she shot slices of metal around the attacker's eyes, hands, and legs. She had whittled their forces down to four. Though her attention was soon turned to the sound of a revving motor behind her. Spinning swiftly, Kuvira noticed the barbarian leader on top a satocycle, and an earth ramp made by one of his men leading up to the monorail roof. Gombo readied his bisento in front and began speeding along the train roof to Kuvira.

Kuvira shifted her weight back and then lunged forwards, sending shards into the monorail roof. Gombo attempted to drive around them, but eventually the tyres of his satocycle burst and he began spinning out of control. Jumping off the bike but keeping a hold of the handlebars, the barbarian commander dug his feet in and heaved the vehicle at Kuvira while he skidded to a halt. She blocked by forming a metal shield around her arms, but the impact sent her backwards. The satocycle toppled to the side.

Gombo and Kuvira stared each other up while catching their breath, the former covered in gashes from sliding along the roof. Kuvira too had sustained injury, her forearms throbbing from blocking the flying satocycle.

Another barbarian tried to sneak-attack Kuvira, but she flung pieces of metal around his legs and arms without even looking directly his way. She kept her eyes on Gombo. Kuvira took another few seconds to catch her breath before addressing the barbarian commander, "So you're Gombo right? The infamous commander underneath no-one except Qiang himself?"

The man in question spat to the side. "Aye. And you must be Kuvira."

"Indeed," Kuvira replied. "You fight well. But you must understand that attacking an Allied Forces train is not something we can overlook." She readied herself again.

"I wasn't count'n on it." Gombo let out a cry before charging onto the next cart. He had lost his bisento when his satocycle spun out of control, but still had his two fists and feet. Kuvira ducked and dived from Gombo's furious strikes, but even she couldn't evade his high kick that collided with her forearm. Kuvira grunted while stepping back. She formed a wrist-blade by shifting her metal shoulder plates down, lunging forwards at the barbarian leader with her makeshift weapon. She was quick but Gombo was surprising fast too, dodging her attack with a pivot and then flying another kick her way. Kuvira was better prepared for this one however, ducking and subsequently striking Gombo's planted foot. The man tripped up but sprung to his feet soon after, also evading Kuvira slamming her boot into the roof.

All the other barbarians had been taken out by now, save for Baraz and Ahnah still crouching behind their wall. "It's now or never," Baraz grunted. Ahnah nodded. She gathered the water out of her pouches, forming a stream which carried her and Baraz towards the monorail. With Kuvira occupied by their leader Gombo, striking her down with a fire blast would be their best bet.

Bolin noticed the water and fire duo surfing across the earth. "Kuvira!" he tried to call out, but she didn't seem to hear him. He jumped out of the carriage and slammed a foot onto the earth, forming a line of pillars rumbling towards the pair. Ahnah noticed the attack and froze her stream into a platform to block. It seemed there were in fact others on the train ready to fight besides Kuvira. Meanwhile, Baraz fired a jet at Kuvira, singeing her uniform as she barely managed to duck in time. It was a close call indeed.

Down below, Bolin tried again to stop the water and firebender. He dodged an icicle from Ahnah before dipping his arm down low, heating a clump of rock into a lava stream and flinging it forwards. The waterbender stood shocked for a moment too long, allowing most of her water to be evaporated in blocking the attack.

With the other two distracted, Kuvira quickly fired metal bands around the fire and waterbender below. Gombo swung his fists several times but the Great Uniter was still swift on her feet. She planted a kick into Gombo's stomach, quickly retracting before he could grab her foot, though knocking him back a few steps. Before the barbarian commander could react, Kuvira pulled open the skylight below Gombo's feet with a flick of her hands. Gombo fell into the gap, and Kuvira crinkled the shutters around his form to prevent him from moving. Though he wriggled around while grunting, he was stuck.

Kuvira's grey-emerald eyes bore down into the barbarian commander's from her stance high above his. Despite what his men thought, Gombo could not in fact rip a satomobile to pieces, nor the skylight of a monorail cabin. All he could do was accept his defeat. Most of her metal plating on her armour had been used already, but Kuvira had just enough to wrap a blindfold around Gombo. The fight was over, and they had been victorious.

Moments later, the captured barbarians sat blindfolded and handcuffed to the train tracks. Kuvira removed their blindfolds, and it was only now that they could see where they were exactly. Several guards stood beside them, and Kuvira stood tall in front of the monorail cart. Kuvira took a moment to eye them up before addressing the group, "So you are the barbarians who have been causing trouble, where I have been trying to restore balance?" she asked rhetorically. "I recognised your commander here with his distinctive attire."

The man in question hung his head in shame or defiance – Kuvira couldn't quite tell which one or both – but it was the scruffy firebender who talked first. "What happens now?"

"Please, spare us!" an older man begged. Gombo glared daggers at his direction.

"We didn't realise it was your train, please!" another joined in.

"Stop grovelling as if this is the worst day of your lives. This, is an opportunity," Kuvira replied. "When I see you, I do not see criminals or degenerates. I see people who are lost. Lost and mistrusting of any authority no matter who they are. And I can understand," she began to pace up and down the tracks, "we are all victims of oppressive monarchies and corrupt leaders who have long exhorted the Earth Kingdom for their own gain."

"And what makes you so different aye?"

Kuvira spun around and locked eyes with Gombo. Defiance it was.

"Do you think that I am just like the former Earth Queen?" she questioned. "Do I take everything from the Earth Kingdom citizens? Do I live in a lavish and decadent palace while others starve to death?"

"Well your train here looks pretty shiny," Gombo spat.

Kuvira smirked, "Do you even know where these monorail trains go? They are nothing short of an extraordinary feat of ingenuity. They spread all over the Earth Kingdom, allowing for faster trade, distribution of goods, easier travel between cities. How are they comparable to a shiny golden palace of empty rooms?" she didn't bother waiting for a reply from Gombo, instead turning back to the rest of the group. "As I mentioned, this is an opportunity. Join our ranks and pledge your loyalty to the Earth Kingdom, and we shall see this nation become the greatest it has ever been."

"And if we refuse? Will you leave us stuck to these tracks, hoping someone saves us before another train comes?" Gombo added.

"Is that something your glorious leader Qiang would do? Maybe he is far more alike Hou-Ting than he cares to admit," Kuvira's words elicited a grunt from Gombo as he struggled against his restraints. It was clear that their barbarian king still held something over some of them. "Loyalty misplaced is loyalty wasted. Serving your current leader is futile. The whole world will close in on Ba Sing Se and not even he will be able to keep his hold over the city. But the choice is yours. Join us, pledge your loyalty to me, and you will be rehabilitated and become productive members of your nation. Otherwise, you can be sent to prison for your crimes."

Several of the bandits glanced at one another. A young woman looked up, "I pledge my loyalty to you Kuvira, and to the Earth Kingdom."

"I pledge my loyalty to Kuvira and the Earth Kingdom," another echoed.

One by one, each of the barbarians bowed and pledged themselves to the cause. Eventually, only Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah remained. Gombo glared at Kuvira a moment longer, before reluctantly bowing his head too. "I pledge my loyalty to the Earth Kingdom." Baraz and Ahnah, slightly shocked to see their commander concede, eventually followed suit.

Kuvira nodded, a faint but satisfied smile forming. "Take them on board the train. We can drop them off at a training facility on the way." Kuvira ordered. The barbarians were rounded up and led onto the back cabin.

As the other soldiers prepared to board the train again, Baatar made his way over to Kuvira. "That was intimidating," he half-teased.

Kuvira smiled lightly, "I like to think 'inspiring', but perhaps intimidation is necessary every so often." Baatar smiled fondly back at Kuvira. She felt his fingers slide over hers, but quickly pulled her arms behind her back and stood tall. "Not in front of the other soldiers."

"Seeing you in danger was just a bit worrying, that's all," Baatar admitted. "It was a good thing Bolin distracted them."

She didn't want to admit it, but Baatar was right. "Maybe I did take on more of a challenge than I could handle... but it won't happen again."

Chapter Text

The Fire Nation was certainly a beautiful place. Despite moving into the modern era with its technology and infrastructure, the Caldera city had retained much of its old-world beauty. The red tiled rooves, gold trim adorning, and white stone walls, all gave the city a regal atmosphere even outside the palace.

Mako continued to gaze out over the city. He hadn't spent much time outside the palace yet, except for a few excursions on work business. His new job working with the Fire Nation had involved more data analysis and interviewing than actually going out, but nonetheless, it was a nice change to be here. Not to mention the Royal Family had been rather generous in letting him stay in the guest quarters.

His thoughts were interrupted by a man dressed in gold-trimmed red robes. "You seem to have improved since being here," his teacher complimented.

Mako bowed, "Thank you for your guidance. I'd learned how to generate lightning but the techniques you've taught me feel like a different kind of bending altogether. I appreciate your time."

"You still have more to learn," a woman leaning against the door frame chimed in.

"Crown Princess Ilah," Mako blurted out before bowing even further than before. His teacher next to him dipped his head lightly.

The crown princess tutted, "Don't bow that low or you'll put your back out. Besides, you've already been here for a few months and you should know I don't care about formalities." Ilah strode over to a wardrobe on the other side of the outdoor training room. "Just picking up some new vambraces. Managed to chip these pretty bad." The trainer nodded, not that she needed permission of course.

The Fire Nation were one of the only nations besides the Earth Kingdom to still use metal armour in their ranks. With the invention of metalbending many other militaries had abandoned it, though the Fire Nation was blessed with abundant metal reserves of platinum and other easily refinable ores.

Mako tried not to stare at the princess, though he couldn't deny that he found her intriguing. All the other officials and personnel carried themselves with a sense of duty or importance, yet the crown princess seemed rather aloof when it came to any of that. Yet somehow, Mako felt like her casual demeanor hid a tenacious and quick-witted spirit underneath. And what kind of battle had she been in that would have wrecked her vambraces like that? Mako had no idea why these thoughts and questions popped into his head, only that he wanted to know the answers.

"Hey Daydreamer," Ilah called out. "When you generate lightning you're guiding, not controlling it. Loosen up a bit."

"I didn't realise you knew so much about it," Mako replied.

Ilah narrowed her eyes, "Is that a jab?"

Mako realised what he had said wrong. "Oh no, I didn't mean it like that," he stammered. Princess Ilah, much like her grandfather Zuko, had never been able to generate her own lightning.

"Anyway," Ilah brushed it off, "the meeting is in ten minutes. We have some new evidence for your division to use." After attaching her new black metal vambrace, the crown princess turned to exit, "See you there."

"Of course... I'll be there soon," Mako mumbled, beginning to bow before he caught the princess's disapproving amber eyes.

Meanwhile, Mako's trainer simply chuckled lightly, "The crown princess certainly is unorthodox. But perhaps that's what makes her popular with the public. Good luck to any man who would choose to pursue her."

"Has she had many people ask?" Mako spun around a little too quickly.

"But of course. Many of the noble families have put forward their suitable sons but alas, she turns everyone down," he replied. "I doubt many could keep up with her energetic spirit when it shows." Mako seemed to be daydreaming again before his trainer snapped him back, "Don't you have a meeting to go to?"

"Yeah, I should get going," Mako turned and bowed lightly to his teacher. "Thank you again Sifu Xaio Feng."

After a quick change of clothes, Mako walked briskly towards the throne room. When he was first here this palace had seemed like a maze, an intricately designed and exquisite maze albeit, but it's many doors and hallways had made it difficult to navigate. Though by now he knew exactly how to get to the throne room.

Mako turned another corner and found the Fire Lord and her father Lord Zuko making their way in. He offered a bow and greeted them, "Fire Lord Izumi, Lord Zuko."

Izumi dipped her head lightly, as did Zuko. "Welcome Detective Mako. We should be starting soon," Izumi greeted.

The trio continued through. Izumi had told him that the throne room was once a dark and ominous space, with a throne barred off by constant flames. Now the throne was more of an artifact than anything more, with Izumi choosing to sit at the head of the table in the middle of the room instead. Being that far back and behind a wall of fire was far too impractical anyways. And the lightning had been improved with the crafting of a beautiful glass window to the sky, an exquisite piece depicting dragons and flames sitting high above the meeting table, allowing natural light to illuminate the room. Occasionally it was still a bit stuffy from poor airflow, but compared to the stifling heat of the old design this was certainly better.

Mako found his place with the others dressed in Republic City Police Department uniform. On the other side sat several military and police personnel, and towards the head of the table the Fire Nation Royals found their places.

"Right, shall we begin," Izumi greeted the room, adjusting her glasses slightly before taking a seat. Each member present had a set of papers in front of them. "The latest attack in the industrial sector is concerning for obvious reasons. So far, we've only found these incidents occurring in the archipelago. Last week's confrontation marks the first on the home island."

"It says that the attack happened in an ore factory in the industrial sector. Was there any connection to the previous incidents?" Ilah asked. None of the other officials ever asked questions without first waiting for the Fire Lord's permission. Not that Izumi would care terribly much, but there were etiquettes that the officials still followed after years of Fire Lords who would have cared.

Izumi glanced to her daughter, "Different target, perpetrators were of a different demographic. The only connection is that once again, they have claimed to be a part of the Red Lotus."

There was an eerie quiet in the room. This had been the sixth incident so far where the perpetrators had claimed to be part of the Red Lotus, a terrorist organisation with the goal of disestablishing organised authority. While their apparent leader Zaheer was apprehended and in the custody of the White Lotus, no one could forget how their plan to kill the Avatar had nearly succeeded. Mako tried not to think back to that day but it was difficult not to. That day when they had nearly lost Korra, her limp body resting in the arms of her father while her spirit seemed to fade, it was all hard to forget even three years after.

One of the officials raised his hand, and Izumi nodded in his direction. "Fire Lord Izumi, were these criminals using any sophisticated technology or had any kind of strategy to their attack?"

Another official raised her hand as well, "They managed to blow up half a factory with nothing but their bending. I'd say they seem pretty capable even without using any advanced technology."

Izumi directed her gaze to the first speaker. "Minister Ozhor, feel free to elaborate," she suggested.

Ozhor continued, "My only point is that they don't exactly seem sophisticated enough to really be a part of the Red Lotus. Proclaiming that they are might even be a cover to arouse fear amongst the people." Ozhor set his papers down, "And this fear is exactly what the revolutionists want. It's not as if we don't have extremists who would rile up the masses to achieve their goal of ending the monarchy." His eyes widened, "I do not mean to offend of course," he blurted out.

Izumi waved a hand, "No apology necessary. And I am aware there is a growing resentment towards our way of politics." The Fire Lord paused before continuing, "Detective Mako, you've spent some time interviewing the previous perpetrators. Do you have any insights?"

Mako was still a bit stunned to be asked a question amongst such high-ranking officials. He quickly regained his composure, "These criminals do not hold the same ideologies as the previous Red Lotus members we've encountered. They seem preoccupied with causing chaos for chaos's sake," he explained.

"Oh," Minister Ozhor began, "and is that not their intention? Usurping the Earth Queen? Trying to end the Avatar Cycle?"

"It's not that simple," Mako began. "Yes, Zaheer did believe that only in a chaotic world would there be true freedom, but they specifically targeted individuals who they believed restricted this freedom. The Earth Queen, or the Avatar, leaders who the masses follow." He glanced back to the report, "These attacks on ore refineries or apartment complexes of common people don't quite embody the same goals."

Ozhor glared at Mako from his spot across the table, "You sure know a lot about their goals?" he accused.

"Minister Ozhor," Izumi interjected.

"Apologies," the large minister bowed, bumping the table as he leant forwards.

Izumi looked back to Mako, "The detective has been nothing but helpful and cooperative. And understanding their goals is part of his job."

Mako couldn't help but notice how Ilah had grown quiet when the topic of revolutionists had come up. He raised his hand, and Izumi gestured for him to continue, "But if I might also add, the lack of clear connection between these cases also doesn't seem like something a revolutionist group would do either. If their goal would be the disestablishment of the central government, then why target random civilian dwellings or factories?" he proposed. "So in all honesty, I don't know what the overall aims of these attacks are, or whether there is a connection at all."

"A series of incidents with no common targets nor motives, yet all claiming to be the Red Lotus," Lord Zuko pondered. "Quite the conundrum."

"We do have one lead now," Izumi offered. She shuffled her pages further into the report, "A box of clothing items left in the satomobile of the vandals. Made by Chao Clothing Manufacturing. They're a company that used to create uniforms fit for industrial purposes but are no longer in business. What's more, the company has no address listed, as Detective Mako pointed out in his report."

Lord Zuko turned to his daughter, "The shipment of clothing found in the vandal's satomobile was designed for the Red River hydro plant workers. Could they be hiding at the facility?"

"It could be a coincidence," Izumi replied, "but worth investigating nonetheless." The Fire Lord turned to another RCPD member, "Officer Lan, is your division ready to investigate?"

The officer addressed nodded, "Yes, it's been a week and we believe our shirshu has acclimated to the climate here." There were a few puzzled expressions so she elaborated, "Recently, the RCPD have been trying to implement using trained shirshu in investigations. They're an endangered animal and wild but have excellent tracking ability. We're had limited success with the program, but one of our officers Hanbao is here with his shirshu."

When Mako heard the officer's name mentioned he was worried. Officer Hanbao seemed to have a knack for finding himself in unfortunate situations. And only now Mako learned that he was meant to be in charge of their shirshu.

"Good," Izumi stood up, "Well then, if there's nothing else I suggest we track this scent before they realise we're onto them." The other ministers and officials exited after the Fire Lord.

The people in Caldera city didn't often use the road snaking up the volcano; despite being fit for satomobiles and larger vehicles many preferred to avoid driving such a winding and steep drive. Nowadays, the road was only really used by necessary vehicles or fitness enthusiasts. Instead, Fire Lord Izumi and the rest of her group took a gondola down to the plaza city. Mako watched from the windows as they neared the other station. He'd worked on several difficult cases since his time as a detective, though this one was proving to be elusive. Were these cases even connected? If so, then what was their motive? The clothing they'd found was the first proper lead they'd had in this case, but just what they'd find was anyone's guess.

After exiting the gondola, Fire Lord Izumi led the group to the ground floor of the Defence Centre, and after a short walk down the hallway, they entered a room.

"Uh... Fire Lord Izumi!" the officer bowed quickly and clumsily when Izumi and her entourage entered.

"Officer Hanbao," Izumi greeted. "We're ready to track the clothing left by the attackers. How is the shirshu?"

"Well," Hanbao began hesitantly, "Jiao has been here for a week to get used to the climate and all but... she isn't very responsive to my commands." Behind him in the corner, a large four-legged animal lay sprawled on the floor. Hanbao began to beckon the creature over, "Here Jiao... come here. I'll give you a treat if you behave-"

The shirshu growled angrily and turned to face him. It was only now that the group could see what a freakishly bizarre animal it was; it had a body similar to a wolf but with a fluffy wide tail like a palm frond, and razor-sharp claws on its feet. But the strangest part was the animal's lack of eyes and tendrils sticking out from its large nose.

"Jiao, listen-"

Without a moment's notice, the shirshu shot a spiked tongue towards the officer, reaching a considerable distance before retracting. Hanbao had obviously experienced this before but still yelped as he ducked just in time. The others flinched and protected each other as well, only relaxing once the shirshu had turned away.

Hanbao stood up from the floor, "Sorry. I should have mentioned about the paralysing tongue."

"I have seen a shirshu before," Lord Zuko seemed like the only one not too bothered by the creature. "Though I do not know how to command one."

"It's pretty simple actually," Hanbao explained, "the shirshu mostly does its own thing and knows where to go. If you want her to track a scent she'll tell when you're putting something under his nose. It's more that Jiao... doesn't really like me a whole lot." Hanbao looked almost hurt that he couldn't bond with the animal.

Ilah looked at the creature and slowly made her way over. "Jiao is it?" She greeted. The shirshu didn't budge.

"Ilah," Izumi called, but her daughter simply put a hand out to silence her.

The crown princess continued forwards, "Hey, we've got a big job to do today." Jiao became slightly more irritated, stirring and growling a low rumble. As Ilah took another step the shirshu lifted its head and growled louder, but the crown princess held her ground. She took another step, and this time Jiao roared so loud it shook the room. Ilah couldn't help but flinch a little, though still held her place.

Mako watched on with the others, terrified for Ilah but astounded at her bravery. The crown princess reached out a hand to stroke the creature and it squirmed a little.

"Not the snout," Hanbao whispered. "It's a sensitive spot for the shirshu and it only lets those its comfortable with pat it there."

Ilah nodded, lifting her hand into a higher position closer to the top of the head. It was silent enough to hear a pin drop as everyone looked on, but eventually, Ilah's hand made contact with the shirshu's head. She even managed to give it a soft stroke while the animal murmured.

Ilah slowly reached over to the box of clothing and pulled out a garment. "We need to track this," Ilah spoke softly. Jiao had already sensed the shirt approaching her nose, her nostrils flaring up and twitching. She growled a soft sound and then sniffed more intently. With a fairly decent roar Jiao announced that she had the scent, eagerly jittering around the corner of the room looking for a way out.

"Ilah, wait," Izumi pleaded.

"I'll go on ahead. You guys follow our trail." Ilah quickly jumped onto the shirshu, which thrashed around a few times before accepting her new rider. All Ilah could do was hold on as Jiao charged through the doors to the outside.

While everyone else watched with awe, Izumi groaned. "I hate it when she does this." She addressed everyone else, "Ready the airship. We'll take a squad of soldiers and Yuyan." She turned to her father, "Stay behind the airship and watch for anyone escaping."

Everyone filed outside. One of the airships was already humming away with the propellers and engines whirling. Perhaps they were used to quickly scrambling together to chase after the Crown Princess. Either way, Mako followed the Fire Lord and the others onto the airship.

Chapter Text

The red tiled homes and cityscape had morphed into rocky wilderness as Ilah and the shirshu continued. Jiao seemed to be coping well enough with tracking, only slowing down a couple times to get her bearings. Zuko had once told his granddaughter about the shirshu tracker he had paid to help capture the Avatar, and later to find him when he went missing. From her understanding, that shirshu had been exceptionally trained, whereas Jiao was still new to tracking in this way.

Meanwhile on the airship, Fire Lord Izumi readied herself. She had several soldiers offer to help but Izumi declined. After removing her outer gown, she fitted pieces of black armour to her form, with the final touch a dark-coloured jian Izumi sheathed and hung over her shoulder. "It's made from a rare space mineral," Izumi explained as she noticed Mako admiring her sword. "Chief Sokka from the Southern Water Tribe once had one very similar. It was a gift from my parents when I turned fifteen since I had wanted to learn the art of sword fighting."

The members of the Royal Family continued to surprise Mako. Izumi looked far more like the sort who would enjoy hiding away in a palace full of books, with her poised, intelligent demeaner and reading glasses, yet now revealed she had once been interested in wielding a sword in her teens. "It looks pretty impressive," Mako complimented. Izumi thanked him.

Mako watched the others in the room prepare. There were several guards clad in metal armour, whom Mako assumed were firebenders. There were a couple in similar uniform but with a blue collar and waistband, which Mako had found out signalled lightningbending ability. And then there were a collection of Yuyan archers, all readying their bows and arrows. Mako could see some of their arrows did not have pointed tips but a small bulb at the end, which he assumed had some other purpose. "I didn't realise archery was still used in the military?" Mako asked Izumi.

"Archery is a skill that teaches not only combat but precision, discipline, and perseverance. The tradition of the Yuyan is an ancient one that many benefit from. Though they have upgraded their techniques for the modern era," Izumi explained. Her eyes turned to the window, scanning the horizon for her daughter. Far in the distance she could just make out the shirshu sprinting ahead. "Why must she be so impulsive?" Izumi thought out loud, taking a seat. "I know that she is incredibly capable and quick-witted, but the future Fire Lord must be far more careful and measured."

As he thought about her words, Mako realised that Ilah was indeed the future Fire Lord; he had already met her brother Iroh who was the commanding general of the United Forces. As part of the Fire Nation's reparations agreement for the Hundred Year War, any Fire Nation Royal who joined the United Forces had to abdicate their birthright to the throne. It was meant to prevent future Fire Lords from consolidating power with other militaries, especially since their own had been reduced by a third. With only one other child, Crown Princess Ilah was next in line.

"Don't mind me," Izumi mumbled, "a mother can only worry over her children."

Mako smiled, "I have a younger brother who I have to look out for," he mentioned. "He has a good heart but he... often gets himself into trouble."

The Fire Lord chuckled lightly. "He was a mover star wasn't he? What's he up to now?"

"Working with Kuvira, actually. He's been with the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces for a few years now."

"Really?" Izumi replied. "Good for him. I'm sure if anyone can sort him out it would be Kuvira." The pair laughed for a brief moment.

It had been a while since Mako had last seen his brother. Most of Bolin's time had been spent in the Earth Kingdom, and on one occasion Mako had gone out to see him. In a way, Mako had felt Bolin needed time to figure out things on his own rather than have his older brother around all the time. They still missed each other though.

"These attacks have certainly come at a bad time," Izumi broke the silence. "Kuvira has nearly driven out the barbarian clans and Prince Wu will be crowned as the Earth King. The Red Lotus were the ones who created this mess, and only now as peace is on our doorstep do they choose to resurface." The Fire Lord sighed, "I only hope that it's a coincidence and these gang attacks are not part of the real Red Lotus."

"I don't know if it matters whether they are or not," Mako replied. "The Red Lotus has become more of an idea than a group. Any faction could simply claim to be them and go against the authorities for their own reasons," he explained. "Not that I mean to disagree," Mako added, worried that he'd spoken out-of-turn.

Izumi smiled, "Don't worry, it's fine. And I actually agree with you." Her expression turned more sombre, "I just don't know which alternative I prefer."

The timing of it all certainly was concerning. Mako mused over the details of the cases, trying to figure out anything more he could in his head.

"Fire Lord Izumi, the crown princess has stopped," a soldier reported back to them. Izumi nodded, and the airship began to land.

The shirshu had led them to a cliff overlooking the Red River. The water itself wasn't actually red, but the surrounding cliffs contained massive streaks of red volcanic rock which coloured the river's reflection, giving the river its name. To Ilah's left stood the hydro dam along a natural cliff, with a massive concrete wall blocking the river to collect water. While lightning generation had become more commonly used in power plants, having a hydro plant was a more consistent method.

The airship swept up dust as it landed nearby, and soon after, the Fire Lord led everyone out. "Please don't charge into danger like that," Izumi pleaded with her daughter, making her way over to the cliff next to her.

"This is as far as Jiao can go it seems," Ilah ignored her mother's request and turned both their attention to the shirshu. Jiao had already begun sniffing something else, though kept near the airship. Although the clothing had been made by Chao Manufacturers, the shirshu had led them to the hydro dam. It seemed that the vandals who had the uniforms made were also held up here too.

Izumi turned back to the group, "We'll enter the facility and look around. It's possible that the plant has been compromised so keep an eye out for any signs of intrusion." The soldiers gave a salute before following Izumi and Ilah towards the complex.

The foyer of the building was reasonably lit and well-kept, though had a tired feel to it with the worn couches and faded paintwork. There was a front desk and receptionist standing beneath their company logo. "Welcome Fire Lord Izumi, and Crown Princess Ilah. How may we help you?"

Izumi narrowed her eyes. Why was the receptionist not surprised by the Fire Lord and a group of soldiers entering their premises?
Ilah didn't seem to pick up the same vibes as Izumi and marched confidently towards to the receptionist, "Hi there, we've heard that there have been some power issues with the outer towns. They get a lot of their electricity supply from here."

The receptionist nodded, "Yes, unfortunately we've been experiencing maintenance issues. We're fixing them as soon as we can, but things have dragged out longer than expected." Her voice and manner were incredibly polite, though it still bothered Izumi that she hadn't mentioned anything about their forces entering the room. "Would you like me to send for our director? I can make tea while you wait?"

"We'd like to speak to him if possible, but no need for the tea," Ilah asked. The receptionist nodded, turning around.

Mako also couldn't shake the feeling that something was off. There were five others in the reception area: two sitting on red sofas to the right, two cleaners in the hallway, and one person milling about at the door to the dam walkway. Why would a hydro plant facility have this many visitors at once?

Izumi also shared Mako's uneasy feelings but didn't quite know what was going on. Were the people here part of this gang and the real workers kept prisoner somewhere? Who manufactured the uniforms, and why did their company not have a listed address? Was the receptionist here being held hostage? That would explain why she wasn't too surprised at their soldiers arriving. Izumi watched as the receptionist shuffled some documents but slipped a shiny object from her sleeve –

"Ilah, look out!"

The crown princess ducked as the receptionist swung a small blade at her. Ilah retaliated by grabbing the receptionist's wrist and twisting till she let go of the knife, and then slammed her back into the shelves behind her. The men sitting on the sofa sprung into action, lighting up flames from their hands. It seemed Izumi and Mako's suspicious were right.

Several of Izumi's firebenders blocked their attacks, while the Yuyan pinned them back with arrows to their shoulders. Fire Lord Izumi blocked a fireball from the cleaners in the hallway, shielding her face behind the broad side of her sheathed sword. She then leapt off the wall to dodge another attack and landed behind them, swinging back to knock them both over. Mako and Ilah watched the last man run out onto the walkway.

"Let's go after him!" Ilah called to Mako while charging away.

Izumi wanted to tell her daughter to wait but dodged another fire jet. She backed up into the reception area as another group rushed into the hallway. It was clear now that whoever these people were, they had far more in their ranks than they once thought.

Out on the walkway, several gang members approached them. Ilah dodged one of their attacks, then sidestepped another fire blast. She stepped forward and punched bright hot bursts of flame. One of her attacks landed, but the other was blocked. As she got closer, the duel turned to hand-to-hand combat as they exchanged punches and kicks. Ilah planted one foot on the dam wall to her left and flame-kicked downward, the woman below her grunting as she fell back unconscious.

Mako managed to reach Ilah but she kept running, taking out another gang member. The crown princess was a one-man army, charging forwards with the ferocity of an armadillo bear but the precision of a shirshu. As she continued to battle, Mako noticed at the base of the dam there was a building carved into the cliffside, right next to the water. A pair were taking items from the building and loading them onto a boat, but Mako couldn't figure out why they'd build something in such a dangerous spot. If the dam would break, anything valuable there would be destroyed by the torrent, but perhaps that was intentional...

"Ilah!" Mako called out, realising what was going on. "Below us! There's a group taking stuff and getting away!"

Ilah crescent kicked a fire arc into another man's chest, leaving scorch marks but not strong enough to kill him. There was some distance between the next group and her, so she turned back to Mako who explained further, "Being under the dam means that if they were discovered they could get rid of any evidence by destroying the wall! Whatever they have there could be important."

Ilah looked down to the building in question. It was about twenty stories below them, with three walkways they could jump down to reach it. Both of them paused as they realised what Mako had just suggested. "But now they know that we've discovered them-" Ilah replied.

An explosion roared behind them, cracking through the dam walkway. Bits of concrete crumbled down as cracks snaked along the wall. Water started trickling through the gaps, streaming down onto the metal walkways.

Ilah turned her glance to the building below, "Quick!"

"We don't have time now!" Mako yelled back, looking back at the damaged dam. For now the gap was small, but it wouldn't be long before much of the dam would collapse. He turned back to see Ilah still making a beeline for the building below, propelling herself down each level. Mako hesitantly followed.

Fire Lord Izumi heard the explosion and ran outside. Her heart nearly stopped when she saw Mako and Ilah jumping down the dam rather than escaping altogether. "Spirits, what's wrong with her?" Izumi wondered. The battle in the foyer continued however, with several firebenders going after the Fire Lord herself. Even though she wanted to get Ilah and Mako out of there, she was preoccupied at the moment.

Mako and Ilah made it onto the last walkway, only several metres above the exit pipes. By now the trickle from the top had turned into a decent stream, hosing the pair as they ran underneath it. "Ilah, I don't think we can make it back!"

"We have to!" She turned back to Mako, "It's as you said. Whatever is in here could be important and they're getting away with it!" She spun around and fire-jumped the rest of the way along their path. Mako did the same and made it to the building entrance.

The building inside looked just about empty, besides a few pieces of furniture and a desk in the corner. There were two figures standing in the back, one of whom was dressed in mostly black with touches of red on their waistband and hood. The other a muscular man with long dark hair, dressed in a green prison outfit. Both of them seemed surprised to be intruded by Mako and Ilah, but quickly sprang into action.

The large man reached through the window and drew a torrent of water, attempting to hose Mako and Ilah. The pair dodged. The woman dressed in black ran over to Ilah, pulling out a pair of thick daggers and swiping her way. She was fast, and Ilah took a cut to her vambrace before fire punching back. It missed as the woman in black leapt to the side. Her distraction had bought the waterbender time to pick up a dodecahedron-shaped machine with a water tendril, and with his other hand, he punched a hole in the wall with an ice spear for the pair to escape.

They couldn't let them escape, not when they'd finally come close to solving these cases and putting an end to it. Mako kicked a jet at the pair but the bladed woman slid under and stuck his calf muscle, drawing blood. She then backflipped out the hole in the wall, following the waterbender. It was too late.

Mako and Ilah recovered and got to their feet, but the other pair were already in the boat speeding away. "Spirits!" Ilah cursed. But their conversation was cut short as a loud crumbling announcing the rest of the dam starting to fall apart. Running back outside to investigate, it seemed further explosions had crumbled the top third of the dam. Ilah glanced back into the room, "There's still some papers in the room! I'll buy you some time!"

"Ilah!" Mako was slightly angrier this time. "The dam is going to break!"

Just as he said those words the top level burst apart, a massive torrent raining down. Ilah stood right underneath it, breathing in a second before looking up. Mako watched with terrified eyes as Ilah just stood still.

But as the crown princess focused, she concentrated a single flame in one hand. Mako could hear a high-pitched whirling as the flame continued to pressurize. He'd never seen anything like it. Ilah aimed her flame at the downpour with an outstretched palm and released. From her hands burst forth a raging inferno, so hot that it started to evaporate the water raining down on them.

Mako snapped out of his amazement and quickly ran back inside. There had to be something left behind. Perhaps something on paper? Mako flicked through a folder but nothing in particular stood out. He grabbed it anyway. Most of the drawers were empty or burnt, but under the table Mako saw a small stack of blueprint papers. Though he didn't know exactly what he was looking at, he noticed a sketch of the object that waterbender was holding. Perhaps the pair from before had dropped these blueprints but meant to take it with them.

"Anything?" Ilah called out from the doorway.

"I'm not sure but I've grabbed all the papers I can find." Their conversation was cut short by another massive explosion. The pair ran outside and saw the rest of the dam cracking apart. "Run!"

Ilah and Mako propelled themselves through several fire-powered jumps, dodging pieces of concrete as they raced to the other side. There was no way they could jump up to the higher walkways with this much debris raining down. As they reached the other building several stories below the reception area, water surged in and swept the pair inside. Mako and Ilah gasped for air as they swirled around the filling room. Hanging onto a light fitting on the roof, Mako quickly formed a blowtorch, Ilah doing the same. Their torches cut a hole out, and the pair climbed through the roof cavity and into the next room above.

The next room wasn't stable either; the whole building seemed to be buckling as the dam crumbled away. Water spewed in from the windows, making it difficult to see a way out. They still weren't high enough. A black blade cut through the roof, making another hole. "Up here!" Izumi yelled. Mako and Ilah each leapt up and joined the Fire Lord.

Once on their feet, Izumi glared at the pair, "That was reckless! Foolish, and stupid!" Ilah tried to protest but Izumi interrupted, "We don't have time!" The three of them lost their balance as the whole building started to slide away from the cliff face. It seemed the rushing water had eroded too much of the support structures below. There were several more stories above them before they reached the top, but there was no way the building would last that long. After sprinting into the stairwell, now on a lean, everyone held onto the railing as the building tipped further. The wall dividing the stairwell and the room crumbled away under the pressure. With the wall missing Mako could see right out the window at the torrent below. They were a long way up.

There was a thunderous roar coming from outside. Massive reptilian claws reached into the crumbling room over the floor. "Quick!" Izumi let go of the railing and slid along onto the creature's claws. Ilah did the same, and after hesitating for a moment Mako followed them. The trio held on tightly as the beast took off, Mako realising now that this must be Zuko's dragon Druk. As they swooped away, the rest of the building collapsed into the river, pulling away much of the cliff face with it. All that was left were the remnants of the reception building, now split in half and overhanging the cliff.

Amazingly, none of Izumi's soldiers were killed in the collapse. They couldn't say the same about the thugs they encountered as they still weren't sure how many there were to begin with, but those apprehended were led into airships in cuffs. Again, the zealous bunch were claiming to be the Red Lotus, spouting off talk of revolution and bringing down the oppressive governments.

Ilah rubbed Druk under the chin, the dragon all too happy to receive such affection, while Zuko and Izumi sat nearby, still catching their breath after all that had happened. "Thank you father," Izumi expressed gratitude.

"No problem, I'm sure you would have figured a way out anyway," Zuko replied.

"Well, I wouldn't have gone down to the lower floors if Ilah hadn't have led Mako there," even though she didn't know who's idea it was to charge down there, she assumed it was Ilah's. "I swear, that girl is going to get herself – or someone else – hurt one day. Why does she have to jump head-first into everything?"

Zuko smirked, "I wonder where she gets it from?"

Izumi glared at her father, "I... I was never ''that'' bad," Izumi defended. "Well at least I grew out of it," she admitted, remembering all the times Zuko had to step in when she got lost or had run off exploring in her childhood and teen years.

"Maybe it's her way of dealing with the stress and responsibilities on her shoulders," Zuko suggested. "Being next in line for the throne is a big ask."

"Well I wish she would find another way to deal with it besides giving me an early heart-attack. Unless she wants to ascend the throne early," Izumi added sarcastically.

Mako was busy going through the papers he had found when Ilah walked over to join him, "Anything useful?" she asked. With a blank and exasperated face, he looked up while holding a pile of drenched, disintegrating papers inside a folder. The ink had soaked through and smudged everything. "Hmm," Ilah grumbled.

By this stage, Izumi and Zuko had made their way over as well. "There are still these blueprints," Mako reassured them. He picked up the fold-out plans. Thankfully being drawn on coated paper they had faired a lot better in the water. "It looks exactly like the device the pair took with them before escaping.

Zuko and Izumi eyed up the design. "I've never seen anything like this," Izumi replied, Zuko shaking his head as well. "Was there anything distinctive about the pair? Anything that could tie them to the Red Lotus?"

"They seemed more capable than the others up top," Ilah added.

Mako also responded, "I guess you could say that the woman was wearing similar a coloured outfit to the Red Lotus sentries we encountered at the Northern Air Temple years ago, but even then, that's a bit of a stretch. The other one was a waterbender in a prion outfit."

"I'll check if there have been any escaped convicts," Zuko suggested.

"Good idea, Izumi added. "Forensics are already looking over the debris, and we're checking for survivors."

Mako set the blueprints back onto the ground. What could have been so important to blow up the dam for? His eyes studied the blueprints but something caught his attention in the bottom corner. After inspecting it closer, he could just make out some of the lettering still intact after their escape through the water. Although smudged, Mako saw the words 'Future Industries' scribbled in the notes.

Chapter Text

Despite trying to keep all that had happened under wraps, the Fire Lord still managed to be swarmed by the media outside the Defence Centre. She stood on the front steps to the building, cameras flashing with reporters pushing past each other to get a closer position.

"Fire Lord Izumi, can you tell us whether this group is part of the Red Lotus? Will they strike again?"

"As I've mentioned it is still very early in the investigation," Izumi tried to hide her exasperation. "What I can say is that those responsible for occupying the Red River hydro plant have been taken into custody." Although they'd only just worked through the night to investigate, it appeared that somehow the gang had taken over the entire plant and kept the current employees running the facility. There were a group of employees who claimed to have no idea the plant was being run by criminals, only that the facility had changed directors three months ago. The rest continued to spout Red Lotus nonsense.

Another reporter spoke, "But how did the facility become occupied by criminals? How safe is the public sector?"

Izumi knew she couldn't tell the whole truth; such a statement would cause even more panic. "Understandably this is of considerable concern. But thus far we are confident the Red River facility is the only public sector entity in this position."

"But how can you be sure? And if they've managed to infiltrate our sector in this way then they could be anywhere," the previous reporter answered. "Can you confirm if they are the Red Lotus?"

"As I've said already it is very early in the investigation," Izumi repeated. "Obviously it is imperative that we discern whether their claims in being part of a terrorist organisation are true or not. All we can say, is that those involved have been apprehended bar the two individuals listed in our report." The woman in black and the waterbender prisoner were now on the police's wanted list. "If you have any information on their whereabouts then please contact the authorities."

"Fire Lord Izumi," a new reporter joined in, "Our sources tell us that the power shortages in the outer regions were due to electricity being siphoned off and used by the gang in the facility. Is this true?"

"It is still early in the investigation," Izumi felt like an iguana parrot at this point. She didn't want to admit it but the reporter had heard right; it seemed whatever device they were working on it required a fair amount of power. That was probably why this gang had chosen to take over a hydro plant on the outskirts of town. How they did it was still a mystery.

"What about those living in the outer regions? When will they get their power back?"

"We have sent civil defence there and are already supplying power to homes. We will not let people be without basic human needs because of this." Thankfully being in the Fire Nation, their civil defence team had a few members who could generate lightning. Storing their electricity in batteries would provide short to medium-term relief until the power station could be repaired.

One of the previous reporters spoke up again, "But what about our need for safety? What is being done to ensure that the people of the Fire Nation can trust our public sector, or the Royal Family, to keep them safe?"

Izumi was worried it would turn into this; rhetoric pointing the finger at the Royal Family. It was not entirely unjustified of course, as having a group of criminals take over a hydro plant was a public-relations disaster and would undoubtedly shake the peoples' faith in the system. But it wasn't as if they were doing nothing to seek out who was behind it. "All I can say is that we will find out what has happened here and inform the public as soon as we know more," Izumi concluded.

As she walked off, the reporters continued shouting questions even when Izumi made it into the gondola. "Like buzzard wasps over a carcass," the Fire Lord mumbled to her daughter as they took off. Izumi hated press briefings, but this one had been exceptionally worse.

"They're scared," Mako tried to reassure. But he knew that whatever happened the blame would still be put on Izumi somehow.

"A gang, claiming to be the Red Lotus, taking over a government power plant to siphon off electricity to use in developing an unknown device all happening right under our noses. It doesn't get much worse than that," Izumi replied solemnly. Even though they hadn't lost any of their men nor the employees at the plant, to Izumi it still felt like an incredible disaster. There was much more they needed to figure out.

Morning sunlight reflected off the train as it sped along. Kuvira had watched the landscape outside progress into grasslands with sparse trees as they left the mountainous desert areas behind. It would still take another day with a couple stops before they reached Republic City.

Now alone in their cabin, Kuvira felt more comfortable being close with Baatar. She turned back and smiled as he wrapped his arms around her, lightly kissing her forehead with a tenderness and warmth that was so comforting. She'd learnt not to be open with her emotions, nor be swayed by them, but Baatar had somehow broken down those barriers over time. His embrace was the only exception, but the only one she needed.

"Imagine what this could become," Baatar pondered, admiring the view as they sped past. "These open grasslands are rocky and not the best for growing crops. We could build another city here, or if there's ore, we could create a smelter."

"Aren't some parts of the world better left in their natural beauty?"

"I guess so," Baatar agreed. "I suppose I spend too much time thinking of what could be rather than what is."

Kuvira turned around to face Baatar while still in his arms, "That's your strength. And why I love you." She kissed him on the lips this time.

Baatar ginned. "This is nice. I wish we could be like this all the time," he admitted.

"I have to be the strong leader our troops need me to be," Kuvira responded, her warm smile fading into a longing one. "Your strength is ingenuity and creativity. Mine is strength itself." She pulled away and walked over to their desk.

"I know," Baatar replied. "I just don't want to lose sight of what's important to us."

Kuvira looked up, pulling a small piece of jade jewellery from the drawer. "I haven't forgotten," she smiled, threading the pendant onto a black cord. Something tugged inside Baatar when seeing Kuvira put the necklace on. It had been part of his engagement proposal; a collection of several exquisite pieces of jewellery, delicious sweet treats, and a red envelope of money. Normally the proposal gifts would be given by the groom and shared with the wife's family, but Kuvira had no contact with her birth parents and tensions were high between Baatar and his. Instead, they'd enjoyed the gifts together.

Baatar made his way over and slid a finger over the jade pendant. He wanted nothing more than to be here alone with Kuvira in this train cabin. They'd spent so long on this mission to liberate the Earth Kingdom, hiding their relationship for fear it would jeopardise their goals. Kuvira tucked the necklace behind her uniform's collar, giving a quick smile again before sitting down at the desk. "I have an idea for Gombo and his two subordinates."

Finding his own seat on the bed, Baatar sighed quietly. The moment was lost. "What is it?"

"We need a way to find out where Qiang is keeping his prisoners when we reclaim Ba Sing Se. If we could get them out of the Upper Ring, then we can deploy all our forces in full without fear of innocent casualties. All we know is that Qiang's somewhere in the city, and if he catches wind that we're onto him he'll escape, or even take hostages with him," Kuvira explained. "But if Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah lead us to his prisons then we'll be able to rescue them, and arrest Qiang. They must know where his base is."

Baatar rubbed his head in his hands, thinking over the plan. "I get your point. Capturing Qiang will likely split the barbarian clans into smaller factions. And we can't exactly launch a full-scale attack with civilians inside. But how can we trust Gombo and the others to lead us to him? I don't believe they'll switch loyalties overnight."

"Where their loyalties lie isn't the issue," Kuvira suggested. Baatar raised an eyebrow. "Leading us to Qiang's base is what matters. Whether they truly switch sides or pretend and lead us into a trap with his men, so long as they help us get to the location it will be worth it."

Baatar pondered. "I don't think it will be that simple. They still won't trust us, and probably realise that we don't trust them yet."

"That's why we'll need someone to watch over them. Someone who they think they can control, should they want to betray us. Someone charismatic, and who's had experience leading a team. Of pro-benders at least."

Baatar looked puzzled, "You mean Bolin?"

Kuvira nodded. "Bolin. We'll get two of our own plus the three of them, and they'll be our infiltration team, tasked with locating and rescuing the civilians so we can move in." Baatar wasn't convinced, shaking his head slightly. Kuvira continued, "Bolin's task will be to train this new team and get them ready for Ba Sing Se. If they really do change their minds and decide to join us, then they’ll help us arrest Qiang. If they remain loyal to their Barbarian King and try to pull anything out of the blue, they'll be matched for numbers with our own."

"It's a gamble," Baatar answered. "And I don't think Bolin is up to the task in all honesty."

"We can't let Qiang get away. He's the head of the dragon. It's his fear and power that united the barbarian clans against us in the first place." Kuvira exhaled, "We'll have the world's armies with us anyway. But we need something else in case he slips away."

Baatar nodded, standing up from the bed. "Let's just see how the Summit goes. We can pitch any ideas there."

He turned to leave, but Kuvira also stood up and held his hand, "We will get through this. And when we're done, we can finally get married like we've been wanting too," Kuvira reassured. Baatar smiled lightly before leaving the room. It always seemed like there was something standing between them and the relationship they both wanted. But Baatar knew it would be worth waiting for. For now, all they could do was plan this mission to Ba Sing Se, and finally bring peace to the Earth Kingdom.

Under a beautiful glass and gold chandelier lay a small, red bundle of fur. Pabu stretched out his legs, letting out a small squeaky yawn on his comfy bed of fine silk cushions. Several attendants were massaging his back, combing his hair, or grabbing lychee nuts to keep him full.

"There you are Pabs," Mako smiled as he entered the room. Pabu had come with him to the Fire Nation since Bolin wasn't allowed to keep a pet while in the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. The Fire Lord had been generous in letting Pabu stay in the palace, with the trained animal keepers attending to his every need. They'd even helped Pabu start to enjoy his bath-times, though given how rough Bolin was it wasn't too surprising he'd enjoy someone else washing him.

Mako knelt down next to Pabu's spot, stroking the happy little creature. The attendants bowed and exited the room. "You're going to miss this place, aren't you?" Mako told him. Although Air Temple Island had become his home, the royal treatment here was something else entirely.

"I still can't believe Mom let you bring that ''vermin'' into the palace," The crown princess stood in the doorway, unimpressed with Mako's affection for the fire ferret.

Mako spun around quickly, and probably would have hurled abuse if it were anyone else but the girl he was crushing on. "Pabu isn't just ''vermin''; he's a family member," he nuzzled the animal and then held him up in the air in front of Ilah. Pabu chittered quietly while staring at the crown princess with his big, adorable eyes.

"Hmm," Ilah rolled her own eyes. "Anyway, your airship is ready. I'll see you off outside."

After watching the crown princess walk away, Mako turned back to his furry friend. "Don't worry, one day she'll like you," he whispered while the fire ferret tilted his head to the side. Though at this point Mako didn't know if his words were for Pabu or himself.

There was plenty of space in front of the palace for Izumi's airship to land, which saved a gondola trip down to the plaza city. Several guards scurried like ant spiders to and from the airship, carrying luggage inside or making their way to the cabins. Izumi hadn't planned to take a large force to Republic City as she still had misgivings about sending their army to the Earth Kingdom, given their nation's history, and so only a modest security detail and Yuyan squadron would be attending. Instead, much of their aid for the mission to Ba Sing Se involved supplies.

Zuko stood with his daughter while watching the soldiers preparing for their journey, noticing Izumi's uneasy demeaner. "The world will be grateful to have the Fire Lord at the summit," Zuko reassured, "and perhaps Republic City will be safer than here."

"Being in danger is part of the job," Izumi replied, sighing briefly. "It feels like defeat to be leaving at a time like this."

Lord Zuko moved in closer, speaking much quieter, "As I'm sure you've also thought, there could very well be someone high up who allowed the Red River facility to be used to harbour the criminals. With you in the Fire Nation they may feel more confident to act and slip up."

Izumi didn't feel happy with the arrangement, though understood where her father was coming from. "But you'll be here as a target too."

"I guess it's a good thing I have a dragon," Zuko smirked. Druk was circling high above them, flying over the lakes behind the palace. "I'll be fine," Zuko replied more seriously.

The whole situation wasn't ideal, and with Izumi heading away from the homeland it wouldn't look good optically, but perhaps it was the best thing she could do. Bringing stability to the Earth Kingdom was also important, and if the Red Lotus really were coming out of the shadows, then having the Fire Lord at the summit would be a greater show of unity and strength to anyone wanting to tear them down.

Letting in a sharp inhale, Izumi turned to her father, "Well, make sure to call me if anything happens," she instructed Zuko. "And keep visiting the physician each week. Don't lift anything too heavy or overwork yourself. And not too many fireflakes either." The pair smirked but parted with a short bow.

Izumi sighed, and walked over to a balding man with a greying top knot. He had grey-brown eyes, yet they were just as vibrant and warm as her amber ones, staring back at her with a mix of adoration and longing. They both smiled at each other for a moment before he went in and kissed her. Izumi was usually far more reserved with affection towards others, but her husband Zhong was one exception. "Take care of Zuko. Call me if anything happens."

"We'll be alright," he tried to reassure his wife. "I'll miss you."

The RCPD officers along with detective Mako made their way out of the palace. Even though he'd been here for only a few months, he couldn't help but feel a connection to this place, being a firebender. Hopefully once the mission to Ba Sing Se had been finished he could come back and stay for longer. "Thank you again for everything," Izumi made her way over. "Things are certainly disconcerting with all that has happened, but we are very grateful for your help in investigating these attacks."

Mako bowed, "It was an honour to work alongside your nation." Pabu had wrapped himself around Mako's collar, chiming in with his soft squeaks.

"I'm sure Pabu will be glad to go back to Air Temple Island," Izumi joked.

"Thank you again for letting him stay, though I think he has a new standard of care he'll be expecting back home," Mako chuckled.

Ilah had also followed the group out, though something grabbed her attention, "Hey, why are they taking my stuff onto the airship?"

"Ilah, we talked about this," Izumi addressed her, "I want you to come to Republic City with me."

"What?!" Ilah reacted, "But what about everything happening here? We can't just stop the investigation!"

Izumi knew this would be the case. She probably should have given her daughter fair warning, but with everything happening so fast there hadn't been much time. Still, Ilah had been aware of her mother's intentions to have them both attend the summit. "The investigation will still be going on of course, but Lord Zuko will be here to lead it."

The crown princess exhaled loudly. "Mother, I don't want to attend the Summit. There are criminals in our nation who need to be snuffed out. I can stay here, even look after the shirshu. I can help catch them."

"Actually, officer Hanbao and the shirshu were going to come back to Republic City. Though I've been told our other shirshu candidate will be arriving here soon," Mako added. Ilah wasn't happy about him intervening and he decided to stay quiet.

"Ilah, I know it isn't easy to leave at a time like this. Part of me wants to stay as well," Izumi tried to connect with her daughter, "but the world needs to see us supporting the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. And I thought it may be a good opportunity to experience world politics first-hand. If you're going to ascend the throne one day, then you'll need to get to know the other world leaders at some point."

At the mention of the throne, Ilah turned and stormed off. "Fine," she called back, going to collect the last of her things from her room herself.

Izumi sighed. She knew that her daughter carried such a heavy burden. And she was sure part of Ilah didn't even want to be the next Fire Lord. But she also knew that her drive and character are exactly what would make her a good successor. Izumi turned to Mako, "Maybe go check on her?" Mako nodded and left.

Mako had never actually seen the crown princess's room. He walked quickly through the hallways to catch up to Ilah, and eventually made it there. It was a rather large room with a view out over the lake.

Ilah had opened another suitcase up and tossed several items in when she noticed Mako standing in the doorway, "I don't want to talk right now," Ilah dismissed. "Sorry."

"We don't have to talk. But I can help if you like?" Mako suggested. The crown princess nodded in response. Mako picked up the suitcase once Ilah was finished, and followed her out back onto the airship.

Once outside, Lord Zuko made his way over to Ilah. "I know the world of politics can seem boring, but at times it can be just as dangerous as chasing bad guys," Zuko shared. He placed a hand on Ilah's shoulder, giving a reassuring smile.

The crown princess turned to Lord Zuko, but instead of bowing she leant in and tightly hugged her grandfather instead. He chuckled lightly, looking fondly at Ilah. They'd always been close. "Be careful grandfather."

"Make sure to keep your mother out of trouble. You're both more alike than you think," Zuko joked. Even Ilah managed a smirk before joining the others on the airship.

Zuko and Zhong watched as the airship took off, bound for the summit at Republic City. While they were heading off to help restore peace to the fractured Earth Kingdom, Zuko knew that he had his work cut out for him here in the Fire Nation. Though he only hoped that their problem with these gangs wouldn't be exported to the United Republic.

Along the riverside, a pair walked back to the rest of their group. They'd left their boat several kilometres behind them to keep the Fire Nation off their tracks, but with their new shirshu they'd need something else. Considering how rare and undomesticated the creatures were, it was not something they could have predicted or easily prepared for.

The woman in black, named Daiyu, and her muscular companion stepped away from the shore, making their way up and over the next hill. Waiting for them was a pair of younger women, one dressed in a plain crimson kimono with her hair in dark brown braids, and the other with black hair in a bun and dressed in a sleeveless coat, laying her head in the other woman's lap. "Look at you two soggy elephant rats," the woman lying down mumbled sarcastically.

"Yingtai, please control your girlfriend," Daiyu replied.

"Hui-Ying, Daiyu is angry so be nice," Yingtai, the woman in the crimson kimono, teased. Daiyu wasn't happy about it, walking past the pair to stand several feet away.

The muscular waterbender placed their strange device on the ground, grabbing the attention of Yingtai and Hui-Ying. "So, we still have the device. S'pose it wasn't all bad then?" Hui-Ying suggested.

"Why don't you talk much?" Yingtai asked the waterbender. He didn't reply. "Oh wait, weren't you that prisoner from the Boiling Rock? The one who had his tongue melted off from the waters when he tried to escape?"

"Are you sure that's Ren?" Hui-Ying quizzed.

Their intrusiveness was rather annoying for him. "I am Ren," he grumbled in reply, "and I can talk just fine. It's Ju who's mute."

"Oh," Yingtai responded.

"But I did burn someone's mouth with boiling water cause he wouldn't shut up." Ren's warning lasted only a moment before the pair giggled quietly. The hulking waterbender simply walked away, standing by himself but closer to Daiyu.

Despite them being the cause of it, Hui-Ying felt slightly bad for the joking around. She dusted off her sleeveless top and made her way over to Daiyu, "Look, it didn't work out but we still have the device. Let's just regroup in the outer regions where Yingtai and I have been and lay low. Kill the minister. Start over?"

How had Daiyu's predecessors done it? Held the world and it's corrupt leaders by the throat? She had been given this task by their master, and now, she was utterly failing at it. This group were nothing but disorganised, Daiyu thought, as she stared out into the distance. She thought she had done everything right; make connections with a higher up to get access to the hydro plant. Enable local gangs to do whatever they wanted and claim to be part of the Red Lotus to keep them off their backs. But all of that work had simply washed away with the rest of the dam.

After a pause, Daiyu answered, "We have to leave the Fire Nation."

The others were surprised. "But we haven't been here that long?" Yingtai questioned.

"They have a shirshu. They have our scent," Daiyu replied. "How far away is Sota?"

"Should be here any minute," Hui-Ying answered.

"Then do something about our trail. Do you have anything that could throw them off for a while?"

Hui-Ying nodded. Around her waist were several bottles and powder rocks held in pouches. She handed a vial of clear liquid to her girlfriend, who took the vial and walked away from the group, tucking her hair braids behind her head. After throwing the vial in the air she punched forward with an open palm, smashing the vial with a small but forceful air blast and catching the contents in an air sphere. The liquid vapourised over where Daiyu and Ren and just walked from. While the scent was potent and could definitely upset a shirshu, it wouldn't buy them a lot of time.

"Get me a line to the minister," Daiyu ordered Hui-Ying. She grabbed their portable radio and called, handing it to Daiyu.

"Hello? Hmph. You always seem to call at the worst times," a voice on the other end grumbled in a whisper. "I'm having lunch with my famil-"

"We're leaving," Daiyu interrupted flatly. "After everything that happened, we can't stay."

"No, wait! I gave you warning about the search party coming to find you, didn't I? I've already lined up another facility-"

"Minister Ozhor, we gave you a chance to change the world. You guaranteed this facility would be safe for us; that we could use power from it for what we needed and not get caught. Well then can you explain to me why a bloody shirshu charged into our base with the Fire Lord and her forces!" Daiyu screamed into the mouthpiece. The others were shocked to see her this angry.

"I tried to convince them the latest event was nothing but they didn't listen! It... it was the detective! I even tried to through suspicion on him but they didn't buy it! He's supposed to be some famous friend of the Avatar or something but I didn't know!" The minister over the phone was starting to panic, his babbling not making a lot of sense.

Daiyu sighed, "I can't blame you for witnessing exactly what we're fighting against," she replied, much calmer than before. "The world worships those who save them. And this is exactly what has made humanity weak. We will crumble unless we can fix our corrupt and dependent society. But we will do it without you."

"Wait, please-"

"Don't get caught. Don't speak a word. If you do, we'll know. Leave the Fire Nation and move elsewhere when it is safe. Otherwise, they will figure out it was you."

"I... I can't leave! I have a job, and a house here! I have a family! Please, I can make it right-"

Daiyu cut the radio. There was no point listening to the minister's ramblings anymore. Working with Ozhor was meant to be their solution; having a large supply of electricity at the ready is exactly what their device needed, and it would take time to set up again after losing the Red River facility arrangement they had. But either way, it seemed their time in the Fire Nation had come to an end.

An airship hovered near them, flying low to the ground before setting down. As the gangplank lowered onto the soil, a panicked and anxious young man strode towards them. "No, no, no!" he wailed while he rubbed his hands through his hair, nearly bumping his glasses off.

"We escaped on boat but had to sink it. Ren kept the device above the water," Daiyu spoke.

The man, named Sota, hovered over the device, "But did it get submerged at all? It looks like there's water damage," his thoughts trailed off as he assessed the device.

"We need to get out of here," Daiyu urged them. She noticed them all staring at her, almost as if they were waiting for her to lead them. It was a look she detested. "We've been given a job to do, but we can't complete it here in the Fire Nation anymore. Our best bet will be to lay low in the United Republic. The world's eyes will be on the Earth Kingdom where the rest of our work is being carried out," she explained.

"Y'know, I actually quite liked this place," Yingtai reflected. But after hearing Daiyu's explanation it made sense to leave.

They'd got lucky, Daiyu knew deep down. If they hadn't had prepared the explosives in the dam wall, then getting away could have been impossible. They all knew that the world was changing. It was likely that what they had put in place in the Earth Kingdom would fail, and the throne would be ascended by yet another self-centred dictator as far as Daiyu was concerned. While their work in the Fire Nation to foster resentment towards the Fire Lord and the Royals had begun, it would have to wait.

Daiyu led the group onto the airship. Laying low was their best bet for now, but it wouldn't be forever.

The view from Air Temple Island was certainly spectacular in the evening. The sun had nearly set over the mountains, and in the faded light Republic City lit up like fireflies dazzling over Yue Bay.

After eating through an array of delicious foods, Asami and the airbender kids sat outside. Meelo had insisted on playing a game of air-ball after dinner, though after eating so much he didn't last long before getting stomach cramps and having to lie down outside. Now, Asami, Jinora, and Ikki sat and watched the stars and Republic City lights ahead.

"It's beautiful," Asami commented. She could just make out the top stories of Future Industries, though her estate was deeper into the mountain suburbs along the river. Not that she lived there anymore; Mako and Bolin's family were still displaced after the fall of Ba Sing Se and she'd offered her home for them.

Jinora chimed in agreement. "It will be nice to see everyone tomorrow," she commented, thinking of the Summit Dinner tomorrow evening.

"Yeah, it will be something," Asami replied. She was still a little nervous. "Will Kai be returning?"

Jinora shook her head, "He's been out with the Air Nation helping the Earth Kingdom villages get back on their feet. I'll be going out again too at some point though."

"I wonder if Korra has a boyfriend in the South Pole?" Ikki blurted her question out loud.

For some reason Asami felt something lurch inside her. Though it was a rather abrupt question, she figured. "She's still recovering," Asami replied.

"Ikki you shouldn't be talking about boys," Meelo piped up from a few feet away, "I'm telling dad!"

"Meelo!" Ikki grumbled. The pair still didn't get along all that well, with each of them taking turns to tell on or annoy the other. Ikki got up and chased her younger brother through the garden.

"I hope they grow out of it," Jinora responded. She turned back to Asami, "How has Korra been doing? It will be nice to see her again."

"I haven't heard from her in a while, but she managed to walk again," Asami had to speak up louder for a moment to be heard over Ikki and Meelo's squeals. "I think a lot of it is her mental health too. It must have been pretty awful to experience what she did." Asami had been there, as was Jinora, when the Red Lotus had nearly killed Korra.

The pair watched Pema make her way over to them, "What's happened now?" She asked with an exasperated tone, watching Ikki and Meelo chasing each other. "Anyway, Asami there's a phone call for you. It's Mako."

"Oh, he must be on his way," Asami replied. She made her way inside, finding their phone on the hallway table. "Hello, it's Asami," she put the receiver to her ear.

"Hey Asami, it's Mako here."

Asami smiled, "Hey Mako, it's been a while. How are you?"

"Yeah, I'm alright, just on the airship now. How are you?"

"Just had dinner with Tenzin's family. It's been nice. Though Meelo and Ikki seem to be causing a bit of a stir at the moment."

"I'm sure they can be a bit of a handful at times," Mako replied. "Listen, I hate to interrupt but I wanted to ask you about something. It came up in the investigation."

Asami was surprised. "Oh, sure. How has it been?"

"We managed to arrest another group claiming to be... a part of the Red Lotus," Mako hesitantly replied. Even naming the terrorist group would trigger difficult memories for them both. "I can't really talk about the details, but one of them had a device we'd never seen before. It looks like a collection of metal plates stuck together, with wires running through the middle and connecting to several cylinders. Dodecahedron in shape. We're not sure what it's used for."

The description was a little vague, though it didn't sound familiar anyway, "I've never heard of anything like it. "Do you have it with you?"

"No, two of them took it and ran before we could catch them. But we managed to get the blueprints left behind. The thing is that... it mentions Future Industries."

Asami didn't know what to say. Why would this gang have a device made by her company? A device that she had no idea what it was? "What... what do you mean? Are you sure?"

"I can show you the blueprints, but it looks like Future Industries might have something to do with it. I'm sorry."

"No, no it's okay. Thanks for letting me know," truth be told it wasn't okay, and Asami was slightly annoyed at Mako's timing. But nonetheless, she knew she had to be informed about something this important. "I don't know anything about it from what you've said, but I can check through our archives and see what I find."

"That would be great thanks. And since it's still under investigation it would be best to keep it quiet," Mako paused, feeling bad about dumping this revelation on Asami at this time, "and sorry again for bringing this up. It will be nice to see you again tomorrow."

"Yeah, I should be at the Summit dinner. I'll see you there," she farewelled Mako and hung up.

Her hand felt numb as she placed the receiver back, still in shock from what she'd just heard. Learning that a device used by the Fire Nation gangs may be tied to her company felt like the Equalist controversy all over again. Whatever it was, Asami only hoped that it was a mistake and had nothing to do with Future Industries.

Chapter Text

The Earth Embassy was not a tall building, though inside it had a high ceiling in the auditorium lined with green crystal chandeliers. The prince and his royal cabinet had pulled out all the stops to decorate this venue into an elegant setting fit for royalty, though they had to dip into Republic City's funds to make it happen as the royal vault in Ba Sing Se had been looted. Still, Raiko didn't seem too bothered to let the prince put on a show, even encouraging him to make his visions a reality. Within reason.

Circular tables were set out in the auditorium, each with their pearl white tablecloths made with a square in the centre to resemble Earth-Kingdom coins. In the middle of each table sat a glass vase with various plant leaves or seeds, differing between each arrangement. To the back of the room were several couches with turquoise and emerald silk cushions, and ebony standing tables for guests to place their drinks. The building itself was beautiful enough even if it didn't have the decorations, with its black marbled floor, ornate gold features, and greenstone pillars against the walls tying the colour themes in the room together nicely.

The waiters promptly darted between tables, guests standing, or those on the couches, offering delicate snacks or refilling drinks. Several guests had already made a beeline for the bar, downing a number of cocktails or traditional beverages. And at the front of the room right before the stage stood the man of the hour, Prince Wu himself. His delegates coddled around him, checking if he needed anything or if his events schedule was on track. Prince Wu didn't hold back in telling them off for getting even the slightest thing wrong. But so far, there hadn't been many incidents.

"What happened to the dancing badgermoles?!" Prince Wu whined to his delegates. His ambitious idea had involved several trained badgermoles earthbending boulders across the room with dancers inside.

Grand Secretariat Gun tried to calm the prince, "Prince Wu, there's no way we could have organised badgermoles in time, nor had them in this venue. Please, the rest of the evening will be fun and elegant."

Prince Wu wasn't exactly happy with the arrangement. Thankfully his attention was easily distracted with a plate of curry puffs passing by, giving many delegates time to 'attend to other guests' and leave the prince by himself. Gun wasn't so lucky and didn't make it away in time.

At the main entrance, Tenzin made his way into the foyer. He wore his usual attire for formal occasions, consisting of a red robe wrapped over each shoulder, and a yellow-trimmed buttoned tunic underneath. While Pema was at home looking after the younger children, Jinora and Asami accompanied the airbending master, each wearing their own formalwear.

"Imagine having to run after your siblings at an event like this," Tenzin sighed, though he did feel bad for his wife at home. At least now Jinora was old enough to attend these events without needing supervision, though she had always been much better behaved than her other siblings.

Jinora snickered, "I can't promise I'll be any better." She was joking of course, but Tenzin couldn't help but worry for a split second out of habit.

Lin Beifong approached the group. It was a rare occasion tonight where she wasn't wearing her officer uniform, instead sporting a dark green jacket with padded shoulders, and a lighter green top and trousers. "Tenzin, Asami, Jinora," she nodded and greeted the trio, "I take it your Mom is with the others at home?"

"Rohan wasn't too well this evening," Tenzin answered for Jinora.

"Sorry to hear that," Lin replied. She turned back towards the auditorium, "It's really something in there," she commented, somewhat sarcastically. "The food is good though."

Arriving in Republic City only minutes ago, Mako and the others from the Fire Nation entered the embassy. They'd spent their time on the airship getting dressed up for the event. Izumi led the group in, dressed in the traditional Fire Lord outfit of crimson and dark reds, followed by Mako in his usual grey three-piece suit with a red scarf. Ilah was dressed in a silk red kimono with gold embroidery. Several other ministers and guards accompanied the group as well, trailing in behind them.

"I know that things are a bit tense between us," Izumi spoke to her daughter, "but it is nice to have you here. Not just for the sake of the summit or politics, but just to spend this time together."

Ilah paused before replying, "I suppose I haven't seen much of Republic City yet." She offered a slight smile for her mother.

Mako scanned ahead and noticed a woman with silky black hair and a dark red dress. "I think that's Asami," Mako told the crown princess. The woman turned around and it was indeed the Future Industries owner.

Asami noticed Mako and left the auditorium to meet him. "Mako," she greeted, the pair embracing. "You look nice."

"As do you," Mako complimented. "This is Crown Princess Ilah," Asami and Ilah exchanged greetings as well. "Oh, I brought this to show you," Mako pulled out a sketch of the device he'd called Asami about.

Neither of the women seemed very happy that Mako was talking about the case in the middle of a night out. "Does he always work this hard?" Ilah asked Asami.

"Yeah, he does. But this is a new record," Asami answered. "I've heard of people taking their work home with them but taking it out with them is something else."

"I'm sorry, it won't take long," Mako had already unfolded the paper for the others to see.

Asami scanned the sketch. It still didn't ring any bells. "I had a look through the archives and couldn't find anything that matched your description. And I definitely didn't see anything like this."

"Is it possible that someone else in your company designed it," Ilah asked. Even though she hadn't wanted to talk about work, since it was being discussed Ilah asked the question anyway.

"Well," Asami looked a little uncomfortable, "my father is the one who founded the company, so... I could ask him but..." she didn't finish her sentence.

Ilah immediately felt bad, remembering what she'd heard about the Future Industries founder Hiroshi Sato, "I'm sorry, I didn't mean to bring him up."

"No, it's okay," Asami assured. "When Mako called me I had assumed my father might come up." She sighed, "I'll see what I can do."

"I'm sorry to put this on you," Mako apologised.

"Well now that work has been discussed, maybe we can enjoy the rest of the evening," Ilah replied. She turned to the side to see her mother politely waving at her to join her, probably to meet some of the officials dressed in green and grey attire. "Oh well, I'm being summoned," Ilah smiled to the pair and then turned to leave.

There was a moment of silence as Mako watched the crown princess glide across the room. Mako couldn't deny he was drawn to her.

"So, is she your new high-profile girlfriend?" Asami asked. She instantly regretted how she had said it, "Sorry, that was poor taste."

Mako laughed slightly awkwardly. "Don't worry about it, I probably deserved that. Though it's pretty one-sided at this point," he concluded with a tinge of sadness in his voice.

"I don't know about that," Asami replied, "I mean, she did walk inside the same building with you, that's a start, right?"

Mako had forgotten that for all her sweetness and her caring nature, Asami still had a witty humour. "I guess that is something," he smirked. "I don't know, I mean she's the future Fire Lord. She must have had a good number of people ask her out."

"And you've managed to date the daughter of a famous businessman and the ''Avatar''. I think you've got a good shot. And from the sounds of things, they're pretty happy and impressed with how you've helped with their case." Although Mako knew Asami had a point, he couldn't let go of his doubts. But he smiled gratefully anyway.

"Can I ask about it at all? The case I mean?" Asami enquired.

"It is on the down-low, but this latest raid was on a much bigger scale than the others before," Mako began. He knew he could trust Asami, even though they'd been told to keep the details quiet. "And every group still claims to be part of the Red Lotus."

Upon hearing their name, Asami felt that same dread as when she was on the phone to Mako yesterday. Everything that was happening in her friends' lives, with Mako investigating in the Fire Nation, Bolin working with Kuvira, and Korra recovering from her fight with Zaheer, were all the direct or indirect result of what the Red Lotus did. "Do you think it's really them?"

Mako shook his head, "I don't really know. It would be strange for the Red Lotus to act so boldly and openly after their defeat, but perhaps this is a smoke screen so they can hide what they're really doing."

"I just hope Korra's okay. It won't be easy for her to hear that the Red Lotus might be back," Asami mused.

Any further conversation was cut short by the second-to-last group to arrive, the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. Asami and Mako watched as the Interim Leader Kuvira led the way, in a pale emerald sleeveless dress with silver jewellery, minimal but elegant. Baatar walked in beside Kuvira, in a deep green three-piece suit. Bolin, Varrick, and Zhu Li all followed behind, sporting their own Earth Kingdom-inspired outfits. As soon as the media noticed Kuvira entering the premises, their cameras flashed and reporters threw their questions her way. With a courteous yet somehow stern smile, she addressed them, "Sorry, we won't be taking questions tonight."

"Hello Republic Cit-ay! Bolin is back!" Bolin cheered, spreading his arms wide. His joy quickly turned to dread as he noticed his ex-girlfriend was standing ahead of him, "Aaaand... Eska's also here."

The Chieftains of the Northern Water Tribe, Eska and her brother Desna, slid over to where Bolin was. "I see you have replaced me with a new girlfriend," Eska nodded to Kuvira. "Well done, she seems very threatening."

"Oh no no, that's Kuvira, and she's kinda my boss," Bolin stammered.

"Boss. Girlfriend. Same thing," Eska replied. Bolin had forgotten how cold and analytical Eska's voice was.

"I'm afraid there's been a mistake, Your Imminence," a staff member approached the Chieftains, "we have you ''and'' your brother booked into the same room, with only one bed." Even though it had been several years since Varrick had ''allegedly'' blown up the Water Tribe Cultural Centre, there still hadn't been another proper one built, with only a small Water Tribe Embassy built elsewhere and without capacity for guests. Instead, the Chieftains had opted to stay in the guest rooms here in the Earth Kingdom Embassy.

"There's no mistake," Eska corrected, "Desna sleeps in the tub." With a quick final glance to Bolin, Eska slinked off with her brother trailing behind. Apparently, they'd had enough socialising for one night.

In the corner nearby, Varrick and Zhu Li stood by themselves, with Zhu Li struggling under the weight of their luggage. They too were staying in the guest floors above. "Never thought I'd be allowed back in Republic City. Raiko must've turned purple when he found out that Kuvira pardoned me of all my ''alleged'' crimes," Varrick wore a smug grin.

Zhu Li didn't exactly look convinced, "You're an upstanding citizen again, sir."

"Upstanding all right!" Varrick waved his arms. He leant in to whisper to Zhu Li, "But don't forget to fill the extra bag with as many of those little soaps you can get. Love the lavender scent." Zhu Li simply rolled her eyes, leaving to take their luggage up to their room.

It was only now that some of the guests had cleared and meandered into the auditorium that Mako noticed his brother had arrived as well as Kuvira. "Bolin!"

"Mako! Asami!" Bolin ran over and hugged his brother. He then hugged Asami while lifting her off the ground, taking her by surprise with the three of them laughing afterwards. "It's so good to see you both."

"You too Bolin," Asami replied.

"So what's it like working for Kuvira? I hear she can be... pretty harsh?" Asami asked.

Bolin shook his head, "No, I - I mean she can be tough - but we're really turning the Earth Kingdom around. Some of these areas have been under siege by barbarians for a long time and we're helping them get back on their feet. With the Air Nation's help of course."

Mako smiled, "Have you seen much of Opal?"

"No, I haven't seen her much, but we talk a lot over radio," Bolin reminisced over his conversations with his girlfriend. He knew they were both doing a lot of good for the Earth Kingdom, but it didn't make it easy to be apart. "And how have you both been?"

Mako and Asami didn't exactly feel like bringing up these latest revelations about a possible Red Lotus connection to Future Industries.

"Oh, you know, just helping rebuild the city and that," Asami answered vaguely.

"That's still awesome," Bolin encouraged.

"I've been in the Fire Nation for some time helping with investigations," Mako replied. "Pabu seemed to love it too."

"Oh Pabu!" Bolin nearly cried hearing his pet's name. "I miss him. I'll have to stop by Air Temple Island before I go." His thoughts shifted to their other friend, "Have you guys heard from Korra?"

"Not yet, but she's supposed to be arriving tonight with the Southern Water Tribe ship," Mako answered.

"Man, it's been ages since we've all been together. It will be nice to have Team Avatar all here in one place!" Bolin echoed. It certainly had been a while since the four of them had been together. They'd been pretty busy with their own lives and had only seen each other occasionally over the past three years. And none of them had seen Korra since then either, though they'd all written to her to help her through her recovery.

In the auditorium they could hear clapping as a speaker announced something over the microphone. "I guess it's starting now," Asami spoke. The three of them made their way inside.

In addition to his usual flashy green jacket, the prince also donned a matching top hat and walking cane. The live band played a loud welcoming tune as the prince revealed his face, his grin wide and eyebrows bobbing. With one hand holding his cane out, the other took a hold of the microphone again, "Welcome Ladies and Gentlemen! Tonight, we have a special line-up ahead indeed!" his arms flailed about after each word, and his eyes captivating the crowd. "I am so happy and thankful to have you all here! And so, to thank all the brave souls who have offered to help rebuild my kingdom, I shall indulge you with a song," Wu's voice quietened to a whisper, "from my heart… Hit it!" The musicians launched into a boisterous and lively song, prompting the prince to start hip swinging on stage. Wu certainly had energy, if nothing else.

A woman dressed in dark green with silver jewellery leaned on one of the standing tables. She looked through the drinks menu as Baatar approached her, "Mother."

Suyin Beifong, matriarch of Zaofu, looked up and saw her son standing before her. She paused, feeling a flood of mixed emotions. She hadn't seen him in a while. "Junior."

"Actually, it's just Baatar now," her son replied coldly. "So, now that you've seen all the good we've done since we left Zaofu, you must be sorry that you didn't come and help us?"

"You and Kuvira have done well," Suyin gave a faint smile. "I'm proud of you both. But you know my reasons for not leaving Zaofu."

Baatar scoffed, "Ah yes, some spiel about 'not wanting to march all over the Earth Kingdom?' I remember that. I haven't forgotten either," he added resentfully.

Suyin had let his previous comment slide, but not this one, "We both have to move past what happened. I've forgiven you for what you did to us-"

"What we did to you?!"Baatar raised his voice, though he noticed people beginning to stare and calmed himself, "We saved the Earth Kingdom, while you left its people to suffer."

"Zaofu still had mouths to feed too. You took half our population with you. Most of the guard, our engineers, our workforce," Suyin shot back. She sighed, realising that she still couldn't get through to him. "I understand that the Earth Kingdom needed help, and it still does. But there were people in Zaofu depending on us too. It hasn't been easy for us either."

Shaking his head, Baatar looked to the side, "It's just as you used to tell us Mother. Even under the monarchy, the Southern Earth Kingdom have always looked after themselves. Omashu has its King. Gaoling and Chin have their leaders. And Zaofu has its domes to hide behind."

Although frustrated to be having this conversation again, Suyin knew that her son needed to get this off his chest. Things had been so tense, and neither of them had been in touch for a long time. "Baatar, I know that we – or I – should have done more. I don't deny that. And we may never agree on the past, but I want to be here now. Not just for the Earth Kingdom, but for you. And Kuvira."

Baatar couldn't deny that hearing these words from his mom struck a chord inside, though he still didn't quite know how to respond.

"And we appreciate Zaofu's help," Kuvira made her way over to the pair.

Suyin greeted the Interim leader, noticing a jade pendant around her neck, "That necklace is beautiful."

Kuvira smiled, turning to Bataar, "It was a special gift from Baatar."

Suyin took a moment to realise what she was saying, "Baatar, I... I had no idea you had proposed." Her surprise and joy were laced with sadness however, "We would have celebrated with you if you had wanted?" she offered.

"Thanks, but we enjoyed the proposal gifts together," Kuvira replied. Although her words were polite, they still stung. "We are keeping it under wraps for now. The mission to Ba Sing Se is imminent and we have to prioritise that," she smiled fondly at her fiancé, "but it was nice to have a moment to enjoy ourselves in the midst of it."

"Well, I'm happy for both of you," Suyin congratulated.

Kuvira and Baatar left, leaving Suyin standing alone at the table. She could tell that both of them were resentful towards her, even Kuvira, though she hid her emotions far more than Bataar. It still saddened Suyin to be estranged from her son and Kuvira, especially with the news of their engagement and all. Many years ago, Kuvira was taken in by Suyin after her parents had struggled to look after her. While she had been raised by foster parents in Zaofu, Suyin couldn't help but feel a motherly attachment to her as well as her biological son. She had her reasons for not wanting to march all over the Earth Kingdom after the fall of the Hou-Ting Dynasty, but whether they were right or not things had already moved forwards. Suyin only hoped that somehow they could patch things up and move forwards in the ''right'' direction.

"Looks like that went well," her sister, Lin Beifong, made her way over.

"Well, I knew something was going to be said. I haven't seen them in a long time. And they're getting married apparently." Suyin still looked a little grieved to have not been involved in the whole process.

Lin placed an arm around Su's shoulder. In the background, Prince Wu's vocals were piercing the very air around them. He certainly had a talent for missing every note he could. "Hey, you know what drink goes well with awful singing?" Suyin shook her head. "A glass of awamori to help deaden the senses." Both the sisters smirked for a moment before Lin bought their drinks.

As guests started filling the tables in the auditorium, crown princess Ilah joined Mako, Asami, and Bolin at their table. Mako introduced Ilah to his brother, pulling out a chair next to him for her.

Her mother Izumi made her way over to a table on the other side, with Tenzin and his brother Bumi on one half and Suyin and Lin just arriving on the other. "May I join?" she asked, and everyone welcomed the Fire Lord. She sat down, her security standing a few feet away. "It's been a while since all of us have been together in one place."

"It has been," Tenzin chimed in. "When would have been the last time?"

"There was that holiday to Ember Island that our parents all made us go to," Bumi commented. "Though it wouldn't have been the last time we were all together."

"Didn't you upset Kya so bad in the middle of beach volleyball that she washed our net away?" Lin joked.

Bumi laughed, "Hey, it wasn't my fault! You all got to use bending during the match. I had to use my wits."

"If I recall, your 'wits' involved throwing a dead lobster crab at Kya before she could spike the ball," Izumi smirked. The rest of the table joined in a chorus of laughter. Being the children of the previous 'Team Avatar', they had spent quite a lot of time with each other growing up. It was nice to reminisce together again.

Prince Wu's performance now included a row of scantily clad Earth Kingdom dancers, with the line of women linking arms and flicking their legs in the air. Wu stood in the middle, one arm around a dancer and the other holding his microphone, and with a final long note, he concluded his song. A few enthusiastic guests at the front cheered loudly, while the rest of the room gave a modest, involuntary clap. "Thank you, thank you," Wu bowed. "And now, just before we have Kuvira up here on stage, we have one more event! It's time for winner of the raffle draw to be announced!"

A man wheeled out a clear plastic tube with tickets inside. Grand Secretariat Gun waved to the prince to grab his attention, but Wu didn't notice. "I will now draw out one lucky ticket from the ballot. Who will it be? Let's find out!" The prince reached in and moved his hand around suspensefully. He quickly grabbed a ticket and pulled it out, taking his time to unfold it and study the name inside. "And the winner is... King Renshu of Omashu!"

An older man near the front stood up, making his way over to the stage. Renshu shook the prince's hand, the moment captured by an event photographer. "Thank you," the quiet king mumbled.

"And now the prize!" Wu paused as he realised he had no idea what they were giving away. He turned to Gun.

"Prince Wu, I tried to tell you earlier," Gun walked closer to the prince on stage, "We don't have a prize for the raffle. There was no money left."

Prince Wu turned back to the audience and King Renshu, "...And you've won a special, warm, and friendly... Royal Prince's hug!" Wu improvised. He went in and wrapped his arms around the stunned King. Renshu looked rather disappointed.

As they pulled away, the King noticed the line of sparkly dancers on stage, "Can I hug one of them instead?"

"No! Of course not!" Prince Wu nearly pushed the old pervert down the stage steps as he hurried him away. All the Grand Secretariat could do was sigh deeply.

"And of course, we have to thank the beautiful, powerful, stern, yet elegant woman herself! The Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, Kuvira! Give it up for Kuvira, for making this all possible!" Kuvira smiled and nodded to those cheering around her from her table. The prince continued, "Let me show the Earth Kingdom's appreciation... with another song!" No one cheered, but Wu proceeded anyway, this time acapella.

Kuvira,

The Great Uniter,

Thank you for all the work you do,

You brought peace to the land,

With a mighty metal hand,

And we love you, I really do!

So please, take my hand,

And I will be your man!"

He added the last line with a wink, though Kuvira didn't respond at all.

"And together, we will—"

His item was cut short when Gun grabbed the microphone off him. The prince protested but Gun spoke into it instead, "I think what Prince Wu means to say, is that on behalf of the Earth Kingdom, and the entire world, we are incredibly grateful for all that you have done to restore balance to our nation." The Grand Secretariat bowed, "Thank you, and may the Great Earth Spirits continue to bless you."

The audience once again erupted into applause for Kuvira. Prince Wu didn't seem too happy at all, sulking in the corner. Nonetheless, Gun invited Kuvira to the stage, and she got up to join him.

Taking the microphone, Kuvira addressed the room, "Thank you, but I can't take the credit for everything that has happened. If you don't mind, I'd like to say a few words," she looked to Gun, who nodded. "When we started out from Zaofu three years ago, we had no idea what we could accomplish. We were only a small group from one city, yet as reports came in about the devastation across our nation, we couldn't just stand by. We thought that maybe we could simply apprehend some of the bandits and keep smaller villages safe, or bring supplies to the cities, but what we accomplished was so much more. What we have achieved in these past three years is incredible. A feat that has involved many of the bravest warriors, smartest minds, and most compassionate hearts. I want to take this opportunity to thank every single person who has been on this mission with us."

There was another round of clapping. "But we cannot be overconfident with this next battle. Tomorrow at the summit, we'll make plans to free the final city left in disarray. Ba Sing Se has long been the Earth Kingdom capital, the shinning beacon of strength and solidarity. But now, it is home to the very people who wish to keep our nation in chaos, and profit from taking what they can from everyone else. So thank you, to the other world leaders for being here in our time of need," Kuvira locked eyes with Suyin. After a brief pause, she managed to smile at the Zaofu matriarch. "And let us complete this three-year campaign to save the Earth Kingdom, and finally bring peace to our nation." Applause filled the room, with some even cheering and whistling in support. Kuvira bowed and took the stage exit while the band continued playing, this time, without the prince's input.

Kuvira met smiles from the audience with her own as she walked back towards her table. Some even thanked her, and Kuvira offered a small nod in return. Being with crowds of important people at a high-end function wasn't exactly her scene, and it still bothered her that there was this much celebration before they'd even finished their campaign and liberated Ba Sing Se. Still, perhaps it was a nice way to take some time to enjoy themselves.

Before she made it back to her table, President Raiko approached. "That was a good speech," he smiled warmly, but Kuvira could sense that his eyes were searching or scanning her. "And as Grand Secretariat Gun mentioned, we are all grateful for you and the work you've done."

"I just want to see the Earth Kingdom thrive once again," Kuvira replied.

"So, once you've finished in your temporary position as Interim Leader, what do you have planned next?" Raiko quizzed.

Kuvira laughed, "I'm not one to get ahead of myself. We still need to free Ba Sing Se."

"Well of course, but I'm sure with the world's armies alongside you it won't be a difficult mission. I guess it's the job of the military commanders to work in the present, and the job of the leaders to think about the future and what comes after."

"I also think of what happens after," Kuvira shot back, though politely, "but I like to keep myself in the present and clear everything else."

"Understandable," Raiko conceded. Kuvira could tell he was prying and wanted to get something out of her. And she had some idea what it could be. Raiko paused to collect his thoughts, "It's just, I've been hearing some... interesting rumours about what has been happening in the cities and villages where your forces have been. There have been tributes and posters made in your name. The people have been calling you their 'Great Uniter'. I just worry that transitioning from having a temporary interim leader to an earth monarchy again might be made more difficult for the citizens if they view you in this way."

"The citizens can call me whatever they want," Kuvira defended. "I won't choose what words they can or can't use to describe me, or how they want to express gratitude."

Raiko contained his anger well, only elevating his voice a little before replying, "As I said, it's us leaders who have to think of the future. The Earth Kingdom needs a monarchy-"

"And what if they don't want one?" Kuvira interrupted. "What if the people are tired of oppressive kings and traditions? What if they want to have something different?"

The president was clearly annoyed by her comments, "You shouldn't say comments like that, not with the rumours of the Red Lotus surfacing."

Kuvira creased her eyebrows, "Please don't twist my words Mr President, you know what I meant." She turned to face the prince at the front of the stage, "When you see him, do you see someone who has potential to lead an entire nation?"

Raiko took a moment to also glance at the prince. Wu was dancing haphazardly and nearly took out a tray of drinks carried by a waiter. The president sighed, "When I see the prince, I do not merely see a person. I see an institution. A tradition that has kept balance for a long time. And that is exactly what the Earth Kingdom needs. Regardless of Wu's ability, the monarchy will bring stability to the Earth Kingdom after a time of complete chaos and anarchy." He could see Kuvira was not convinced, "What is it that you want then?"

The Interim Leader paused before answering, "I just want what's best for the Earth Kingdom. Nothing more nor less."

"Well then, if that's the case then I know you'll do what is right," Raiko concluded. Neither of them were very satisfied with the conversation, but they also knew that any further discussion was probably pointless. "I'll see you tomorrow at the summit."

Kuvira didn't bother answering back. She simply watched the president make his way over to another group of gaudy guests, chatting and laughing away. She couldn't exactly speak her mind with the president, especially not with their mission to Ba Sing Se being aided by the United Republic of Nations. But whatever his views or intentions may be, she knew that she had to focus on their mission first.

After leaving their table for more drinks, Asami, Mako, Bolin, and Ilah stood near the back of the auditorium. It would soon be time for the main course to be served.

"It's a shame that Korra's ship didn't arrive in time for the dinner," Asami mentioned. The others chimed in.

"Yeah, I knew they were arriving late, but I thought they'd be here by now," Mako replied.

Tenzin approached the group, "I just got word that a Southern Water Tribe ship has pulled up at the dock."

"Is it Korra?!" Bolin excitedly asked. The others all set their drinks down and joined the airbending master.

After a short bison trip from the embassy to the docks, Tenzin disembarked with the others. The grey-blue boat floated next to the wharf, and several people in Water Tribe clothing hopped out and secured the ship with ropes.

As soon as the main door opened, a large mass of white charged out and tackled Mako to the ground. Ilah had only just managed to duck away while the polar bear dog licked Mako's face.

"Naga!" Mako tried to get Korra's best friend to stop, though he couldn't deny he was happy being missed this much. Bolin and Asami also petted the excited animal. "This is Naga, Korra's best friend," Mako explained to Ilah as he stood up.

Tonraq, the Chief of the Southern Water Tribe and Korra's father, made his way out. He was a large and muscular man but had a warmth and friendliness to his demeaner. He smiled and cupped his hands together, bowing to Tenzin as he did the same. "Master Tenzin, it's good to see you."

"It's good to see you too, Chief Tonraq," Tenzin replied. He noticed that Korra hadn't followed her father out, "Does Korra need a minute before meeting us?"

"Korra?" Tonraq looked confused. "I... thought she was here in Republic City?"

Tenzin looked to Asami next to him, "We haven't seen Korra here since she left. Are you sure she's meant to be here?"

Tonraq nodded, "She left the South Pole a year ago. She's been writing us letters too." He started to look more worried and panicked, "If she isn't here in Republic City then where is she?"

No one knew exactly what to say; they'd all been expecting the Avatar to arrive with Tonraq. "I... I don't know," Tenzin responded.

"Is that all you got?!"

Another boulder flew through the arena, crashing into the woman's forearms as she tried to block. She couldn't keep her balance however, falling onto the ground as the dust settled. The ground beneath her shook, and she quickly leapt up to dodge a wall of pillars shooting out.

The crowds on the other side of the cage cheered and roared like hungry animals. Her opponent bounced back on her feet, waiting for the her to get up again. She jumped up and dodged another strike, but her opponent leapt onto the wall from an earth pillar.

Tired and vision blurry, the woman couldn't dodge in time, instead taking the boulder to her shoulder and rolling across the arena floor. She didn't get up. Her opponent raised her arms high in the air, the crowd screaming like ravenous lion vultures hungry for more fighting. Their fight had barely lasted a few minutes, if one could even call it a fight.

After the battle, the woman found herself sitting on the benches of the now empty arena. She wasn't a bad earthbender; in fact, she had been trained by some of the best in the world. Though it was impossible to feel that way after such a terrible battle.

"Here," a gruff voice tossed a wad of yuans onto her lap, "for your lackluster performance." His comment only confirmed how she felt.

"Thanks," the woman replied. It didn't feel like much of a silver lining, but at least she had food now.

The man didn't walk away immediately though, instead looking the woman up and down. It was hard to tell with her black eye, cuts, and bruises, but he knew she looked familiar. "Say, you kind of look like that Avatar girl. Yeah, you really do!"

The woman got up quickly, keeping her gaze low and hanging her bag over her shoulder. "Yeah I get that a lot," she replied, turning and walking away.

"What ever happened to her?"

"I wouldn't know," Korra replied.

Chapter Text

Three years ago

There were countless Water Tribe tales about what lay at the bottom of the ocean. Some believed it was a gateway to the spirit world, even though there were other portals to get there. Other tales suggested it was a third realm of the aether, sitting in between this one and the next. Whatever it was, most agreed that terrible monsters probably lurked deep beneath, and so they would never know for sure where it led.

It was strange that Korra was dwelling on old folk tales she'd heard long ago. Perhaps it was because these stories were mysterious and uncertain, an escape from her current reality. The reality where she was stuck in this wheelchair, simply watching the endless waves from their ship and imagining what lay beneath them.

Korra had said goodbye to her friends back on Air Temple Island. All of them wanted nothing more than to see her recover, and Asami had even offered to come with her. While it was comforting to have their support, Korra had felt that she needed time alone. Time to heal and process all that had happened, from facing the Red Lotus, nearly losing her father, and the aching toll from what the poison had done to her body.

Footsteps approached from behind. "Hey," Kya greeted. She was also on the way back from Republic City, along with Korra's parents and Naga. For a long time neither of the pair said anything, simply watching the expanse of ocean. There was very little anyone could say, Kya knew. Being a healer, she knew that giving false hope to patients was not ideal, but she also wanted Korra to not give up. Sliding a hand over Korra's shoulder she turned to her, "My Mom will do her best." She tried to smile reassuringly, but her eyes were still saddened and filled with concern.

Korra's smile wasn't much more sincere. She tried to, but her facial muscles just didn't have the strength. There was not much more either of them could say or do, only wait as they sailed for two weeks and a bit to get home.

The nightmares still plagued Korra's sleep, even while on the ship. When she did arrive back in the Southern Water Tribe she wasn't spared either; tonight was a particularly terrifying dream. Korra saw images from the day she faced Zaheer, the leader of the Red Lotus. The grey-robed figure simply floated in the air like some kind of ghost or spirit, and with a wave of his hands, Korra felt her chest constrict. An air sphere enclosed her head, and her lungs burned as they collapsed. All Korra's whimpering and crying did nothing to stop it. She watched as the man's arms twisted and fingers clenched, now drawing the very air out of her lungs. She tried to scream but nothing came out. It was all overwhelming and sickening until she burst her eyes open, waking to the blue ceiling above.

Her chest heaved in an out, still traumatised by the nightmare. She was in bed, at home in the Southern Water Tribe. Korra looked down to her feet, still unable to move or even feel her legs. She may have been asleep, but it wasn't a dream.

Deciding some fresh air would help, Korra managed to shift herself into her chair. A sorrowful whine came from Naga in the corner as her companion watched her struggle. As she wheeled herself onto the balcony, the cold air prickled her skin where she could still feel it. At least the southern lights were calming and ethereal, with their turquoise and green trails like rolling silk sheets across the dark sky. It was sad though, that something so beautiful was also a reminder of what she had accomplished previously before all this. These lights had appeared after she reopened the spirit portal years ago, and for all their mystical beauty, Korra couldn't help but feel like they were taunting her, reminding her of the person she used to be. How far had she fallen.

Her presence outside hadn't gone unnoticed. "Can't sleep again?" Korra's mother embraced her daughter. Korra didn't reply. Senna knelt down beside the wheelchair and stroked Korra's hair, "Honey, your father and I have tried to give you as much space as you needed... but we're worried. You're not sleeping, you're barely eating. We don't want to push you, but it's been three weeks."

It shouldn't be like this, Korra felt. Her mother shouldn't have to be worrying over her like this. She was supposed to be the Avatar for spirits' sake! The bridge between the material and spirit world, the bringer of balance. Not some broken girl stuck inside a chair with her poor parents anxiously worrying over her.

"Will you please go see Katara?" Senna pleaded.

Korra couldn't respond immediately. Everyone kept telling her to see Katara, but Korra wasn't sure she wanted to. Katara was an incredible healer of course, but a part of Korra knew that maybe whatever had happened couldn't be reversed. By not going she wouldn't have to find out. She wouldn't have to face the very real possibility of failing once again.

Still, she could hear the sadness and strain in her mother's voice. Her parents were trying their best but they couldn't help her, and all they could do was try and be there for her and watch from the sidelines. "Okay, I'll go," she conceded.

"You're going to get through this," Senna held Korra close, squeezing her gently as she tried to reassure her. Korra leaned in too, a single, long tear snaking its way down her cheek, quickly growing cold against her skin.

The next day, Korra had adopted a bathing suit and sat in a glowing pool inside a wooden hut. Beside her, an older woman swirled her arms, guiding the water around Korra's body. Part of Korra felt anxious for what she'd find, and the other part was simply too tired to care. She sat there in the water, watching Katara's expression for any signs of worry or concern, though also shutting down any nervous thoughts in her mind. Such a battle between two opposing desires was exhausting.

The examination seemed to last a lifetime as Korra's mind grew heavy. After a few moments, Katara addressed her, "The poison did a lot of internal damage. You've healed from the initial wounds, but there are lingering imbalances inside your body."

Korra looked up from the pool, "Can you fix it?"

"I can try and guide your healing process. But whether you get better or not is up to you," Katara explained.

Managing to pull her body upright slightly, Korra stared into the waters as the glowing disappeared. This was just the answer she was dreading.

Katara could see Korra's grieved expression and deep melancholy. She worried that maybe a part of her had already given up. "I know what it's like to go through a traumatic experience," Katara began. "It can feel like nothing at all can pull you out from the darkness. Even life itself can feel meaningless. But I promise you, it is worth trying. There may be a path where you recover stronger than ever."

"That's what I want, more than anything," Korra pleaded.

That was good; at least she hadn't given in to despair entirely. Katara continued, "Then try something for me; concentrate on your big toe."

Korra looked down at her feet. They seemed lifeless, even with their image obscured by the ripples in the water.

"Visualise it moving. Breathe."

Sipping in air through her nose, Korra inhaled, concentrating on her feet. She watched and studied her toe, imagining what it would be like to see it move. What it would be like to be a living extension of her body, not just stuck there like a chunk of a stone statue. She cleared her thoughts of all else, dwelling only on her toe.

After a short while, she noticed a twitch, and soon after, it moved. "Huh... did... did you see that?!" Korra stammered. "It worked!" A grin soon formed on her mouth.

Over the next week, Katara helped Korra through several exercises. She'd managed to heal a lot of the physical damage, but much of what was going on was in Korra's mind and spirit. Over time, little by little, Korra had regained some of her ability. She could feel in her toes and feet again, the sensation of textures like the wooden floors or fluffy shoes that she'd never taken notice of previously. She'd also regained feeling and some movement in the rest of her legs. Today, it was time to relearn how to walk.

Korra was dressed in her baggy navy pants and light blue singlet, her hair in two side ponytails and one on top. It was small, but having the energy to do her own hair again had made a big difference to her morale. Korra balanced her body on two poles extending in front of her like train tracks. While she could put some weight on her legs and stand, she still needed the rails for support.

Katara stood beside Korra, watching on as she tried to encourage her, "The mind can be your greatest enemy, or, a powerful ally. Focus again on taking a step forward. Visualise it happening, and block out all else."

She'd already heard that much of this was in her head, but it still didn't relax her body. Korra shook as she struggled to hold herself up. Sweat beads slid from her forehead as she concentrated hard. She managed to move her left leg forward only an inch before searing pain shot into her forearm. Korra turned her head to see the metallic poison seeping into her flesh. She could feel the platinum shackles gripping her wrists as she struggled against the pain. Screaming out loud, Korra crashed to the floor.

"It's alright," Katara made her way over. "Your body thinks it's in danger still but you're safe here. Let's try again. Use your mind to overcome the pain."

Korra held her head in her arms. "Not now, I've had enough for today," she replied.

She didn't go back to Katara for another week. And when she did, it was the same over and over. The rails, struggling to take a step, then falling onto the floor. All the progress she'd made up until this point seemed to crumble away into a powder that vanished in the wind. On this morning, Korra hadn't had even bothered to get out of her chair yet, simply staring at the rails in front of her. Her new enemy. How pitiful that the supposed Avatar had been bested by an inanimate pair of rails.

Katara sipped on a hot cup of tea. "Whenever you're ready," she encouraged.

"We've been at this for six months and I can barely take a couple of steps without collapsing," Korra let out a supressed sigh. "What's the point?"

"I know you're frustrated, but-"

"Of course I'm frustrated! A crazy madman poisoned me, and now I can't walk, or dress myself, or cook for myself, or do anything for myself, all the while my friends have been off saving the world while I'm stuck with you, and you can't even heal me!" Korra took a few breaths before realising what she had said. "That came out wrong," she slid a hand over the side of her face, hiding her shame at her outburst.

Katara looked pained at Korra's words, but not because she was offended. More because she could see the struggle in Korra's eyes and hear it in her voice, "It's alright, let your emotions flow."

Korra could barely look up as Katara made her way over. "I'm tired, Katara. I'm so tired." Her lip quivered as she realised she couldn't be strong anymore. The first cry escaped her mouth and she contained herself again, but before long, Korra began sobbing into her forearm. It had all been too much. The frustration and anguish burst forth like a torrent from deep inside, and Korra finally allowed herself to feel everything she had been trying to bottle up.

Wrapping her warm arms around her tenderly, Katara could feel Korra's pain and frustration as she wept. So much had been put on Korra's shoulders. From the outside, Katara knew that Korra had already overcome so much hardship, but for Korra, none of it mattered while she was stuck at this hurdle.

The pair grieved together for a moment longer before Katara sat back on the floor. "I know that your struggle is different, but you're not the only Avatar to have overcome great loss. My husband Aang lost his entire people when he awoke from the iceberg a hundred years later," Katara turned to the side of the room while she reminisced, almost as if she were watching it happen in front of her. "I was there on the mountain when he found the remains of someone very close to him. I had lost my mother when I was very young, but to lose everyone in your life and your entire culture. I couldn't imagine what that was like." Even after all these years, Katara couldn't help but feel that same grief that she did long ago, her eyes growing watery as she dwelt on the past.

"That must have been awful," Korra responded. She had nearly lost her father when Zaheer threw him off Laghima's peak during the battle, and that deep sadness and anger that she had felt had been so encompassing and overwhelming.

"There were times where he really grieved for what he had lost," Katara continued, "but he never let it break his spirit. He chose to find meaning in his suffering, and eventually, peace."

Korra looked up at Katara longingly, "And what will I find if I get through this?"

"I don't know," a small smile formed on Katara's mouth, "but won't it be interesting to find out?"

It was that simple phrase that sat with Korra. What would she find? She wanted so badly to get back the life she had lost, to be out there with the others helping the world find balance again. Maybe such a future was possible. Though even with all the steps she'd taken to move forwards, it seemed the ground beneath her was sliding back. Still, she had to try.

A moment later, Korra took to the rails again. Her arms carried most of her weight as she looked to the floor. She still wasn't sure of herself, her muscles quivering as she tried to fight it. What would be different about this attempt compared to all her previous failures?

"Close your eyes, visualise yourself walking over to Naga," Katara guided. At the end of the rails, the polar bear dog murmured as she watched her best friend try to hold herself together. "Did you see it?" Katara asked Korra.

"Yes."

"Then take your first step."

Still shaking heavily, Korra dragged her foot forwards. It felt like lead, but she continued pushing through until she felt it connect with the wooden boards again. She'd taken a step. With her eyes still closed, Korra tried taking another. Her body struggled, and she still couldn't put all her weight on her legs, but she was doing it. In her mind she watched her legs moving freely, unshackled by the fear and worry that kept her down. Grunting and groaning through each movement, Korra slipped a little but held firm onto the rails. She wasn't going to let herself fall, not this time. It took a bit more energy to pull herself back up, but after another couple steps she had reached the end.

Korra fell into Naga's cuddly fur, exhaling deeply. She had done it. She had finally taken her first steps after months of work. Korra felt the edges of her mouth tug into a smile, the first real one she'd had in a long time.

One year ago

Oogi flew through their last stretch before landing on the snow. Tenzin hadn't been to the South Pole for a few months, though he hadn't forgotten how cold it could get, and wrapped his cloak around himself a little tighter.

After disembarking, Tenzin was greeted by an enthusiastic Korra throwing her arms around him. "It's so good to see you," Korra beamed as Tenzin hugged her back.

"How have you been, Korra? You look great," Tenzin commented. It was almost surreal seeing Korra on her two feet, moving freely and without struggle. The past two years must have been exhausting, but seeing Korra now moved his heart.

"I feel great too. Come, I want to show you how much better I'm doing." Korra grabbed Tenzin's hands and ran off excitedly.

It didn't take long for Korra to put on her firebending training gear, with the additional red robes, padding over her arms, and head protection. She grinned through the clear face visor as three firebenders made their way onto the patterned flooring. The Order of the White Lotus had a number of benders at the compound, meaning Korra had ample opportunity to retrain her bending forms.

Tenzin watched with Katara from the pavilion as the three firebenders readied themselves for Korra's attacks. With two punches and a kick, Korra shot forth several powerful bursts of flame. One was dodged, and the other two blocked by her opponents.

"Attack, I can take it," Korra ordered. She had been training hard for a while now.

With a quick glance between each other, the firebenders took it up a notch. One of them high kicked a jet, the other a quick set of fire punches, while the last crescent kicked an arc of flame.

Korra roundhouse kicked one of their attacks, dissipating the flames. The other two attacks were blocked when she punched forward her own fire. The middle firebender streamed an inferno her way, though Korra began parting the wall of fire with her arms sweeping to the sides.

She could see the form of a person as she cleared it, but on the other side, it wasn't the firebender who she was expecting. It was Zaheer. She was atop a cliff, with the Red Lotus terrorist sweeping over to her with a gust behind him. Korra closed her eyes and began punching, sending fire strikes haphazardly through the air. As she stumbled backwards, the firebenders launched another couple bursts before Tenzin stepped in.

"Alright, the sparring match is over," he held a hand out to stop them while also reaching down to Korra who had collapsed onto the ground.

Tenzin's voice brought Korra back to reality. When she reopened her eyes, she wasn't on that cliff. Zaheer wasn't in front of her. It was just her on the ground, failing at her firebending.

With Tenzin helping her up, Korra took off her headgear. "I thought I was ready," she spoke, her words filled with exasperation and frustration.

"There's no shame in taking the time you need to recover properly. Being the Avatar can wait," Tenzin tried to reassure Korra.

"But what about the Earth Kingdom? "I hear it's still a mess out there."

"The situation has been stabilising since Kuvira took charge. She's been appointed the Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom."

Korra cast her eyes downward, "But that should be me out there fixing things, not her."

"I know you want to help, but trust me, everyone has this under control. You just have to…" Tenzin didn't finish his sentence as he caught a fiery glare from Korra.

"If you say, 'be patient' then I swear I'm going to water-smack you in the mouth."

"Well, er, no... I meant," Tenzin fumbled over his words. "You just have to... not, worry over the future. You've made progress already and that is worth focusing on."

Huffing to herself, Korra threw her helmet into the ground while turning away. Even after all her previous training and recovery thus far, she found it hard to be patient.

Tenzin could sense how Korra was feeling. It had been two years, such a long time to be on this journey. But he had to try and get Korra to see how far she'd come. The airbending master cleared his throat, "Korra, you have already done so much for the world. You stopped Zaheer and the Red Lotus. You opened the spirit portals and connected humans to the spirits once again, also restoring the Air Nation in the process. And you can't forget how you helped save my family from Amon. But even as the Avatar, the burden of saving everyone shouldn't rest solely on your shoulders."

A deep sigh left Korra's lips. "I always knew what his responsibility was, and I never shied away from it," Korra turned around. "Ever since I found I could bend earth and fire as well as water, I knew what it meant; I was the Avatar. I grew up hearing stories of how Aang stopped the Fire Lord, how Roku had saved all those people on the volcano, how Kyoshi defeated Chin the conqueror. And I was ready for that responsibility even when I was a kid," she explained. "I know that I need to be out there helping the others bring balance to the world. It's what I'm meant to do, who I am meant to be. I just can't seem to be able to do it, even two years on."

Tenzin wished he had the words to comfort her. What could he possibly say that would help Korra lift her spirits? Her whole life she had grown up knowing who she was as the Avatar, and for Korra, it must feel like her whole identity had been stripped away. "Korra, I think you have done more in your time as Avatar than others have done in their entire lifetime. But it's you who needs to believe this. We already do." He paused while trying to connect with Korra, but her eyes remained downcast. "Have you made any progress in regaining the Avatar state?"

"No, I haven't been able to. I keep getting visions, like the ones I had just now."

"Hmmm," Tenzin mused. "My father once learnt a technique to help him unlock his Avatar state. My plan had been to teach you once you had mastered airbending, but it had seemed that after you connected with Aang you unlocked it without needing it. How about next time I'm in the South Pole I'll teach the technique to you?"

Korra looked up slowly, still frustrated and saddened. But if there was a chance that this technique could help her regain the Avatar state, then she had to at least try it. "Yeah, maybe that would be good."

Although Tenzin stayed for the next few days, Korra didn't train in front of him again. They still spent time together, though Tenzin tried to avoid conversations around the Earth Kingdom and the Allied Forces. Korra was still struggling with being out of action, so better that way. He'd also spent much time with his mother and promised to bring the grandkids next time. Katara beamed, waving her son goodbye as he sped away on his bison.

Korra had wanted to join Tenzin, flying back to the rest of the world and helping the Allied Forces. But how could she? Not after her failure with the firebenders a few days ago. Instead, Korra retired to her bedroom till the sun went down. It would be dinner soon anyway.

She sat at her desk, watching the distant glow vanish behind the mountains on the horizon. She remembered in her drawers the countless letters her friends had sent her. Asami, Mako, Bolin, Tenzin's kids, and even Lin Beifong had managed to write to her. Korra still hadn't figured out what exactly Bolin's crayon drawings were all about, but she appreciated them nonetheless. Hopefully one day she'd get to ask him.

Thinking of all her friends brought forth another wave of sorrow. Though this time, Korra didn't cry. Maybe her tear ducts were sick of that. But Korra still felt a deep grief at all the time she'd lost these past two years, simply re-learning how to do everything again like a newborn. Her friends seemed to be living their best years, off saving the world, or exploring new things. She didn't want to be jealous – and in fact she was glad that they were living their best lives – but she only wished that she could too.

Tenzin did say that he could teach her an exercise to help unlock the Avatar state. And as much as she wanted to be hopeful, there was still a sinking fear that this would once again turn out a failure. Was she being too hard on herself? Was the Avatar state such a big deal anyway? Korra didn't know. All she knew was that after so many failed attempts to regain what she'd lost, maybe this block in her recovery was something only she could figure out.

Later at the dinner table, Korra pushed her food around her plate. Her mother noticed her swirling the noodles with her chopsticks, yet not actually eating any. It was almost like a repeat of when Korra had just returned home and wasn't eating much. "Honey, is everything alright?" Senna beckoned.

Looking between both her parents, Korra shared her thoughts, "There's something I've been thinking. I think I want to go back to Republic City."

Tonraq and Senna exchanged glances. "Are you sure?" Her father asked.

"I know I'm not one hundred percent, but I feel like I've hit a wall," Korra explained. "Maybe it would be good for me to be where the real action is, where my friends are."

Her parents weren't so sure. They still had the memories etched in their minds of seeing their daughter chair-bound and broken. It was hard to believe, even after two years, that Korra was ready to go out again. "We just want you to get better," Senna replied.

"If you think it might help then we'll be okay with it," Tonraq answered. "Do you want us to come with you? We can prepare a boat with the White Lotus."

"No, thanks though. I think it might be good for me to sail alone. Clear my head."

They'd be lying if they said they weren't worried, but Tonraq and Senna could see Korra had made up her mind. They only prayed for her safety and hoped that maybe she would find a way to pull through.

In the morning, Korra grabbed the last of her belongings and loaded them onto a small catamaran canoe. The air was crisp and foggy, though once she got out of the arctic air it would be clearer.

Her father gave Korra a strong embrace, telling her how much he loved her. Senna's hug was tight as well, though she simply smiled through tearful eyes. Korra then looked over at her best friend. Naga could feel that she would be staying while Korra would be heading off, letting out a short anxious whine. She had wanted to take her polar bear dog with her, but she didn't exactly know where she'd end up. Naga would be more comfortable in the south pole anyway, though the more Korra thought about it the more it seemed like she was just making excuses so she could be alone. Either way, hugging her best friend goodbye was just about the hardest thing she could have done right now. "I won't be gone for long," she whispered. Naga whirred a sorrowful sound.

After pulling herself together, Korra set sail. She waved goodbye, watching her family until they disappeared behind the fog. She could still hear Naga's call, a sorrowful tone reverberating in her soul. Part of her felt like this whole thing was a mistake. Maybe she should've just waited for Tenzin to return and teach her this new technique? But Korra knew that there was no guarantee that he would return anytime soon. She could be waiting another two years before she felt ready to get back into the world. Even though her fears and longings tried to pull her back this very instant, Korra tried to hold on to the unknown ahead.

To her sides, several flying dolphins shot out of the water, riding the waves along the canoe. Korra's shock turned to amazement as she watched the graceful creatures dip and dive through the water. Perhaps it was a sign that this journey was the right choice. As Katara had said, what she would find at the end of this season was anyone's guess.

Maybe it would turn out alright.

One week later

The sail to the mainland had been smooth enough, with only one night of rain from the south pole to where she was now. Thankfully there was a tent in the middle of her craft for cover. Although the snow and cold had a familiar call to them, the warm beach here was a welcome sensation.

Korra made her way along the wooden dock, dodging a few broken planks. These islands were the first stop on her voyage to Republic City, where she could restock her supplies before continuing. At the end of the dock she noticed a fishmonger's stand, the vendor waving a fan over his tired face as he tried to keep cool. "Two lobster crabs please," Korra made her order.

She thought maybe the old man had completely missed what she said when he didn't respond immediately, though he quickly sprung into action once he recognised who she was, "Wait, you're the Avatar! Aren't you!"

"Yep, that's me," Korra replied. She had forgotten what it was like to get recognised all the time.

The man excitedly slammed his hands on the table and took to his feet. "Mind if I take a photo for my wall of Avatars?!" He pleaded. Turning back to the wall, he proudly showed off a photo of Aang spinning coins using an air ring in his hands.

Korra still found it hard to believe she'd been that silly in a previous life. Either way, she wasn't exactly too keen on getting her photo taken. She'd been hoping to slide her way back into action unnoticed, lest the world finds out that she can't even use her Avatar state at the moment. "Well, um, I'm kind of in a hurry-"

"It will only take a second!" He didn't seem to listen to Korra, instead turning back into his hut. "Avatar Aang was a big fan of my seaweed wraps y'know," the old man reminisced while chucking things out of the way to find his camera. A pair of parrot gulls flapped away from inside as he continued, "so I named them 'Aang Rolls'. Now they're my biggest seller, and they ain't even got fish in 'em!" He seemed so enthusiastic about meeting her, so maybe this wasn't so bad. "Now, smile!" He pulled his head under a camera cloth.

Something metal was reflecting light into Korra's eyes so she couldn't smile well, but she tried. The flash from the camera was nearly unbearable, but at least it seemed to have made his day.

"But if there ever was an Avatar I'd like to meet it would have to be Avatar Kyoshi," the man confessed. "Taking down a shark squid with one hand? Now that's a lady I'd like to 'get to know'."

"Thieves! Get back here!" an older woman cried out from behind them.

The pair spun around to see two men running with bags over their shoulders. The poor old lady could only watch as they sprinted away down the beach.

"Oh, don't worry, the Avatar is here!" The fish vendor called out. He could see that Korra still hadn't moved. "Well, what are you waiting for? Go get 'em!" he smiled confidently.

Korra only wished she had the same confidence. Nonetheless, this woman needed her help; it looked like the action found her before she'd even got to Republic City. Swirling her arms out, Korra rode a wave through the shallows and landed on the beach, directly ahead of the thieves. "Hand over the bags, or else."

The two robbers paused before sending earth flying her way. One of them flipped a hunk of earth from below the sand, the other shooting forth a sand wave. Korra dodged the wave but somehow stumbled into the path of the rock, taking it to the shoulder and crashing on her back. She tried to get up but everything was spinning and her breathing laboured. She could hear two sets of footsteps moving quickly down the beach. They were probably gone by now.

When Korra opened her eyes again she saw the old woman who had been robbed. "You sure she's the Avatar?" she quizzed the fish monger as he sprinted over as best as he could. Korra couldn't help but feel like this was her firebending demonstration all over again where she had failed in front of Tenzin. Only this time, now a woman was left with her things stolen.

Korra didn't stay much longer in the settlement. She did help the lady contact law enforcement, thinking it was better they handle the thieves rather than herself. Maybe she'd jumped into action too early. It would still be some time until she reached Republic City, and maybe then things would just 'click'.

After another couple weeks, Korra had finally found herself on the edges of Yue bay. Just like her home in the south pole, this city too held a special place in her being. She could make out the city lights ahead, dancing on the horizon. And through the mist, the spire on Air Temple Island was coming into view.

Korra breathed in the air. The warmer breeze picked up her hair and ruffled her fur clothes. There was something on one of the rocks up ahead. A figure, though Korra couldn't quite make out who it was. It looked human, though had a creepy aura to it that didn't sit well in Korra's stomach. Was it a spirit?

After a few more metres Korra could start to see that it was a woman, wearing a blue singlet top and baggy pants. Korra gasped as she realised that it was her. Whatever this thing was, it resembled her appearance during her fight with Zaheer. Frozen in place, Korra felt her heart thumping against her chest. The expression this 'Korra' had on its face was so stern, so confronting, so unsettling, yet it also had big, glowing, empty eyes. She had no idea what was going on, only that she wasn't ready to find out.

After turning the sail of her craft, she sped back out of the bay. Never had she felt something like this, almost like an out-of-body moment where she was both herself and that apparition at the same time. Thankfully, the mist covered Air Temple Island completely, and Korra sailed back into the seas.

It took the rest of the night to sail up the river. The lush jungles along the banks were rather quiet, with the occasional call of an animal or rustle of the trees in the wind. Better that she was alone, Korra thought.

She'd bought some new Earth Kingdom-green clothes; a singlet top, three-quarter dark emerald pants with matching shoes, and a lighter green compression tape wrapped around her arms. She tossed her blue and white armband into the water. Apparently none of the stores had wanted to buy it, though she'd managed to sell the rest of her Water Tribe attire to a second-hand store. Nothing about her at all looked Water Tribe, save for her deep blue eyes that stared blankly into the green waters as her armband floated away.

There was still one more thing to do. With one hand, Korra bundled up her hair and with the other, picked up a knife. She paused, ready to cut away her long hair and let it go into the water. There was no need for long hair when her hair ties had been sold or thrown away, was there?

But it was more than that. This shedding of her Water Tribe look wasn't just about blending in, but also letting go. Korra knew that she was barely an Avatar now. She'd lost her connection to her past lives long ago, she couldn't sense Raava anymore, and she couldn't even go into the Avatar state. She could still bend the four elements, but look at what good that had done? She couldn't even stop the thieves back at the beach settlement.

She finally cut through her hair, watching the clumps fall into the stream with despondent eyes. She couldn't have people recognise her as the Avatar when she didn't even feel she was anymore. The world had found their saviour. She'd heard about Kuvira, how she had brought stability to much of the Earth Kingdom. She'd heard about the Air Nation and how they were helping the villages after the barbarians had been driven out. The world had moved on.

Of course Korra wanted to find out what was wrong with her, and why she couldn't connect to Raava anymore. But until then, she didn't want people thinking she was the Avatar.

Because right now she wasn't the Avatar; she was just Korra. Korra alone.

Chapter Text

Present day

A bruise was swelling under her eye. Gashes on the other side of her face. Korra had wanted to think that it was the cracked and dirty bathroom mirror that made her look different, but the pain in her face indicated otherwise. She was getting used to her new look though, in forest green and emerald clothes and with shorter hair. But maybe it wasn't enough, given that the man before at the fight club had recognised her.

Korra pulled a glowing stream of water from the basin, giving her arm another round of healing. The bone wasn't fractured but it would still take time to feel completely better.

"Hurry up in there!" a loud thump at the door interrupted her thoughts. "C'mon, I got an emergency situation!"

Grunting to herself, Korra streamed her water back and walked outside. "Knock yourself out," she replied sarcastically to the man jiggling around by the door. He hurried inside and let out a sigh as he relieved himself.

The lights of a satomobile came from the side, their horn blaring as Korra looked up. She had walked onto the road without thinking. She quickly ducked to the other side, and the driver swerved and managed to stop their vehicle. Korra sent an apologetic wave their way and turned the other direction.

Although her head still throbbed after her fight in the arena, she could sense an eerie presence in the alley ahead. In the dark space stood a familiar figure, this spirit or ghost – Korra hadn't figured out which – that resembled her. The one she'd seen in Republic City.

"You again," Korra threatened. She'd had enough of this. She'd just gone into the Earth Rumble arena while following this apparition, and after getting beaten up for several minutes she was still seeing it appear.

The ghost seemed to pick up on Korra's emotions. It looked up, and for the first time, actually moved. Korra could see that on its arm was a wound-up chain. But not any metal chain; Korra's eyes widened with panic as she realised it was the same platinum restraint that had been used on her when captured by the Red Lotus, as if it were taunting her by reminding her of that day. The ghost flicked the chain out around Korra's ankle and pulled, tripping Korra onto the ground. Still stunned at what she was seeing, Korra couldn't react in time as the ghost wrapped the chain around her forearm.

It couldn't be real. Or could it be a spirit? Korra had asked herself many times while travelling and seeing this thing appear. Whatever it was, Korra was sick of trying to escape it only to find it reappearing all along her journey. It had to be something in her head. "Leave me alone!" Korra cried out as flames shot from her fist. They disappeared in the night air, and so too did the ghost.

By this stage, a small crowd had gathered around her. One of them was the satomobile driver she'd run in front of, though she seemed more concerned than angry, especially after seeing Korra falling to the ground and firebending at nothing.

"Young lady, are you alright? Can I call a doctor?" an older woman offered
.
"No, I'm just tired. But thank you," Korra brushed it aside while quickly walking off. She didn't want to attract anymore unwanted attention.

Thankfully the next few streets were empty. It was getting late after all. And more importantly, it seemed the ghost had stopped following her for now.

Korra flipped through her yuans from the match, counting roughly how much she had earned. It wasn't a great amount of money but would at least keep her going for a bit. Perhaps some food was just what she needed.

Korra followed the street back to the inner town, though stopped when she noticed a post box to the side. Normally a post box wouldn't attract her attention, though for some reason this one brought back memories. She had sent a couple letters a while ago to her parents and Asami, in a box just like this one in a different city...

Nine months ago

It felt like she'd spent an eternity here, standing motionless, still clutching the two letters in her hands. It had actually only been a minute or so, but her hesitancy slowed time to a crawl.

Did her letters make sense? Had she said everything she'd wanted to? Korra kept rethinking everything. She'd only written to Asami out of her friend group. Not that she didn't want to write to Mako and Bolin, but for some reason, writing to Asami just felt easier. And as far as her parents were concerned, she was in Republic City. She didn't want to worry them and say she was off travelling the world, but she still felt guilty for lying to them. She hoped that maybe something would click into place inside of her, then she could go back and see them soon anyway. At least she tried to hope, though it seemed dimmer and dimmer each day.

Finally, Korra pushed the letters through the slot. It would take some time before they received the letters but for now, she had a long sail ahead of her to the Northern Water Tribe.

Over the next month, Korra sailed through the mainland route up the river and through the inland lakes. She didn't want to even sail past Republic City in case someone saw her, or that apparition appeared again. The voyage had been interesting though, passing through mostly untouched wilderness and the occasional village along the river. The greens and browns of her scenery eventually turned into greys and whites of the rocks and mountains either side, and after a few weeks, she was back on the open ocean in the north.

Korra didn't know if her idea would work, but she had nothing else to try. If this ghost was some kind of spirit or a hallucination she was seeing, then perhaps mediating in the Tree of Time would help her refocus her spiritual self. During Harmonic Convergence it had certainly helped.

Eventually, Korra made it to the Northern Water Tribe. After leaving her canoe, she trekked through the snow towards the spirit portal, thankfully having bought a thicker coat to get through the cold. Even in this heavy weather, the light from the portal still shone brightly into the sky.

After a few more steps and passing through the portal, Korra had arrived in the Spirit World. Normally she would feel something inside, a sensation hard to put into words, almost like a voice in her soul that would speak up when she entered the Spirit World. She didn't feel it this time.

A whale spirit drifted overhead, and many smaller beings floated in the space around the tree. Korra looked up at the leafless tree, its opening like an empty eye. It was worth a shot. Korra sat cross-legged inside the hollowed trunk of the tree, pressing her fists together above her lap. She focused on her breaths, closing out everything else. It was hard to tell how long she'd been there for, but her presence was noticed.

Before long, a small and yellow bean-shaped spirit peered into the tree. It turned back to its companions and smiled. "Everyone, come look! It's the Avatar." A number of smaller spirits also joined it, some walking or crawling along the roots and others bobbing through the air.

"Are you sure? "I don't sense any of Raava's light in her," a crawling amphibian spirit questioned. "Besides, she isn't dressed like the Avatar. And doesn't the Avatar have ponytails?"

Korra scrunched her face as she lost focus. "Do you mind? I'm trying to concentrate. And yes, I am the Avatar. I just cut my hair and I'm wearing different clothes." It wasn't much point trying to hide her identity from the spirits anyway.

"See! I told you guys it was her," the little light spirit led the others over to Korra. It had two green leaves on the sides of its head that flopped about as it excitedly ran over. "How come you've been away for so long?"

"I was hurt pretty bad a while ago, and I lost touch with my Avatar spirit."

"No wonder I couldn't feel Raava's presence," the amphibian spirit realised.

Korra explained further, "I came to the Tree of Time hoping I could reconnect with Raava, but it's not working. The last time I was here I saw all sorts of visions, but now, I see nothing," she concluded solemnly. During Harmonic Convergence, a time where all the planets aligned every ten thousand years, Korra had sat in this very tree. She'd seen flashes of her past, even some moments that she had forgotten. But as she looked around the sides of the hollow, no such visions were there.

"Maybe we can help you get better?" the light spirit offered, now sitting in Korra's lap.

It was always the same. People had solutions, they had ideas and remedies to try. But no matter how hard Korra did try, there was always something in the way. She knew she had made so much progress, and it had been a long journey indeed. But the more she tried to reach out and grab onto her previous life she had lost, the more it seemed to elude her.

"I'm sorry, but for years people have been saying they can help me get better. Nothing's worked," she told the light spirit as she picked it up and placed it to the side. Korra stood up and walked over to the entrance, "I need to figure this out on my own."

She didn't turn back to the spirits, nor spend anymore time in the Spirit World. This was yet again, another dead end.

Without having anywhere else to go, Korra spent the next few months simply wandering through the world. She knew that something was missing inside of her, something that was imbalanced and disordered. She searched through the Fire Nation volcanic fields, climbed mountains in the archipelagos, even went back to the spirit-forsaken desert where she and Asami were nearly eaten by a sand shark. And every time she thought she'd found something, found Raava, just as quickly the sensation would be snatched out of her grasp.

Deep down, Korra thought that maybe the thing she was missing was with her all along, but the only thing that followed her was this apparition glaring at her with its empty glowing eyes. She didn't know what she was looking for, but only that whatever it was, she couldn't find it.

Present day

It was starting to get colder as the night crept through the later hours, though with her throbbing wounds Korra almost appreciated it. Up ahead, Korra could see a red-tiled shop with the lights still on, and there were a few people walking in as she approached. Seemed like they were still open even at this hour.

Before entering, Korra noticed a portrait graffitied next to the door. It was a depiction of a stern-looking woman, standing tall and proud with her hands behind her back. The words along the side read, "There is Hope in Unity," and the caption below read "Great Uniter". It was obvious that this wasn't an official piece of artwork given its hastily painted look, but nonetheless it seemed that Kuvira had supporters this far south of Ba Sing Se. She was from Zaofu, so maybe the south resonated with her ideals more? Either way, Korra couldn't stare at the picture much longer. After all, it was a bleak reminder of her own failings as the Avatar.

Korra opened the doors to the establishment. There were a few patrons perched on bar stools near the front, though most of the tables were empty. The room had a few Fire Nation-esque ornaments and colours, but the overall structure and design of the building felt more Southern Earth Kingdom. The smell of intense spices and meats wafted from the kitchen doors up ahead, though at this point Korra wasn't too concerned what she was going to eat just that she had food.

A lively older man approached Korra as she stood in the doorway. "Welcome to the Emerald Dragon! Table for one?"

"Yeah, thanks. I'll just order some Komodo Rhino donburi," Korra replied. She wasn't sure if the 'Emerald Dragon' was a nod to the mix of Fire Nation and Earth Kingdom influences, but either way the locals seemed to enjoy it.

"Certainly," the man replied. "Feel free to sit anywhere and I'll have your order ready in a jiffy."

Korra nodded, finding a place at a table near the side. There was a radio across on the other side of the room, and she could still hear the distant notes of a song playing.

A loud slam came from behind, and Korra spun around to see three men march inside. "Tsutomu! Old man!" one of them cried out. "Get out here!"

The old man from before scurried out of the kitchen. He seemed a little shaken by the outburst, but almost as if he'd experienced this several times. "Y-Yes, how may I help?"

The first man stepped forward, "You're from the Fire Nation, right?" Tsutomu nodded, "Then why are you on Earth Kingdom soil? This is the Southern Earth Kingdom, right?"

"Of course," Tsutomu nodded shakily. "But I moved here nearly thirty years ago. I've been a part of this community, wanting to share my cooking with-"

"And who said we wanted your cooking?" another stepped forward. "Who said we wanted anything from the Fire Nation? The ones who nearly burnt our continent to the ground?"

"I mean, I've normally had pretty good reviews so-"

Korra stood up abruptly, eyeing the nearest thug up, "I think it's time to leave."

The man barely turned to acknowledge Korra at first, but when he did, he looked her up and down and then intently in her eyes. "Hmm, looks like you're not from here either, with those ocean blue eyes of yours." He scoffed, "Though I can hardly see them with them bruises all over your face. Lost in the arena I take it?"

His words stung as badly as her wounds. Korra doubled down, "It doesn't matter. You shouldn't be harassing people like this."

Grumbling loudly, the man slammed a fist against Korra's table, "And who are you to tell us otherwise?!"

"If... if you like, you can try some of my cooking for free? That way you can make up your own minds about whether you like it or not?"

"Fine. We'll see," the man turned back to Tsutomu.

The old man shook his head at Korra, letting her know that it was okay. Korra didn't want to let these men threaten the restaurant owner, but in her state what could she even do?

After a few minutes, Tsutomu emerged from the kitchen with three piping-hot bowls of spicy udon. "There, I even added extra Komodo chicken. Let me know what you think." He hid behind a polite smile, but Korra knew that none of this was right.

Thankfully, Tsutomu's cooking was that good. "It's alright. You can stay... for now," one of the men commented. They didn't bother sitting down, taking the food and utensils back outside. The old man looked relieved once they left.

"You shouldn't let them bully you," Korra explained. "I can go get the authorities if you'd like?"

Tsutomu shook his head, "Nah, it's alright. I appreciate it though."

"How often does this happen?"

"People are just a bit excited over all the 'Great Uniter' stuff. Kuvira came back through our town a few months ago. Some of the Earth Kingdom people tend to get a bit defensive and wary of outsiders. Can't blame them though considering the Hundred Year War and everything."

"Well, let me know if there's anything I can do," Korra offered. There wasn't much she thought she could do, but at least she would try.

The old man paused for a bit, "Actually if you don't mind, it would be nice to eat with someone again. I don't have much company these days. Except for patrons of course."

A part of Korra regretted asking; she didn't want anyone to recognise her as the Avatar. But then again, the old man did seem a little blind so perhaps he wouldn't notice. "Sure."

Tsutomu went back to the kitchen and prepared Korra's meal and a bowl of udon for himself. The next ten minutes or so were filled with stories and ramblings from the old man. Although Korra didn't have much to say in between, it was kind of nice to hear his tales. He also got so caught up in his own stories that Korra was able to zone out and ignore him for a lot of it too. Either way, he seemed a lot happier having company, so that was something.

"Well, that's my life story," Tsutomu joked. "So, what about you?"

Korra was snapped back to reality. She'd zoned out for a bit. "I... I just entered Earth Rumble."

"I could tell from all the cuts and bruises. Should really see a healer. Being so close to the venue we get a lot of contestants coming here, either to celebrate or commiserate," Tsutomu paused, pondering what he had just said. "To celebrate or commiserate... maybe that should be my restaurant's slogan."

"So why do people get so inspired by Kuvira?" Korra changed the subject. Come to think of it, the men she'd seen come into the store earlier had all adopted dark green clothing and pieces of silver metal.

"I mean, she's pretty different to what we've had so far in the Earth Kingdom; that old hippo cow Hou-Ting, the creepy Dai Li," Tsutomu explained. "Not only that, but I guess many people in the Earth Kingdom feel like they've lost a sense of their national identity. Kuvira seems to be giving the Earth Kingdom their identity and sense of purpose back, spouting off stuff about becoming great and all that. Shouldn't complain though; her forces really have saved us from the bandits and barbarian clans."

"It sounds like she's in the running to become the new leader of the Earth Kingdom?" Korra mused, a little bitter in her words.

Tsutomu waved his hand, "She'd be alright with the younger ones, but there's no way the older and wealthy people would get behind her. Their kind are pretty set and stubborn in their ways, clinging to the tradition of the monarchy. Maybe if Kuvira was a noble or daughter of someone important, but rumour has it she was an orphan given in to Zaofu." The old man got up from the table, "Anyways, it's late so I shouldn't hold you up any longer."

"Thank you for the food," Korra stood as well, reaching for her money.

"Oh no need for that," Tsutomu responded, "Listening to an old geezer for twenty minutes is payment enough."

Korra smirked. A part of her actually agreed with his statement. She offered again nonetheless though Tsutomu shook his head. "Well, I hope things improve for your store," Korra mentioned.

"It can't be helped, but I'll be alright. It's better here in the Earth Kingdom. Despite what people say, Republic City is still an economic mess after the spirit vines, and there's no way I'm heading back to the Fire Nation with recent events."

"What do you mean?" Korra had collected her things but stopped to hear his answer.

"You haven't heard? The attacks along the islands?" When Korra shook her head Tsutomu continued, "There's been all these incidents by groups claiming to be the Red Lotus."

Korra's eyes widened. She'd heard nothing about this. "What? Is... is it really them?"

"Ah, who knows. Probably not. I mean, the Avatar did stop them a few years ago right?"

It was nice that this man still believed in the Avatar's ability. But Korra couldn't be sure of anything anymore. Her expression downcast, she replied, "I suppose I don't have a lot of faith in the Avatar anymore."

"That's a shame," Tsutomu responded. "But whatever happened to the Avatar anyway?" he became lost in his thoughts again, staring out through the windows.

"Thanks again for the meal," Korra quickly turned and waved. She heard the old man bid farewell too as she stepped outside into the night air. Before leaving, Korra took one last glance at the Kuvira drawing next to the door. She managed to smile, but only one filled with solemness.

The streets had begun to fill with fog, creating an eerie atmosphere as Korra continued. She'd been sleeping in earth huts for a while now, not wanting to spend much money on accommodation. It was easier camping when you could bend all four elements.

As Korra made her way to the outskirts of the city again, she couldn't help but feel like she was followed. A shadowy presence seemed to linger around every corner. The village was close to the Foggy Swamp, and it was said that it was a highly spiritual but eerie place.

Korra turned back in front of her, seeing a small bundle of white fur. It was only a puppy. It barked happily at Korra, who couldn't resist reaching down and petting the creature. "Where did you come from you little cutie?" It almost looked like a smaller version of Naga, though it was missing its larger front paws.

The puppy wasn't the only visitor though; Korra saw her ghost once again materialise in front of her up the steps. This was getting on her nerves. Korra cried out while facing the apparition, "I did what you wanted! I entered the Earth Rumble tournament after seeing you there, and all that happened was I got beaten to a pulp! Just tell me what you want!"

She thought maybe her outburst would have scared the little puppy, but amazingly, it didn't run away. Instead, it growled angrily straight ahead. "You... you can see it too?" Korra stammered, realising that this small animal could see whatever it was in front of her. "Then maybe I'm not crazy."

The dog barked another few times, and then ran up to meet the ghost. It continued to growl, though stared into its glowing eyes. It was strange, almost as if the puppy were trying to decipher what this ghost wanted. It barked again, and the apparition disappeared once more.

Korra didn't know how to react. This thing had been reappearing all over the globe everywhere she went. And when she did try to confront it, all it did was attack her. No one else so far had even noticed its presence, but now, a puppy of all things not only noticed it, but also managed to scare it away with nothing but a bark. "How... how did you do that?"

The puppy didn't answer, barking at Korra again.

"You want me to follow you?" It barked a third time. Sighing quietly, Korra complied. Following a puppy who could see a ghost that had been haunting her for the past few years was not the strangest thing she'd done, in fact. "Okay, let's see what I find."

The pair ran through the rest of the town, with the puppy taking the lead and not slowing. Korra wished they'd be travelling a little slower given her injuries, but something inside her kept calling and telling her to keep pace. This was the first time in a while something had finally begun to make sense. Not that she knew who or what this apparition was, but the fact that this puppy could even see it was proof that Korra was getting somewhere.

The night skies eventually turned into the oranges and pinks of early morning. Korra kept running, and though her tired legs wanted to collapse at any minute she held on. After a while longer, Korra climbed the top of the next hill and saw just where they were heading. Before her was an endless expanse of jungle. Vines snaked around the trees, and their roots submerged in a greenish water. It was the Foggy Swamp.

"Why did you bring me to the swamp?" Korra enquired, but the puppy had already run down the hill.

Sliding down the other side of the hill, Korra ran the final stretch to the tree line where she saw the puppy start to glow. After jumping over a log, the bundle of light shone and transformed into a bean-shaped spirit with two leaves on its head.

"Wait, I know you... you were at the Tree of Time!" Korra recognised. "You should have told me who you were."

"If I did, would you have followed me?"

The spirit did have a point. Back in the Tree of Time, this spirit had offered help and Korra still turned away. Perhaps disguising as an animal was the only way to finally get her attention. "Good point," Korra conceded.

She took in her surroundings again, now under the shade of the massive grove trees. There were choruses of insect chirpings, the occasional bird screech, and an eerie sense of being watched. Korra had never been to the Foggy Swamp before, and it wasn't exactly her first choice of travel destination. "But why are we here?"

"The ghost that's been haunting you was also trying to show you something."

That would explain what happened before when the light spirit had approached this ghost; it must have learnt what it was trying to show her. "It wanted me to go to the Earth Rumble competition. But... what will I find ''here''? In the swamp?"

"Not a what, but a ''who''." The light spirit flapped its head leaves, flying high into the air ahead of them.

"Wait!' Korra hated the thought of more running, but she had to push on.

She sprinted over the roots and through the mud, but her path led her into thick vines hanging from the trees. Korra grunted as she pushed them aside, though she didn't see the ground beneath her drop into a shallow pool. The water sloshed as Korra fell in, and she managed to land on her feet.

But as she looked up, she couldn't see the light spirit. Instead, the apparition reappeared, standing only a few metres away, glaring down at her with those same glowing, empty eyes.

Stepping back with a panicked expression, Korra felt the fear seep through her veins again. "Why... why are you fighting me?" she whispered. But it was no use. The apparition pulled its arms together and burst forth an inferno.

Korra was shot back through the vines, tumbling backwards in the mud. She eventually smacked into a tree and then landed in a puddle. Her head was fuzzy and vision blurred, but she saw the creature emerge from the vines. It was relentless. Korra sent several water streams at the ghost, but it phased through the air and evaded each attack. It then punched a fire ball, hosed a stream of water, and flipped a chunk of mud towards her. Korra cartwheeled away from each attack, except for the mud rock that knocked her over another ledge.

After tumbling into a gully, Korra dodged a fire kick as the ghost leapt in after her. How could this ghost even bend? Was it even a ghost? Korra had no more time to think about it as a water hose shoved her into the ground. She only lay in the mud for a moment before jumping up again.

This wasn't going well. Korra knew that she was losing against whatever this thing was. Up ahead, she noticed a rather tall tree. Perhaps escape was best for now. Korra spun around and threw a hunk of earth. It missed but bought her enough time to leap onto one of the branches, using a whirlwind of air to help push her higher. The ghost wasn't following, and Korra continued up the tree. Though a moment later, Korra heard a whipping sound striking the earth. She glanced back only for a second, and saw the apparition fling a chain forwards. Although Korra leapt away, she wasn't fast enough as the chain wrapped around her ankle.

Down below, the ghost seemed to melt into a pool of liquid metal. This couldn't be happening, Korra thought. Not metal! Not the poison that broke her body and spirit! Korra gripped tightly to the branch, but with her ankle snagged she couldn't hold on for long. The moment she let go Korra gripped a vine along the branch, though it eventually snapped, and the air rushed from underneath her as she fell. She cried out upon landing on her back, with the impact knocking her breath out of her. Strands of silver slithered over her, trying to submerge her into the pool underneath.

"Help! Please..." Korra begged, all while panic squeezed her chest as she lost control of her breathing. Her vision went black, and her struggling ceased.

The ringing was the first thing Korra noticed. A high-pitched tone in her ears that seemed intent on splitting her head in two. But at least it meant she was alive, Korra thought.

As her eyes opened, Korra saw a circle of dark blue sky through a natural opening in this tree hollow. It was nearly dusk, judging from the hue. Her body hurt all over, but it was resting on a thatched bed. Someone had obviously found her, but who? Korra couldn't contain her groans as she moved into a sitting position.

"Feeling better?" a voice from the other side of the hollow asked.

Korra turned to see a faint outline of woman stirring a pot over a fire. Her hair was light and hung behind her shoulders. "Where am I? What... happened?" Korra managed to string the words together but her head throbbed intensely.

"I was hoping you could tell me. I found you passed out in the mud."

"How did you know where to find me?"

The old woman smiled, "I'm pretty tapped in to the goings-on around here. What brings you to the swamp?"

There was something about this woman that seemed... familiar. Though Korra couldn't put her finger on it. Either way, Korra wanted to figure out what was going on. "A spirit led me here and told me I needed to find someone. Is... that you?"

"Beats me," she replied. Not the answer that Korra was hoping for, though the old woman wasn't finished, "but if your Avatar senses told you to come here then you should probably listen."

That caught Korra's attention. "Wait, you recognise me?" The dizziness had passed and she stood up.

"In a manner of speaking, yes," the woman replied. "We were good friends in your previous life."

The hollow was so dark that Korra could barely see the woman's figure. She lit a flame in her hand and held it out, revealing the woman's form as she turned around. Korra gasped. It all made sense! The ghost leading her to Earth Rumble XI, it was trying to lead her here. "I can't believe it... Toph?"

The woman chuckled warmly, "Nice to see you, Twinkle-Toes."

Chapter Text

The inside of the Police Department had become a scorpion bee hive; everyone dipped and ducked around each other while carrying paperwork, there was chatter in every room as officers took calls and put out bulletins, and the main meeting room had a constant flow of people in and out. Everyone was on edge. The summit dinner was cancelled early and the prince whisked away by security. Although they hadn't found any evidence of the 'Red Lotus' here in Republic City, they had to keep him safe nonetheless. The real question on everyone's minds was, where did Korra end up if not in Republic City?

Bringing with him a quick gust of air, Tenzin entered the room, "I've been in touch with the Air Nation all over the world. None of them have seen Avatar Korra, but they're out looking for her now."

Mako slammed a fist into the table, grunting angrily. Normally he wouldn't display such an outburst in front of his superiors or the president, but given it was Korra who was missing he wasn't exactly acting like himself. "There must be something we missed back at the dam," Mako blurted out. His mind raced as he went over every detail from his reports.

"What about the shirshu trackers?" Ilah suggested, trying to keep Mako's attention on the present crisis.

Mako shook his head, "Keep the one heading to the Fire Nation; it will help you guys figure out if it really is the Red Lotus in your nation, and if they have anything to do with Korra disappearing too. Hanbao is working with his shirshu so they should be ready in a week or so." They also didn't have anything with Korra's scent, at least nothing she had recently interacted with.

Tonraq sat at the map table, head in his hands. He looked up as Tenzin made his way over, who placed a hand on his shoulder, "We'll find her."

The Water Tribe Chief tried to smile. "I called Senna before; she and Kya are beginning a search back home and across the seas," he mentioned. His gaze was downcast, with fears and worries gnawing at the back of his mind.

So far, no one had any idea where Korra had gone when she left the Southern Water Tribe. Most of the search in the past few hours had involved coordinating efforts along the route to Republic City, with General Iroh leading the search since his ship was already at sea. They'd also made contact with the communities living in the Patola Mountains and the southern archipelago in case she'd been stranded there. If something else had happened, then it would be harder to narrow down the search area.

The doors opened again, with Kuvira leading a small group inside. She'd been the only one so far to change back into her uniform, with everyone else in the room still in their formalwear. "I'm sorry I wasn't here earlier. We've made contact with our people across the coast. If the Avatar showed up anywhere there, we'll hear about it."

"Thank you," Tonraq managed to force a smile Kuvira's way. She'd already saved his life once during the fight at Laghima's peak, and now she was doing all she could to help find his daughter.

Bolin made his way over to Asami in the corner, exchanging a sympathetic but anxious half-smile. She managed to return the gesture. Tonight was supposed to be when the four of them were finally reunited after so many years, yet it had all turned to disaster.

"If there's anything else we can do, please don't hesitate to ask," Kuvira offered the others.

"We've decided to house Prince Wu at the Fire Nation Embassy," Fire Lord Izumi began. "We brought only a small security detail with us, but the Yuyan and guards we have are quite capable."

Kuvira nodded, not wanting to admit that she hadn't even considered the prince's whereabouts at this point. Not because she wished him misfortune, but simply because there were more important matters. "Well, I hate to be proactive at a time like this, but I might turn in for the evening. We can start the summit tomorrow morning an hour later than scheduled."

Tonraq exchanged glances with Tenzin, "Kuvira, I... I know that the mission to Ba Sing Se is important. But I don't think I can lead the Water Tribes at a time like this. I think all of us are too worried about Korra."

There was a pause in the air before Kuvira answered, "I understand Chief Tonraq. And as I mentioned, we will be vigilant for any news on your daughter's whereabouts."

"Unfortunately, the Air Nation will have to pull out as well," Tenzin began. "There will still be those close enough to Ba Sing Se to help, but we thought it would be better for the other airbenders to stay where they are in case they find Korra."

"I'm afraid the Fire Nation will not be able to commit to the mission either," Izumi joined in. "To be perfectly honest I was hesitant about sending our forces into the Earth Kingdom, given our nation's history. But we will fulfil our duties by protecting the prince. I feel that our efforts would be best spent on investigating these Red Lotus claims. The timing of the attacks in our homeland and the Avatar's disappearance is quite troubling indeed."

There was definitely a shift in Kuvira's composure upon hearing their words. A deep frustration, though it manifested ever so slightly in her creased brows. She wouldn't lose her cool in front of them. "I understand that the Avatar's disappearance is incredibly troubling, especially since many of you know Avatar Korra personally. I don't want to sound insensitive, but I would like to remind everyone that this mission to Ba Sing Se is a pressing matter."

"We brought a lot of supplies which your forces are welcome to," Izumi added.

Raiko stood up abruptly, "Hold on for a minute; I happen to agree with Kuvira here. I know that Avatar Korra has done much for the world and we still have to search for her, but the Earth Kingdom is still in disarray and needs us. If we could send the United Forces in full then I would, but currently the bulk of our forces are out searching."

"And we'll need all of them sir," Lin Beifong replied. "I'm afraid there's a lot of ground to cover on the route from the South Pole to here in Republic City. And if we don't find Korra there, we'll need to cover even more ground across the world."

"Of course I understand, but is there no one we can spare for Ba Sing Se?" Raiko replied. It was rare that he and Kuvira would be the only ones on the same page about anything, even if their reasons weren't aligned. "We've all seen and heard the reports of what Qiang and his barbarians are up to. There are innocent civilians being kept inside, and Kuvira's own soldiers who were taken hostage and never seen again. Their clans have been held up in the great city for nearly three years now. The Earth Kingdom needs unity again. They need Prince Wu on the throne as soon as possible."

There was a long awkward pause. No one really knew what to say. On the one hand, everyone could sympathise with Ba Sing Se and everything that was happening there. But Korra wasn't just the Avatar; she was a dear friend to many in the room. Not only that, but those investigating the attacks in the Fire Nation couldn't help but worry that somehow Korra's disappearance was linked to their crisis.

Eventually, Lin cleared the air, "I can send more of our officers further out in the search. Maybe it will ease the burden for General Iroh and his troops."

"I'll contact him and ask if there's anyone he can spare," Raiko replied after a long sigh. It wasn't much, but it was a start.

When a further silence ensued, Kuvira decided it was time to leave, "As I mentioned, we'll start the summit an hour early tomorrow. I understand things are stressful right now, but I hope you will change your mind." She gave a quick nod and left, and her soldiers following her out.

It was only once she had left the room where Kuvira's cold but polite expression faded into a far more resentful look. She marched quickly out the Police Department and onto the streets.

They must know that the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces couldn't take back Ba Sing Se alone? Why would they expect her to charge in with no support from the other nations? Did they expect her to put the mission on hold and go look for the Avatar instead? All their hard work and sacrifices over the past three years would count for nothing if they didn't take back Ba Sing Se soon. All because the Avatar, who had been out of action and contributed nothing to the world for the past three years, was missing. Kuvira nearly laughed cynically as she left the building, if she weren't so frustrated. She should have expected this; unless you were a king, a Beifong, or the Avatar, you were nobody in the world's eyes.

Kuvira stopped herself from going down that train of thought. Maybe she was being too harsh, or she was still frustrated by what had just happened? Perhaps the leaders would change their minds by tomorrow? It seemed unlikely, but all she could do was wait.

The air was peaceful and still as Korra woke; there were chirps and insect chatters, and the distant sounds of squirrel frog croaks and other animals. Being in the Foggy Swamp surrounded by nature had a primordial feel to it indeed. Toph had provided a meal and shelter, for which Korra was grateful, though she hadn't mentioned anything about what to do next. If the light spirit led her to Toph then there had to be a reason. Korra could hear the shuffling of footsteps in the next room.

After rising to her feet and stretching her body, which still ached from yesterday, Korra made her way over to Toph. The earthbender had sat down on a raised mound of earth, sipping on a warm herbal drink. She didn't turn her head when Korra approached, which was something Korra was still getting used to. "Morning. Thanks again for letting me stay."

Toph finished the last of her cup, "Ah it's alright, I guess. I don't tend to have many visitors."

Her words made Korra think back to when she first visited Zaofu. Their guide Aiwei had explained to them that Toph had just disappeared one day in 'search of enlightenment.' She wanted to find out why she hadn't been back though figured it may be too soon to ask. There were other things Korra wanted to know anyway. "So um, do you know what I should do next?"

"Why would I know?" Toph replied slightly grumpier. "Doesn't the Avatar have past lives or something?"

"Well..." Korra didn't feel like going into detail. "It's just that the light spirit that brought me here told me I had to find someone. I assumed it was you and that you'd know something about how I can regain my Avatar State?"

"I'm not an Avatar, why would I know about that?"

Although she was an incredible master and respected bender, Korra had half the mind to send a gust into the old woman. Why was she so grumpy? Then again, Lin was her daughter. Perhaps a different approach would work? She was an earthbender after all. "Look, I didn't work through months and months of exercises with Katara to relearn how to walk again, travel to the Spirit World to try and regain my connection, get beaten up in an earthbending tournament, and chase a spirit all the way here, just so you could tell me you can't help me."

Toph snorted, "I never said I couldn't help you. I just don't know anything about the Avatar State!"

Working with Toph was like trying to push a stubborn mountain an inch. Korra sighed loudly, "Look, I just want to get better again. There has to be something I can learn from you? The world hasn't had an Avatar for three years. It needs me."

"'It ''needs'' you? Really? That's what people said about me as Chief of Police and now we're both in the same swamp and the world is ticking along just fine." Toph replied.

"Wait, so are you saying that basically all I've done as the Avatar has been for nothing? That the world never needed me to begin with?"

Toph got up to pour herself another cup of brew, "Listen, when I was Chief of Republic City Police, I worked my butt off busting criminals. But did that stop crime? Nope. If there's one thing I've learned it's that the names change, but the street stays the same."

"Not exactly an inspiring talk," Korra muttered. "So are you not going to help me at all?"

"Well, I was planning on soaking my feet for a few weeks in a mud bath. But if it really was a spirit that led you here then I suppose we should both listen to it." Toph sighed, "Alright, I'll help."

Finally, Korra thought. It was like getting blood out of a stone, but it seemed she was getting somewhere. Korra leant in for a hug, "Thank you so much-"

An earth pillar shot up from the floor into Korra, "Nah uh uh. If you want to hug something then go hug a tree. We're here to work."

Korra lay on the floor for a while longer. Perhaps training with Toph would turn out to be more than she bargained for.

In the Earth Embassy meeting room, a small group sat around a black marble table. Kuvira and Baatar were seated near the head of the table, with several other Allied Forces soldiers along the side. On the opposite side sat Prince Wu, Grand Secretariat Gun, and other royal cabinet ministers.

And then there were the empty chairs, making up about the other half of the table. The other nations hadn't showed.

With much of their budget spent on the dinner last night there weren't a lot of refreshments provided. Still, a few waiters served tea and light snacks, trying to keep the atmosphere busier. Though given that many people here had been up till the early hours of the morning after news of the Avatar's disappearance, the wait for others to arrive prompted some to yawn constantly or drift off into sleep.

Kuvira exhaled loudly through her nose, trying to contain her disappointment and frustration. They'd waited another half an hour, but still no one else had shown up. "Maybe we should begin," she spoke quietly.

"Well, may I start by addressing the elephant rhino in the room," Wu blurted out. "Why has it taken ''this'' long to get my throne back? I've had to hide away for three years now, waiting and waiting for all this to end!"

"Err, I think what Prince Wu ''meant'' to say, is that he is eager to see the Earth Kingdom restored," the Grand Secretariat intervened.

Kuvira didn't bother responding to either of them; if it had been up to her, Wu's half of the table wouldn't have even been here, but President Raiko had insisted. It took a few seconds before Kuvira realised she had crushed her metal cup in her hands after listening to the prince. "Excuse me," she mumbled, putting the cup on the floor.

"Anyway," Kuvira continued, "I guess we should run through our current plan. I'm sure most of you are aware of the so-called Barbarian 'King' of Ba Sing Se; Qiang. After the fall of the Hou-Ting Dynasty, the Earth Kingdom military did their best to maintain order within Ba Sing Se, but with many defectors and a lack of resources they were no match for Qiang's gang when the rode in and took over." It had happened three months after the fall of Hou-Ting in fact, with Qiang executing the Council of Five and declaring himself the new 'king'.

"There has been a relief package established for those in the Upper Ring who had insurance, I'm assuming?" One of the ministers asked.

"Of course, but there are plenty of civilians who have lost everything throughout the rings," Kuvira retorted, not wanting to make the focus of their mission on the rich and powerful citizens who were displaced. There were many citizens who fled after Qiang took over, especially when Kuvira's forces started liberating the Southern Earth Kingdom since there were new opportunities to start over. Not everyone had been so lucky to be able to relocate. "At the moment, our forces have managed to keep the remaining citizens safe in the west Lower Ring, but there have been frequent attacks on our defences from Qiang."

Grand Secretariat Gun finished his tea before speaking up, "And where is Qiang located? Did he take refuge in the Royal Palace?"

Baatar answered, "We don't know where Qiang's specific location is, only that he's in the Upper Ring. Our main concern is that he has a number of civilians and prisoners within the walls, and if he catches wind of our attack and escapes, he may take them hostage. Not only that, but we want to limit civilian casualties before launching a full-scale attack. So if we can find a way to get inside and free the prisoners, we can then move in and arrest Qiang."

One of the ministers spoke up next, "Qiang is the one who united most of the barbarian clans together when the Allied Forces moved in is he not? Letting him escape could be a problem."

"Exactly. If we can get to him, I believe the other factions will split apart. He's the one who has kept them all together."

"I'm sorry we're late," a voice came from the doorway.

Kuvira looked up in surprise, "Suyin?"

"I thought you would have pulled out like all the other nations did," Baatar replied. He wasn't so convinced.

Suyin made her way over to the table with several other guards, all dressed in their metal armour, "Zaofu doesn't have the largest military, but we can offer our support. We're all part of the Earth Kingdom, and we will help free Ba Sing Se."

Kuvira couldn't deny that she was happy to see Suyin, even with all the bad blood between them. She looked down to the table to hide a small smile. "Well, shall we take a look at the maps then?" Kuvira suggested, standing up and turning to a map board of Ba Sing Se behind them.

With most of the swamp floor underwater, it took Toph and Korra some time before they found a dryer stretch of earth. There were still small streams and a puddle to the side, but at least this area was also clearer of trees. It would make for a good sparring arena.

Korra had been too busy looking at the surrounding foliage that she bumped into Toph slightly. The old woman said nothing at first, but turned her face to Korra, squinting intently. "Wh... what is it?"

"Hmm," Toph mused, before turning away, "I must be getting old." Korra didn't know what Toph was talking about, but the earthbender continued anyway, "I don't really know a lot about all that 'Avatar spirit' stuff, but I guess I could take a look at your bending form and see how you're going." She then slid on a wave of mud over to the other side of the clearing.

Even though Korra had heard stories of the 'blind bandit', seeing Toph somehow know where to move and what she was doing without her sight was rather intriguing. She'd never seen anything like it. "Okay, a sparring match. Do you want me to just use earthbending? Like... will you be able to tell if I use fire?" Given that it was an element that Toph couldn't bend, Korra didn't know how Toph would sense her non-earthbending attacks.

Toph cackled confidently, "Oh please, I can sense everything you do before you do it. Use whatever elements you want, martial arts, or even chuck a tree if you want. I'll beat you."

Korra still couldn't shake the feeling that there was something wrong with attacking an old blind lady, but Toph seemed confident enough. "Okay, I'll do it."

"Bring it!"

The earth was mushy from all the water as Korra stomped into it, but it was still hers to control. She punched forward a clump, and then another, sending them towards Toph. Both of them were evaded easily. Korra tried flipping a larger rock out of the ground and heaving it over, while sending a line of mud pillars as well. Toph leaned back to dodge the rock, and then stomped to raise a platform above the pillars. Korra thought she caught a glimpse of a smirk on the old woman's face.

It was time to try something else. Grabbing the greenish water from a stream nearby, Korra pivoted and sloshed the swamp water at Toph. Again she evaded, this time sinking the patch of ground she was on to duck underneath Korra's attack. Toph continued to duck and dive from Korra's fire punches, and then slid on a mud platform to escape a crescent kick of flame. As she circled to the side of Korra, Toph kicked her mud slide into the Avatar, sending her flying back into a tree trunk with a thud.

As Korra opened her eyes, a small hunk of mud was thrown into her face. She also felt something furry land on her shoulder and croak. It seemed this squirrel frog had taken an interest in Korra getting beaten up.

"Tell me what you did wrong," Toph walked over.

Gently picking up the squirrel frog and placing it back on the ground, Korra tried explaining herself, "Well, I was thinking-"

"Exactly. You were thinking."

Korra looked confused, "Isn't 'thinking' important in fighting though?"

"Of course it is you numbskull!" Toph's explanations weren't making much sense. "But you're over-thinking. You're too worried over what your actions will do that you aren't moving fast enough. Bending is an extension of your body; rather than 'think' all the time of what you should do and how, it should be something that you 'feel', and can sense. Go again!"

There was a truth to what Toph was saying that Korra had already known, especially when she'd first learned earthbending. Part of her that knew that she had to connect to her bending in a way that was more instinctive rather than over-analysing every move she wanted to make. The problem wasn't that she didn't know this, only that she didn't know how to make it happen anymore.

More determined after being thrown around, Korra took to her feet. She brought her arms together and shot a powerful gust of air forwards, only for Toph to slip underneath it. Korra then kicked a water whip, but this time Toph raised a platform above it. She then jump kicked a flame jet, and yet again Toph evaded. It seemed whatever Korra tried to do, Toph anticipated it. Toph then slid to the right, creating a ramp to trip Korra up, and with her right arm, knocked Korra into the air with a mud geyser. Korra cried out as she was launched through the air and landed in a murky pool of water.

Grunting as she rolled onto her back, Korra just lay there with her arms spread wide. She was getting beaten up by someone over four times her age! Even if Toph was an incredible bender, it felt pretty miserable to be losing this badly to her.

"Hmph," Toph stood over Korra, watching her lay in the swampy water. "I can't say I'm impressed at all. At least this is good practice I guess."

As Korra stood to her feet, Toph walked past and yanked off an elbow leech that had somehow stuck to Korra's arm. She yelped, turning angrily to Toph, "Hey! It seems you're enjoying having someone around to beat up an awful lot."

"Yeah, the swampbenders here really can't take a punch," Toph admitted. She made her way over to a moss-covered tree root, taking a seat and catching her breath. It was time for a break it seemed.

With a moments rest, Korra decided it was time to ask Toph something she'd been thinking about earlier, "So, what made you decide to disconnect from the world and move here?"

"Disconnect? I'm just as connected as I've ever been!" Toph defended. "You see these roots and vines? They run all over the world."

The vines in Republic City had appeared when Vaatu attacked, but Korra hadn't realised these vines were also connected somehow. "Can you see through the vines?"

Toph laughed, "I can't see anything! But I can hear everyone, and I can sense what they're doing. I can sense Su and Lin, Republic City and Zaofu," she reminisced, a smile forming on her lips. "Lin is always hurrying around the Police Department, worried about something. She does well at her job, but I always told her to take it easier. And then there's Su in Zaofu. I can hear their whole family. Did you know that my youngest grandkids invented a game using metalbending? They fling this metal disc around and try to land it in the others' goal. And my other grandson Huan, he... he makes these things out of metal. I don't know what they are, maybe some new trend or something. My oldest grandson Baatar isn't a bender, but he spends time sketching and making designs with his father. Not that I can see what they're drawing of course, but he does study hard. Hmph, always thought Su's husband was a little spineless but it's her choice, I guess. And then there's Opal, my only granddaughter. She turned out to be an airbender which I can't say I'm happy about. Too much floating and fluffing around with airbending, but she's really good at it."

It made Korra smile hearing Toph prattle on about her family. She could sense that Toph did have a deep love and connection to her family, listing things about them at great length. Hearing their voices or sensing their presence through the vines was one thing, but actually being there was another. "Yeah, I actually helped show Opal the basics when I was in Zaofu. I met all your grandkids," Korra replied. "Why don't you visit them more often?" Korra asked.

Toph furrowed her eyebrows, "I don't need ''another'' Avatar getting involved in my personal life."

"I suppose it's an inherited trait," Korra joked, taking a seat on the vine next to Toph. The old lady managed to smirk, and then proceeded to punch Korra in the arm rather hard, who turned around in shock, "Ow?!"

"Get used to it," Toph smirked. Maybe punching others was her love language? However, after a few seconds she again turned her head to Korra just like she did earlier. Toph narrowed her eyes, and then started feeling Korra's arms. Korra just sat there while Toph patted her shoulders and back, even shoving her hand over Korra's face at one point.

"Ow! What are you doing?"

Eventually, Toph pulled back. "I was right! I thought I was losing my marbles." Toph laughed as she realised what was wrong, while Korra still looked perplexed, "You have metal inside of you."

Korra just sat there for a moment, trying to process what Toph had just said. What on earth was the old lady on about? Her eyes flashed as it suddenly hit her, "Wait... the poison! It was metallic! But I thought Suyin had got it all out?"

"There isn't a lot, from what I can tell. When you're blind and earthbending is your main way of sensing the world then you get a feel for something so small," Toph explained. When Korra had bumped into her earlier she must have first sensed something, but only after punching her in the arm had it been confirmed.

Maybe this was the reason she had found Toph? No one else had noticed anything so far, not even Korra herself who could metalbend, yet Toph's reliance on earth and metalbending for 'seeing' may have been why only she was sensitive enough to notice it. Korra had been carrying this poison around the whole time. "That must be what's been holding me back for so long. I gotta get it out! You can get it out of me, right?"

Toph screwed up her face, "Who do you think you're talking to? Of course I can!"

Something welled up deep inside Korra. Maybe it was hope? Hope that finally, things had begun to make sense. She'd gone through so many trials, exercises, and chased false hopes trying to get herself better. Now it finally felt like there was an explanation for why she hadn't fully recovered. Korra grinned, ready to do whatever it took to get the poison out. Maybe the world wouldn't have to wait much longer for an Avatar.

Bolin's uniform was a mess. He'd hurriedly changed after waking up late for the summit meeting, now powerwalking along with Mako and Asami trying to keep up. They'd stayed in the Police Department overnight, barely sleeping at all, trying to gather whatever information they could about their friend's disappearance.

"Ugh, Kuvira is going to kill me for being late!" Bolin wailed. He'd basically missed the entire meeting as it was now close to midday, with the bright sun bearing down as the trio left the building.

"I'm sure she'll understand," Asami tried to reassure. All of them were worried sick about Korra, so surely Kuvira would be sympathetic?

Bolin's fears about being late intensified as he noticed Kuvira approaching. "Uh, Kuvira! I'm sorry I... I meant to be at the meeting, but you see-"

"It's quite alright, I understand," Kuvira responded. One could almost hear the relief as it tumbled from Bolin's shoulders. "I know the Avatar is a close friend of yours. We were just on our way back to the Earth Embassy to pack up and I thought I would come to let you know."

"Wait... we're leaving to Ba Sing Se? Now?" Bolin asked.

Kuvira nodded, "Of course. We will do all we can to find the Avatar, but in the meantime, we need to progress with bringing stability to the Earth Kingdom."
It was hard for Bolin to accept, though he knew he couldn't say no. "Of course, I'll be there before the train leaves."

"Kuvira," Lin Beifong called out while leaving the Police Department main entrance, "I've been informed that General Iroh will be sending a platoon of reinforcements and supplies."

She couldn't really complain in front of them, but sending a single unit of soldiers wouldn't add a lot to their forces. Still, perhaps it was better than nothing. Kuvira gave a courteous smile before leaving, "I'll see you at the train Bolin." She and her soldiers made their way to a satomobile.

"Hmmm," Bolin sighed. "I know leaving is the right thing to do to help Ba Sing Se and all, but it feels wrong with Korra still missing. And I haven't even got to see Pabu yet!"

"I'll make sure to give him extra pats from you," Mako offered. "It's been good to see you bro."

"You too Mako, and Asami. And you too Lin!" Bolin echoed.

"Good luck for the mission. Be safe out there, okay?" Asami farewelled. Bolin gave the three one last glance before marching off to collect his things.

Mako smiled, "It still seems a little surreal seeing Bolin in uniform and all grown up." The others chimed in. "So, what now with the search?" Mako turned to Lin.

"Well... I hate to bring this news but... there's been a last-minute change of plans. You have a new assignment."

"Wait... what assignment?"

Lin shifted uncomfortably. She knew this wasn't going to go down well. "So, after Korra's disappearance, and the attacks by groups claiming to be the 'Red Lotus', it occurred to President Raiko that perhaps the prince needed further protection."

Mako almost didn't understand what he was hearing, "Wait, but... I'm a detective. Does Raiko want me to be a bodyguard now? What about the investigations?"

"I tried to talk him around, but it seems Prince Wu asked for you specifically. He said he saw you when you were a pro-bender, and he was a super fan of the Nuktuk series your brother was in."

"I can't believe this!" Mako yelled into the air. Being a bodyguard was the last thing he needed to be doing right now, especially for someone like the prince.

Sighing deeply, Lin continued, "You could try talking to Raiko but I'm not sure if he'll let you quit. Keeping Prince Wu close seems to be part of his political game, but maybe after Wu's coronation he'll let you go."

"I hope so," Mako sulked. "Well, I'm not sure if I'll have much time to see you anyway Asami even now I'm back here," he added sarcastically. He turned back to Lin, "When do I start?"

"I... I think Prince Wu and Raiko are expecting you at the Fire Nation Embassy after lunch. So, basically now," Lin sighed. "Look, I'm sorry this has happened. We'll continue searching for Korra."

Mako nodded. He still hadn't fully processed all that had just happened, but whether he was ready or not he didn't have much of a choice. After Lin disappeared back into the department, Mako farewelled Asami, "Well, take care. Let me know if you hear anything about Korra."

"Yeah, I will do. Good luck," she added a sympathetic grin, trying to keep Mako's spirits up. None of them knew the prince personally, but they'd all seen what he was like at his Summit dinner.

As she watched Mako and Lin leave, Asami couldn't help but feel like this was just like three years ago, when all her friends left. She didn't want to dwell on her feelings too much, but there was that niggling voice in her mind reminding her. There were plenty of projects she could get buried into again? But after seeing Tenzin and her friends recently, it had reminded Asami of the importance of balancing work, rather than using it to cope with loneliness. And of course there was Korra's disappearance, but then again she wasn't part of the search teams so there wasn't much Asami could do.

Well, there was one thing; the case Mako had told her about and this unknown device. But that would require her to talk to her father again.

Inside the tree hollow, Korra lay down on the bed. Toph was positioned on a platform, giving her a better view of what she was doing. Although Toph had never tried removing a metallic poison from one's body before, given that she was the only one who had even sensed the remnants in her, Korra was confident in Toph's ability.

"Now," Toph began, "if you want me to bend out this poison inside of you, then you need to relax."

"I ''am'' relaxed," Korra replied. She'd slowed her breathing, tried to relax her limbs, and cleared her headspace of anything distracting.

Toph grunted, "Seriously? Your body is like a twisted tree trunk!"

"Just do it! I'm ready," Korra lifted her head up. She closed her eyes again, emptying her mind of all distractions.

Clicking all her joints, Toph held her arms out. She didn't know much about healing or anatomy, but she could tell that the poison was in circulation and had collected in many areas in Korra's body. Breathing in deeply, Toph began drawing the metal out from Korra's feet and started working her way upwards. It took only a few seconds before Korra lurched forwards from the searing pain.

"It wouldn't hurt if you just relaxed! Stop fighting me!"

"I'm not fighting you!" Korra shot back. The truth was that Korra was resisting, though it wasn't her decision to do so. She flung her body back onto the bed, trying to keep calmer this time. Her breathing steadied, and she relaxed.

Toph began again, and Korra could feel something moving through her. An image flashed in her mind, and she was once again on that cliff ledge with Zaheer ahead of her. She couldn't breathe, her throat constricted, and panic filled every inch of her being. Korra screamed, rolling to the side and holding herself in a curled ball.

Toph threw her hands in the air, "Alright that's it. If you want this poison out then you can bend it yourself. Clearly you want to keep it in you."

"What do you mean?!" Korra spun her head around, "Why would I ''want'' to keep a poison inside of me?" The idea seemed ridiculous after everything Korra had endured to get here.

"I don't know. Maybe because if you don't get it out then you won't get better, and if you don't get better, you won't have to go out and be the Avatar anymore. You won't have to risk disappointing others or getting hurt again."

Korra's face screwed up in confusion and anger at the comments, "What?! That's... crazy." She realised halfway through her sentence that maybe Toph wasn't so crazy. Maybe there was an element of truth to what she'd just said. "I... I don't know what to do now."

"When you want the metal out, you can bend it. In the meantime, the good news is that if you're looking for a place to hang where no one will bother you then you picked the best swamp in the world!" Toph took a seat on a mound of earth. She'd done as much as she could.

This wasn't how it was supposed to go. Minutes before it had all made sense; the spirit had led her to Toph, the only one who had sensed the metal poison still stuck in her body. And yet, it had turned out to be another false hope.

Or maybe this was meant to be? Maybe the ''real'' reason Korra found Toph wasn't so that she could get the poison out, but so that she'd find a place to stay and lay low. Maybe it was finally time for her to accept the truth that she had been running from this entire time; that the world didn't need an Avatar anymore.

Chapter Text

Bolin watched as the cityscape shrank in the distance as their train left Republic City and his friends behind. He exhaled loudly, his head resting on the windowsill. It was hard being torn between two desires; one to go back and help look for Korra, and the other to press on with reclaiming Ba Sing Se. Obviously he didn't have a choice since he was working for Kuvira and the Allied Forces, but it still didn't make it easier.

The doors to the cabin opened, and Bolin quickly rose to his feet and saluted once he noticed it was his boss. "At ease," Kuvira ordered. "I actually came by to talk about your new assignment." Her words yanked Bolin out of his melancholy. What new assignment was this? "As you know, many of the world's forces have pulled out of the mission, and so we're going to need another approach. We're going to put an infiltration team together to locate Qiang and rescue those he imprisoned so the bulk of our forces can move in."

"That sounds like a good plan," Bolin replied. "So do you want me to be a part of this team?"

"I want you to lead them."

Bolin's surprised look said it all. "Wait... you want me? To lead a military operation? I... well...," he mumbled.

"I know this may seem like a big challenge, but I have faith in you Bolin. You have led a team of pro-benders before have you not? And you've been working with the Allied Forces for just over two years now, so you are well aware of all our protocols and tactics. I think you will make a fine team leader."

He didn't exactly know what to say. But then again, she had a point; he had experience leading a team before. Maybe it wouldn't be so difficult. "All right, yeah that sounds awesome!" He quickly retracted his newfound excitement and bowed politely, "It will be an honour, sir."

"So, to find Qiang, we'll need someone who knows where his base is located. That's why you'll be training a team of three barbarians we arrested earlier," Kuvira explained.

"Oh, who will they be?"

"Gombo, and his two subordinates Baraz and Ahnah. They were some of Qiang's top henchmen. If anyone will know where the barbarian king is hiding or where the prisoners are kept, it will be them."

Bolin gulped, "You mean, ''I'' have to train that massive angry guy with the skull face paint?"

"We've also selected two of our own to join your team; Officer Aktio, one of the best mecha pilots in his division, and Officer Guan, from the metalbending division, so you won't be alone with them. With a balanced team of three of our own with the three ex-barbarians, it should help integrate Gombo and the others into our ranks easier," Kuvira explained.

He still couldn't imagine how that massive barbarian commander would even listen to a word he would say. And that firebender and waterbender wouldn't be very cooperative either. Even if they did know where their former leader was, why would they even give that information up?

"You'll have some time now before we arrive at the training facility to come up with a plan," Kuvira interrupted Bolin's worrying. "I'm sure you'll find some way to bring the team together. I wouldn't ask this of you if I didn't think you were capable," Kuvira smiled ever so slightly. It still didn't soothe Bolin's anxiety. As she made her way back towards the door, Kuvira turned around, "Oh, and I should mention that our reclamation mission will begin in two weeks' time, so you have fourteen days to work with them."

Despite his stomach nearly dropping, Bolin managed a salute as Kuvira left. Two weeks' time?! How on earth was he going to string together a team in such short notice? Bolin sighed, again gazing longingly out the window. He couldn't see Republic City anymore, though wished he were back there.

A couple train carts along, Suyin sat at a map board. Her son Baatar was also nearby, though they hadn't said much. Instead, Suyin mused over the pieces on the map of Ba Sing Se. It was better to keep their conversation neutral. "So, we don't have enough forces to surround the Upper Ring, and that was the original plan, right?"

Baatar nodded, "Yes, it was."

"We'll have to come up with something else then. Is there any intel from within Ba Sing Se that would be useful? Like perhaps sightings of Qiang, or where his forces are predominantly held up? Or how about where his prisoners are kept?"

"Kuvira has come up with a plan, I'm sure she can run you through it when she's back."

Suyin nodded. Another awkward silence ensued, the pair simply gazing through opposite windows. Suyin tried to look again over the map and stack of reports, but she'd already gone over everything. Still, the silence was getting to be too much.

"So... how is everyone? Back in Zaofu?" Baatar almost mumbled his question too quietly for Suyin to hear.

Surprised at first, Suyin took a moment before answering, "Well... Wei and Wing finally graduated. It had been a hectic last three years for those in school, but they got through. And Huan might be going abroad for study in fine arts. Maybe Republic City, though he hasn't made up his mind yet. And your father, well, he's been working hard as usual. Some of the surrounding towns needed redesigning after the barbarian attacks so he does travel a bit."

Baatar had almost regretted asking. Hearing about his siblings and his father, it all brought back memories of when he was living there. He'd left Zaofu with such resentment towards his parents, believing they had done nothing to help the Earth Kingdom in its time of need. Being away with Kuvira had allowed him to not think about it all and to focus on what was ahead. But now, his thoughts drifted back to all those times he and his father would sketch designs together, the times where he would sneak into his father's office and use the drafting table without him knowing. Baatar's interests had shifted more into science and technology, but those memories were still warm, though now painful.

"Once this is all over, I'm sure you would be welcome to come back to Zaofu. Even just for a visit?" Suyin tentatively offered. "And of course, Kuvira would be welcome too."

A small, longing smile, formed on Baatar's lips. It sparked something inside him to hear his mother reaching out, welling up a deep sadness that he couldn't quite put into words.

Their conversation was interrupted as Kuvira returned, opening the metal door to their cabin. She smiled politely before sitting with Baatar at the table across from Suyin. "Have you had another read through the reports?"

"Yes, I have. Though Baatar was saying you have an alternative plan to capturing Qiang since we don't have the soldiers to surround the Upper Ring."

"I have," Kuvira answered. "We're going to send an infiltration team in, with former members of Qiang's barbarians. Bolin will be leading the team."

Suyin looked puzzled for a moment, "Wait, so can we trust these former barbarians to go along with our plan?"

"We'll be sending Bolin and two of our own with the three former barbarians. They know Qiang's multiple bases of operations and will be tasked with leading the small team of six there. Once we have their location, we'll send more of our forces in. They'll be able to rescue those trapped inside the Upper Ring, and then we can launch a full-scale attack on Qiang's forces."

"But Bolin will be in danger, and the other two you're sending with him. These 'former' barbarians might just lead them into a trap," Kuvira didn't answer, glancing off to the side. Suyin's eyes widened, "You already realise this, don't you?"

"I wasn't too keen on the idea either," Baatar responded, "but we don't have many other good options. There's no way we can get the information out of these three barbarians. Therefore, if they think they have a chance to lead Bolin and the others into a trap, they might still lead us to Qiang and the prisoners."

Kuvira glanced back up, "And that's when we will swoop in with the rest of our forces. If the bulk of our armies can push forward to the Upper Ring, then an airship flight to Qiang's location would only take ten minutes or so at the most."

It still sounded too risky. "But that's ten minutes Bolin and the others will have to fight off a whole horde of barbarians till we get there if they're led into a trap," Suyin replied. Her eyes glanced out the windows again. There had to be another way. "What if the Zaofu soldiers and I go ahead while you lead your troops to the Upper Ring. That way, if we hear anything from Bolin we can move in quicker. We can even launch our attack at night so we have the cover of darkness, giving our airships some protection. Maybe I can contact the Air Nation and see if they could spare even one airbender to help create a cloud cover around our ship."

They hadn't planned on attacking in the dark, but perhaps it was just the edge they needed. The barbarians had fairly decent anti-airship tech from repurposing the stolen Allied Forces technology, and so flying in at dark might make it easier for them to evade their defences. Kuvira nodded slowly, "Then I can lead our airship fleet and join you once we reach the Upper Ring. And Baatar then can lead the ground forces."

"Are you going to fight? Alongside your forces?" Suyin asked her son.

Baatar smirked, "I may not be a bender but I am a skilled mecha pilot. I can lead us there." His eyes glanced back to the map as he pondered, "But we'll have to keep Zaofu's airships moving in a secret from the former barbarians. That way, if they do betray us, they won't know that we'll already be moving in and waiting."

It certainly seemed a lot more promising, though Suyin still didn't like the idea of throwing their own soldiers into a trap. But maybe that was their only option for now.

The dark mahogany doors of the Fire Nation embassy stood in front of Mako, who was still trying to muster the courage to enter. The guards outside gave quick awkward glances at the detective's direction, not realising that Mako was still waiting outside because he was procrastinating. "Alright," Mako muttered after another couple seconds, grabbing the gold doorhandle and making his way inside.

The interior of the Fire Nation embassy was rather elegant, with polished wooden boards along the wall and a repeating, red-patterned wallpaper across the top. A couch arrangement sat to his left, while a dark wood staircase to the right led visitors to the upper floors. There was also a beautiful calligraphy ink painting of a dragon straight ahead, positioned above the reception desk.

Footsteps on the staircase announced the president's arrival. Behind him followed Fire Lord Izumi and Crown Princess Ilah, as well as the Earth Kingdom prince whom Mako would be serving. Raiko noticed Mako inside, "Ah, Mako, good to see you," he didn't even bother using Mako's 'detective' title, ironic since on this next assignment he even wouldn't be one. "Mako, I'd like to introduce you to our esteemed guest, Prince Wu, of Ba Sing Se."

Prince Wu was already strutting over before Mako could give a greeting, "Mako! The one and only! I am soooo thrilled that you have chosen to be my bodyguard."

"Yeah... chosen," Mako mumbled. "It's nice to meet you too."

"To be honest though, I was hoping for your brother Bolin since y'know, he's the mover star and all," Wu chuckled while waving his hands. This wasn't going well for Mako at all so far.

Thankfully, Raiko intervened, "So Mako, I'm sure Lin gave you the briefing, but I'd like to reiterate that looking after Prince Wu and maintaining his safety is of the upmost importance. With everything going on in the Fire Nation and these supposed Red Lotus attacks we can't take any chances."

"I understand Mr President," Mako almost sighed the words. "I'll protect Prince Wu."

"Thank you Mako. Now, I have to be off. I'll see you again at some point I'm sure," Raiko turned and left the embassy.

"Please make yourself at home, Prince Wu," Izumi offered, giving a nod before also departing.

Prince Wu turned back to Mako, "So, tell me all about those attacks in the Fire Nation. Was it really the Red Lotus? Did you get attacked?"

"Actually, it's classified. Sorry."

"Naw," Wu whined. "Oh well. So, I suppose I should begin. As my bodyguard, I expect you to be vigilant, keep your eyes peeled for anything or anyone, and to attend to needs that relate to my safety and wellbeing. Also, I have an extensive list of allergies you should be aware of," the prince handed Mako a sheet of paper with scribbles all over it.

As Mako scanned the page it started to seem more and more ridiculous, "So you're allergic to beestings, apple peaches... food that's too spicy, food that's... bland in flavour, high humidity, cold weather, fear of going to the bathroom alone, anxiety over flying animals...," Mako screwed his face up. "How... how do you even go outside with this many requirements?!"

"With a bodyguard of course!" Wu replied, his face lighting up. "Anyways, I should find out what I'm doing today... Gun!" The prince bellowed.

"Coming, Prince Wu!" The old Grand Secretariat shuffled his way into the foyer as fast as he could.

"What are we doing today?"

Gun pulled out a green and gold diary, "Well, um, let's see... in the evening we have dinner with the Lan family, but there's nothing else scheduled for this afternoon."

Prince Wu clapped his hands together, "Great! I want to go shopping with Mako!"

"Make sure you're back by five," Gun suggested.

"Of course!" Wu waved a hand dismissively. He then turned to Mako, eyeing him up and down, "So, I see that you're wearing a Republic City Police Uniform. Hmmm... that won't do I'm afraid."

What was Wu talking about? Mako wasn't sure what the problem was. "What's wrong with my uniform? I am a detective you know."

"Of course, I know, it's just, now that you're part of ''my'' security detail I think you should look the part. Otherwise, people will think I'm being escorted by the police! Imagine that!" Wu added dramatically. "So, I've had Gun arrange a special uniform for you. It's upstairs and I think you'll ''totally'' love it!"

"We'll see," Mako mumbled. He highly doubted it.

After going upstairs and changing, Mako made his way back down the stairs. His new uniform was a greenish-grey colour with the pants and top exactly the same shade, almost like he'd just stepped out of a prison. He still wore the same shoes and socks, only now they stood out against the rest of his drab attire. When Ilah saw him she just about burst out laughing.

"Don't say anything," Mako muttered to the crown princess as he walked past.

"Hey, this is the latest line from Ba Sing Se," Wu paused, "at least before the barbarians took over."

"Let's just get this over with. Okay, Prince Wu, so where would you like to go?"

"I have a private satomobile which can take us wherever we want! I'm feeling like… maybe some rest and relaxation is in order. Maybe a spa? Or a massage? Or, this foot therapy that involves hundreds of tiny fish eating away all your callouses!"

"Ugh," Mako groaned. It sounded awful.

Wu pondered for a moment, "Okay, let's go to the shopping precinct and get some more clothes!"

The fact that Prince Wu could change his mind about everything so rapidly wasn't a good sign, and this new job as a bodyguard was possibly Mako's most trying yet. He turned and gave Ilah a sad wave, smirking as he followed Wu outside. Ilah tried to smile back sympathetically but couldn't help chuckling a little as they left. Mako and the prince hopped inside their satomobile and sped off.

Back inside, Ilah leant into the couch. It was certainly a lot quieter now, not that she wanted to go with them of course. Hopefully Mako would be able to survive this job long enough until the prince was safe in Ba Sing Se.

Ilah noticed that Pabu was staring at her. She still found the idea of keeping a ferret as a pet strange, but she couldn't help but notice what big eyes Pabu had, or his fluffy red fur. Pabu cocked his head to the side, watching Ilah intently too. Ilah sighed, "Okay, come here then," she beckoned the ferret onto the couch, and Pabu was all too happy to finally interact with the princess. Before long, Ilah was beaming while petting the happy little creature, telling Pabu how cute he was.

It had taken the rest of the afternoon to make it to the training facility. The sun had started to cast a warm orange glow over the grounds as Bolin followed Kuvira out of the train. The facility wasn't much to look at; a metal-fenced block in the middle of the dry plains around them, but still, it was a useful training ground which housed many soldiers and ex-barbarians retraining to join their forces.

"Here goes nothing," Bolin muttered to himself as they entered. The inside of this building looked like a high-ceilinged warehouse, with a large open space before them. Some soldiers were lined up in groups with their commanding officers yelling out instructions at them. There were several different regiments; some who were metalbenders, carrying metal spools on their hips, another group with less metal plating were going over earthbending techniques, and towards the back there was the nonbender division, some learning combat and others the basics of piloting a mecha suit. These newer designs were more streamlined than the original mechs on tank treading, instead having robotic legs to walk on. There were also waterbender and firebender divisions in the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces made up of those born in the Earth Kingdom, though their numbers were far fewer.

Kuvira continued through another door into a smaller room. It was still large enough to fit around thirty people or so, though at present there were only two others. One, a younger man tinkering with a mecha suit in the corner, and the other launching metal coils from his hips into wooden targets. His last swipe cut through the entire board as Kuvira and Bolin entered.

The two officers immediately stopped what they were doing and saluted. Kuvira nodded their way, prompting them to relax again. "Bolin, these are your first two team members; Private Akito, and Corporal Guan."

"Hi there!" The younger mecha pilot waved enthusiastically. "I'm really happy to be working together."

"Nice to meet you," the metalbender greeted, far less jovially and almost with a hint of scepticism.

Bolin smiled, still feeling his nervousness inside, "Nice to meet you too."

The exterior doors opened, and a line of three people in uniform were escorted in. As they came closer, Bolin recognised them as the three new team members he was supposed to train; Baraz, the firebender with messy hair and stubble, Ahnah, the waterbender with hair braids, and Gombo, the hulking man that looked like he would rip Bolin's head off for breathing the wrong way.

With a quick flick of her wrist, Kuvira unlocked the trio's handcuffs. "I suppose introductions are in order. Private Akito and Corporal Guan, these are your new team members, Gombo, Baraz and Ahnah. Corporal Bolin here is your team leader." Only Akito gave an enthusiastic wave, whereas Guan grunted while side-eyeing the three. "You six will be our infiltration team to Ba Sing Se. With your knowledge of Qiang's forces and his base, we will be able to free those imprisoned so we can launch a full-scale assault on the Upper Ring."

None of the three said a word for a few seconds, simply taking in what was said. Perhaps they were surprised to be put in this position after only being at the facility for four days.

Kuvira continued, "I know you haven't been part of our ranks for very long, but you three have pledged your loyalty to myself, and the Earth Kingdom. Therefore, I know we can count on you. Bolin here will be your commanding officer, and over the next two weeks he will be overseeing your training. You six will be vital to our mission in capturing Qiang, and so you'll have to work together as a cohesive unit in order to see our success. We will go over the specifics of your task another time, but for now, perhaps it would be good to get know each other and your capabilities. Do you have any questions?"

For a while longer it was silent. Eventually, Gombo raised a hand, "I normally only have one shoulder pad. With spikes too. And what about war face paint?"

"That's against uniform regulations," Guan side-eyed Gombo from the other end of their line. "I assumed you would have picked up on that by looking at the rest of us."

Gombo looked ready to lunge at the metalbender, but Kuvira put up a hand to stop them. "We do have to maintain a certain standard in appearance given that we're working with the public. But, I can make an exception for now with the shoulder plate," she then walked over to Gombo and raised a hand above his shoulder pad, creating two small spikes on either side. "I expect you to follow our guidelines in the future however." Guan didn't seem impressed, huffing quietly and looking away. Kuvira ignored him, turning back to the other three, "Any further questions?"

Baraz and Ahnah glanced at each other, the waterbender speaking up, "But aren't we your prisoners? Why would you trust us with this mission?"

"To be frank, I don't fully trust you. Not as fully fledged members of our forces just yet," Kuvira admitted, "though I trust that you will in time see everything we have achieved and will fully commit to our cause. In the meantime, however, think of this as an exercise to ''prove'' your loyalty. It will serve as a test of where your allegiances lie. Not only that, but whether you still harbour loyalties to your former leader or not, preventing unnecessary casualties in the Upper Ring is something I hope we could all agree on?"

"Couldn't we just tell you where his base is and where he's keeping the prisoners? Save all of this 'working as a team' garbage," Gombo replied.

Kuvira had thought that Gombo would the hardest to deal with. Not only because of his high rank under Qiang, but also since he lost to Kuvira herself in their battle, "You could, but as I said, we don't fully trust you yet. By taking your three team members there directly, they can observe Qiang's base from a distance and confirm the location of the prisoners and rescue them. Then, the bulk of our forces will move in."

It still struck them as odd that Kuvira would take such a chance by having three recently captured barbarians involved in such an important mission. Maybe Kuvira was just too overconfident, Bolin thought. She did take on their entire group when they attacked her train. Either way, they were technically still prisoners of hers and had to go along with what she ordered anyway.

When no one said anything further, Kuvira turned to leave, "Well, if there's anything else then let your team leader know and he can relay it to me. We have two weeks until we arrive in Ba Sing Se, so use this time well." She nodded a farewell to the other six and left the room.

Bolin had almost wished that Kuvira were still here to help out, but he knew that he couldn't run away from this challenge. "Okay, so, I thought that maybe we should have like an icebreaker so we can get to know each other better. Like, maybe what each of our favourite foods are, or our childhood pets?"

Only Akito seemed excited to answer either of those questions, though Baraz responded first, "Shouldn't we like... talk about our skills or whatever?"

"Well, yeah, maybe that's a better idea," Bolin redacted. "So, I'm Bolin. I am an earthbender, and I can also lavabend."

"So that's what you did earlier at the train," Ahnah thought out loud.

"I mean, I'm still learning how to master it, though I haven't melted anything important yet so that's something right?" Bolin offered a nervous chuckle, though no one else laughed.

Akito shot his hand up next, and Bolin motioned for him to continue, "My name is Akito, I'm a mecha pilot, and I have a degree in mechanical engineering," he smiled excitedly. "And to answer the first questions, I love bean curd puffs, and my first pet was a rock named Hanshu."

"A pet rock? That's sounds kinda cool," Bolin replied. He then turned to Guan, "And you, Guan?"

The soldier said nothing, but instead lashed a metal cord from his hip at a wooden target on the other side of the room. The wooden mannequin's head tumbled onto the floor.

"So, a metalbender. We have quite a diverse range of abilities so far," Bolin tried to encourage everyone.

Baraz was next in line. There was a long pause, probably since they were still unsure and hesitant about their situation. Eventually, Baraz answered, "I'm a firebender," he sighed, creating a small ball of flame in his palm.

Finally, Guan spoke up, "Do you know any subskills of your art? Perhaps lightning generation? Or combustionbending?"

Baraz wasn't too keen on being called out, "I don't have a third eye tattoo you idiot. And why do I need to know any other subskills?"

"I'm just trying to suss you all out and see what I'm working with," Guan turned away smugly. He noticed Gombo was next in line, "I suppose you're a nonbender? Most nonbenders in our forces either have tactical skills or become mecha pilots. I'm guessing neither are within your cognitive capabilities?"

Gombo exhaled a fiery snort before turning to the metalbender. His two comrades held him back before he tried punching the living daylight out of the metalbender.

"Woah, woah, hold up," Bolin tried to stop him. "I'm sure you have skills that will help us greatly, Gombo?"

The hulking man settled down, but still scowled at Guan. "I can handle myself ''without'' a mecha suit."

Lastly, Ahnah leaned forwards, "I'm a waterbender, born in the northern territories. I can also use healing."

Guan wasn't finished harassing the trio, "I thought your ''kind'' weren't supposed to learn combat waterbending? You are a woman right? I'm guessing you'd be better suited to working in the medical bay?"

That was the last straw for the former barbarians. Ahnah returned a furious glare at Guan, "Do you wanna go you shiny dickwad?! I'll skewer you!" A nearby water fountain burst as Ahanh ripped the water from it and formed an ice dagger extending from her wrist. Gombo too readied himself to lunge at Guan, who in turn formed a metal blade from his arm bands. Before either party could do anything, the guards on either side of the room flung metal shackles around Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah. Another guard grabbed Guan's shoulder and yelled at him to stand down.

"Ugh! Guys, would you stop! We're supposed to be working together!" Bolin tried to reconcile his team.

"I have no desire to train with these low-lives. They were the ones who attacked our train, and now we're supposed to work side by side?" Guan spat his words out. "It would be more productive if I trained by myself," the metalbender turned and made his way over to the other side of the room.

"I'm going back to my quarters," Gombo grumbled to the guards. "I dunno who shoved a platinum spoon up his arse, but I ain't wasting time here either dealing with his crap."

The trio were escorted out the building, and all Bolin could do was watch. This had gone exactly as he had feared.

"It was nice meeting you all!" Akito called out, waving to Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah as they left. Bolin sighed deeply, sitting back on the floor with his head in his hands. The next two weeks were going to be hell.

There was a clunk as the door to the meeting room opened. Even though Asami had made it all the way here, she struggled to take even a single step forward. Was she really going to do this? See ''him'' after all these years? She knew deep down she didn't want to.

"The clock's ticking Miss," a large guardswoman mumbled grumpily, holding the door open.

"Right," Asami tried to smile back, taking a step into the room and feeling the door thud behind her. For Korra, she thought. She had to do this for her, just in case this 'device' had anything to do with her disappearance.

As she scanned the room, Asami couldn't find her father. Maybe he hadn't arrived yet? Her heart thumped each time someone turned around, thinking it could be him. There was one man sitting near the wall but his hair was completely grey, nearly white even. It took a moment longer, but as the man turned and saw her Asami realised that it was indeed her father.

It just about split his heart in two seeing Asami standing there, welling up deep feelings of regret, joy, longing, and shame. "Asami," he greeted.

His daughter stared for a moment, simply too stunned to say or do anything. It was all so surreal. After another moment, Asami sucked in a quick breath, and sat down at the table with her father.

"Is... it's really you," Hiroshi said. His eyes were warm and affectionate.

Her father still had no idea why Asami even arranged the visit, so she finally decided to elaborate, "I'm only here because I need you to look at something." She reached into her purse and pulled out the sketch Mako gave her, sliding it across the table under Hiroshi's nose.

Her father adjusted his glasses a little, staring over the design. Asami caught his eyes flicker ever so slightly, and realised he recognised it. "You know what this is, don't you?" Asami whispered but spat her words out, a rage boiling within her. "Have you been plotting with the Equalists again? Or is it the Red Lotus now?!"

"Asami, no it... isn't that!" Hiroshi tried to defend. He also kept his voice low, lest they attract the attention of the guards. "Please, I've never worked with the Red Lotus, and I'm not connected to any terrorist group. Please let me explain."

"I can't believe it," Asami muttered, staring back to the door. This was just what she feared. It was everything that had been plaguing her dreams and thoughts all night and day long. "Do you know just how hard I've had to work to get our – no, my – company back into business?! For a year, no one wanted to touch our stock, let alone trade with us. I had to sail all the way to the South Pole to try and find a business partner, and even then, he turned out to be a criminal too! I have worked so hard the past three years, and now, another one of your skeletons is being brought to light and may be connected to the Red Lotus or Korra disappearing!"

Hiroshi looked confused and horrified. He rambled incoherently for a moment before speaking clearer, "Asami, I have no idea what's going on. I... I do know what that device is but it's not what you think I-I never actually created it; it was just a prototype-"

She said nothing more to her father. Instead, Asami pulled out a stack of envelopes. Their wax seals were still intact.

Hiroshi stared down at the letters, a deep sorrow creeping into his bones. "You haven't even opened them..." he left his sentence unfinished.

"Don't write to me ever again," Asami replied. Her tone wasn't overly aggressive, though her words felt like hot acid as she said them.

Asami shoved the pile of letters across the table, letting them slide onto the floor. She'd had enough. Snatching the sketch from the table, Asami stood up abruptly and stormed off. Hiroshi tried to call out to her but Asami couldn't bear being here anymore. She knew that this device – one that her father seemed to know about – could have something to do with Korra, and she knew that she should stay and hear her father out, but it was too much. Her blood boiled with a pain and hurt that she hadn't felt for a long time, not since the whole equalist scandal last time. Asami knew she had to figure out what was going on, but now she would try to do so without her father's help.

It had been a long afternoon, but finally, Mako and Wu returned back to the embassy. They'd spent several hours looking through clothing stores, jewellers, and even managed to grab some tapioca pearl tea on the satomobile ride back. Mako was treated to a pearl tea as well, a small consolation for his time babysitting the prince.

Mako pushed open the doors to the upstairs lounge, leaving Prince Wu in his room with his numerous bags of new clothes. With a loud sigh Mako collapsed into the cushiony couch, letting go of all his frustration and tiredness.

He almost drifted off to sleep, but a voice spoke from the other side of the room, "That bad huh?"

Opening his eyes, Mako realised he wasn't alone. He hadn't even noticed the crown princess in the lounge as well. He would have got up to bow properly, but his body was simply too tired. Though he also had to keep reminding himself that Ilah didn't appreciate the formalities anyway. "Yeah, something like that," Mako mumbled an answer. He noticed Pabu curled up in a ball on Ilah's lap, "Well, looks like Pabu's made a new friend."

Ilah looked slightly embarrassed, especially after she'd shown her disapproval for keeping a ferret as a pet back in the Fire Nation, though there was no point hiding it now. "I suppose I may have misjudged him. And yes, Pabu is pretty adorable," Ilah admitted, stoking the sleeping fire ferret tenderly.

"Maybe you've misjudged me as well then?" Mako spoke his mind. In his tired state his filter wasn't exactly working well, and a slight awkwardness crept into his smile.

Surprisingly, Ilah didn't take offense. She smirked lightly, "I think I'm still trying to figure you out." She turned and looked out at the setting sun, the orange and golden glow resting delicately on her skin and ebony hair.

Mako's flirting game was a tad rusty, but neither he nor Ilah could deny that there was something between them. And not just a shared affection for Pabu. Either way, the pair sat in a comfortable silence, each looking out the opposite windows of the room. Mako was probably too tired to hold much of a conversation anyway, though he did remember something he had wanted to ask Ilah about for some time, "So back at the dam, you used a firebending technique I've never seen before. When the water was falling down you made a really hot flame that evaporated the water. Where did you learn that?"

Ilah smiled, taking her time to answer, "Well, since I've always had trouble with lightning generation, I had to come up with my own special techniques," she turned back to Mako. "I don't exactly have a name for it, but it's basically a way to condense a flame and feed energy into it, making the output far stronger. Like a charged attack, or one step towards combustionbending. I heard stories of firebenders using this move when Sozin's Comet had arrived, but to do it without the help of the comet required a lot of training," Ilah explained.

"Must be quite a complicated technique then?" Mako replied.

The crown princess shook her head, "Actually, the technique is pretty simple. It's the practice that's tricky. See, you start with a normal flame in the palm of your hand," Ilah twirled her hand and ignited a glowing ember, eventually becoming a decent flicker, "then, you keep adding to it, until it becomes like the fire dagger form. Then, you add even more, and you should start to see a halo around the flame and a high whistling if you continue," as Ilah mentioned it, her flame condensed into a smaller and smaller flicker of orange, and a faint ring started to appear around it. After relaxing, her flame dissipated. "The flame can be hard to control with so much power inside it, but it can be pretty effective if you need something that packs more of a punch."

Mako stared with astonishment for a moment. "Okay, I want to try it." He then produced his own flame within his palm. He managed to condense the flickers into a small consistent dagger-shape, but any further progress resulted in tongues of flame shooting off to the sides. After a few seconds his flame went out.

"No no, your hand is too loose. Your flame is going to lose control when you add to it," Ilah suggested. She instinctively made her way over and held Mako's hand in both of hers to try and guide it. Though as she did, she noticed just how soft his fingers were. Not femininely soft, as his skin was tougher in places, but it was more like a warm tenderness in his touch. His hand was still a little clammy with sweat, but it didn't seem to bother Ilah all that much. Once realising what had happened, Ilah moved her gaze upward and locked eyes with Mako. She awkwardly smirked and cast her eyes downward again.

The moment seemed to last forever, with Mako staring with a mix of stunned surprise and a deep longing. Here he was, tired and a little delirious from his afternoon wandering the shopping mall, and the girl he had feelings for was holding his hand. Of course, she was doing so to teach him her firebending technique, but it still made something in him spark as a goofy smile appeared on his face.

There was an impatient knock coming from the door, "Uh, Mako? It's ten minutes past five?"

Both Mako and Ilah immediately retracted upon seeing Prince Wu at the door. "Yeah, you're going to dinner with the Lan's," Mako replied, somewhat resentfully at being interrupted.

Prince Wu looked aghast, "What do you mean? You're coming with me of course!"

Mako looked confused, "But... don't I knock off for today?"

"You're my bodyguard, so I need constant supervision! What if there's poison in my food? What if there's a thug in the bathrooms? What if my food is too hot and needs blowing on? I need you Mako," Prince Wu pleaded.

Sucking in a gulp of air and exhaling, Mako responded, "Of course, Prince Wu. I'll be ready in a few minutes."

"Yay! This is gonna be awesome! We're going to this ''amazing'' restaurant, and they even have karaoke!"

The news of karaoke made it even less appealing. Mako had half the mind to smash his head against the wall and knock himself out, though Prince Wu would probably still find a way to drag him away somewhere. As the prince strutted off down the stairs, Mako realised he couldn't stay here with Ilah right now. He gave her a quick but warm smile before standing to his feet. "Guess I'll have to practice another time then?"

"Hang in there, " Ilah replied. Mako left the room, wishing their moment could have lasted just a bit longer.

Chapter Text

Under the glow of the evening sun, Bolin practiced his lavabending. Sweat dripped down his forehead while he twisted his arm, and a rock pillar in front of him melted into a boiling pile of magma. He stomped his foot forwards, grounding himself to the earth, and used his firm stance to drag the lava around his body in a swirl, before pulling it up in the air and back to the ground, reforming the rock pillar.

Nearby, Suyin clapped while perched on a rock. "Well done. It seems you've mastered the second form."

Grabbing a towel to wipe himself, Bolin made his way over. "How many forms are there again?" he pondered, throwing the towel over his bare shoulder.

"There's four listed here, but then again this is only the basics," Suyin answered, referring to the scroll to her side. She had come across a rare and ancient lavabending scroll a year ago while she was hosting an antiques and artifacts event in Zaofu. Although not a lavabender herself, Suyin had been helping Bolin learn the basic techniques whenever they met up. He already had some ability in lavabending but learning the proper forms had seemed like a good idea, especially with something as destructive as boiling hot lava.

"I've also been having trouble understanding all that 'neutral jing' stuff you were teaching me last time," Bolin revealed. He had always thought that part of earthbending was to be stubborn and immoveable, always ready to face any threat. Of course, earthbending did require these skills, but while learning lavabending with Suyin she had also begun teaching him to be 'still' and take in his surroundings before making a move.

"What are you having trouble with?"

"It's just... I get that like, stopping and taking in things is useful and all. And I know that I can often run into trouble because I don't exactly think things through sometimes. Or at least that's what Mako tells me." Bolin continued, "But I am learning to 'wait and listen' and... I don't know if it's helping."

Suyin smiled, "It will take time to master. But learning neutral jing is useful for a skill like lavabending, which requires a degree of caution and precision to avoid damaging or injuring someone." She stepped down from her rock, "Sit down for a moment. Wait, and listen. Then tell me what you can see."

Bolin sat cross-legged in front of Suyin, who also took a seat. Breathing in deeply and trying to mediate, Bolin cleared his mind. After a moment, he opened his eyes noting his surroundings, "Well... um... I see the grass. The rocks. There're some trees over there, and a... I think that's a snail skunk eww."

"So it seems with your neutral jing, you can perceive the details of your surroundings. But how is it all connected?" Bolin didn't know how to answer. "You see, neutral jing isn't about doing absolutely nothing, but it's about taking in everything. You have a knack for noticing things as they are, but once you learn to take in the connections between things, your neutral jing can become a powerful foresight."

Bolin still seemed confused, "Um, I guess."

"Think of it this way," Suyin tried another approach, "Have you heard the story of King Bumi of Omashu?"

"Yeah, I think. Wasn't he the dude who did nothing and like, let the Fire Nation take over his city?"

Suyin explained further, "Well, yes that is what happened. But do you know why he did that? It was because of what he perceived. He saw that on that occasion, the Fire Nation's forces were too strong to handle. He projected into the future, seeing only his defeat and his people killed. So instead, he chose to wait for a better time to strike back. And it came, during the solar eclipse."

"So, when I practice neutral jing, it's about gathering... and predicting what I... will see."

Suyin smiled, "While neutral jing is neither attacking nor defending, it is about perceiving what is, and what will be. And you'll find that learning this foresight will not only help with bending lava, but it might also help you run into less trouble as you say."

Her words made a lot of sense in Bolin's mind; with lavabending being a rather dangerous technique with it's potential to melt everything, listening to what is around him and projecting what might happen seemed like a good skill in managing it. Bolin gazed back to the training facility, his smile fading into slight frustration, "If only neutral jing could help me organise my team and help them get along better."

"Don't beat yourself up about it," Suyin reassured. Her eyes narrowed as she too glanced to the facility. She still wasn't entirely comfortable trusting Kuvira's plan, but she didn't have any better ideas. Maybe all she could do was help Bolin be vigilant for anything suspicious the three barbarians might pull. "Just keep your guard up. Gombo and the others have only recently been recruited, and I doubt they'll join us right away."

Bolin appreciated the encouragement, "Yeah, I know you're right. But I hope that they do see everything we've done. All the good for the Earth Kingdom," he turned back to Suyin. "I can't wait to reclaim Ba Sing Se and help my family move back. They've been away for so long. I've been away from my friends and family for a long time too."

It was hard not to admire Bolin's enthusiasm and optimism, though Suyin only hoped that he wouldn't be too naïve and trusting with his new assignment.

Meanwhile in the facility, Kuvira shuffled through some documents at her desk. She'd tried to read through a stack of reports, but found her mind kept drifting back to their mission. Would her plan work? It did seem risky to trust the former barbarians and three of their own soldiers, but what choice did they have? If the other world leaders were still with them it would be a different story, but Kuvira knew she could only rely on herself now.

Her thoughts were interrupted by a knock at the door. "Enter," Kuvira called out, turning her chair to face the door. An officer made his way in, "Corporal Guan."

Guan saluted, then relaxed his shoulders. "Kuvira, sir. I was hoping to discuss this new 'arrangement' under Bolin."

"What is it that you would like to bring up?"

"May I speak freely?" Kuvira nodded, prompting Guan to continue, "I do not like Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah. I think that they are degenerates. But more importantly, I do not think they can be trusted. Neither do I believe that Bolin is capable to lead our team. I would be grateful if you would reconsider my position there."

Kuvira paused. She had suspected this might happen. "And you didn't relay your concerns to your team leader and instead came to see me?"

"As I mentioned, I do not have confidence in Bolin's abilities as a leader at all."

"But do you have confidence in my abilities as a leader?"

"But of course," Guan replied.

"Then would it surprise you to learn that this plan was one that I came up with?" Kuvira asked.

Guan remained silent for a moment, considering what Kuvira had said. "I have faith in your ability, and your judgement. You have led our forces through dire situations and brought our nation into a wonderous era. But I cannot understand this decision."

"Then tell me, what would you do in this situation?"

Slightly taken back by the question, Guan stammered a little. He stared out the window, stroking his moustache while he pondered. "I would try and get the location of Qiang's base out of three barbarians. Instead of trusting them, I would make them talk. Use whatever means necessary to get that information out of them."

Kuvira raised her voice, startling Guan who had never seen her lose her cool, "And what do you mean by 'make them talk'? Would you have us torture people into telling us what we want to know? Or perhaps adopt the brainwashing techniques of the Dai Li? How would we be any better than the previous rulers?" Guan didn't know exactly how to reply, still surprised at his leader's outburst. Maybe Kuvira was stressing over her plan more than she realised, she thought to herself.

"I apologise for my outburst," Kuvira sighed quietly, standing from her chair. She let out a deep sigh. Now was not the time to get frustrated. "I share the same concerns as you; it is almost certain that you three will be walking into a trap. And while Bolin is charismatic and has a good heart, I believe that Gombo and the others are more likely to take advantage of that then actually follow him. But that's why you are most suited for this mission, Guan," she started making her way over to him. "You are a vigilant and capable soldier, and that's exactly what I need you to be on this mission. I need you to tell me exactly what goes on so we can send the rest of our forces in as soon as we can."

Guan took a moment to reply, pondering what had been said. He'd misjudged Kuvira. She'd been aware that they'd be walking into a trap this whole time, yet trusted him to be one to see the mission through. Maybe this really were that desperate with the other nations abandoning them? Guan eventually nodded, "I understand, Kuvira. I will do what needs to be done."

"Thank you, Guan," Kuvira turned back to her seat. "I believe you will make a fine commanding officer one day."

The edges of Guan's lips curled into a small but satisfied smile. He bowed, taking his leave and closing the door behind him.

Kuvira continued to stare out at the plains below. There was still that niggling voice in the back of her mind that doubted their plan, though it seemed like it had moved closer to the forefront as she continued to worry. The fact remained that to Kuvira, the greater goal was all that mattered. For too long their kingdom had been run into the ground by selfish dictators who only wanted to take for themselves. Even if it meant putting her soldiers in danger, Kuvira knew that saving Ba Sing Se and restoring the Earth Kingdom was all that mattered. If she could control what everyone did and how the mission would play out then they would defeat the barbarian king, and finally put an end to this three-year campaign.

After a long and mostly sleepless night, Bolin found himself at the doors to his team's training room. He hadn't come up with any new ideas on how to help his team bond together, but now his only hope was that they didn't kill each other before their mission.

When he opened the doors, Bolin was relieved to find his team members still in one piece. There was a clear divide between the two halves of the room though, with the Allied Forces on one side and the former barbarians on the other. But at least nothing had broken out yet. "Good morning," Bolin addressed the room, and while some looked up, no one replied with anything. Except for Akito, who gave a friendly wave back. Bolin sighed quietly to himself, realising that his team were still fractured.

After a few moments, Akito poured two cups of warm liquid from a flask. Smiling to himself, he made his way over to Baraz who was milling about in the other corner. "Here, it's ginseng, with a few other ingredients. It should help you feel more awake."

Baraz was hesitant at first, but then took a sip. The warm liquid and spices were soothing, "Mmm, it's pretty good. Thanks. Much better way to start my morning than what I'm used to."

"How do you normally start your day?" Akito enquired.

"Usually, the sound of someone screaming from getting beaten up would wake me at sunrise," Baraz replied, a serious and blank look on his face. When Akito screwed his face up in horror Baraz explained, "Sorry, that was my attempt at a joke. It wasn't quite like that with Qiang."

"Oh, a joke! Haha," Akito laughed, a little too hard to feel authentic.

In the other corner on their side, Guan watched the exchange between Akito and Baraz. He sighed, reluctantly walking over to Ahnah, "Hi, I... er... I just wanted to apologise for what I said the other day. I still have my reservations about working with you, as I'm sure you have about the Allied Forces and Kuvira. But either way, I shouldn't have disrespected you like that."

Ahnah didn't say anything at first, busy refilling her water pouch. Eventually, she glanced up at Guan, "Looks like you finally got off your high ostrich horse and pulled that platinum spoon out."

Guan frowned angrily, though after a long pause, he sighed, "I guess I might have deserved that."

"No hard feelings. I've heard worse from Qiang. At least you guys seem to have standards."

Sitting by himself on a crate, Gombo finally spoke up, "If you really are going after Qiang, then you'll have to get past his wall-mounted canons." He got up and made his way over to the drawing board on the wall by Bolin, "The majority of 'em are on the southern Upper Ring, though they are mobile and can be moved around. Your airships will be blown to pieces if they see you, and they can rain down fire on any ground troops approaching the wall. He has enough earthbenders to man them, and explosive discs to really do some damage."

Bolin was still stunned at the former barbarian commander finally breaking his silence, "So... does this mean you're on board with the mission? You've decided to join the Allied Forces properly?"

"I never said that," Gombo retorted, "I just don't wanna get sent out to die. So telling you about Qiang's defences is how I do that." He started drawing out a map, but then exhaled loudly, "Qiang had a certain way of running things. If there is a better person to do so, then I'm not opposed to doin' it," Gombo admitted. Maybe he was coming round to the idea of working with the Allied Forces. "Anyways, north of the upper ring is mainly protected by fields of landmines. It's meant to force any attackers to come from the south."

"So should we come from the north then? Since he won't be expecting that?" Bolin suggested.

Gombo shook his head, "It would take too long to detect the mines. Even with our metalbender here."

"So where is Qiang's main headquarters located? Is there a clear path there?" Guan asked.

Gombo was still hesitant in answering – perhaps because he was still weighing his options and where to place his allegiance – but eventually he drew a circle near the southern upper ring wall. "Here. It's close to the wall. Means he can see what's going on."

Bolin exchanged a glance with Guan, the metalbender responding next, "He's not in the palace?"

"It was ransacked and damaged pretty bad. Instead, Qiang found a mansion next to the wall fort. It's become his own palace." Gombo added more features to the map; an arrow leading to the southern wall, and a series of dots to the right, "I suggest you send the bulk of your ground troops here. There's another mine field to the east, so attacking from the southwest avoids them."

"And where will we infiltrate from?" Bolin asked.

Gombo drew another line, pointing at the series of dots, "I know a way through the mine field. It will take us right to the upper ring wall, and from there, you'll see Qiang's base. You can confirm what I've told you is true."

Trusting them to walk through a field of landmines was just the thing Guan was wary of. But nonetheless, for now he knew he had to play along. Bolin too found it a little odd, but thanked Gombo for sharing what he had, "Alright. I guess that's a good plan for now. I'll take it to Kuvira after training. Next, how about we come up with a strategy in case we get ambushed."

The next few hours were spent training, with each of them practicing bending, combat, or working through strategies. There was definitely still an air of tension between the two halves of their team, but also plenty of moments where things seemed to be coming together. By the end of it, Bolin couldn't help but smile a small, satisfied grin as he watched the other five share goodbyes, albeit not much more than a slight nod or wave. Perhaps it would turn out alright after all.

Bolin noticed the time, remembering he had a call to make. As he made his way over to their radio and started adjusting the channels he heard a voice behind him, "Hey, thanks for today."

After turning, Bolin noticed Ahnah hadn't left yet, "No problem, I'm just glad things went a bit smoother than yesterday."

Ahnah smirked, "Yeah, I guess things got quite heated. So, I was wondering, would it be okay if I borrowed the radio to make a call? It's just, my family are up north still and I... I had been keeping in touch with them but haven't been able to contact them since y'know, I've been here."

"Well... it's not really my place to say..." Bolin stammered.

"I understand. It's hard to trust us since we're still new here and all. I can wait."

Something squeezed Bolin's chest inside as he contemplated what to do. He knew that letting Ahnah use the radio was a risk, but then again, he really did want to get the three of them onside. "Ah, it's okay. You can use it. But maybe I'll adjust the frequency so I know where you're calling."

"Yeah, that should be fine. Thank you." It took a few moments to connect, but once they did, Ahnah couldn't help smiling, "Mom, hey. It's so good to hear you. Listen, I... kinda ended up leaving Qiang's forces. Not intentionally; I got picked up by the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. I know you've been wanting me to leave for a while, so I guess this is good news for you? Anyways, we're heading near our old village soon. Bringing a lot of troops from the Allied Forces, but without the help of the other armies, so I might be seeing you in a couple weeks?"

Bolin zoned out as Ahnah chatted happily to her mom. It was actually surprising to him that someone like Ahnah – part of a barbarian clan – would have family outside in other places wanting to hear from her. Either way, Bolin's mind dwelt on his own call to make. His girlfriend Opal was part of the Air Nation, and while they occasionally saw each other across the Earth Kingdom they had been doing long distance for quite a while. He caught himself grinning while staring out the window. How long would it be before they were reunited? Either way, he was just glad to be speaking to her again.

"...Yeah, I will be careful. You take care too," Ahnah put the receiver back, smiling to herself. She turned back to Bolin, "Well, my Mom seems incredibly happy at me leaving the barbarian clan. Maybe... maybe getting captured was the best thing to happen to me?" She laughed, "Never thought I'd say that. Thank you Bolin."

"Of course, and it's great that your family are happy with where you are now. I'm sure we're going to make an incredible team!" Bolin cheered.

Bolin waved goodbye, quickly taking his seat at the radio booth. He almost dialled too far when using the radio, his excitement getting the better of him. Eventually he found the right channel and spoke into the receiver, "Hey, Opal?"

There was a flicker of static before the other line answered, "Bolin! hey. It's me"

Opal's voice was crackly from static, but it still felt warm in Bolin's mind, "How have you been? It's so nice to hear your voice. I miss you so much."

"I miss you too, Bolin. Right now, Kai and I are helping a town in the south. We're meant to be heading to the Yi soon, but we've been held up for some time. Though it's been nice helping these people here too. How have you been? I'm sorry to hear about Korra."

"Yeah, I know tonnes of people are looking for her but it's a little scary. I just hope we find her soon. In the meantime, I'm off to Ba Sing Se. We're finally going to reclaim it!"

"That's exciting." Another voice chimed in the background, "Kai says hi as well; he just got back."

"Kai! I hope you're doing well too! It's been a while," Bolin greeted. Kai was Jinora's boyfriend, but Bolin had met him while travelling the Earth Kingdom looking for new airbenders.

"He says he's doing well too," Opal responded.

They spent the next while talking through their work, with Opal explaining their relief missions and Bolin telling her about his new assignment. He needed it; all the fear and anxiety he had about leading this team was something he had to talk out, and he also listened to Opal's worries over her station too.

"Your Mom's been here too," Bolin continued, "Zaofu have joined us in our mission to Ba Sing Se. She's also been helping me master lavabending, and teaching me how to like, 'listen' and stuff."

"Listen?" Opal questioned.

Bolin tried to explain himself better, "It's like... called neutral jing. It's this thing where you press 'pause' and take in your surroundings. Or like the connections between things."

Opal laughed, "Well I'm glad you two are getting along well at least." There was a sound on the other end, "Anyways, I have to go sorry; there's just been another delivery of supplies and we'll have to sort them out. Take care through, and be careful in Ba Sing Se."

"Yeah, I will. You take care too. I love you."

"Love you too Bolin."

The line cut out, and Bolin put the receiver back. He was still beaming from ear to ear, feeling warm and fuzzy after speaking to Opal. They'd been apart for so long, but it only meant that he looked forward that much more to when they could talk over the phone, or better yet, see each other in person. Smiling to himself, he rose to his feet and made his way back to his quarters.

The room was filled with obnoxious laughter and the smell of booze. This beautiful mansion had once stood with elegance and splendour, but now it was more akin to a dragon's hoard of trinkets and treasures but inside a tavern. A large, muscular, gorilla goat of a man sat on a stained silk couch, his shoulders adorned with an animal-fur coat and a spiked metal shoulder pad. His comrades cackled away at his humour, all of them guzzling the expensive wine they'd salvaged not so long ago. It was well past sunset, with the darkened clouds covering much of the moonlight, though their lounge had a massive crystal chandelier hanging from a high ceiling to illuminate the room.

Their laughter was interrupted when a man pushed open the main doors, letting the crisp night air inside. The outdoor guards followed him in briefly, then bowed and returned to their post. "My King, I have a message. We received intel from one of our scouting parties," the messenger crouched on his knee while speaking.

Qiang ran his fingers through his thick dreads, turning his head to the messenger, "What is it?"

The messenger nodded, "In two weeks' time, the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces will be launching an attack. They have supplies from the other nations, but only Zaofu has joined their forces."

Qiang addressed the room after a lengthy pause, "You hear that? The Allied Forces are coming to get us. Hah! But they don't even have the other nations behind them!" Qiang cackled away. He turned to a pair of captured Allied Forces prisoners chained to the wall in tattered uniforms, "Do you lot think your 'Great Uniter' will be able to overrun our glorious city?

New Ba Sing Se has been untouchable for nearly three years! If that shiny bitch Kuvira thinks she can breach our defences, then she's insane!" Qiang continued his relentless laughing, even wiping a tear at one point.

"She... Kuvira... will defeat you."

Qiang spun his head towards the voice. It had come from one of the prisoners, "What did you say?" Qiang threatened.

The prisoner smirked, using much of his energy just to look up at the hulking man a few metres away, "Kuvira will defeat you. She's... outwitted every barbarian group she's come across, and now, she'll finally unite the Earth Kingdom... You better start running."

The barbarian king fumed to himself, his face contorting with a deep rage. After he tossed his metal goblet full of drink to the floor, he picked up a broad sword and swiped towards the prisoner. His blade extended from its handle all the way into the prisoner's throat.

"I don't think I'm enjoying the company anymore." Blood dribbled from the prisoner's neck, snaking down in streams and staining his uniform as his eyes glazed over.

Qiang retracted his blade, reforming the sword in its original shape. "Do you have any 'wise words' for me, eh?" He glared at the other prisoner, who started shaking his head vigorously with tears welling in his eyes. "If there's a fight coming, then we better make sure our armadillo lions our fed. How 'bout we give 'em a taste of the corpses they'll be devouring soon," Qiang motioned to his guards, who started dragging both the dead prisoner and the one still kicking and struggling.

"No... please!"

After a short while, Qiang held his hand up. The guards stopped, and the barbarian king strode over. "See, your friend here, he is pretty dead, isn't he?" Qiang grabbed the dead man's head in one hand, glancing at it before dropping the body to the ground, "So if an armadillo lion were to chomp 'em up, he 'ain't gonna feel nothing, is he now? But you, on the other hand, are still very... much... alive," He leant in so close that the prisoner could feel his booze-filled breath all over him. "So here's the deal. I want to know everything. How many men does Kuvira have? How many tanks? How many airships? How many spirit-damned soldiers is she gonna send our way?! Can you help me with any of that? Hmm?"

The prisoner was drenched in his tears, nodding profusely and mumbling something incoherent.

"Good," Qiang got up again. "Take him into the holding cells. Find out what you can. In the meantime," he turned back to his comrades, "let's drink and make merry tonight! A storm is comin', but we ain't going down without a fight!" A servant had conveniently filled his cup again, and Qiang promptly snatched it and guzzled the contents. The others in the room cheered and laughed, raising their glasses and celebrating well into the night.

Chapter Text

Balancing six cups of his morning brew, Akito walked briskly to their training room. Inside the others were working hard, each honing their specific skill or art. Bolin was practicing the fourth form of his lavabending scroll; the shuriken. It involved heating a small collection of rocks into a molten blade. He grunted to himself while flinging the lava shuriken across a platinum beam, managing to cut a gash through halfway.

One the other side, Baraz kicked fireballs into a mannequin, this one made of metal. Ahnah was nearby practicing a water streaming move, circling a torrent around her body and flinging icicles out into the wall. Near the front, Gombo was also training with mannequins like Baraz, but he was holding a metallic bisento. He'd been gifted a platinum bisento, lest any metalbender try and use it for themselves. The razor-sharp blade sliced through the wooden mannequins as easily as it did the air, giving off a faint metallic ringing with every swipe. Lastly, Guan was practicing his metalbending on the other side, trying to mimic Kuvira's technique of pulling sharp plates from his armour and flinging them at enemies.

"I got some more tea!" Akito happily chirped from the entrance. The others finished what they were doing and made their way over. They'd been training all morning, and soon, they would be heading out to Ba Sing Se. "I can't believe it's been two weeks already," Akito reflected, afterwards taking a sip from his drink. "I've never actually been to Ba Sing Se before. I wonder what it's like?"

"It won't be much to look at now," Baraz replied bluntly. "Wasn't much to look at before either I guess."

"We'll be able to build it back," Bolin grinned determinedly. "First though, we'll get the prisoners out and take back the Upper Ring." It hadn't been long, but he already felt proud of how far his team had come.

As the group finished off their drinks, a soldier came in through the doors, "We're nearly packed up and ready to go. You lot better grab your supplies."

Bolin nodded, "Alright, I guess this is it. Let's remember everything we've been practicing." The others all rose to their feet and started grabbing their things. It would only be a day's journey to Ba Sing Se and then they'd be on the front lines.

The upper offices were bustling with activity. Soldiers carried equipment downstairs, while others ordered groups to collect supplies. Kuvira marched along with Varrick and Zhu Li trailing behind, occasionally stopping to direct soldiers to various tasks. "As the two most senior members staying behind, you'll be in charge of overseeing the facility," Kuvira turned back to Varrick and Zhu Li.

"In charge of a whole facility?! Oh boy, think of all the tests we can carry out Zhu Li!" His assistant subtly rolled her eyes.

"I expect you to continue to work diligently, I might add, and be focused," Kuvira corrected. "The work you've been doing with renewable energy and battery tech is crucial to our nation's future."

Varrick gave an exaggerated bow, "Of course Kuvira!" He gave a subtle wink to Zhu Li, who simply rolled her eyes.

Kuvira farewelled the pair and made her way down the stairs. As she exited the building, she noticed Baatar talking with another soldier. He didn't look too pleased. "What's going on?" Kuvira made her way over.

Baatar's face softened when he noticed Kuvira, "Turns out we have fewer mecha suits than we thought. And the airship fleet is down to twelve. We'll have to make it work somehow," he sighed. "How are things with Bolin and his team?"

"I'm not exactly sure how things will turn out, but we're prepared for any outcome," Kuvira replied. One of the members had made a phone call over their radio two weeks ago. It had struck Kuvira as a little suspicious, though they'd tracked the line to a village north of Ba Sing Se. Still, Kuvira was wary of the former barbarians, even if it was her plan to use them. "I suppose we won't know until we get there."

Smiling back, Baatar looked deeply into Kuvira's eyes, "We're nearly there, you know. After this mission, maybe we can finally be together. Properly, I mean."

Kuvira returned the smile. She wanted to be affectionate with Baatar, but she still felt like she felt she couldn't. He was right though; before them was the final mission in restoring the Earth Kingdom. Finally, the people of Ba Sing Se would know peace again.

Both of them watched as soldiers started filing into the train cabins. Some were loading mecha suits into the carts, others carried boxes, and some moved in with their squadron leaders yelling out orders. Bolin led his team into one of the cabins, smiling eagerly. Soon, it was time for Kuvira and Baatar to enter. As the train took off, Kuvira watched out the window as the facility disappeared from the horizon.

A cold wind swept through the Upper Ring. The sun had already set, bringing with it a cloudy night sky. Standing proud along the top of his wall, the barbarian king surveyed the remnants of the Middle Ring before him. His men had spent all day shifting their wall canons to the west, as they'd received intel that the Allied Forces would be attacking from that direction. Although he was concerned that his headquarters were right next to the attack point, at least he knew where it was coming from.

Qiang watched as two of his men repositioned a wall canon, pointing the barrel out ahead. With their continual raids into the Allied Forces territory they'd managed to steal a number of mecha suits and heavy artillery, repurposing their parts for their own defences. They also had several explosives experts in their ranks, refitting the usual green discs launched through the canons with bombs. So far, no airship had ever breached their defences, and the Allied Forces had sent many.

One of his commanders clad in leather bands and chunks of metal approached Qiang, "King, sir, we've relocated a number of prisoners as you requested. Where would you like them now?"

Staring out into the darkened ruins ahead, Qiang pondered. He only hoped his intel was reliable, "If they're coming for the prisoners, then I'd say... let's give them to them. In our own way, of course." A sick grin appeared on his face, his big mouth curling into his cheeks.

"I wouldn't be so overconfident if I were you."

The voice came from Qiang's left; a man dressed in a black and red kimono, with a katana strapped to his side. He also had several silver plates along his forearms, shin, and chest. The Barbarian King grimaced as he recognised the figure, though how he managed to get onto the wall was still a mystery. "Leave us," Qiang turned to his guards, who obeyed. Once they were gone, Qiang looked the man up and down before speaking, "I thought you'd be deserting us. Just when the action is about to start too. I don't take too well to deserters; Kuvira has been poaching many of us into her own shiny metal army."

"My companion Ju and I will be staying to watch. But whether we help out or not will depend on what happens next."

"So you are deserters. Or only on my side until it's inconvenient?" Qiang cursed, "I should skewer you both."

The man smirked, "You may try, but I won't go down easy. There is important work to attend to, far greater than this battle. I must stay alive to see it through."

His words ignited a fury in Qiang, "What kind of 'work' is more important than this? I have freed Ba Sing Se! I snatched it from the rich and fat scumbags who have been running it for spirits know how long, and I gave it back to my people!"

"Don't forget who it was that ''took care'' of the Council of Five," the man reminded Qiang. He didn't appreciate it, and an annoyed snort left his mouth. The man continued, "We didn't want to see Ba Sing Se fall back into the royal's hands, but from what we have seen, there is a great chance that they will prevail. Their forces are not much larger than yours, and you do have the advantage of this wall. But humanity is still weak. They will bow and worship Kuvira as their saviour, until of course, Prince Wu takes the throne. He is of royal decent after all. They will flock to him as if he were a god himself, and with his right hand he will embrace his sheep, and with his left, squeeze them of all their life."

"I don't care much for your nonsense or ramblin'. And why do you talk as if it's already decided?!"

"Oh, it certainly isn't, Qiang. The spirits have ordained this battle, and whatever the outcome is, it is sure to be poetic. I look forward to witnessing it first-hand."

Qiang was growing tired of this man's talk, "So are you going to just stand by and 'witness' what's happening? Or will you actually help me?"

The man sighed deeply, taking a bow in Qiang's direction, "Ju and I will remain here until it is no longer feasible. We will offer our services to the cause." He stood upright again, starting to make his way to the staircase, "Just consider my words a warning to not be complacent. If you are, we'll have to end things here."

Finally he was leaving, but at least he had somewhat confirmed his allegiance to Qiang. "You never told me your name you know?" He called out.

"It's Yatsu."

"Pah," Qiang scoffed, "I'll remember it if you fail us tomorrow."

Yatsu smirked, taking off down the stairs. Qiang grunted again, simply glad to have that strange man leave from his presence. Not that he didn't want his help, but listening to his poetic mumblings made Qiang consider throwing him off the wall. He didn't want to admit it, but maybe Yatsu had a point. Perhaps they were being too overconfident? But either way, Qiang wasn't going to give up quietly. Kuvira could bring whatever forces she wanted, but New Ba Sing Se was their city now.

Despite the light rain setting in, Bolin could still see quite a view from the train cabin window. Below them were fields of crops and grains, with the occasional hut or farmer dotted across the landscape. In the near distance was the inner wall, the top obscured by cloud cover, and behind them the outer wall was barely visible as they continued.

"It still seems so intact. Almost doesn't feel like a war is even going on," Bolin commented. He hadn't seen any signs of battle since their train ride.

"We have been approaching from the western side, which faired a lot better. But just wait until we get inside," Guan replied.

Bolin turned back to his team member, "You've been in Ba Sing Se before, haven't you? Weren't you stationed here as a recruit?"

Guan nodded, "Yes, I was. Not for too long though. When we lost ground Kuvira decided it would be better to focus on the other cities for the time being. I was transferred to the southern forces."

The conversation seemed to drift into silence. It was still a little awkward talking about previous battles in Ba Sing Se, considering how Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah, were on the opposite side not long ago. But at least now they'd be heading to the front lines together, Bolin thought.

As they neared the wall up ahead, Bolin could see a few temporary settlements propping up in the fields and meadows. While it was mostly an agrarian zone here, with the damage the inner regions experienced it made sense more citizens had moved out here.

After a few more minutes, the train passed through the Inner Wall tunnel, and out into the Lower Ring. Bolin gasped as the scenery changed drastically; instead of the rainy meadows and croplands, the Lower Ring was filled with burnt-out hovels and rubble. The rain didn't help, creating streams of muck that ran down hills and collected into pools. "I didn't think the Lower Ring could look any worse than when I was here before the war," Bolin remarked. It was true; even though it housed the lower socioeconomic classes, at least the Lower Ring once had factories, stores, and other businesses inside. Instead, now groups of people huddled around fires or under tents, with the occasional Earth Kingdom Allied Forces soldier helping them along.

"The Middle Ring was worst hit; most of the battles to the west have been fought there. And the north and eastern sides of the city were hit with bad fires that swept through them. Most of the citizens who remained came to live on the west side," Guan informed.

Whilst there were other monorail tracks snaking off to the sides, their magna-train tracks ended at one of the stations in the heart of the Lower Ring. Without many of the other suburbs rebuilt, there hadn't been a pressing need to upgrade the tracks to other areas. The train slowed to a halt under the tiled rooves, and a large crowd had appeared at the base of the stairs.

As soon as the first soldiers disembarked, hungry and desperate cries surfaced from those gathered. Bolin left their cabin, and he could see even from this distance how desolate and poor these people were. He tried to smile longingly at them but found he couldn't quite muster the strength. Thankfully, some of their supplies had been unloaded, and several officers began carrying the loaded crates down to the masses. It was only as he got closer that Bolin noticed the stench of some of those here, but he tried to contain himself and hand out the boxes of food and other supplies they had. It's not like having a bath every day was as pressing a concern as finding food.

When Kuvira emerged from her train cabin, the crowd screamed louder. Though instead of hungry and desperate cries, these were screams of praise and adoration. The words 'Great Uniter' continued to echo amongst some of the crowd, Kuvira gave only a slight wave before descending the stairs with Baatar. She turned to one of her officers, "See to it that the people are looked after." The man saluted and turned back to the others. As Kuvira made it to the base of the steps, the crowds praised even louder.

There was a path along the street that had been barred off to create a walkway, and several soldiers made their way towards Kuvira. "Kuvira, Sir!" a woman with dark brown hair saluted, along with two soldiers in metalbender uniform.

Kuvira recognised who it was; there weren't many female officers in her forces, "Lieutenant Yasuko. I was expecting Commander Jinsuk, is he at HQ?"

The lieutenant kept her eyes on the ground for a moment, but then mustered enough strength to look Kuvira in the eyes, "I regret to inform you that Commander Jinsuk was killed in action. It happened a day ago, and we did try and send a report out. I... I am now the most senior soldier here."

Kuvira knew must've missed the report, though given how much had happened the past few days it wasn't surprising. She took a moment before replying, "Commander Jinsuk was a good man, and an excellent leader. My deepest condolences."

Lieutenant Yasuko saluted again. "I apologise that the rest of our journey to HQ will be by satomobile; we haven't had the resources to spend in extending the tracks."

"No matter, I understand," Kuvira replied. By now, the Zaofu guard were also dishing out supplies. Kuvira turned back to Suyin, "Would you like to come too, Suyin?" The Zaofu Matriarch turned at the mention of her name. She nodded, joining her son and Kuvira as they hopped inside an open roof satomobile.

After their supplies had been handed out, much of the crowd dispersed. Though their camps and living quarters were still in need of repair, and with the many earth and metalbenders in the Allied Forces they still had work to do. There were roads that had become treacherous in the rain or needed fixing, bridges that were on the verge of collapse, and leaky dwellings that weren't fit to live in anymore. Half of Bolin's team seemed to be naturals at helping out; Bolin was helping repair a broken bridge with Guan, while Akito had helped fix a satomobile that had been playing up. Now, the mecha pilot was entertaining the kids, telling them all about mecha suits and even letting one of the kids try his helmet on, though it had started an argument as to who got to wear it first.

The other three didn't quite know what to do; it was still a bit strange for Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah to be with the Allied Forces. Several of the kids with Akito noticed them standing around and made their way over, "Are you a waterbender?" one of the kids asked. She was pointing to her two silver canteens on Ahnah's hips.

Although smiling awkwardly at first, Ahnah replied warmly, "Yeah, I am. I was born in the Earth Kingdom though."

"Woah cool, waterbending!" Another kid beamed. Ahnah realised that maybe these kids had never even seen other benders besides earthbenders before.

"Baraz here is a firebender y'know," Ahnah pointed to her right.

The kids seemed a little scared and unsure, even when Baraz tried to give a grin in return. One of the kids piped up, "I thought firebenders were bad. They attacked Ba Sing Se ages ago."

"Yeah," a young girl chimed in, "my brother Lee told me that firebenders can use a fire from the sky and burn people by looking at them."

Ahnah almost regretted telling the kids about Baraz, though the firebender tried to smooth things over, "I think your brother is mistaken. Fire can be dangerous, but I'm on your side, see? I'm wearing this uniform." Baraz showed off his dark emerald and silver attire, somewhat calming the kid's nerves. "And even though it can be dangerous, firebending can be fun too. Watch this," Baraz formed a small flame in his hand, and while the kids were scared at first, they were also intrigued. Baraz began juggling the small flicker in his hands, and then ran it along his arms and behind his shoulder. The kids had now erupted into laughter and giggles, some even calling for Baraz to continue. The firebender smiled.

"Do you want to come see our home?" One of the boys asked.

Ahnah smiled, "I think we should ask your parent's first, shouldn't we? Check if it's okay with them?"

The boy lowered his gaze, "We don't have parents. But we made it ourselves."

His words struck a chord in Ahnah, and she felt awful for even asking. She placed a hand on the boy's shoulder, "We can come visit. I'd love to see it. And we can help out too."

"Alright," the boy's eyes lit up again. The other kids grabbed both of Ahnah's and Baraz's hands and sped off, nearly slipping in the mud.

For a while Gombo watched the kids and his team members run off, leaning against a wall by himself. Baraz and Ahnah were certainly getting along with the locals alright. He continued staring, though eventually, an elderly man came by, "Hey there sonny, might you be able to help this old man lift some crates into my home?"

Gombo tried to give a warm smile, though he obviously intimidated the elderly man who looked like he almost regretted asking. Either way, Gombo followed the man and helped him out, giving a final glance to his other teammates being dragged away by the kids.

The satomobile convoy continued along the muddy streets, diving up and over a hill. The houses along this main road looked worn, though still intact. Suyin could see the blocks of houses further in the distance were badly damaged, if you could even call them houses at that point. Even though many civilians had rushed to the station when their forces arrived, there were still plenty of people lining the streets here as they drove, some on the footpath taking shelter from the rain, and others shuffling along to tend to other activities.

Before long, their convoy arrived at the wall. Although these barriers had once divided the citizens and kept them in poverty, at a time like this they proved to be a valuable defence against the barbarian king. Lieutenant Yasuko led the group through the wall gate and into a metal elevator controlled by their guards. It was only a short trip to the headquarters above, a large room that overlooked either side of the wall.

"We had set up a perimeter in the Middle Ring, but our forces were always overwhelmed. Instead, we've been forced back to the Middle Ring wall," Lieutenant Yasuko informed. Kuvira, Baatar, and Suyin could see just how bad the Middle Ring was on this side. There wasn't even a single building left intact that they could notice. In the distance they could see the Upper Ring wall where Qiang and his men would be stationed.

"Do we have any long-range artillery that can fire at the wall?" Kuvira asked.

Lieutenant Yasuko nodded, "We do, but their accuracy is limited from this far back. We haven't made any strikes on the wall itself in case our men are trapped in there. There are also civilians living inside the Upper Ring. We have tried to send many airship fleets, but none have made it past the wall."

Suyin replied next, "Do we know how many of our soldiers were taken? Or how many civilians are trapped inside?"

"Unfortunately, we don't know for sure. A whole apartment block were kidnapped in one of the raids, along with multiple squadrons of our men," Yasuko looked pained when she mentioned it, even though she tried to keep her composure in front of her boss. "I'm sorry we haven't been able to take any ground."

"It's alright, I understand," Kuvira reassured. "You and your men have suffered heavy losses and have been stationed in Ba Sing Se for a long time. For the next part of this mission, if any of your soldiers would like to sit out then they may."

Lieutenant Yasuko didn't quite know how to respond. She took a moment before replying, "Thank you, Kuvira Sir. I know that some of us are weary from the fighting, though some would also want to see this mission completed first-hand too."

"As do I. And we have greater numbers now from restoring the rest of the Earth Kingdom," Kuvira smiled. Her expression turned more serious, "And we do have a plan for getting the prisoners out."

It had been a long time since Yasuko and her soldiers had felt hope again, "Thank you, Kuvira."

Bolin and his team had spent a couple hours helping the citizens. There were still a few soldiers handing supplies out, but many had taken a meal break back at the train station. With a small fire in front of them, Akito prepared a warm meal for the others. He looked up at Baraz and Ahnah while stirring a pot, "Those kids really seemed to like you guys."

"Ah, it was nothing," Ahnah tried to brush it off.

"No, I really think you made their day. They looked young – possibly under five years old – so they probably don't even remember much besides this war they've been stuck in." The pair smiled in response.

An officer made his way over to the collection of soldiers in the station, "Our attack will be starting after dusk. It would be wise to get some rest over the next few hours until then." The others nodded, and the officer carried on to inform the other groups.

"I'm starting to feel nervous," Bolin thought out loud. It was almost like that feeling before a pro-bending match.

"I'm sure it will work out fine," Akito encouraged, a warm smile forming across his cheeks. "Looks like this is ready now," he started dishing out their stew into metal bowls. The next few minutes were fairly silent, the six of them focused more on eating than talking. Akito had managed to start several conversations or give positive comments, but even he ran out of things to say by the end of their meal. After finishing the last of his stew, he stood up and stretched, "Well, I guess we'd better get some sleep. Or clean up first I suppose," he suggested, noticing the mess of plates in front of them.

"We can do that," Gombo offered. "You three did prepare it, so it's only fair."

"Oh, how thoughtful!" Akito cheered. "Well, thank you, and rest well." The mecha pilot took to his feet and made his way to the sleeping quarters on the train.

Bolin and Guan also stood up, giving farewells before heading into the train. The other three started packing up in silence at first, with Ahnah preparing a washing bucket for the dishes and Baraz collecting them up. Most of the other groups had already departed.

After another minute or so, Gombo broke the silence, "Seems like you two were getting close with the locals."

Grunting under her breath, Ahnah washed the first of the containers. She knew this would come up. "It was only a couple of kids. They just needed supplies, that's all."

"We have our own kids, remember? In our villages up north?" Gombo replied. His voice angry, but quiet. "Have you forgotten what we talked about back at the training facility?"

"I haven't forgotten!" Ahnah whispered angrily, turning around to face Gombo, but only for a moment.

Gombo sighed, "Don't forget that we will never be accepted by these people. Just look at Guan's act; it's pretty obvious that he don't think much of us. And we all swore an oath to our king. We ain't just petty criminals sucked into something bigger than us; we are some of ''his'' top soldiers. And that means something."

"I agree," Ahnah replied. She wasn't too happy about having her loyalties questioned.

"I haven't heard much from you, Baraz?" Gombo mentioned.

The firebender's eyes stared off into the distance. Baraz responded after a moment longer, "I know where we stand. It was just... nice, that's all. It was nice that my firebending could mean something for those kids. I've only ever used it for fighting others."

"Don't get all soft," Gombo warned.

Baraz cursed under his breath. "So do you actually have a plan in mind or are you just spouting garbage?"

Gombo had half the mind to whack the firebender if there weren't other soldiers about. "Kuvira obviously doesn't trust us; that's why she paired us up with three of their own. We need to tip the odds in our favour," he explained. "We can't do much about Guan or Bolin, but if we can find a way to get Akito out of his mecha suit then we'll have the advantage." The other two nodded. Neither Baraz nor Ahnah had any other ideas at this point.

Eventually, Gombo stood up, "Don't get fooled by all this 'Great Uniter' crap; Kuvira may be dressed all shiny but she's another Hou-Ting for sure." He made his way back to the train, and after cleaning up, Baraz and Ahnah also followed. With the constant supervision, talking to each other had been difficult. But very soon, they'd be reunited with their clan and could finally end this 'Earth Kingdom Allied Forces' charade.

The sound of sirens woke Bolin and his team up. It wasn't a warning signal, but simply an alarm to assemble the forces. It was time for their mission.

Grunting to himself while groggy from sleep, Bolin sat up in his bed. On the lower bunk, Akito popped his head up saw Bolin. "Rise n' shine Team Leader!" He greeted.

Bolin managed to form a confident smile in return, "You too mecha pilot." He quickly got to his feet and changed into his uniform, along with his other teammates. They hadn't had a lot of sleep, only three hours or so, but after this mission they would have plenty of time to recover. Before leaving, Akito managed to pass around a quick shot of his tea blend, hoping to give them all an edge and fight their tiredness.

Soldiers poured out of the train in organised lines and groups, making their way to the wall by truck. The majority of them were to be briefed and led by Baatar if part of the ground forces, or Kuvira if part of the air fleet. Bolin and his team on the other hand, would be the first to depart as they needed to infiltrate the Upper Ring before a full-scale attack could be launched. Their convoy from the train station reached the Lower Ring wall, and the team hopped out.

Inside the headquarters, Kuvira and Baatar gave orders to soldiers around them. The sun had set a few hours ago, and below them in the Lower Ring there were massive floodlights to help everyone set up. Suyin also consulted her forces, who were preparing their airships for launch, and two airbenders Meng and Chao had arrived, both women not much older than Su's daughter Opal. Another soldier entered the room, addressing Kuvira, "Bolin and his team have arrived, sir!"

The three leaders left headquarters and saw Bolin and his team standing in a line waiting. Akito was already climbing into a mech suit, but managed to salute as Kuvira, Baatar, and Suyin came closer. "Soldiers," Kuvira addressed them, "We'll be counting on you."

"Radio us as soon as you've located the prisoners and Qiang's whereabouts. Kuvira and I will be on the other line," Suyin handed the radio to Bolin, who smiled assuredly in response. Su then placed a hand on Bolin's shoulder, "Please be careful. Remember what we've been practicing. And if anything happens at all, call us and we can come in." She glanced over at the three former barbarians, making sure they were out of earshot.

"We'll give you a headstart and then we'll be moving in," Kuvira informed. It would take about a full hour for their forces to reach the Upper Ring Wall, and they needed Qiang to keep his attention on them rather than their infiltration team. "Good luck."

Bolin's team all saluted before turning to the wall. After reaching the barrier, Bolin waved his hands to the side and with a team of other earthbenders, created an opening through the wall. It was better they create their own exit rather than leave through the metal gates in case they were being watched. On his way out, Guan glanced at Kuvira from behind his green-visor helmet. His leader gave a faint nod of reassurance. She was counting on him to keep a level head and be vigilant should anything happen.

"Well, I suppose we should start preparing to leave too," Suyin turned to Kuvira and Baatar. "I haven't mentioned anything about us being there to Bolin's team. I still don't know if we can trust Gombo and the others yet. Maybe Zaofu should just move in earlier?"

"I've taught Guan how to use your 'seismic sense' that you once taught me. It took him the two weeks to grasp it," Kuvira replied. Suyin gave a surprised look in return. Kuvira continued, "Guan will be able to confirm where the prisoners are in case they try and pull one on them. I don't trust Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah yet either, but we cannot act pre-emptively."

Suyin still wasn't convinced, even with Guan learning the seismic sense technique. She pondered for a moment before replying, "I still think it's risky, Kuvira. If anything changes we can swoop in and get them out."

"I'm hoping it doesn't go that way, but I'm counting on you too. Focus on getting the prisoners out first."

"Be safe too, Baatar," Suyin smiled fondly at her son. She was also concerned about him, and still found it hard to believe that her quiet and intellectual son was a capable fighter now. Suyin nodded again to both of them before leaving with her guard to the airships.

Baatar turned back to Kuvira, a longing smile forming across his cheeks. He couldn't hide his anxiety, but he still tried to put on a brave face, "Here it goes."

"Be careful," Kuvira replied. After a moment of gazing into each other's eyes, Kuvira and Baatar parted. Their physical embrace would have to wait.

Holding a telescope up to his eye, Qiang stared towards the Lower Ring wall. "So, they decided to attack at night aye?" He could see lines of Allied Forces troops, marching in tanks, mecha suits, and in trucks, as well as a row of ten airships hovering above.

"Maybe they think with the cover of night they can sneak their airships past?" one of Qiang's men suggested.

The barbarian king responded with an annoyed grunt. He turned to one of his soldiers near the canon, "Send 'em a warning shot. Aim for the first row of landmines, but don't hit their men directly." The man did as Qiang ordered, sending an explosive earth disc into the distance. It didn't reach the soldiers, instead landing in a minefield several blocks ahead of the Allied Forces.

"How goes the preparations?" Yatsu found the Barbarian King and his men along the wall. Behind him trailed a mountain of a man dressed in a dark cloak.

Qiang turned to face the two visitors, "Well there ain't much more time to prepare; their forces are approaching now. But I know what's going to happen next, so that gives us the advantage."

"I'm intrigued, Qiang. Do you care to share these insights with us?" Yatsu questioned. The other man behind him, Ju, remained silent.

"Let's just say that I have some inside knowledge of what Kuvira's plans are," Qiang didn't elaborate, but their attention was drawn to a group of prisoners being escorted up the stairs. "Ah, good," Qiang snickered.

Yatsu watched as prisoners in green uniform shuffled in, though towards the end of the line were some dressed in ordinary clothing. He narrowed his eyes, "King Qiang, these prisoners, are they not all Allied Forces soldiers? Where have these last few come from?"

Qiang didn't like the tone of Yatsu's questioning. He staired at the swordsman for a moment, "We kidnapped 'em from the Lower Ring of course. We've been sending raiding parties in to keep them occupied. But it turns out these prisoners are our best Pai Sho tile to play; Kuivra wants to rescue them before launching an attack."

"But they are innocent civilians. Do you not see the injustice manifested by your actions? The utter hypocrisy-"

"Quit you're blabbering! Did you not tell us that we could run New Ba Sing Se however we saw fit? Hmm? I thought that's what you people do?"

Yatsu cast his eyes downward; Qiang wasn't wrong, though it didn't sit well with Yatsu at all, "Of course Qiang; our goal is for the liberation of humanity, in giving the freedom of self-autonomy to those who have been without for too long."

"Well," Qiang strode over to Yatsu, "perhaps you should stop questioning me and get on with helping us instead!" Qiang barked. He motioned to the canons along the wall ahead of them, "I need you two to protect our wall canons; if we lose 'em, we ain't got no hope of holding out against Kuvira's air fleet." The barbarian king took off back to the mansion, followed by a couple guards.

Yatsu didn't bother responding, simply glaring at the king as we marched away. Perhaps his hunch about the outcome of this battle was right. He knew that he could leave at any time, and it wasn't like Qiang actually had a hold over him. But after all he and Ju had invested into keeping Ba Sing Se liberated, it was hard to abandon things now, even if it did clash with his conscience.

The journey on foot had taken a bit longer than Bolin had hoped, but then again, they couldn't exactly travel very fast without drawing attention to themselves. They'd heard a landmine go off a few minutes ago, courtesy of Qiang's wall canons, and Bolin only hoped that the explosion hadn't injured anyone. The team had marched through the vine-covered ruins of the Middle Ring, and now approached a grassy mound. The once bustling Middle Ring was now a wasteland of broken homes and scattered rubble, with nature reclaiming the land.

Gombo kept walking towards the hill, and then motioned for Bolin and Guan to walk over, "Behind this wall is a tunnel. It leads to Qiang's base, and the prisons are just ahead from the opening."

"Good work," Bolin complimented. He and Guan pulled the arms downward to lower a stone wall. "What do you know? It is a tunnel."

"I thought you said you had a way through the landmines?" Guan looked to Gombo.

"It is. The landmine field is above us, while this tunnel leads underneath 'em," Gombo defended. "Just don't touch the roof of the tunnel in case, well, some of the mines are buried deep into the surface." He then looked to an open-roof satomobile parked near the tunnel entrance, "We used to take this tunnel when going out on raids, and we'd always have satomobiles at either end. We can take this one and get to the base faster. Though, I don't know if your metal suit will fit Akito."

Guan looked at the satomobile; it could indeed fit six people, with two of them hanging on the boot, but there was no way Akito's mecha suit would fit as well. "Akito could run with his suit?" Guan proposed.

Ahnah shook her head, "Do you think you can run at a hundred kilometres an hour? We'll be speeding pretty quick through the tunnels. We do want to make it before the battle begins, right?"

"I'll do it," Akito replied from the mecha suit. He walked the suit over to the side of the tunnel entrance and started climbed out.

Guan narrowed his eyes. This was exactly what he was afraid of. "Before we take off, I think it would be good to inform Kuvira what's happening," Guan suggested. He walked over to Bolin, who handed him the radio, though as he tried speaking through the receiver there was only static.

"I don't think there'll be very good reception in the tunnel," Gombo spoke.

"I'll only be a few seconds outside then," Guan replied. While the others began hoping into the satomobile, the metalbender walked out and around to the side of the tunnel entrance.

This was starting to feel suspicious. There must have been other ways around the landmine field, and yet Gombo chose this route underground where their radio would have trouble connecting, and a means of transportation that would remove Akito's mecha suit from the equation. Breathing in deeply, Guan tried to calm himself. He then stomped into the ground, sensing the vibrations around him. After a short moment, he could see roughly where the tunnel led.

Guan picked up the radio and made contact with Kuvira and Suyin, "It's officer Guan. Gombo and the others have shown us to a tunnel which leads directly to the Upper Ring. The reception is bad in there so I won't be able to radio back for a while. I'm not sure if it's because we're underground or because of some kind of interference. We'll be travelling in a satomobile they had at the tunnel entrance, and so Akito won't be able to take his mecha suit. We should be there in five minutes or so."

Kuvira didn't respond at first; perhaps she too thought their circumstances were suspicious. "Keep your guard up. We'll be approaching the wall soon and will try make contact with Qiang to buy you some time," Kuvira informed.

"Thank you, sir. I have to go," Guan heard Gombo yelling from the satomobile and put the radio down. None of this was ideal, but perhaps all he could do was inform Kuvira of where the underground tunnel ended and hope for a rescue. It's not like he could just disagree with Gombo and the others before even finding the prisoners. The former barbarians didn't know that Suyin and Zaofu would be sneaking in to rescue the prisoners, so they at least had that to bank on should things take a turn for the worse. Guan climbed into the vehicle, and the group sped off into the darkness.

Their satomobile kicked up a trail of dust as it sped along. There wasn't much anyone could talk about over the sound of the vehicle, not that there was much to say anyway. They all knew what they had to do.

After another few minutes, Bolin could see the end. There was a metal ladder along the rock face with a gate at the top, letting in a small amount of moonlight. Wherever it led, they would be on the surface again.

With the vehicle grinding to a halt, Gombo stepped out, "Up there. It's a few paces in from the wall, and then opens up to the Upper Ring."

Bolin studied the entrance from the ground for a moment, "Well, let's get going then."

Gombo was about to start climbing the ladder before Bolin raised a pillar of earth underneath the six of them. Although slightly surprised, Gombo grinned, "I forgot you two were earthbenders. Alright," his expression became more serious, "through this gate there may be patrols along the streets. The prison is to our right, but there's another one to the left closer to the wall as well."

"So, we bust out once the coast is clear, and then confirm that building to the right is the prison?" Bolin suggested. The others nodded in agreement. The gate separating them was made of platinum, so Bolin formed a lava shuriken and started grinding through the bars. They couldn't risk alerting anyone by opening the gate fully. They could hear a group rushing past on the other side however, and Guan grabbed Bolin's arm and pushed them both to the ground.

"Get to the wall!" a barbarian screamed to his subordinates, who ran behind their commander. Once the coast was clear, Bolin started cutting through the bars again.

"Kuvira must have arrived at the wall then," Akito mused. "We don't have long."

After finishing their opening, Bolin followed the three former barbarians into the Upper Ring. In this part of the city there wasn't much cover as most of the dwellings had large gardens and parks surrounding them. It would be tough to sneak in like this, even under the cloudy night sky. Eventually, they pulled up behind a decorative stone wall along the path. The prison building was right ahead of them. "So this is it? Hmm... how do we get in?"

Bolin's thoughts were interrupted by another group of barbarians marching down the road. In this group were several mecha suits, each with green war paint over their exterior to signify their allegiance to Qiang. Gombo looked back to the group, "There's no way we can sneak past them! Let's go back to the second prison first," he whispered.

"We still need to confirm that the prisoners are in there," Guan reminded. The sound of the barbarians grew louder, and he knew he didn't have much time. He quickly stomped into the ground, sensing the vibrations coming from the prison. Though after a moment, Guan realised that he couldn't sense anyone inside. Not even prison guards. He glanced back to Gombo, "There's no one inside."

The large man pondered for a moment. The three of them all seemed a little surprised at Guan using his earthbending to 'see' inside the prison. "They must've moved 'em," Gombo replied after a pause. "But there's still the other prison. We should go there-"

"That's awfully convenient," Guan blurted out. He narrowed his eyes at the three in front of him.

"We haven't been back here for almost three weeks!" Ahnah retorted with a harsh whisper. "There are several buildings where prisoners are kept. This was the main one, but there are others."

"Look, we can't fight amongst ourselves," Bolin tried to intervene. He shifted his gaze over to Guan, who still looked suspicious at the other three.

Baraz glanced towards the lavabender, "Then what do we do now?"

Bolin felt everyone's eyes on him. Guan was clearly untrusting of the other three, though Bolin still didn't know what to think. They couldn't exactly send Guan around the entire Upper Ring checking for the prisoners. And although he shared the same sinking suspicions that Guan did about Gombo and the others, nothing had been confirmed yet. Still, he couldn't just let them walk into a trap. Bolin breathed in deeply, trying to clear his mind and focus only on what lay ahead. "We call Su – I mean, Kuvira, and tell her where we're heading, yeah. We can't go round and check every building for where the prisoners are, but we can check out this second prison first."

Thankfully no one picked up on Bolin nearly mentioning Suyin's name. Bolin turned to Guan, who reluctantly nodded in agreement. Their mission was to find the prisoners, and as much as Guan didn't like it, they had to go along with Gombo and the others' plan until they did find them.

Picking up the radio, Guan made the call to Suyin and Kuvira, "Sir, we couldn't find the prisoners where we thought we would. There's a second prison, it's near a three-storey house adjacent to the wall, with a small lake to the north," Guan tried to give as many details as he could. He knew Suyin was also on the line, but with Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah nearby he couldn't exactly tell Suyin to come in and save them.

Bolin seemed to pick up on Guan's hint, but thankfully it had flown under the radar for the others. "Okay, let's get moving then," Bolin ordered. The group of barbarians were close now, but they still had a chance to dash across the road and into the bushes.

In the skies to the east, Suyin and her Zaofu guard had begun flying over the Upper Ring. Their two airbenders, Meng and Chao, swirled the dark clouds around and under the two airships. It had already started to rain, which would also help give them cover.

"It was good we launched from behind the Middle Ring wall. Otherwise, they might have seen us," Wei mentioned to Suyin. Wei and Wing were Suyin's youngest children and had decided to accompany the Zaofu Guard on this mission.

Suyin turned to her twins, "You both need to be careful; this isn't an ordinary mission, and these barbarians are dangerous."

Wing smirked, "Mom, this is us you're talking about."

"I hope Baatar is okay," Suyin thought out loud. Wing and Wei seemed a little begrudging at the mention of their older brother, and they certainly weren't as forgiving as their mother was. Nonetheless, they also found it hard to imagine Baatar on the front lines of a war. Perhaps he really had changed a lot since he left Zaofu.

"Suyin, Ma'am. We're approaching the Upper Ring wall," a guard reported.

The Zaofu Matriarch nodded. Something still didn't sit right with her though. They'd just heard Guan over the radio tell them they couldn't find the prisoners, and that they were heading to a 'second' prison near the wall. But why did he give such specific details about where they were heading? Surely a more detailed description of their pickup point would have been more necessary than a second prison? Suyin couldn't shake the feeling that something was off, especially with everything that Guan had reported earlier about their journey into the Upper Ring. Grabbing her own radio, Suyin called Kuvira, "I think Bolin and his team are in trouble, Kuvira. Maybe... maybe we should move in."

On the other line, Kuvira paused for a moment before replying, "I also share your concerns Su. But if you move in then we won't be able to rescue you."

"I know," Suyin replied. It was a gamble. They only had two airships, and there were plenty of wall canons to take them out if they were discovered. "The prisoners can't be too far from where their camp is. Wing and Wei could drop down with one airship and search for them; most of the barbarians close to the wall, and so if they're careful they won't get caught. I'll lead our other airship and drop in to where Bolin and the others are heading."

"Send in one airship with Wing and Wei, but make sure you stay out of sight for as long as you can, and only intervene when you've found the prisoners or if Bolin and his team are in danger. We'll keep Qiang occupied at the wall."

The radio went silent, and Suyin sighed. At least they had the green light to move in. She turned to her twin sons, "Be careful you two. Radio me if you find them." The pair nodded and made their way to the door, creating a metal gangplank to the other airship. "Meng, we'll be heading to the Upper Ring soon. Send Chao with the other airship," Suyin directed the airbender. She nodded and left.

Below their airship, a lone barbarian soldier stood next to a canon. While most of his comrades had been redeployed to the western wall, he'd been instructed to keep this side safe instead. It was rather boring and frustrating, especially since he could hear the sounds of his friends firing off a canon on the other side of the palace while he had to stay here, staring up at the night clouds. The clouds did look strange though, drifting quite low to the wall. Before he could examine further, several metal cables shot through the fog and snatched him away.

Back on her airship, Suyin made sure the canon operator was well restrained. She then looked out the door to their other airship, giving them the signal to proceed. It would take some time to fly over their side of the Upper Ring and the Royal Palace, but soon they would be right behind Qiang and his forces. Suyin only hoped Bolin could hold out until then.

Kuvira watched from her airship as the Allied Forces made it to the Upper Ring wall. They were close enough to see the canons mounted all along, and the hordes of barbarians guarding them. "That's enough," Kuvira instructed the pilot. She could see the ground forces marching ahead of them, and they too stopped where they were. There was still some distance between them and the wall, but now they were in range of Qiang's canons.

On the ground, Baatar raised his mecha suit hand. The soldiers behind him readied themselves; those at the front erected earth barriers and metal shields, the mecha pilots stood behind, and the tank crews aimed their canons at the wall. Even though Qiang's wall canons were useful in shooting down airships, Baatar knew they would be sitting turtle ducks on the ground for their fire as well.

Back in Kuvira's airship, the radio team began searching for a frequency within the Upper Ring. "See if you can reach them. We need to buy our infiltration team some more time," Kuvira ordered. It took a few seconds, but eventually their radio connected. Kuvira pulled up the receiver, "This is Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom and Commander of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, Kuvira. Am I speaking with Qiang?"

There was crackling static before a voice was heard, "I'm a king. But yer, it's me."

"Release the prisoners you have captive and surrender. We have superior forces to yours, and we will not hesitate to engage."

"You 'will not hesitate' to attack? That's ain't what I heard. I heard that you were so concerned with their safety that you put together an infiltration team using three of my men to guide them," there was a loud cackle on the other line. It seemed their suspicions about Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah were right. "Pity. They won't find the prisoners where we normally keep 'em. And I think I might hang onto them for a while longer. They're my only bargaining tile left. Turn around, Kuvira. You don't belong here. This is New Ba Sing Se, and we govern ourselves!"

She still needed to buy a little more time. Suyin hadn't reported back yet, and they were probably just arriving above Qiang's base now. It would still be some time before they found the prisoners, if they did. "We won't be backing down. Even if we lose this battle our troops will return to our Lower Ring post. The rest of the Earth Kingdom has been freed and so we will devote ourselves to liberating Ba Sing Se. Even the other world leaders will eventually join us. What will you do when the whole world surrounds you and your clan?"

There was a laugh on the other line, "Hah! But you haven't got the other world leaders on your side, do you? You came here all confident with your shiny new army, but you know that you can't win against us."

"The other world leaders will join our campaign in time."

"You really think that? Maybe they see through you. You're just some young southerner with delusions of grandeur! Us in the north have always felt the brunt of the monarchy's greed, and we can tell a dictator when we see one. We were the ones that freed Ba Sing Se and created a new empire in its place, not you, not your army, nor anyone else!"

Kuvira turned the receiver off for a moment as a soldier approached, "Sir, we just got word from Suyin. The Zaofu Guard have located a group of prisoners and are escorting them onto an airship. The prisoners claim there are others who were taken elsewhere yesterday."

"Good," Kuvira replied. At least she wouldn't have to worry about talking with Qiang much longer, but then there were now other prisoners unaccounted for. She had to take the upper hand. "You seem to think you have me and our plan all figured out Qiang. But did you really think I would reveal our entire plan to your three subordinates?"

"You're desperate now."

"Am I? We've located and retrieved one group of your prisoners, but there are others you've relocated yesterday. Hand them over and surrender, this is your final warning."

There was a pause on the other side. Perhaps Qiang was checking with his men to verify what she had said. "Fine. If you want them back, then here yer go."

At first, Kuvira had no idea what Qiang meant by that. But after looking through their telescope, she noticed a row of prisoners moving to the edge of the wall. She quickly grabbed the radio again, "Qiang, stop this! Let them go!"

"Don't worry, I ain't dropping 'em from the wall." Qiang replied. After he spoke, his men lowered the prisoners down the other side of the wall on earth platforms. When they reached the ground, the group began running towards the Allied Forces, though with their hands bound it was still hard to move.

There was no way Qiang would give up like this. There had to be something going on. After a few seconds, Kuvira saw just what Qiang's plan was; several gates opened up in the wall, and rows of armadillo lions emerged from inside. Kuvira couldn't see the animals in great detail from the airship, but after a few seconds they started chasing the fleeing prisoners as they ran. "Ground forces! Move in to rescue the prisoners!"

Before Kuvira could say anymore, one of their airships took an explosive shot from Qiang's wall canons. "Enemy has engaged! Move in!" Kuvira continued to watch as the canons turned on their ground forces too, firing onto their mecha tanks and soldiers hiding beneath their defences. With the prisoners fleeing the armadillo lions and the wall canons firing on her troops, Kuvira knew she had to take control of the situation now.

As their group snuck around another corner, the sound of explosions came from the wall. "They've started firing already?" Bolin observed. They were supposed to have rescued all the prisoners before the battle began.

"Let's keep going then!" Gombo whispered to the others. He led the group further through the gardens, stopping and hiding from the occasional barbarian sprinting down the adjacent street. Thankfully the night was cloudy. The group waited a moment longer before moving again.

There was a small stream to leap over and another clump of bushes and trees on the other side, and once across, Bolin noticed that there weren't any guards outside this prison. Perhaps they'd left to engage Kuvira? Either way, it seemed strange that this three-storey golden-tiled mansion would be a prison. Before he could object, Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah were already leading the way inside. With the coast clear, the six of them pried open the front door and snuck inside.

The mansion's interior was filled with golden ornaments and expensive furniture, though it was clear it had been occupied by a large group with the mess lying around. Strangely enough, the main living area was also empty, though Guan and Bolin noticed several pairs of shackles to the left by the door. "Perhaps they've taken the prisoners elsewhere?" Bolin thought as he examined the empty room.

"Or maybe this isn't a prison," Guan retorted. Before he could say anything else, several mecha suits appeared at the top of the interior balcony. They had painted markings on them, and a group of their barbarian comrades flooded the staircase to the living quarters. Guan tried to reach for his metal cables but a whack to the head sent him stumbling back and his helmet clattering from the floor. As he looked up, he realised the hit came from Gombo.

"What?!" Akito cried out while watching Gombo attack Guan. Before he could react, Ahnah smashed an ice hunk over his head. Bolin caught the mecha pilot as he fell, but Baraz kicked Bolin to the ground. Guan had managed to recover but Gombo's punches were ferocious. In Guan's dazed state, Gombo managed to trip the metalbender and send a downwards elbow into Guan's chest.

Bolin and Akito tried to break free from Ahnah and Baraz, but they held them in place on their knees with an ice blade and fire daggers to their throats. Deep down, Bolin knew he had seen the signs, but he had never wanted to accept that the three of them were traitors. His stomach sank as he realised what was happening, "I thought you were on our side? What about all our training-"

"Shut up!" Ahnah interrupted. "We were never going to join you. I honestly can't believe that you fell for that 'Mom in the northern village' crap that I pulled for the radio call. You really are so dull."

"You're making a mistake!" Akito tried to intervene.

"Keep quiet too! You're even worse than Bolin," Gombo hurled a punch at the mecha pilot while trying to restrain Guan. The silence seemed to last forever as they waited, presumably for Qiang to meet them. All Guan, Bolin, and Akito could do was replay everything that had just happened. How did they get into this mess?

Eventually, the hulking barbarian king strode his way onto the balcony. His expression was seething with fury, and his eyes bored holes into the six of them on the lower floor.

"My King, we captured 'em just like we said we would," Gombo addressed Qiang with a salute on his chest, as did Baraz and Ahnah. "They also didn't get to the prisoners; we led 'em here instead."

At first Qiang said nothing, to the surprise of the three traitors. His eyes continued to glare even deeper into their souls, and Gombo realised something wasn't right. "Haven't got to the prisoners you say?! Then why don't you call the guards and ask them why they aren't responding!" his voice boomed and echoed through the mansion. Qiang could see that they didn't understand so he continued, "You were followed you idiots! Kuvira sent in airships to your location! They've taken away one lot of prisoners and now they've started shooting us on the wall!"

None of the three could say anything, simply stunned by this news. "It was bad enough that your entire unit were taken in by Kuvira, but after I received your intel I thought, yeah, maybe I could forgive you for your incompetence. But you couldn't even pull off this blindside properly either. You three really are pathetic! If it weren't for my own brilliant planning in throwing the prisoners to the armadillo lions, then we'd have no hope at all."

"King Qiang, we told you where they would be attacking from and what their plans were!" Ahnah yelled back, gripping Akito tighter in her anger.

"And I thank you for your contribution," Qiang bowed. "But I won't let your incompetence go unpunished. Capture the three of them. Do whatever you want with Kuvira's toys."

Gombo, Ahnah, and Baraz stood shocked for a moment. How could their leader be doing this? Sure, they hadn't realised Kuvira had airships following them, but they did everything they could to support Qiang?

Before any of them could respond, Guan began cackling from the floor, his laughter echoing through the room. Even Qiang seemed surprised at his outburst and waiting around a moment longer. "How sad. You three spent all this time scheming and pretending, only to crawl back to your leader who doesn't even want you anymore!"

Gombo wasn't having a bar of it; he kneed Guan in the face and sent him sprawling on the floor, though the metalbender didn't give up, "Y'know, the best part is that none of you realise our full plan either."

Grabbing him by the collar, Gombo yanked the man into the air. Even with the barbarians flooding into the room ready to capture them, Gombo couldn't stop the fury burning up inside him towards Guan. For weeks he'd been putting up with his condescending and fake attitude, waiting to get his chance to take him down. But was there more to what Guan was saying? Gombo glared into Guan's green eyes, thinking through everything that he'd just said. There was that radio call that he made describing Qiang's mansion in great detail, and if there were another airship sent in to rescue the prisoners, that could mean they also had others. "Qiang, I think they know where we are-"

Metal cables shot through the glass windows, sending shards raining down on the six of them. Gombo looked to his wrist, now entangled by the cable, but before he could react his body was flung back into the wall. Baraz and Ahnah were apprehended as the metalbenders swung in. It was the Zaofu guard.

Qiang grimaced from the upper balcony, furious by their further incompetence in leading Zaofu here. "Kill them all!" he bellowed. As he tried to make his way back a metal cable whizzed past his head and struck the doorframe. The fuming king spun around and saw the matriarch of Zaofu landing onto the floor, staring back. Qiang pulled out his swords.

After retracting her cable, Suyin crouched down and helped Bolin to his feet, "Are you alright?" she asked. The other two were also helped up by Zaofu guards, while Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah were chained to the wall.

"Yeah, I'm alright," Bolin turned his gaze to the swam of barbarians ahead of them.

Suyin saw that Qiang was readying himself to attack. "I'm going to end this and go after Qiang. Back me up Bolin." Bolin readied himself next to her, the pair staring down their opponent. Although their plan was far from executed well, they'd cornered the barbarian king. Now, they had a chance to end things.

Chapter Text

Unleashing a furious cry, Qiang leapt from the mezzanine and slammed onto the lower floor. The barbarian king held his own despite being surrounded by the Zaofu guard, slashing each of their cables away. With a quick extension of his index fingers, each of his swords morphed into deadly chain blades, gashing several guards. He shot a blade end towards Gombo chained against the wall, but a burning orange disc blocked his attack. It had come from Bolin. "So you must be the lavabender, Bolin?" Qiang called out after retracting his swords. "Bolin, Suyin, and Kuvira. I have a special place on my mantel for each of your heads!"

By now many barbarian reinforcements had swarmed into the room, forcing the Zaofu guard to hide behind marble floor barriers. With their smaller force, Suyin knew they had to find a way to break their lines and move in. "Bolin, I'll cover you and when you get a chance, force them back with a wall of lava," she turned to Bolin, who nodded. With her eyes narrowed and determined, Suyin jumped out from their wall and flung chunks of earth. With the many earthbenders in their clan, the barbarians blocked most of her attacks. The rest of the Zaofu guard followed Suyin's lead, picking up their barriers and launching them forwards.

Each of the attacks were once again blocked with earthen walls of their own, though through the clouds of dust Qiang could see an orange glow forming in front of them. Before he could warn his men, a searing hot wall of magma slid forth. The barbarian king whipped his sword into cable and climbed back up to the mezzanine, while his subordinates tried to block the molten attack. After the lava cooled, the Zaofu guard moved in and started apprehending the panicked barbarians.

"Stand your ground!" Qiang bellowed at his men. He turned to the mecha suits next to him, "Give 'em some electricity!" The mechs whirred as they moved into position.

Blue forks of electricity burst forth from the mecha suits, catching one unfortunate Zaofu guard by surprise, the man crying and passing out from the attack. Before the mech could launch another attack, Bolin flung a lava shuriken into the electricity generator, exploding the device and knocking Qiang and the mecha suit over.

Suyin shot her cables onto the roof and grabbed Bolin, pulling them both onto the mezzanine right next to Qiang. A two-on-one fight would end things quicker, though by no means was the barbarian king going down easily.

Qiang leapt back on his feet, slashing the air wildly with his blades. Suyin managed to counter with a cable whip while Bolin dodged Qiang's swords. The barbarian king grunted as he took Suyin's cable to the shoulder. He quickly braced himself as Bolin pushed an earth wall towards him. His swords slashed the attack in pieces, and with a quick pivot, he brought both his blades together and lunged forwards. Bolin quickly formed lava disc to block the swords, though Qiang's attacks were not only fast but also carried an immense power behind them, shattering through Bolin's defence and nearly gashing his stomach.

On the ground floor, Guan and Akito managed to stand on their feet. Although injured, Guan knew they had to help somehow. "Akito, we should lead a group to the wall canons," he turned to the mecha pilot, but quickly ducked as another barrage of flame and electricity exploded next to them.

"Okay, but first I need a mecha suit," Akito responded. His eyes darted across the room, noticing an enemy mecha pilot marching just in front of them. Guan tried to reach out and stop him, but Akito charged forward and ducked under the mecha suit's punches. With a barrel roll to the right, Akito was now on the other side of the mech, and swiftly jumped onto its back. Guan almost couldn't believe what he was seeing as Akito clambered and held on like a spider cat, and despite the barbarian pilot's swinging around, he couldn't shake Akito off.

Pulling out a spanner, Akito stabbed in between the metal plating near the visor. "Hmm... should be here!" Akito thought out loud. His tinkering managed to flip the mecha suit's visor open, all while the barbarian pilot desperately tried to close it.

"Hey! Mind if I borrow this?" Akito taunted as he clocked the barbarian in the head with his spanner. After pushing him out, Akito climbed inside the mecha suit. Unfortunately, he'd broken the visor so his head would be unprotected, but at least the weapons were still working. After taking out a couple of nearby barbarians, Guan and Akito led a group towards the wall. If they could take out some of the barbarian's canons, then Kuvira and the airship fleet could move in and back them up.

Meanwhile, Qiang's duel had progressed into the upper hallways near the mezzanine. The barbarian king tried desperately to fend off Suyin and Bolin's attacks, though both of them were quick with their strikes. Qiang ducked as another shuriken spun past, cutting through an exquisite ink painting behind him instead. With his attention occupied, Suyin shot a cable forth to snare Qiang's legs. It was close, but her cable just missed as Qiang leapt to the right. A scowl burned on the barbarian's face as he lunged forwards.

Instead of using both his swords, with one hand he cracked a marble pillar and rolled it at Bolin while aiming a sword for the Zaofu matriarch. Bolin stomped forwards and smashed the pillar with a fist, while Suyin parried the sword blade with her armour. They had Qiang cornered and outnumbered, but just like a wild animal, that was when he fought hardest.

Baatar had thought Qiang was capable of terrible things, but the scene in front of him was nothing short of a horrific nightmare. With widened eyes he stared as the prisoners fled from the armadillo lions, the ravenous beasts charging relentlessly. Not all were lucky enough to escape.

"Baatar, sir!"

A soldier next to him grabbed his attention. Baatar looked to his side, his eyes locking with Lieutenant Yasuko's. Their forces had already moved in with their shields kept high to block enemy fire, though now they'd realised there were pitfalls dug all along the stretch towards the wall. One poor woman fell through the ground while running, and soon after, an armadillo lion dove into the pit as soldiers desperately tried to hold it back. Qiang had a reputation for being cruel, but this was something else.

"We need to advance!" Baatar snapped back into action. As he shut his mecha suit visor, several soldiers in front deflected an explosive disc fired their way. Lieutenant Yasuko called back to another squadron, leading them behind Baatar as he marched.

In the skies above, another airship took a direct hit. As the flames engulfed its exterior, the soldiers on board evacuated on cables to the ground or neighbouring airships. Suyin's team hadn't made much progress in taking out the wall canons, and Kuvira knew they had to do something.

She motioned for their current canon bearer to step aside, aiming the weapon towards the wall herself. With a metal disc inside loaded, Kuvira tilted the canon and fired. Her shot struck the wall just below one of the canons. The other soldier looked slightly perplexed as Kuvira fired two more discs in the same location, seemly doing nothing against the massive wall canon. After a fourth disc, the weakened wall gave way, dragging down the wall canon and its crew, nearly taking out a second canon if the remaining barbarians hadn't saved it.

A soldier ran through to the canon room, saluting before addressing their leader, "Kuvira! We've lost another airship. Should we move in?"

There was a pause in the air as Kuvira pondered what to do. "No, we'll stay on the defensive for now. There'll be an opening when our forces get to the canons. Then we can back them up." Moving in too soon would cost them many airships, especially with the number of wall canons the barbarians still had. She didn't like it but staying back seemed like the best idea for now.

With a rage-filled war cry, Qiang slashed about with his chain blades. The upper floors were mainly constructed out of wood so there wasn't much earth to bend, but the barbarian king was skilled with his weapons. Qiang's attacks clashed with Bolin's shuriken, the last he had left. Still, Bolin and Suyin had Qiang on the defensive for the most part.

As the pair forced Qiang backwards down another hallway, Suyin lashed a cable past Qiang's shoulder. Though it missed Qiang himself, the Zaofu matriarch pulled herself along and planted a kick into Qiang's face. With Qiang surrounded now, Bolin and Suyin took a moment to catch their breath as Qiang recovered and held a defensive stance.

Even with his technique, Qiang was losing this fight. He quickly spun his swords around to force Suyin and Bolin back, and then cut a hole in the ceiling and launched himself up.

"He's getting away!" Bolin called out.

Suyin swiftly pulled the two of them up on cables through the opening. After landing on the third floor, the pair could see Qiang had also cut through to the roof. After another launch, Bolin and Suyin made it outside.

Without giving them a chance to prepare, Qiang lunged his blades towards Suyin, forcing her to the edge of the roof. With the cloudy skies above it was hard to see the incoming sword strikes, as the metal blades only caught short glimpses of the moonlight. He then feinted another swipe, and afterwards grabbed a hold of the golden roof tiles with outstretched fingers. Bolin panicked as the tiles slid beneath him, toppling the lavabender towards the ground.

Seeing Bolin fall, Suyin shot a cable around his waist and leapt from the building. Using her own momentum from falling, Suyin retracted the cable holding Bolin and launched him back towards Qiang, landing on the ground herself. Bolin flew through the air back onto the golden tiles, and punched Qiang in the face. The stunned king toppling over the edge, with several wooden balconies breaking the fall as he landed on the ground.

Stomping forwards with an outstretched fist, Suyin encased the barbarian king in earth. "It's over now," Suyin panted in between her words.

Qiang managed to look up from his prison, still gasping and recovering from his fall. He noticed Bolin make his way to the ground as well, but he wasn't the only one to join them. "Is it?" he smirked to himself.

"Look out!" Bolin heard a mechanical whirling sound from behind, ducking himself and Suyin out the way. Two barbarian mecha suits had followed the trio to their battle outside, now aiming their flamethrowers at Bolin and Suyin. The pair blocked each attack, creating a wall of earth to duck behind the flames. However, the mechs' attacks were relentless, with their flames breaking away the pair's defences.

Seeing his opponents pinned down, Qiang heaved his earth prison apart. His body was still throbbing from the fall, though he had enough energy to continue. As he moved in to attack Suyin and Bolin however, he noticed the ground around the pair melting into lava. While Suyin was holding their barrier up, Bolin was creating a lava moat. Qiang jumped back to avoid the searing hot magma, though the mecha suits weren't so lucky. While they were focused on firing their flamethrowers, Bolin's attack melted the ground around their legs, sinking them into the earth.

As the mechs struggled, Bolin cooled the earth once their legs were submerged. It would take some time for them to break out, so for now it had returned to a two-on-one battle again. Qiang cursed before lashing his sword out as a distraction. He then turned his other weapon into a cable and pulled himself towards the wall.

After dodging his first strike, Suyin and Bolin kept on Qiang's tail. Leaping onto the wall themselves, the pair sprinted along until they reached their own forces engaging the barbarians. Both the guard and the barbarians had set up barriers to block each other's attacks, and projectile discs and metal shards were flung from either direction. Qiang had somehow propelled himself over and behind his forces, locking eyes with Suyin as he glared from across their battlefield. "We need to push through!" the Zaofu matriarch ordered her guard. The earthbenders slowly grinded their defences forwards, hoping to gain ground against the barbarians.

Bolin noticed Akito and Guan near a barrier to the side. After dodging an incoming earth disc, he crouched while dashing over to his comrades. "Akito! Guan!"

"Team Leader!" Akito called out from his mech suit. He quickly ducked as a disc exploded against his suit. Given that his visor was broken, he couldn't block attacks like he normally would. "What should we do?"

Another blast forced the trio to hide behind their barrier. Peering round the side of the defence, Bolin could just see Qiang behind several canons and rows of barbarians. They needed a way to break their lines, but with so much incoming fire it would be impossible to push through on top of the wall.

"Bolin, can you melt through a segment of the wall?" Guan suggested. "I can swing you down on a cable."

The lavabender pondered, "We'll need a distraction. Otherwise, they'll see me right away. Akito, can you blow up one of the canons from here?"

"If I can land a shot on their stockpiled ammunition then maybe..."

"Well, it's the best we've got. We'll cover you!" It wasn't much of a plan, but Bolin knew they had to try something. After heaving a boulder with Guan over at their enemy, Akito lined up his shot. A fork of lightning burst from his mech's gauntlet, piercing through the air and striking a pile of explosive discs. The fiery explosion blew one canon out of commission, sending barbarian troops sprawling in either direction.

With the explosion and smoke obscuring the barbarians' view, Guan lowered Bolin by cable along the wall, swinging him a good distance ahead. The lavabender punched forwards an indent to give him some space, and with a clench of his fingers the bricks in the wall glowed bright orange and sizzled, melting into magma that seeped through the cracks. Before long, the wall began collapsing under the canons. Those barbarians near the front noticed the bricks beneath them glowing, and with panicked cries, ran to the barriers behind them. Several of their wall canons had been abandoned.

Once the molten earth cooled, Suyin and the Zaofu Guard charged in. Sliding their earth walls along for cover, the metalbenders launched hunks of earth over their heads at the barbarians. Guan managed to swing Bolin back onto the wall, who also created a barrier. With his cable still attached to Bolin, Guan propelled himself forwards while launching metal shards from his armour, taking out another barbarian. Akito also caught up with the group, knocking over a straggler with a mighty mechanical punch.

With several more canons taken out, the Allied Forces airships had begun moving in. Three ships engaged the barbarian artillery remaining, taking heavy hits from the explosive discs, though still managing to hold their own. With their attacks coming from the skies and the wall, the barbarian forces were pushed back even further. Upon seeing his army lose ground, Qiang narrowed his eyes. This wasn't going well.

An explosive disc went off up ahead, and Suyin knew they had to act. While the Zaofu Guard covered, Suyin leapt over to Bolin and his team behind their barrier, "Let's go!". The Zaofu matriarch struck her cables into the enemy barrier and pulled herself towards them, destroying their defence with a kick. Bolin erected a wall to block the onslaught of attacks aimed at them, while Guan flicked metal plates around the barbarians taken out by Suyin.

A mech began spewing an inferno from its gauntlet, though Akito landed a kick with his suit. The mech stumbled backwards before Akito rammed both the pilot and suit off the wall. Now, the four of them were surrounded by barbarians, but much closer to Qiang and his last two bodyguards.

They still had to get past this last line of barbarians though. The three earthbenders launched themselves and Akito over the last of the barbarians, landing right in front of the stunned king. Thankfully another airship was keeping those barbarians behind them engaged, allowing Suyin and the others to focus on the enemy ahead.

"Yatsu! Ju! Take 'em out!" Qiang bellowed at the two men next to him. One unsheathed a katana, while the other revealed a shiny metal prosthetic arm.

Guan formed his own blade and clashed with Yatsu, but it was only now that he was close he could see the swordsman was also wearing electrified gloves. Before he could retreat, Guan felt a sharp jolt shooting through his arm and the rest of his body. Bolin quickly dove in to block another attack with his lava shuriken, though Yatsu was swift with his strikes. His sword crackled with electricity, each of his swipes only barely missing the lavabender.

Akito had his hands full with the other opponent. He tried landing a punch, but the man named Ju had blocked his attack. The mecha's mechanical arm whirred as it tried to push forwards against Ju's arm, but the man's strength was something else. Ju stomped a pillar of earth into Akito's suit, knocking the mecha pilot back. It seemed this man wasn't just powerful because of his own strength, but was using metalbending to reinforce his prosthetic arm.

With her cables lashing at both opponents, Suyin tried to help Bolin and Akito with their battles. She managed to trip Ju, but the massive man recovered quickly, glaring at the Zaofu matriarch with an intense stare. Before he could try anything, Akito managed to land a punch to Ju's chest. Bolin was still dodging Yatsu's swift and deadly slashes, though a sheet of metal flicked around the swordsman's ankle and threw him back. Guan managed to stumble to his feet beside Bolin, "Suyin, go on ahead. It's three on two here."

"Right," Suyin nodded. She could see the barbarian king fleeing further along the wall and if she didn't get to him now, he could disappear and escape them.

There were screams and shots firing everywhere. The horrific and bloodcurdling howls of the armadillo lions as they charged at everyone. Here on the ground beneath the wall, it felt like Koh's Realm had opened up on them.

Baatar kept a ravenous beast at bay while another prisoner fled, while the armadillo lion roaring a furious cry as at swiped at the mecha suit. While the suit's armour blocked most of the blows, their vicious attacks had significant power behind them.

Many of their ground tanks had been fired upon by the barbarian wall canons earlier, forcing the mecha tanks and foot soldiers to move in and rescue the fleeing prisoners. To top all that off, the ground tanks that did survive had driven right into the pitfalls, some being dived on by the armadillo lions. Qiang had probably intended this to be merely a distraction while his wall forces drove them back, but this 'distraction' was proving difficult to resolve.

A line of mecha suits fired electricity at an armadillo lion, and the creature howled as it collapsed. It seemed the lightning and flamethrowers were best against them, since their body armour blocked most of their metal and earth attacks. Another mech escorting a prisoner back tried to aim its flamethrower, but the armadillo lion was too fast, gripping onto the suit's arm and flinging it over onto the ground. The beast soon turned its attention to the scrambling prisoner.

"Lieutenant Yasuko! Up ahead!" Baatar called from his mecha suit. The lieutenant also saw the prisoner and armadillo lion ahead, charging forwards with Baatar to rescue them. Before they could reach them however, the ground beneath crumbled away and opened up into a pit. As the cloud of dust settled, Baatar tried to move but a massive weight pressed down onto his suit. It was the armadillo lion.

The creature thrashed and pelted his suit, and even its platinum plating started to crumple after each attack. Baatar's eyes widened as he looked out his side visor, seeing Lieutenant Yasuko on the ground with a streak of red dripping down her face. She must have hit her head as the ground gave way. There was no sign of the prisoner, but thankfully the armadillo lion seemed preoccupied with him. For now at least.

After another swipe the mecha suit crumpled around Baatar's shoulder. His mech had taken too much of a beating and couldn't stand against the animal's powerful blows. It wasn't ideal at all, but Baatar knew he had to leave his suit. He managed to roll his mecha suit to the side along with the armadillo lion, and quickly sprawled onto the dirt before the suit crumpled completely.

Baatar crawled over to Lieutenant Yasuko. She was still breathing, and the hit to her head didn't seem as bad up close. But it would be impossible to carry her and escape out of this pitfall. Fortunately, Baatar had grabbed an electrified glove just in time before leaving his suit, though against the furious armadillo lion it wouldn't be much.

With only a second to spare, Baatar crackled electricity from his glove as the beast lunged. It retracted quickly. Baatar tried to ward it off again, though this time the armadillo lion didn't retreat as far. After seeing the other mecha suits electrify the air around them this animal must have been fearful of the electricity, though it was starting to realise Baatar's weapon was nowhere near as dangerous. Again it swiped near the pair, and Baatar raised his glove again.

With his other arm he hoisted Lieutenant Yasuko up, who managed to stand on her legs in between moments of unconsciousness. As they shuffled slowly away from the mecha suit, Baatar grunted as he tried to hold the lieutenant up while warding off the beast. He had noticed a small dribble of engine oil leaking form his mecha suit. If he could put some distance between himself and the suit, perhaps he could set off an explosion and give them a chance to escape.

It was now or never. Baatar jammed the glove's trigger and flung the weapon towards the mecha suit, while the crackling electricity startling the beast as it moved away. Within a second the engine oil caught alight, and the subsequent fiery explosion threw the armadillo lion into the wall of the pit. Baatar and Yasuko were also flung backwards to the other side, the impact smacking the air out their lungs. The armadillo lion was injured but writhed around, howling and hissing even louder.

A blue fork of electricity struck the animal, and with a final cry it collapsed knocked out. The bolt had come from a mecha suit on the surface above. Next to the suit a panicked prisoner cowered for a moment before reaching down to help Baatar and Yasuko up. Relief washed over the pair as they realised not only that they were saved, but this prisoner was the one they'd been running to help just before they fell into the pitfall.

"Sir, we've managed to stop all the armadillo lions," the mecha pilot informed Baatar once he was on the surface. It took a moment to realise that what the pilot said was true; Baatar scanned the battlefield around them, the roaring and howling of the armadillo lions was now absent. Their troops were still pushing forwards to the wall under their barriers, with the wall canons firing down on them. But at least now they had saved as many of the prisoners as they could.

Baatar turned back to the Yasuko, "She hit her head on the way down. I don't know how bad it is, but she needs to get to medical." The mecha pilot nodded, picking up the lieutenant and marching back to their side. They'd made it out of the pit and stopped Qiang's armadillo lions, but it wasn't over yet.

The two men before them certainly weren't ordinary barbarians, if they were barbarians at all. Suyin tried to get past the pair but another electrified sword swing blocked her path. She only narrowly missed his attack.

Akito had locked arms with Ju, both of them trying to push back the other. Though even with three against himself, Yatsu was holding his own. Bolin sent a line of earth spikes protruding from the ground, while Guan and Suyin shot cables forth. The swordsman leapt away from Bolin's attack and swung his katana around with a pirouette, knocking each cable aside.

"How is he beating us?!" Bolin swiped his forearm across his head, eyeing up Yatsu ahead of them.

"In battle it is the strength of one's convictions that determines their success and ability, not their physical prowess," Yatsu taunted. "Though it certainly helps."

"He can't hold all three of us back forever. Though if Ju breaks free from Akito then we might have a problem," Suyin suggested, glancing over at the mecha pilot trying to hold his own against Ju.

Although his body ached from the electrical shock earlier, Guan still had fight left in him. Yatsu was fast – there was no way they could outmanoeuvre him – and maybe all he and Bolin could do is create an opening for Suyin to sneak past. Yatsu would suspect this of course, but if they timed it right it wouldn't matter.

The metalbender charged forwards with a makeshift blade, though this time he didn't lock swords with Yatsu. Ducking to his left quickly, it was Bolin who pushed forwards and clashed blades with the swordsman, his lava shuriken spinning against the katana. Yatsu spun his head to see a cable shoot forwards from Suyin's hips. After jumping back he tried slashing the cable but it retracted too fast. He dodged a boulder from Bolin before realising what had happened; Suyin's cable was a feint, and the other metalbender had made it past and ran towards Qiang. With a slight grin forming, Yatsu dashed towards Guan with his sword pointed forwards, only Guan didn't continue running. He stopped suddenly and shifted his weight back, before flipping a chunk of earth from the wall with two uppercutting fists. Yatsu only barely missed, but managed to leap on top of the earth mound. Another cable whizzed past, though Bolin's lava shuriken clashed against Yatsu's sword as he tried to electrify the cable.

Yatsu jumped back to the ground, slashing an electrified arc towards Bolin and Guan, and quickly thrust forwards to cut off Suyin. His sword was a hair's breadth away from the Zaofu matriarch, but not enough to stop her, and she managed to sprint past. It turned out Guan was the decoy after all, and Suyin was the one to clash with Qiang. Instead of pursuing Suyin, Yatsu sighed, "I think I've bought Qiang enough time. If he cannot defeat a single metalbender, a talented Beifong albeit, then he does not deserve protection."

Bolin and Guan exchanged glances, the metalbender replying, "Well that's loyalty among barbarians for you."

A soft chuckle left Yatsu's lips, "Do not mistake me for some underling barbarian. Ju and I are here on our own accord."

"You don't serve Qiang?" Bolin questioned.

"We are here to protect Ba Sing Se. For too long it has been subjugated to unspeakable injustice. The innocents have been left to suffer for generation after generation. Qiang is merely a tool to reach this ideal."

Guan doubted very much that Qiang considered himself a tool. "Are the prisoners ''tools'' too?"

Yatsu's smile faded somewhat, though he replied in the same manner as before, "We are all instruments of the powers that be. It is futile to question our nature but only how we may be used." He pointed his sword over his shoulder and aimed at the pair, his legs forming a sturdy stance, "And my current purpose is keeping you occupied." Bolin and Guan had little idea what Yatsu was on about, but either way, their fight wasn't over yet.

Suyin somersaulted along the ground after retracting her cable, glancing back to see the others. Bolin and Guan were duelling the swordsman again, while Akito was keeping the other man busy. She wanted to help them, especially since these two were on another level to the other barbarians they faced, but she knew she had to keep going. Once on her feet, Suyin sprinted along the wall.

It was after a few seconds of running that Suyin realised Qiang wasn't ahead of her, nor anywhere in sight. She spun her eyes to the left and right, searching for any sign of the barbarian king. A figure emerged from the next battlement, but it wasn't Qiang; it was Meng, the airbender from their airship.

Upon seeing the Zaofu matriarch, Meng looked up, "Suyin!" Her expression was a mix of shock and relief, and as she got closer Suyin could see she was helping an injured Zaofu guard along the wall. There were others from their airship behind her.

"Are you alright? What happened?" Suyin asked. Though a sinking feeling crept into her bones as she figured the answer.

"It was Qiang. He hijacked our airship," Meng confirmed, pointing in the distance. "No one was killed, and we got everyone out safely, except for the pilot."

Suyin scanned the skies and saw the airship in question. She doubted Qiang knew how to fly, and it was possible he was holding the pilot hostage since he needed him. A worried expression formed on her face as she realised something else; Qiang was in a Zaofu airship, and Kuvira had no idea what was happening. "Do we have a radio? We have to contact Kuvira immediately, otherwise he'll fly right past them!"

Meng shook her head, her own face screwing up in panic as she understood what Suyin was saying. Before they could say anything else, a stream of fire burst forth from the battlement. Suyin formed a wall to block the inferno, but there were more mecha suits. Qiang's mecha suits. A cluster of earth discs were launched by several barbarians from the other side, and Meng created a gust to sweep them away. With no way to contact Kuvira right now and their hands full with these barbarians, Suyin only hoped Kuvira would realise what was happening. Otherwise, their attack may have been for nothing.

Several airship canons fired at once, converging on one of the barbarian's canons. Before it could retaliate, the artillery toppled off the wall and into the Middle Ring. With their forces moving in on the wall and gaining ground, the Allied Forces airships were having a much easier time fighting back.

Kuvira watched as another of Qiang's canons was taken out. It all seemed to be tipping in their favour, though without news on Qiang's whereabouts it was still up in the air. To the north, Kuvira could see one of their airships flying back towards their camps. "Have we heard anything from the rescue airship? The Zaofu guard who saved those prisoners in the Upper Ring?" she asked a soldier.

"Yes, they reported in ten minutes ago. They've headed back to the Lower Ring."

"Then what is that airship doing?" Kuvira drew their attention to the airship in question.

The soldier didn't know how to respond at first, though moved towards their communications officer, "Hail that airship to the north. Why are they heading away?" The officer tried, but there was only static. "Kuvira sir, we cannot get through."

"Make a course to intercept," Kuvira ordered. There could be all sorts of reasons why they weren't responding, like perhaps their radio had been taken out in the attack, but it still didn't sit right with Kuvira. They were turning the tide in this fight, and she knew Qiang wouldn't hang around to be thrown away in prison. Plus their trajectory was sending them towards their camp, exactly what one would do if they were flying an enemy airship pretending to be one of them.

It only took a few minutes to reach the airship's vicinity. The soldiers were trying again to radio them, but they still couldn't get through. "Kuvira, we can't reach them. What should we do?"

"Stay the course."

"But sir, on this path we'll crash-"

"Stay the course," Kuvira repeated. "It could be Qiang on that airship. He won't risk crashing his means of escape. We'll get in close, and if we can get a visual on Qiang I'll move in apprehend him." Her soldiers glanced to each other quickly, still unsure of their leader's plan. But if she was right and it really was Qiang on that airship, then they had to do something.

In the airship in question, the helmsman kept his hands on the controls. Though with his shaking and anxious breathing, he couldn't keep himself composed.

"I told you! Say something back to them!" Qiang growled at the soldier, pressing his blade even closer to the man's throat.

"Please... I...," the helmsman mumbled, "I'll try again." Qiang obliged, picking up the radio receiver and contacting the airship pursuing them.

After a brief static, a voice answered through the radio, ''"Airship helmsman you are heading westward. Please advise why you have changed course, over."''

The helmsman trailed his words out in a panicked stream, "Uh yeah, we're just... heading back, nothing-"

Qiang slammed the receiver back before he could utter anything else, "I told you to keep calm! You sound nervous!"

"I am nervous!"

The barbarian king grunted while slamming the wall. It wasn't like Qiang to run away from a fight, but he knew this was a lost cause. They still had clans to the north. If he could just reach them and return to Ba Sing Se with a larger force, they could take back their city before the other world armies arrived.

Kuvira continued to watch the airship pull away. Their own ship wasn't quite as quick, especially after taking several explosive discs from Qiang's wall canons. "I'll prepare to engage," Kuvira informed the other soldiers. She promptly made her way over to a stack of metal spools, attaching one on each hip.

"Sir, the airship is far away. Do you think you can make the distance?"

"We don't have time. Our ship won't be able to keep up in its current condition," Kuvira replied. Her soldier had a point, but Kuvira knew this was the best chance they had. "Keep in pursuit. I might need your help with rescuing the helmsman," Kuvira ordered before giving a quick nod. She climbed up a ladder to the roof cavity and then outside of the airship.

The stolen airship was a considerable distance away. Kuvira sprinted to the other side of the airship, kicked off from the metal plating, and flew through the night air. The wind rushed towards her as she fell, and after another second, Kuvira fired her cable forwards. There was barely a metre of spool left to spare as her cable connected with the airship rail, wrapping around just enough that Kuvira could retract it and fly upwards. Her momentum swung her underneath the airship and to the other side, looping around and eventually flinging her onto the roof.

Both Qiang and the helmsman turned when they heard a thud above them. "What was that?" the king thought out loud.

His question was answered when a woman in metal armour caved the roof in. Kuvira landed behind the pair, quickly jumping to her feet and readying herself to attack. "Stand down Qiang!"

The barbarian took a moment to take in what happened, and promptly grabbed the helmsman and held his sword to his throat, "Any closer and he goes to Koh's Realm."

Kuvira tried to hide her frustration, with the edges of her eyes narrowing slightly. She couldn't let Qiang think he had her figured out. "My soldiers know what is at stake and are willing to sacrifice everything to achieve our greater goal."

"You're bluffing again!" Qiang reacted, gripping the poor helmsman even tighter.

"It wasn't the first time, remember? Let him go and stand down. There's no point keeping a hostage."

"I think there is in fact. You created this elaborate plan to save a bunch of prisoners, some of whom were you own men, and so I find it hard to believe you'd be so callous about this fella right here?" Qiang cackled while side-eyeing his hostage.

A grimace formed on Kuvira's face. Her plan to outsmart Qiang had failed. Though she could see in the cockpit that no one was holding the wheel. If she could somehow strike the engine and take it out, the falling airship would give her an opening to rescue the helmsman. "You're right Qiang, I'm not like you at all. Though have you noticed that the airship is drifting without anyone to keep it steady?"

Qiang's grin soon turned to a frown. The split second that he turned to look at the controls, Kuvira shot a metal plate into the control panel. The surprised king turned back to slash his hostage, but Kuvira had also shot a cable around his ankle and dragged the helmsman down, only just missing Qiang's sword as it clattered against the doorframe. Before Qiang could retaliate, the ship lurched to the side, sending all three occupants crashing into the wall. Her metal shard had struck and jammed the helm controls, tilting the ship to the right.

While Qiang tried to regain control of his escape ship, Kuvira handed a metal spool to the helmsman and wrapped the cable tightly around his waist. "Hold on!" she shouted over the rushing wind, shooting the cable out into an apartment complex. The helmsman screamed as the cable retracted, pulling him out of the airship.

The airship steadied, with Qiang yanking the controls to stop them from falling. He had never flown an airship before, and with the damage to the control panel it didn't seem like the controls were very responsive, but at least they were stable again. The barbarian king turned back to Kuvira and quickly extended his swords towards her. The blades clattered against Kuvira's makeshift sword, and with her other hand, Kuvira tried flinging a cable around Qiang. He sidestepped the attack while retracting his swords.

Kuvira dodged another sword swipe, and launched herself back into the roof cavity. If she could slow the airship down, or even stop it altogether, then Qiang's means of escape would be taken out. After making it outside, Kuvira gripped one of the rotors and crumpled it together. She did the same to the other propellers on the opposite side, and the airship began tilting towards the ground.

Inside, Qiang realised what was happening. "Spirits!" Qiang slammed a fist into the dashboard. The barbarian king made his way over to the exit, latching his sword onto a nearby building and jumping out.

Seeing Qiang leap from the airship, Kuvira also ditched the falling aircraft. With her one cable left, Kuvira struck the side of a tiled roof and swung through the air, landing and sliding down a steep road. She could see Qiang ahead catching his breath, while the airship continued sinking and eventually crashed into a mound ahead of them. The explosion sent pieces of metal flying and waves of inferno, none of it close enough to reach the pair, however.

Panting heavily, Qiang stood to his feet, "You... really haven't thought things through, have you?" the barbarian king taunted. "Without your airship, it's just you and me stuck here."

Kuvira stood proudly with her arms posed behind her back, "You think that ''I'' haven't thought things through? I sent in airships to follow your men because I anticipated their betrayal. Most of the prisoners were saved, and my forces are defeating yours. I destroyed the airship because it was your means of escape. And as for a one-on-one fight," she readied herself with a stance, "I haven't engaged in battle myself this entire time, while you must be worn out and injured."

Qiang found it hard to believe that Kuvira had planned out ''every'' step this carefully. Perhaps she was trying to intimidate him? Either way, the barbarian king knew what would happen if he gave up. "I still got fight left in me you wench!" Qiang bellowed while stomping a row of pillars forwards.

Kuvira blocked with a wall of her own, though the slashing of Qiang's swords tore her defence apart. He was much slower though, and Kuvira managed to sidestep his attack. She then slid along the earth and propelled off an earth mound, landing behind the barbarian king. After flicking her metal cable around his wrist, Kuvira yanked Qiang head-first into the earth. His swords cut through the cable, but his head throbbed after slamming into the ground.

"You're making a mistake!" Qiang yelled as he recovered, digging his feet into the ground and readying for Kuvira's next move. "Ba Sing Se is better off in the hands of the people!"

"And who are 'the people'? Were the prisoners you threw to your armadillo lions not also citizens?"

"You forced our hand!" Qiang defended, though Kuvira wasn't having a bar of it. She tried flinging more metal shards his way, though he managed to deflect each one. "What are you going to do once you retake Ba Sing Se, hmm? Hand it over to another dictator?!"

His words made Kuvira pause for a moment. This was exactly what Kuvira was fearing; that Prince Wu would undo everything her forces had worked so hard to achieve. In a way, she could understand where Qiang was coming from, though she would never admit it. "Whatever happens with the Earth Kingdom is none of your concern. You'll be spending the remainder of your days in a prison cell," she replied flatly.

With his face contorting in a deep rage, Qiang slashed wildly with his swords once more. Each strike was quick, though Kuvira outstepped all of them. She shifted her weight forwards, striking a rock against Qiang's chest. After sliding back, the barbarian king lifted a massive boulder from the earth and rolled it forwards. Kuvira was light on her feet, sliding out the way of the boulder and several other attacks sent her way. The pair continue trading attacks, kicking up a cloud of dust as each rocks collided with each other.

In a desperate effort to turn the battle in his favour, Qiang ran his hands along the ruins of an apartment block next to them. Seeing the building start to collapse, Kuvira kicked up two pillars to stabilise the structure, though only just managed to dodge a sword slash that cut her side. After dodging Qiang's sword again, Kuvira launched herself through the tipped building and out onto the other side, cutting through the wooden structural beams with a wrist blade. With a downward kick Kuvira collapsed the apartment block on top of Qiang, trapping him in the rubble. As the dust settled around her, there was silence.

A hand punched through the wreckage, grabbing Kuvira's forearm and yanking her down. She let out a pained grunt as Qiang pushed through to the surface. "It's not over yet!" He strengthened his grip, fracturing Kuvira's forearm and she cried out.

Gritting her teeth through the pain, Kuvira kicked a boulder into Qiang's torso, though the man barely reacted. She then stomped up another hunk of rubble with a broken wooden beam embedded inside. This one left a gash across Qiang's face as it hit, but he still wouldn't let go. In his adrenaline-fueled rage he mustn't have felt the damage to body.

As she struggled against his grip, even punching him square in the jaw, the barbarian king didn't budge. With his other arm he thrust a metal shard towards Kuvira's side. She managed to stop his attack with her other arm, though she couldn't break free from his grip. Like a murderous eel hound hellbent on devouring its target, Qiang glared into Kuvira's green eyes. He had no intention of giving up.

Kuvira heard a whizzing sound from her right; a green earth disc smashed into the back of Qiang's head. With his grip loosening, Kuvira quickly rose to her feet. The other airship had caught up. Qiang tried to stand up, but with the strike from the airship and losing a fair amount of blood, he wasn't able to keep his stance. The barbarian king toppled over, mumbling to himself as he collapsed.

The soldiers from the airship swooped down on cables, landing beside their leader and the fallen king. "Kuvira sir, are you alright?" a soldier motioned to her side.

"It's only a graze," Kuvira replied, though soon winced as her arm stung from Qiang's blow. It seemed her own adrenaline was wearing off too. "Apprehend Qiang. Inform the others that the barbarian king has been defeated."

An exploding airship caught Bolin's attention as they duelled. Thankfully, Yatsu had also stopped attacking and surveyed the scene. "Ju, I believe our time is up. The spirits have decided that this cause is lost," the swordsman added solemnly.

"Don't think we'll let you escape!" Guan called out. He threw a hunk of wall towards the swordsman but he leapt backwards out of the way. His companion Ju uppercut Akito's mecha suit, sending him staggering back while the metalbender made his way over to Yatsu. Before any of them could go after them, Yatsu breathed in deeply, and shot forth a bolt of lightning from his glove. It only just missed Guan and Bolin, electrifying the air between them as they dodged.

Bolin whizzed his head towards Yatsu, "I didn't think electrified gloves could do that?! They can't, right?"

Guan narrowed his eyes, "He's redirecting the electricity. He's a firebender."

"Very astute, I would expect nothing less of a worthy opponent," Yatsu dipped his head before kicking a swirl of fire across the width of the wall. Bolin and Guan flipped a hunk of earth to hide behind, while Akito shielded himself from the inferno. Once the fire had dissipated, there was no sign of either of them.

Suyin saw the blasts of fire ahead and charged over to the trio. They'd only just now been able to apprehend the barbarians they were facing. "Bolin! Are you guys alright?"

"It's the swordsman! He's a firebender! Did you see where they went?" Bolin asked.

The Zaofu matriarch spun around, though she couldn't see the benders in question. She turned back to the guard, "Fan out and search for the pair escaping. One is a firebender carrying a katana. The other a metalbender with a prosthetic limb!" The Zaofu guard and Allied Forces present marched into gear, scaling down the wall and searching the streets.

"Suyin, Ma'am," a soldier found them on the wall, "I have word from Kuvira; she's apprehended Qiang."

"Thank the spirits," Suyin sighed. Although they hadn't apprehended all the barbarians, nor these two Bolin and his team had been fighting, they had at least captured the barbarian king. At least for now, it was over, and they were victorious.

With most of the barbarians taken prisoner and shipped off, the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces congregated just outside the Upper Ring. A medical bay had been set up, with patients from both sides being treated. There were still teams out searching for those who escaped, but with the barbarian king captured their priorities were now to keep Ba Sing Se protected.

Not all the barbarians had been taken away just yet; Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah were handcuffed and waiting for Kuvira to arrive. Soldiers surrounded the trio, and Bolin, Guan, and Akito stood nearby.

"Baatar!" Suyin called out to her son. He had scrapes and bruises, but otherwise he looked alright. He smiled in return, making his way over. "Are you alright?"

Her son nodded, "I'll be okay. Lieutenant Yasuko's injuries were worse than I thought, but medical thinks she'll pull through." His expression grew darker, "We couldn't save all the prisoners though. The... armadillo lions..." his thoughts trailed off, and Baatar was unable to recount his experiences out loud.

Suyin placed a hand on his shoulder, "You did the best you could. I can't even imagine what you all witnessed down there, but it's going to be alright." She tried to smile reassuringly, as any mother would do for her son, and Baatar reciprocated the gesture.

Guan looked upon the three barbarians with a smug grin, "I never trusted any of you. But thankfully, now I don't have to hide my disdain."

"I really thought you guys would see everything we've done and join us," Bolin mentioned. "I don't understand why you'd follow someone like Qiang." The three of them said nothing, keeping their gaze to the ground. After a moment Gombo spat at Bolin's feet, and Guan promptly kicked the man in the chin. He tried to get another kick in but Bolin stopped him, "That's enough! They'll be treated like any other prisoner."

Guan was clearly annoyed at being told what to do, though he obliged. Before he could reply, an airship arrived and hovered behind them. It was Kuvira's.

"Bolin," Baraz mumbled, "...thank you." Bolin looked confused as the firebender elaborated, "For believing in us. I got to actually use my firebending for something good. When we helped out those kids."

Bolin didn't exactly know what Baraz was referring to nor how to respond, though the three of them stood to their feet as soldiers marched them over to Kuvira, now exiting the airship. She gave a quick smile to Suyin and Baatar before turning her attention to them. Before addressing the barbarians, Kuvira turned to the other three team members, "Thank you for accomplishing your mission. I understand that you were all put into a difficult situation having to work with three barbarians, though your efforts were instrumental in our victory today. Especially you, officer Guan," the soldier looked up at the mention of his name, "your quick thinking and sound judgement helped us locate and rescue the prisoners, and move in on Qiang's location. Before, when you came to my office and brought to light your concerns about this assignment, I told you that I had faith in your abilities. I am pleased that you met and exceeded my expectations."

Although her manner of speaking was a little analytical and distanced, Guan knew that such praise from Kuvira meant a great deal. He smiled proudly and saluted, "Thank you Kuvira sir. Your complements are most appreciated."

"Officers Akito and Bolin, thank you too for your efforts. You all have done a great service to the Earth Kingdom and the Allied Forces."

"Thank you Kuvira sir!" both Bolin and Akito saluted in unison.

Their leader shifted her attention to the other three 'team members', all three of them hanging their heads low, "I suppose it may have been too optimistic to think you would shift your allegiances to the Allied Forces so easily. We have had many join our ranks after seeing all that we have accomplished, and who also share our vision to unite and bring the Earth Kingdom into the modern era. But now, your leader Qiang has been captured. With his defeat, the other barbarian clans will fracture, and Ba Sing Se will now be under the protection of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces." None of them said a word, though Kuvira continued, "I gave you all a chance for greatness; to be a part of something bigger than yourselves, something that will benefit generations to come. Yet you clung to the old ways of chaos and disorder where I am trying to bring stability, and unity. I am not one to waste time. If you rejected my offer the first time, who's to say that you'll accept it a second time? Why should you get a second chance?"

There was a long, uncomfortable pause while no one said a word. Eventually, Ahnah broke the silence, "We thought Qiang would hold on to Ba Sing Se. It wasn't great with the clan sure, but they were all we had."

"You had the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces?" Kuvira responded.

"There was no way you would ''really'' take us in. At least that's what I thought," Ahnah admitted. "I didn't think that Bolin would ''actually'' believe we could all work together. We thought our only option was to stick with who we know."

"Look," Gombo continued, "we placed our bets, and we lost. That's all there is to it. I won't grovel for my life nor for a second chance. Do what y'er gonna do."

Kuvira frowned, her eyes boring into Gombo's as he looked down again, "If pride is the hill you choose to die on then so be it." She then paced back towards the other three soldiers, "Bolin, what do you think should happen? Would you be willing to take on the responsibility of leading them?"

Bolin looked as shocked as the three barbarians did. Was Kuvira really considering reinstating them? The lavabender mumbled for a moment, taking his time to think it over. As he glanced at each of them, he remembered what Baraz had said earlier, about being thankful to a part of something good for once. Maybe there was a chance. "Kuvira, sir, I... I don't think we can trust them. Not fully at least. But... I would like to try."

"They will be your responsibility officer Bolin. Do you understand this?"

"Yeah, I mean, yes sir, I do understand."

Kuvira glanced towards Akito, "And do you feel comfortable being on a team with the three of them, and with Bolin as your team leader?"

The mecha pilot paused for a moment, glancing at each of the barbarians before answering, "I trust our team leader Bolin. And... I kind of want to hear more of Baraz's interesting jokes." Akito's smile faded, "I mean, I think we can work together efficiently, if given the time and proper training."

Giving a brief nod, Kuvira then turned to Guan, "I think I already know your answer," she added, eliciting a slight smirk from Guan. "With the unfortunate death of Commander Jinsuk, I will have to shuffle around our officers to fill the vacancy. There could be a position in the southern forces if you would be interested? I believe a promotion is in order too for your efforts."

Guan pondered for a moment before giving an answer, "I do wish Bolin and his team all the best, but yes, I would prefer to be transferred. And thank you for the promotion, I would be honoured to accept the rank of sergeant."

"Sergeant? I intend for your promotion to be of several ranks to lieutenant," Kuvira replied. Guan was a little surprised at the revelation. "I did mention that I see a bright future ahead of you, ''lieutenant'' Guan. I am sure the southern forces will be privileged to have such a diligent and capable soldier leading them." Kuvira paced back to Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah, giving them a moment before speaking, "So, do you have an answer? You will still be considered working prisoners of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces and will be confined to training quarters when not on duty. And Bolin, your new ''sergeant'', will be in charge of leading your missions alongside other divisions."

Gombo looked up again, "I don't understand why you would take another chance with us. Is this some kind of plan again where you trick us into doing something?"

"If you'll have us, then I will accept," Baraz finally spoke. Ahnah nodded in agreement.

"I already told you; I'm not like Qiang. And I'm certainly not like Hou-Ting. I am willing to do whatever it takes to unite the Earth Kingdom and see it prosper. That includes rehabilitating people like you. However, I do have expectations," Kuvira stretched out an arm and lowered her fingers, shrinking Gombo's shoulder spikes back into the metal plate. "Don't disappoint me again."

While Kuvira walked off to join Suyin and Baatar, the six of them were still processing all that had just happened. Especially Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah who had almost certainly expected imprisonment or even death. Not that they were free of course, but it still surprised them to be given this new arrangement as part of Bolin's team still. Baraz turned to Bolin, "I'm sorry about what happened. Thank you though, for sticking up for us like that."

"Well, it's as I said before: once you guys see all the good we're doing for the Earth Kingdom you'll want to help us out. I intend to make that happen."

"Qiang threatened to kill us for messing up, yet Kuvira gave us another chance," Ahnah pondered solemnly, staring at the soil beneath them. She eventually looked back to Bolin, "I guess maybe she is different after all."

"That's right!" Bolin cheered.

Guan wasn't so impressed. He grunted while walking away, grabbing the attention of the others. "I sincerely doubt that any of you are capable of rehabilitation, if I'm being perfectly honest," since they were out of earshot from Kuvira Guan felt he could speak more freely, "though I am happy to be proven wrong." He didn't bother waiting for their response, simply walking away and joining the other soldiers standing behind Kuvira.

Despite his harsh comments and scepticism, Bolin couldn't shake the feeling of relief and joy at retaking Ba Sing Se. His family had been displaced for three years now – many citizens had – and finally, the city was free from the clutches of the barbarian clans. Their plan hadn't gone a smoothly as hoped, but nonetheless, Ba Sing Se was now liberated.

Chapter Text

There were cracks running through almost every wall. Scorch marks from fires. Broken pieces of rubble strewn across the floor. Not a single surface was left intact.

The Royal Palace had once stood proudly in the centre of Ba Sing Se, with its golden coloured rooves reflecting the sunlight like a beacon across the city. Now, there weren't many tiles left to reflect anything, most having been stolen or destroyed by fires. Every ounce of metal or precious stone had been stripped from the palace as well, and even most of the green light crystals were missing.

Kuvira led their small group into the throne room. Even without much of a light source, there were enough holes through the ceiling to allow the morning sun light in. Baatar stood behind her as they came to a halt, followed by the now Commander Yasuko, Lieutenant Guan, and Suyin Beifong. Yasuko and Kuvira had spent a bit of time in the medical bay with the healers getting treated, with Kuvira's arm wrapped in bandages and Yasuko's head, though they'd had a good amount of rest and were given the green light to come to the palace. Even with her disdain for the monarchy, seeing this place in ruins brought a sense of unrest for Kuvira.

Placing a hand on her shoulder, Baatar turned to Kuvira, "We can repair it. This throne room will be even more spectacular than it was."

"It's not that," Kuvira replied. "So much has been taken. The gold plating and gemstones pried out of everything, the fabrics and paintings, even the lights. But where did it all go? All those riches? It didn't go to those still in the Lower Ring that's for sure." Kuvira looked to Baatar, "This court should never take more than it needs. Not if it means people have to suffer for it."

After making their way outside again, Kuvira saw that a small group of reporters had gathered outside the palace. As soon as they noticed Kuvira they tried to take pictures, though the soldiers in their escort stopped them. "It isn't safe yet; there could be barbarians left in the city. You shouldn't be here," Kuvira scolded the group.

"Please, we just wanted to confirm that Ba Sing Se has been liberated! The world needs to know," one reporter defended.

"We climbed all these stairs!" another mentioned. There were, in fact, a lot of stairs to climb to get to the palace entrance.

One of her soldiers stepped forward, "I'm sorry for letting them here, they had already got into the Middle Ring when we found them."

Kuvira sighed to herself, "We have apprehended the Barbarian King named Qiang, and most of his clan. There are other factions out there, but Ba Sing Se is now under the protection of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces." She noticed that one reporter was holding a microphone out, probably live recording over the radio too. "We still have search parties all over the city to snuff out any stragglers, but I am confident that the threat has mostly been dealt with."

"When will the coronation be held? Is the city safe enough for the prince?"

"Do you have any comments on the Red Lotus rumours? Or Avatar Korra's disappeara-"

"I won't be taking questions," Kuvira interrupted. "Now, as my soldiers rightly pointed out it isn't safe here. I suggest you leave with them to avoid being prosecuted for obstruction in carrying out military duties." The reporters collectively whined at Kuvira's threat, though obliged.

Baatar and Suyin made their way over, "Well, that's one way to deal with the buzzard wasps," Baatar joked.

"They're just excited," Suyin defended. "It's been a long three years. You both have done so much for the Earth Kingdom and they want to acknowledge that."

Kuvira was far more sceptical than Suyin about the reporters' intentions. It seemed all anyone ever wanted to talk about was Prince Wu, the Avatar, or the Red Lotus. Nonetheless, she was grateful for Suyin's help, "Thank you Suyin, for being here when we needed you most. You and the Zaofu guard were instrumental in our success."

A smile formed on Suyin's lips. Not just one of gratitude for the acknowledgment, but one of genuine joy. Perhaps things were healing between them.

A piece of wooden beam cracked and fell from the roof, splintering on the palace steps, grabbing the attention of the three of them. While the barbarians were gone and the fighting was over, the rebuilding was just beginning. Still, Kuvira and Baatar couldn't deny the relief and joy that they each felt in this moment. Their three-year campaign to free the Earth Kingdom had finally come to an end. Everything they had worked so hard to achieve, all the sacrifices they had made, it all led to this. This moment, on the stairs of the royal palace, watching the sunrise cast its glow over the remnants of the palace.

Kuvira slipped her hand into Baatar's, giving a gentle squeeze as he looked back to her with surprise. Surprise, but also a deep and resounding joy. They had finally made it.

Without the cover of night, escaping the city would prove difficult. Thankfully, Yatsu and Ju were rather experienced at evading authorities. The pair snuck around another corner, hiding from a platoon of Allied Forces soldiers marching down a street. They'd made it into the Lower Ring without much trouble.

Yatsu turned back to the wall behind them, a mix of regret and sorrow filling his bones. It was hard leaving it all behind. He wasn't from Ba Sing Se, nor had any personal connection to the walled city, but it was their failed mission to return it to the people that made parting with it so difficult. Still, there was other work to be done. All he and Ju could do now was return to their comrades.

Before the swordsman could take another step, his companion stuck his arm out to stop him. "What is it?" he quizzed Ju, despite knowing that the man wouldn't give a verbal reply.

Motioning his head forwards, he drew Yatsu's attention to the street ahead. It seemed they weren't the only a group trying to keep away from the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces; a pair of barbarians were also hiding in the shadows, waiting to make an escape. The soldiers they'd hid from were now further down the street, and this part of the Lower Ring was quieter than the rest. Yatsu and Ju watched the barbarians make a quick dash to the next block. Though before they could reach the end of the street, the earth underneath them flipped over. A muffled cry was heard as the barbarians disappeared from sight.

Ju and Yatsu exchanged glances with each other. A third barbarian saw what happened to his comrades and tried earthbending them out, though a metal chain clamped around his arm and yanked him into the shadows.

"That doesn't seem like the Allied Forces, does it?" Yatsu pondered. "This is interesting."

Mako was barely awake when his bedroom doors slammed open. A boisterous voice yelled from the hallway, "Mako! Mako! It's Ba Sing Se! It's been freed!"

After getting over the initial shock of being woken up, Mako sat up and rubbed his head, "Good morning to you too Prince Wu."

"My city is finally free of those awful savages! Finally! Living in the penthouse apartments has been fun, but oh boy, it is such a downgrade from the royal palace!" Wu flailed his arms around, dreaming of the luxurious home he missed.

"Prince Wu, you do know that the palace was ransacked pretty bad," Mako reminded. "It might take some time to rebuild everything."

Wu waved his hand, "It will be fine, I'm sure the Allied Forces will already be making progress. It will take a couple days by train so I'm sure that's plenty of time, right?"

Mako realised that he and Wu had very different definitions of the word plenty. While the prince rushed off downstairs to summon his royal cabinet, Mako got dressed into his 'prison' uniform.

As he made his way down to the foyer, Mako could hear Prince Wu complaining to the Grand Secretariat, "...but what about the Seven Sacred Chests of Exquisite Finery? What about my grandfather's taffeta pantaloons?"

"Prince Wu, the palace was completely ransacked after the fall of your great aunt. The royal artifacts have disappeared, and we don't have the funds for your... bold entertainment ideas."

Wu was aghast, "You mean there's no dancing badgermoles here either? No acrobat bell ringers? No horn announcer-y guy?!"

Gun tried his best to reassure the prince, "It will be a quaint, but elegant ceremony, your majesty. We even have a... royal broach to use instead of the crown, which... erm... also went missing."

"THERE'S NO CROWN?!"

"Prince Wu," President Raiko intervened. He'd come to visit the Fire Nation Embassy after hearing the news from Ba Sing Se, "I'm sure that you can still have a wonderful coronation, even if it is a smaller affair than hoped for."

Wu was on the verge of crying at this point, "You can't make me have a downgraded Summit dinner, and a coronation. It isn't fair!"

"Think of it this way; once Ba Sing Se is back up and running, you can have a ''second'' coronation. A bigger and better one," Raiko continued.

There was a pause as Wu thought about what the president had said "Yeah," the sparkle returned to Wu's eyes, "in fact, I can have a re-coronation every year! It will be like, a day for everyone to celebrate me each year!"

"Haha, that's the spirit!" Raiko gave a warm and encouraging laugh. Clearly fake, not that Wu noticed. "Well, I have to leave to attend to other matters. Though I'll be seeing you for your big moment in a week's time."

"A week?" Wu's voice was tinged with surprise and sadness. "You mean, we won't be going to the coronation today?"

"Well, the throne room still hasn't been repaired. And the Allied Forces are still searching for any remaining barbarians in the capitol. Have to keep you safe of course, your majesty," Raiko replied.

Wu mumbled as his gaze turned to the floor. Though he jumped up as he thought of a solution, "What if we stop by the Winter Palace on the way?! We could stay there for a few nights and then be in Ba Sing Se for my coronation!"

"The Winter Palace?" Mako asked.

"Yeah! It's the place where I grew up. It's a royal palace to the north of Ba Sing Se. Oh, it's amazing let me tell you!"

Gun explained further, "The Winter Palace is a facility for royal vacations, refurbished during the reign of Hou-Ting. She seldom visited, though her sister, Wu's grandmother, resided there for most of her days. And Wu's mother did the same."

"It was lucky I was there when the Red Lotus attacked, that's for sure!" Wu smirked. He turned back to Gun, "So, can we stay there?"

The Grand Secretariat nodded, "I think that I can make the arrangements. Fire Lord Izumi and Crown Princess Ilah, would you like to attend as well? The Winter Palace has many guest rooms. It's the least we can do in thanking you for your hospitality."

Izumi and Ilah exchanged glances before the Fire Lord replied, "We would be honoured, thank you." There hadn't been any updates with the search for the Avatar, though Izumi knew she'd be contacted if anything changed.

"I'm sharing a room with Mako!" Wu blurted out. "The palace is old and creaky, and sometimes there's these weird noises. I need you there to check them out in case it's something dangerous."

Mako groaned internally, feeling something die inside him. He only hoped there wasn't karaoke again.

"Splendid, well, I'm sure you'll all have a wonderful time. I'll see you all at the coronation," Raiko concluded jovially. He then bid farewell and left the embassy.

"This is going to be so much fun!" Wu cheered, shoving his face right in front of Mako's. All Mako could do was remind himself that after the coronation, he could go back to the investigation and this whole nightmare would be over.

The royal palace was in better shape now. Teams of architects, engineers, and construction crew had worked tirelessly to restore the grand design to its former glory. There was still much to be done, and not all the precious gemstones, artifacts, and gold adornments could be replaced, but the workers were doing their best to improvise.

As a team of earthbenders sculpted the famed badgermole statues, Kuvira and Suyin watched from the base of the stairs. People carried materials and equipment to and from the palace, racing past them with a sense of urgency. The coronation was meant to be in a week.

"Who knew the Allied Forces could put together a team so quickly?" Baatar said as he made his way over. "There's still so much to do so it won't be completely finished, not for a long time, but at least the front exterior of the palace will be finished."

Kuvira found herself unable to smile at the progress. It still didn't sit well with her. "I keep wondering why we can't put this much effort into helping those in the Lower Ring. The people there have lived in squalor even before the fall of the monarchy."

"At least restoring the palace and grounds means the royal cabinet can return to their duties," Suyin offered. "With the government and the new king back in place, they can organise the rebuilding efforts across the city. I'm sure Prince Wu would be honoured and lucky to have you and your men aiding him?"

None of Suyin's response convinced Kuvira any differently. She gave a polite smile, "I think I might go for a walk. Get some air."

Baatar looked concerned, "Are you sure you're well enough? Your arm hasn't fully healed?"

Kuvira smiled back, "I won't go far. I'll be alright." She gave a brief nod to Suyin and left.

Much of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces had set up camps inside the palace grounds. Under normal circumstances this would be unheard of, though they needed to be close to help with the repairs and launch patrols into the Upper and Middle rings. They'd only caught a handful of barbarians and so far there hadn't been any other reports of barbarian activity outside Ba Sing Se. Kuvira knew that they hadn't quashed the threat entirely, but for the most part, it seemed like peace was finally here.

Kuvira made her way through the living quarters, with soldiers giving her salutes as she continued. She didn't know exactly where she was going, only that she wanted a break from the palace grounds.

There were many conflicting thoughts going through her mind. It's not that she didn't enjoy this peace or was ungrateful, more that the efforts spent on preparing for Prince Wu's coronation weren't right in her mind, not when so many others in Ba Sing Se were suffering.

Why would people spend so much to celebrate one man who had done virtually nothing to help this nation? Kuvira knew she shouldn't be surprised; the other world leaders had all pulled out of their mission to find one person, the Avatar, who hadn't done anything for the Earth Kingdom or the rest of the world for the past three years. And then there was the problem with President Raiko. She could tell he wanted Wu on the throne, and many of the royal cabinet ministers had buddied-up with the president while taking refuge in the United Republic, so it was clear that Raiko wanted to control the Earth Kingdom. But what was his end game? To turn the entire continent into a United Republic?

Her thoughts were interrupted as she reached a dead end. It seemed while busy stewing in her head she had mindlessly walked through the Upper Ring. However, as she turned around there was a shift in the earth beneath her.

Kuvira quickly stomped into the road, but by the time she sensed the vibrations it was too late. The earth beneath her flipped over, and metal shackles clunked around her wrists. They were platinum. She tried to call out but something covered her mouth. It had all happened so quickly. Despite her injured arm stabbing with pain, she thrashed about while two men took hold of her either side. It was completely dark, and the three of them descended even further into the earth.

These two were obviously earthbenders, but whom exactly? Kuvira tried to feel her surroundings, taking note of how many seconds they had descended and in what direction so she could escape. She lost count but at least it kept her panic at bay. She reminded herself that whoever they were, if they wanted her dead, she would have been by now.

Finally, their stone elevator reached an illuminated cavern. Green light crystals dotted the walls around them, giving the room an eerie atmosphere. Kuvira glanced to her sides, noting that her captors were wearing long dark robes, though she couldn't see anything else. As a rock glove fell from her mouth, Kuvira's questions were answered. It was the Dai Li.

"The... Dai Li?" Kuvira panted as she caught her breath. "Why are you here? What's going on?" Neither agent replied, which angered Kuvira further, "Answer me!"

"We are not here to fight you," one of the agents finally broke the silence.

"Then what do you want? Why restrain me and snatch me in broad daylight?" Kuvira questioned, though the agents said nothing more.

From the tunnel in front of them, several more Dai Li walked out in unison. Their numbers grew until several rows of them filled the cavern. The agents parted like a city gate, making room for another figure dressed like them. Though they did not have a hat, and as they approached, Kuvira could see that it was an older woman. As she came closer, green light reflected off her long, painted fingernails, and illuminated her face. Kuvira's eyes widened. It couldn't be, surely not? She let out a small gasp.

"...Hou-Ting?"

The former earth queen stood before Kuvira with a stern yet poised expression, "The Great Uniter herself. It is a pleasure to meet you, Kuvira," her wrinkled face twisted into a grin.

It really was her, the former earth monarch. The one which all had presumed dead. After the initial shock began to wear off, a deep rage boiled up inside Kuvira, "I will not have the Allied Forces victory be marred by another royal!" she exclaimed. She shoved one of the Dai Li next to her and tried to knee an earth pillar into the other, but both attacks were thwarted easily.

Hou-Ting looked bored as she examined her nails, not giving Kuvira's struggling a single glance, "The sooner you stop that the sooner we can talk and let you go."

"Talk?!" Kuvira spat her words, "Why would I talk to you? You have no relevance here!"

With her eyes wide with fury, Hou-Ting bellowed her words, "No relevance?! I am the Earth Queen!" Before she could finish Hou-Ting choked and spluttered, her voice raspy and hoarse. She waved a hand to the side, and a Dai Li agent pulled out a silk handkerchief for her to cough into. Kuvira guessed that it was the result of what Zaheer had done to her.

Kuvira knew she had to calm down. She was being irrational; there were too many agents to escape from, even if she weren't injured, and if the Dai Li really were here then they may have infiltrated her army. They were the masters of secrecy and gathering information after all. She had to figure out why they were here and what they were after.

Inhaling deeply, Kuvira continued, "How are you alive? The world thinks you're dead?"

After she managed to compose herself, Hou-Ting replied, "Is that the story they're telling?"

"There was no body found, so it was assumed that you'd been burnt to death in the palace fires. But there were eye-witness reports that Zaheer killed you? Grand Secretariat Gun said as much when as he was fleeing."

"Gun!" Hou-Ting whispered his name resentfully, "I should have disposed of that treacherous viper rat while I had the chance." She coughed a few more times, and then finally relaxed. "Those Red Lotus low-lives did attack me in my throne room. Zaheer ripped the very air from my lungs as I fell, unable to do anything as I passed in and out of consciousness. Before I blacked out entirely, I did hear that ruffian claim that my 'death belonged to the people' or some nonsense like that. The absurdity of them!" Hou-Ting explained, taking a moment to catch her breath. "My guess is Zaheer believed that I would die at the hands of the masses as he let them rampage and pillage my palace, as if it were some act of justice. And I nearly did die, I might add. But I found a way to escape, and made my way back to the Dai Li."

It was still hard to believe that Hou-Ting was actually here, though Kuvira couldn't deny that the former earth queen really was standing in front of her. "So, what is it that you want from me?"

"To thank you, of course," Hou-Ting's grin appeared once more, while Kuvira looked surprised at her answer. "For years I waited and hid, unable to do anything to save my kingdom from ruin. I spent time wandering through the wilderness, before finally reconnecting with the Dai Li. Even then our numbers were so few that we could not do much, instead hiding like wolfbats in a cave. But then, I heard of your successes as commander of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. You untied the Earth Kingdom and drove out the degenerates that stole Ba Sing Se from me. I knew that you were a truly honourable and capable commander. If anyone could restore balance to the Earth Kingdom, it would be you."

"You 'reconnected' with the Dai Li?"

Hou-Ting sighed, "The Dai Li have always had a... complicated relationship with the crown. At one point they controlled Ba Sing Se and my father was merely an instrument, then the Dai Li were banished. And later, I sought them out when I needed their assistance in keeping the throne. I had to prove myself once again but now, we have come to an arrangement."

There was obviously a lot more to her story, though Kuvira didn't think Hou-Ting would share the details. "Well, if you wanted to thank me you could've just posted a letter rather than drag me down here."

"Direct and to the point, fine qualities of a military commander," Hou-Ting responded. She took her time to reply to Kuvira's comment, "What I want is what you want; a stable and united Earth Kingdom. So what I am proposing, and why I had you brought down here, is to form a partnership between both of us."

Kuvira looked perplexed at Hou-Ting's suggestion, "A partnership?"

"Indeed. A partnership between the crown and the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. Kuvira, you are a brilliant military commander and strategist, while I am an experienced diplomat and leader. Together with our own abilities, we can restore the Earth Kingdom to its former glory." Hou-Ting explained, raising her arms triumphantly to either side.

It was all sounding rather unbelievable. A queen back from the dead, wanting to form a 'partnership' with her. "You do realise that your great-nephew is about to be crowned as the next king," Kuvira replied. She hated bringing up Wu but at least it would put a dent in Hou-Ting's proposition, "It's a bit hard to offer a partnership with the 'crown' when you don't have one."

Hou-Ting clearly wasn't happy with Kuvira's tone, though she allowed her comment to slide, "It is true that my great-nephew is my kin, and one day, he will inherit everything that I have. But he is not ready. I'm sure you've noticed that President Raiko has fostered quite a friendship with the prince, and many of the royal cabinet. Shameful to pollute my own great-nephew's mind and use him as his puppet. And there are other concerns too," Hou-Ting continued, "were you aware of two barbarians who were more 'skilled', or seemed like they were far superior to any in Qiang's forces? One of them carried a sword and the other a metalbender with a prosthetic arm?"

Kuvira didn't want to admit it, but she had heard such reports from Suyin and the others on the wall. Just how much to Hou-Ting know?

"I have good reason to believe that they were Red Lotus operatives, sent to Ba Sing Se after my attempted assassination and tasked with fanning the flames of rebellion against the crown. They may have even been involved in the assassination of the Council of Five, leading to the fall of Ba Sing Se."

"You mean the reports from the Fire Nation are true? That is really is the Red Lotus out there?" Kuvira questioned.

"I have yet to confirm anything, but if such a threat does exist, then even Raiko controlling my great-nephew will not be enough to keep the Earth Kingdom safe. Raiko may know how to win the hearts and minds of those he wants to control, but he is spineless, and cannot do what is necessary," her words were probably the only thing so far that Kuvira actually agreed with. Hou-Ting continued, "But with me at the head of our glorious kingdom, and with the resources I posses with the Dai Li, together we can defend against any such threats!"

There was a long silence. Hou-Ting looked surprised as she continued to wait for a reply, though Kuvira said nothing. While she still couldn't believe what was happening – with the former earth monarch appearing before her – there was a different emotion that welled up inside Kuvira upon hearing Hou-Ting's proposition.

After a moment longer, Kuvira replied, "I set out three years ago with a small collection of willing and brave soldiers, and we built up our forces and helped those around us. We were recognised by the world leaders, and I was even appointed Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom. We sacrificed so much, lost people we cared about, and gave up parts of ourselves just to see a united and free Earth Kingdom finally at peace." Images of the past flashed through Kuvira's mind. All the injuries and death, the hopeless and drive, but all the successes, overcoming against all the odds, it had all taken three years but felt like a lifetime ago.

Kuvira's face formed a defiant and spiteful stare as she looked up. "Do you mean to tell me that while we were fighting and risking our lives, you were alive and kicking this whole time, simply hiding underground with your collection of agents protecting you where it is safe? And now you want to take what we sacrificed so much to build and keep it for yourself?! Hou-Ting!" Kuvira locked eyes with her, "You are the epiphany of arrogance and self-entitlement! Why, why in Vaatu's name, would I ever partner with some old underground hag like you?!"

Hou-Ting's face was aghast. "How dare you?!" she exclaimed, matching Kuvira's tone.

"You talk about experience, yet you ran your kingdom into the ground! You exhorted your citizens and took everything they had so you could live in a luxurious palace growing fat with your riches! I have travelled and met people all over the Earth Kingdom, and despite their differences they all say the same thing; how much they despised you!"

"Enough!" Hou-Ting bellowed. Her agents readied themselves to strike, prompting Kuvira to settle down. "Your ignorance is astounding, Kuvira, if you believe that I have done nothing for my kingdom. Though, I will humble myself in a way unbefitting for royalty and admit that there is an element, albeit a small one, of truth to what you have said."

Even with her round-about way of saying it, Kuvira was shocked that Hou-Ting would respond with this. The former earth queen continued, "It is true that I grew complacent while I was the Earth Queen. I did enjoy the riches and nourishment that comes with being royalty – as was my divine birth right and reward – though it did cause me to lose sight of what it takes to rule a nation. Believe it or not, I did have to claw my way to the throne. I did have to fight to hold onto what was rightfully mine." As the former earth monarch reflected, Kuvira could see Hou-Ting was in fact genuine. She truly believed that she had made a mistake, yet it did nothing to sway Kuvira's convictions.

Hou-Ting continued, "But, as I did enjoy the rewards for my efforts, I forgot what it meant to struggle. To stop those with power and influence from taking what belongs to you." Hou-Ting stared into Kuvira's eyes, "I will never let myself forget that again."

"Well, I'm glad that you've had this moment of self-awareness, but it doesn't change the fact that I won't agree to any partnership with you," Kuvira challenged. There was still the threat of the Dai Li that she had to keep in mind, but she had another angle to play, "I only told my soldiers that I would be going for a walk. I've been gone for a few minutes now, and they will probably suspect something is wrong. If you don't send me back then they might go looking for me - and might I add – we have very capable earthbenders, some of whom can sense vibrations from underground. You can't keep me here forever."

Thankfully, Hou-Ting didn't question Kuvira's embellishment of her circumstances. "I'll get to the heart of the matter then, shall I?" Hou-Ting answered. "I do not believe that you are unintelligent, naïve of course, but I do believe that you must have seen what I see in President Raiko's intentions. I believe that you share the same concern as me, and do not wish to see the Earth Kingdom controlled by Raiko from his comfy office on stolen Earth Kingdom land. Therefore, if you see what will happen if my great nephew takes the throne and is controlled by Raiko, though you do not see myself as the rightful and capable ruler that I am, then that must mean you wish... to hold onto the throne yourself."

The thought had been on Kuvira's mind, but by no means had she considered it fully, "I haven't made a decision."

"Then good. Because you're a nobody, Kuvira, and no one will ever follow you," Hou-Ting answered bluntly. "You are an orphan, cast aside by your parents and given away to a Beifong," Hou-Ting continued. Kuvira looked shocked and angry that Hou-Ting knew this much about her, to which the former earth queen gestured to her agents all around them, as if it should be obvious by now that Hou-Ting knew everything about her. "You may have gained the title 'Great Uniter' by some, but you will never be seen as a true ruler by the aristocrats and nobles of the kingdom."

Kuvira was silent for a moment, partly because she was stunned that Hou-Ting would know such things, but also since it welled up a deep insecurity that Kuvira feared was true. "So, what will you do if I still refuse to work with you?"

"I will give you time," Hou-Ting answered, to Kuvira's surprise. The former earth queen flicked her hand once more, and a Dai Li agent fetched a radio and lay it in front of Kuvira. "Take this. It is a secure line to myself and the Dai Li. Do not bother tracking it. But if you really are idealistic and naïve than I suppose experience will be the only teacher you'll accept. If you do take the throne, then try and keep it. See how the other leaders view you, and whether they will serve under your rule. See if you can convince Raiko and the other leaders that you are somehow the one to lead the Earth Kingdom. Watch as crowds revolt against you, as your closest allies become your enemies. And through it all," Hou-Ting moved in closer, "know that my Dai Li will be watching. I will know of your failures even before you do. And then, when you realise the truth that I do, you will come back and ask for my help."

The Dai Li agents uncuffed Kuvira's hands, though she couldn't bring herself to reach for the radio just yet. She kept herself composed even with Hou-Ting's haunting threats, though even she felt the fear seep into the back of her mind. "Are we finished?" Kuvira responded.

Hou-Ting directed her agents away, "I look forward to hearing from you, Great Uniter." As she turned and left, Kuvira felt the earth platform travel back the way she came.

The daylight was blinding once she reached the surface. It almost felt like she'd imagined the entire ordeal. Though next to Kuvira sat the radio given by Hou-Ting, a reminder that it wasn't all a nightmare.

Kuvira looked down and saw her arms shaking. Her whole body soon began to tremble. She had tried to remain so calm and collected but now that it was over, Kuvira couldn't hold it together. She gasped several times before steadying her breathing. It was everything; the suddenness of being snatched, the rows of Dai Li, the eerie green glow of the crystals. The revelation that Hou-Ting was alive and the threat of her Dai Li watching the entire time. Kuvira took a moment to process it all, and then exhaled. Her calm had returned.

Though it didn't resolve her dilemma; Kuvira had come out here to clear her head and gather her thoughts, but now, she was more confused than ever.

Chapter Text

"We're here!" Prince Wu exclaimed as the train stopped. There was still a short trip from the station to the Winter Palace, but Wu couldn't contain his excitement. He turned back to Mako, "Just wait until you see the mountain spas!"

Mako stepped out after Wu, admiring the scenery around them. Much of the land around Ba Sing Se was arid and dry, yet this secluded Winter Palace a few hours northwest of the Outer Wall was rather luscious. The forest before them was an array of vibrant greens, dotted with the reds and pinks of wild flowers, and the air filled with the scent of recent rain. A decretive green and gold archway with badgermole carvings engraved into the corners welcomed them, leading to a lantern-lined pathway to the palace. "It's... pretty beautiful here, actually."

Two men pulling rickshaws approached from the path ahead and stopped under the archway. "Your majesty, welcome to the Winter Palace," one of the men greeted. The other addressed Izumi and Ilah, "Welcome, Fire Lord Izumi and Crown Princess Ilah. It is an honour to have you visit." Both men bowed low, and the others returned the greeting.

The group were escorted through the forests. It was only for a couple minutes, but it was still a tranquil and almost ethereal experience. There were even flashes of the occasional spirit dwelling in the colourful canopies. Once out of the trees, Mako realised why this palace was named after 'winter'; the golden-tiled building was situated on the edges of the northern mountain range. In the colder seasons these hills would be laden with snow and the lake partially frozen over. But even with the warm summer they were currently experiencing, the Winter Palace was still a beautiful sight.

After making their way over a stone bridge along the waterfront, the rickshaws pulled up. Grand Secretariat Gun helped the prince out of his vehicle, followed by Mako, while other servants attended to the Fire Nation royals. The palace servants carried their luggage and led the group through another ornamental gate and over a stream to the main gardens. Much of the native jungle had been preserved, and with the stone architecture the whole grounds had an ancient and mystical aura to it.

"It isn't a modern dwelling for sure, but this place does feel like home," Wu reminisced. He paused while at the front of the group with the grand secretariat, and for a rare moment, Prince Wu simply stood still, taking in what he saw. "Over there is where I nearly tripped and died by falling down a hill. Oh, and over there is where Gun and I used to practice earthbending stances... back when I thought I could earthbend."

Despite every other moment working for the prince being soul-destroying, Mako couldn't help but appreciate Wu's fondness for the Winter Palace. "You seem to really have a connection to this place," he commented. It reminded him of how he felt when he visited the Fire Nation; a bond or understanding that couldn't quite be articulated into words. Elusive, yet close to the core.

"Yeah, I probably spent more of my childhood here than in Ba Sing Se if I'm honest," Wu replied.

"So, when did the royal family build this palace? It does look old."

"Build it? Hah, we didn't do that," Wu admitted. "My great-grandmother and great aunt kicked some religious group out and refurbished it. They weren't really using it all that much anyway. I think. That's the story at least."

Suddenly, the magic of this place had been lost in Mako's eyes, "Hmm..."

Wu turned back to the group, "Anyway, the main building is up ahead! I've had the servants prepare refreshments and then we can visit the mountain spa. A secluded collection of hot pools only a short walk from the palace!"

It was another few minutes till they reached the palace itself. The main building sat on a raised hill, giving spectacular views of the lake and fields ahead, and the mountains behind. Through another arch stood two massive doors, opening up into a sunny and intricately designed lounge. The smell of incense and other fragrances wafted from inside.

To their left was a large mural in a golden frame, depicting the first walls of Ba Sing Se being constructed. "How fascinating," Fire Lord Izumi admired.

"It is an artistic interpretation; no one really knows exactly how or when the walls of Ba Sing Se were created," Grand Secretariat Gun commented, "though it is still a beautiful piece. Sadly, much of the original artworks were damaged when the palace was attacked during the Hundred Year War, before the Winter Palace was acquired by the crown." Gun's eyes widened as he realised what he had said, "I beg your pardon, Fire Lord Izumi, I did not intend to bring up the war."

"Grand Secretariat Gun, you have nothing to apologise for," Izumi's eyes softened as she held up her hand. She glanced back to the mural, "The day that Avatar Aang defeated my grandfather was the day that ''all'' of us were liberated from the ideology of generations of Fire Lords. If we do not remember and recognise what they did for what it was, then we will be doomed to repeat it."

The grand secretariat bowed again, "Thank you for your words, Fire Lord Izumi." Gun looked the entire group, "Well, I suppose we should show you to your rooms." The servants collected their luggage and started leading them through the hallways.

As Izumi turned to follow them, she noticed that her daughter was still staring at the mural. It wasn't a look of admiration though, but one of a deep sadness. Izumi instinctively wanted to console Ilah and help her through whatever emotions she was feeling. But there was still this rift between them, something that had been brewing for some time. Maybe it was best if she let her daughter process whatever it was at this moment alone.

After a brief moment longer, Ilah joined the rest of the group.

It had been a long day for the team rebuilding the palace. Suyin and Baatar were taking a break along with those in their roster, while others were starting the next shift. The afternoon summer sun brought with it an uncomfortable heat, and the pair sat under the sunshades around the camp.

Suyin poured her son a cup of water, "So, after this coronation will you and Kuvira take some time for yourselves?" she asked.

Baatar took a sip, relieving the dryness in his throat. "We haven't really thought that far ahead, I guess. Everything we've done has been to get to this point, so it's hard to think about what to do next."

"You'll both have the wedding to plan," Suyin answered. "Sorry, I... didn't know if you wanted to talk about it." Even though they'd fought on this mission together, Suyin still wasn't sure where she stood with Baatar. Her twin sons hadn't said a word to their older brother despite also being in Ba Sing Se for the mission and coronation.

"It's alright," Baatar replied. The truth was that they also hadn't spent much time planning their wedding. Though it didn't stop Baatar from imagining what it would be like. His face grew downcast as he thought about it more. "Do... do you think dad would want to be there?"

Suyin's eyes were wide with surprise and sadness. She tried to smile warmly, "Your father loves you very much, Baatar. As do I. I can promise you, that we'll both be there to celebrate your wedding."

Baatar lost the words to respond. While he had harboured resentment towards his parents this whole time, he had still imagined countless scenarios where his parents wouldn't show up at his wedding or would turn up just to disown him. The way it had played out here was probably what he was least expecting.

The pair noticed Kuvira returning from her walk. She made her way through the crowds of soldiers, some greeting her with a salute, though Kuvira barely acknowledged them. Instead, her eyes followed the ground ahead of her, refusing to look up at the others. Baatar tried to wave but she didn't notice, not until he called her name out. Kuvira shifted her gaze and saw Baatar with Suyin, "Hey."

There was something off with Kuvira; both Baatar and Suyin could sense it. Baatar pulled up a chair, "Come join us. How are you feeling?"

Kuvira walked over, but her eyes shifted between the soldiers around them like a startled fox antelope. "I might go lie down for a bit," she mentioned after a pause. "I think it will be good to get some rest before working on the repairs."

"Is everything alright?" Suyin asked, her expression growing slightly concerned.

"I think I just need some rest, that's all," Kuvira reassured.

Baatar stood up and ran his hand down her arm, and Kuvira gave a soft smile before turning away. Maybe she was just overworked? Though Baatar and Suyin couldn't shake the feeling that something was off.

Mako stood along the waterfront, admiring the view of the lake and hills. Finally, there was a moment of peace; the prince had decided to take a nap after soaking in the thermal pools, giving Mako some time to himself. The past few weeks had been exhausting being Prince Wu's bodyguard, though he couldn't deny he was glad that he had the chance to see this place thanks to his new job.

"Mako," Grand Secretariat Gun walked along the stone path, "the servants prepared some warm lunch." In his hands was a cardboard box with delicious smells emanating out, with a pair of chopsticks laying flat on top.

"Thanks, I appreciate it," Mako replied, taking the meal and opening it up. Inside were slices of braised turtle duck on a bed of jasmine rice and steamed greens. With his stomach grumbling, Mako sat on an outdoor bench and dug in.

The grand secretariat chuckled lightly, "Serving Prince Wu can be exhausting, and work up quite the appetite." The old man joined Mako on the bench, "Thank you for everything that you've done to help the prince."

Part of Mako wanted to reply that he didn't have much of a choice in working for Wu. He'd always wondered why Gun kept on being Grand Secretariat and basically a servant to Wu. After finishing his mouthful, Mako asked Gun a question, "So, why do you still work for Prince Wu? After Hou-Ting fell, you could have gone anywhere. She was just as bad – I mean, er... 'challenging' – as the prince, wasn't she?" Mako smoothed over.

Gun didn't seem too bothered by Mako's words, almost as if part of him expected Mako to feel that way about the royals. He sighed, "It is true; the prince is very much cut from the same cloth as his great aunt, or so it would seem at a glance. But he wasn't always like that." Gun could see Mako wasn't exactly convinced so he continued, "Before becoming an advisor to the queen and later the grand secretariat, I was actually an advisor for Hou-Ting's sister and her daughter. I spent a lot of time here at the Winter Palace and got to watch Wu grow from just a tiny infant."

"Did the royal family not spend much time in Ba Sing Se? Wu's grandmother and mother I mean?"

"Hou-Ting's sister didn't want to be involved in politics anymore, not after she saw what Hou-Ting did to keep the throne," Gun revealed. "It was a difficult and messy time back then; Earth King Kuei and his wife bore only two daughters, and after his sudden passing, there were many in the extended family who thought that the Earth Kingdom needed a male successor. But, she did take the Earth Kingdom throne and quashed any threat against her, while her sister Kwa Mai sought a more peaceful life here at the Winter Palace, finding a husband and giving birth to a daughter and living out the rest of her days here. Wu's parents were tragically killed in an act of retaliation against the royal family," the grand secretariat looked pained while recalling the memories.

"Wu was such a curious child, and although it happened when was very young, I think his parents' murder turned that curiosity of the world into a fear and anxiety. Combined with the special treatment he received for being royalty, it changed him into who he is today."

It was hard for Mako not to sympathise with Wu, especially given his own experience of losing his parents when he and Bolin were young. The difference was, Mako had no royal cabinet or Winter Palace to take care of him; he and Bolin had been all alone. And none of Wu's sorrows could really be used an as excuse to treat everyone around him the way he did.

"Wu might have a sense of entitlement and demand a lot, but he has never been cruel. He has never seen his status as the future heir as an excuse to torture and hurt others. Not like Hou-Ting," Gun added. He smiled fondly, "Maybe it is a bit selfish of me, but I just can't let go of those memories of a happy little child running around the palace, asking countless questions about everything even as a young toddler. That's why I want to see him take the throne; I want to see him be the ruler his great-aunt should have been. Anyways," Gun looked back to Mako, "I imagine you'd probably enjoy some time alone rather than listening to the reminiscing of an old man."

Mako smiled politely, "It's alright, and thank you again for bringing the food." Gun bowed and made his way back to the main palace.

The world of palaces and kings was something completely foreign to Mako. Not only had he grown up on the streets for much of his life, but the United Republic of Nations had never been ruled by a monarchy. It seemed that behind the scenes there was so much corruption and bloodshed all to cling to a throne. Not that Republic City was free of that of course, though his conversation with the grand secretariat had been insightful. It only made Mako wonder what kind of pressures the crown princess also bore, being next in line to the Fire Nation throne. Maybe one day he'd have the courage to ask her about it.

In the shelter of their cabin, Baatar and Kuvira ate together. Despite the heat during the day, the summer nights in Ba Sing Se could still get rather cold. They'd been served a dinner of vegetable stew and greens, though Kuvira hadn't eaten much at all.

"Kuvira, what's up? Something is bothering you?" Baatar asked. "You've pushed that bok choy around your plate a dozen times."

Kuvira said nothing right away, though sat upright in her chair, "Actually, I've pushed it around fourteen times."

"Please," Baatar reached out and held Kuvira's hand, his eyes trying to connect with her. "You can tell me."

There was a silence while Kuvira pondered, "Okay. Let's go for a walk."

"A... walk?" Baatar was confused at first, though when Kuvira started putting her uniform coat on he realised she was serious.

After a few minutes, Kuvira led them both to an open section of the Upper Ring. There was a lake nearby, and the scattered remnants of the barbarians and their presence here. Kuvira stomped into the earth, closing her eyes and sensing the vibrations all around. They were alone, as far as she could tell.

Baatar realised by now that Kuvira wasn't worried to speak freely because she couldn't trust him, but because she thought someone was listening. He turned and scanned their surroundings as well.

Once Kuvira opened her eyes, sure that no one was there, her cold and distant expression softened into one of sadness. Saying nothing, she buried herself into Baatar's arms. She didn't cry – no, she would never let herself do that – but in that moment, Kuvira allowed herself to break down her walls and feel everything that she'd kept inside earlier today. Baatar held her close, still confused and now even more concerned.

After a sharp exhale, Kuvira composed herself again. She pulled away, standing in front of Baatar. "I...," Kuvira had to clear her throat, "earlier today, when I went for that walk... I was kidnapped."

Baatar stood stunned for a few seconds before his protectiveness kicked in. Horror and worry spread across his face as he held Kuvira, "What?! What do you mean?! Who... who kidnapped you? How?!"

"It was the Dai Li, Baatar. And Hou-Ting," Kuvira revealed. Baatar's eyes were wide and in shock. "Hou-Ting and her Dai Li have been here the whole time, watching us, watching how we've helped the Earth Kingdom. She's alive."

"W... what?" Baatar stammered.

Kuvira was now a bit calmer after her outburst, "Hou-Ting was never killed by Zaheer. Apparently, he had intended for her to die at the hands of the civilians she controlled and used. But somehow, she survived. She and the Dai Li snatched me while I was out."

"That's why you didn't want to talk in our cabin, or earlier today during our break; in case the Dai Li were there." Baatar then stood upright, "Quick, let's send out search parties and find them. They must still be in-"

"Wait, Baatar," Kuvira stopped him. "We can't go after them. They've probably left by now."

A solemn expression appeared on Baatar's face. He wished to the spirits that he had been there to protect her. "Kuvira... I'm sorry I wasn't there to help you," Baatar confessed.

Kuvira shook her head, "Don't worry about that Baatar. The problem is that Hou-Ting and her Dai Li could have infiltrated our ranks. She knew things, Baatar," Kuvira found her fears bubbling to the surface again. "She knew about the two barbarians Suyin and Bolin faced. She said they are likely Red Lotus operatives. She also knows that Raiko is using Wu to get to the throne. She... also knew about my past."

By this point Baatar looked horrified and perplexed. It was a lot to take in. "What is it that she wants?"

"The throne. She brought me down there to try and convince me to form a partnership, with me as her military commander and her on the throne," Kuvira answered, a spitefulness creeping into her voice. Even saying the words aloud felt wrong.

Baatar shared the same disgust, "What? Did she really think we'd say yes to that?" He shook his head.

"The thing is Baatar, Hou-Ting did have a point," Kuvira admitted. She elaborated while noticing Baatar's face drop, "If Prince Wu gets the throne, then that's basically handing the Earth Kingdom to Raiko. While I tried to push that idea out of my mind and focus on our campaign, now that it's complete I can't help but wonder if it's best for the Earth Kingdom."

"But you can't give the throne to Hou-Ting."

"Of course not!" Kuvira replied. Her fists started to clench, "It's her fault that the Earth Kingdom was in such disarray before her fall. The Hundred Year War didn't help, but she drove the kingdom into the ground from her selfishness and cruelty. It baffles me why there are those who would still want another monarch to take her place." Kuvira had told Hou-Ting that everyone in the Earth Kingdom despised her, though that wasn't necessarily true. There were still many who supported the idea of monarchy, even though they were grateful for Kuvira and the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. It didn't make sense at all to Kuvira; why would someone be held on a pedestal and praised for simply being born into the right family?

"We can't give the throne to Hou-Ting, but letting Prince Wu take the throne is also a bad idea," Baatar concluded. "Then maybe we find another solution. Maybe... maybe we could maintain control." Kuvira looked back to Baatar as he continued, "We've done more for this nation than Hou-Ting or Wu ever have. And we can't trust Raiko and his schemes. Plus, if Hou-Ting is right about the Red Lotus, then simply replacing a useless monarch with another would leave the Earth Kingdom vulnerable to a second collapse."

Kuvira paused, dwelling on Baatar's words. "Back when we were attacked by the barbarians on the train, I took on all twenty of them myself. I had a close call with one of them, and if it weren't for Bolin, it might have ended differently. Do you remember what I said?" Kuvira asked. "I said that perhaps I had taken on more of a challenge than I could handle, and that it wouldn't happen again. If we hold onto power for ourselves, would we be doing just that?"

"Kuvira," Baatar responded, "I believe in you. In us. We've achieved so much these past few years, more than any other leader has in the Earth Kingdom. Maybe, you need to believe in and trust yourself."

"I do believe in myself. I know that if we did maintain control over the Earth Kingdom then we would preserve all that we have achieved, and our nation would prosper," Kuvira replied. Her expression grew more concerned, "Though, I do not trust the people. There are those who would only see us as a military kingdom, those who would rather hold onto a ruling class of monarchs and officials. And how would the rest of the world see it? Would they see us as legitimate rulers? And what if Hou-Ting did come out from the shadows? I doubt that she would work with Raiko, but if she did reach out to Prince Wu then the Earth Kingdom could back him over us."

Her concerns were reasonable, Baatar thought. It was a tricky situation after all. The last thing they needed was to make themselves enemies of everyone else. "Regardless of what faces us, I know that there are soldiers in our ranks who would support you," Baatar reassured. "Soldiers who have risked too much to see it all be undone in the hands of another spoilt and self-serving monarch."

Baatar's reassurances did help Kuvira, especially after everything Hou-Ting had thrown at her about no one wanting to follow her. Kuvira slowly nodded, "We'll have to be tactful about it; we can't simply say that we're taking over from the royals." She stared out into the dark streets and surroundings, pondering over what to do. "We can't tell anyone about Hou-Ting," Kuvira mentioned. Baatar looked a bit surprised so she explained further, "But we can use that to our advantage. I have an idea."

Chapter Text

Rows of chairs were arranged below the palace steps, with a stage and microphone set up in front. The coronation wasn't exactly what Wu had hoped for, given that there were no festivities, dancing badgermoles, nor six hours of entertainment like what he had planned, but nonetheless, the prince was excited for his big day. Several photographers snapped up shots of Wu as he posed in various positions and locations, even offering autographs and photos with guests. Officials and leaders had come from the four corners of the world, all to see the prince be crowned, and Wu was all too eager to photos taken with them.

"Okay, to the left a little," a photographer directed Prince Wu and several young women posing for a photo. "Okay, let's all say 'Kyoshi' on the count of three. One. Two. Three. Kyoshi!" The group all said the Avatar's name in unison, and the flash of a camera soon followed. "Oh spirits," the cameraman cursed. "I didn't see the wreckage in the background. Maybe we should take another one?"

Wu angrily spun his head around, noticing a section of burnt roof tiles in the outer palace wall that hadn't been fixed yet. "Gun!" the prince yelled, "Why wasn't the palace ''completely'' rebuilt?"

The grand secretariat shuffled over, "Well, your majesty, it does take time-"

"But it's ruining my photos!"

"Might I suggest taking a few more then?" Gun responded. "The view from that side is quite flattering, without compromising the lighting either."

His suggestion seemed to have quietened the prince, who moved over to where Gun had pointed to and started posing. After his fan club left, Wu gazed over to Mako, "Hey, Mako! How about we get some photos too!"

Mako had been completely ignoring everything that was happening, instead staring into the distance. Upon hearing his name he turned around, "Prince Wu?"

"Photos! We have to get some!"

"Uh... but I'm your bodyguard. Why exactly do you need me in your photos?"

Wu wasn't taking no for an answer, "Because, you're part of the royal assistants now! And you're famous of course! Well, your brother at least. The newspapers will be all over it, so I'll get better publicity!"

The thought of having the world know about his current job as a bodyguard serving Wu didn't exactly fill Mako with much joy. He reluctantly shuffled over, trying to force some semblance of a smile for each photo while simultaneously reminding himself that his job was nearly over.

"Well, if it isn't the man of the event himself!" President Raiko strode over, a warm and charismatic grin spread across his face.

"Ooh! President Raiko! We should get some pictures taken!" Wu shooed Mako out the way to make room for the president.

Raiko was much better at giving fake smiles than Mako was, beaming in between camera flashes while giving off a confident composure. The president held up a hand to stop the photographer for a moment, turning to Wu, "So, you know that you can trust the United Republic, and myself for that matter, right?"

Wu seemed surprised at Raiko's question, as if his answer was already obvious, "Of course Mr President! If it weren't for you letting us stay in Republic City I would've been dead, or worse, living in squalor!"

Raiko smiled in reply, "The reason I bring this up is that the throne is a great responsibility, and many see the position as one of immense power. There are some who might... find that power appealing."

"I'm the king though, they can't do anything right?" Wu answered naively.

"Of course you are Prince Wu. But I simply mean to reassure you that I will be there should anything happen, and to remind you to keep your guard up for anyone wanting to seize power for themselves."

"Oh, I am the ''most'' vigilant man out there Mr President! They don't call me 'superhuman' for nothing!" Wu laughed loudly.

Raiko tried his best to return a light-hearted chuckle, but even he couldn't give a convincing one. Instead, he gave a half-smirk-half-groan at Wu's joke.

While the prince was busy getting more photos taken, Mako felt an arm wrap around from behind in a fake chokehold. He freed himself and spun around, realising it was his brother. "Bolin!"

"Hey Mako! I didn't realise that you were going to be here at the... wait, why are you wearing... that?" Bolin noticed the firebender's attire.

"Well," Mako's face dropped, "I've been working as a bodyguard for Prince Wu. That's why I'm here at the coronation."

Bolin nodded slowly, "Uh huh... but... aren't you like, a detective?" he tried processing his thoughts out loud.

Sighing deeply, Mako slumped his shoulders, "Yeah, I am."

His brother didn't elaborate, so Bolin broke the silence, "Oh yeah. I should introduce you to my teammates."

"You have teammates? Oh yeah, how did the mission to Ba Sing Se go? People I've talked to seem to think you guys did amazing."

"Well, it wasn't just our team. But yeah, it went better than I thought it would," Bolin answered. He then turned back to a group of soldiers behind him, "Yeah, so that guy there is Gombo," he pointed to the large muscular man in the group, "and next to him are Baraz and Ahnah. They used to be part of Qiang's forces but now they're on our side. And then that's Akito, our mecha pilot."

Mako didn't know what to think about former barbarians being part of the Allied Forces, let alone working with his brother. It would almost be like him working with the triads back in Republic City. Nonetheless, his brother seemed pretty happy with his new role. "Well, it sounds like you're doing great things Bolin. I'm proud of you."

The lavabender smiled at hearing his brother's words, "Aw, thanks bro. I'm sure you've been... doing great things too!" he tried to encourage.

"I'll just be glad when this job is over. As soon as Prince Wu is crowned, I get to go back to being a detective."

"Hey, Mako!"

The firebender groaned as he heard the familiar voice. Turning reluctantly, he watched Prince Wu make his way over. "Yes, your majesty?"

Prince Wu noticed Bolin standing ahead of him, "Oh, you must be Mako's brother Bolin! It is so good to finally meet you!" Wu shook hands with Bolin vigorously.

"It's an honour, Prince Wu," Bolin replied.

Something was bubbling inside the young prince, making him burst with joy like a water satchel. Dread filled Mako as he watched, wondering what on earth he could be on about. "So, Mako, I was talking with President Raiko just now and... you're coming to Ba Sing Se with me!"

The words barely registered on Mako's stunned face. After a moment, his face contorted into a mix of frustration and horror, "Wait... what do you mean?"

"Well," the prince began, "Raiko told me that if there was anything he could do to help me then I should ask, and I mentioned that having you as a bodyguard has been such a wonderful experience and I didn't know what I would do without you. So, I asked if you could be stationed in Ba Sing Se permanently! And he said yes!"

Mako saw his life flash before his eyes. His future, spent in Ba Sing Se, with Prince Wu. "I... I can't believe it," he stammered.

"I know right?!" Prince Wu cheered.

With the event starting soon, Grand Secretariat Gun ushered Prince Wu over to the stage waiting area, with Mako trailing behind solemnly. The other guests began taking their seats as well. The front rows were reserved for the Zaofu Guard, with Suyin and her two sons near the front, and on the opposite side the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. Bolin sat with his team, while those receiving medals as part of the ceremony sat on stage.

Towards the middle of the chairs, Fire Lord Izumi made her way over with her daughter. She had noticed Tonraq sitting with the Northern Water Tribe chieftains, and gave a soft but sympathetic smile. "We haven't had any updates with the search for your daughter, though I'll make sure you're the first to know when we do," she reassured.

Tonraq smiled in reply, "Thank you, Fire Lord Izumi. We haven't heard anything either..." He managed to smile again while looking up at the stage, "It's nice that the Earth Kingdom can finally be at peace."

"Indeed," Fire Lord Izumi replied.

Once most of the seats were filled, Grand Secretariat Gun made his way over to the microphone, "Welcome, everyone. Thank you all for being here. Now, as the first order of business, I welcome President Raiko of the United Republic of Nations, who will be awarding medals to honour those soldiers and commanders who have performed exemplarily in the latest mission to liberate Ba Sing Se." Applause followed, and Gun turned to Raiko seated on his right, gesturing for him to come forwards.

The crowds continued to applaud for the president, who gave a brief smile and nod to the grand secretariat, "Welcome, everyone. I want to begin by saying that the past three years have been a long and difficult journey. With the fall of her majesty Hou-Ting, and the revelation that a terrorist group have been hiding among us, it seemed that the Earth Kingdom was on the brink of collapse. The whole world as well, for that matter. Though I can stand before you today in the heart of this great capitol city because that reality did not come to pass. Instead, we have united the Earth Kingdom and the United Republic of Nations, provided stability during a time of incredible chaos and uncertainty, and transformed the Earth Kingdom into a grand nation like nothing seen before."

Cheers and praised echoed in the courtyard. "Though, I do not take responsibility for this myself. The Earth Kingdom Allied Forces are the true heroes here, and I want to sincerely thank each and every soldier for their sacrifice, comradery, and bravery, in carrying out this task. I know that you have all sacrificed much. The Earth Kingdom, and the whole world, are indebted to your service." There was a round of applause, "And now, I will present the Kyoshi Medal of Freedom on behalf of the Earth Kingdom, to honour those on the front lines who have demonstrated incredible acts of service and bravery. Lieutenant Yasuko, now First Commander of the Northern Forces."

As Yasuko made her way across the stage to receive her medal, Kuvira found her thoughts drifting. She had spent all week discussing what to do with Baatar. Her eyes met with his in the front row of the crowd, each giving the other a reassuring smile. It was rare for Kuvira to feel nervous after she'd extensively planned ahead, though with so much on the line it was hard to remain calm.

"Lieutenant Guan, now Second Commander of the Southern Forces," Raiko continued. Smiling proudly to himself, Lieutenant Guan strode over and bowed as the president strung a medal around his neck. Kuvira watched as the next few commanders received their medals, until eventually, it was her turn. "And lastly, this final medal is awarded to Grand Commander of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces and Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom, Kuvira."

It was time. Kuvira rose to her feet, walking slowly but confidently towards Raiko. She didn't make eye contact for long, looking past him as he did the same. As she approached and dipped her head, Raiko slipped the medal around her neck. As with the previous recipients, cameras from the front row flashed as photographers captured the moment. Raiko smiled warmly, posing while shaking hands with Kuvira. Though she didn't make her way back to her seat just yet. Instead, Kuvira turned to face Raiko, "Mr President, if I may, I'd like to say a few words."

There was a flash in Raiko's eyes as she said this, as if he had been anticipating something. Though with the microphone picking up Kuvira's words, there was no way he could deny her request. Smiling diplomatically, he nodded, "Of course, Kuvira."

Standing with her shoulders upright and arms behind her back, Kuvira faced the audience. She managed to lock eyes with Baatar once more, his expression being the final reassurance Kuvira needed to continue. She breathed in deeply, and spoke, "I want to thank everyone who has taken part in this campaign. I know what you all have sacrificed, the losses and the joys, and many of you I'm sure would like to return to some kind of normalcy now that Ba Sing Se has been liberated. I know that we have gathered here to see the prince crowned today, but... that is something that I cannot allow."

There was silence at first, then confused murmurs in the crowd. Prince Wu looked aghast, stammering from his chair on stage. Kuvira could feel the shock and anger emanating from Raiko. "I'm sure most of you have heard of the Dai Li; they were once the cultural protectors of Ba Sing Se, but then became an underground police force in Ba Sing Se. They used their power to control the Earth King, and then the former Earth Queen Hou-Ting used them to kidnap airbenders in the city. I mention this because I can confirm that the Dai Li are once again in Ba Sing Se."

"What?!" Prince Wu blurted out. Others in the crowd looked shocked, with Fire Lorrd Izumi and Tonraq exchanging worried looks. No one could have seen this coming.

"I do not know their motives; I managed to escape their clutches before I could find out. And I do not know who is leading them. But their presence in Ba Sing Se poses a significant risk to the prince and his safety. Not only that, but we received reports that there may have been two Red Lotus operatives working with the barbarians." There were even more panicked murmurs in the audience, "I do not need to remind people of the devastation that only four members from their organisation caused, which included injuring our beloved Avatar to the point where she can no longer fulfil her duty."

There were still murmurs and uneasy whispering in the people before her. Kuvira inhaled sharply, "With all this considered, I believe that it would be irresponsible to hand over the throne to Prince Wu during a time of such uncertainty and present danger. And while I know that my forces are weary, I am confident that with a little more time as Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom, we can quash these threats, and bring lasting peace to our nation. Unless, Prince Wu," she turned back to the prince, "you believe that you can withstand the threat of secret Red Lotus operatives and the Dai Li returning to Ba Sing Se?"

Prince Wu stood up abruptly, his face scrunching up as he yelled, "President Raiko! You told me Ba Sing Se would be safe for me when I returned!"

The president looked taken back as he glanced between Prince Wu and Kuvira, unable to think of a reply. "Uh...," he mumbled.

"Prince Wu, would you like me to continue serving you and our great kingdom, and to deal with these threats before you ascend the throne?" Kuvira asked.

"Yeah, fine," Wu replied, "Just make it quicker this time. I don't want to wait

another three years." The prince sat down and folding his arms, sulking about his coronation being cancelled.

Kuvira turned back to the audience, "I do apologise for not notifying you all sooner, but I did want to make this announcement to the entire world." Her eyes stared into the crowd, piercing the very air around them, "To the Red Lotus: you will not dismantle all that we have built over the past three years. We have sacrificed too much to let it be destroyed once more. And, to the Dai Li and their leader: you will ''never'' have the Earth Kingdom throne. We have been rid of your scheming and nefarious ways, and our nation has no need of you."

There was silence from the audience, most still in shock about the revelations from Kuvira's speech. Eventually the applause began, a cold and rigid show of appreciation, more akin to a crowd of mecha suits applauding than sincere cheering. Between Kuvira's intimidating speech and composure, the awkwardness on stage between Raiko and Wu, and the news about both the Dai Li and the Red Lotus, it was hard to give a genuine ovation.

All at once, questions buzzed from the reporters. Kuvira motioned to one reporter to continue, "So does this mean that the Red Lotus really are back? Can you comment on any connection between your reports and the incidents in the Fire Nation?"

"We have yet to confirm that it is indeed the Red Lotus, and whether they are connected to the events in the Fire Nation. That is something we will follow up with immediately," Kuvira replied.

"And what about the Dai Li? How sure are you that it was them? What do they want with Ba Sing Se?" Another asked.

"As I mentioned, I wasn't able to deduce that much from my encounter. I'm sure you can imagine my focus was on escape rather than finding out more about them. But if anyone has any information, or sightings, surrounding the Dai Li, then contact us immediately." There were more questions flying her way, though Kuvira dismissed them, "I will be meeting with my officers after this where we will discuss our next steps. Once we've complied a report and assessed the situation, we will host another press conference and answer more of your questions. For now, please understand that these findings still need to be verified and investigated further."

Kuvira gave a quick nod, and walked back to her chair on stage. There wasn't a lot she could say to the audience anyway, but thankfully this would buy her and Baatar some time to figure out what to do.

Eventually the reporters died down when they realised Kuvira wouldn't answer any more of their questions. An awkward silence ensued, until Grand Secretariat Gun made his way to the microphone, "Well... um... we wish you good fortune in your investigations, Kuvira. The Crown will assist you in whatever ways necessary. Might I invite everyone to stay for the refreshments? Despite things... not quite going as expected, we still have wonderful catering from some of the best culinary experts in the surrounding cities. Uh... thank you all for coming," Gun concluded. There was some kind of half-hearted applause at the end, if one could call it that. The royal procession were the first to leave the stage, escorting a fuming Prince Wu as he marched down the steps. Several of the guests also started leaving, while Kuvira and her commanders remained on stage.

"Kuvira," a voice called from the side of the stage. Suyin had made her way over, "I had no idea the Dai Li had done this! Why didn't you tell me?"

Kuvira avoided eye contact while replying, "I didn't want to worry you, Suyin."

"Still," Suyin placed a hand on Kuvira's shoulder, "you can tell me anything, Kuvira. What can we do to help?"

"I'll be meeting with the commanders soon and we'll go over what we know and what to do. Zaofu has already been a great help to us, you needn't worry over these new threats," Kuvira replied.

Suyin looked slightly perplexed and concerned. Why would Kuvira not want their help? Before she could say anything further, President Raiko approached, "Kuvira. I think it would be best we had a word."

Kuvira had been expecting this. It wasn't a secret to her that Raiko wanted Prince Wu on the throne as soon as he could, and this setback would be putting a delay in Wu's coronation. Closing her eyes for a moment, she turned to the president, "Of course, President Raiko." The pair walked further back on the stage, with Suyin watching from the sidelines. For all the progress they'd made in patching up their relationship, Suyin couldn't help but feel like Kuvira was slipping away.

Once they were out of earshot, Raiko turned back to face Kuvira. Although he was still composed and collected, Kuvira could sense a deep rage welling up behind his confident façade. For a moment he said nothing, simply staring, before breaking the silence, "The Dai Li?"

A further silence ensued, and Kuvira realised Raiko meant his words as a question, "Yes. You are aware of them, are you not?"

"Don't give me that!" Raiko pointed his finger like a dagger at Kuvira's direction, though quickly retracted as he noticed glances from some lingering on stage. "Did anyone else encounter them? Or was it only yourself? How many are there?"

Kuvira narrowed her eyes, "Whether you believe me or not is hardly my concern. My top priority is snuffing them out." After she said this, Raiko smirked and looked away, shaking his head. Kuvira continued, "You know what kind of threat this poses, don't you? Not only is it likely that the Red Lotus have returned or are planning something since their defeat three years ago, but the Dai Li also threaten the balance of peace in the Earth Kingdom. For all we know, they could even be working together. Do you really think that Prince Wu, who has never led a nation before, could stand headstrong in such a difficult time?"

"The United Republic of Nations could have stood alongside him! There was no need to blindside us all with that spectacle," Raiko retorted angrily. "And how do you even know that it is the Red Lotus? For all I know, you're simply using fear to hold onto the throne for yourself."

"What?!" Kuvira was taken back by the president's words.

"Oh please, it's no secret that you don't approve of Prince Wu or the monarchy."

"President Raiko, I want what's best for the Earth Kingdom, as I've said before. And that means protecting us from both of these threats, since the Allied Forces are in a better position to do so than some child prince who has no experience in governing a nation. If you can't see that, then I think it's your intentions that should be questioned."

Raiko looked furious at Kuvira's words, though she wasn't finished, "And as for the United Republic protecting the prince, well, I can't say I have much faith in your abilities either. Republic City has had problems with gang violence for years, not to mention unable to withstand the Equalist threat, nor Unalaq and his attack on the city, and the Order of the White Lotus could not even keep four Red Lotus members prisoner. I think we really know who is more capable of dealing with these threats."

Raiko looked ready to lose it. His eyes burned with the intensity of Sozin's comet as he fumed, irate with the accusations he was hearing. "That is hardly fair!"

"Regardless, announcing over international radio that we are aware of their presence is sure to cause them to stumble. When an armadillo bear is backed into a corner, it tends to be careless. Now that both groups know that we're onto them, they’ll have nowhere to hide."

"And it will cause incredible panic," Raiko interjected. "Can you imagine what it will do to the public? Neighbours suspicious of each other? Questioning who among them is secretly a terrorist? You've started something that you cannot control."

"Then that is all the more reason to keep someone in a position of power who has demonstrated the strength and ability needed to stand against such threats."

It was clear that nothing Raiko could say would change Kuvira's mind. He exhaled sharply, still angry over everything. "Remember who it is you work for, Kuvira. We, the world leaders, put you in this position. And as such, I want you to report everything to me. Exactly what you find. You will step down as Interim Leader once this crisis has been resolved, mark my words," he pointed his finger out again, seething with spite and anger.

After a hot exhale left his lips, Raiko straightened his jacket, adjusted his glasses, and walked away. "I expect daily updates. Fail to comply and I will not hesitate to remove you forcibly."

All things considered, Kuvira felt like her encounter with Raiko had gone better than expected. There was much more she could have said about how incompetent Wu was, and Raiko's self-serving schemes in controlling the prince, but that would have to wait. Clearly, she'd already gotten under his skin. Though more importantly, she'd bought time for her and Baatar to figure out what to do next. With her back turned to the rest of the dispersing audience, Kuvira allowed a soft but confident smile to form on her lips.

"And, to the Dai Li and their leader: you will never have the Earth Kingdom throne. We have been rid of your scheming and nefarious ways, and our nation has no need of you."

A metal-gloved hand switched the radio off. "She is bold. But Kuvira cannot expect to lead the Earth Kingdom herself," The Dai Li agent commented.

Hou-Ting sat at a desk side-on, pondering what they'd just heard. Her fingernails caught the flickering light of a crystal nearby, her chin resting on her hand as she stared into the darkened corridors. "Kuvira is certainly clever. But no, I do not think this will be a problem."

"But she's revealed our existence to the world-"

"I wasn't finished, Guozhi," Hou-Ting flicked her hand to silence the Dai Li agent, who bowed a second time. "Kuvira never mentioned my existence, only that she encountered the Dai Li," Hou-Ting elaborated. There was something in that word choice, something that felt like a clue to what Kuvira was thinking. "It makes me wonder... does she in fact agree with some of what I said? That if I were in the picture, people would flock to see their queen rise to glory again and take the throne? By not mentioning my presence, she would never have to face that scenario. Instead, she believes that she can lead the Earth Kingdom and is using the fear of us and the Red Lotus to justify clinging to the throne."

After a pause ensued, Guozhi asked a question, "What should we do then?"

"Well that's simple of course," Hou-Ting answered, "we have to remind her of who she is and her place in the world. She is not fit to lead the kingdom, and we have to prove that to her."

"What would you like me to do next?"

Hou-Ting paused for a moment before answering, though once she thought up a plan her lips curled into a smile, "We still have those low-life barbarians we captured after Qiang fell. How about we repurpose them."

The morning air was filled with the chirps of birds and sounds of other swamp-dwelling creatures. Korra walked along a path through the trees, taking in the atmosphere while scanning the swamp floor. She'd been sent on 'mushroom duty', which involved scavenging for various edible fungi. While she still occasionally trained with Toph or by herself, most of her time nowadays was spent gathering, hunting, or doing chores for themselves and the swampbenders in the village. Although it was nice to have things to keep busy, it still didn't fill the void in her life from not being the Avatar, but it was something at least.

As Korra made her way past a cluster of trees, something caught her eye in the distance. It was hard to tell, but it seemed like a person was standing there. A woman, though Korra couldn't tell who it was. She instinctively wanted to run the other way, especially with this ghost still haunting her, but this presence felt strangely... different. Putting her basket on the ground, she decided to investigate.

"Hello?" Korra called out, pushing past some vines as she drew near. There was no reply. By now Korra could see that this woman had her back turned to her, simply standing there unmoving. She had dark hair tied up neatly at the back and was dressed in an emerald uniform with silver plating. Eventually Korra realised that she'd seen this woman before, a couple times in person, and then in portraits and photographs all over the Earth Kingdom. Korra walked around to face the woman, "Kuvira?"

Only now did the woman speak, not moving her body, but only glancing sideways at Korra, "Are you the Avatar, or Korra?"

Korra stared for a moment with widened eyes, trying to understand what was happening. There was no way that the Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom would be casually hanging out in a swamp waiting for her. Korra rubbed her eyes, though this apparition was still there. "You... you're not really here. You can't be," she concluded.

"You're right. I'm not really here, but you are," the ghost answered back. "You're here, hiding in the swamp while the world falls apart."

"I... I don't have to listen to this," Korra stammered. She spun around, heading back to the path. She wasn't about to be lectured by a figment of her imagination. "You don't know anything."

"I know that you don't want to be the Avatar," the Kuvira ghost called out. It reappeared next to Korra, who kept walking. "I know that you think the world doesn't need you anymore."

Korra tutted, a deep frustration welling inside, "That's not true! I ''did'' want to get better! I've spent three spirit-damned years trying to pull myself out of this rut, but everything I've done has ended in failure!" her voice rang out through the trees, scaring away several birds and squirrel frogs. The Kuvira ghost was gone, though Korra still spoke out loud, "The world doesn't need me anymore. It has you." Her words were grieved, though far less bitter than when she'd thought them previously. Maybe the more she repeated them, the more this truth had sunk it.

"The world will always need an Avatar."

Spinning around, Korra saw that the ghost had reappeared. This was starting to get to Korra. How could this ghost just show up out of nowhere and make these claims? "Well that's great, but come back to me when you actually have a solution," Korra retorted, marching back through the vines. She turned her head back to catch a final glimpse of the ghost, "If the world really does need an Avatar, then you'll have to show... me." Korra stopped in her tracks. She wasn't in the Foggy Swamp anymore, but in Republic City.

Before her, Korra could see the familiar peaks of skyscrapers along the rivers, the waters of Yue bay extending into the vast oceans. Though it wasn't a calming scene, but one of deep dread. Fires scattered across the city, the smoke filling the sky with a darkness that obscured the evening sunset. The smell of burning filled her nostrils, an unbearable stench of war that sent chills down her spine. Screams from terrified citizens and soldiers echoed and reverberated through her head, while the sound of earth canons firing, and blazing infernos emanated from the battle. It was a nightmare.

On the ledge where Korra stood, she realised that she wasn't alone. A man dressed in red also watched the scene unfold. She couldn't exactly see his face, though she didn't feel a familiar presence from him either. He too watched with a deep sadness and grief, almost like he had already seen this future before.

Korra gasped, feeling her heart race as the vision unfolded. What was this? Was she seeing a past event? No, there were spirit vines throughout the city. So was this a future? If so, then what in Raava's name could have caused such devastation and horror? There was something massive and metallic in the distance; Korra couldn't see what exactly, it was obscured by all the smoke and debris, but an entire building crumpled just ahead of it. And to the west, a vibrant beam of light pierced the cloudy sky, almost like a spirit portal. Though it glowed a sickly orange hue, and the vines all around it lashed out and struck those nearby.

"No... what is this?" Korra blurted out, the terror gripping her chest. She closed her eyes, wanting whatever this was to end. And to her relief, it did; when she opened her eyes, she could see the muddy earth beneath her feet. She was back in the swamp.

Collapsing to her knees, Korra rubbed her aching head. She couldn't feel the presence of the Kuvira ghost anymore, so perhaps she was alone. At least for now. Once she steadied her breathing, Korra sat upright again. She had no idea what this meant, or why she was seeing this vision, but something told her that this wasn't just a hallucination. Somehow, she knew that Republic City – no, the entire world – was in trouble. And something massive and terrible, a great calamity, was about to unfold on the world.

Chapter Text

It was still surreal waking up in the palace bedroom, with the silk bed sheets draped over her skin. The grand palace wasn't fully repaired of course, but nonetheless, it felt almost like a dream as Kuvira reminded herself of where she was.

The morning dawn cast its orange and yellow hues into their room, creating a rather calming, and tranquil atmosphere. There were no noises of troops milling about, cries from barbarians attacking in the night, nor the sounds of earth shifting during battle. The silence here was a comfort, a reminder of what they had accomplished. They had finally brought peace to the nation.

Baatar's tanned body shifted as he left the grogginess of his slumber, mumbling something incoherent as he rolled over. His skin was always warm no matter the weather, even with a crisp breeze wafting in. In a strange way it was a comfort to Kuvira as she felt her fiancé's elbow brush against her arm as he sat up.

"Morning," Kuvira greeted, her viridescent eyes inviting Baatar in.

A grin formed between Baatar's cheeks. He brushed away Kuvira's dark locks and leant in, his lips connecting with hers, "Morning to you too." After another few kisses, Baatar sat up against the headrest, with Kuivra leaning her head against his shoulder as they cuddled. Even though they'd been side-by-side for the past few years, it had been a long time since they'd felt this close.

"It still feels so unbelievable, doesn't it," Baatar mused. His gaze turned to the windows, seeing the tops of the palace walls and other buildings just visible to him from the bed.

"It is," Kuvira smiled. "We should get to the throne room," Kuvira said, sitting upright.

Baatar moaned lightly, kissing Kuvira's neck and shoulder, "Do we have to?" He mumbled between kisses. "Can't we just enjoy this without worrying over work?"

His affection couldn't help but make Kuvira feel warm and loved. But there was a sinking, lingering feeling that she couldn't shake. Even in their bedroom, there could be Dai Li anywhere, watching them. She tried to shake that feeling but it was always present, like a dark cloud smothering everything with fear. Her only escape was during sleep, and now that she was awake, the thought of Hou-Ting watching was keeping her on edge. "How do you think she responded?" Kuvira eventually replied.

"Who?"

"Hou-Ting."

Baatar pulled away, a small, annoyed grunt escaping his lips, "If she knows what's good for her then she would've crawled back into an even deeper cavern and stayed there."

Kuvira wanted to enjoy this victory. She wanted to finally know peace, to not have this feeling of struggling against a tide that she'd felt her whole life. But she couldn't feel it to its fullest, not at the moment. Not while Hou-Ting and her Dai Li were out there, waiting for her to fail. Not while Raiko and the other world leaders quietly plotted a way to shove that idiot prince on the throne. Not while the Red Lotus, the ones who started all this mess, were also out there planning who knew what. Only once they'd resolved all of this, only then she would let herself enjoy the moment. Planting a kiss on Baatar's forehead, Kuvira smiled fondly before pulling the sheets off. Baatar exhaled, realising that he too would have to get ready.

It didn't take long for Kuvira and Baatar to assemble the top commanders in the throne room. The pair had gotten dressed and eaten a quick bite, and now gathered with the others around the golden throne. The chair itself was worn and tarnished, and the badgermole display behind it had been stripped of all its precious gems and had lost its sheen. And while the throne room itself had been repaired it still had a damp, musty smell to it from years of abandonment, something the incense candles couldn't entirely ameliorate. Nonetheless, as Kuvira sat down on the Earth Kingdom throne those in the room couldn't help but feel a sense of accomplishment.

Kuvira turned to First Commander Minsheng of the Southern Division, "So, have there been any updates with the investigations?" she inquired. Yesterday after the coronation she had briefed them all on what had happened with the Dai Li, still sparing details on Hou-Ting's involvement. She couldn't trust anyone with that information just yet.

The first commander cleared his throat, "There haven't been any developments, Kuvira sir. We've begun questioning the Southern Division to ascertain whether the Dai Li have infiltrated our ranks, but so far nothing has been found."

"And anything from the barbarian clans?" This time, Kuvira turned to First Commander Yasuko.

"We've interrogated them as best as we can. They all say the same thing. Which at least corroborates their stories of the two men present, but not whether they have ties to the Red Lotus. Qiang is still uncooperative, but I suspect even he doesn't know the full story behind his helpers," the lieutenant explained. "We have several teams in the north advancing on other clans too. We should receive a report by the end of the week."

Second Commander Guan was the next to speak, "We've also been investigating the underground caverns where you encountered the Dai Li, Kuvira sir. It's hard to tell where the original tunnels led as they've been rearranged to cover their tracks. So far, they seem rather localised to the Upper Ring."

Giving a slight nod, Kuvira pondered all that had been said. The Red Lotus' involvement were still only rumours at this point, so they could put that aside for now if no more leads presented themselves. There was then the problem with the Dai Li, and also with the other world leaders. But first, Kuvira needed to find out where the commanders stood, "As I'm sure you're all aware, the other world leaders haven't exactly been happy with us staying on in Ba Sing Se. And while this move was to give us time to investigate these threats to the Earth Kingdom, I've also had concerns about handing the throne back to Prince Wu."

The other commanders glanced between each other, wondering where their leader was going. "What I am trying to say, is that once we deal with the Dai Li then the other nations may want us to step aside. But, in the interest of the Earth Kingdom and keeping its people safe and prosperous, there may come a time where we are unable to do so." Kuvira glanced into each of the commanders' eyes, searching and prying them for their answers, "I would like to know where you all stand on this."

There was a tense silence that filled the room. It almost felt like this was a test of their loyalty. "Kuvira, sir," Lieutenant Yasuko answered first, "I have lived in Ba Sing Se for much of my life. My family always admired the royalty, even though we had friends and relatives who were stuck in the Lower Ring and never allowed to visit us in the Middle Ring; only we could travel to see them. I could never understand how such a system was fair, until I realised that it wasn't." Yasuko saluted, "The Northern Division will never forget how you helped us retake Ba Sing Se after three long years on the front lines. I will make sure they support your ascension."

"The Allied Forces have been popular in many towns in the south," First Commander Minsheng mused, "but not all will be on board, particularly the larger cities of Omashu, Zaofu, and Gaoling. I will support such a movement and do my best to convince those in my ranks as well."

"As will I," Second Commander Lieutenant Guan echoed the sentiment, the pair saluting.

Kuvira gave a modest smile, turning to the last two commanders of the West and Central divisions, "And what of you both?"

First Commander General Cheung was more hesitant with his response, "The territories in the west are so far removed from the monarchy that they probably won't mind either way, but they are neighbours and close trading partners to the United Republic of Nations. If the United Republic is supporting the prince, then I'm not sure how supportive they will be of us assuming control."

"I understand your concerns," Kuvira reassured. "That's why I've already sent out trade agreements to many of the Earth Kingdom states. In fact, the Regent of Gaoling should be arriving here tomorrow to discuss it. That way, we can rely less on the United Republic of Nations and more on ourselves." She could still see some hesitation in General Cheung's face, "Our mission was never just about ending the barbarian threat; we have a chance now to make a real difference for our nation, and if we hand the throne back to Prince Wu then we may never get that chance again. It won't be easy of course, but we haven't been stopped at other obstacles that seemed impossible."

General Cheung exchanged another glance with his second commanders. "We will join you, Great Uniter," the three of them saluted in unison, with the First Commander of Central Division following suit soon after.

With all of them pledging loyalty to their new cause, Kuvira felt a confidence well up inside her. She knew that convincing the citizens and states would be a much tougher battle than her commanders, but this moment still carried a feeling of success. They still had to figure out what to do about the Dai Li, but at least now Kuvira knew that should she make a move to hold onto the Earth Kingdom, she would have the military backing to do so.

"Your tea, Mr President."

Raiko had been intensely staring off into the distance as the train sped along, so engrossed in his thoughts that he hadn't even noticed the waiter had arrived. "Thank you," the president acknowledged, dipping his head slightly and setting the cup down.

It wasn't hard to feel like he had been played. They'd all travelled to see the prince take his rightful place on the throne, only to have Kuvira cling to the position herself. There wasn't much Raiko could've done, at least not while the coronation was unfolding. Though it was little comfort to the president as his fingers clenched on the table.

"Good morning, President Raiko," Tenzin made his way into the cabin followed by Suyin, both of them taking a seat at his table. The president gave a half-smile to each of them before sipping his tea. There was a moment of silence before Tenzin continued, "How is the prince holding up?" He asked.

"I haven't spoken to Prince Wu yet," Raiko replied. However, he seemed much more interested in something else besides the prince's wellbeing. His eyes locked onto Suyin, "Did you know Kuvira was going to make that announcement?"

Feeling the awkwardness of being called out, Suyin stammered a little before answering, "N-no, of course not. We encountered the two barbarians who we thought could be Red Lotus operatives, but I had no idea about the Dai Li, nor that Kuvira was planning to stay on as Interim Leader of the Earth Kingdom. I tried reaching out to her after the coronation but she didn't seem like she wanted to talk," Suyin explained, her voice sounding solemn by the end of her explanation. Although they'd had their disagreements, recently it had felt like things were starting to heal between them. That was until Kuvira pulled away and didn't tell Suyin about everything that had happened.

Raiko wasn't happy with Suyin's response. He grunted, "I don't think we can trust her. She could very well be making up these threats as an excuse to hold onto power."

"I don't think we can throw out accusations like that," Suyin responded.

"Oh please!" Raiko hissed his words, "We all know how ''you've'' felt about the monarchy. You've probably filled her head with these revolutionist ideas and she's putting them into action."

Suyin's face was aghast at the notions Raiko was putting forward, "Excuse me? I have spoken out against the monarchy and the injustices of Ba Sing Se, but that by no way means that I would accept taking control by force! That's the very reason I ''didn't'' want to lead the Allied Forces in the first place."

"With all due respect Mr President," Tenzin intervened, "we don't know exactly what we're dealing with, and until we do find out more about these claims of the Dai Li and Red Lotus we shouldn't be jumping to conclusions."

Raiko exhaled loudly, brushing his hand over his forehead. "I'm sorry," he mumbled in response, glancing towards Suyin. "I'm just concerned about the state of the world after this debacle."

Suyin looked ready to snap back, though Tenzin intervened again, "As we all are, I am sure. But we have to work together to figure out how best to proceed. At least we know that Kuvira's intentions are to maintain peace in the Earth Kingdom. For now, it seems far better to have her hold onto her position than the chaos that would ensue from not having a leader at all."

There wasn't much of a reply to Tenzin's words, more like a quiet agreement and nod from the other two. Raiko wasn't convinced; he'd spent time talking with Kuvira back at the summit dinner and on previous occasions. He'd seen and heard reports of how the Earth Kingdom citizens viewed Kuvira as their new leader, how they'd even begun to call her their 'Great Uniter'. His anger wasn't just at Kuvira, but also at himself for not doing something even though he'd seen this coming.

On the other hand, Suyin was quiet because she wasn't sure what to think. She wanted to believe that Kuvira had good intentions, despite her disagreement with how Kuvira reunited the Earth Kingdom, but there still seemed to be so much distance between the two of them that Suyin didn't know what Kuvira was planning for sure. Either way, the conversation drifted into silence.

The rest of the train ride was rather uneventful. Raiko and Suyin had gone to their cabins, while Tenzin had spent time with the Fire Lord and her daughter. It was now sunset, and the train had stopped in a western Earth Kingdom town for those transferring to other rail lines.

Suyin reached for her last suitcase to unload, though a robed figure grabbed it before she could. She smiled, seeing Tenzin carry the case and the pair exited the train.

Given the time of day the station was rather empty, with only a few passengers waiting for the same train as Suyin heading south. "Off to Zaofu then?" Tenzin set the case down, "I'm sorry I can't lend you Oogie for the trip."

Suyin chuckled lightly, "I think a flying bison ride would have made this whole trip a little more bearable." Her smile soon faded, however, as a question surfaced to her mind that she'd been dwelling on all day, "Tenzin, I've always tried to live life believing that people deserve second chances. In Zaofu I've taken in many who were former criminals and pirates, and I myself used to live that life when I was younger." Suyin smirked, though her expression drew more concerned, "But how many chances should someone get? What if... what if Raiko is right about Kuvira?"

Tenzin stroked his beard while thinking of how to answer. It was hard to know what to say, and he could see that Suyin was still trying to process everything. "I'm sorry I don't have the answer," he admitted, "but I also believe in forgiveness and redemption. I don't know what to think about this situation, but living with the hope that people can change is admirable."

It wasn't much of a consolation for Suyin's worry and fear, but she still managed a soft smile. An announcer made the final boarding call for Suyin's train. "Take care Tenzin," Suyin farewelled. She picked up her luggage and made her way over to the train.

Offering a smile and a wave goodbye, Tenzin farewelled the Zaofu matriarch, making his way back onto the train as they prepared to leave as well.

The morning sunrise was once again vibrant and warm, but the throne room was anything but. After meeting with the commanders, Kuvira now sat in the echoey chamber with nothing further to do. A small group remained waiting for further instruction, though with no new reports to act on time had slowed to a crawl.

"This is unbearable," Kuvira mumbled to herself, her fingers tapping against the throne armrests. Standing next to her, Baatar gave a concerned glance before Kuvira continued, "How did centuries of monarchs sit here in the dull silence? With nothing to do but sit chained to this throne?"

"We could hire a court jester? Zhu Li, can you perform some acrobatics!" Varrick suggested, though his assistant raised an eyebrow.

Kuvira stood up abruptly. She couldn't just sit still waiting for reports to come in. If that was how the Earth monarchs did it, then she was going to do things her way. After walking down the steps from the throne, Kuvira stomped a slab of green stone from the floor. With two swift arm motions, an earth chair burst from the ground, and a square hole cut into the first slab to form leg space. "Bring me some paperwork to fill out. Anything that needs doing," she commanded the soldier nearest to her, who quickly dashed away. "In fact," the soldier stopped in his tracks as Kuvira continued, "why don't we renovate this entire room?"

After several hours of shifting and redesigning, the throne room had been transformed into a bustling hive of activity. Desks and workstations had been arranged, providing officers a space to fill out paperwork and make calls. Radio lines snaked along the rafters high above, and massive lights had been set up in each corner to illuminate the room. Officers scurried back and forth conducting their business. And at the end of the room, Kuvira had set up her own workspace. The throne sat behind her, overshadowed by the new open-plan office Kuvira had constructed for her forces.

Baatar and Kuvira looked out over their new work area, admiring how it had all turned out. In their eyes it was quite fitting really; having their work desks illuminated while the throne and display behind them draped in shadow, it made it feel like an artifact of a bygone era while their new area was the future.

Their attention turned to a slender man entering the room, his gown and moustache flowing either side, "Oh my." The man examined the newly revamped throne room with awe. As soldiers escorted him to the front desk, the man bowed, "Ah, the Great Uniter herself! It is an honour."

"Grand Regent of Gaoling, Baozhai. Welcome to Ba Sing Se," Kuvira replied.

"The throne room sure is... lively," Baozhai remarked. It was hard to tell whether he thought it was better than the grand empty court of the past or worse.

"Yes, I felt it was a more productive work arrangement than simply sitting in a chair," Kuvira added, a slight smirk appearing on her face. She hoped the dig at the previous monarchy would help the regent bond with them, given how the southern Earth Kingdom weren't always fond of the old regime. "I'm sure you must be tired after the train ride here; would you like to meet in one of our serving rooms? I can have some tea prepared?"

Regent Baozhai held up his hands, "Ah, thank you but that won't be necessary. I won't need to stay long. I actually have somewhere to be in the hour."

Kuvira raised an eyebrow, "I'm sure the negotiations won't take all day but we'll still need some time to talk through them, no?"

"Well, it's just... there won't be a lot to discuss," Baozhai talked as if he were treading lightly over glass. "Unfortunately, Gaoling cannot commit to a trade agreement with Ba Sing Se just yet."

There was an awkward pause as Kuvira stared at the regent with a blank and cold expression, "I don't understand. The terms are quite reasonable-"

Baozhai chuckled, "I wouldn't call it reasonable. You're asking us to send supplies, resources, and manpower, to aid in rebuilding Ba Sing Se. Where is the compensation for us in that?"

"Ba Sing Se, and many Earth Kingdom states for that matter, need repairing and resources from the other states. Gaoling has been rather prosperous since we drove out the barbarian clans. In fact, if I recall, your city has been basically untouched these past three years. I do not think it is unreasonable to request aid in our time of need."

"Kuvira, we are incredibly grateful for all you and the Allied Forces have done, but there's something you don't seem to understand about... the 'history' of things." Kuvira had no idea what the regent was on about. Baozhai elaborated, "While we are very, very, happy and grateful for your work, we are also glad to finally have our independence back. You see, the north and south have always had a... difficult relationship. The geographic distance doesn't help, but often either side has attempted to control the other. For a long time now Ba Sing Se and the Earth monarchy were seen as the ruling power, despite the fact that Omashu has always had its own king."

This wasn't sitting well with Kuvira, and her impatience grew with every word, "With all due respect, regent, I don't need a history lesson. I am well aware of our nation's past. What is the point you wish to make?"

Regent Baozhai looked taken back at Kuvira's abruptness. Nonetheless, he continued, "The point is, that many of the southern Earth Kingdom states value our freedom from the Earth monarchy. For too long Ba Sing Se has been the stain of our nation, and many of us would much prefer to let it turn to dust. Of course if there were a more equitable trade agreement then we would be more than happy to negotiate, but as it stands, well, I don't think Ba Sing Se really has anything to trade at all. You'll find a similar position from King Renshu of Omashu in his letter."

It was surprising to Kuvira that these leaders wouldn't want to join them. They had been well received in the south since during their campaigns, more so than in the north since many of the northern states saw any authority as a threat after years of dealing with the Earth Queen. But now it seemed those same states in the south that had welcomed them also wanted to avoid helping with rebuilding their nation. "Regent Baozhai, Ba Sing Se is home to many. The largest city in the kingdom. I understand that any trade agreement will be one-sided for now, but sending aid to rebuild the city will be a benefit to the entire nation in the future."

"I'm afraid I can't agree. And many of us across the Earth Kingdom have written a similar response to your trade agreements. Kuvira, we are tremendously appreciative of all you have done. But the Earth Kingdom is entering a new era without a monarchy standing over us. We think it best to look after ourselves. It hasn't been all that easy for us as well, you know. And besides, we already have great trading relations with the Southern Water Tribe and the United Republic of Nations. Of course, we wish you the very best of luck in your endeavours!"

Kuvira watched the regent bow and make his exit. She wanted to yell at him, tell him how selfish they were for rejecting her offer. How could they just condemn everyone in Ba Sing Se to live in poverty and desolation? Not all the Earth Kingdom states had declined, but at this point most had.

"Closed-minded and selfish old bag," Baatar muttered under his breath. He gently rubbed his hand over Kuvira's arm, noticing her anger and frustration. "We don't need Gaoling. Let them sit in their backwards city while we progress into a new age."

"Maybe we need a different approach," Kuvira mused. There had to be more they could do to convince the other states to join them. "I think I'll take a trip to Omashu."

Another day of work ended as the day drew to a close. President Raiko had been working with politicians and the business sector, all of them concerned over Kuvira and her move to keep the Earth Kingdom under her jurisdiction. Things were tense, to say the least. Raiko slipped an overcoat over his purple jacket and donned a hat. A little too obvious a disguise given that nearly every undercover agent in a mover looked just like he did, but as long as Raiko wasn't recognised he didn't care.

The night air was breezy but mild as Raiko left the City Hall, and his bodyguards escorted him into a satomobile while he clutched the edges of his coat. Once inside, the vehicle took off. It didn't take long to reach their destination. The satomobile pulled up down a dark alley, with several chimneys next to them bellowing out smoke plumes against the night sky. The prison complex was a few blocks east.

A man stood in the alleyway, his pompadour hair jet black and slicked with gel. He didn't watch Raiko as he stepped out of his vehicle, instead looking to the side while tugging on the edges of his grey-blue jacket. The doors to Raiko's vehicle shut, and the man grinned slyly, "Ah, how I've missed this."

Raiko wasn't too happy with the man's tone, "Don't get used to it. The only reason I'm contacting you is because I'm desperate."

"But you're one of my most interesting clients! All my other ones are just rich and spoilt upper-classmen who hire me to check on their cheating spouses," the man chuckled. "Y'know, if you do need a campaign manager for your re-election next year I'd be happy to-"

"Do you have what I need or not, Wenyan?" Raiko interrupted. He was already anxious about being recognised and didn't want to waste any more time here.

Wenyan sighed, "You know the rules Mr President. Payment first. It took my guys and I quite a bit just to organise this."

Rolling his eyes and grunting, Raiko reached into his jacket. "They'd better be up to the task," he muttered, slapping a stack of yuans into Wenyan's open hand.

"Excellent," Wenyan flicked through the notes briefly before clicking at his subordinates. The doors to an adjacent warehouse opened with a creak, and three men in prison uniforms were escorted out. "Their records state that these three are out for an evening class on 'team building exercises'," Wenyan noted as he was handed a folder of notes from one of his men.

The three prisoners were all stood in a line in front of them. The first two looked rather blank and emotionless, while the third's eyes darted around each corner of the alleyway, "What...? What's happening?! Where are we?" he panicked.

Wenyan turned to Raiko, "I present to you, 'Republic City's Finest!'" The man mocked. Raiko started eyeing up the first prisoner as Wenyan read through his notes, "Inmate 305. He has no birth certificate, no legal name, though he once went by the alias 'Lieutenant'. Was part of the failed attempts by the Equalists to rid the world of bending and further the non-bender movement."

The man in question wasn't impressed by Wenyan's description, "Well, considering we now have a non-bender president, I don't think it was a complete failure."

Ignoring his rebuttal, Wenyan continued, "Multiple charges of acts of terrorism, theft, kidnapping, aggravated assault, manslaughter, and murder. Sentenced to life imprisonment."

Lieutenant grunted at the introduction, though Wenyan had already moved on to the next in line, "Inmate 317. Saikhan. Former Chief of Police at one point. After his convictions of corruption and collusion with Councilman Tarrlok, it was found that he was also involved in evidence tampering in cases, and in particular, the on-selling of confiscated illegal substances to the triads and other gangs for cash. Another lifer."

Raiko wasn't impressed, "A former equalist and former cop working together? You don't think this will be a problem?"

"...Working together?" Saikhan puzzled. He glanced to Lieutenant on his right.

Wenyan moved to the last prisoner, a slender man with dyed dark blue hair. "And this, is Tahno," Wenyan announced. "Convicted of corruption and various misconducts while he was a pro-bender. Multiple charges of possession of illicit substances as he got involved in the underground drug market. What landed him in court was him getting busted stealing a snow cone from a market cart."

Despite their peculiar situation, both Lieutenant and Saikhan couldn't help but smirk along with Wenyan as he read Tahno's criminal record. "You haven't told us what's going on! What are you doing with us?" Tahno repeated his pleas.

With all eyes on Raiko, he eventually spoke up, "You three are here because you're expendable. And, I have a job for you," the president explained.

"You can't do that!" Tahno protested. "I... I'll... wait until I tell my lawyer about this-"

"Please, shut up," Saikhan replied to Tahno. "Do you really think we have a choice in the matter? He's the president of the bloody United Republic of Nations." Smirking to himself, he then turned to Lieutenant, "So, how does it feel to see your 'non-bender president' is just as corrupt as the rest of us, hmm?"

"Believe me, recruiting delinquents is the last thing I want to do, but I'm out of options," Raiko intervened. He paused, taking a moment to breathe in before continuing, "You may have heard about Kuvira, and how she united the Earth Kingdom before announcing at the Coronation that she would not be stepping down. She claims that the Dai Li have returned and attacked her, and that Red Lotus operatives could be hiding amongst the barbarian clans. I want you to confirm whether these claims are true." There was silence while the three prisoners contemplated what was being said. "Of course, you'll all be compensated for your efforts. You'll each receive reductions on your sentences and be given leniency when it comes to parole. You will be offering your services to the nation after all."

The three prisoners exchanged looks. They still weren't sure of what this mission would entail, but it wasn't like they could back out. Plus, shorting their sentences wasn't a bad reward. Saikhan nodded in response, while Tanho offered a hesitant agreement. Lieutenant answered next, "When do we leave?"

None of this was ideal for Raiko, but he did agree with what Tenzin had said on the train. They couldn't make a move against Kuvira if they didn't know what they were dealing with. So, if it was information that they needed, Raiko was going to do whatever he could to get it.

Chapter Text

Omashu had changed a lot since it was occupied by the Fire Nation during the war. While the tall city had once boasted an elaborate mail system of chutes, moving into the modern era had seen Omashu become one of the largest exporters of platinum products and refined ore. The deep trenches surrounding the old town contained massive veins of minerals that had remained undiscovered for years, and now, brought the city into a prosperous season.

As Kuvira's maglev train sped through the northern border, it wasn't hard to see why many in the south viewed Omashu as the true Earth Kingdom capitol. The old town and surrounding mining suburbs would easily number close to a million. Part of the appeal had been the mining prospects, but the city had also seen a huge influx of immigrants from Ba Sing Se. Groups of people congregated in the streets and went about their business, seemingly happy and free to live their lives. It was a glimpse of what Ba Sing Se could be, should she land this trade deal.

After leaving the outer suburbs, the train carried on to a bridge leading to the old town. The base of the chasm was barely visible from the windows, though groups of miners shifted ore and equipment up and down the cliff faces via earth elevators. The tall peaks of Old Omashu caught flashes of the midday sun before the train passed through a tunnel into the station. After coming to a halt, Kuvira took in a deep breath, calming herself. She hadn't mentioned to King Renshu about her arrival, and she could only hope that he would listen to her.

A group of Kuvira's soldiers exited the train, catching the attention of nearby citizens. Only when Kuvira herself left the train did they start congregating, offering thanks and praises. Kuvira smiled. It would be harder for King Renshu to simply dismiss her if his citizens were supportive of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces.

It didn't take long for their presence to be noticed by the king. While Kuvira and her soldiers conversed with a few citizens, the royal guard made their way over. "Kuvira, welcome to Omashu," one of the guards clasped his hands and bowed. "It is an honour to have you visit us."

Kuvira returned the gesture, "Thank you, it is an honour to be here. I was wondering if King Renshu would be able to meet with us for a brief moment? I wanted to clarify what he had said in his letter and thought an in-person visit would be more appropriate."

"His Majesty is rather busy, but he has agreed to speak with you. He is waiting by a cable car as we speak. Come, right this way," the guard replied.

As they made their way to the cable car station, Kuvira could see the king with his iconic crown, with its feathery tassels dangling upright above his head and drooping down. "Greetings, King Renshu."

"Kuvira," the king mumbled. He had a thick white beard muffling his words. "I understand you wish to discuss my letter I sent. Let us talk while I return to the palace."

The cable cars looked like a set of huts, with their green tiled and gold trimmed rooves and metal exterior. Kuvira entered with her soldiers and Renshu's royal guard. Once the car approached the steep incline, it shifted into three tessellating segments as it travelled up the hill. Kuvira and Renshu sat in the lowest segment, watching the people and buildings pass by them as they continued.

King Renshu cleared his throat, "What would you like to discuss about my letter? I feel like the other leaders and I have been clear."

All along her train ride, Kuvira had gone over how to reach the king. She knew that she had to address his concerns, but also try and get him to see why it was worth joining them. "I understand you have concerns about giving support to Ba Sing Se in our rebuild efforts. I have seen what a great city Omashu is, and putting a strain on your economy might worry citizens that their way of life might be taken from them," Kuvira explained. "But what I want to reiterate is that this partnership will be a great benefit for the entire Earth Kingdom. Ba Sing Se will be revolutionised, and we can create something new and innovative if we all collaborate together," Kuvira concluded. She could see King Renshu wasn't convinced, "While in the beginning our mission was to bring peace and order to the Earth Kingdom, we have a chance now to transform our nation into something better."

There was a pause before Renshu responded, "Kuvira, the Earth Kingdom is no more." Kuvira furrowed her brows as she tried to understand what Renshu meant, "Maintaining balance in the Earth Kingdom has always been impossible. Many Avatars have tried and failed, many wars have been fought over territories, and much blood has been spilt in the name of unity. Many of the other leaders and I believe that in the coming years, the Earth Kingdom will be dissolved entirely, becoming something more like a collection of states where each is treated as an individual entity. I see no point in trying to rebuild what once was."

The cable car jolted as it stopped at a station for a moment. Renshu's words were news to Kuvira. Why did he think the Earth Kingdom would be dissolved? But there was also no way splitting into separate states would be that easy. "And what will you do when Prince Wu takes the throne? I doubt he will be onboard with dissolving the Earth Kingdom?"

Renshu waved his hand dismissively, "The prince is young and inexperienced. He won't care if some states leave the Earth Kingdom so long as he gets his palace. Besides, President Raiko is sending his own delegates to help the prince with his new role. We've already expressed our intentions to the president, and he seems receptive to our arrangements."

Kuvira had thought that Raiko had a hand in this, and now, her suspicions had been confirmed. "King Renshu, we cannot let our nation be split apart in our time of need. If you could please reconsider-"

"We've already done our bit in restoring balance to the Earth Kingdom," Renshu interrupted. "We've sent many soldiers into the Allied Forces. We've also taken in many immigrants from Ba Sing Se. Life isn't always easy for them; we are trying to build more outer suburbs to accommodate everyone, and it can be tough working in the mines. But they've made a home here in Omashu. We have already donated to the cause, and thank you for all you have done, but we cannot commit anymore." King Renshu got up from his seat as the cable car stopped at the next station.

"Your Majesty, please wait!" Kuvira responded. The old king was surprised at Kuvira's tone, "You cannot just turn your back on the people of Ba Sing Se. They have been struggling for three years, living in desolate conditions and extreme poverty. We-"

"And where was Ba Sing Se when the Fire Nation occupied Omashu?" King Renshu shouted back. He was normally a quiet and reserved man, and his outburst shook his royal guard and everyone else in the cabin. "While the Fire Nation took over our city, Ba Sing Se was busy brainwashing their citizens into submission, convincing them there was no war to begin with. Hou-Ting was foolish enough to bring the Dai Li back, and to keep all of us in line, she sent them to abduct many dissenters and threaten us to submit to the crown! Why should Omashu give up our freedom and independence that we have longed for just to help such a city?" Kuvira didn't know how to respond. "As I said, we are grateful for all you have done, but we have no interest in rebuilding Ba Sing Se. The next cable car heading downtown should be arriving soon," King Renshu replied, exiting the cable car onto the streets.

Kuvira wanted to say something, anything, but the words just couldn't come forwards. She watched the king march off, and the doors close to their cabin. Letting out a heavy exhale, Kuvira sat back onto the green cushioned chairs. This had been her chance to convince King Renshu to join, and she'd failed.

Maybe she should call Suyin? She would know how to handle this. Kuvira dismissed the thought. Suyin was already unhappy with the Allied Forces holding onto their position. As her frustration grew, Kuvira's mind replayed the words Hou-Ting had uttered to her in the cave. She could be watching this very moment, cackling away at her failures to unite the Earth Kingdom. The metal rail of her chair crinkled up as Kuvira clenched her fist. There had to be more she could do.

Nothing ever happened at Central Command. That's what people said at least. The northern part of the Si Wong was rather uninhabited, even by the sandbender tribes. Construction of a maglev train track over Serpent's Pass was still ongoing, as it seemed any attempts were hindered by the ferocious sea monsters the pass was named after. The stress-free and quietness of the job was actually what attracted First Commander Hu to the Central Division. Though today, something interesting was unfolding.

They'd been chasing a group of barbarians from one of the southern clans who had migrated north to avoid the Allied Forces. Central Division was tasked with creating a blockade, though with limited numbers and inexperienced soldiers driving a fair number of vehicles into quicksand, they hadn't been successful. First Commander Hu clutched the receiver of a radio as he waited desperately for news. He had only recently returned from Ba Sing Se where he had learned of Kuvira's intentions to stay on in leading the Earth Kingdom, and having such a blunder to his name was not going to look good.

The commander answered the receiver, "First Commander Hu here, what's going on?"

"First Commander sir, we've lost another airship. We've positioned our units in Full Moon Bay to intercept them should they escape the township."

"Hmm," Hu mused. Despite all this, Hu was glad that there was still one squadron in pursuit of the barbarians fleeing north. And this team had gained quite a reputation. If all went well, the barbarians would be stopped before reaching Full Moon Bay. Though that was a big 'if'. There wasn't much more he could do except hope and pray to the Earth Spirits.

Meanwhile, a group of satomobiles and a truck sped along a narrow canyon. One of the occupants stood behind a canon mounted on the truck, cheering loudly. "Woohoo! Did you see that?!" the man yelled, directing his comrade's attention to the burning Allied Forces airship behind them. Their canon was not dissimilar to those their former leader Qiang had implemented on the walls of Ba Sing Se, though this one much smaller and more compact in design.

"Keep your guard up!" the barbarian commander yelled from inside the truck, "There could still be more of 'em!"

The man at the canon laughed confidently, "Hah! Even if there were others they can't do nothing against this baby!" Though his joy and cockiness was soon dispelled as he glanced behind him. There was another truck speeding along the top of the canyon above them, though he couldn't quite see who was driving it.

There was a shout from the vehicle behind them, "It's the Allied Forces! Quick! Fire!"

A burning hot disc whizzed past and scraped the canon. Thankfully for them, the man and the weapon weren't harmed. "Alrighty then!" the canon wielder turned to face them.

Instead of being in his mecha suit, Akito sat behind the wheel of a truck. In the cargo bay sat Akito's other four teammates, each of them hanging on while trying to block enemy fire.

"We could really use some lava right now!" Gombo shouted over the noise to Bolin, swiping his bisento through an earth disc.

Bolin fired another lava shuriken at the barbarians, though it missed their canon once again. "We're moving too fast. If we can slow them down, maybe I can quickly make a lava flow from the side of the canyon." Just as he finished, another explosive projectile was launched from the canon. Thankfully Baraz shot at it before it reached them, causing the fiery explosion to erupt into the canyon wall. Bolin knew they were outnumbered with their one vehicle to the barbarian's five, and with their truck-mounted canon the clan had a firepower that they didn't. There were troops in the settlement at Full Moon bay, but these barbarians had already pushed past several blockades while only losing a few of their clan. Bolin knew that their best chance of stopping them was here in the canyon.

"Akito! We need to pick up speed!" Bolin called out. "If we can get just a little bit further ahead than them, then we can block their path with some lava. After that, Baraz and Ahnah can create a mist cloud for cover, and we'll swoop in and take them out!" Bolin revealed his plan.

Akito tutted from the front seat. "If we want to go faster than I'll need some help! We're already pushing as fast as we can go!" he yelled back. "I would've been able to go faster, but apparently my vehicle upgrades were too 'dangerous'," Akito mumbled spitefully to himself.

"I can help with that!" Baraz called back. Breathing in deeply, Baraz thrust his hands behind the truck, bursting forth two streams of flame. Baraz brought his hands together, creating a single jet that roared intensely Gombo held his companion steady as the truck pushed forwards, and Baraz grunted as he tried not to lose focus.

"It's working!" Akito called out, watching as their vehicle starting gaining on the barbarians. Soon they would overtake them.

In the back, Ahnah and Bolin blocked another explosive shot their way. "Maybe I can lose some of the extra weight," Ahnah thought out loud. She heaved the contents of one water barrel out, hovered the water in the air above the truck, before clenching her fist and swiping forwards. A barrage of icicles spun forwards, piercing the wheels of one barbarian satomobile. The occupants screamed as their vehicle spun out of control and slowed to a halt.

"Leave them! The reinforcements will arrest them," Bolin instructed. After ducking from an attack, Bolin noticed a stone archway over the canyon up ahead. "There!" He pointed, "I'll make that archway collapse and block their path!"

Akito wasn't so sure, "I don't think we'll make it in time! And more importantly, how will we stop before we hit that?" Akito pointing ahead to a massive mound on their side of the canyon. There was no way to drive past it along the canyon, and if they wanted to melt the archway to block the barbarians, they'd run out of room to slow down before hitting it.

"We may not get another chance! I'll try and weaken it as we get closer, and then I'll melt the archway down," Bolin explained. He paused for a moment. There had to be a way they could get off their truck at the last minute. "Ahnah," Bolin turned to the waterbender, "could you shield us in like, some kind of water bubble to cushion our fall? We'll jump out before the truck hits the mountain up ahead."

It wasn't something she'd ever attempted before, but she'd surprised herself in the past. "Yeah, I think I can," Ahnah answered.

"Alright," Bolin replied. "Let's do this."

Down below, the barbarians could see flames shooting from the Allied Forces truck, propelling them ahead of their position. It wasn't common to encounter a squadron with a waterbender and firebender, considering how many earthbenders there were in the Allied Forces. The canon wielder tried to land another shot, but it was blocked again before reaching them. "Spirits!" the man cursed.

Those in the front seats watched from inside the truck as several earth discs whizzed ahead, though instead of aiming at them, they struck an overhead arch. "Hah!" the driver laughed, "Do they think breaking that archway will do any good? We're earthbenders too!" the driver cackled away, but their leader wasn't convinced.

"Song!" the barbarian leader bellowed, "Did you say earlier that they were firing 'flaming discs' as us?"

The man in question turned to his commander from the back of the truck, "Aye sir. They did. Must've been something the earthbender and firebender were doing!"

Their leader pondered for a moment, though it all started to make sense, "It's the lavabender! The one named Bolin!" His men glanced awkwardly between each other, unsure of what was happening. "You know! The one that was a mover star! Nuktuk!"

"Oh yeah, I love that guy," one of the barbarians blurted out.

"He's shooting lava discs into the arch to weaken it!" the leader replied. Again, none of his men understood where he was going. Sighing loudly, he yelled once more, "And none of you are lavabenders, are ye?! How will we clear a path if the road is a boiling pit of lava?!" Finally, they seemed to get it, with worried looks appearing on their faces. "Earthbenders! Get to the sides of the truck and form a bridge over-"

Before the barbarian leader could finish, there was a large crack ahead of them. Most of the archway had melted into searing hot magma and collapsed onto the canyon floor. There was no time to launch their vehicles over it. The barbarian leader reached over and grabbed the wheel off their driver, skidding their truck to a halt as the other three remaining vehicles did the same. Thankfully there was still some distance between them and they managed to stop before speeding into the sizzling magma.

The archway collapsing wasn't the only thing to occur; a crash up above as the Allied Forces truck smashed into a cliff, and a giant bubble of water burst open on the edge of the canyon. The barbarian leader watched as the five occupants tumbled down the edge along a wave and spilled out onto the canyon floor.

Rubbing his head from the fall, Bolin tried to stand with the rest of his team. "Well, it wasn't as graceful as an air bubble but that worked... oh... and they're right in front of us," Bolin remarked, watching as their enemies drew their weapons and lifted boulders into the air. While their plan had blocked the barbarian's exit, it had also left them trapped and without a vehicle.

The barbarian commander spat to the side, "That was quite some trick you pulled. But now, you're trapped." He unsheathed a menacing spiked hammer and pointed it their way, "Move the lava out the way or else!"

Bolin sighed, standing upright. "Fine," he agreed. Though as Bolin reached back to shift the boiling magma, he directed the mass over his head and towards the barbarians.

A few of the barbarians screamed as they retreated back, though their commander stomped up a pillar with his hammer to block the lava. Veins of searing red and orange snaked through his earth formation, forcing even the brave commander to retreat to his truck.

"Baraz, Ahnah!" Bolin called out. The pair nodded. Ahnah drew the remnants of their water bubble from the ground, while Baraz shot a flame jet into the liquid, evaporating it into a mist. While Ahnah directed the mist cloud over the barbarians, the rest of Bolin's team moved forwards.

Several barbarians readied themselves in the fog, though a flash of silver struck their weapons and bodies, toppling them over in a heap. Gombo charged forwards, taking out the last of their group with the pole end of his bisento. He also swung his weapon across the tires of the barbarians' satomobile. On the other side, Baraz kicked several flame arcs at a group hiding behind a wall. Their defence was strong, though with their attention turned to Baraz they hadn't noticed the mist condensing next to them. With a quick motion, Ahnah solidified a cloud of mist into ice, leaving only the barbarians' heads free.

With the sounds of his comrades being taken out, even the barbarian commander started to panic. He swung his hammer around wildly, kicking up pillars and boulders in all directions. One of his attacks shattered in front of him, and he realised he'd found Bolin. With a loud thunderous cry he charged forwards, only to slash through mist as Bolin rolled to the side. Bolin kicked up a pillar though the barbarian commander dodged, afterwards slamming his hammer into the earth and sending an earth wave either side of him. It was close, though Bolin managed to evade by jumping onto the truck. However, he spun around after hearing the canon locking into position behind him.

"Time to die!" the canon wielder taunted. Before he could fire his weapon, his body convulsed with streaks of blue forking through the air. Akito emerged from behind, waving to Bolin with his electrified gloved hand.

Now that his back was covered, Bolin was ready to finish this. He punched forward two boulders, both of which were blocked by the barbarian leader swinging his hammer across. With the dust obscuring their view, Bolin managed to uppercut the barbarian's chin, who grunted while leaping backwards to regain his balance. Though he didn't have a chance as an earth pillar slammed into his body, knocking him back and rolling over the canyon floor.

With the barbarian leader taken out, the last of the clan had been apprehended. It had been a close call, but Bolin and his team had done it.

With widened eyes and their mouths drooling, Bolin and Akito stared at their metal dinner trays. Instead of the usual 'whatever' stew, made from whatever ingredients were on hand, today their plates were full with crispy venison-pork stir fry, char sui khomodo rhino, and a selection of fresh vegetables all served on a pristine bed of jasmine white rice.

"Please, accept this as a deep appreciation of our gratitude!" First Commander Hu bowed so low that Bolin thought he'd hit his head on the table. "And thank you, thank you, thank you so much for stopping the barbarians!"

"Of course, Commander sir," Bolin replied. It was a little weird having a First Commander bow to him. Obviously, Hu had been incredibly anxious about the barbarians getting away.

Three more portions of the same meal were brought out to Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah, while First Commander Hu stood upright, "For a moment I thought they'd get away, but you five are quite the squadron!" Hu complemented. "I never thought Central Command would be lucky enough to have such a talented and dedicated team in our midst."

"We're just doing our job," Baraz replied, not wanting to be in the spotlight any more than they were.

"No, I mean, of course... but honestly, the blockade failure happened at such a bad time. With Kuvira planning on staying on in Ba Sing Se I thought she'd want to replace me if the barbarians had gotten away!" Hu realised he'd said too much when the other five stared back with blank expressions, "Uh... but that is classified of course heh... I didn't say anything. Oh well, you five truly earnt your dinner, so enjoy!" The First Commander bowed again before powerwalking off, probably regretting yet another blunder of revealing Kuvira's trusted plans.

Thankfully, Akito's enthusiasm for their dinner changed the conversation, "Oh wow! That char sui komodo rhino is to die for!" He munched away, scooping large portions into his mouth with his chopsticks.

"I don't think I've ever eaten something this delicious," Baraz chimed in. After another mouthful he smirked at Ahnah, "Certainly a lot better than Ahnah's sea prunes."

The waterbender let out an annoyed grunt and icy stare, though quickly followed with a chuckle, "You'll never let me live that down, will you?" She noticed the curious faces on Bolin and Akito so explained further, "My grandparents were the ones to move to the Earth Kingdom early on in the war, though I never really got to know them and never had much a chance to learn traditional Water Tribe cooking. So, I tried making 'sea prune stew' from some local ingredients and a recipe I'd found."

"It tasted like old boots!"

"And you'd know what old boots taste like?" Ahnah retorted. With a cheeky grin on her face, she clenched her fingers together and froze Baraz's drink solid. "Better than your fireflakes that gave us acid reflux for a week."

Baraz picked up his glass, thawing it out gently before taking a sip, "Well, if you can't handle the heat then don't eat, I'd say."

Bolin smiled. He was always unsure with the three of them. He had thought they were on their side, then they betrayed him in Ba Sing Se, and now they had accepted their new role as part of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces. His uncertainty would probably never leave him, but moments like this where they could talk openly about their past made him hopeful at least.

"So what about you Gombo?" Akito asked. "Do you have any favourite dishes to cook?"

The hulking man hadn't said much so far, only grunting and smirking at Baraz and Ahnah's exchange. He finally broke his silence, "I never really got into cooking," he said between mouthfuls, "but when I was very young I was taken in by a baker. Spawn of Koh the man was, but his red bean bao weren't too shabby. I could go for one of them anytime."

The others smirked and grinned after Gombo's story, and the conversation drifted into silence again as they all took a few mouthfuls. Bolin eventually spoke up, "My brother Mako and I had some pretty awful street gruel when we were younger on the streets. To be honest, 'whatever' stew isn't nearly as bad," he laughed.

"You grew up on the streets?" Ahnah enquired.

Bolin nodded, "Well yeah, for a time. Our... parents were killed when we were young, and Mako took care of us both for a time."

"Before becoming a pro-bender?" Akito chimed in.

"First we joined a gang, and then yeah, pro-bending."

Baraz shook his head while smirking, "You are pretty surprising Bolin. With the slick haircut, pro-bending, and your job as a mover star I wouldn't have guessed you were part of a gang at one point. Part of Republic City's elite I would've thought."

Laughing out loud, Bolin turned to the firebender, "Yeah, it sure felt elite sleeping on trash cans. Though we were lucky to get out of that life. Mainly because of Mako; he was the one that suggested pro-bending in the first place even though he wasn't interested at first." Bolin thoughts shifted to his brother. All those nights on the streets, all the times Mako had to step in and help him when he got into trouble. Bolin's decision to join the Allied Forces was probably the biggest one he'd ever made by himself.

"What are you thinking about?" Akito asked.

While Akito's inquisitiveness was a little much, Bolin still managed a polite, awkward chuckle, "I'm just wondering what he would think. What Mako would think of me being here, joining the Allied Forces and that. He's always been the one making decisions for us, so this was kinda big for me to leave on my own."

Akito smiled back, "I'm sure he would be proud."

"Thanks," Bolin responded.

"And you guys have been working hard too," Akito turned to the other three. "That flame jet must've been powerful; we picked up some serious speed when you used it Baraz. And Ahnah, that water bubble was pretty tough to survive the impact the way it did." The two benders in questions smiled in response. "And Gombo, you were like a one-man-army out there, taking out all those barbarians. You're pretty amazing too."

Gombo said nothing at first, only a half-smile in reply. He quietly stood up from the table picking up the rest of his dinner, "I might go eat this outside. Think I need some air."

Akito's face dropped as he watched Gombo leave the room. "Oh... I'm sorry."

"It's alright," Baraz reassured. "He'll come around, it's all just a bit strange, I guess." His eyes stared into the distance as he thought back, "Ahnah and I joined Qiang's clan when we were adults, but Gombo had practically been raised by them. It's probably still a bit weird to be fighting other barbarians, even from clans he was once rivals with."

"Oh... I see," Akito nodded slowly. There was a further silence as the group finished the last of their meal. Akito's spirits were never dampened for long, and he thought about another conversation topic he could bring up, "I wonder what First Commander Hu meant by what he said. About Kuvira staying on in Ba Sing Se."

"Oh yeah, he did say that," Bolin said. It had been the first he had heard of it too. "Does that mean Kuvira wants to be in charge of the Earth Kingdom? Or just run Ba Sing Se?"

Baraz finished the last of his drink, "I can't imagine the prince is gonna like either of those options. Though the people will probably be happier without the monarchy."

"But... isn't Prince Wu the rightful air?"

"According to tradition," Ahnah replied, "but it doesn't have to be that way I guess."

"I for one would support that idea too," Akito chirped up. "I mean, look at all we've accomplished these past three years? Have any of our Earth Kings ever done that much for our nation?"

It was hard to know exactly what to think. Bolin had seen all the rebuilding and advancements they had achieved, but he'd always been under the assumption that Prince Wu would take the throne. But would the Earth Kingdom be better off without the monarchy? He couldn't deny that the idea seemed appealing. Either way if it really were the case, then the other world leaders may not be as happy as they were about Kuvira staying in power.

Returning to the palace a day later having failed in Omashu was bad enough, but when Kuvira arrived she had received even more bad news. Several of the northern states had seen a resurgence of barbarian attacks, and even with a redeployment of troops they were having trouble keeping it under control. First Commander General Cheung had reported back about their trade agreements in the west, which had been about as successful as Kuvira's visit to Omashu. Even the science division were struggling as their spirit vine samples were running low, and attempts to harvest more from the swamp had been unsuccessful.

All Kuvira could think about now was that radio Hou-Ting had given her. Why had she even kept it? Maybe part of her knew that what the former Earth Queen had said was true. Kuvira was nothing more than a military leader, only capable of leading soldiers to battle but not leading a nation. That's what Raiko had insinuated too.

No. Kuvira clenched her fist, staring intently at the distant sunset from their bedroom balcony. She couldn't give in. There had to be something else they could do.

"Isn't it a bit cold?" Baatar interrupted his fiancé's thoughts. He joined her on the balcony, wrapping a warm arm around Kuvira as they looked out over the city. He could see Kuvira's blank and distant expression and knew what it was about, "We don't need any of them. Ba Sing Se and the Allied Forces will become something greater than all of their insignificant cities."

After a long pause, Kuvira spoke while watching the cityscape ahead, "I had forgotten how big Omashu was." She'd been a few times when she was younger since it was near Zaofu. "There are many new suburbs on other mountains, and Old Omashu is a towering peak of houses and factories. The mines beneath had people coming and going. It isn't an insignificant city at all."

"So, they have ore? It doesn't matter-"

"Baatar, it isn't just the ore. People see Omashu as a true capitol of the Earth Kingdom. And we do need their help. They all think that Ba Sing Se is a lost cause, that reforming the Earth Kingdom is a lost cause. They see it as going back to the old ways. But what they don't get is that we can build something even better than anything the earth monarchs ever achieved."

Sighing deeply, Baatar leant on the rails. "What do you think we should do then?"

Kuvira pondered for a moment. "Instead of rebuilding the Earth Kingdom, we have to show people that we are building something different, something better. We have to unite people and give them a sense of identity, and a common goal that anyone, no matter who or where they are, can get behind and devote themselves to." As she said these words, an idea started to form in her mind. They had been going about this all the wrong way.

"What are you thinking?" Baatar could see something had clicked in Kuvira's mind.

"We have a press conference tomorrow at midday. It's meant to be an update on our investigations, but perhaps we could use it to announce something else."

Two men sprinted frantically along the rocky path. Thankfully the Si Wong was colder at night, though it was quite a journey sprinting through the desert. The pair had been part of a barbarian convoy trying to break past the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, and it was a miracle that they'd gotten away while in the canyon. Their leader, and many others, hadn't been so lucky. They'd spent the past few hours trekking through the sands, and had thankfully reached some vegetation and rocky outcrops.

"Finally... we're out of that spirit-forsaken desert!" one of the barbarians said while gasping for air. They hadn't encountered or seen any Allied Forces troops around for a while, and figured they were safe now.

The other man was about to agree, though a shadow up ahead caught his attention, "What... is that?" The barbarian squinted through the darkness as the shadow turned into a figure, one with robes and a wide, pointed hat. "Wait! It can't be?!"

Both of the barbarians stared with widened eyes as they recognised the visitor to be an agent of the Dai Li. They were too tired and weary from the escape to put up much of a fight, but there was no way they were going quietly.

"You must continue to fight the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces," the Dai Li agent said calmly, his tone calm but direct.

The barbarians exchanged looks. "What do you mean? We can't do much by ourselves!"

"Then regroup with another clan. Fight the Allied Forces."

"No way you creep!" one of the men stomped up a boulder ready to fling the agent's way. Though before he could, the Dai Li agent's next words stopped him dead in his tracks.

"The Earth Queen had invited you to Lake Laogai."

For a split second, everything made sense. The barbarians saw flashes of their memories like photographs, stacking onto one another and blending together. Two weeks ago they'd encountered another Dai Li agent, and had been kidnapped and locked in a chamber with a glowing lantern. Somehow they'd ended up in the south, and had joined another barbarian clan in fighting the Allied Forces.

But the images soon faded, and everything went black.

Both men stood there expressionless, their bodies limp like dolls, and their dark pupils wide. The Dai Li agent spoke calmly, "The Earth Queen has commanded that you rejoin another barbarian clan and continue to fight Kuvira and the Allied Forces. Do you understand your instructions?"

"Yes," both men said in unison.

"Good," the Dai Li agent sped away on an earth platform, disappearing just as the barbarians regained their consciousness.

Chapter Text

It was meant to be a day to try out the latest invention from Varrick Global Industries. It was called the "Varri-vision", a device that could display real-time events visually from receiving a broadcast, similar to a mover. President Raiko had visited the Fire Nation Embassy to experience the Varri-vision for the first time, though what they were watching was anything but exciting.

The group sat near the black-and-white screen, watching Kuivra speaking with a journalist in Ba Sing Se. While the visuals were a little difficult to make out, the audio was clearer, and what they heard from the Great Uniter was troubling indeed.

"So just to be clear," the journalist said, "this 'Earth Empire' that you are creating, it is its own nation?"

"Yes. The Earth Empire will be what the Earth Kingdom was not. Any states that choose to join will have the full support of the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces – or I should call us – the military of the Earth Empire. While initially our goal was to free the Earth Kingdom from the barbarian threat and chaos after the fall of the monarchy, I've always maintained that we have a chance to transform our nation into something greater. That time is now. The Earth Empire will be a coalition of states, all committed to advancing our nation into a prosperous era and free from the grip of the Earth Monarchy."

"And what of Prince Wu? Is he not the rightful heir to the Earth Kingdom?"

Kuvira almost smirked on stage before answering, "Prince Wu is the heir to the Earth Kingdom, while we are leading the Earth Empire. Of course he will still be in charge of the Earth Kingdom, though how many states choose to remain under the monarchy is yet to be determined. Additionally, Ba Sing Se has become our main base of operations, so it will be difficult to accommodate the royal cabinet and the prince here."

"She can't do that!" Prince Wu stood up and yelled at the screen as if Kuvira were actually right in front of him.

Fire Lord Izumi turned the device off, "I think we've seen enough for today."

"She's taking everything! My throne! My nation! This is the worst day ever...," Wu sobbed into his elbow.

Grand Secretariat Gun tried to console the prince, "Your Majesty, I am meeting with some of the royal cabinet this afternoon. We'll try and come up with a solution, along with President Raiko's advisory team."

Wu looked up, "Some of the royal cabinet?"

"Well... er... many of the ''former'' royal cabinet ministers have um... joined the Earth Empire. I was informed today," Wu sobbed further at the news. Gun looked around the room as he tried thinking of a different conversation stater, "The Varri-vision was certainly fascinating, wasn't it?" he awkwardly laughed after his words.

"I've been in touch with some of our trading partners in the Earth Kingdom. They've estimated around twenty-one states have joined the Earth Empire," Raiko said.

"That's nearly half of my kingdom!"

Raiko stood up from his seat, "Kuvira won't get away with this. She's made enemies of the other Earth Kingdom states, and the rest of the world. We will get her to stand down. It's just going to take some time to figure out how we can."

"If you need to mobilise the United Forces then my army can help bolster defences here in the United Republic," Fire Lord Izumi offered. "Though I do not wish to send the Fire Nation military into the Earth Kingdom."

"Thank you, and yes, I've already summoned the United Forces," Raiko said.

"But what about the search for Korra?" Mako asked.

Raiko shook his head, "We've already covered the western coastline several times. It's clear she's elsewhere. For all we know she could be in the spirit world. For now, we need to bring stability to this situation. General Iroh should be arriving soon."

"Iroh will be here?" Crown Princess Ilah asked. She hadn't seen her brother for some time.

"Perhaps the four of you could do something," Izumi motioned to Prince Wu and Mako. "I'm sure Grand Secretariat Gun and President Raiko will be busy responding to today's press conference, and it might be good to take Wu's mind off things."

Prince Wu didn't even look up at the suggestion, simply sulking and watching the floor intently. Fire Lord Izumi motioned her eyes to Mako, who then tried getting through to the prince, "We... could go back to Little Ba Sing Se? Last time we were there they were advertising a sale in the fashion mall?"

It took a while for Prince Wu to respond, but eventually he looked up, "Okay."

"Alright, I'll organise a ride there."

"I'll go see Iroh at the docks and then meet you both there," Ilah suggested.

The Little Ba Sing Se Fashion mall was like a slice of Earth Kingdom snuggled between the towering skyscrapers of Republic City. It even came complete with its own downsized three rings and palace walls, though the mall's Lower Ring wasn't nearly as impoverished as the real thing. Instead, dozens of boutique shops and stalls lined the walls along the ring, attracting groups of excited shoppers either buying or browsing their wares.

Prince Wu and Mako waited by the entrance to the mall. Despite everything Wu had put him through, it was hard for Mako not to feel sorry for the prince. Although the hustle and bustle of activity had slightly uplifted the prince's spirits, the situation in Ba Sing Se was definitely weighing on him.

Thankfully the others had arrived. Crown Princess Ilah led the way, while her brother General Iroh followed. There was a bit of an age gap between the two, though the family resemblance was still clear. "Mako, Wu, this is my brother Iroh."

General Iroh side-eyed his sister, "As always my sister has forgotten how to formally introduce people, though she does omit her own title so I suppose it works out." Ilah narrowed her eyes playfully at her brother, who smirked in response. "I'm General Iroh. It's a pleasure to see you again Mako, and to properly meet you Your Majesty Prince Wu," Iroh greeted. As he bowed briefly to both of them, he switched his open hand from the traditional Fire Nation posture to the Earth Kingdom greeting when facing Wu.

"It's great to see you too, General Iroh," Mako said, offering a bow as well. Wu did the same.

"So... Little Ba Sing Se Fashion Mall. Can't say I've ever been here before," Iroh commented.

"I come here all the time!" said Wu. However, his face soon screwed up and he folded his arms in a huff, "And it's about as close as I can get to the real Ba Sing Se now."

"Yes, I have heard about what's happening. I'm sure it's been quite difficult, though with my forces in Republic City I hope we can alleviate some of the tension."

Wu's eyes latched on to a sign in the shopping complex, "Hey Mako! They have a sale on at Mushi's Marvels! That's where I got my jacket altered."

"How about you two go on ahead and we can all meet up later, if that's alright with you?" Iroh suggested. "I haven't seen my sister for a while."

The prince was already dragging Mako away at this point. The firebender nodded, "Yeah, sounds good. Let's meet back at the entrance in a couple hours." Mako gave a final glance and smile at Ilah before turning away.

Iroh watched as his sister returned the warm gesture. Noticing her brother's subtle grin, she furrowed her brows, "What?"

"Mako?"

"Hmph... it's nothing," Ilah mumbled.

Smirking to himself, General Ilah walked towards the entrance, "Let's get some food."

A restaurant in the Middle Ring of the complex had caught Ilah's eye while walking around. They'd spent some time looking at the other stores, though it was too crammed and busy to have any decent conversation. Now the pair sat inside the cosy little store, their table one of only five in the building.

"And... maybe some possum chicken steamed bao. Oh and a round of shumai too," Iroh said, smiling warmly to the waitress as she took the last of their order.

"Possum chicken bao and shumai," she jotted down in her notes. She paused, eyeing up Iroh's uniform and badges, "Um... excuse me, but are you General Iroh of the United Forces?"

Iroh nodded, "Yes, I am indeed. This is my sister, Crown Princess Ilah."

The waitress smiled even wider, "It is an honour to have you dine with us. I'll make sure your food is ready soon."

"There's no rush, but thank you," Iroh replied as the waitress scurried away. He noticed Ilah rolling her eyes, though he shrugged it off. "Hey, if I were back home the reception would be different."

"How so?"

"You know. Before I became general of the United Forces, I got called a 'runaway prince' for abdicating my right to the throne and all that," Iroh said. He didn't look too bothered by the statement either, instead using it more in an ironic or funny way.

"I doubt people would still be saying that now," Ilah replied. "Besides, I have my own reputation in the Fire Nation apparently."

Iroh smirked, "What's that?"

"Ilah the Untouchable."

"Not too bad a name," her brother commented. "Sounds threatening, like a great military leader or something."

Ilah shook her head, "I got called that by some of the noble families who tried setting me up with their sons. Apparently, my heart is so untouchable that no one can ever win it over." She watched her brother try not to burst out laughing, though he eventually succumbed to it. "Oh come on! Don't tell me you didn't have the same experience with the noble families all vying to marry their children off to us. How many times I had the Chu family and their seven sons write to me."

"Are any of them married now?"

"I think the oldest two are," Ilah laughed. She had no idea about the other five, but pitied the women who ended up with them.

The waitress brought out some tea while their conversation died down. It was nice to reconnect with his sister, though Iroh had another reason to meet with Ilah. "So I... I did want to talk to you about Mother, and everything that's been going on between you both."

Ilah's smile soon faded, "And we were having such a nice conversation. Did she ask you to talk to me?"

"Not... exactly."

Ilah tutted, "Well, she's perfectly capable of talking to me herself."

"Ilah, it's not like that. She just thought maybe you'd have an easier time opening up to me than her. Things have been tense for a while from what I hear, particularly in the last month since coming to Republic City."

"Maybe because there's a terrorist group running rampant in our country, and I have to be here playing politics instead of helping stop them."

"And is that all it is, or is there something more?"

Sighing to herself, Ilah let her gaze drift to the floor. She didn't appreciate feeling ambushed like this, but the rift between her and Izumi was also affecting her. Maybe it was better to let at least some of it out, "It's just... I dunno." Ilah gathered her thoughts, "Mother always talks about my future as the Fire Lord. It's like everything I do has to be working towards that goal." Iroh nodded slowly while continuing to hear Ilah out, "Iroh, when you left to join the United Forces, you weren't just deciding your own future. You decided mine."

Iroh's face grew saddened as he realised what Ilah was saying. "I didn't realise that's how you feel."

"The kids at school would talk about how cool you were, leading an army of soldiers across the globe, stopping bad guys and all that. I really looked up to you, and I wanted to be just like you. But... there has to be an heir to the throne, and you gave up your birth right."

"Do you not want to be the next Fire Lord?"

"It's not that I don't want it at all... but I also don't really want it either. I just... I don't know," Ilah said. It was hard articulating what had been bottled up for so long, but letting it go brought a strange peace to her soul. "I don't know how I could lead a nation that's been responsible for one of the worst war crimes this world has ever seen. Why would I want such a responsibility? And now that I'm eighteen it's like everything revolves around it, with Mother dragging me here to learn about world politics first-hand. It's like... I'm being forced towards this thing and I don't even know if I can do it or want to, but not being able to decide is weighing on me."

It was easy for Iroh to feel some guilt for what Ilah was feeling. Being the general of the United Forces wasn't exactly an easy task, but being the Fire Lord had its own difficulties too. "Ilah, you know I could technically be the Fire Lord once I retire from the United Forces? The only reason I can't right now is because currently I'm the commanding general. It wouldn't go down well with all the world leaders of course and could be seen as an action of bad faith given the reparations agreement, but it wouldn't be breaking any laws specifically. Though from what you've said, it seems more that you're confused rather than not wanting it at all."

Ilah looked up, the strain in her eyes clear as day. It was rare for her to show this kind of emotion so openly. "Yeah... I guess I just... don't really know how to feel about it."

"You know, Mother will probably understand what you're going through more than you think."

"Really? She's the one always pushing me down this path," Ilah laughed sarcastically.

"No, really. She was an only child remember? She must have felt very much like you do, like she never had a choice. Maybe give it a chance?"

Several bamboo steamers of food were placed at the table along with the condiments, and the waitress bowed and smiled as she left back to the kitchen. Ilah breathed out deeply, "I'll try and find a time to speak with her."

Iroh smiled. "I'm glad. And you can always talk to me if you need," he offered. "Well, this food smells delicious," Iroh poured them each a dish of soy sauce and picked up his chopsticks. "It hasn't been all that bad in Republic City has it? You seem to be getting on with Mako at least?" Iroh teased.

Ilah stole the shumai her brother was reaching for, smirking to herself as she took a bite. Maybe Iroh did have a point. "I'm still trying to suss Mako out," Ilah replied.

"Well don't wait too long, or else you'll be marrying one of the Chu brothers one day instead."

The siblings laughed, enjoying the food and each other's company for the rest of the afternoon.

"... And once we're done with these we can go into the Middle Ring! I'll let you pick out some new suits. Then we'll hit some boutiques in the Upper Ring for me."

Mako sipped on his iced tea, only half listening to Wu's rambling. They'd spent the past few hours browsing numerous stores.

"You know Mako, I think this is exactly what I needed. I mean, I can't do anything about Ba Sing Se myself, though my loyal subjects and allies are working to kick that evil metal witch off my throne and maybe that's enough. For now, being here in Little Ba Sing Se is enough to feel –" Wu tossed his drink forwards, which soaked Mako's uniform. "HEY!"

Wu had noticed two young women walking past their outdoor table, wearing t-shirts over their clothes. They had Kuvira's face on them. "Huh?" one of the women said.

"Where did you get those shirts?!"

The girls exchanged glances, "Ace's right? Kuvira is my hero."

"They're selling them over there."

Wu spun around so fast he nearly toppled over from the dizziness. His eyes honed in like a cat hawk, targeting the store up ahead. "Urghhh!" an infuriated, high-pitched squeal burst from his lips. "You can't sell that junk here!" Wu cried out while sprinting over to the stand. The shoppers and staff looked confused, unsure what to make of the clearly insane man running over to them. "This is the Little Ba Sing Se Fashion mall and I'm the little king here!"

"Boo!" the crowds of shoppers responded, unimpressed by Wu's demands.

"Stop it, 'Little King'!" A man called out.

"I am the glorious defender!"

This was getting bad. Mako had already started running over to stop Wu but it was too late; the prince had thrown his iced tea at one of the shoppers.

"I'm covered in juice!"

"Get him!"

Chills snaked down Wu's spine when he realised what he'd done.

"We need to get you out of here!" Mako intervened. He grabbed the prince's arm and took off down the street, with several of the crowd chasing after them. Mako pulled Wu behind him like a rag doll, but there was no way they'd outrun the angry shoppers. He yanked the prince in front him and flicked a wheel of fire in the air. The flames settled on the ground, stopping the group chasing them and giving them enough time to sneak down an alleyway. For now, they'd lost them.

After sneaking through the Middle and Upper rings of the mall, Mako and Wu found themselves on the first floor of the replica palace, although the Little Ba Sing Se's version functioned as a restaurant. The elevator doors opened, and Wu's eyes widened with awe. "Mako, look where we are! It must be destiny!"

Without a second thought, Wu charged up the stairs and into the golden-tiled building. Nothing could stand in his way; he charged past a family trying to get a photograph in the entrance, only caring about the golden throne straight ahead.

Mako called out to the prince, "Wu –"

"Out of my way!" the prince ignored Mako, shoving several patrons and their trays of food aside as he pressed on. The throne was right in front of him. His throne, shining in all its glory.

There was a young boy sitting happily in the chair with his mother nearby, but alas, he had no chance as Wu began yanking the royal sceptre out of his hands. The child protested, "Hey! It's my birthday –"

"So what?! You'll get another one next year! I'm the prince and Kuvira just stole my nation from me this morning and I'll never get it back!" Wu's joy had turned to grief as he wailed, snatching the cloak and crown from the boy and slumping himself on the throne.

Mako watched the poor child burst into tears as his mother led him away. This was not going to end well. "Okay Wu, you're losing it."

"This is the worst day of my life!"

"Why? Do you even want to be king?"

Wu's weeping paused for a moment as he looked up at Mako.

"Kuvira might be a power-crazed dictator, but at least she cares about the Earth Kingdom. Look at what she's done over the past few years? What have you ever done? If you were an Earth Kingdom citizen, would you want someone like you to rule over them?" Mako realised he'd said too much. "Sorry... that... was out of line."

To Mako's surprise, Wu didn't scold him. He paused for a moment, as if he'd experienced something new. "No, it's... alright. No one has ever spoken to me like that before."

"I didn't mean –"

"It's alright. I guess... maybe you have a point."

Although he'd been honest and still believed what he had said, Mako felt bad about being so blunt with Wu. He awkwardly looked back to the restaurant entrance, though saw the crowd from before had finally found them. "Uh, we'd better go. They've found us."

Wu let out a terrified squeal as Mako grabbed his arm once again, taking off through the back entrance of the palace.

Iroh glanced at his watch again. Mako and Wu were about an hour late, which was concerning as there'd been a commotion in the Upper Ring shops and palace restaurant. Eventually the pair made their way out of the mall complex, though for some reason Mako was powerwalking while shuffling Wu along, keeping his gaze low to the ground.

"How... was it?" Ilah asked.

"Something happened in the Lower Ring, not sure what it was. Did you guys see anything?" Iroh asked.

Mako and Wu exchanged awkward glances. "You know what," Wu relaxed his composure, "I actually had a good time. I even got to be king for a day."

Now Iroh and Ilah exchanged confused glances. "I... feel like there's more to that story," Iroh said.

"Well, it's more like king for five minutes but who's counting?" Wu laughed.

"Hey you!"

The four of them turned to see a mall security officer march over. Behind him were several of the shoppers at Ace's that had seen everything going on. "You there, in the emerald green jacket!" Wu looked to the others either side even though he was the one being yelled at. "You've been trespassed from the mall!"

Wu's face was aghast, "What?! You can't trespass me!"

"Don't show up here again or we'll call law enforcement! You got that?!"

"How dare you?! I... I come here all the time!"

Mako hooked an arm around Wu's, dragging him along as he dug his heels in, "Come on Wu."

"I am the law enforcement of Ba Sing Se! You can't kick me out! Where... where will I get my silk badgermole underwear from?!" the poor prince cried and yelled as he was helplessly tugged along by Mako and Ilah, only giving up his rant when they reached their satomobile.

Chapter Text

It was barely sunrise when Toph's eyes flung open. But as soon as she felt the tremors, she knew exactly what it meant.

"Ugh, not again," Toph mumbled as she sat upright. Korra was still fast asleep in her bed. "Korra, wake up!"

The Avatar didn't budge murmuring to herself as she snoozed, "Morning... evil..."

Toph grunted, and immediately flipped Korra's bed upright with a stomp of her foot. "Get up."

"What?! Why am I... did you just flip me out of my bed?!" Korra yelled at Toph as she came to, sitting in a pile of thatched blankets on the ground.

"We need to get to the banyan grove tree."

"We need to go to the what-now?"

"The banyan grove tree. Someone's there, quick!"

It took only a few seconds to get ready, and Korra followed Toph as she bolted out the door. The pair ran through the swampbender village, with Toph whacking a stick on several of the hut doors to wake the occupants up. One tribesman opened the door after hearing Toph approaching, rubbing his groggy head, "What is it now Old Lady Toph?"

"The metal-men are back! Get ready!" The news seemed to startle the man, though Toph grabbed his collar, "And stop calling me 'Old Lady' Toph! I still have plenty of life left in me!"

Toph and Korra ran past some more huts, and eventually back into the wilds. "Wait, Toph. Metal-men? What do you mean?"

Toph let out an irritated sigh, "These platinumbenders have been coming to the swamp to take vines from the banyan-grove tree."

"Platinumbenders?"

"I didn't believe it myself either. But they control these suits made of pure metal, and I can't bend them myself. I don't know how they do it, but they're a real nuisance if you ask me." Toph's head flicked to the side as she heard the sound of chainsaws, "Quick! They're already here!"

The pair continued running, eventually meeting up with some others from the Foggy Swamp Tribe. As they entered a clearing, Korra got to see the banyan tree in all its glory. "Woah," she marvelled. The massive tree was several stories high, with roots and vines snaking in all directions across the swamp. Her attention turned to Toph, who stomped a wall up ahead of them, cutting off the group of intruders from the tree. The 'metal-men' indeed had earthbenders with them, as Toph's barrier was quickly dispersed. Now that they had gathered, the tribesmen readied themselves for attack.

"It's them!" Toph said spitefully, noticing the so called 'platinumbenders' in their suits.

Korra soon realised what the confusion was, "Oh, they aren't platinumbenders Toph. They're called 'mecha-tanks'; suits made of platinum that are controlled by non-benders. Though I've... never seen any on legs. Usually they have tank tread wheels."

"Hmph, well that's a relief; I thought I'd been outdone as the 'greatest earthbender of all time'."

Several soldiers in green and silver uniforms made their way forwards, while the mecha suits marched forward into a line. "We've been here before, swamp people. The Earth Empire requires that you let us harvest vines for research purposes. If you obstruct us than it will be considered an act of aggression."

"Earth Empire? That's new," Toph mumbled.

"We haven't agreed to this! Leave our tribe alone!"

"Yeah, get outta here!"

"Silence!" the soldier cut them off. "Grand Commander Kuvira orders you to comply. The Foggy Swamp Tribe has no legal jurisdiction here. Besides, this research will benefit the entire empire. Do not stand in the way of progress."

It was clear that these soldiers weren't going to back down. And did they just mention that they were working for Kuvira? What was the 'Earth Empire'? Korra had many questions, though it was certain that this would end in a brawl. Thankfully, Korra looked just like one of the swampbenders in her dark green pants and singlet top, so she wouldn't out herself as the Avatar if she stuck to waterbending.

"This is your final warning. Move aside, and let us conduct our business. Then you can get back to whatever it is you people do."

To everyone's surprise, Toph started laughing, "Ah, I'm gonna have fun smacking your tin can suits around, and you'd better be ready to have you butts whooped! I haven't had an exciting fight like this since the last time you dunderheads showed up."

"Our training sessions have been pretty intense," Korra frowned. Apparently they weren't that much of a thrill for Toph.

"Remember what we've discussed Avatar," Toph said. "Feel what you're doing, and don't overthink it."

"Right."

The soldier at the front of the group moaned, "This is wasting our time. All units, move in and apprehend!"

The tribesmen let out a furious war cry and charged ahead. Several streamed torrents of water into the soldiers, and others struck with spears. The Earth Empire managed to block most of their attacks and launched boulders of mudstone from beneath the waters. Toph had raised a section of earth for herself to stand on, dodging multiple projectiles thrown her way. She grounded herself, digging her feet into the muddy earth while digging up a massive slab and toppling it forwards. It managed to knock over a mecha suit, though two earthbenders cut through the slab and launched boulders of their own.

A soldier had managed to break through, and Korra charged ahead. She started with a right hook, sending a stream of swamp water at the man. It missed. She tried a left hook, but it also shot past. The earthbender was just about to strike until he was knocked back by a pillar of earth from Toph. Korra gritted her teeth, frustrated at herself. Even in the heat of the battle she was struggling to keep up.

As the tribespeople continued to battle, some of them looked over at the tree line. "She's here!" one of them yelled.

"It's Ut!"

Korra looked over and wondered what they were excited about, though her questions were soon answered. A mass of green vines seemed to be... moving through the trees. Once it appeared in the clearing, Korra's eyes widened, "What is that?"

The vine mass was wide and had two thick arms, with a wooden mask as a face. Several soldiers and a mecha suit turned to react but it was too late; with a mighty swipe, the vine monster swung its arm into them and bowled them over. Many of the tribesmen cheered, spurring them on as they fought back.

"Gotta love the swampbenders and their tricks," Toph smirked. "That's Ut in there, Chiefess of the Foggy Swamp Tribe."

Korra had never seen anything like it. She'd heard stories of waterbenders being able to control moisture-rich plants, but seeing it in action was something else. Her attention soon turned to a mecha suit up ahead aiming its lightning generator at Toph. "Watch out!" Korra tackled Toph out of the way, and the pair sploshed into the water behind Toph's earth platform.

"I knew that was coming!" Toph stood up, though Korra quickly pulled her forwards as another bolt of electricity snaked behind her. "Well... okay, the lightning is harder for me to sense."

Panic started to set in. Korra knew she wasn't up to her usual self, and these mecha suits with lightning generators were difficult for Toph to handle. They were already outnumbered, and Korra had no idea what she should do. Could she even do anything? Korra clenched her fist, her thoughts swirling around and overwhelming her.

No. She had to let go.

Korra breathed in deeply, and exhaled, slowly relaxing her hand. She didn't have to be as good as she once was. She only needed to stop these soldiers. She was standing in knee-deep water, her native element that she'd had control over for as long as she could remember. She could do this.

"Toph, keep the mecha suits occupied so they can't aim lightning at anyone. I'll advance and knock them all back."

Toph was surprised at first, wondering what Korra was thinking proposing such a bold move. Though a confident grin soon formed, "Alright Twinkle-Toes. I'll back you up." The old lady stomped onto the platform. A series of earth pillars shot out and flew across the swamp, landing over the mecha suits and earthbenders beneath.

With the troops at the back occupied Korra focused on getting closer. Raising a stream of greenish water around her, Korra lashed out a whip and struck a soldier in the face. As he stumbled back, Korra brought her arms forwards and raised a geyser underneath the soldier, with the poor man crying out as he was tossed in the air. That was one down.

Another man ran at Korra with an electrified glove charged up. Streaks of blue coursed through the air as Korra ducked and sidestepped each swipe, though eventually Korra swatted the man's hand out the way and elbowed his chest. With a powerful water hose she sent him tumbling backwards.

With Ut and Toph keeping the flanks occupied, Korra had a moment to concentrate in the middle of the battlefield. There were still so many troops left, but if she could get this to work, it might just save them. Korra began focusing on the water in front of them, pushing and pulling just like the moon. With momentum the waves became larger and wider.

Soon, some of the other tribesmen caught on to what Korra was doing. "Hey! Let's give Korra a hand!"

Korra brought her arms in sharply, pulling up a wall of water that grew as others joined in. The swamp on the other side had run dry, even revealing the bare earth under the soldier's feet. Their attacks tried to break through but Korra's barrier held firm. For a moment her eyes flashed white and a familiar sensation filled her body. And with a push forwards, the water wall released.

The massive wave crashed back onto the ground, sweeping up soldiers as it surged along. Even some the mecha suits lost their footing, and those that didn't were quickly dealt with by Toph's projectiles or Ut's vine attacks. As the waves swept the Earth Empire away, their cries became nothing but a distance sound, soon replaced by the cheers and celebrations from the tribesmen. Korra even managed a smile. She'd felt something inside her that she hadn't in a long time. Was it Raava? She didn't know, but as she tried to think about it she found herself grow dizzy and her vision turn black. She could hear the voices of Toph and others calling her name, but eventually, Korra passed out.

"Is she going to be alright? Why did she pass out?"

"Her chi is blocked and strained, but her vitals are fine. She'll probably wake up soon."

"But how did this happen?"

"She has a metal poison stuck inside her body according to Toph. It might have affected her chakras."

Although dazed and weary, Korra could hear the murmur of voices around her. She managed to open her eyes, heaving in a breath of air as she stirred. "Uh... what happened?"

"I knew she'd be fine," Toph said from the corner of the room.

Korra looked to her sides. She was in her bed with several tribesmen next to her, one of them drawing glowing water back into a pouch. "How are you feeling?"

"I'm... tired. But I feel okay. Just... a little sore all over." Korra's eyes widened, "Wait! The Earth Empire?"

"They'll be back, but at least they've left for now."

Korra sat up, rubbing her aching head. Toph's words offered some relief at least. They had no idea what the Earth Empire wanted with the banyan tree, nor how the Earth Kingdom even became an empire, but at least their swamp was safe once again. "I think I may have blacked out," Korra said. She could remember creating that massive wave which washed the troops away, but after that everything was fuzzy.

Toph snorted, "You did. You passed out with this ridiculous silly grin on your face. I don't know what was so funny but it was weird."

"Not... funny. It was joy. I... I think I used the Avatar state again. Just for a moment."

"Well, don't go trying it again. At least not until you try to remove the poison. Can't have you passing out everywhere," Toph sighed. "Either way Twinkle-Toes, that was some quick thinking out there. You did well."

Korra couldn't help but smirk, a small but satisfied smile forming afterwards. This was probably the first complement Toph had ever given her.

"Thank you for helping us, Avatar Korra," the healer offered. "If you are feeling up to it, the tribe is having a celebration."

"A celebration?"

"For defeating the invaders of course," the healer laughed. "I hope you feel better soon."

After the swambenders had left, Korra took a few minutes to get her bearings. Once she was ready, she called out to Toph in the other room, "You coming as well Toph?"

"Ah, I'm too old for that sort of thing. The swampbenders do know how to throw a party though."

"Alright," Korra replied.

It was only once Korra was outside that she realised how late in the day it was. The sky had bloomed with oranges and pinks of sunset, and even the glowing fireflies had started bobbing around through the trees. The path towards the village was filled with the echoes of wildlife, soon overtaken by the distant sounds of the celebration as Korra approached.

Once in the clearing, Korra grinned at the sight in front of her. There were dozens of lanterns hung from cords between branches, and torches lighting the paths. Several fire pits scattered the clearing with villagers huddled about, some cooking large skewers of meats and vegetables, all of it sending a tantalising aroma wafting throughout the area. A group played stringed instruments and drums, and their lively tune had started a dance party in the corner. "Toph was right about the swampbenders."

"Oh hey, it's the Avatar!"

"Avatar Korra!"

To Korra's surprise, the tribespeople started cheering for her. She'd only met a few of them while living in the swamp, though everyone here were treating her with a fondness that felt like she'd been a part of their tribe for years. "Oh, thanks," Korra replied as a necklace of green leaves and a water lily was wrapped around her neck, matching some of the others.

"Have some food! Are you hungry?" another villager asked. He didn't wait for Korra's reply, instead handing her a bowl of soup and a skewer straight from the fire.

"Now now, give the Avatar some space. She's been recovering all day," Korra watched as a woman approached. She had her silver hair in braids, and like the other tribespeople, incorporated leaves and pieces of wood in her attire. "I don't believe we've properly met Avatar Korra, but my name is Ut. I'm the Chiefess of the Foggy Swamp Tribe."

Korra returned a bow, "Nice to meet you Ut. This is quite the celebration."

Ut laughed, "It is. We can be a lively bunch here." She motioned towards the edge of the gathering, "Why don't we eat together, Korra?"

The pair made their way towards a tall tree, its roots providing a perfect seating spot. "So, how have you found living here in the Foggy Swamp?"

"It's been... different. But in a good way of course. Everyone has been really welcoming."

"Life in the swamp is rather different to the North and South poles, or Republic City for that matter," Ut laughed. "Even Toph has been welcoming?"

"She has her moments."

The pair laughed together before eating their meal. Ut finished another bite before continuing, "Toph has been a blessing for us in the Foggy Swamp Tribe. When she arrived long ago she was isolated and preferred to stick to herself, though in more recent years she's joined in a lot more. And especially with the attacks she's been very helpful."

Korra nodded along while listening to Ut's words. She still hadn't figured out why Toph had moved to the swamp, though at some point she'd try asking again. Her thoughts drifted to the Earth Empire, "Do you know what they wanted with the vines from the banyan tree?"

"The banyan-grove tree and the swamp itself is a spiritual place. It's home to a very old spirit, Tengwan, the vine spirit. I can only imagine that the Earth Empire want the banyan tree for that reason." She looked out at the reeds ahead, "As Chiefess I honour the spirit by adopting his original form when bending the water in the vines."

"So that's what that was earlier today. With the vines and the wooden mask."

"The tradition has been passed down since our people lived here. My father Huu taught me, and one day, I shall teach my successor," Ut explained. While the vine form was a little scary-looking, Korra could appreciate that it did hold a special meaning to the tribespeople. Ut continued, "Legend has it that Tengwan crossed over from the Spirit World long ago. During a great battle, part of the Tree of Time, an ancient spirit, was cut off and thrown into the material world. This branch eventually became Tengwan. But instead of binding the material and Spirit World together as the Tree of Time did, Tengwan sought to bind those in the material world together with one another, creating the Foggy Swamp."

It was easy to see why the banyan tree was such a special place for the Foggy Swamp Tribe. "I've been in the Tree of Time, actually," Korra recalled. "What will you do about the Earth Empire? Will you go after them?"

Ut shook her head, "My job is to look after my tribe and be here, teaching the people our ways and looking after future generations. That's my place in the universe." She looked towards Korra, "And what is your place in the universe, Korra?"

She hadn't expected things to get this deep. Perhaps it was part of being in such a spiritual place. "I don't know," Korra answered after a long, heavy pause.

"Are you not the Avatar?"

"Well... I haven't felt like it for a long time," Korra revealed. Her mind filled with images of Kuvira, the Air Nation, and all those who had taken up the mantle of bringing balance to the world. What was her place in the universe if the world didn't seem to need her anymore? "Ut... I saw a vision, or something weird that happened a few weeks ago."

"Ah, yes. The swamp tends to do that. What did you see?"

"I... I don't know what it was exactly. It started when I saw Kuvira. Not in the flesh but a projection. We talked, or more like argued. And then I saw... Republic City being destroyed. What do you think it means?"

Ut didn't answer straight away, instead taking the time to ponder what Korra had said. "I don't know if I can give an answer. Sometimes people see visions of past events, sometimes events in the future. Sometimes neither past nor future but a vision that compels one to look inward. Part of Tengwan's role in the world is to help us connect with ourselves, so whatever it is, it must be something deep and important in your life, or, your destiny."

Much of what they'd already talked about had been in Korra's vision as well. The vision of Kuvira had asked her if she were "Korra or the Avatar", and when she didn't want to believe that the world really needed her, she walked into a vision of Republic City under attack.

"Ut," Korra turned to the chiefess, "I remember when I was with Katara in the South Pole, she had said that part of the healing process is finding meaning in suffering and eventually peace. And maybe that's why I tried telling myself that the world doesn't need me anymore. It was my reason for explaining why all of this happened; why I got sick, why the world moved on without the Avatar. I don't know if I can ever believe anything else."

There was a deep empathy in Ut's eyes as she listened to Korra, feeling her struggles in herself. She smiled fondly, "Finding meaning in suffering is not the same as looking for reasons why something has happened. If a reason is what you're after then you could search your entire life without ever finding it." She looked over to some of the tribespeople around a campfire, "Over on the logs there is a woman named Nanaki. Last winter, sadly her son passed away."

"That... must've been awful."

Ut nodded slowly, her eyes growing saddened with grief, "Nanaki's child was so young, though he'd been very sick from birth and none of our healers could ever help him recover completely."

Korra watched the woman mentioned, sitting by herself. She was comfortable, but Korra could sense a deep grief weighing on her soul.

"The woman next to her is named Tui. Her son is the one over there dancing with his younger sister," she nudged her head in their direction. "He's a funny one. Loves to explore the swamp and every little detail. If he could live for eternity in the material world he would never tire of it, always fascinated by its beauty and intricacy," Ut smiled fondly. "I don't know why Nanaki's son passed away yet Tui's lives. Both mothers loved their sons dearly, but why should one suffer a loss no parent should ever endure, and the other experience the joy of parenthood that many long for? What reason is there for one's boundless joy, and the other's devastating sorrow?"

Korra let her gaze drift towards the earth, feeling her eyes grow warm. She'd never thought of things this way before. "I don't know."

"Both women can find meaning in their journey, but a reason? All we can really do is accept that life can be chaotic and bitter, but also bring balance and joy. And often there is no reason that can justify either. Balance and chaos. It's the cycle we all live though. Much like the great spirits of light and dark."

"... And neither Raava or Vaatu can live without the other."

"Indeed," Ut smiled. "Sometimes all we can do is enjoy the small things while accepting this truth. That's why we celebrate together; it isn't much, but it keeps us going." While Ut continued, Korra watched the woman named Nanaki across from her. A man approached with an arrangement of flowers tied together – presumably her husband – and presented the gift to her. Nanaki grinned, before leaping into the arms of her lover. The pair joined the others dancing, their bodies moving like flowing water as they performed together.

Korra felt Ut's hand rest on hers, "I can sense that you have been through much suffering, Korra. And I cannot answer your question of what your place is in this universe, or why you had to endure such hardship. But I do know that your actions today made a difference for us."

Tears snaked down Korra's cheeks as she smiled back.

"Hey Miss, would you like to come dance with us?"

Korra wiped her tears away, slightly embarrassed to be crying in front of a young girl. "Sorry I... um... I'm not much of a dancer."

"And sometimes the universe calls to us in the most unexpected ways," Ut said, smiling at Korra.

"Well," Korra sighed. "Okay. But I don't know what dances you have in the Foggy Swamp Tribe."

"I'll show you!" the little girl grabbed Korra's hands and dragged her away, with Ut laughing as she watched them take off. As they stood in the middle of the dance area, the young girl started swaying her arms either side, trying to imitate the adults nearby. "See!" she boasted.

Korra smiled, "That was pretty good. Y'know, I do know one dance from the South Pole I could show you. Do you know what an otter penguin is?" The girl shook her head. "It's an animal that lives in the ice. It was a face with whiskers and four flippers."

"Four flippers!"

"Mmhm. And it walks like this –" Korra proceed to shuffle around like an otter penguin, keeping her arms close but sticking her hands out like tiny fins. She also pulled a face while she danced, making the young girl and other kids nearby laugh away.

After her dance, several of the children formed a circle holding hands with one another, making sure to include Korra. The rest of the evening was spent eating, drinking, dancing, and laughing, enjoying each other's company as the sun set far in the distance.

A knock at the door brought Asami back to reality. She'd been staring out the window of her office for the past half an hour, her thoughts a whirlwind as she tried to focus. "Come in."

"Miss Sato," the employee greeted.

"Do you have any news on the device? Any new leads?"

The man shook his head, "Regrettably, we couldn't find anything in the records. Even in your father's old workspaces."

Asami sighed, dipping her head and staring at her desk. "Nothing at all," she mused.

"I'll keep searching and go back over what we've looked at, but it does seem like there's nothing on record about such a project." Offering a quick smile, the man bowed and left the office.

A part of her had suspected this would be the case. She'd already trudged through countless documents and archives, finding nothing even remotely related to the device. She'd even found more plans for Equalist technology that never saw daylight, but nothing on this elusive machine except her father's words. Asami grabbed her purse and made her way downstairs.

"I'm just popping out for some air," Asami informed the receptionist before leaving out the front door.

The street was quiet and calm, though Asami's mind was anything but. She didn't know exactly where she was heading, only that she needed to walk this out. Avatar Korra Park was nearby, and she found herself drifting that direction anyway.

Was she being selfish? For not wanting to talk to her father and letting her hurt get in the way? It's not like Asami had wanted to storm out when she'd visited the prison. In fact, she'd made up her mind before visiting her father that she'd find out everything she could about the device, even though she'd also brought the unopened letters with her. But seeing him in the flesh had snapped something inside of her. It was like a geyser of hurt and anger had burst forth and smothered everything, all these feelings that she'd thought years of distance and space could have repressed.

A bench in the park offered a moment's rest as Asami took a seat. There had to be a solution to this problem. She wanted to put aside her feelings towards Hiroshi for Korra's sake, so she could find out what this device was and whether it had anything to do with Korra's disappearance. But she had already tried to ignore her hurt and anger and it hadn't worked. Maybe there was another way? Maybe the way forwards involved... letting go of her anger? It was a strange thought, and an impossible one.

Asami looked up, seeing the tall statue of her friend catching the sun's evening rays. Korra looked so tall and mighty here. Asami only hoped that she was recovering and getting back to the person she was. It had sounded like she was making progress when she had written to her months ago, but now that she was missing anything could have happened.

Something else in the park caught Asami's attention; a young girl playing Pai Sho at a table with her father. Sadness filled Asami's heart as she watched, a fond and longing smile surfacing beneath her troubled eyes. She remembered doing this with her own father. The hours they'd spent playing Pai Sho together. It had been cathartic for moments where their grief over losing her mother was too much to bear. The logical nature of Pai Sho with all the pieces and strategy had been the perfect way to take their minds off everything that was going on around them. Eventually it was engineering that had taken its place as Asami grew older and would spend every day working alongside her father, but their close bond had all started with Pai Sho.

Asami hadn't noticed the tear snaking down her cheeks, too engrossed in reminiscing about the past to realise. Beneath all this anger and pain lay a sorrow and grief, one that she'd been too afraid to deal with. Perhaps it wasn't the anger and feeling of betrayal that need healing, but the lost relationship that she once had with her father.

She couldn't forgive him, but maybe she could still move forwards.

After several hours with the villagers, Korra's body was worn out. Though she couldn't help smiling to herself as she made her way back to the hollow, thinking of all the people she'd met, the laughter, and the atmosphere. It was something she hadn't experienced for a long time.

"You sure danced your socks off."

Korra jolted as she realised Toph was sitting on a root outside the hollow. Although the sun hadn't faded completely it was still dark under the thick canopy. Korra was now a little jumpy in the swamp since the random visions had started appearing. "Toph... you scared me. I didn't know you went to the party?"

Toph swished a gourd next to her, "I just came by for some drink and left. Far too noisy for me over there." She took a swig and then let out a loud burp.

"How... much have you had?"

"Ah, don't get onto me. My liver will probably go when the rest of me does at this point," she waved dismissively before taking another sip. "I haven't had that much though. Drunk and blind isn't exactly a great combo."

Drunk and sighted wasn't either Korra thought, but she let it go. "You were right about the swampbender parties though," Korra said, taking a seat next to Toph.

The old lady narrowed her eyes without looking Korra's way, "Who said you could join me?"

"Well, you talked to me first?"

Toph shrugged, taking another swig. "Did you get to talk to Ut? She help you with all that spiritual stuff?"

"Yeah, we talked a bit. It was actually really nice." Korra glanced over at Toph, "We talked about the vine spirit Tengwan and its desire to connect the material world with each other and us with ourselves, which... is why I don't understand why you're here."

Korra's words took Toph by surprise, who stopped herself before drinking, "The world is too busy and full of rules, I can't be bothered keeping up."

"But what about connecting with Su and Lin?"

"I'm more connected than you'll ever be!" Toph defended. "I already told you I can hear all their voices and sense their presence through the vines. I'm connected just fine."

"But it's lonely, isn't it? Hearing them is one thing but feeling them in person –"

"And what do you want me to say? Of course it's lonely! Of course I miss them!" Now Toph took a gulp from her gourd. "I wish I could be there to spend time with them. But the best thing I can do as a mother is leave them be. They don't need me anymore."

Korra didn't know what to say. She'd seen Lin and Suyin reconcile and could imagine they too wanted to see Toph again. Why would she think otherwise? Korra thought of her own parents, how she was worried about upsetting them, how she'd thought she'd lost her father at Laghima's peak. "I don't think there's ever a time where kids don't need their parents."

Sighing deeply, Toph explained, "My girls might still need a mother, but they don't need a sorry excuse for one."

"... Toph?"

The old lady clearly looked uncomfortable being this vulnerable, but somehow, Toph opened up anyway, "Suyin was a difficult child. She broke the rules at home, broke the law when she was older. I sent her away to live with my parents for a time because I couldn't deal with her anymore. But when I look back, it was then that I fractured our family." Toph laughed sarcastically, "No, actually it was earlier that I did that. With their dads. I never told Lin or Su much about their fathers. I had one failed marriage and then a second relationship that didn't work out. I wanted to focus on raising my girls but I ended up with one that worked herself to the bone to please me and the other that had lost all direction. I'm not the mother they should have."

Her words deeply troubled Korra, "Toph, I don't think they'd see it like that."

"They don't need to because that's how I see it. The one last good thing I can do for them is let them be."

Korra almost regretted asking about it. Knowing the truth was hard to bear. All this time Toph had maintained that she was happy being alone, that she'd left to 'search for enlightenment'. At least that's what she'd been told in Zaofu. But in reality, Toph had been carrying around this heavy guilt, much like Korra was carrying around the poison in her. "I once saw Suyin and Lin nearly beat each other up in Zaofu."

Even though her voice was strained with grief, Toph managed a laugh, "That's my girls for you."

"They were both grown women, yet had so much unresolved anger and bitterness between them that they'd been driven to nearly hurting each other. But they reconciled, because deep down they missed each other. I think... something similar might be possible for you and Lin."

Surprisingly, Toph didn't have a snappy reply or snarky answer. She simply embraced those words from Korra, letting them sink in. She even let out a sob before containing her emotions. Toph heard Korra shuffle next to her, and then felt the Avatar's warm arms wrap around her in a tender embrace. "I... told you Korra, if you want a hug then go hug some trees," she replied in between sniffles.

"I guess I'm not good at following rules either," Korra smiled. She held Toph for a while, not saying anything more but simply letting the old woman know that she was near. After she pulled away, Korra felt a familiar pain in her upper arm from one of Toph's punches. "Ow! Was that really necessary?"

Toph smiled, wiping away the last of her tears, "It was."

The pair sat in the serene atmosphere, taking in the last of the sun's rays high above the tree line. Korra sighed, "I guess in the end... we were both hiding in the swamp to avoid something."

"Hmph, spirits you Avatars can't help yourselves, always meddling in other's personal lives," Toph added, smirking to herself.

"What can I say? I guess solving other's problems is... my place in the universe."

Silence followed, allowing both Korra and Toph to reflect. Korra had come to the swamp to find a quick fix, something to help her get back into action and go save the world. But now it was clear that there had been much more healing she had needed to do. And, healing she'd helped others begin.

After going to visit the prison block again, Asami wasn't having much luck getting in.

"Visiting hours are nearly over," the usual guardswoman said flatly.

"Please, I won't be long."

"Hmph, fine. You have twenty minutes."

The door clunked open, and Asami found a seat at one of the tables. No one else was in the visiting area at the moment, probably because it was late in the day. At least that meant she could have some privacy.

Despite finding her resolve in the park, seeing her father walk in sent an uneasy chill down her spine. But Asami tried relaxing her breathing, remembering what she wanted to say.

Hiroshi smiled when he saw Asami, though he still wore an anxious and saddened expression as he walked over. "You came back?" he said, taking a seat while the guard walked away.

Mustering up her courage and strength, Asami looked her father in the eyes, "When I first came here, I only did it because of Korra. I met with you because I needed information on that device, and that was the only reason I had for meeting you. At least, that's what I thought." She inhaled deeply, while Hiroshi listened on, "But I also came here because I was angry. I brought the stack of letters you sent so I could show you I hadn't read any of them. I wanted to tell you face-to-face that I never wanted to see or hear from you ever again. I wanted my words to hurt you, so you would know how hurt I was after all you had done."

Casting his eyes downward, Hiroshi felt a deep guilt and sorrow rise in his chest. "I'm sorry."

"But as I've thought about it, I realised that the anger was only a cover, and underneath, what I really feel is sadness. You were the only real family I had left after Mom died. And after I found out you had been working with the Equalists, it... felt like you had died to me too. What I really feel, is grief."

"Asami, I regret ever working with Amon."

"I understand your intentions dad; I've also felt anger at what happened to Mom. I've also wondered what I could do to make the world safer, and prevent something like that from ever happening, to anyone else," Asami shook her head. "But you took that to an extreme by joining a terrorist group and destroying the city. You tainted our past and destroyed our future together."

Hiroshi leaned forwards, "I want to make amends. Please, if there's anything I can do –"

"I'm not sure if I'll ever be able to forgive you... but that doesn't mean I shouldn't try." Asami reached down into her bag, pulling out a Pai Sho board. "I... thought maybe we could play Pai Sho. Like we used to."

The mere action of placing the board on the table welled up tears in Hiroshi's eyes. "Nothing would make me happier," he said, smiling fondly.

It wasn't much, and maybe it wouldn't solve anything, but Asami knew she had to try. And not just for Korra's sake or for finding out more about this device, but for her own grief and sadness that she'd been holding onto for so long.

After they'd both assembled their pieces, the pair started their game. Both Asami and Hiroshi were silent throughout, focusing on the pieces and the moves each of them made. Their game lasted for the remainder of the visiting hours, with the guardswoman calling out from the door that Asami would have to leave soon.

"Thank you," Asami broke the silence. She started putting the pieces away
.
She expected her father to return the thanks, but instead he took a hold of her hand, "Asami... I have never, ever, worked for the Red Lotus. And I haven't done anything for the Equalists since coming to prison."

Asami didn't know how to respond at first. Eventually she exhaled, "I believe you."

"Two minutes!" the guardswoman called out.

Maybe now was a good time to ask for more. Asami finished packing up and looked back to her father, "Can you tell me more about it?"

Hiroshi swallowed, glancing to his sides as if checking that no one else was listening, "It... it was in the early days, before the Equalists became so... extreme. If I'm not mistaken, the device you showed me looks like one I helped design long ago. It was meant to be a means to remove a person's bending." It was hard for Asami to listen on, though she nodded slowly as Hiroshi continued, "We thought about selling it to the RCPD so they could use it for dealing with extreme criminals. It was after Avatar Aang had retired, and he had once used energybending in severe circumstances to do the same. But with him gone we felt we needed that same power once again."

"Did it ever get finished?"

"No, it was only ever a prototype. We could never get it to work, and then soon after Amon showed up with the same power to remove a person's bending. We ditched the project to work on other things."

This wasn't sounding good at all. A device to remove a person's bending? "The group that has the device aren't Equalists, or at least they're working with benders so it's unlikely. Mako thinks they could be the Red Lotus. Did anyone else know about it? Who worked on it with you?"

"There were a few of us, some others in the engineering field, an intern from Future Industries. No one with connections to the Red Lotus, at least from what I know. I have no idea how they got a hold of the blueprints. Every original I had was destroyed, so the ones Mako found must be a copy."

"... a copy?" Asami pondered out loud.

"It was never functional," Hiroshi revealed.

"You never got it to work?"

Hiroshi shook his head, "Bending is just as much a spiritual art as it is a physical martial art. To remove someone's bending would require spiritual energy. We didn't know how to generate it, if such a thing even existed. We were engineers after all. Do spirits give off some kind of energy? Which spirits can produce it? We tried converting electrical energy into other forms of energy, but it never worked. Whoever has the device now would need to crack this in order for it to work."

While it hadn't exactly opened up any new leads, the news of what this device could do was vital. Asami still didn't know if it had anything to do with Korra, but only hoped that they could figure out what was going on in case it did. "I'd better report to Lord Zuko."

"Please, be careful Asami."

Asami looked up at her father's worried expression. She managed to return a smile, "Thank you for sharing this. And... for the Pai Sho."

"Time's up!"

Heeding the guardswoman's words, Asami picked up her bag and made her way towards the door. Before leaving though, she turned back, "I'll... see you again sometime. Maybe next week. For a rematch."

Hiroshi tried to reply, but his throat tightened as he choked up from his emotions. Instead, he simply smiled warmly with tear-laden eyes, giving a slight wave as he watched his daughter leave.

On the other side, Asami too smiled. Her visit certainly hadn't solved everything, but it felt like a weight that she'd been carrying in her heart this whole time had started to lift, ever so slightly.

Kuvira watched from a balcony overlooking the lab. She'd been told by Varrick that they'd made progress with the samples of spirit vines. They'd have to deal with the Foggy Swamp Tribe problem at some point, but at least they had something to show for their efforts. Below her, Varrick and Zhu Li had been tinkering around with their equipment, with Baatar observing to learn all he could about their work.

"And why are the spirit vines in these... canisters?" Baatar asked.

"These... are spirit batteries," Varrick answered as he finished rightening a screw. "We said we thought we could find a clean, renewable energy source, and it turns out spiritual energy really does exist!"

"Spiritual energy?"

"These vines retain a physical form even though they're from the spirit world, which not all spirits do. We discovered that their presence gives off an energy signature like nothing we'd seen before," Varrick elaborated, while Zhu Li continued lifting the heavy equipment by herself. "And since the spirit vines are abundant and grow by themselves, and are largely stationary – well, except that one time they attacked Zhu Li."

Zhu Li rolled her eyes while placing a spirit vine battery into their machine, "I believe you used me as a 'human shield' sir."

"-We thought they could make an ideal energy source from them!" Varrick concluded.

It was nice to have some good news after a long few weeks of failures. "From now on, developing this technology is your number one priority," Kuvira instructed.

Varrick crouched beside the spirit battery, looking though his elaborate safety goggles, "This is going to change everything."

Chapter Text

The Earth Empire. That had been Kuvira's plan. She had needed something bigger and better for people to join than the old regime. Reforming the old Earth Kingdom? How about instead, creating the greatest empire this world has ever seen? Technologically more advanced than any other, with better distribution of wealth and resources, and a greater sense of national identity than any other earth monarch could've achieved.

At least, that's how it sounded in Kuvira's head when she'd proposed the idea during the interview just over a week ago.

She'd spent the morning walking with Baatar through a revamped room in the palace; the large storage room had been transformed into a printing press. Fliers were being sent out with their new logo the metal Earth Kingdom coin, meant to represent not only prosperity but technological superiority and ingenuity. Banners were being sewn, and plenty of other paraphernalia to be sent out to the masses. Kuvira had also penned a few more letters to the stubborn leaders, particularly those in the south.

And yet for all her efforts and optimism, only two more states had joined in the past few days.

Two.

Kuvira creased her brows, a slight frustration settling in. She looked to the soldier next to her, "Is that really what she said?"

"Y-yes," the soldier stammered. "Lady Wuozhi was not interested at all."

The state in question was rather small, and along the southern border of the Si Wong desert. Kuvira would've thought the state of tiny mining and farming towns would be desperate enough to join, lured in by the promise of a fair and just empire, but Wuozhi's letter said otherwise.

Kuvira felt a warm hand along her back from Baatar. Although he was excited to be forming this new empire – it did give their movement a greater feeling of permanency after all – she knew where he stood on states that didn't want to join. To Koh's realm with them, he'd said the other day.

But there was something Kuvira knew that Baatar didn't seem to get. Hou-Ting. And Raiko. These two were only threats so long as they could get a foothold in the Earth Kingdom. So Kuvira couldn't leave even one state independent. She had to unite the entire nation, the first leader to ever do so.

"Send word to the First Commanders in Ba Sing Se," Kuvira said at last. The soldier next to her nodded as she continued, "We need a meeting."

"What do you have in mind?" Baatar adjusted his glasses while asking.

"It's about time we change our tactics."

An hour later, and Kuvira had three of the First Commanders with her in a closed office. First Commander Cheung of the Western Division was out in the field and had to be contacted via radio, while the other three had been in Ba Sing Se. First Commander Minsheng was training a new battalion in Ba Sing Se to help with the skirmishes in the south, while Hu of Central Division was here briefly and would be catching the next train back. But Kuvira was glad most of them were able to be here.

She stood with her arms behind her back, standing tall and authoritative. After a brief pause, she began, "I thank you for supporting this new venture, our great empire. I had hoped that giving birth to the greatest nation that ever lived would inspire the other states to join that have yet to do so, but it seems the old ways of the monarchy still run deep."

"Kuvira sir," Yasuko stepped forward. "I will do whatever it takes to see that our empire remains prosperous."

"I appreciate that, First Commander," Kuvira answered. Her expression turned graver, "However, I believe that we must change our approach. It is vital that not even one of the states remain independent, lest they become a target for the other world leaders, the Dai Li, or even the Red Lotus. And so," she eyed up each of the commanders present, "I believe we must employ an 'aggressive negotiations' style going forwards."

Hu and Minsheng shared a quick glance, wondering what Kuvira meant.

"If there are states in your divisions that are still reluctant to join, we must apply pressure. Remind them that our armies will not continue protecting them from the barbarians for free. Remind them that our aid, our resources, and our support must be reciprocated. For those that won't join, increase our military presence along their borders, reminding them of their isolation should they continue to ignore us. If they want to continue using ''our'' maglev train network across the nation, then restrict access."

While Yasuko nodded along intently, the other two first commanders seemed a little unsure. Kuvira continued, "Why should we supply these independent states with all our empire's richness if they refuse to contribute? There are plenty that have joined our empire and need our help."

"Kuvira sir," Minsheng began. "My forces are stretched pretty thin. Maintaining a strong presence along the southern state borders as well as dealing with the barbarian attacks will be nigh impossible, I regret to say."

Kuvira nodded thoughtfully. Her first commander had a point. But, she also had a plan, "Then we must also increase our productivity. Conscript more soldiers from our states. Increase our training facilities and military bases, particularly in the west, lest the other world leaders think they can trample all over us."

Static crackled before Cheung replied, "Yes, Kuvira sir. It will be done."

"And increase our harvesting of natural resources; ore, lumber, crop production, all of it must increase tenfold." She caught a few concerned glances, "The earth will heal and recover, but our empire won't, unless we get this right."

It was a tall order, but Kuvira could see she was getting through. "Let us create the greatest nation this world has ever seen. Let us show the other world leaders, all those who doubted us, that the Earth Empire is not to be trifled with."

"All hail the Great Uniter!" Yasuko led the chant. The other two joined in, and then First Commander Cheung also over the radio.

Kuvira smiled, and dismissed the first commanders. It was all coming together, and soon, she would show the Raikos and Hou-Tings of the world that she was capable.

"That was impressive," Baatar said. He wrapped a hand around hers.

Kuvira had been so enthralled by her vision that she'd forgotten her other half was still there. She smiled, "We really can do it, Baatar. But I'm going to need to go out for some time."

"Oh?"

"To some of the other states," Kuvira replied. "I'll be gone for a week or so." Seeing the other leaders yet to join in person seemed the best way to go. If she could apply a little bit of pressure in the right way, then their resistance would crumble like a landslide. And then, the whole of the Earth Kingdom would be united.

A lone jeep chugged along a dusty path, kicking up a slight cloud as it continued on. Wenyan had described this as the 'scenic route' to Ba Sing Se, though Tanho didn't care much for the sightseeing, nor Raiko's mission at all for that matter. In the back he stretched his legs out across both seats, leaning his head on his arm perched on the side door. "I don't know why we couldn't just take a train," he huffed to himself.

They weren't travelling very fast, and Tahno's words were still audible from the front. "Do you have to keep reminding us every hour or so how much you don't like this?" Lieutenant replied. Saikhan didn't even bother to respond, keeping his hands on the steering wheel.

"We could have blended in on the train! We would have been there a lot quicker too." Tahno was about to say more though gurgled as something flew inside his mouth. He coughed and spluttered, "Ugh! I... I think a bug flew into my mouth!" he exclaimed.

Lieutenant and Saikhan chuckled, much to Tahno's annoyance. "How did a former Equalist and former cop become such buddies anyway?"

"Must be our disdain for you," Saikhan smirked.

At this point Tahno had had just enough out of them. He folded his arms grumpily. "How do you even think we're going to complete this mission anyway? I mean, if the Dai Li have been hiding for the past three years, then how will we manage to find them?"

"It isn't an easy task, that's for sure," Lieutenant said. "Figured our best bet was to start in Ba Sing Se. That's where Kuvira claimed she saw them, plus it's where they used to be based. Not like we can say no though."

"Man this sucks," Tahno mumbled again. A week ago, he'd been planning for a court appeal with his lawyers to shorten his sentence. Now, he was stuck on a road trip with two other inmates on a wild goose pigeon chase because the president had asked them too.

Saikhan sighed, "It is nice to be out in the open air for a change though."

"Why did I have to get asked anyway?" Tahno complained further. "It's not like my bending is what it used to be."

"Didn't the Avatar give all you benders your powers back?" Lieutenant asked, somewhat spitefully.

"She gave mine back after Amon took it," Saikhan said, carefully eyeing Lieutenant after mentioning his former boss.

Tahno let out an annoyed tut, "Well yeah, she tried. But it couldn't be restored fully. At least that's what she told me."

Lieutenant chuckled, "She probably didn't give it back on purpose."

With his face aghast, Tahno leant forwards, "No she didn't! She told me she tried her best!" After the pair in the front started cackling again, Tahno realised they were teasing him again.

Saikhan sighed, "Relax, pretty boy. We're just messing with you. Still don't know how someone like you ended up in prison." He stared out into the distance, contemplating his next words, "I guess in the end we're in the same boat. Slip a grey prison outfit on a man and they're all the same, bender or nonbender. All just pawns to be used by others."

"We were all pawns before going to prison too," Lieutenant chimed in. He knew better than most what it was like to be strung along by a lie, believing in a leader who was meant to be on his side. Saikhan grunted in agreement, while Tahno was still struggling to hear what was being said, though he'd heard the gist of it. They really were just pawns, but at least they knew what they were in for.

After a few more seconds, Lieutenant spoke up, "Well that got depressing rather quick."

"Yeah, I think I liked teasing Tahno more," Saikhan added.

The waterbender in the back grumbled again, turning his gaze to the distance and trying to ignore them. He wasn't sure what this mission was all about, or what they would find when looking for the Dai Li. But one thing was for certain; it was going to be a long, tiring journey, with these two inmates as companions.

The people of Yanhu spared no expense in welcoming the Earth Empire. The small town bordered the river mouth near the northern sea. They were also a lively bunch; Kuvira watched as a line of dancers under a sea serpent costume tapped in time with a fast drumbeat, with their pretend serpent snaking around the city arch and near the cheering crowd. Petals were thrown through the air as lines of dancers accompanied the serpent, and their dazzling costumes caught the rays of afternoon sun.

As the procession stopped near the viewing stands, all the performers bowed. A short, older man walked forward with two others behind him, dressed in finer clothing than all the other citizens. "Today, we pledge our loyalty to the Great Uniter, and the Earth Empire. We, the people of Yanhu, are incredibly grateful for all you have done, Kuvira." The crowds went silent, offering a bow with their three leaders.

Kuvira gave a soft smile as she rose from her chair, "Thank you, people of Yanhu, for that performance, and your allegiance to the Earth Empire. Your contribution will help guide our entire nation into a prosperous era of peace and innovation. And of course, you will now have the full support of our forces. I look forward to working with you." A flurry of cheers and applause followed.

The trio of older men walked over to Kuvira as the crowds dispersed. The one in front, with the largest hat, bowed again. "We have refreshments set up in one of our halls, as we finalise the details of our agreement."

"Let's discuss then," Kuvira replied.

Kuvira followed the men over several ornate bridges, crossing over ponds of beautiful and scenic wildlife. The sounds of chirping insects filled the air, adding to the tranquil atmosphere.

Although beautiful, Kuvira wasn't here for Yanhu's flowers or nature. The state was smaller than others, but consisted of kilometres of wetlands, fertile soils for growing rice in paddy fields. If the Earth Empire were going to expand their forces and influence, then they'd have to be kept fed.

Eventually they made it to a wooden house with paper walls and decorative roof tiles. Once seated, tea and refreshments were served. Kuvira didn't care much for them, however. Instead, she watched the expressions of the three leaders reading through the agreement in their hands.

Each had a copy, and every so often, would chat amongst themselves. Occasionally, another man with an even taller headpiece would step in. Probably a financial advisor of some kind. While the reception on her entry had been lively and warm, the mood in the room was quickly shifting as the leaders observed just what their agreement would entail. But Kuvira was prepared for that.

At last, one of the men looked up at Kuvira. Their whispers on the other end of the table had been inaudible, but Kuvira could see from his face he had misgivings, as did the other two. Eventually, the man sighed deeply. "I regret to say that this agreement is... not exactly what we thought it would be."

Kuvira pretended to be even a little surprised, furrowing her brows slightly. "Oh? What parts exactly?"

The leaders exchanged a troubled glance with each other. "Well... what you require from us is... rather steep."

"Steep?" Kuvira questioned. She leant forwards, "Steep is the cost that my armies are paying to keep the barbarians at bay. Steep is the resources required to get our nation back on their feet. Surely you can see that any sacrifices now will be paid thrice over in the future?"

The leaders shared another worried glance. One of the others in a purple tunic spoke up, "Great Uniter, we are tremendously grateful for all the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces have done in driving out the barbarian clans."

Kuvira let out a hot exhale. If she had a copper for every time someone would start with that sentence and end with a 'but', then Kuvira would have more wealth than the former Earth Queen.

"But our state is looking much better than before," the man continued.

Another leader continued, "The Air Nation have passed through, bringing supplies to us in the last few months, and helping our small farming villages and paddy fields boom in activity."

The main leader leant forwards, "So although we can sympathise with the other states that are struggling, it is not something we can do much about without putting our own citizens in jeopardy."

Kuvira nodded slowly, pretending to care about their concerns.

"We were inspired by the idea of joining an Earth Empire, but if this is the cost then we cannot, I'm afraid to say."

The trio of older men all watched and waited, nodding and quietly mumbling in agreement. They expected Kuvira to answer with some gracious acceptance. But she wouldn't. Instead, Kuvira's polite demeaner melted into a steely scowl. "So tell me," she began, "how does your rice and water lilies make it to the other states?"

Somewhat confused, their man leader answered, "By train of course."

"Right," Kuvira replied. "And who is it that owns the maglev train system?"

It had become clearer where Kuvira was going. The leaders looked shocked, aghast even, and then one of them replied in his gruff voice, "Every state contributed to the maglev system! It... was made as a means to help the Allied Forces travel around!"

"You can't lay claim to it!"

"Oh but I do," Kuvira replied sternly. "The system has upkeep costs, shouldered almost entirely by the Earth Empire."

A fist slammed into table. The main leader stood to his feet soon after, "How dare you?! We contributed to the maglev train system in our state with the promise we could use it!"

"And you can; as citizens of the Earth Empire. Otherwise," Kuvira almost smirked, "I'll require a tax on any goods shipped using our system. To make up for the running costs."

"A tax?!"

"It's only fair," Kuvira dismissed. "And in order to bolster our security, the Earth Empire will need to have an increased presence along our border. Which will include patrols along any main roads heading in or out your territory."

A chorus of groans emanated from the other end of the table. Kuvira's plan to wear them down was working.

"However," Kuvira said. "It needn't be that way. Simply become part of our glorious empire. Be a part of something new, and innovative. And then, you will have access to transport, access to technology, access to wealth and opportunities." She shook her head, "But, if you think you can do without then so be it. Don't let me stop you from exporting your goods via... riverboat, I suppose."

"There's no need for that jab, Great Uniter," the leader said.

Perhaps she had taken it too far. But Kuvira could do whatever she wanted. She was the one with all the Pai Sho tiles here. Even still, Kuvira decided a certain level of amicability might go a long way. "I only mean to stress that your situation will be rather dire. You won't want to see that come to pass, and nor do I."

One of the other leaders had taken to reading further on the conditions presented. His gruff voice scoffed loudly, "And you want us to increase rice and grain production by fifty per cent? While sending more of our people into your army? How do you expect us to manage? We are no Omashu or Gaoling, or Zaofu."

"I think you'll manage," Kuvira said flatly. "After all, you are the river people. Isn't there a Yanhu proverb about accepting where the waters take you and finding away, much like the current of a stream?"

"A very liberal interpretation of our culture, I might add."

Kuvira nodded slowly. She'd pushed the boundaries far enough, though it had worked. She waited a good minute to give her words time to digest. "So, what will your decision be?"

The main leader in purple glanced to the other two. He hung his head, and sighed deeply. "We accept. We pledge our loyalty to you, Great Uniter."

Kuvira's lips curled into a smile. "Excellent. I'll have some of my soldiers stationed here to enact the terms of our agreement."

"We're to start all of this now?!"

"But of course," Kuvira answered. "Our problems are not going to simply wait. I'll be expecting great things, Yanhu."

Kuvira bowed, though received a far less appreciative goodbye. But in the end, it didn't matter. Though small, Yanhu was a food basket of the north, and would be vital in their endeavours.

As Kuvira walked back to the maglev train, she paused. Those three had particularly started to cave when she'd mentioned troops along the border, and the tax for using their maglev train. She'd have to take advantage of that.

"Soldier," she called over one of her subordinates. "Send a message to First Commander Minsheng."

"Of course sir. What shall I say?"

Kuvira smiled, and her brows creased. "Tell him to station heavy patrols around Omashu's border. And enforce a tax for any goods they ship along the coastal maglev line."

As the soldier bowed and headed to their radio, Kuvira smiled. If that old fool Renshu wanted to ignore her, then she'd just have to get his attention.

Chapter Text

After three weeks of driving from Republic city, the trio had finally arrived in Ba Sing Se. The drive at night had been rather concerning with reports of roving barbarians still around, though they'd made it in one piece. Saikhan cut the engine to the jeep after pulling up outside a lodge in the agrarian zone.

A groggy Tahno staggered out of the vehicle. He'd been sleeping for several hours in the back, though it hadn't been a very deep sleep with everything going on. "Finally... we get some proper sleep," he said, eyeing up the lodge.

"We should only stay a few hours," Saikhan replied.

"What? Why can't we rest for longer? It's been a long drive already!" Tahno complained.

"You didn't even do any driving," Saikhan tutted. "And we should keep moving. We'll take a train into the city and start investigating."

Tahno folded his arms while grumbling. He was still mad at the president and this whole situation. The least he could get was some decent sleep.

"So, how are we going to get around without any cash?" Lieutenant spoke up.

Saikhan reached into his pocket and pulled out a few yuans, "Our employer was kind enough to leave us some money. Not enough to run off with of course, but we should be fine for food and accommodation."

"Running off wouldn't be that bad an idea," Tahno thought out loud.

"If you want to be hunted down then by all means," Saihkan replied. "I'm guessing neither of you really know who dragged us out of prison?" The other two said nothing, so he continued, "Wenyan's name came up all the time at the RCPD. He's a broker in the criminal underworld. Many criminals had ties to him but no one could ever find the man himself. Damn, Raiko must be desperate to get into bed with him. Either way, Wenyan will most likely have the resources and manpower to track us down should we bail."

It was a worrying bit of information, but at least it cleared up any questions over escaping this ordeal. Lieutenant stepped forward to the front entrance, "So this is the place Wenyan told us to go?"

"Yeah, sure is."

"Well, let's get this show on the road," Lieutenant replied to Saikhan. He made his way in, followed by the other two.

After a few hours of rest, the trio caught a tram into the Upper Ring. They'd found at the lodge their room had already been booked and paid for – courtesy of Wenyan no doubt – and on the bed they'd found a black bag with supplies. Passports for the trams, some more money, and their equipment. For Lieutenant, a pair of electrified batons and other items. For Saikhan, metal arm bands and hip cables. And Tahno had filled the two water satchels he'd been given. With clothing and sheaths to conceal all their weapons, of course. They couldn't go round drawing attention to themselves.

Thankfully their passes had checked out, and as another few hours went by the group found themselves in the Upper Ring. They stepped out under the midday sun, greeted by the sight of people hurrying about.

"Well, looks like Ba Sing Se isn't doing so bad," Tahno thought out loud. There was construction going on wherever he looked, but he noticed a few stalls had opened up, and a lot of the rubble and ruin had been cleared. Nothing like the Lower Ring, nor the Middle Ring which was flattened on the Western side they'd come from.

Saikhan turned to the other two, "I think we should split up and gather intel. It will be easier to gather information if we move around by ourselves."

"I don't have to take orders from an earthbender," Lieutenant narrowed his eyes. "But I agree. Let's meet back here at sundown."

The former police chief wasn't too happy with Lieutenant's tone, but he said nothing. "Just make sure to stay inconspicuous. If we get busted I'm sure Raiko will wipe his hands clean of us."

The two of them started walking off until Tahno stopped them, "Wait! Where... where should we be looking?"

Saikhan answered first, "I was going to see what I could find out from the soldiers. I did my time in the United Forces so hopefully I can get them to open up."

Running his fingers through his long moustache tails, Lieutenant answered next, "I'll see what I can find out on the street. The homeless are the real ears of the city. If there's anything to find, I'm sure someone there will know."

"Just pick somewhere and go. We can't babysit you everywhere, Tahno," Saikhan replied. He turned and left, as did Lieutenant.

After watching the other two leave, Tahno eventually walked away as well. He muttered to himself while kicking a stone along the path, wondering how in spirit's name he was going to pull this off.

Bolin and his team sat in a meeting room. They'd been called in to one of Central Division's bases, along with First Commander Hu and several others. The scene outside was bright and cheerful, with the central lakes expanding towards the horizon.

Bolin was in good spirits as things seemed to be working out. The missions he'd gone on recently had been a success, and he'd started getting used to his team leader role much more. And in two weeks' time he'd be finally seeing his long-distance girlfriend Opal as they'd be in the same city by then. A smile beamed as he thought about her.

"I have to say, I am so glad the 'Stars of Central' are with us," First Commander Hu said cheerfully, returning from the break room. "I honestly can't thank you enough for all your work!"

"Just doing our jobs," Baraz offered with a smile. He felt like he'd said that to the First Commander multiple times at this point.

"Central Division would really feel incomplete without you guys," Hu confessed. "But hey! After your success they might even have you tag along to the Foggy Swamp on one of those 'science' expeditions to harvest spirit vines. I hear it hasn't been going well lately."

Baraz and Ahnah exchanged glances, "Harvesting spirit vines?"

Hu's face went pale as he realised he'd said too much, "Oh, well... um... that's classified of course you didn't hear it from me! Heh... heh..."

There was an awkward pause before Gombo broke the silence, "So, do you know what this mission is all about?"

"No, actually I haven't been told."

"Can't imagine why," Gombo mumbled under his breath. As much as they enjoyed First Commander Hu's hospitality, they all struggled to see how he became a first commander with his habit of blurting out important information.

"One of the Second Commanders from the Southern Division is leading this one. First Commander Minsheng is busy in Ba Sing Se training another squadron for the barbarian clans down south. Been causing trouble for them I hear," Hu explained.

Several officers entered the room, followed by the Second Commander leading the mission. The others saw the familiar moustache and permanent scowl of none other than Guan, their former teammate.

"Guan!" Akito cheerfully greeted.

The man's scowl grew even more intense, "It's Second Commander Guan." He walked over and examined his former teammates, "You three have exceeded my expectations. I thought you'd be kicked out in a week."

"Thanks, I guess," Baraz replied.

Saying nothing further to the firebender, Guan strode over to the map board, "I can't say I'm exactly thrilled to be working with you, however, this is an easy mission so it should go smoothly." The others got up from their seats to look at the map, "There's a barbarian clan to the northeast of our position, on the other side of Chameleon Bay. Our intel suggests they've been making frequent trips to Ba Sing Se, to the northern regions where they've been attacking our patrol groups and impeding our efforts to rebuild that part of the city. Kuvira wants us to arrest them."

"We have several squadrons with us, and enough vehicles to chase down any who escape," First Commander Hu said.

"Sweet, that sounds like we got a good team with us," Bolin added.

Guan rolled his eyes. He'd certainly had enough of Bolin for one lifetime. He cleared his throat, "If there's a chase then they'll likely head north. To the south is the Si-Wong Desert, and unless they have means to cross the river and the desert then it's unlikely they'll head that way. The Northern Division have set up a base south of Ba Sing Se, near where we suspect these barbarians have set up camp. Our scouting parties have been investigating the territories and villages in the area, though we haven't found them yet."

"So we set up a border to the north, come from the south, and snag everyone we see. Sounds easy enough," Baraz commented.

"Yes, more or less," Guan didn't look too happy about being interrupted, though he let it slide. "We'll move out in an hour. We still have some scouting to do to pinpoint their location, which could take a couple days, depending on how lucky we are. Any questions?" After no one raised their hand, Guan nodded and left with his officers.

The three of them had spent the entire afternoon trying to gather information. Saihkan had gone to a local bar to listen in on the soldiers off duty. It hadn't yielded anything useful. Lieutenant had gone into the Lower Ring refugee camps, asking around for anything. Apart from the occasional story of people going missing, there was nothing concrete about whether the Dai Li had returned. It had only been day one so far, but it was beginning to seem like Raiko's assumption that Kuvira had made the whole story up was actually true.

"Man, I'm beat," Tahno slumped into a couch, flicking his head to the side to shift his blue fringe out of his eyes.

Lieutenant looked across with a perplexed face, "Where did you go again?"

"I went on a tour of the Ba Sing Se Crystal Catacombs. They even had rock candy," he pulled out a bag of the sugary treats.

"Then why are you so tired? You barely did anything!"

Tahno looked ready to lunge at Lieutenant, though Saikhan stopped them both, "That's enough." He continued to stare at a map of the city, "So, what did you find out Lieutenant?"

The man leant forwards from his couch, "I went to the Lower Ring among the slums and refugee camps. No one really wanted to talk, even after I flashed some yuans. But I did hear of some cases of people going missing. Can't be too sure who it was though."

"I bought the men a round of drinks at their local," Saikhan said. "Got them talking, though none of them were high-ranking officers. They mentioned barbarian sightings in the north and northeastern quadrants of the city. Seems to be a lot of activity going on there."

"It seems strange that after losing their leader the barbarians would still be fighting, doesn't it?" Lieutenant asked. After Amon had been outed as a fraud, most of the Equalist movement fell apart. There were still factions remaining after the incident, though the group had lost their momentum for quite some time. Lieutenant knew all too well what it was like to lose a leader of a movement, and the apathy that followed.

Saikhan nodded, "Ah, maybe they're a devoted bunch? Either way, the north of the city is where all the action seems to be happening."

Tahno looked confused, "Then shouldn't we be staying away from there?"

"We should try not to get caught obviously, but if we want to confirm whether the Dai Li are around then we have to go where the conflict is. Maybe we could even talk to the barbarians and find out if they know anything? I mean, they were here for nearly three years before the Earth Empire took it back," Saihkan explained.

It was risky, and there was no guarantee that they'd even find anything. But right now, it was their only lead. It's not like they could walk up to Kuivra and just ask her what happened, and infiltrating the Earth Empire seemed impossible with just the three of them. "How do we get in?" Lieutenant asked.

Saikhan shook his head, "That's where I draw a blank. The soldiers said they had a pretty tight perimeter around the Upper Ring, especially on the eastern side. Patrols in the Middle Ring. We can sneak around under the cover of night. But getting there is tricky without being military."

Tahno paused as an idea popped into his head, "Wait, I remember something from the Crystal Catacomb tour." He walked over to the map, pointing to an area on the eastern side, "There were these caverns roped off to us – construction, or unstable tunnels, something like that – and they led deep into the eastern Middle Ring."

"We can't be sure where they lead. And what do you mean by unstable?" Lieutenant was sceptical.

"Well, hello, we have an earthbender here," Tahno pointed obnoxiously to Saikhan. "The tunnels will get us to the Middle Ring, then we just make our own exit."

Saikhan pondered the plan, "It seems sketchy, but I guess we don't have many other options. I doubt we'll be able to sneak past the Earth Empire on the ground."

"We can leave in a few hours after sundown," Lieutenant suggested.

"Yeah, that will help," Saikhan agreed. "And who knows? Maybe we'll find the Dai Li down there ourselves? They did used to navigate the city using underground tunnels."

Something dropped in Tahno's stomach as he heard Saikhan's words, "Um... maybe the tunnels aren't such a good idea after all?" The other two chuckled lightly, ignoring the waterbender altogether.

After some dinner and rest, the trio caught the last train back into the Upper Ring from their lodge. Sneaking inside the catacombs tour had actually been pretty easy, with most security being kept for the patrols in the Middle and Lower rings. After walking through the tunnels for a couple hours, eventually the group made it back to the surface. They hadn't encountered any Dai Li, nor anyone else for that matter, and the tunnel ended with a natural opening above a small stream. It was hard to know exactly where they were, but judging from the stars and their trajectory, they were in the Lower Ring.

Lieutenant was the first to emerge into the moonlight. He turned behind them, seeing the top of the once grand wall, "We're in the Lower Ring alright." The wall was cracked and shattered in places, a remnant of a previous regime.

The other two followed the nonbender out, though the sound of footsteps made them freeze. It was a patrol coming from above. Lieutenant noticed a bridge and waved the others over, and the trio took cover and tried to keep quiet while wading through the stream. The heavy clunks of mecha suits echoed through the gully, and the dull rumbling of a tank engine. Thankfully the patrol was noisier than the sloshing of water under the bridge as the three of them moved.

Although they hadn't been spotted yet they weren't in the clear; the patrol stopped on the other side of the bank. Perhaps they had been seen? Lieutenant reached for his baton but Saikhan stopped him. He pointed upwards, just as they saw another group of soldiers approach from the south.

"There's been a sighting a few blocks east from here," one solider reported.

"Roger. A team witnessed their vehicle being attacked nearby as well. We'd better move in to back them up."

Lieutenant and Saihkan exchanged a quick glance. If they wanted to talk with the barbarians, they'd have to get there before the Earth Empire. Otherwise, they would be snatched up before they would reach them. They needed a way to lead the soldiers above them away and buy them time to find the barbarians themselves.

It seemed Lieutenant was on the same page. Quietly, he pulled out a grenade from his jacket, locking eyes with the other two. He then pointed to a building over at the next bridge. It was a good distance away, not something he could throw himself. Saihkan nodded, readying himself with a sturdy stance. He'd fling the explosive there with his earthbending.

After pulling the pin, Saikhan flung the grenade with a cable, tossing it high into the sky and close to their target. After a few more seconds, the explosive went off, lighting up the sky with a fiery orange glow as the building splintered apart.

Their distraction had worked, and the soldiers readied themselves for an attack. "Negative on the reinforcements, we've got activity at our location. We're moving in!"

Saihkan mouthed a 'go' as the three of them dashed up the side of the stream bank and into the wreckage across the street.

Once in the clear, the group slowed down their pace and walked along the street. The path was covered in mounds of rubble, with patches of overgrown vegetation covering much of it. Blackened walls and rooves of former buildings were visible, like injured soldiers standing tall after years of war. For the most part, the eastern Lower Ring was more like an overgrown ruin rather than a city.

They could still hear the occasional sounds of a patrol in the distance, but where they were now was rather quiet. Eventually, Tahno broke the silence, "So... um... why are we over here?" he said in a hushed voice. "I thought the sighting was further north?"

"It was," Saihkan replied. "But if the barbarians are fleeing, we'll see them away from the patrol. Plus, can't get caught by the Earth Empire now can we?"

"Look," Lieutenant directed their attention to a hill up ahead. "We'll have a better view from up there."

Saihkan nodded, "Let's go then."

The group trekked up the hill, climbing over broken houses and tree roots before arriving at the remains of a burnt-out dwelling. There were some roof tiles left, but most of it was exposed to the outdoor air. Nonetheless, it did provide them with a good view of the city. They could see several patrols with their lights from a distance, and the view of the wall was clearer. Still, even with the night vision binoculars, they couldn't see anything else.

Lieutenant continued gazing through the green-tinted lenses, trying to spot any kind of movement. He grunted to himself, "Whatever that sighting was, I can't see any movement. Must be laying low."

"That would make sense," Saihkan said. "But they'll need to start moving again soon if they want to make it away from the empire."

A few more seconds passed and eventually, Lieutenant saw something, "Over there! Near the next hill," he whispered quickly. The other two made their way over. "I see a pair running through the main street." He could only see glimpses through the thick vegetation and rubble, but definitely people.

"Can you tell who they were? Were they wearing robes and pointed hats like the Dai Li?" Tahno asked.

Lieutenant shook his head, "Couldn't see. I think they looked more like the barbarians though."

With their attention preoccupied, none of them noticed a group approaching from behind until it was too late. The sound of a crossbow locking into place made them spin around, "Hands up!" the man commanded, still keeping his voice quiet. The three of them definitely looked like barbarians.

"We mean no harm," Saihkan tried to reason with them. "We aren't with the Earth Empire."

"We figured that much," one of the others said. "Who are you then?"

Although he was shaking and terrified, Tahno managed to string together a sentence, "Private investigators," he said too quickly. "We're... investigating. For a client. It's... confidential."

Saihkan and Lieutenant both glanced at Tahno, as if to tell him to shut up. "Our client wants to know if the Dai Li are really back," Saihkan revealed. He figured it be better to be honest and see if these barbarians actually wanted to help.

The man with the crossbow looked angry and concerned at what Saihkan said, pointing his weapon closer, "Don't mention their name! You don't know when they're watching."

"Sorry."

"We saw two men across the hill. Are they your guys?" Lieutenant asked.

The barbarians glanced between each other before one of them spoke, "They were. If they're that far away then we can't retrieve them."

"Retrieve them?" Saihkan asked.

One of the barbarians picked up the receiver on his portable radio, "Boss-man, we have three guys here who say they're investigating the group. They don't look like empire goons. What should we do?" The static from the radio was too fuzzy for the others to hear. The man looked up again, "Boss says he'd like to meet with you. Seems like we may have a common enemy."

Relief filled Tahno's chest as he relaxed a little. It was still nerve-wracking and uncertain, but at least he wasn't going to be skewered with a crossbow bolt. For now.

The three of them followed the barbarians round a corner, noticing their truck parked next to the ruined building. "We'd better get going," the barbarian with the radio said.

"If they're your guys out there then we can help get them back," Saihkan offered.

The barbarian shook his head, "We're only a scouting party. We wouldn't stand a chance if they showed up. We've lost too many friends already."

It seemed more likely that the Dai Li were in fact around, or at least something out there that had these guys on edge. Saihkan nodded, "Well, we're grateful that you've let us tag along. We don't exactly want to get caught by the Earth Empire either."

"Tag along?" the barbarian questioned. He shook his head, "I should have mentioned that Boss-man said he'd be happy to see you, but only as his prisoners."

Before they could react, Saihkan felt a jolt of electricity surge through his body. In his dazed state he turned back, seeing Tahno and Lieutenant also fall to the ground. He tried to reach for his cables, but eventually his vision went black.

Chapter Text

It was sunrise by the time the group reached their camp. Tahno could barely see out of the truck, with his arms bound and only one window to look out, but he caught a glimpse of the first morning rays over a rocky mound. They'd travelled some distance after being kidnapped in Ba Sing Se, though how far exactly was anyone's guess.

The truck halted to a stop, and the back doors swung open. The men forced Raiko's trio to their feet, shoving them out into the open air. Although still fearful and on edge with all that was happening, Lieutenant and Saihkan tried to take in as much of their surroundings as they could. Their feet landed on rocky earth, and in the dim light they could just see hills of sand to their left. The camp around them had a wall of earth surrounding it, with huts and tents made from animal hide and rock.

"Boss-man's over here," one of the barbarians instructed them. He led the three in a line and forced them to kneel next to a lantern. Their gags were removed, though their arms remained bound.

They could see a shadowy outline of the barbarians' leader, and as he approached his form became clearer. His spiked armour and metal plating made him look like a true barbarian commander, with his gaze adding to his menacing presence.

"So, you're the boss-man?" Saihkan asked.

The man paused, eyeing him up before replying, "Donghai. The others call me boss-man."

Saihkan nodded, not wanting to say another word after hearing the tone of Donghai's voice.

The leader eyed up Lieutenant and Tahno as well, with the latter hiding his nerves far worse. Donghai seemed to pick up on the fear, taking a moment to crouch down and look the waterbender in the eye directly. Eventually, he stood back up. "I didn't see any of you at the battle of Ba Sing Se. Lot a people there though." He glanced over to the others, "Any of 'em look familiar to you lot?" his subordinates shook their heads. "Maybe you really ain't spies from the empire. Still, can't be too sure."

"We're not with the Earth Empire," Lieutenant said, putting on a cold and calm voice.

"So you say," Donghai replied.

Lieutenant continued, "We were sent to investigate the Dai –"

"Emerald Shadows," Dongahi interrupted. "We call them that here. In case they're listening. And my men already told me your story. Who sent you?"

"Client confidentiality," Tahno blurted out. His nerves got the better of him and he slumped his head to face the ground.

Surprisingly, Donghai simply nodded, "I can understand that."

"We're just looking for any information you can tell us. Then we can report back to our employer," Saikhan explained.

"Or, you could be seeing how much we know," Donghai replied, keeping his gaze on the former chief of police. The barbarian grunted, "I think you three are clean. That one there is snivelling too much to be one of 'em," he gestured to Tahno, "but still, can't be too careful. Keep 'em in the prison tent. Give them food and water till I know what to do with 'em."

His men nodded. The three of Raiko's men were pushed to their feet and led away to one of the tents. It had started out as an investigation forced on them by the president, but now, it seemed they were right in the middle of a war.

In a secluded valley in the south stood Zaofu, a shining metal city. The lotus domes had opened for the day, allowing the morning rays to bathe the city in warm light.

Suyin had made her way to the city centre early in the morning for the markets. While still a good distance from the ocean, the fish mongers would catch river fish from the local lakes which tasted just as good. Suyin did have a chef, though she didn't mind helping out by bringing ingredients back.

While the Matriarch of Zaofu examined the fresh looking samples in front of her, two of the Zaofu guard approached from the steps of City Spire. "Suyin, Ma'am."

"Yes?"

"There's a visitor here to see you."

"This early?" Suyin thought out loud. But she nodded soon after, "Set up a meeting room in City Spire."

It didn't take long for Suyin to make her way to her visitor. When she entered she saw an older man, slightly hunched over, with a long, thick beard reaching his waist. But the giveaway was his headgear; a crown of sorts, with two wispy feathers dangling off. It was the King of Omashu.

"Suyin," the quiet old man greeted with a bow. "I apologise for the early hour. My airship has been flying through the night."

"King Renshu," Suyin returned the greeting. Though her brows furrowed, "Airship? I would've thought you'd take the maglev here? Much faster."

Even though his facial features were small and outshone by the massive beard, Suyin saw the old man's face contort. "That's exactly why I'm here. May I sit?"

"Of course," Suyin replied.

After taking a seat on the couches, Renshu inhaled sharply, "It's Kuvira. The so-called 'Great Uniter' is strongarming the Earth Kingdom states to join her silly little empire. And despite being the largest state besides Ba Sing Se, we at Omashu are feeling the brunt of her childish antics."

Childish antics? Things had been getting worse, so Suyin had heard. Reports of sates being forced into the Earth Empire. Stripping the earth of natural resources and disrupting livelihoods. Suyin shook her head, "I've heard about the Earth Empire, but what else exactly is Kuvira doing?"

"What isn't she doing?" Renshu scoffed. "She's claimed the maglev network as her own! We all paid for it with labour and funds, but just because she has her shiny silver emblem on it now we have to pay taxes to ship goods along the lines! Omashu has neighbouring farming towns in our state, but we're mainly a mountainous region. We need that trade to the other states, the United Republic, and spirits, even the Fire Nation buy our goods. Our economy will crumble without it." Renshu continued his complaining, "She's also put her military all along our main roads into our state, making travel difficult. And the smaller states that have been forced to join are being stripped of their natural resources, and forced to send even more conscripts into the military."

This certainly was troubling. Suyin had seen the broadcast on a new Varri-vision where Kuvira announced she was creating a new empire, but it had all seemed voluntary. And while it technically still was, if what the King of Omashu was saying was true, then Kuvira was using pretty blatant blackmail to swallow the rest of the states up.

Suyin sat down as well, trying to gather her thoughts. "It's... it's like the old regime."

"Worse," Renshu replied. "Because Kuvira's actually doing what the former Earth Queen could not."

That was true. The earth monarchs had never been able to unite the entire continent. Yet, Kuvira was on her way there.

Renshu shook his head, "But Kuvira is young, arrogant, and ambitious. She doesn't have the life experience that actual leaders do. She will ruin this nation by pressuring and forcing everyone to do what she wants. And I fear that our window of opportunity is slowly closing."

"And what does President Raiko have to say?"

"He said he is trying," Renshu replied, letting out a long sigh. "But I think someone else should speak to Kuvira. Someone who has a connection with her."

It took Suyin a bit to realise what Renshu was saying. Suyin scoffed and shook her head, "King Renshu, Kuvira she... we're not exactly in a great place right now."

"Suyin," Renshu said, leaning closer, "I know we've never been friends. You have been quite public about your issues with monarchies, including Omashu. But I still like to believe we respect each other as leaders. So please, please go talk to Kuvira. She's out of control. She needs someone to snap some sense into her and tell her to stop all this madness."

Suyin looked unsure. Even if she did speak to Kuvira, would she even listen? And it's not like she completely disagreed with Kuvira's point of view. If there really was a Dai Li threat then having Kuvira around was a positive. But Suyin would be lying to herself if she said that Kuvira's latest actions hadn't worried her. Her aggressive language and tactics to get what she wanted, it all reminded her of a younger Kuvira who would push too far to get everyone to do what she wanted. Had Kuvira really not changed since then?

"The very fate of the nation could depend on it," Renshu added.

Eventually, Suyin exhaled sharply. "I'll organise a peace talk in Zaofu. I'll give Kuvira one more chance to turn this around. I have to believe that she can be reasoned with."

Renshu looked slightly unhappy with Suyin's wording, though he nodded slowly. Suyin didn't care much what the old man thought; Kuvira wasn't some evil dictator on par with Hou-Ting, nor a threat to the world like Zaheer. She was... practically her daughter. She was her daughter in law. There had to be some part of Kuvira left that could see reason. At least, Suyin kept telling herself that as she said goodbye to King Renshu and sat alone in the meeting room.

She couldn't give up on Kuvira. She would go to Ba Sing Se, then give her a chance to sort it out.

It was mid-afternoon, and the three of Raiko's men were still locked up. Tahno could see their weapons and gear on the other side of the tent, but with several barbarians inside, including Donghai himself, it would be impossible to try anything. Plus, their hands were still bound. And with the others nearby and listening they'd been too afraid to speak and plan their next move.

They had to try something though. Tahno looked over at the other two. He was terrified out of his mind, but eventually, he worked up the courage to stand and speak to the barbarian leader, "I know that you guys are scared. I understand. But... we can help." Lieutenant and Saikhan looked surprised that Tahno would act so boldly, and worried about what he would say.

"You understand?" Donghai replied. He was eating a fruit while in a chair, looking away from them. "Maybe because you are really with them?"

Tahno shook his head vigorously, "No, not like that. Our... our client. He's pretty important. He... has the power to do something about it. If you tell us what you know and we report back to him –"

"Tahno!" Saikhan grumbled. The waterbender had given too many clues.

"I appreciate your companion's honesty, actually," Donghai glared at Saikhan. He spun around in his chair to face the three of them. "If I were a betting man, I'd say you three are definitely not one of 'em. But that's exactly what I thought about every other spy in our ranks," he said, glaring intently at each of them.

Tahno, Lieutenant, and Saikhan all looked back with widened eyes. What did he mean by 'spies'? "They infiltrated your camp?" Saikhan asked.

Donghai stared out the tent entrance, his eyes gazing on nothing in particular as he watched his memories unfold, "We picked up some of our men. After the battle in Ba Sing Se, our clan were scattered. We stayed a while in the north, but eventually made it here south of the city. Some of our guys reported seeing others sink into the earth, captured and dragged into the shadows. I didn't believe them at first, but I knew if it were true it would be 'em. The Emerald Shadows," Donghai recalled. "We thought we were safe. Had a good number of us left. But then... it started with small things. Some of the guys were eager to get back and fight the Earth Empire. We weren't so sure, I mean, what could a small band of us do against the world's forces? But they insisted... to the point that they took off with our gear and weapons. And then some of them would return, like nothing had happened, saying that we needed to continue fighting the Earth Empire."

"Sounds like they were dedicated, at the very least," Tahno replied.

Donghai shook his head, "That's why it was strange. And when we confronted them, some of them... they lashed out. Their pupils as big as a saucer, emotionless faces. And in that moment I knew that what the Great Uniter said was true," he looked up. "The Emerald Shadows were back. And they were using us as their pawns in some big game."

There was silence as the other three contemplated what they'd heard. It would be strange for the barbarians to keep attacking when their chances of success were basically none, but if what Donghai said was true than they weren't doing it by their own volition. It was the Dai Li.

"Hate to be blunt, but did any of you actually see them? The 'Emerald Shadows'?" Lieutenant said. "We need proof for our client. Might not accept the word of a barbarian, no offense."

Donghai laughed, "You're not from around here are you? Even before all of this we had a saying about the Emerald Shadows. By the time you see one, it's too late. No, we ain't seen any of 'em, but it's their handywork for sure."

"Do you have any idea why they would do it? Force you all to keep fighting the Earth Empire?" Tahno asked.

"My guess is there ain't a lot of them. That's why they need pawns to do their bidding," Donghai clenched his fist. "It's always those on the bottom that get used in these schemes. With Qiang we finally had something different, and then that shiny metal bitch Kuvira had to take it from us. Like all of them. Filthy elites."

There were many more questions they needed answers to, but at least this was a start. Although still stuck inside a prison, it made it feel like them getting captured was worthwhile at least. "I have another question –"

"Boss-man!"

Donghai spun around to see a frantic barbarian burst through the tent flaps. "What is it?!"

"It's them! They've found us!"

"Who? The Emerald –"

"No, the Earth Empire."

The barbarian leader cursed, smashing a crack through the floor. "Get to your posts! Fight every last one of 'em!"

Tahno called out as Donghai started marching into battle, "Wait! Please let us go!" the waterbender begged. "We can help stop them. The Emerald Shadows."

The man paused a moment, eventually reaching for his keys. Before he could grab them, a metallic scraping sound rang through the tent. Donghai's eyes went wide, and he clutched his chest where a shard of metal now protruded out. The others stared with terrified faces as the barbarian leader toppled over.

"Get down!" Saikhan yelled, dropping to floor of their cell.

The others joined him, and several metal shards whizzed through the tent. After the onslaught finished, Lieutenant pointed outside their cell, "The keys! They're out of reach!"

Tahno was still coming to terms with seeing the barbarian leader get shot in the chest, though he knew they had to kick into gear. If they were caught by the Earth Empire, there was no way they'd get out of this. If he could find some water, Tahno knew he could reach the key. His bending had never returned to what it was before Amon, but a simple water tendril wouldn't be too difficult. But if the Earth Empire were already firing on them, then they didn't have much time.

On a nearby hill, Second Commander Guan surveyed the scene through a pair of binoculars.

"Are you crazy?!" Baraz yelled, waving his arm in anger. "We could have killed someone!"

Guan side-eyed the firebender, "And what's it you? Are you saying you still care about what happens to them? Where do your loyalties lie?"

"We don't go round killing people unless we have to. What happened to 'rehabilitate to become productive members of our nation'?" Baraz insisted. "They're your rules. It has nothing to do with me and my loyalties."

"And do you think these low-lives would give you the same courtesy? We've lost too many good soldiers in the south. Maybe you lot at Central Division need to take a trip and experience it for yourselves."

Ahnah looked over towards their commander, "First Commander Hu, you outrank Guan right?"

The large man fumbled his hands around nervously, "Well... yes... I do but..."

"Second Commander Guan, sir," Bolin looked over. "Please give us a chance. We can arrest them without anyone needing to die."

Guan wasn't having a bar of it. He simply glared at Bolin before turning his attention back to the canons.

Before he could command another firing, Hu stepped forward, "Second Commander Guan, I think we should move in before firing as well."

"With all due respect, First Commander Hu," Guan replied, "this is a mission I have planned. And I do not think it appropriate to question our plan in the middle of carrying it out."

"With all due respect, Second Commander Guan, you did not inform us of your plan nor give me adequate time to scrutinize it," Hu replied. His confidence surprised not only Bolin and his team but also himself. Guan appeared to take great umbrage at Hu's emphasis of his rank, but the First Commander ignored it, "We already know what a skilled commander you are, but perhaps Bolin and his team are right?"

Guan was clearly frustrated with what was happening, though he knew he didn't exactly have a choice. "Artillery squad; hold your fire," Guan conceded. The metalbenders in their tanks stood down and lowered the next round of metal shards.

"Alright!" Bolin cheered. He shrunk as he noticed Guan glaring angrily at him, and changed his composure, "I mean... let's move in and apprehend them, team!"

Bolin led the charge with Akito in his mech suit, and the other three following them in. Soldiers on the other sides moved in as well, creating makeshift covers to block enemy fire.

Inside the prison tent, Tahno finally bust the cage open after retrieving the keys. He'd managed to source water from a spilt bucket. "Let's get out of here quick!" he said to the other two.

"We need to find a vehicle. One that can travel well over the sand and back to Ba Sing Se," Lieutenant replied.

Saihkan peered out the tent to get their bearings. The Earth Empire still hadn't breached the camp yet, though they were getting close. "There's some sand sailers on the other side. But we better be quick if we want to make it." After picking up their weapons and equipment, Lieutenant led the three of them out the tent, stepping over the fallen barbarian commander on their way out.

At the camp entrance, Akito managed to smash a hole through the stone wall, sending debris everywhere. The barbarians tried to retaliate, though Ahnah followed up with some well-timed water whips, and Akito shot forth cables to apprehend them. Moving ahead, Bolin and Gombo charged into the camp and started taking out barbarians. They moved like a well-oiled machine, with Bolin searing through canons and weapons with a lava glaive and Gombo backing him up with swift bisento strikes.

As the battle progressed, Bolin and his team became more separated, though with the other Earth Empire soldiers they clearly had the upper hand. "Over there!" a soldier pointed to a group up ahead behind a barrier, and Bolin lobbed a burning hot shuriken with an over arm throw to cut through the stone and leave them exposed.

After running past another tent, Bolin crashed into a man dashing through the sand. Both of them quickly got on their feet, though as he refocused, Bolin felt like he'd seen him before, "Wait... Tahno? Is that you" he asked, noticing the dark blue hair.

The man in question laughed awkwardly, "Ha... well... n-no you must be mistaken!" he blurted the last part out too fast, quickly sprinting the other way.

"Hey, wait!" Bolin called out. It had caught him off guard and now Tahno was metres ahead of him. He watched as he joined two others on a sand sailer, who also looked somewhat familiar, as they tried forcing through a line of soldiers.

A barbarian tried to sneak up on the lavabender, though a spiral kick of flame knocked the man down. "Don't space out like that man," Baraz chided.

"Sorry, I just...," Bolin replied. He quickly shifted into gear though, pushing aside the strange encounter for now. There were still more barbarians to apprehend.

Gombo had taken off on his own, though there were several squadrons all around. He made his way into a tent looking for stragglers. The inside housed a prison cell, and he noticed the door was open and the keys inside the outer lock. Obviously someone had escaped. He took a few steps forwards though stopped as he noticed the blood.

Beneath him, a large man lay motionless, a metal shard protruding from his chest. Although he was contorted and lifeless, Gombo had seen him before. He was Donghai; a barbarian leader of the eastern clans, and had joined alongside the other clans in taking Ba Sing Se. They hadn't been exceptionally close, even being in rival clans for years before Qiang, but somehow seeing the former leader slumped in a bloody heap on the ground stirred something in Gombo. It wasn't just anger at Guan for ordering the shot, but more of a sombre realisation that the old ways were dead and gone. The question was, whether where they were heading now really was something better.

A noise to his right pulled Gombo back to reality. His bisento jerked up in an instant, ready to slice whoever was there. A slim young man cautiously stepped into view, his arms raised and eyes wide with fear.

"Please, I surrender."

The former barbarian lowered his weapon. He grunted, "Would've thought Donghai trained his men better than that, to simply surrender at the first sign of trouble. I thought I'd take a moment to pay respects after finding him," he motioned his head to the body on the ground.

"You're Gombo, aren't you?" the man asked. Even without the facepaint, there was some resemblance. "You knew him?"

"Not well," Gombo admitted. "Still... it ain't right. Going out like this."

The other man nodded, still keeping his arms up. "I don't want to fight anymore. I... I had heard you had been taken in by the Great Uniter. But seeing you here I think I can trust you with this," he said, his words intriguing Gombo. "The Emerald Shadows. They've been infiltrating our ranks. Using us to keep fighting. Your boss, Kuvira. She must have a plan to stop them, right? She's the one who announced to the world that she'd seen them."

Gombo shook his head, "I ain't far up enough to know anything about that." He sighed, "I ain't gonna arrest you either."

"I don't mind... honestly, it's safer there than anywhere else. But please," his eyes grew desperate, "many of my friends were taken by them. Please stop them."

Before Gombo could respond, another group of soldiers burst in. The metalbender at the front flung a pair of shackles around the barbarian's arms, pushing him on the ground. "Another one down!" he called back. Several others picked him up and started dragging him out. Even though he'd offered to surrender, he instinctively thrashed about against his captors. None of them gave Gombo a second glance, taking the barbarian and moving on to apprehending others, all while Gombo continued to gaze at his former comrade on the ground.

It had taken less than ten minutes, but now the entire camp had been cleared. First Commander Hu and Second Commander Guan watched from their position as the lines of apprehended barbarians formed outside their camp wall. Several bodies had been retrieved and lay under blankets on the other side, while the injured were tended to in the medical tent.

"Second Commander sir!" a soldier approached the pair. "We've apprehended everyone in the camp. There were a pair of vehicles that managed to leave, however. We've sent units in to pursue them, and also contacted the Northern Division." Guan nodded, dismissing the soldier.

"Well, at least most of them were stopped?" Hu responded. "And we had fewer casualties than expected.

Guan was not impressed. He didn't even make eye contact with the first commander as he replied, "I will be writing up a full report on today's events and passing it along to Kuvira, along with my recommendations." After a short grunt he marched off, reconvening with the other troops.

Bolin and his team made their way over to First Commander Hu, who smiled upon seeing them, "I'm glad you five are ok. Guan isn't happy with me though."

"He's never happy with anyone," Ahnah replied, making sure her words were out of earshot.

"Still, well done. You five performed exceptionally. And we should have enough units to track down the last of them," Hu informed.

The mission had been largely successful, though Bolin and Gombo couldn't help but dwell on their strange encounters during the fight.

The wilderness seemed to have no end in sight as the trio sped along. Saihkan wasn't the best at sandbending, but being the only earthbender they had no other choice. Meanwhile, all Tahno and Lieutenant could do was hold on and keep watch. Another barbarian vehicle was keeping pace with them, also fleeing the Earth Empire. Despite being their prisoners not long before the attack, they decided to travel along with Raiko's men for now.

Far in the distance behind them, Tahno could just make out the Earth Empire speeding after them. The terrain was rocky and more ideal for their satomobiles, though the three of them had created some distance between them and the Earth Empire. While Lieutenant continued to watch the enemy behind them, Tahno turned his attention ahead. The waterbender squinted as he noticed something, "Wait... what's that ahead?"

"Ugh... a blockade," Saihkan sighed. They should have known the Earth Empire would have had troops stationed to box them in. He'd been so focused on escaping the barbarian camp that it hadn't even crossed his mind.

"With only two soldiers?" Lieutenant questioned.

Saihkan glanced back, "Who could it be then?"

Before his questions were answered, a massive wall was erected from the ground. Saihkan managed to swerve their sailer right before it collided, but the other barbarian sand sailer wasn't so lucky. After smacking into it headfirst, and the occupants screamed as they were flipped over onto the other side.

Lieutenant, Tahno, and Saihkan hid behind the wall while the barbarians on the other side readied for a fight. They'd have to escape on foot, and waiting for the right time to make a dash for it seemed like the best idea.

That was, until they heard something on the other side.

"The Earth Queen has invited you to Lake Laogai."

Shivers ran down their spines as they froze in place. Had they really heard it right? There was an eerie silence from the barbarians on the other side of the wall, only confirming their fears. They'd found the Dai Li.

Or more accurately, the Dai Li had found them.

"I am honoured to accept her request," the barbarians said in unison.

The three of Raiko's men had no idea what to do. They had to find an opening somehow.

The walls collapsed back into the earth, and the three of them tumbled forwards at the feet of the men in dark robes. "We're not barbarians!" Tahno cried out, quickly jumping to his feet with the other two. "Please, we don't know anything."

There was no emotion in the agents' faces, only a dark shadow cast from their wide-brimmed hats. "The Earth Queen has invited you to Lake Laogai." The agents glanced between themselves when nothing happened, and then readied themselves to take them by force.

"I know what you've been doing to the barbarians," Saihkan said. It was a desperate attempt to catch them off guard. "We also told our employer all about it."

The agents paused in their advancing, only for a split second. But it was enough. Lieutenant lunged forward with his electrified baton. He was fast but the agent's reflexes were even swifter. The agent caught the baton in his hand, his rock glove rendering the electricity ineffective. Lieutenant gritted his teeth and pushed, though no amount of force was going to break through the Dai Li agent's glove.

Tahno pretended to launch a boulder at the other agent, forming a sturdy horse stance and outstretched his fist. As the Dai Li agent prepared to intercept, Tahno slid to the ground and formed an ice dagger, swiping at the agent but only slashing his gown.

Saihkan knew they wouldn't get another chance to surprise the Dai Li. It was now or never. With his metal cables he flicked himself back onto the sand sailer, and then propelled the vehicle forwards with a massive earth wave. The other two managed to jump on in time before the Dai Li could join them. Saihkan manifested a sand twister and swung his arms around as fast as he could.

Though it wasn't over yet; the Dai Li agents were already on their tail. They skated along the ground as if it were ice, moving gracefully and effortlessly like seal sharks chasing their prey, while their sand sailer was scraping against the rock threatening to burst apart. Tahno and Lieutenant tried their best to fend off their attacks. Occasionally the waterbender threw icicles their way, though he was low on water, while Lieutenant swatted the rock projectiles.

Saihkan's gut sank when he noticed something ahead, "Spirits!" he cursed. "Now there's the blockade." The other two turned briefly and also saw the distant shimmer of silver and dark emerald of the Earth Empire.

"Take us closer!" Lieutenant ordered, blocking another hunk of earth thrown at him.

"What?!"

"It's either the Dai Li or the Earth Empire! Which one would you prefer to capture us?" Saihkan was still hesitant, so Lieutenant faced him again, "We can't outrun these guys. If we try go around the Earth Empire they'll follow. I don't like it either, but we don't have a choice!"

Saihkan cursed again, propelling their sand sailer even faster. As predicted, the Dai Li agents started peeling pack once they too noticed the Earth Empire blockade. Whatever their role was in this war, it was obvious they didn't want to get caught by the Earth Empire.

The line of soldiers up ahead aimed their canons and tanks towards the lone sand sailer as it approached. A voice was projected over megaphone, ordering them to slow down or they'll be fired upon. Saihkan had half the mind to go out in a blaze and run them straight over, but he eventually conceded and grinded their vehicle to a halt. As the dust settled, the trio watched as soldiers marched towards them, once again making them prisoners.

Chapter Text

Tucked away behind the mountainous forests west of Ba Sing Se, stood the capital of Yi. It was a rather quiet mining town, not particularly famous to most, but known for its rich ore deposits and beautiful scenery. While it had a maglev train station at the town entrance, Yi was a rather secluded and isolated state, with the nearest larger town several hours away.

It was the perfect target for barbarian raids.

A woman crouched behind her shop counter, shutting her eyes and trembling. It was like this every time. A convoy for satomobiles and trucks would speed down one of the main streets, stopping along the way to take whatever they wanted. They still had earthbenders in Yi even though some had left to join the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, but they'd learned long ago not to fight back against the barbarians. Not after many of them were beaten, abducted, or even killed. It was cruel and unjust, but all the citizens of Yi could do was wait and pray to the earth spirits that it wouldn't be their turn to be robbed.

A jeep engine cut out, and the doors opened and slammed. The woman knew it was her turn.

The trio entered the battered shop. "Give us what we want and you don't have to get hurt," one of the barbarians threatened. She eyed up the woman while the other two started rummaging around.

"Please, we don't have anything left!"

The female barbarian wasn't buying it. She punched forwards and the floor snapped up through the wooden counter, sending splinters and fragments everywhere. Once the dust settled, the other two barbarians strode over and snatched the last few bags of supplies. "Now you have nothing left!"

The trio had just finished loading their hoard onto the jeep when they heard a loud, rumbling growl above them. A shadow approached in the sky, one with a round, horned head, fluffy body with six legs, and broad tail. A flying bison no doubt, which meant the Air Nation was here.

Opal and Kai gave each other a quick glance before taking off from their bison, nose-diving through the air as they picked up speed. With a quick flap of their arms their wing suits opened, allowing them to glide towards the barbarians as the jeep reversed and turned to leave. Despite the vehicle picking up speed, they couldn't outrun the airbenders. Kai pulled ahead and kicked a jet of air into the front of the jeep, throwing the occupants out as the vehicle toppled over. The three barbarians screamed as they fell through the air, until Opal caught them in an air current as she drifted to the ground.

"Nice work," Kai said to Opal, the pair of them clipping their glider wings back onto their suits.

Opal smiled, though noticed something in the distance, "Kai! Look out!" She leapt forwards and stretched her open palm out, blocking a hunk of earth thrown their way. It had come from a truck up ahead. "There's more of them."

The barbarians cried out and jeered as their vehicle sped forwards. Though before they could reach their fallen comrades, a loud roar came from the sky. Kai's bison Lefty dropped onto the ground, slamming his massive tail towards the barbarians. The powerful blast flipped the vehicle into its back, and several people flew out.

Opal sailed in to apprehend them. She spun an air funnel into one man, though the others had already propped their truck up and started taking off down the road. At least they'd nabbed one more.

After tying up the four of them, Kai called out to the village, "The barbarians are gone now. It's safe to come out."

The villagers were hesitant at first, some peeking out the windows and doors just to check that they were indeed safe. Though eventually they started migrating from their homes and hideouts towards the city gate. After months of barbarian raids, this was a strange feeling. They'd actually survived the encounter unscathed.

"You finally made it!" a white-haired man ran over from a nearby house. Given the hat he was wearing with its insignia, he must've been the state's governor, Opal noticed. His gratitude turned to confusion however when he noticed only the pair of airbenders. "So where... are the rest of you?"

"Actually, it's just us," Kai replied. "But we're going to do everything we can to help. I'm Kai, and this is Opal."

"What?! I called Master Tenzin because our state has been under siege by barbarians for months! They've blocked all the roads, cut off our supply lines. Our economy is on the brink of collapse, and all he sends is you two kids?"

Opal wasn't happy with the governor's tone, "Hey, us two kids just took out these four barbarians." A loud grumble from behind interrupted Opal. "And Kai's bison, Lefty."

"There's four here but hundreds more where they came from! Our citizens are going hungry, our entire state is falling apart!"

"Unfortunately, the Air Nation is spread pretty thin right now. We're all you have," Kai added solemnly.

The governor sighed, rubbing his head, "Ah well. I guess the least we can do is offer you food and lodging for stopping them. I don't know what else I can do."

"Let's get these four locked up first," Kai suggested.

Opal and Kai had spent the rest of the morning gathering what they could to help the villagers. After staying the night, the pair continued working. The hilly fields to the west had provided bundles of hay for the farm animals, though the airbenders made sure to give Lefty a big portion of course.

"I guess it's not the welcome I was expecting," Opal remarked, reflecting on how the governor had acted yesterday. "I know the villagers are struggling, but it's not like we can bring our entire nation with us."

Kai finished bundling up a bale of hay, "Still, it's nice to be able to help." He smiled. Before meeting Korra and her friends he had been a runaway thief, moving from foster home to foster home and never finding somewhere to belong. Though after Harmonic Convergence he became an airbender, and now had the chance to give back to those who needed it.

Opal sighed, "Yeah, I know. I just wished we could do more."

The sound of a train horn came from the distant flatlands. "A train made it through!" Kai looked up.

"Maybe they brought food and supplies!"

After finishing with the hay, the airbenders made it back to the city entrance, noticing a crowd gathered around the train stop. This had been the first maglev train to make it in months, and many of them stared in disbelief as the silver metal doors opened. Their disbelief turned to concern when several military officers marched out, dressed in dark emerald with silver shoulder plates. It was the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, or now known as the Earth Empire.

The next officer to step out caught Kai and Opal's attention; it was Bolin. "Hey, your boyfriend is here too."

While excited and happy to see her long-distance partner, her expression changed as she saw he wasn't alone; her brother, and Kuvira, were also here.

Kuvira stood with her arms poised behind her, giving the crowd a quick glance.

One of the villagers hesitantly approached an officer, "How did you get past the blockages? The rails have been cut either side of our state."

"It took us some time, but we managed to repair the tracks leading here," Kuvira answered. "Is the governor around? I would like to speak with him if possible."

The villager nodded, "I'll go look for him."

Bolin glanced around the crowd, though grinned as he saw a familiar face, "Kai!" He hugged the young airbender while lifting him off the ground, "Wow! You're a lot heavier than you used to be. You're really growing up." Kai still had those mischievous deep green eyes and messy brown undercut that he remembered when he had first met him, but he looked a lot older to Bolin who hadn't seen him in a while.

"What's with the new hair-do? You look like a stiff," Kai teased.

"Hey, Kuvira tells me it makes me look intelligent, and professional," Bolin straightened the strands of hair at the front, as if to prove Kai wrong.

"Don't believe everything she says."

Bolin felt a familiar sensation of fingers running through his hair. He spun around, his heart racing and filled with joy, "Opal! I can't believe you're really here!" He pulled her in his embrace, the pair savouring each other's touch. "I've missed you."

"I've missed you too," Opal replied. "I didn't think I'd be seeing you for a while. I thought you were stationed in one of the central states?"

"Yeah," Bolin replied. "We had this massive raid of a barbarian camp a few days ago, but Kuvira needed help up here so my team and I joined." His smile went even wider, "I'm so glad you're here."

Their moment was cut short by a voice from behind. It was Baatar, "Look who it is. It's good to see you again little sister," he smiled.

Kuvira also made her way over, "What a wonderful surprise. A happy reunion for my favourite couple."

"Mom told me about you and the others last time I saw her. It must have been a few months ago before our mission to Ba Sing Se," Baatar mentioned.

Opal narrowed her eyes, "Mom may be ready to make amends with you, but I still haven't forgiven you. Neither have Wing or Wei, or Huan."

"You know, aren't airbenders supposed to be 'enlightened' and not hold grudges?"

"I guess when your brother betrays you –"

"Opal, please," Kuvira intervened, "We aren't here to bicker or argue. We're here to help this state get back on their feet."

It was hard for Opal to be convinced by Kuvira's words, "I've heard some pretty disturbing rumours. And what about this 'Empire' you've created?"

Although her eyes shifted ever so slightly, Kuvira maintained her composure, "It's merely strong language to convey a strong response. I'm sure you know better than anyone how bad the barbarian raids have been, and the bandits too. But if our enemies can see us as a united and fortified nation, it will help us put an end to their chaos and maintain order."

"What is the Earth Empire doing here?"

Kuvira turned around and noticed the governor had arrived, standing just in front of the city arch. Her face softened as she addressed him, "Governor, it is a pleasure to meet you. My name is Kuvira."

"I know who you are," the governor nodded slowly, keeping his suspicious gaze on Kuvira. "And I've heard about your decision to keep the Earth Kingdom throne and form a new empire."

"We fixed the train tracks on one end," Kuvira motioned to the side.

"I'll have to hold off on my thanks until I know why you've come to my state."

His hostility had started to chip away at Kuvira's composure, "I was wondering if we could talk in private. I understand you have been having a problem with the barbarian clans nearby."

The governor turned to the side, noticing the two airbenders watching. Only two. He closed his eyes and took a deep breath. "Fine," he eventually conceded, following the Great Uniter towards her train.

As the pair made their way inside, Baatar and Kuvira exchanged a nod and smile. Baatar watched longingly as the doors shut behind them.

His expression hadn't gone unnoticed by Opal, "You and Kuvira?"

Baatar was still smiling fondly when he turned back to his sister, "You haven't heard? Kuvira and I are engaged."

"Isn't that great news, sweetie?" Bolin tried smoothing it over, watching Opal's face for a reaction.

Her eyes widened at the news, though she quickly shifted her gaze to the ground, "I'm happy for you both."

While he could feel Opal's discomfort, Baatar also felt his own uneasiness about seeing his family again. For the past three years he'd had very little contact with any of them, pushing Zaofu and his old life away to pursue his new one with Kuvira and their mission. "Opal, we all want the same thing. We just have different ways of going about it. Kuvira and I want the Earth Empire to be prosperous and free from the chaos these towns have experienced for so long. You might disagree with how we're doing it, but we both want what's best. Surely you can see that?"

Opal was still at first, but slowly nodded. Her green eyes locked onto Baatar's, "We'll just have to wait and see." With all the unrest around this new 'empire', Opal couldn't believe her brother just yet.

The interior of the train was deathly quiet. The smallest creak in the walls or slight shuffle of feet against the floor would reverberate through the air. Kuvira tried not to stare at the governor, lest he feel uncomfortable, though she occasionally glanced as he agonized over every letter of the agreement in front of him. Eventually, the silence became too much. The governor had nearly finished the agreement anyway so Kuvira decided to clear the air, "So, what do you think of our offer?"

The governor sat upright, a look of slight disgust forming on his face, "I wouldn't call this much of an 'offer'; it looks more like you want to take from us than offer anything."

"Governor, your state has been under siege for months. They have you outnumbered and outmatched. If you think that we're taking too much, then think about how much they will take from you when they come for your state."

"But why do you need this much of our ore and exports? We also need to trade. What good are your troops when they can't provide food or financial support?" he said, his voice filled with concern and frustration.

Kuvira narrowed her eyes, growing more impatient, "Our forces can help with immediate needs like food and shelter. A more long-term strategy will be doable once our economy is back on its feet."

"You mean when Ba Sing Se is back on its feet?"

"Governor, regardless of what you think, you have a problem that you can't fix. You've tried to keep your people safe, and that is admirable, but you cannot stop the barbarians from coming back. However, we can help. We just need something in return." She slid the agreement closer to the governor, motioning to a quill and ink pot next to him, "Agree to these terms, and you'll have the full support of our forces. You will remain in charge, under the Earth Empire commanders and myself. In return, I will save the lives of you and your citizens. I believe our terms are rather generous."

There was a pause as the governor glared at Kuvira. He shoved the ink pot and papers off the desk, and the dark liquid soaked the agreement and ran off the table. "You say that I can't protect my people anymore, but I think rejecting the promises of a viper rat is just that," he said defiantly as Kuvira's face twisted into a cold anger at his words. "You promise to feed our hungry and fix our shelters today, but what about a month from now? A year? Will you still honour this agreement? Or will you have taken everything from us to build yourself an empire? I know why you want me to say yes; it's because our state is rich with ore. You need it to build your machines and help your troops. You have no concern for our wellbeing, just your own and your empire's! They may call you the Great Uniter, but all you care about it taking what you want! I'll never turn over the great state of Yi to you. Ever!"

Kuvira simply glared at the defiant old man. She was tired of having to fight to get these people to listen. She breathed in sharply, "You have a lot of pride, but it cannot save you people." Kuvira marched closer to the governor, forcing him to sit back down on his chair. "Your pride will not stop the hoards of barbarians who will come to destroy your state, and it will not feed your hungry when all that is left is rubble! Unless you sign our agreement, you and your people will perish."

"Leave! Get out of my state!"

Kuvira pulled back, watching the governor take to his feet and storm out. It seemed she'd hit another wall. There was still a page of the agreement untainted by the ink. Kuvira picked it up and made her way off the train.

Once outside, she was greeted with a look of concern from Baatar. They'd all seen the governor march back through the city arch angrily, realising that it hadn't gone well. She gave a quick look to Baatar and Bolin, "It's time to go."

"But what happened?" Bolin asked.

"It seems we're not wanted here. We can't make a deal right now."

"Wait," Kai called out just as Kuvira turned to leave, "aren't you guys going to stick around and help?"

Kuvira held out the last page of the agreement, "Here's the contract. We'll wait at the border till the end of the day. If you can convince the governor to sign it, then you'll get all the help you need." She said no more, walking back onto the train with her soldiers following.

It was hard to just leave, but Bolin knew he couldn't stick around any longer. He turned to Opal, "I guess... I gotta go."

"Please! Don't go!" Opal begged her boyfriend. "Don't turn your back on this village."

"I want to stay but if the governor doesn't want us here then... there's nothing I can do. I'm sorry," Bolin leant in to kiss his girlfriend goodbye but she pushed him back. Bolin looked dismayed at Opal's action, "Hey?"

Opal folder her arms, not even looking at Bolin as she responded, "Leave! If that's what you want to then do it."

Bolin wanted to hold her, try to get through to her and get her to see how hard this was. But he couldn't. He simply sighed, pulling himself onto the train.

"Y'know, we may not need their help after all. There's another way," Kai suggested to Opal. Although she was still upset about Bolin leaving, she perked up at Kai's words. "The roads may be impassable, but we still have the skies."

"That's right!" Opal chimed in, "We can fly supplies in with Lefty. It won't be as fast as the train, but it will still count for something."

"We can visit some of the surrounding farms and larger towns to ask for help."

Opal smiled, though her expression grew heavy as she watched the train take off. It had been nice to finally see her boyfriend after doing long distance, but their brief encounter had been overshadowed. Though hope wasn't lost; if Bolin and Kuvira weren't going to help this village, then they would have to do it themselves.

The swirling clouds of the mid-afternoon sky were a grey blanket across the horizon. Kai and Opal had put on their outer robes to deal with the chilly wind. Their last stop had been at a rice paddy and hippo cow farm, providing them with a good amount of food, building supplies, and animal feed for the citizens at Yi. The pair sat on Lefty's nape with the supplies strapped to the bison's back, who occasionally let out a low murmur as he sailed along.

Despite their successes, Opal gazed out with a melancholy look. "What's all the gloom for?" Kai asked, noticing her aimless stare into the distance. "I know it's not as much as we'd hoped, but it's still something right?"

"Oh, it's not that," Opal snapped back into reality, giving a half smile. It soon faded though, "It's just about Bolin."

"And what happened at the train station?"

Opal nodded. She sighed, "Like, I get that he can't just walk away and he has to follow orders. But he must be able to see that Kuvira's going too far, right?"

"The Earth Kingdom Allied Forces – I mean, the Earth Empire – have done a lot of good though," Kai responded. Opal furrowed her brows slightly while glancing at him, and Kai shifted uncomfortably, "Sorry, just playing Vaatu's advocate."

"It's alright, I get what you're saying," Opal conceded. She stared into the distance again, though instead of her mind going blank, she replayed memories in her mind as she spoke, "For a time I grew up with Kuvira. Mom took her in when she was a young teenager, and before her new foster parents adopted her she lived with us for a few years. Yeah I know she's driven, a capable leader, and we couldn't have stopped the barbarian clans without her. But it's that drive that worries me. She never knows when to give up."

Kai nodded slowly while listening, "Did she do something?"

"It was a hike in the mountains. We were supposed to be back before sunset, but since we all tagged along we were slower than Kuvira and Baatar wanted. Wing and Wei were so young and they were worn out. The weather had turned and I was freezing. And Huan was still scared of the dark and started freaking out. Baatar tried to act tough; even then he always wanted to impress Kuvira. But still, Kuvira kept pushing, determined to reach the summit even in the dark." Opal smirked, "Thankfully Mom came with a search party. Kuvira was only fifteen but she was scolded pretty badly. She told Mom that it was our fault for being too slow otherwise we would've made it."

"Compassion isn't really her strong suit is it?" Kai replied.

"She also crushed my metal doll's house because I didn't want to share it with her."

Kai's eyes widened, "Oh."

Opal laughed, "Yeah, I guess I was a bit selfish as a kid too." Her expression grew more concerned, "I know that Kuvira grew out of it. I mean, she joined the Zaofu Guard and helped Mom in the dance troupe. But I still see that side of Kuvira. That side that just won't let go of something until she has it. She'll push everyone too far and I'm worried Bolin will get caught up in it. She's causing some real fear and concern in the other world leaders from her actions, and Bolin can't seem to see what's happening."

Kai nodded slowly, taking in what Opal was saying. "Bolin seems to have changed too though. For a long time he seemed stuck on what he wanted to do with his life. I think working with Kuvira for over three years has been the longest time he's had the same job for. And he spends his time working with his team, providing support to villages and helping them out. Even if Kuvira is causing trouble, it's hard to argue that Bolin is making a difference out there."

"Yeah," Opal offered. "I know he's found his calling and has grown up. I just hope we aren't growing apart." Being separate for so long was tricky to really sort problems out when they happen. Neither Opal nor Bolin wanted to spend their time fighting when they did't have much time in the first place. Opal turned to face Kai, "How do you and Jinora do it? Long distance?"

Kai laughed, "It's kinda hard to do long distance when your girlfriend can project her spirit anywhere in the world."

"That's right," Opal chuckled.

"It's led to some... embarrassing situations."

"Really?"

Kai nodded, "This one time she forgot about the time differences, accidentally woke me in the middle of the night. Aaaand then this other time she caught me riding the hoping llamas when I was supposed to still be on duty." He laughed, "We've had to set some boundaries around it, but I guess we're quite lucky that we haven't had any major fights yet." Kai smiled warmly, reminiscing about his girlfriend and seeing her image in his mind. He noticed Opal smile, but her eyes saddened, "I don't know about Bolin and the Earth Empire. But I do know that whatever he's doing, he wouldn't want to be upsetting you like this. He really does love you."

"I know," Opal said. Even though she already knew what Kai said was true, hearing him say it aloud brought her peace. "Maybe I'll get some rest. We've still got about an hour to go."

"Of course," Kai said. "I'll wake you if I need anything."

The young airbender curled up against Lefty's fur, closing her eyes and draping her robes around herself. Opal's heart was still troubled and her mind uneasy, but at least speaking everything aloud had made a difference.

Lefty continued drifting forwards. While Opal managed to get some sleep, she eventually woke after hearing a whirring sound from behind them. "... What is that?"

"You can hear it too?" Kai responded. He turned around and could just make out a shape in the clouds behind them. "It's a biplane... I think?"

By now Opal had sat up awake and alert. She glanced back over Lefty's shoulder hump, "But why are they following us?" She noticed a man standing on the wing, holding what looked like a crossbow, "Get down!"

Kai and Opal ducked, hearing the firing sound from the plane. Though when they looked up again, it wasn't a crossbow shot, but a grapple stuck into their supplies. "We've been hooked!" Kai yelled out.

A man slid down the zipline and landed on the bison. After pulling out a handle, two sword blades flicked out and he began slashing the cables tying the supplies to Lefty. Kai noticed his cuts were precise, only snapping through the cables and none of the netting keeping the boxes bundles together. He was well trained, perhaps a mercenary working for the barbarian clans nearby. It wasn't going to be easy.

"I'll try tip him off, hold on!" Opal called back. She tugged on the reigns and steered Lefty to the side, and the attacker tumbled over before reaching onto the netting. With one arm holding on and the other free, he continued slashing the cables even while hanging there. Opal then tipped Lefty upright again and the man lost his grip, though managed to hold onto the bison as they steadied.

"He's still there!" Kai yelled.

"We could try flying up high? Or landing?"

"We can't," Kai replied. "The cables are cut, and if we try move around the rest could snap. I'll go in and unhook us!" He let out a gust to disorient the attacker, before taking off his outer robe and leaping forwards.

Opal watched with worried eyes, "Be careful!" She kept the reigns steady.

The man was swift with his strikes, stabbing through the air and narrowly missing Kai. He forced the airbender back, though Kai retaliated with a spiral gale that knocked him off the bison. The man cried out, grabbing onto his cable tying him to the plane as he fell.

"I think we got him!"

Opal looked to their left, noticing the biplane shifting, "They're coming from the other side!"

Kai jumped over the bundle of supplies, just as the attacker landed back onto the bison. His eyes burned at Kai, even more determined to steal what they had. He let out a fury of strikes, and Kai parried each one. He blocked the sword with an air swipe and tried to blast the man off again, though he ducked and slashed another couple cables. Eventually, Kai was forced back and only just missed a sword strike as he stumbled.

Grimacing to himself, Kai looked up but it was too late; the man had climbed onto the bundle of supplies and held onto the grapple cable. The biplane slowed down as the supplies were dragged off of Lefty. Kai narrowed his eyes. He charged forwards and tried to grab onto the supplies, but they were just out of reach. The airbender fell through the sky. He opened his wing suit but only spun out of control; his wing had been cut during the fight.

Opal could hear her friend screaming as he spiralled through the air. She flipped off the bison and pushed downwards like a diver, and once reaching Kai she took hold of his arm. With Opal's help, the pair stabilised.

Soon after, Lefty swooped underneath them, catching the tired and frustrated airbenders on his now-empty back.

Kai turned back and watched the plane slowly disappear from sight. "Spirits," he muttered.

"We could track them down?" Opal suggested. "We can still see where they're heading –"

"They're too fast. We'd never keep up," Kai conceded.

Opal's eyes shifted from the view of the biplane to the ground below. She had wanted to help Yi so badly, and not have to rely on Kuvira or the Earth Empire. But what else could they do? Their supplies were gone, and the only ones who could help now were the Earth Empire, as much as she hated to admit it.

When they eventually made it back to the city arch, Opal and Kai could see the confused and worried faces of the villagers even from a distance. It didn't feel right at all for Opal. She felt her stomach sick as the governor ran over to them, a frantic and anxious look in his eyes. "What's happened? Where did all the supplies go?"

"We were attacked in mid-air. A pair on a biplane. They snagged the cargo and we tried to stop them, but..." Opal trailed off.

Kai exchanged a glance with Opal, before turning back to the governor, "It might be time to make a tough call." He reached into his suit pocked and pulled out the signing page of the agreement, with a large silver emblem on it.

The governor creased his brows as soon as he saw it. There was no way he could give in. Though his expression softened as he turned back and saw his people. Each of them wore a mixture of fear and tiredness in their eyes. They were all exhausted. For months they'd been struggling like this, and lost so much.

He turned back, snatching the paper from Kai's hands and scribbling a signature on it. "Here," he finished signing and stuck the agreement out towards Kai, "tell Kuvira to save my people."

Kai took the agreement back, nodding slowly. "For what it's worth, I think you made the right choice," Kai said.

"Did I ever really have a choice?" The governor replied.

While she was glad that the village would be helped, Opal still felt like this was all wrong. She walked away from the pair, staring out into the hills behind them. In the end, there was nothing they could do. But if Bolin wasn't going to see all that was wrong with this, then she didn't know how much longer she could keep supporting him.

The pillar of earth ahead split cleanly in two. Another perfect strike.

Bolin relaxed from his stance, cooling the lava shuriken into solid earth. He'd managed to perfect his shuriken form, being able to create, launch, and cool lava discs in record time and with far more precision than he'd ever had. But everything else in his life seemed far from perfect.

He almost expected to see Suyin perched on a boulder, congratulating him and giving advice.

Suyin. Opal. Normally practicing bending would help him clear his head and put aside his emotions for some time, but now all he could think about was how they all felt about him. But couldn't they see that they were doing good? Bolin, exhaled, feeling a frustration building up. Sure, Kuvira seemed strict and rather intimidating, but they weren't with Bolin when they helped other villages get back on their feet. They weren't thinking about all the good they had done.

"Hey, Team Leader!"

Bolin's thoughts were interrupted as Akito ran from the train. "Akito? What's up?"

The mecha pilot grinned widely, "The governor has allowed us back into Yi! We're taking off soon!"

"Ha ha, that's great!" Bolin cheered. He noticed the setting sun. "It will be great to get them some help before sundown."

It didn't take long for the Earth Empire to reach the city arch. Outside the townspeople waited anxiously as the train doors opened, with several soldiers marching out and moving in groups towards the village perimeter. Bolin and his team stepped out with the next group of soldiers, many of them carrying containers of food and supplies. His heart moved when he watched their expressions turn from hungry and desolate, to faces beaming with hope.

A group of soldiers met with the governor and what was left of the local police force. While the governor was still hesitant about all of it, Bolin caught the beginnings of a faint smile as the group talked over protections and stationing personnel there.

Even his other team members had joined in. Akito had brought out his mecha suit for the kids to play in again, the young boy screaming excitedly from the cockpit. Ahnah tended to a woman's wounds, while Baraz was nearby handing out rations. Even Gombo was carting heavy equipment from the train.

The mood soon changed as a jeep pulled up outside the arch. Footsteps approached from behind, and the governor's smile soon melted into a bitter glare. Kuvira marched through the city arch, ignoring the governor's presence, "The state of Yi is now under the Earth Empire's jurisdiction," she called out to the villagers. There were quiet cheers and praises heard from the crowds. "Governor, it is time to make a public declaration of your allegiance. Swear loyalty to me, and we shall continue to help your state."

"Isn't a signature enough?" the governor shot back.

"The agreement is a legal document for our benefit. Publicly declaring loyalty to myself is for the benefit of the people."

The governor looked out at the other villagers. It had been so long since they'd felt this kind of hope, or had that look of genuine joy in their faces. His duty was to them, and if it meant swallowing his pride, he knew he had to. Eventually, the governor bowed, "I pledge allegiance to you, Great Uniter."

The crowd cheered once again, and a banner was released from the city arch with the silver Earth Empire coin emblem. The governor looked shocked and resentful; they must have already put the banner up before he'd even publicly declared his support. It was just as he had told those airbenders: he never really had a choice. But if his people were fed and looked after, perhaps that was the best he could do.

Bolin offered an apple to a boy sitting nearby, grinning warmly as the young one was fed. His eyes met Opal's green ones in the crowd, and he smiled. Though Opal didn't return the expression. All of this felt wrong. Yes, helping and giving out supplies was incredibly important and exactly what the villagers needed, but the public declaration? To Opal, it felt more like putting a polar bear dog on a leash and forcing it to bow. She turned away, not looking back at Bolin, and walked back down the street.

Even with all the joy and gratitude around him, Bolin couldn't shake the way Opal looked at him. His mind blocked out all the chatter and movement around him, and all he could do was watch his girlfriend walk away, wondering if he could ever win her back.

Chapter Text

Yi and Yanhu were now part of the Earth Empire. Kuvira had been away for three weeks now on the road, and although she'd been optimistic about her mission, she'd never thought she would unite the entire north and west. Her new tactics were certainly working.

After Yi, Kuvira's train had started making its way back to Ba Sing Se. As she walked through one of their outposts and towards the train, Kuvira couldn't help but form a small smile. What would that old buffoon Renshu think of her now? She'd had Minsheng reinforce the borders around Omashu and cut off maglev access. Would he still be questioning her ability? And what about Hou-Ting for that matter? Or Raiko? Kuvira was proving to all of those old, backwards, and stubborn leaders that she was superior to them. And it lit a fire inside Kuvira.

Inside the train, Baatar had been working in the portable lab, with Varrick and Zhu Li tinkering around with a device in the other corner. It had been a long time since Baatar had been in the lab; most of his time the past few months had been spent organising resources or soldiers. But something about working with machines felt calming and familiar.

The door opened with a metallic thud. Kuvira strode in, proud and confident in her pose.

"Great news everyone; we have finalised agreements with Yi and Yanhu."

"That's great," Baatar replied. He gave a smile, but his expression seemed troubled and preoccupied.

Kuvira continued, "You should've seen the procession the last village put on." They'd been travelling out of Yi and back into the neighbouring state. "The people there welcomed us with a performance, even dressing in costume."

Varrick gave a light chuckle from his workstation, "That reminds me of the time I dressed up my yacht as a giant whale squid. Zhu Li got to stand at the front with the fireworks while we sailed around the Water Tribe harbour. Too bad that other boat crashed into us."

"I believe you have a different account of what happened, sir," Zhu Li gave a disapproving look. "It was you who crashed into several other yachts."

"Of course I have a different account of what happened! Otherwise I would've been liable for damages," Varrick said, cackling while waving his arms around.

The room grew silent, though it wasn't until Zhu Li nudged Varrick that he took the hint. The pair snuck out into the next cart, leaving Kuvira and Baatar in the room alone.

"What seems to be troubling you?" Kuvira asked.

Baatar finally put down his tools, looking to the side of the room as he spoke, "We had another attack while collecting spirit vines from the swamp. Seems the Foggy Swamp Tribe have some new recruits from what the reports said."

Kuvira nodded, "Then we'll send a bigger battalion."

"It's not just that," Baatar clenched his fist, not out of anger, but out of worry. "The other world leaders are against us. The Southern Earth Kingdom are threatening us if we don't pull back from their borders." Kuvira didn't know what he was referring to, and Baatar motioned towards a letter on the bench. "That came in today. It's been signed by King Renshu, Gaoling, Chin, and other states. Even the sandbender tribes and Kyoshi Island."

Kuvira gave the letter a quick glance, "Zaofu didn't sign it."

"But we already know what my mother thinks," he sighed. "The other world leaders have also sent us their threats."

"We've had successes in Yi and Yanhu in the past week. The south would always be difficult to win over, we knew that going into this. But Commander Minsheng –"

"-Is busy fighting off barbarians in his mech suit. He sent his Second Commander Guan to central to help because they needed it as well. The Southern Division are too busy for diplomacy."

Kuvira furrowed her brows, "Then we'll send more delegates."

"Kuvira," Baatar made his way closer, "maybe we need to accept where we're at. We already have a decent coalition of states under our empire. I've said it before, but we don't need those other states. If they can't see this vision that we're working towards then to Koh's realm with all of them."

"But there's still so much more that we need to do."

Baatar felt a slight frustration building inside, "We've already done so much. Have you heard about Ba Sing Se? Over the past three months we've poured in resources, soldiers, building supplies, and now the city is getting back on its feet. The first stores in the Upper Ring opened recently! Many other states have also grown. We've expanded our military, opened up more training facilities and bases across the nation. But we can't win against the Southern Earth Kingdom or the rest of the world if they take up arms against us."

There was a moment of silence as Kuvira processed Baatar's words. She pulled away, exhaling softly. "Do you remember what you said to me that night? The one where I first told you about the Dai Li and we tried to figure out what we should do?"

"Of course," Baatar affirmed. "I said you were the best leader the Earth Kingdom could ever have. Better than the hundreds of years of useless monarchs who did nothing but hoard their riches." And he'd meant it, genuinely. But Baatar shook his head, "Not everyone is intelligent enough to see that. That's why we shouldn't waste any more energy trying to convince them. Let them wallow in their backwards ways."

"But they're not wallowing," Kuvira's anger also rose slightly as she spoke. "Remember Omashu? They're thriving, all while millions across Ba Sing Se and the rest of the nation starve."

"But can we win a war with them?"

Kuvira didn't answer. She paused again, thinking back to everything that had happened. "I can't give up. If I do, then... what she said about me was correct."

"Who?" Baatar looked confused at first, though his face sunk when he realised, "Hou-Ting." He grunted while turning away, "You know, she sure seems to come up frequently for someone who's supposed to be irrelevant."

"It's not what Hou-Ting said specifically, but what it reflects," Kuvira said. "She told me that no one would ever follow me because I'm not royalty or a noble of any kind. And so long as the Earth Kingdom holds these archaic ideals and traditions, we'll never be able to change things for the better. We have to show people that progress and innovation mean far more than simply being born into the right family. Otherwise, Hou-Ting, Prince Wu - they'll always be a threat to us." She calmed herself, "We have to get the entire Earth Kingdom united under the Earth Empire. Then we'll never see our nation slide back into those old ways."

Baatar still looked unsure, but he nodded slowly. "I get what you're saying, Kuvira. But still, we can't keep doing what we're doing. We have to find another way."

"And what other way is there?"

"I...," Baatar paused. His eyes lit up when he came up with an idea, "We could get married." Kuvira rolled her eyes, while Baatar's grew angered and saddened, "Is our relationship a joke to you?"

"Of course not," Kuvira softened her tone a little, "but getting married won't solve anything."

"Think about it. You said that Hou-Ting viewed you as nothing more than a military commander. That's because that's primarily what the world sees in you, in us. But what if we showed them a different side? That we're also people, just like them?" Baatar had taken to his feet now, and held Kuvira's arms in his. "We could have our marriage publicised, do interviews. The states in our empire will come together to celebrate, and other states that haven't joined will be encouraged to."

Kuvira looked back at Baatar, meeting his eyes with hers, "I don't think that would work."

"The royal families did it all the time."

"And we're supposed to be better than them," Kuvira shot back. She could see his eagerness and longing to be together, and she did feel the same. But he didn't understand. "We can't get married until we figure this out. Not until the Dai Li, Hou-Ting, the Red Lotus, and the other world leaders are dealt with. Not until we have the Earth Empire completely united."

As the moment faded away, Baatar stepped back. "Do you really think you can do all that? There will always be poverty, wars, tensions, and disagreements. Don't you think setting that standard is impossible?"

Kuvira's eyes grew cold, "Well, if that's what you think then it's obvious you don't believe in me anymore."

At first Baatar looked hurt and confused, but his face also melted into a cold, empty expression, "I do believe in you. But it seems like you don't believe in us anymore." He turned around and picked up his tools again, "I think I'd like to be alone for some time."

She wanted to stay, try and prove herself. Explain things further. Anything. But she knew she couldn't. Kuvira simply nodded and turned to leave the lab. Once in the hallway, Kuvira felt her eyes grow warm, though she wouldn't let herself cry. She hated to admit it, but in that moment, all she could think about was Hou-Ting's radio in her drawer.

It had certainly been a busy week. Between the mission apprehending Donghai and the barbarians, his urgent transfer to Yi, and argument with Opal, Bolin's mind had become bogged down. For now, he was back in central, and Bolin and his team had some time to recoup.

They sat outdoors above a ledge overlooking the central river, watching the afternoon oranges and yellows caught in the water's reflection like a river of lava.

Yi hung over him like a dark cloud, swallowing up all his energy. He was sure they were doing the right thing. Right? He thought back to all those happy smiles, the laughter of kids playing, the tears of joy from the adults as they handed out supplies so desperately needed. But he also remembered Opal's face when he last saw her in Yi, a look of disappointment, hurt, and betrayal.

Noticing his team leader looking gloomy, Akito patted Bolin on the shoulder, "I'm sure your girlfriend will come around."

His reassurance somewhat helped, with Bolin giving a forced smile in response. But Bolin wasn't really sure of anything anymore.

Though Bolin wasn't Akito's only concern; their First Commander had been asked to go into headquarters after their mission. He hadn't returned yet. "I hope First Commander Hu is alright," Akito said, eyeing the ground below him. Next to him sat the other four, all of them waiting for their stew to cook.

"Guan didn't seem too happy about it all," Baraz added. "Said he was going to 'send a report' to Kuvira or something like that. Tsk." He clicked his tongue and shook his head. Guan was always like this, always thinking that he was the best and most superior one out there. Baraz was rather happy to no longer be working with him.

Ahnah gave the stew another stir while looking up, "Bolin, didn't you say that you saw someone there at Donghai's camp?"

The lavabender's mind had been so preoccupied with Opal that he'd missed Ahnah's words. "Yeah. It was... strange," Bolin answered. He thought back to their mission, "I swear it was a guy I played against when pro-bending. He denied it, but the rest of his group that escaped seemed familiar. And they didn't really look like the other barbarians."

"I wonder why he was there? If it was him?" Akito mused. He grinned as Ahnah swirled the stew into his bowl, and then the others' dishes. "I heard you found someone in the tent Gombo. That they actually surrendered."

The former barbarian leader grunted in response, saying nothing for a good while. Perhaps Akito was being too inquisitive the others thought? But Gombo eventually opened up, "I found their leader Donghai. He'd been hit by our canons."

Akito shook his head, "Guan..."

"I didn't know him that well, but one of his lackies was hiding in the tent as well. Said some strange things about the Dai Li."

His words made all four of them look up. "The... Dai Li?" Baraz questioned.

Gombo nodded, "He claimed they'd been rounding up the clans and forcing 'em to fight when they no longer wanted to. Said they were brainwashing 'em into doing their work. I don't know if the kid was desperate or not, but he definitely looked spooked."

"Kuvira said the Dai Li attacked her," Akito said. "I wonder why they'd be going after the barbarians and forcing them to fight?"

"I don't know that much, but it never sat right with me her story," Gombo revealed. "Before all of this, we knew that once you saw the Dai Li that was it. So how did she escape? To be honest, I thought she'd made the whole thing up. Didn't bother me that much I guess, so long as the royals don't get the Earth Kingdom back. But if they are real, then how did Kuvira get away?"

Akito pipped up again, "She is an excellent metalbender. I'm sure she could take on many foes."

Gombo grunted, "So everyone says. But still."

It certainly was a troubling development. And for Bolin, it only added to his worry and fears that maybe something insidious was going on in the shadows. But did that mean Opal was right? Bolin's head was heavy again, filled with confusion, sadness, and worry. For now, all he could do was wait until something was announced and the truth brought to light.

"Thank you, we are incredibly grateful for your help," an older woman bowed alongside her husband.

Kai smiled warmly. They'd been helping out at a farm in the state of Yi, a couple hours out of the main settlement. They'd wanted to leave a bit sooner, especially Opal after everything that had happened with her boyfriend, but there were still villagers on the outskirts of the state that need help. Soon they'd be moving south. "You're welcome. We're happy to help," Opal bowed.

The two airbenders made it back to their bison. Lefty murmured a low sound, his eyes beaming at seeing the others return. "Master Tenzin said Gaipan had asked for some help. Supplies and that. Should take us a couple days to make it." Opal seemed too preoccupied to hear Kai's words, gazing back longingly towards the main settlement. "Hey, I know it's tricky with Bolin. But I'm sure you two can figure it out."

"I want to hope we can," Opal said quietly, her green eyes filled with worry and a heaviness. "Anyway, we should get going."

Once they started flying, the view of Yi quickly faded behind them. The airbenders sat in silence most of the way, lost in their thoughts and admiring the view of the rolling clouds, or the forests and bushland below. After a few hours, the forests became dotted with red-leaved trees, like a blanket of embers underneath the grey skies. Still, even with all the beautiful scenery around them, Opal couldn't quite lift her spirits.

Before she could dwell on it any longer, Opal noticed a clearing up ahead. The treeline seemed to just end with no thinning out over the fields, though as they got closer, they could see the fields themselves had been reduced to muddy earth. "What's happened here?"

"Dunno. Maybe a logging site?"

Opal shook her head, "Then where are the stumps? It seems like the trees and vegetation were just removed." Up ahead there was a small settlement, with several chimneys pumping out thick smoke against the sky. "Let's take a quick look."

After descending and landing on the ground, Opal and Kai disembarked. It was like entering a war zone, with a grim and sombre mood in the atmosphere like a grey film over everything. The stone pathway had been covered in a slurry of thick mud, like the earth bleeding out from beneath them. And in the distance, the Earth Empire's silver coin emblem hung proudly from a flag waving on the city arch.

There were few people on the streets, all of them giving hesitant glances at the airbenders walking through. Whenever Opal or Kai caught their gaze they would shift away quickly, not wanting to draw any attention. Whatever had happened here, it had undoubtably left a mark.

In the square there was a fountain and water feature, though it had dried up. There were a couple of villagers milling about, their faces filled with a weariness and fear. Opal tried making her way over to one of them, "Hello, I just wanted to ask..." her words trailed off as the pair scurried away.

"That... was strange," Kai remarked.

A patrol of soldiers in green and silver marched over. The man at the front noticed the airbenders, "What brings you to Ga-Eul?"

His tone wasn't exactly welcoming, though Opal replied anyway, "We were just wondering what had happened here? To the village?"

The soldier furrowed his brows, "What do you mean 'happened' here? Ga-Eul is a future military base for the Earth Empire."

Kai and Opal exchanged looks. Ga-Eul wasn't a well-known village, but both of them had travelled here before it was occupied. "What about the village?" Opal asked.

"That's not any of your business, airbenders."

"These people had a home here!" Opal replied.

The soldier glared irritably, "You've been here less than five minutes and you think you understand what these people need? That's it. You better get going or you'll be processed for trespassing."

"Processed?" Kai mumbled. This was getting bad.

Opal didn't back down, instead forming a fighting stance with her arms crossed in front, "I'm not leaving till we get some answers!"

"That's quite enough," another soldier appeared. The airbenders could see he had many badges and several extra stripes on his upper arm. "I can handle this."

The other soldier looked embarrassed, "Right... apologies, sir."

The commanding officer was a tall and slender man, eyeing up Opal and Kai. His face wore a permanent scowl. "My name is First Commander Cheung of the Western Division. I couldn't help but overhear you had some concerns about our operation?"

Opal and Kai looked at each other for a moment. A First Commander? That would make him pretty high up the chain of command. Opal was the one to reply, "I've been here before. I... I was just wondering what happened to the village here? And the fields to the north used to be filled with crops and trees?"

Cheung tried smiling enthusiastically, but it was hard given how rigid his facial muscles were, "Well, the villagers were relocated to the mountains. We helped them build a new living area while we construct this military base. You see, these lands here are far more suitable for vehicles and training new recruits, whereas the mountain area was unoccupied."

"But did these villagers actually want to move?" Opal asked. She thought of all those faces they'd seen while walking in. Something felt off about all of this.

Despite her abrupt questioning, Cheung maintained his composure, "Well of course, they pledged loyalty to the Earth Empire."

"That's not what I meant."

Now Cheung's composure faltered slightly. His brows creased, and his two-tailed moustache twitched as he frowned, "What exactly are you implying?"

Opal felt an uneasiness manifest in her stomach. "I just..."

"We were just concerned, that's all," Kai intervened.

Cheung's eyed the pair up for a moment, "The reason I wanted to speak with you is that I recognised you from afar," he motioned towards Opal. "Zaofu is the home of Suyin Beifong of course. You look just like her. And both of you are airbenders, so you must know Master Tenzin." The pair weren't too sure where First Commander Cheung was going with this, and gave each other a worried glance as he continued, "Since you have such esteemed leaders in your midst, I would hate for there to be a misunderstanding here and have you report back to them."

It was becoming clearer why the Earth Empire were concerned about their visit. Maybe that was also why Cheung had stepped forward to resolve things himself. Though as Opal looked back to the anxious villagers hiding and watching what was unfolding, she knew she had to press further, "Are you sure the villagers are happy with this decision though? Those still here look desperate. If you really are supposed to be uniting them, then why are they suffering?"

"We are still making arrangements, and those staying here are working on the new base. Conditions aren't the best we know, but at least their efforts are part of something larger and bigger than themselves. Now, I think I've explained things as well as I can." As Cheung finished, a few of his subordinates stepped closer.

Opal tried to respond, though Kai cut her off, "Thank you for clearing up our concerns, we should be on our way." He bowed and started making his way back along the muddy path to the village arch.

As they walked away, Opal caught a glimpse of a young child hiding next to a crate. It was almost like a spark had gone out in the child's eyes as she watched the two airbenders leave. It broke Opal's spirit, though she quickly caught up to Kai.

Once out of the village, Opal couldn't hold in her objections any longer, "We should've done something!" she yelled. Her voice was exasperated. This was exactly how she had felt after Yi. No, worse; at least at Yi the people were being looked after. Though here, it was the very people who promised to help the villagers that were also the ones exploiting them. It made her shudder to think that maybe this was happening all over the Earth Kingdom.

"Opal, I know. I wanted to help too. But something is really off."

Opal calmed herself, unsure of Kai's words. "What do you mean?"

"Why are they building a military base on the western side, close to the United Republic? It's not like they've been many barbarian attacks here recently."

"You don't think..." Opal's words trailed off as a worrying thought entered her mind.

Kai nodded, "Unless you needed to maintain a strong perimeter around your nation." Opal was still a bit stunned to respond, so Kai continued, "You said it yourself that Kuvira doesn't know when to stop. She'll keep going until the entire Earth Kingdom is part of her empire. And when that happens, she'll need to keep troops stationed at the border, especially when the other world leaders react."

"It's worse than I thought," Opal replied. There was a chance they were reading too much into it, though Opal couldn't deny that the more she thought about it, the more likely it seemed. The First Commander seemed intent on keeping the new base under wraps, and knowing what Kuvira was like... it didn't seem like much of a stretch. It was likely what happened to Ga-Eul was happening in all the other states who joined the Earth Empire.

"We should go back and tell Tenzin. After we stop in Gaipan of course."

Opal shook her head, "After Gaipan, I need to go to Zaofu." She looked back towards Kai, a mix of determination and fear in her eyes, "It's worse than we thought, and I have to tell Mom about it. Maybe... maybe there's a chance she can stop this."

After taking off on Lefty, the muddy and desolate village of Ga-Eul disappeared from sight. But what remained etched in Opal's memory was the sight of that poor child losing hope as they left their village.

It was late in the night, but Kuvira couldn't sleep. Baatar had nodded off in their cabin, and Kuvira had come out into the next cart along to do some work. Despite feeling alert and energetic, she still couldn't stay focused on the report in front of her. She'd re-read the same paragraph on the economic report from Ba Sing Se several times now. Perhaps it was time to read something else.

When filing the report away, Kuvira noticed an unopened letter in her tray. It must have come in late. She picked it up, though felt a deep anger well up inside as she saw it was from the president. What could Raiko want with her now? Probably the same reason the Southern Earth Kingdom leaders wrote their own letter to her.

For a split second she thought it would be better to go to bed and not deal with it now, but she knew it would just play on her mind and prevent her from sleeping. Whatever Raiko had to say she would face it now, however infuriating his letter may be.

Kuvira broke the wax seal, and read the letter:

Dear Kuvira,

I think it would be safe to say that this situation has gotten out of hand. I gave clear expectations to have daily updates on the Dai Li and the Red Lotus investigations, though the last report I received was three months ago. What is being done about these threats? How soon can Prince Wu take his rightful place on the throne? The longer you ignore me, the worse it will get.

And do not think that your little 'Earth Empire' stunt has gone unchallenged. When Prince Wu ascends the throne as the rightful ruler of the entire nation, any coalition you've made will become null and void. I'll see to it myself.

I assume you've heard from the other Earth Kingdom states as well, in particular, King Renshu of Omashu, Regent Baozhai of Gaoling, and many others who are unhappy with your actions. I want to make it very clear; the United Republic of Nations will back these Earth Kingdom states should they feel provoked. And the other nations feel similarly.

Kuvira, what will it take to get you to stand down? I larger reward? I giant, marble statue made in your honour in Republic City? A grand title to add to your rank? I once thought that you truly wanted what is best for the Earth Kingdom, but your aggressive actions and manipulation of other states has led me to believe that you only care about gaining a name for yourself.

Do consider this letter a final warning. The world is waiting for you to give up. You cannot keep this up forever, and your actions could very well throw us into another world war. If there's any sane part of you still left that isn't obsessed with obtaining power, then please consider this.

Sincerely,

President Raiko,

United Republic of Nations

Kuvira felt like shredding the letter to pieces once she finished, though she managed to keep it together and simply tossed it aside. She'd expected it would be this bad. The nerve of that man to question her intentions and dangle prizes like statues and titles in front of her as if that would stop her? It was insulting.

Still, she couldn't deny that at least part of what he said deserved consideration. Things were getting tense in the political sphere.

She exhaled loudly, rubbing her head in her hands. The whole world was waiting for her to give up. It wasn't just the other leaders though; Suyin wasn't too fond of them keeping their position either according to Baatar, and Baatar... his face appeared in her mind, the cold and emotionless look from when they'd argued in the lab. Even he wanted to give up.

Before she'd even realised it, Kuvira had already unlocked her drawer with Hou-Ting's radio inside. She nearly scolded herself, but stopped as she considered it. Who else could she turn to? Maybe there was something she could learn from Hou-Ting?

She tried to dismiss the thought immediately. What would that old bag know about running a nation? She'd let her people starve, hoarded riches for herself. She was the last person she needed.

But still, she had no one else to ask. Kuvira turned away, her eyes making contact with the letter she'd just tossed aside. Without giving it another second thought, Kuvira turned the radio on, and put the receiver to her ear.

At first there was nothing but static. It went on for what seemed like an eternity. Though eventually, a voice cut through the background noise, "Kuvira. It's nice to hear from you at this late hour."

The former queen's words made her feel physically sick. What was she doing talking to her? Still, Kuvira couldn't put it down.

"I gather that I am in fact speaking with you, Kuvira?" She said nothing but a dull grunt, "I'll take your silence as a yes. To what do I owe this pleasure? I assume it has something to do with the southern states, namely, Renshu?"

"Spying on me? Should've known. It was a mistake to call –"

"Now, now, don't be too hasty. The reason I know it is Renshu is because I had to deal with him in the past too. He's a stubborn old bat, though somehow he always manages to win over the other states in the south."

Kuvira swallowed. Part of her still couldn't believe she was actually talking to the former earth queen. Though hearing her speak of King Renshu like this, it made her feel... understood, in a weird way. She hated it, but felt compelled to ask more. "What did you do in the past?"

Hou-Ting smirked, though it brought about a couple coughs and splutters, "Omashu is a trading city. It has factories yes, but no farms, crops, nor grains. Not enough to feed its people at least. So, when they wouldn't comply I blocked all their trading routes and surrounded the city."

"But what about the people inside? They would've starved." Kuvira hadn't entirely blocked their exports, only the maglev network, which seemed fair in her eyes. What Hou-Ting was suggesting was a complete blockade.

"There were some losses, though their sacrifice was what led to me maintaining control. I also had the Dai Li arrest some prominent members who were causing trouble. Treason is a very broad crime, after all. After a few months, King Renshu eventually conceded."

"And that's why he wants nothing to do with my empire now!" Kuvira felt a white-hot rage manifest inside. "He claims you abducted his family members and others in high up positions! And your blockade resulting in people dying... you're pathetic."

There was a pause on the other line, "How dare you?! Think what you like, but you were the one that called me. I have ruled the Earth Kingdom for far longer than you, and yet you seem to think you can do better? Why did you call if not for advice?"

Kuvira exhaled angrily, "I did call for advice. But I regret that now wholeheartedly. I'll figure this out without your help."

Hou-Ting laughed, "Well, I wish you the best of luck. And of course, I'll be waiting for you next call."

After slamming the receiver back onto the radio, Kuvira shut the drawer. She wanted to blast the radio into tiny pieces, but even now, something prevented her. Instead, she gripped her metal desk lap and twisted its shape into some contorted form, crumpling over onto the floor.

She took a breath. This wasn't the end. Hou-Ting was just some irrelevant old bag, that's all. At least that's what Kuvira wanted to console herself with. The truth was, she didn't know what to do. With the world leaders closing in on her, and only two thirds of the Earth Kingdom states aligned with the empire, there was still so much more they had to do if they wanted to prevail against Wu, Raiko, and the other leaders. The question was, what could she do?

Chapter Text

Morning dawned, and brought with it the first light shining into the bedroom cabin. Kuvira woke from her sleep, rolling over to feel Baatar and his warmth next to her. Though as she opened her eyes, she realised the bed was empty. It had been like this for two nights now. All that was left were the creases in the bedsheets left from his body, a reminder of his absence. Soon they'd be arriving back in Ba Sing Se, so unless Baatar planned on sleeping in a storage closet or unrepaired room, he'd have to join her eventually.

Once back at headquarters, Kuvira was bombarded with paperwork and reports. Baatar was probably in the lab, getting buried into his work. He always did that when he needed space. Most of the reports were bleak. They did have a number of states sign up, which pushed the Earth Empire further into the majority. But there were still states in the south that refused to join.

Not only that, but these states had also retaliated and blocked many of the Earth Empire's train routes. Renshu had won a skirmish against their forces, pushing back Minsheng's army. Her hold on Omashu was quickly slipping, as well as the other southern states.

Just as she was ready to take a break from the admin work, a soldier approached, "Kuvira sir, there's someone here to see you."

After making her way out of the palace entrance, Kuvira saw just who it was. The woman was dressed in dark greens with silver plating and jewellery, which caught the light as she stared over the city. "Suyin?"

The matriarch of Zaofu turned around. "Kuvira," she greeted.

A mix of tension and uneasiness filled the air. It was clear Suyin was happy to see Kuvira, but her unannounced visit and everything going on in the world didn't bode well with Kuvira. "I wanted to come and talk, if that's alright."

"Of course," Kuvira replied.

Suyin was half expecting to be led to a quieter meeting room, but Kuvira stayed put. Perhaps she knew why she was visiting. Suyin breathed in, "Kuvira, I wanted to come and talk about what's happening with the 'Earth Empire' and the other nations. I'm not here to accuse you of anything, but there are tensions rising with the other leaders, and I've heard troubling news from people on the ground."

It looked like Suyin was going to cut to the chase. "What troubling news have you heard?" Kuvira asked.

"A few days ago, Opal and Kai were visiting a village in a state that recently joined the Earth Empire. The people there didn't seem well-looked after at all. Their village had been stripped of all its natural resources, and most of the people relocated. It's been like that in a few villages, actually. Is that really what you want for the Earth Kingdom?"

"I don't know what Opal thinks she saw, but I can guarantee that's not what I intended –"

"Kuvira," Suyin pleaded. "Be honest. You know that I want what's right. I don't want the world to go to war. I want the Earth Kingdom to be restored. But you're not being honest with everything. Don't keep shutting me out. You didn't tell me about the Dai Li attack, and since then you've barely said anything."

There was a time where Suyin's approval would've meant a lot to Kuvira. But now, all she could think was how hollow her words were. She'd been sent here to get her to stand down. She wasn't here because she actually cared about her. "You say you want what's best for the Earth Kingdom, but why didn't you lead the Allied Forces after the nation fell?"

Suyin grumbled, "Oh Kuvira, would you stop with that? We've been over this –"

"And I don't buy it. And I don't buy your reasons for being here now either!" Kuvira's voice raised, her eyes filled with a rising anger, "I know you're one of Raiko's allies. I know that you have ties to King Renshu and Regent Baozhai. The only reason you've come to me now is on their behalf."

"Kuvira!" Suyin looked angry but also hurt at the accusation. "It's true that I'm here on behalf of all the world leaders because I want peace like they do. But I'm also here because of you. I know things have been tense ever since you left, but during the mission to Ba Sing Se, I really thought things were changing for the better. Then you shut me out again. Please, you and Baatar have already done so much for the Earth Kingdom, and I have no intention of trying to throw you both out. But we need to find a resolution."

She pulled out an invitation from her pocket, "Zaofu will be hosting a peace talk in three weeks' time. President Raiko, Prince Wu, and I, will all be there. Nothing is off the table, but we do need to reach a solution. People are getting worried. War is being talked of. We can't let it get that far." Suyin reached out, though Kuvira only stared at the envelope. "Please just consider it."

Eventually Kuvira took the envelope, eyeing up the seal. It was the silver coin of Zaofu on the wax seal, now the symbol of their Earth Empire. "I'll talk to Baatar."

Suyin smiled, "Thank you." Even with the heated exchange, Suyin conveyed a look of genuine concern. "Speaking of, I thought I might talk to him for a moment. Is he around?"

Kuvira's eyes shifted slightly. She didn't want Suyin knowing they were fighting, but hearing her fiancé's name brought forth a deep sadness. "He's in the lab," Kuvira said finally.

"Oh, thank you. I won't be long," Suyin replied. "And Kuvira, thank you for considering the meeting. I hope to see you in three weeks."

Kuvira gave a slight nod as she watched Suyin turn and leave.

The light above pierced like a searing hot iron. Tahno was already uneasy and fidgety, though the harsh beam of light made it all the worse. Thankfully they'd gone over their cover stories before in case they were captured; the three of them were from the outskirts of Ba Sing Se, and recently returned. They snuck into the northern Lower Ring suburbs to find their old homes, though barbarians kidnapped them after mistaking them as Earth Empire.

It was the best they could've come up with, though they wouldn't get off free since they did trespass into the northern city. But all Tahno could do was hope they bought his story, and no one would recognise him as a former pro-bender.

The woman questioning him was busy shuffling her notes, while the other behind seemed intent on boring a hole right through Tahno with her gaze. She'd introduced herself as First Commander Yasuko of the Northern Division, pretty high up in the chain of command as far as Tahno knew.

"Do you have any further questions?" the soldier turned to the first commander.

Yasuko didn't let up her stare, "His story certainly corroborates what the other two said. We still need some more time. And, there's the issue with you three trespassing into Earth Empire controlled territory. I hope you realise that being a bender doesn't mean you can just go waltzing wherever you want. We have strict boundaries in place to prevent exactly what you three went through in getting kidnapped."

Tahno gave a nervous laugh, "I guess we just really missed our homes and wanted to see if anything was left intact."

"I'll start filing the report. Have him sent back to the holding cells for now."

"Yes Ma'am," the soldier replied.

It seemed like just maybe they'd got out of this ordeal unscathed. After the first commander left, two soldiers moved in and hoisted Tahno to his feet.

In the hallways, Tahno followed the solider in front while another trailed behind. He instinctively turned to where his holding cell was but the guard behind pushed him ahead, "Keep moving."

While at first confused, Tahno felt his stomach drop as he remembered a previous conversation with the other two. Raiko couldn't afford to have them get caught; if the public found out about the president hiring inmates to do private investigations, it would land him a cell right next to the three of them. And now, after getting caught by the Earth Empire, he was being led away from his cell.

Panic started to set in. He couldn't go anywhere with these guards, if they even were guards at all. "Uh... I um... I forgot something in my cell I should really –"

"All your belongings have been loaded onto a truck."

The guard's words made him feel even worse. What could he do now?

After making their way into a vehicle hanger, Tahno saw the familiar faces of Lieutenant and Saihkan standing nearby. It was a contradictory mix of relief at seeing them and fear of what would happen next, washing over him in waves. Though they weren't alone; a man with a slick black pompadour and light blue fur-lined suit stepped into view. "Tahno, nice of you to join us," Wenyan said. "Our associate wants a debrief. We should get going."

Saihkan and Lieutenant seemed a little more relaxed than Tahno, though even they were somewhat concerned. Wenyan motioned for them to get in the satomobile, and once they were all inside, the vehicle took off.

It was a short drive in silence to the lodge. This was a different one than their first in the agrarian zone, more towards the south judging from the morning sunrise. Obviously they'd stayed in the prison for a couple days, though time seemed to crawl when confined to a small cell so it was hard to tell. Once inside the lodge, Wenyan's men collected the trio's belongings and then left them in peace.

"If you're worried about me killing you than don't be," Wenyan cleared the air. While his abruptness was concerning, at least his words were good news. "Raiko is still a virtuous man, or at least he likes to think he is. If it were up to me I would've put you all six feet under for getting caught by the Earth Empire of all people. Spirits, you screwed up big time."

"It was either them or the Dai Li," Lieutenant said coldly.

Wenyan's eyebrows raised, with an intrigued grin forming, "Do tell."

Saihkan let out a sigh, "It started when we were gathering intel. We thought if anyone knew anything about the Dai Li then we should talk to the barbarians. The Earth Empire soldiers didn't seem to know much and getting info out of the top commanders seemed unlikely. Plus, the barbarians were there during the fall of Ba Sing Se. Maybe they would've seen something, or known more about the assassination of the Council of Five? Honestly, it was a bit of luck we even found anything."

"And what did you find?"

Lieutenant chipped in next, "We met some barbarians, and we tried telling them that we weren't the Earth Empire. But they didn't believe us. Instead, they kidnapped us and took us to a man named Donghai and his clan. He told us the Dai Li were around and were brainwashing his and the other clans into continuing their fight against the Earth Empire." It had been such a busy past few days that it almost felt surreal that so much had happened in such a short space of time.

"Brainwashing the barabarians. How fascinating. But did you confirm that it really was the Dai Li?" Wenyan suggested.

Saihkan explained further, "We met two of them on the road escaping; they were waiting for us. Probably thought we were barbarians to brainwash, I don't know. They had already messed with two of them, and when they tried to fight back they just stopped in their tracks."

"Now this is getting exciting. I'm glad Raiko contacted me for this job," Wenyan grinned. His mood seemed to swing between excitement and cold murder threats. "Well, Raiko would like you to investigate further. I just spoke with him over the phone and he wasn't too happy with the lack of communication."

Tahno grumbled, "Oh come on. Haven't we done enough already?"

Wenyan wasn't thrilled with Tahno's response, narrowing his eyes with an ice-cold stare, "Need I remind you of your blunder in getting captured? It's highly unusual for me to let something like that slide. I have a reputation you know. Besides, don't you want to get to the bottom of this mystery?"

"Not really, to be honest," Tahno replied. "And if you have those guys in the Earth Empire then why do you even need us?"

"'Those guys' aren't part of the Earth Empire; we just managed to snag some uniforms. And if Raiko did have people on the inside then we wouldn't have needed you three, would we?" Tahno said nothing further, simply tutting and gazing out the window. Wenyan smiled again, "Raiko and I were sure Kuvira was lying about it all in an effort to keep the Earth Kingdom. But it seems there is an element of truth to what she was saying."

"What else does Raiko want us to do?" Lieutenant asked.

"We still need to find out what Kuvira knows. Surely by now she should know everything you three do? They have captured many barbarians after all, who probably would've shared their stories. So, we need to infiltrate the Earth Empire this time."

The three of them shared glanced. Would it even be possible to infiltrate them?

"Right," Wenyan clapped while standing to his feet. The door opened once again, and two of Wenyan's guys entered the room and marched over with uniforms in their hands. "We'll need these two to continue disguising as Earth Empire soldiers. You three on the other hand will be working kitchen hand and room service." The three inmates collectively groaned. "Come now, you start your first shift in an hour."

Tahno stared at the waiter uniform placed in his hands. It had already been an eventful and terrifying journey so far, but just when this trail would end was anyone's guess.

The lab inside the palace had become cluttered with pieces of equipment and materials. Well-organised, but still rather packed. Kuvira watched as Baatar took apart a mechanical mech arm, probably experimenting with some new attachment. She smiled softly, walking over to her fiancé, "What are you working on now?"

Baatar barely looked up, "Just modifying a mech arm."

Silence followed for a moment, with Baatar working on his device and Kuvira looking out the windows to the palace grounds below. "Suyin came to visit today. Did she come and speak with you?"

"Yeah, she did."

"Did you tell her... about us?" Kuvira asked.

"No," Baatar replied, slightly irritated. "I'm not on the best terms with my mother anyway. I wouldn't tell her about us fighting." He continued working on the mech arm, though eventually let out a sigh, "She told me about the peace meeting in a few weeks. With Raiko and Wu."

Kuvira grunted, "Yeah, she gave me the invitation. She said she wants to help, but she made it pretty clear she doesn't want the Earth Empire around if she's involving Raiko and Wu. I don't think we can trust her." She expected a reply from Baatar, but he said nothing. "Baatar?"

"What?"

His fiancé tutted, "We need to think about what we're going to do. We have reports coming in from Omashu and they've started amassing their own military and patrolling the border to several southern Earth Kingdom states. The other southern states are putting up quite a resistance. And with the continued barbarian attacks our forces are stretched thin." Kuvira exhaled, "I have to unite the last of the states, and quickly."

Baatar sighed, "Kuvira, I love you. But I'm not ready to talk." He looked at her, his deep green eyes conveying the hurt he felt.

"But this is important Baatar! Please..." Kuvira replied. Her head was swirling with thoughts, and the one person she wanted to rely on didn't want to talk. Eventually she took off, walking out the door while Baatar gave a longing glance as she left.

Kuvira found herself in an office, shutting the door behind to seal herself in. She'd never felt this alone before. Well, that wasn't entirely true. Her own parents had shipped her away to an orphanage before being sent to Zaofu. She was young, but still remembered their faces.

Why now of all times would she be reminiscing? Especially of such painful memories? Was it because this situation here bore an uncanny resemblance to her past? Like some cruel twist of destiny, doomed to repeat over and over?

No, this was different. Kuvira may have been abandoned before and left all alone, but back then she was weak. She'd learnt now how to be strong, how to stifle her emotions. She knew she could achieve whatever she wanted. It was true that the world leaders were against her. Suyin was against her. Even Baatar had given up.

How could she even continue? Even with her ramped up response, pressuring the last of the states to join, increasing their production and military, she still couldn't maintain her empire.

Maybe in the end, all her enemies were in fact right.

No.

She couldn't accept that.

In the end, it didn't matter what they all thought, because Kuvira knew that she was capable. She could control people like pieces on a Pai Sho board, like tools to achieve a goal. If no one wanted to support her and build an empire where everyone could be cared for, then she'd just have to make them. The last of the Earth Kingdom states would not be allowed to let everyone else suffer.

She didn't need allies, only tools. And there was one more she could add to her belt to deal with this problem.

Marching out of the palace with her face filled with cold determination, Kuvira made her way to their maglev train. She gave a quick nod at the guards as she entered, finding herself in the train office. Soon the radio was in her hands, and she dialled the number. When the static passed and a voice could be heard on the other line, Kuvira spoke, "Hou-Ting. I want you to do something for me."

The golden tiles of the palace glistened under the warm sun, while flags bearing the silver coin hung proudly from the rafters. Kuvira waited at the top of the palace stairs, ready to greet her guests with a regal welcome.

An urgent meeting. That's what Kuvira had called it. Four days ago the calls had gone out, and now, the last of the southern Earth Kingdom leaders would be joining her.

The first to arrive was Mei, Lady of Kyoshi Island. While she was not one of the famed Kyoshi Warriors herself, she still adorned her head with an elaborate gold hairpiece and red eyeshadow against a white face paint. Her expression hardly changed when she saw Kuvira at the top of the palace stairs, her cold stare only ceasing momentarily as she bowed to the Great Uniter. "Kuvira."

"Lady Mei," Kuvira returned the gesture. "Thank you for coming, and at such short notice. I imagine the journey was long."

The Kyoshi Island ambassador's expression finally changed; a spiteful grin forming as she spoke, "It was a long journey, but the thought of you finally accepting defeat made it all worthwhile."

Kuvira had to bite her tongue. She tried reciprocating a smile, though her eyes glared daggers as she replied, "I believe my exact words were 'negotiate terms of removing the Earth Empire military from your territory'. But yes, I am thankful for you and the other leaders responding to my summit a few days ago."

"I hope you know that moving your troops out will not be the end of your reparations; although your naval fleets are well, quite frankly, mediocre compared to our own, they did cause significant loss of trade and income for Kyoshi Island. Being an island nation, it impacted us greatly. We will be expecting some compensation."

"We have much to discuss, I'm sure," Kuvira replied. As soon as the ambassador was inside, Kuvira let her fake courteousness fade into a resentful scowl. Part of her regretted even inviting the pretentious ambassador here. Kyoshi Island was so far removed from Earth Kingdom politics that they'd hardly be missed. But then again, they were one of the states yet to join the Earth Empire, and thus Kuvira did want them here.

Next up the stairs were several other leaders and delegates. King Renshu led the group in, followed by Regent Baozhai and several others. He was far less polite, hiding a bitter frown under his thick grey moustache and beard. "Kuvira," he lightly tipped his head.

Kuvira also bowed to the group, "Thank you all for coming to this meeting, and at such short notice. My servants can show you to our meeting hall."

The King of Omashu said nothing further, following his security detail and the other delegates inside.

The wind picked up slightly, and Kuvira took a moment to breathe in and calm herself. This was her move. She'd sent out a call to the remaining eleven states that had refused to join the Earth Empire, asking them to attend an urgent summit to negotiate her military moving out of their territories. Though what Lady Mei and the others seemingly failed to realise, was that this was by no means a surrender. Kuvira smiled, a satisfied and proud expression manifesting as she turned back to the palace.

Inside the meeting room, the guests had all been seated along a narrow greenstone table. Bamboo steamers filled with light snacks had been laid out, with fragrant tea to accompany. None of it had been touched yet. Baatar stood in the corner with First Commander Yasuko and two of her second commanders. An uneasy look filled Bataar's eyes as he watched the guests enter.

When Kuvira arrived, she took a moment to address the table of guests with a quick glance. All of them were from the southern states, and everyone was present, which was even better than what Kuvira had hoped for. After clearing her throat, Kuvira posed her arms behind and addressed them, "Thank you all for coming here. As I mentioned in the call to all of you, today we will be discussing terms of removing our military presence from your territories."

"Yes, yes, that was always inevitable," the Minister of Chin Village interrupted. "But what we really want to organise is the dismantling of the Earth Empire and reinstation of the Earth Monarchy."

"As well as reparations. Monetary, and otherwise," Lady Mei chimed in.

There was no need for fake politeness now. Kuvira's smile faded, "I believe you misunderstand what this summit is about. I never said I had any intention of dismantling the Earth Empire, only discussing the terms of removing my military from your territory."

"This is outrageous!" Regent Baozhai said, standing up from his seat. "And where is Suyin Beifong? I know that Zaofu have not agreed to this either. Suyin told us she had organised a peace meeting in three weeks' time!"

"I will be attending the peace meeting as well, where Zaofu will have a chance to negotiate. But this meeting is for you eleven to decide your next course of action."

King Renshu sat opposite Kuvira at the head of the table. With his face contorting with a deep resentment, he stood up abruptly, "I've had enough of this. You're wasting our time Kuvira! Any good will we had towards you for stabilising the Earth Kingdom has now been lost in my eyes."

"You can still decide to resist the Earth Empire, and if so, I will remove our forces from your borders. But the purpose of today's meeting is to show you what you will be up against if you do," Kuvira warned. As the other delegates and leaders took to their feet, a set of doors on the other side of the room opened. Every head turned to see several Dai Li agents in their matching uniforms walk in. Gasps and anxious looks filled the air.

"This is obviously a bluff," King Renshu turned back to Kuvira. "You're desperate now! I suggest you end this charade!"

"A bluff, you say?"

Everyone spun back around to see another figure in the doorway. An older woman, dressed in a black and gold outfit with green sleeves, similar to the Dai Li. King Renshu's eyes grew wide, the Omashu monarch's horror evident on his face, "... it can't be."

Hou-Ting smiled, holding her hands out as she addressed the room, "It has been a long time, hasn't it?" Her iconic fingernails stood out like pikes in the earth, curling up as she eyed up every member there.

Although shocked and completely off-guard at first, Renshu stood defiantly, "You can conjure up the dead, bring whoever you want to. But Omashu will never yield!" his security readied themselves for a fight.

"Explain yourself!" Lady Mei commanded. While the other leaders were still gobsmacked by the return of the former monarch, the Kyoshi Island leader and King of Omashu stood firmly.

As Hou-Ting made her way to the other side of the room, Kuvira elaborated, "I want to be clear that this is not a reinstation of the monarchy. But I will reiterate that the Earth Empire is the future for all of the Earth Kingdom. I tried to convince you to share in this vision, but you all continued to ignore me. You ignored the others in our nation who were suffering, focussing on yourselves." A smug grin formed as Kuvira continued, "That's why I held this meeting; you are free to resist the Earth Empire, and we will remove our military should you do. But now that I have made an alliance with the former Earth Queen and the Dai Li, you may find yourselves in a more... precarious position than before, if you continue to oppose me."

The other leaders were silent. Was this really happening? The return of Hou-Ting and the Dai Li? It certainly looked convincing. Regent Baozhai shook his head, "So those reports of 'getting captured' by the Dai Li..."

"Were true, though we recently managed to come to an agreement," Kuvira replied, sharing a courteous nod with Hou-Ting. In the corner, Baatar continued to watch the scene unfold with a deep anxiousness.

After another pause, King Renshu finally broke the silence, "Omashu is strong. We have good relations with the other nations. Do what you want – strike me down here if you must – but we can never go back. We will never join you!"

"Kyoshi Island feels the same!" Lady Mei stood up again. "Our patron Avatar, the honourable Avatar Kyoshi, fought against the same tyranny being forced on us here. There is only one course of action we will take; we will not back down even when our entire island is in ruin!"

Even after their display, there were still leaders willing to resist. Hou-Ting glanced over at Kuvira, who gave a nod of approval. The former Earth Queen spoke up, her voice sly and threatening, "King Renshu, do you remember what happened during the early years of my reign? When you first talked of 'independence' from the crown?"

King Renshu smirked sarcastically "Of course. How could I forget." His expression grew darker and more enraged, "You blocked us in for months. Our people starved, and your demons in emerald stole our children!"

"And yet, you stand there with a ferocity as if it never happened."

"Do I?!" King Renshu yelled. "It is because I remember what happened that I stand against you. Kuvira," he addressed the Great Uniter with his gaze, "why would you have made a deal with this spawn of Vaatu?"

Kuvira didn't say anything, and Hou-Ting moved on to the other leader still challenging them, "Lady Mei, is it? I can't say that Kyoshi Island is very relevant in Earth Kingdom politics. Even during my reign, I tended to ignore the buzzing of mosquitos whose sound holds nothing as it's forgotten in the wind."

Lady Mei was infuriated, "How dare you?! Do not forget that it was our women who fought bravely during the Hundred Year War. We left the safety of our island to risk ourselves for the entire kingdom!"

"And do you think your tiny island can fight off our entire forces? What say you, King Renshu? Even if you repel our military, can you also check every shadow in case my Dai Li are waiting, and watching your every move?"

There was another silence that followed. Kuvira felt the point had been made; for all their courage and bravery, none of them really wanted to go to war, especially with the Dai Li.

Now, it was time to make her pitch again, "I want to reassure you, that no matter who is standing before you, the old ways of the monarchy will not be reinstated. As I've said many times, the Earth Empire gives us all a new opportunity. Whatever politics or past misgivings you may have, we must look to the future, because if we cannot stand united then our whole nation will fall. We cannot allow another Hundred Year War to destroy us. We will not fall back into the old regime where the innocent suffered, where citizens struggled to get by, living in desolate desperation and abandoned by leaders who were meant to help them." She stood proudly, giving each member eye contact to try and reach them, "Our Earth Empire will be the greatest civilisation to ever unite the Earth Kingdom. And if you will not join for the sake of the people, then let me assure you, I will make sure we are all united. One way, or another."

A few of the leaders exchanged glances. Those on their feet giving impassioned reactions moments before, now took to their seats. Eventually, the Minister of Chin let out a sigh, "Chin Village will pledge our loyalty." The other leaders gave concerned looks, but none of them said anything in response.

Finally, it seemed like the other states would be joining the Earth Empire. Kuvira's lips curled into a soft smile. This is everything that Raiko and the other world leaders believed she was incapable of. She looked towards Baatar, though he only managed to return a half smile. Either way, Kuvira knew that the end goal would be worth it. Soon, nearly all the states would have joined, except for Zaofu, though they would also be giving the same ultimatum in due time.

The meeting didn't go on for very long. After the other states had signed up, all the leaders were ready to leave as soon as they could. Kuvira, Baatar, and Hou-Ting were the only ones remaining in the meeting room, with the former two glancing through the paperwork. "King Renshu only signed for 'Provisional Membership', whatever that means," Kuvira commented. She flipped to the next agreement, the one from Lady Mei. Instead of a signature, she'd written an ominous threat of war along the dotted line. Still, if it were only those two states that didn't fully join the Earth Empire then they'd done pretty well.

"So, how does it look?" Hou-Ting asked.

Baatar looked over and narrowed his eyes. He still wasn't used to having the former earth queen and her Dai Li in the same room, and he hadn't forgiven them for kidnapping his fiancé before. "Everyone signed up except Kyoshi Island. And the provisional membership King Renshu agreed to."

"He'll come around, in time," Hou-Ting said. "As for Kyoshi Island, perhaps stronger measures will be necessary."

"We'll be deciding what needs to happen further," Kuvira chided, much to Hou-Ting's disdain.

Hou-Ting wasn't finished however, "So, now comes the time where you hold up your end of our agreement. This show wasn't just for free," she said while sweeping a hand across the room.

"I am well aware. But you should know that I meant what I said: the old ways of the Earth monarchy will never return."

"Then what will you be offering? I presumed that was on the table?"

Kuvira placed the paperwork down, folding her arms behind her back and standing tall, "I agreed to align with you and the Dai Li, but this did not mean that you would become head of the Earth Empire, nor be reinstated as Earth Queen."

Hou-Ting laughed, "I should have known you would play your semantics game with me as well, just like the other leaders." Her expression grew more serious, "Though I will not take kindly to betrayal."

"And I have no intention to betray you," Kuvira corrected. "But you must understand that things cannot go back to the way they were. No matter how much you may wish for it, the old ways of the monarchy will never be coming back. But, what I can offer you, is a position in Ba Sing Se. Governor of the city. There is still much to be done, especially in rebuilding the Middle and Lower Rings."

The former earth queen furrowed her brows. It was obviously tough to swallow, seeing her kingdom and throne be dismantled, and having a younger woman half her age telling her what to do. Nonetheless, Hou-Ting nodded, "I will agree to these terms."

"I should add that this position is also provisional; I will need to see results if you wish to maintain it."

Kuvira's patronising lit a burning rage in Hou-Ting, though she hid it well save for her stare. "And what of my Dai Li?"

"The problem, is that they are loyal to you. That will need to change," Kuvira said. "I propose that they become incorporated into our existing military. The First Commanders and I will have full authority over them, and they will be an additional unit predominantly based in the capitol. Do you find these terms agreeable?"

Hou-Ting clearly had misgivings about all of this. Though, if she really wanted to move forwards and no longer be stuck dwelling in a cave, then Kuvira knew she would have to accept. "I do," she answered.

Kuvira gave a nod, "Then I look forward to be working with you. Governor Hou-Ting."

The title stung like a scorpion bee, though Hou-Ting forced a courteous smile. "Well, at least our disagreements have been resolved. And the other leaders have ceased their pitiful resistance attempt. I always knew you were a capable leader, Kuvira."

Her positive words were merely a formality, Kuvira knew, though she accepted them nonetheless. "Thank you Hou-Ting. And I am very grateful for your presence today. How about I show you around our headquarters tomorrow and we can talk further?"

"That would be ideal."

Giving a slight bow, Hou-Ting left with several agents in tow. Kuvira still had her proud smile on her face as she watched Hou-Ting leave. She noticed Baatar was still uneasy, "You haven't said much."

"I guess in a way I'm still just as surprised as the other Earth Kingdom leaders."

"But this is a good thing; almost all the other states have joined."

Baatar turned to face Kuvira, "But at what cost? I don't like working with her. Nor the Dai Li."

"I said it before; Hou-Ting and the Dai Li are just tools. That's all. We can discard them whenever we want. And with their help we finally managed to get nearly all the states united. We needed them." Baatar didn't respond, giving a soft grunt while looking away. Kuvira felt a slight anger building up, "Don't forget that you also shut me out. I had no one else to turn to except myself. I know that I can control this situation, control them, control her. We just need to see this through."

Kuvira could see that Baatar did feel guilt about what she said. He was angry at the time, but he never would've ignored her if he knew she were planning something this drastic. Still, he couldn't deny that having Hou-Ting here had worked. Baatar sighed, "We just need to keep an eye on her. And the Dai Li."

"I agree," Kuvira said. "But we couldn't have done this without them. It was just as you said; the other states cling to their old and backwards ways. That's why showing them this threat was the only thing that would get them to fall in line." She could see Baatar knew where she was coming from, though he still seemed uneasy about things. Kuvira softened her composure, reaching for Baatar's hand and squeezing it. They hadn't felt close for a while, especially with their fighting the past week, and this small act was comforting for both of them. "Soon, we can finally get married. I know you've been waiting, and longing for that as have I. But we have to see this through first."

It was a promise that Baatar had heard many times now, and although he still felt dragged along, hearing Kuvira's words melted away his coldness. He smiled, "I know. I love you."

"I love you too."

The pair kissed, feeling warmth and life in each other's arms. They still had much to do ahead, but if Baatar could hold on to this happy future they both envisioned, then he knew he could keep going a little longer.

Chapter Text

The branches of City Hall Tree stretched into the bright blue sky, a perfect resting spot for birds and spirits alike. Ever since Harmonic Convergence, the old building had been draped in spirit wilds, with this tree bursting through the roof becoming another icon of Republic City. While still functional as a government building, the vines and wilds gave an ambient peace to the surrounding area.

Inside City Hall however, it was anything but peaceful.

Raiko had a throbbing headache. He rubbed the front of his forehead, casting his face down. Prince Wu had been speaking non-stop for the past ten minutes, giving all manner of wild and outlandish ideas on how to get Kuvira to step down. Sadly, the other world leaders present hadn't offered any better ideas.

"... And then, we tell Kuvira that she won an all-expense paid-for vacation, but then, we drop her on a desert island –"

"Prince Wu, we appreciate your input, but can you please cease this useless chatter," Raiko cut in bluntly. His fuse was short, his anger bubbling up. He was frustrated at his associate Wenyan and the three inmates who hadn't contacted him for several weeks, and then out-of-the-blue it turns out they'd been arrested by the Earth Empire. While he usually tried to bite his tongue around the prince, today was not the day.

Prince Wu sunk back into his chair, "I was trying to help..."

Raiko sighed, "We need to come up with serious suggestions. How do we all feel about organising troops along Omashu's border to protect them from the empire? We could spin it as a defensive act."

"I cannot commit to such a move, President Raiko," Fire Lord Izumi said. Her daughter Crown Princess Ilah sat next to her, while Mako and Grand Secretariat Gun stood behind Prince Wu. "After the Hundred Year War, our nation made a declaration of peace. We can never invade the Earth Kingdom ever again."

"But these times call for such action, no? I was supposed to hear from King Renshu and other leaders in the Southern Earth Kingdom, but I've heard nothing."

Tenzin chimed in next, "President Raiko, while I understand the need for urgent action, moving in the military could escalate the situation. As far as we know, those Earth Kingdom states who have joined the Earth Empire have done so willingly."

"There have been reports of coercion and propaganda campaigns to be fair," Izumi said, "though I still agree with Tenzin. We must exhaust every opportunity for diplomacy before crossing that line. And even then, the Fire Nation can only be stationed in the United Republic for defense."

Sighing deeply, Raiko rubbed his head in his hands. He knew in his gut that this was all wrong. Kuvira had to be forcing states into her empire. And it was troubling that he hadn't heard anything from Renshu. "Suyin has organised a peace meeting in a couple weeks. It will be our last opportunity to negotiate. But I'm convinced we need some kind of pre-emptive action. Even just bolstering our forces along our border, or contacting those states nearest to the United Republic and forming alliances with them."

"We can certainly station our troops along our borders," General Iroh said.

"And the RCPD can fill in any gaps here in Republic City too," Lin replied.

Tenzin stroked his beard, "Perhaps this is all we can do for now." He glanced over to the Chieftains of the Northern Water Tribe, "Chief Desna and Chiefess Eska, have you heard any news of Avatar Korra's whereabouts?"

The twins exchanged a glance before Eska spoke, "No, we have not. Cousin Korra's whereabouts are still unknown."

"Hmm..." Tenzin gazed downwards.

Raiko shook his head, "We can't place all our hope in one missing Avatar. However, the United Republic cannot commit to anything that the other nations are not comfortable with either. We won't move our troops into the Earth Kingdom." The other leaders gave a nod in agreement, though Raiko still wished he could do more.

"Unfortunately there have been no other leads in our investigation of the Red Lotus claims," Izumi informed. "Though for now, the incidents have seemed to cease."

"Well, that's one positive at least," Tenzin replied. "And we still have Suyin in Zaofu. I can't see her joining the Earth Empire anytime soon." Even though the search for Korra had taken a back seat, he still felt like they had to do more to find her. Not only could she be in trouble, but the world could really use their Avatar in a time of such unrest. Tonraq was still out there searching – the only world leader not at this meeting – though even he hadn't come up with anything. Tenzin stroked his goatee again, wondering what more he could do.

Baatar still didn't like what was going on. He stared out over the plaza, watching for any sign of Hou-Ting or her Dai Li arriving. Next to him, Kuvira stood with a confident posture, arms positioned behind her back. "I wonder why she's taking so long?" Baatar thought out loud.

"She'll be here," Kuvira side eyed her fiancé, "and make sure to relax a little. We need them to feel comfortable."

Grunting to himself, Baatar relaxed his shoulders and let his arms hang at his sides. He was still on edge, but Kuvira had a point.

A moment later, the pair could see a hole opening up at the base of the palace steps. Two men in dark robes and pointed hats parted the earth, with another figure stepping out into the light. Baatar frowned, "Should've guessed they'd be travelling underground."

"I asked them to," Kuvira replied. "I only want our personnel knowing of her presence for now, not any of the citizens."

Once at the stairs, the Dai Li shifted an earth platform underneath them, sliding all the way up. The trio reached the top of the palace and stepped off. "What a lovely day it is," Hou-Ting smiled, eyeing up Kuvira and Baatar. Her agents returned the palace steps to normal with a quick motion of their hands.

"Welcome, Hou-Ting," Kuvira said. "I should warn you though, our headquarters look quite different to how it may have in the past." Even though the meeting yesterday had been in one of the palace rooms, she hadn't shown Hou-Ting much of the rest of the palace yet.

"Oh? I'm intrigued to see what you've done with the place," Hou-Ting replied.

The group made their way through the entrance. As they passed several smaller rooms, soldiers stopped in their tracks when they saw Hou-Ting and the Dai Li. "Assemble all personnel in the main hall," Kuvira directed one stunned soldier. He quickly nodded and darted off.

"My, it sure is... busy," Hou-Ting remarked.

"The palace had a lot of unused space. This seemed like the most efficient way to maximize our productivity."

"Productivity..." the former Earth Queen mumbled. She watched as several soldiers scribbled away at desks in one room. It used to be one of the several lounges for guests.

At last, the group made it to the massive throne room doors. Or as Kuvira called it, the 'main hall'. Hou-Ting could already see some of what was inside given the doors were open. But nothing could've quite prepared her when she stepped inside. "Dear earth spirits almighty..."

"I know, isn't it impressive?" Kuvira smiled. If Hou-Ting wasn't mistaken, Kuvira seemed like she was enjoying rubbing it in.

Hou-Ting looked out with a mix of grief and horror at what had become of her throne room. Instead of the grand, open floors of greenstone stretching out like an endless expanse, the room was cluttered with desks and people, like spider ants working collectively in a nest. All of them looked up in disbelief at seeing Hou-Ting, while she returned the same expression from seeing her old throne room in such a state.

As they walked further inside, Kuvira could see Hou-Ting eyeing up the throne at the other end. "It makes for a nice backdrop in staff photos," Kuvira mentioned.

"It will take some getting used to," Hou-Ting replied. Zaheer hadn't managed to kill her in this room, though seeing the throne room redesigned like this certainly could have.

Soldiers started making their way into the throne room. Word had already spread about the former Earth Queen and two Dai Li agents walking about, but every soldier who came in still looked on in shock nonetheless.

Once the room was full, Kuvira addressed them, "As you can see, the former Earth Queen Hou-Ting is with us today, as well as two of her Dai Li. We have come to an agreement, and have chosen to no longer be enemies." Kuvira paused to let everything sink it. She could see confused and concerned expressions in her men, "I want to reiterate, and emphasise, that this does not mean we are ruled by a monarchy, nor will Hou-Ting have ultimate authority here. But with her as Governor of Ba Sing Se, and her Dai Li as a division among our military, we will have a stronger empire. And we will need this in the coming times when the other world leaders, jealous of what we've accomplished, will try to tear everything we've built down."

Varrick turned to his assistant at the back of the room, "Spirits. If Hou-Ting knows how to fake a death I want to find out how she did it!" he whispered. Zhu Li simply raised an eyebrow.

Many in the crowd look anxious or even angry. Kuvira worried, though kept her face emotionless like stone. She had to think of something to calm their nerves. Obviously seeing the former queen back from the grave was a massive shock in itself, but to have her and the Dai Li working with them was another leap on top of that. Perhaps it was the one that would break the camelephant's back.

"I know that many of you must have concerns," Baatar spoke aloud. Kuvira shot a glance his way. "I have to admit, I do too. The former monarchy represents everything that we are working so hard to dismantle. And the Dai Li are notorious for their crimes during the Hundred Year War, for continuing the cycle of oppression that we have all lived under since. However," Baatar locked eyes with Kuvira, "I trust our leader. I trust Kuvira's judgement. She has made an agreement with our former enemy, and brought peace in a time when we have many who want to stop us from achieving greatness. If you have misgivings about working with Hou-Ting then fine, but I hope you can still trust in our Great Uniter. I... know that I still do." He gave a soft smile, looking into Kuvira's eyes with an intense longing. Maybe he did believe in her after all. Kuvira returned a smile.

It was hard to gauge where the soldiers were with all this. Some looked confused or unsure of what to think. Others were wary, and distrusting. Kuvira knew they had to win them over. "Why don't we have the new Governor share some words with us, to put all minds at ease?" Kuvira glanced over to Hou-Ting.

While at first Hou-Ting was a little surprised to be put on the spot, she gave a courteous nod and stepped forwards, "Our kingdom has gone through many changes. We have been united in war, and separated by it. However," Hou-Ting looked towards Kuvira, taking a lot of energy to muster up her next words, "I have come to accept that however grand and prosperous my dynasty may have been, something better has taken its place. Therefore, I want to publicly proclaim loyalty to Kuvira, and loyalty to the Earth Empire, in an effort to prove my devotion."

The room was silent. Many stared in disbelief. Kuvira wore a proud grin as she looked on, a feeling of accomplishment and satisfaction manifesting inside. This was everything she had hoped for. She had defeated Hou-Ting, and proven to everyone that nobility didn't define what she could accomplish. "Thank you, Governor Hou-Ting. The Dai Li will serve under the first commanders and myself, while Hou-Ting will bring her expertise in negotiations to oversee the rebuilding of Ba Sing Se's economy. And I should add that I would prefer for this partnership to be kept within our ranks, lest word gets out and the other leaders or Red Lotus use this knowledge against us. While we have numerous enemies who wish to dismantle all we have achieved, today marks the day where we have one less threat to our prosperity."

There was little applause at first, though eventually, soldiers in the room started clapping together. It was hardly like the ovation they would get when they first set out, but Kuvira took it as a sign that they'd accepted Hou-Ting. At least in some capacity. The real challenge would be keeping it under wraps from the rest of the world and the other Earth Kingdom citizens. Hou-Ting still posed a threat as a viable contender for the Earth Kingdom throne, and it hadn't slipped past Kuvira that the former earth queen could very well try and take it back.

But nonetheless, as the soldiers clapped for them and Hou-Ting gave Kuvira a bow, she felt exhilarated, relieved, and invincible. Because now she was in charge of the Dai Li, had Hou-Ting wrapped around her finger, and all that was left was to stomp out the last threats to her empire.

After the meeting, Kuvira walked with Hou-Ting down the long palace hallways. The former earth queen was still getting used to the place. The walls and floors were far barer than when she'd been here, courtesy of the thieves and raids after Zaheer attacked her, but still, being here in the palace once again brought comfort.

Kuvira came to a stop and motioned towards a room on the right, "This will be your new work office. I hope it has everything you need."

Hou-Ting peered in cautiously, half expecting to see desks piled on top of each other for the sake of 'productivity'. To her surprise, it was quite a roomy office, with a single desk, several chairs and a table, plus the odd bit of décor sprucing up the place. it even had a drinks table for rice wines and sake. "I'm glad I have an office to myself."

"It seemed appropriate; your role will be to meet with investors and businessmen to negotiate trade deals," Kuvira replied. "I hope you don't mind but I've organised a meeting for tomorrow morning. A wealthy investor from the north who is interested in starting up in Ba Sing Se."

Hou-Ting glanced at the folder as it was handed her way. "Well, you do work quickly, don't you?"

"Of course. That's what has made the Earth Empire successful."

"Well, I will get started then. And I will make sure to demonstrate that our partnership is worth it."

"Good," Kuvira smiled, though her eyes were cold. "You'll also have weekly progress reports to complete, just so I can make sure you're on track. I'm sure you will prove your worth in time."

"But of course," Hou-Ting returned the same fake smile, dipping her head lightly. When the door closed however, her expression morphed into a deep, resentful look. It had taken every ounce of her strength not to react to the gall of that woman, but now that she was alone in her office, she could let it all show on her face.

How could Kuvira dare to speak to her in such a condescending tone? Hou-Ting felt humiliated. She was just about to throw something when she heard a knock at her window. She was several stories up, so whoever it was they had to be hanging outside. "Hurry up Guozhi."

The window opened, and Hou-Ting watched as a Dai Li agent with a grey braid made his way inside. When he stood to his feet, he bowed, "Nice to see you, Governor Hou-Ting."

Hou-Ting frowned, "Call me that again and I'll have the others throw you in a cell."

The agent of the Dai Li, chuckled, "Is your first day on the job that bad?"

"I'm currently sitting in what used to be my second dressing room, being told by some naïve fool that she'll be tracking my progress as I work." Hou-Ting waved her hand towards the side table, "Make yourself useful and pour me a drink."

Guozhi nodded. He flicked his wrist, forming a metal corkscrew from the plates of his glove. "So, what is your next move?"

"You know, the job itself isn't that undesirable," Hou-Ting said. She stared at the folder, almost with a fondness as she reminisced. When she'd started out in trying to take back the throne after her father passed, much of her time had been spent with negotiations and trade deals. "It takes me back, all of this. But I cannot stand being humiliated by that silver-plated wench." Hou-Ting was handed a glass of alcohol. After taking a sip, she stared out into the blue skies, "For now, you need to lay low. Gather what intel you can. And I'll continue to perform my duties."

The Dai Li agent furrowed his brows, "You're giving in to her?"

Hou-Ting didn't take too kindly to his tone, "Watch how you speak to me. You may be my closest ally, but I am still a queen," she tutted. There was a pause as she collected her thoughts, "Have you ever thought about the viper rat? It's a peculiar animal. Both prey and predator."

"Can't say I have. I didn't know you were much a philosopher?"

"But of course; it is the job of royalty to ponder the world. Common people have no time for such things," Hou-Ting took another sip. "The rodent part of the viper rat makes it a target to other predators, yet, one cannot forget it is part serpent as well. At this time, I am very much like the viper rat. My turn to strike must be only when I am guaranteed to survive."

Guozhi nodded along, "So when will that be?"

Hou-Ting set her glass down, still gazing out the window, "Kuvira has the resources to unite my entire kingdom while I cannot. So, I will help her do so. After that... we'll see what happens."

The Dai Li agent grinned. "Well, I should probably take my leave. If I stay in the open too long I'll get roped into one of Kuvira's squadrons," Guozhi replied. "I'll be in touch... Governor Hou-Ting."

Thankfully, Guozhi left out the window before Hou-Ting could throw anything at him. She'd have to reinstall respect in him for sure. But still, she knew he would always be loyal to her. There would come a time when she would have to make a move, and Kuvira would have the chance to either join her or be eliminated. But for now, Hou-Ting would play the part of 'governor' for as long as it suited her.

Day one on the job had been a gruelling orientation. Day two seemed to be going even worse.

Tahno had been whizzing around the palace, taking orders and serving Earth Empire personnel all day. As he returned to the kitchen, Tahno wiped his forearm across his face, sighing deeply. His actions didn't go unnoticed by the head chef.

"Lee! Why have you stopped serving? You cannot take a break!" the short, plump man screeched.

"Uh! Right!" Tahno snapped back into action. He was seriously going to get his lawyers to sue Raiko for putting him through all this.

Saihkan and Lieutenant had landed positions in the kitchen. Mysteriously, two of the kitchen hands hadn't shown up for work. They probably had Wenyan to thank for that. Saihkan was busy chopping a green onion when felt a hot breath against him. Reluctantly, he turned and caught the head chef's fiery stare.

"Those onions are not thin enough! THINNER! See him!" he pointed over to Lieutenant. "He do it right!"

"Not the only thing that needs to be thinner," Saihkan mumbled, eyeing up the head chef as he waddled away. Saihkan turned his attention to Lieutenant working, "Seems like you're good with a knife."

Lieutenant smiled, uncharacteristically for him, "I used to work in a kitchen in my teens. Been here, done this before." His smile faded when he felt his knife slip from under his hand, cutting the green onion on an odd angel. He shot a glare to Saihkan, who smirked while tucking his hand away.

After filling up his trolley with the next batch of orders, Tahno glanced back to his comrades, "See you guys later."

"No talking!"

Tahno cowered as the thundering voice shook him to his core. He quickly sped into the hallway, eager to get away from the head chef.

The palace was more like a maze than a dwelling for royalty. Tahno had found himself lost during nearly every order. Somehow he'd made it to the third floor, and quickly double checked his order receipt to confirm he was in the right place.

He still didn't know what they were supposed to be looking for. Kuvira and Baatar had other chefs and waiters catering for them, and it's not like they could just ask anyone what they knew. Plus, with the busy work schedules and that spawn of Vaatu head chef ordering them around, they barely had a chance to investigate. Whatever way he looked at it, the only way Tahno thought they'd find anything was by a stroke of dumb luck. And judging by how their journey had panned out so far, it didn't seem like they had a lot of that.

After going round in circles, Tahno eventually made it to the right door. He knocked hesitantly. The door flung open, scaring the waterbender as he took a step back. "Uh... your room service is ready."

The woman who answered the door glared at him with a deep disdain. "Hmph. You're late, you know."

"Sorry," Tahno muttered. "New on the job."

"If it were still my palace I'd have you fired for incompetence. Come now," she flicked her hand towards the centre table. Several well-dressed visitors sat around the serving table, all staring at Tahno. He quickly darted in and served the tea, placed the utensils and bamboo steamers, and sped out like a startled rabaroo.

Tahno grabbed his trolley and wheeled it into the next hallway. Today wasn't great. He didn't know how much longer he could put up with getting yelled at by angry chefs and old ladies. Still, something seemed off about the last patron he served, though he couldn't quite put his finger on it. Maybe he was just tired and worn out from this whole ordeal.

After turning the next corner, Tahno noticed a group of soldiers milling about. One of them, high up in rank judging by his stripes, was conversing with someone as they turned a corner. It was only when they came into view that Tahno recognised who, or what, it was. It was an agent of the Dai Li.

The waterbender clasped a hand over his mouth to muffle a gasp. He pushed his trolley along, trying to act as calm as possible. Which was nearly impossible. His arms trembled as he continued along the hallway. Perhaps he could just pretend to be lost again and change direction? No, it was too late for that. And maybe he could try and find out what was going on? Dai Li conversing freely with the Earth Empire? Weren't they meant to be enemies? If he wanted out of this wild goose pigeon chase, then he knew he had to gather intel.

Tahno's shaky legs carried him further through the hallway. His arms were wobbling so much that the plates and utensils on the trolley all rattled like an earthquake was happening. Still, he tried to keep himself calm, and listen to what was being said. Without making it seem like he was listening.

As he approached, Tahno heard the soldier mention something about troop numbers. The pair looked up as he walked by, both of them wary of his presence. Tahno politely dipped his head, taking every ounce of strength not to look nervous, "Would either of you care for some tea?"

"No thank you," the soldier responded gruffly. The Dai Li agent stared intently at Tahno, sending chills down his spine.

"No worries, that's all cool," Tahno bowed again. He knew they would wait until he was out of earshot to start talking again, but if he could come back this way again maybe he'd hear something important.

After doing a loop around the next few hallways, Tahno made his way back to the previous one. He could hear the soldier and Dai Li agent still there. Quietly, he wheeled the trolley from behind. He could've sworn he heard the words "Governor Hou-Ting," spoken, but that made no sense at all. Wasn't Hou-Ting the previous monarch? She was thought to have died in the palace after the Red Lotus had attacked.

"You there!"

Tahno squeaked when he heard the soldier speaking. He pretended to not hear, continuing down the hallway.

"Trolley boy!"

There was no way that he could keep going now. Had his cover been blown? Tahno hesitantly turned back, "Uh... yeah? How can I help?"

The soldier strode over with the Dai Li agent snaking behind. His eyes looked intense, staring like a pythanoconda in the wild. The soldier cleared his throat, "One pot of jasmine tea. To my office. Room 235."

Tahno was nearly sweating beads at this point. He quickly nodded his head, jotting down the details onto his note pad, "Of course. It should be there in ten minutes!" The soldier nodded, turning back.

Once in a different hallway, Tahno sucked in a gulp of air. He thought he was a goner. After catching his breath, Tahno started making his way back to the kitchen. And then, a lightbulb went off in his mind.

Tahno's face went pale once he pieced everything together. The older woman he saw, the Dai Li agent, what the soldier had said. It all made sense!

In the kitchen, Lieutenant and Saihkan glanced up as their comrade returned. His face looked white as a sheet, and his eyes widened. "What happened to you? Looks like you've seen a ghost?" Saihkan asked.

Finally managing to look up at them, Tahno laughed nervously, "Well, funny you should say that."

The evening sun was calm and serene over Yue bay. Tenzin gazed out over the waters, still doubting his decision. But he thought back to everything that had happened these past few months, with the coronation, the Earth Empire, and now Kuvira taking Earth Kingdom states by force. He was worried, and concerned, but he knew this was the only way.

Tenzin exhaled, closing his eyes as he spoke, "The world is heading down a dangerous path. There is much tension between the nations, and I fear, like many others, that this may lead to another world war. If ever there was a time to have the Avatar with us, it is now. We need to find Korra." Tenzin turned around to face three of his kids. Jinora, Meelo, and Ikki, all stood and listened, "This mission is of the upmost importance. I must stay in Republic City to keep tabs on what's going on, but I need you three to search for Korra and bring her home. Can I count on you?"

All three of them stood with determined expressions. Korra wasn't just an Avatar to them, but also a friend. She'd been like a big sister while living on Air Temple Island, and the thought of her being held captive or injured somewhere was motivation enough, even without the conflict that was ensuing in the Earth Kingdom. Whatever it took, they were ready.

Meelo grinned confidently, "Well, you can count on one of us. I'm not so sure about my sisters."

"Hey!" Ikki protested. Jinora simply rolled her eyes.

Tenzin facepalmed. "What have I done..." he mumbled.

Chapter Text

The weather was perfect for flying. Ikki and Meelo hoisted up their supplies onto the flying bison's back, while an RCPD airship landed on the other side of the Air Temple Island courtyard. Tenzin and Pema watched their kids preparing for their journey from the pavilion, looking on with a mix of worry and pride as any parent would. Their oldest Jinora had been an airbending master for over three years, being the first to earn her tattoos out of the Air Nation. Though the other two were still young. It was hard for Pema to let go of that motherly instinct to protect them, even Jinora, but especially Ikki and Meelo.

"Are you sure you can't go with them?" Pema turned to her husband.

Tenzin stroked his goatee, "I wish I could, but things are tense here in Republic City. Raiko specifically asked me to stay."

Ikki poked her head up from below, "Mom, we'll be fine. Grandpa Aang was around our age when he and his friends travelled the world." She beamed with a wide grin as she reassured her mother.

Pema sighed, "Well, at least I won't have to worry about you starving out there." She pulled up a sack of food she'd been preparing all night.

"Mom, we're going to be in the wild! Living off the land!" Meelo replied, he and his lemur Poki sharing an annoyed look. "We don't need your food!"

"But I made your favourite," Pema smiled warmly.

"Sweet buns with happy faces on them?" Meelo ran back to the railing, "Well, I guess we aren't in the wild just yet." As he grabbed one of the buns and undid the leaf wrapping, his face screwed up, "Aw, this one is smudged!"

Pema smiled fondly again, "Well, when you're in the wild sometimes things get smudged." She touched his nose, and Meelo couldn't help but grin.

While the family were talking, Lin had disembarked from the airship. Her metal police armour clinked lightly as she walked over, holding a portable radio. "You kids all ready?"

"It does make me feel better that you'll be out there too, Lin," Pema said.

"We'll be travelling separately to cover more ground, but I'll make sure to check in with them," Lin replied. They all turned behind where a shriek came from the airship. Hanbao held his hands out, trying to get the shirshu to stop hissing at him and lashing her tongue. Lin rolled her eyes, "If my hands aren't full with those two that is," she mumbled. "I only wish we could've started this search sooner."

Tenzin nodded, "Yes, so do I. But nonetheless, thank you for agreeing to go along."

Lin smiled, "It's the least I can do. Korra needs us, and we need her too." She turned to Ikki, holding out the radio she'd been carrying, "Look after this. Your sister can project her spirit, but obviously I can't do the same, so this is the only way I'll get through to you."

Ikki reached for the radio but her brother snatched it first, "Hey! Meelo!"

"I'm in charge of the radio! I can't trust you with it!"

"Meelo," Tenzin chided. "Be kind to your sisters. And Jinora, you're in charge."

"I answer to no one, even if they have their tattoos!" Meelo cheered, with Poki chittering triumphantly on his shoulder.

All Tenzin could do was sigh deeply, hoping that his kids could somehow find Korra before they killed each other. After the last of the supplies were loaded, Tenzin and Pema watched as their kids took off on Jinora's bison Pepper and Lin's airship following them into the distance.

The group spent the rest of the day flying, with the occasional stop to rest or scout out the area. Still, Jinora couldn't sense Korra's energy, nor could their shirshu Jiao pick up any scent left by the Avatar. By nightfall they reached the edge of the United Republic.

At first light they each set off again, with Jinora and the airbenders travelling further out and Lin and Hanbao travelling slower with the shirshu. So far, Jinora had spent more time on this journey defusing arguments between her siblings then she had searching for Korra's energy. Though there hadn't been much of a chance to meditate properly while flying her bison, nor had there been any particularly spiritual areas to meditate around.

While scanning the horizon, Jinora noticed a tall plateau with several stone spires sitting on top. Colourful flags had been hung between the structures, each dotted with assorted spirits watching the world around them. It wasn't the most ideal place to meditate, but if the presence of spirits was anything to go by then perhaps she would have more luck connecting to Korra there.

Pepper rumbled a low sound as she landed, and Meelo immediately leaped off. "Finally! I've been holding in my pee for an hour!" the young airbender exclaimed. He quickly took off behind one of the stone buildings.

Ignoring her brother's outburst, Jinora found a quiet spot overlooking the valley below. At least, it was quiet at first. She'd been sitting in a mediating position for no more than five seconds when her sister peered around the corner, "If you get through to Korra, tell her I say hi!"

Jinora grumbled to herself.

"Feel anything yet?" Ikki quizzed.

"Hmmph."

Another second passed before Ikki returned, "What's taking so long?"

"Ikki, I can't concentrate if you keep talking. Why don't you go and play with one of those spirits over there?"

Ikki sighed, hanging her head and turning back around the corner. She noticed Meelo returning after his emergency, "Jinora's spirit-y powers are broken and she can't find Korra."

Now Jinora was exasperated, "My powers are not broken! I just need more than five seconds! And some quiet." Jinora and her siblings had always had fights, but she'd underestimated just how annoying they'd be on this mission.

"While you two try and pull yourselves together, Poki and I are going into town to see if anyone's seen Korra," Meelo said. His lemur chittered while landing on his arm.

Ikki piped up, "Sounds like a plan to me!"

"Enough chit-chat!" Meelo scolded his older sister, much to Ikki's annoyance. "You can hold the poster."

"Wow," Ikki looked surprised as her brother unravelled his portrait of Korra. "I didn't know you could draw."

"You don't know a lot of things about me, sister," Meelo grinned. He quickly switched back to his bossy self, "Now let's roll!"

Another day came to an end, and neither search party had much luck. Jinora meditated all afternoon, but still couldn't pick up any trace of Korra. Ikki and Meelo had found nothing in the nearby town below the plateau, and Lin's group hadn't found anything either. The only consolation was that Jiao had only lashed out at Hanbao a dozen times, much less than the previous two days. Perhaps he was growing on her.

Now, the five of them sat around a small fire as the night sky rolled out above them. Lin felt bad to be cooking meat in front of the airbenders, being vegetarians, but she had to consume her perishable supplies before they would spoil. "Sorry about the meat."

Jinora shook her head, "It's not a problem. Mom packed us enough for two weeks."

"We shouldn't need it though! We're supposed to be living in the wild!" Meelo started up again.

"Ugh, Meelo," Ikki scolded.

Lin gave a sympathetic look to Jinora, "Has it been like this all day?"

"Mmmhmm."

Sighing to herself, Lin finished cooking. It was a little on the rare side, but better to get it over with and eaten. "We didn't have much luck either."

In the corner, Jiao had made herself comfy next to one of the stone spires. "Here you go... good girl...," a nervous Hanbao offered the creature some cooked meat. He moved faster than a viper rat as he dropped the offering and ran, almost like he were leaving it as a tribute to some fearsome spirit. Jiao may as well have been. Being a shirshu she didn't have eyes to glare at her handler, but that only made her more terrifying for the poor Hanbao.

"Meelo and Ikki didn't find any leads in the town either," Jinora said to Lin.

A cheeky grin formed on Ikki's face as she thought of what to say next, "But we did find an old lady who called Meelo adorable."

Meelo was not impressed, "Ikki!"

"And he found a girlfriend too. She gave him a flower and Meelo turned bright red."

"Hey!"

"That's enough you two," Lin chided. She didn't have kids of her own and the whole 'substitute' parenting thing was awkward, but she was the only responsible adult here. Well, there was Hanbao, but he didn't seem like he'd be very good at disciplining children either.

"We'll need to get some sleep, so both of you behave," Jinora added. She turned to Lin, eager to change topic, "I'll have to head out further tomorrow. I don't feel anything connecting me to Korra at all."

Lin nodded, "Jiao is still new to tracking, and she's acclimating to the scents around her. So we'll be taking it slower. We may not see much of each other so take care, and radio if you need anything."

Jinora stared into the distance. "We have to find her," she said.

Lin grunted, sharing the same sentiment. It wasn't going well so far, but they still had a lot more territory to cover.

Nighttime had rolled around quickly as Kuvira signed off on the last few reports and briefings for the day. It would be her last chance to fill out this paperwork before heading away for the week.

It seemed she wasn't the only one still working late; Hou-Ting meandered her way through the main hall, still forgetting about all the desks in the room and nearly colliding with one. She was still getting used to her throne room refurbishment. "I see the rumours about your work ethic are true; it's well past sundown and the Great Uniter is still hard at work."

"I'll be heading away for the next week, so this needs to be done," she replied, giving only a slight glance before returning to the reports.

Hou-Ting continued to mill about, eyeing up the new fittings in the room. "I thought I'd inform you that the negotiations with Crystal Industries was successful. They've agreed to start up a new outlet and factory in the Lower Ring."

"I'm glad," Kuvira gave a polite smile.

"And the Xiao family of investors are also looking for several start-ups to back in the Upper Ring. I'm sure with their resources we'll transform the city."

"Excellent news. I see you are also working quickly despite being here for a short time."

Hou-Ting smiled in reply. She didn't leave just yet however, instead mulling over her next words carefully, "I don't mean to intrude, of course, but I couldn't help but overhear from the soldiers that much of the military is moving in on Zaofu."

Finally, Kuvira's smile faded. She stopped writing mid-signature and slowly looked up at the former earth queen. "The military's movements are none of your concern."

"Of course," Hou-Ting bowed, giving her a chance to glare daggers at the floor before regaining her composure. Thankfully, Kuvira didn't notice. "But may I offer this one bit of advice, should you be making a move to unite Zaofu into the Earth Empire?" She didn't give Kuvira a chance to say no, "A city without its people is just an empty seal turtle shell. What I mean to say, is that if you want Zaofu to be a productive asset to the empire than you must ensure its workforce remain."

It was something Kuvira had already considered, multiple times, when getting the other states to join. Did Hou-Ting think she was that incompetent? No, it was probably that she wanted to find out more about the mission. But Kuvira still didn't trust Hou-Ting with that information. And it wasn't her role either; the former earth queen was a tool to use in rebuilding Ba Sing Se, nothing more, nothing less, though if she kept up this persistent quizzing she might wear out her welcome. Kuvira shuffled another set of papers, barely looking up as she dismissed Hou-Ting, "Duly noted."

Seeing her reluctance to share anything, Hou-Ting gave a short bow, "I will keep you informed of my progress," she said.

There was still something about what Hou-Ting said that niggled away in the back of Kuvira's mind. Of course, Kuvira could see that Hou-Ting was sticking her nose where it didn't belong, but perhaps a small gesture would help the former earth queen feel at ease, making her easier to control. "Hou-Ting," Kuvira called out. "There is something, actually. I need the Dai Li to do something for me once we reach Zaofu."

It had been a couple days since the kids had left the plateau. After another day of finding nothing, Jinora, Ikki, and Meelo arrived at a coastal town just as the sun began to set over the waters. They'd checked in with Lin and Hanbao every day over the radio, but they too weren't having much luck.

The town was small but homely, with people wandering around and chatting as the working day came to an end. Jinora and Ikki had just picked up some more supplies from an older woman running a shop, while Meelo walked down to the dock. As he stared at the fish monger stand, he couldn't help but notice a set of framed photographs on the back wall. His eyes widened as he saw the first was of his grandpa Aang, though the second...

"Jinora! Ikki! It's Korra!"

The two airbenders stopped what they were doing and immediately bolted over, "Where where where where where where?!" Ikki beamed.

Jinora frowned, "It's just a photo."

"At least it's something!" Meelo defended.

The fishmonger grinned ear-to-ear, "Pretty neat huh? She came by... eh... maybe a year ago?"

"Looks like someone just dug up a good ol' fashioned lead," Meelo grinned proudly. "Then where did she go?"

"Er... I dunno. But she didn't look too good. She tried fighting off some thieves but couldn't even stop them."

The news that Korra wasn't in a good spot only fuelled the kid's sense of urgency. "Well, we've found some kind of trail at least. We just have to figure out where Korra went next," Jinora said.

"Well, I can't be the only one digging up leads," Meelo replied. He huffed and stormed off, much to the annoyance of his sisters.

"Remember when he used to be so nice and kind?" Ikki asked.

Jinora frowned, "Nope."

The trio made camp for the night and took off again in the morning. It had been welcome news for Lin and Hanbao that the kids had found a lead, and it meant that at least a year ago, Korra had been up and about, even if she was unwell. The question now was where did the Avatar go next?

As midday rolled around, Jinora guided Pepper down to a clearing along the river. Hopefully the calm and tranquil sounds of water would provide a good place to concentrate.

It took less then five minutes before the other two started fighting. Meelo was busy running around with Poki while Ikki rummaged through their bags. Something was wrong, "Hey, where's all the supplies Mom gave us?" Ikki asked.

"I threw them in the river."

"You did WHAT?! That was supposed to last us two weeks!"

"Hey! Keep it down!" Jinora called out from under a tree. "I'm trying to meditate."

Meelo grinned, "Yeah, keep it down Ikki."

"But Meelo threw away all our food!"

"From now on, we hunt for our meals!" Meelo grabbed a stick and waved it about, with Poki chittering along with him.

Ikki was exasperated. "But Meelo! We're vegetarians; we don't hunt for our food!"

Her brother ignored her pleas, "Enough whining! Poki and I will go get us some grub." Meelo marched off from the camp, a determined look on his face, while all Ikki could do was yell a frustrated cry into the wind. This trip was only getting worse.

"My name is Meelo, and I like to throw away food and fart all the time!" Ikki marched through the forest, imitating her younger brother. She needed to vent, and this was the only way she knew how. Her demeanor switched as she mocked her older sister, "My name is Jinora, and I'm so above it all because I'm meditating all the time." With an angry grunt she shot a gust of wind ahead.

Her face softened when she noticed something in the grass; it was a small sugar glider, clutching a berry. Ikki immediately felt guilty, "Oh I'm sorry, I didn't see you there little guy." The small creature shook nervously, and then quickly took off into the air. "No wait! You forgot your lunch!" Ikki called out. She picked up the berry and flew after it.

After trying to hand the berry back, Ikki crashed into a branch and spun out of control. She toppled onto the ground with a thud. "Uh...," Ikki rubbed her head, sitting up against a log. And to make matters worse, the berry had smooshed against her cheek, leaving orange juices stuck to her face. She came out to the forest to vent and clear her head, though now things felt worse than before.

She felt something furry land on her shoulder. It seemed the sugar glider wasn't scared off after all. Ikki smiled, "Does this mean we're friends now?" The sugar glider started licking the berry juice off her face, while the young airbender giggled. Perhaps it wasn't all bad, despite everything that had happened on this trip.

It was only now that Ikki noticed her surroundings. She was sitting in a muddy clearing, with lifeless stumps of trees cluttering the landscape. She'd heard her dad mention how the Earth Empire had been overharvesting the land, and maybe she'd ended up in their territory?

Her questions were answered when a voice came from behind, "You there! You're trespassing!"

Ikki spun around and saw two men in green uniforms staring her way. She couldn't get caught by them. Taking off as fast as she could, Ikki sprinted the other way.

"After her!"

The earth shifted under her feet, and Ikki darted upwards to avoid the mud clasping around her feet. Again, she leapt over their attack, and then another set of rock pincers nearly had her. But as soon as she tried to take off into the air, the soldier just managed to get her. The muddy earth yanked her down as she cried out, while the two soldiers made their way over.

Back at the camp, Jinora had found a different spot to continue meditating. It was frustrating not being able to sense Korra at all, and she had doubts about whether she even could. But still, she tried not to lose hope and let negative thoughts cloud her mind. Easier said than done with her two siblings fighting all the time.

As if on cue, her brother came staggering in from the forest with Poki trailing behind him. He was holding a purple-stained bag while clutching his stomach, letting out the occasional groan. Jinora raised an eyebrow, "What's up with you?"

"Uh... I found some berries," Meelo replied, holding up his bounty.

Clearly they weren't very edible, but Jinora recognised the colour and at least they weren't terribly toxic. But these purple berries caused a nasty queasiness and stomach cramps. "Looks like you picked a bad batch of berries."

"No... they're fine... I just ate too many, see," Meelo turned around and gave his best convincing smile, though with his sunken eyes and dribble it wasn't doing the job. Nearby, Poki spewed up purple vomit.

Jinora sighed, "While you were out picking your poisonous berries, did you see Ikki by any chance?"

Meelo looked surprised at first, then took a moment to shake his head, "No, we didn't see her. Has she run off?"

"Maybe. I'll see if I can connect to her spiritual energy."

The Earth Empire base was barely more than a cabin. The interior was taken up by the two bunk beds and table, with a small kitchen area squashed into the corner. After getting captured by the soldiers, Ikki had been taken here and tied to one of the chairs. All she could do was wait for the soldiers to make their move. Still, she didn't sense anything sinister from them. In fact, the tanned one with the shaved sides seemed a little dim, though as the pair stood either side of her she couldn't help but let anxiety set in.

"Alright little lady," the rounder soldier with the moustache said, "tell us what you're doing in our territory. Are you a spy?"

"No I'm not a spy! I swear!" Ikki blurted out, a little too quickly. She couldn't control herself as she began talking faster, "I've been travelling with my brother and sister. It's our first big mission together, but if we don't find the Avatar my dad Tenzin will be really disappointed. Please, you have to believe me!"

Moustache-soldier glanced to his companion. It seemed this chatty airbender kid had revealed more than she meant to. "Can I talk to you for a minute?" He led them both over to the other side of the cabin. "This girl, did you hear what she said? She's Tenzin's kid. Y'know, the airbending master? Son of Avatar Aang? Do you know what that means?"

The other soldier looked clueless. "Nah but try one of these macaroons. They're delightful." He had recently come across a whole bag of the sweet treats and offered one up to his comrade.

Unfortunately, the other soldier wasn't as pleased as he was with the snacks. "Get that out of my face!" he swatted it away. The other soldier picked it up as moustache-face continued, "If we capture these three airbender kids and deliver them to Kuvira, then I'm sure we'll get a big-time promotion!"

"You mean we'll finally get out of this dump?"

Stache-face nodded slowly, while the other soldier finally started getting it. This was their one stroke of luck since being transferred here, and now, it was their ticket out.

"Er... sorry little lady, I think we got off on the wrong foot. So," he leant in closer, "you're out here with your bother and sister. Where's your campsite?"

"Why do you wanna know?"

The other soldier piped up, "Uh... we just want to get the family back together. Maybe we could all sit around and have a nice plate of macaroons."

He placed the dish of sweet treats in front of Ikki, though her eyes squinted as she examined the macaroons. "Where... did you get those?"

"I found a whole sack of them down by the river," the soldier replied gleefully. "And with each treat comes a handwritten note. This one says, 'You're my handsome little man'. Hah, isn't that sweet!"

Ikki knew she'd seen them before, "My Mom wrote that! That's our sack of food!"

"Enough with the macaroons!" the moustache soldier yelled. They were getting nowhere. "Where are your brother and sister now?"

"Who cares?" Ikki sighed. Despite being captured, she didn't exactly want to go back and join her siblings. This whole mission had been a nightmare, with them leaving her out, telling her off, and she didn't mind some time away from them in all honesty. "I'd rather hang out here with you guys. Hit me with one of those macaroons!" she said, opening her mouth so the soldier could toss her one.

The round soldier stroked his moustache, sighing angrily. Perhaps they could take a short break. Both of them sat down and ate together.

Once the plate of macaroons was finished, Ikki finally broke the silence, "It seems pretty lonely out here. Where's everybody else?"

"I... uh... don't want to talk about it," the moustache soldier said, turning his face away.

"Aw, he's just upset because Kuvira's taking all the troops to Zaofu but we had to be stationed here."

"Well, it's the last state left and then the whole empire is united! And you know there's gonna be a big party afterwards," he replied, throwing his hands into the air. Truth be told he wouldn't have ended up here if hadn't asked his superior officer's daughter on a date. He didn't take it well and had him on cleaning duties for a week before sending him to this outpost.

Ikki smiled warmly, "It's tough being left out of things huh? I know exactly what you're going through."

The soldier turned around surprised, "You do?"

"Sure! My brother and sister are always leaving me out fun stuff. This mission is supposed to be something we do together, but they won't even let me help."

"Well, that's not fair," the other soldier replied. "Maybe we can help? Why don't you show us where you've been looking so far?" He then swapped the empty plate for a map and slid it over to Ikki.

Somehow the airbender managed to pull her arms out from the ropes and start pointing at the map. Clearly these two soldiers were also incompetent at tying up prisoners as well. Ikki didn't think twice, and started chatting away, "Well, we've been travelling down the west coast for the past week and we haven't found Korra yet. We did find a photo of her but it was from a whole year ago."

The round soldier hovered over the map, "We have troops all over the Earth Empire. If anyone's seen her they would have reported it."

"Hmm," Ikki pondered. Her finger slid down to a green area on the map, "What about here?"

"That's the Foggy Swamp. We don't send people in there often, I think. Meant to be a creepy place."

Ikki cast her head downwards. Even with this new intel, it seemed they couldn't find any leads on where the Avatar was. Unless, the one place the Earth Empire hadn't looked was actually where she was.

"Don't get discouraged Ikki," the dim soldier reassured. "You're a valuable member of the team, and you have a big heart. I know you're going to find her. Now, let's get you out of those ropes –"

A gust of wind smashed through the door. Both soldiers turned around stunned but didn't have a chance to react as two more gales blew them both into the wall. They fell unconscious, while Jinora and Meelo made their way in.

"Why did you do that?!" Ikki yelled.

"We're saving you?" Jinora replied. It wasn't exactly the reaction she was expecting.

Ikki shook her head, pulling herself out of the ropes, "I had everything under control. I just found our food that Meelo through away, and, I have an idea where Korra might be."

Meelo and Jinora exchanged glances. Had their sister really accomplished all that? "Well, let's get going then." Jinora said.

"Hold on," Ikki stopped and pulled two macaroons out. She placed one on each of the soldiers' heads, "It was nice chatting with you two. Sorry my brother and sister knocked you out." As she left, the sugar glider she had befriended followed and sat on her shoulder, leaving the unconscious soldiers behind.

Chapter Text

An endless expanse of lush green extended across the horizon. The Foggy Swamp was a primordial and spiritual place, with the ethereal mist wafting out from the trees and the distant cries of creatures hidden beneath. It truly was a mystical and beautiful landscape, but more important than its scenery, it was hopefully the place where the Avatar would be found.

On board the airship, Ikki stroked the shirshu's face. It turned out that Jiao adored macaroons, and after feeding her some Ikki had become her new best friend. Hanbao had also tried to feed her the macaroons, though it hadn't been nearly as successful.

"So you thought about looking in the Foggy Swamp because the Earth Empire haven't conquered it yet?" Lin asked the young airbender.

Ikki kept stroking Jiao but looked up, "Yeah. When I was taken in by those soldiers they mentioned hardly anyone one goes into the swamp, and I thought if Korra wasn't feeling well she might have come to a spiritual place to rest up."

"Hmm," Lin mused. She appreciated how Ikki described her capture by Earth Empire soldiers as 'taken in' by them. At least Tenzin wouldn't freak out if Ikki told him that. "Still, you shouldn't have wandered off on your own."

"I know, I was just mad because of Meelo and Jinora," Ikki said. "But it all turned out alright and now we know where Korra might be!"

Meelo folded his arms, "Next mission, it's boys only. Just me and Poki."

"Kids," Lin chided. They obeyed, for now at least.

"There... is the chance that maybe the Earth Empire did find the Avatar and are just lying about it?" Hanbao mentioned. Everyone turned to him as if they'd forgotten he was even in the airship with them.

"Only one way to find out," Jinora replied. She opened the wide doors to let Pepper out, who was all too eager to be in the wind again instead of cramped in a metal airship with five others and a shirshu. "We'll travel in the air and radio you if we find anything."

Lin nodded, "Good luck. We'll be landing soon and scout down below."

Ikki and Meelo joined their sister on Pepper's saddle, taking off into the skies above the mysterious swamp below. All of them only hoped that somewhere down in the lush greenery, Korra would be there waiting for them.

Korra had been training with Toph less and less nowadays. She'd regained a lot of her skill and could even hold her own against Toph for some time now, before being flung into the mud that is. She spent her days helping the swampbenders, or doing chores around Toph's hollow. And while the quieter life was welcome in some ways, it was hard for Korra not to get restless.

As the afternoon rolled around, Korra made her way back to the hollow. "So, what's the plan for the rest of the day?" she asked Toph.

The old earthbender was laying on the branch of a tree, arms relaxed behind her head. "You're looking at it."

"But that's what we did yesterday. And the day before," Korra mumbled. She took a seat on a vine next to her. "I know! Tell me the story about how taught Aang to earthbend!"

Toph sighed, "What's there to tell? I threw some rocks at Aang, he got all whiny, and Sokka fell in a hole."

It wasn't exactly what Korra had been expecting. "I... thought there would've been more to it. Or what about the time you guys took down the Fire Lord? That must've been epic!"

"Oh yeah!" Toph began. Her face soon dropped as she recounted the day, "It was hot. I was on a blimp. And some giant turtle showed up. Wow. What a day." She leant back into her seat.

Korra had grown up hearing the awe-inspiring tales of her previous life and his friends. She'd dreamed of the chance to actually be there, especially after hearing many of the epic tales from Katara in the Southern Water Tribe. But hearing Toph's nonchalant abridged versions felt rather deflating. "Okay, you're terrible at telling stories Toph."

"You're terrible at listening."

"Hmm," Korra grumbled, turning away. Even after all their bonding after the swampbender party, it seemed she and Toph would always clash to some degree.

She started bobbing her knee up and down until Toph lifted the chuck of earth underneath it. "If you're so antsy to do something then why don't you get tonight's dinner ready?"

"You got it."

"Take the path till you reach the stone with a hole in it and then turn left," Toph instructed as Korra marched off. "Oh, and make sure you get the slimy mushrooms; they're the tastiest!"

Surprisingly, Toph was actually right about the slimy mushrooms tasting better. Though Korra didn't think she'd ever be used to their texture. She'd try catch some river fish as well.

It didn't take long for Korra to reach the landmark Toph mentioned. It was a shame that the mushrooms Toph liked didn't grow somewhere sunnier and more open; the path ahead led through dense vines and trees, and the eerie sounds of animal calls echoed all around. Korra was still on edge after seeing her visions and her ghost attacking her when she first arrived at the swamp.

Korra passed through a thick patch of vines, pushing them aside as she pressed on. Though as she entered a clearing her heart sank. She was in the pro-bending arena. It was another vision. She wanted to close her eyes. Tell herself it wasn't real. But something compelled her to watch.

It was Amon ahead of her, the Equalist leader who hid behind his white mask. Korra watched as he held her past self in his bloodbending grip, her body writhing against his control. She couldn't watch anymore. That was the day she'd had her bending taken away from her, and even though it had been returned, it was still something that shook her to the core. Korra turned away but she wasn't back in the swamp; now, she was standing in ankle-deep snow, watching her old self fighting her uncle Unalaq. A monstrous black and red tentacle snaked from his mouth, wrapping around Korra's face as it ripped the light spirit Raava from out of her.

Again, Korra spun around. Now, she was watching herself in the crystal cavern where she had been chained by the Red Lotus. Her arms and legs were stretched out, unable to break through the platinum restraints. Zaheer stood at the ledge in his grey robes, eagerly waiting for the metallic poison to enter her body. As present Korra started hyperventilating, the visions of Zaheer and the Red Lotus all turned to face her. Their eyes bore holes straight through her, and Korra collapsed under the weight and pressure building in her chest.

Finally, she was back in the real world. Her hands and knees were submerged in the greenish swamp water. But Korra still couldn't get up just yet. She sat there for what seemed like an eternity, before somehow finding the energy to stand on her feet and walk away.

The sky was painted with oranges and pinks as the day drew to a close. The airbender kids had been flying around for only a short time, but already their spirits were dwindling. After radioing Lin it seemed Hanbao and Jiao hadn't made any progress either. The shirshu seemed to pick up on something, but it was hard to tell whether it was actually Korra's scent or the unfamiliar smells coming from the swamp.

Jinora continued to keep her fists pressed together, and legs crossed in a meditative position on Pepper's nape. Her breathing was slow and calm, and thankfully the other two hadn't caused any ruckus yet. Despite all her best efforts however, she still couldn't sense Korra.

"Do you feel anything yet?" Ikki asked.

Sighing to herself, Jinora shook her head, "No, I can't sense her at all."

Meelo folded his arms, "Well, that's what we get for listening to Ikki."

"Hey!" Ikki replied. "We only just got here. Maybe we should keep searching for a bit?"

"I do sense a lot of spiritual activity here in the swamp, but I don't feel Korra," Jinora replied. "I'm sorry Ikki, but I'm with Meelo on this one. I think we should leave. It will get dark soon and we'll need to set up camp." After a slight tug on the reigns, Jinora guided Pepper upward. There was no point spending any more time here in the swamp if she couldn't sense Korra.

Ikki leaned on the edge of the saddle, a despondency welling up inside her. She was sure she had been onto something when talking with the soldiers, but maybe it was another dead end. Something caught her eye down below, and Ikki squinted to figure out what it was, "Guys, what's that?"

Before anyone could respond, several vines shot out and latched around the bison. Pepper roared and struggled against their pull, but she remained hovering in place. "What's going on?!" Meelo yelled, holding onto Poki tightly.

"The vines are dragging us down! But why?" Jinora muttered as she gritted her teeth, though she couldn't get them to break free. After another struggle, the vines managed to drag Pepper down towards the swamp, splashing them in the greeny waters and mud. Miraculously, the vines slithered away once the group had landed.

Meelo panted as he tried to calm himself, "Why did those stupid vines drag us down here anyway?!"

"I'm telling you!" Ikki replied, "It's because they want us here. Korra must be in the swamp somewhere."

"But I haven't sensed her at all."

"You haven't sensed her the whole time Jinora! Maybe your spirit-y powers are broken!"

Jinora grumbled, "No they're not! I found you with the soldiers didn't I?"

"Enough! Poki and I are taking on this mission alone now!" Meelo tried marching off with his lemur in the other direction, until the sound of something large charging at them filled the air. "What's happening now?"

Their fears were stilled when they saw the familiar snout of Jiao emerge from the vines. Officer Hanbao was barely hanging on to the saddle as the pair arrived, though one would be forgiven for not noticing the officer altogether. The shirshu shook her coat, and Hanbao tumbled into the water with a yelp.

"We saw you go down and Jiao came sprinting after you," Hanbao said as he stood to his feet. "Lin went back to the airship to try and find you from the air."

"We should radio Lin and let her know what happened, " Jinora suggested. She went to reach for the radio but saw her brother walking off, "Meelo! Come back!"

"No! I'm tired of relying on you two! Poki and I can find Korra on our own!"

Jinora was exasperated. Dealing with the frustration at not finding Korra, and her siblings, was taking a toll. "This isn't only your mission Meelo. And we have to stick together!"

"Poki and I can survive in the wild! We're men now!" Meelo cheered. He stomped his foot in the swampy water to add extra emphasis, though unwillingly let out a loud bout of flatulence. Self-control wasn't his strong suit.

"Ugh, Meelo!" Ikki yelled.

The young airbender wore a smug grin after upsetting his sisters, though all heads turned to Jiao who restlessly jittered about. "Uh... shirshu have very sensitive noses," Hanbao mumbled. Jiao growled and let out a massive roar as her nose and head twitched.

Ikki turned back to her brother, "Meelo! You've upset the shirshu!" She quickly flew over to the startled animal to try and get her to calm down. "There, there, Jiao. It's alight –"

The shirshu wasn't listening to Ikki, nor her handler Hanbao. Obviously Meelo had done a number on the poor creature. Jiao began lashing out her tongue all around, which startled Pepper and she grumbled a low sound.

"Pepper! It's okay," Jinora soothed, though it wasn't helping.

Unsurprisingly, Jiao's tongue struck the unfortunate Hanbao and his body tensed up, landing limp on a nearby tree root. Ikki tried to move away from the shirshu, though the wing of her glider suit got caught on Jiao's saddle. The shirshu decided to make a break for it, dashing away into the distance with Ikki and the sugar glider clinging on.

"Jinora! Help!" Ikki cried out, though they soon disappeared from sight.

Meanwhile, Pepper had also started fleeing. With all six legs she pushed off from the waters and hopped over a fallen tree, "Pepper! Stop!"

Seeing both his sisters and their animals take off, Meelo realised he was all alone with Poki. The young boy trembled as fear took over, and he too ran off in a different direction.

Ripples in the water distorted Korra's reflection as she stared aimlessly. Even now there were times she forgot how different she looked, with her shorter hair and lack of Water Tribe attire.

"There you are! Have you got dinner yet?"

Korra spun around to see Toph shuffling along the tree roots, hopping across the last to join her. It was only now that Korra realised how late it was, with the setting sun casting a warm glow in between the tree canopy high above. "No, not yet," Korra replied after a pause. "I saw visions again. I've been seeing them since coming here."

Toph grunted, "Yeah, that can happen sometimes."

Korra pulled a face like she was slightly annoyed Toph hadn't mentioned this sooner, but she let it slide and went back to staring at the greenish water.

"Have you talked to Ut about it? She's knows more about all that spiritual stuff."

"Yeah, a few weeks ago at the party. It definitely helped. But I still saw visions of all the enemies I've faced before," Korra replied. She pondered for a moment longer, "Toph, do you remember what you said a while back? About 'the names change but street stays the same' when you were talking about being Chief of Republic City Police?"

Toph nodded, "Yeah, I probably said something like that."

Korra paused, trying to articulate everything she was feeling, "I remember talking about something similar with Ut. About how bad things seem to happen no matter what we do. How life can be chaotic. It was like, how Raava and Vaatu can't exist without each other; in life, good and bad things happen." She sighed, "I guess what I'm wondering, is how did you motivate yourself to keep working as a police chief when crime never seemed to stop?"

There was a pause as Toph considered what Korra was saying. Maybe no one had ever asked this before. Toph sighed, "I guess I couldn't forever. That's why I retired and came here."

Korra gave a laugh, or more like a grunt in reply. "Maybe that's why I'm here too."

"Listen," Toph began, "I became a police officer because it seemed straight forward. I've never been a fan of all the rules and laws; that political mumbo-jumbo was more Sokka or Zuko's thing. But arresting bad guys and helping civilians – it was just the job I felt I was best for. Like earthbending. You want to move a rock, you move a rock. No questions asked. But the longer I stayed on the job, the more I realised that it ain't so simple." Her expression turned more solemn, "Sure there are bad people that do bad things. But there are people who do bad things out of desperation, and sometimes the worst people seem to be out of reach from the law because of their power or position. That kind of thing can get you down for sure."

"I guess that black-and-white thinking doesn't always work."

Toph nodded, "But still, I know that I helped people while in Republic City. It still meant something to those people who need us."

Her words echoed what Ut had said about Korra; that her actions helped save their tribe from the Earth Empire. "I always thought the Avatar was meant to bring balance to the world. I mean like, stop all suffering and bad things and that. I remember my Mom once saying that some problems are too big for the Avatar to solve, and I didn't want to listen to her. But maybe... she was right. That's why I took it so badly when the world moved on without me, with the Air Nation and Kuvira being the ones to save the world when I wanted to be the one out there doing that. I felt like it should have been me out there instead of them. And that fear of failing again, maybe that's what's leaving me so disconnected from the world."

"Not being able to stop every bad guy doesn't mean you're a failure; it means you're human. And the Avatar is still a human after all Twinkle Toes."

Her whole life all Korra had known was that she was the Avatar. She had some affinity for bending earth and fire even as a kid, because she was the Avatar. She was nearly kidnapped by the Red Lotus as a child, because she was the Avatar. And she had to live inside a compound guarded by the White Lotus, all because she was the Avatar. Having all that pressure of saving the world on her shoulders from such a young age, it meant that being the Avatar was all she'd known. And not being able to fulfil that role had eaten away at her these past three years. It had felt like Zaheer had ripped away her entire identity when he poisoned her and others had to step up while she could not. But perhaps it was time to see things differently.

Toph took to her feet, stretching her arms before relaxing again, "Well, that's enough soppy talk for one day. Any more and I might hurl before we even have dinner. But, if you're feeling disconnected, there's still one thing we can try."

"Yeah?" Korra also stood up.

"We're going back to the Banyan Grove tree. And, I'll pick the slimiest mushrooms I can find for dinner on the way there!"

Korra thought she might hurl as well but at the sound of the slimy mushrooms for dinner. Either way, she took to her feet and followed Toph.

Things couldn't seem to get worse. Though Lin didn't dare tempt fate by saying that out loud.

Instead, she picked up the radio again, trying to get through to anyone below. They'd seen Jinora and her bison go down when vines attacked them, and even though Hanbao and the shirshu had gone out to search for them, she'd still heard nothing. All she could do now was watch from the airship, hoping for any sign of the bison or the kids.

There was a moment where the static ceased, "Jinora? Ikki? Meelo? Is that you?"

"Lin? It's Jinora."

"Spirits, what's going on down there?"

"The vines... they reached out and dragged us down. I don't think I've ever seen vines do that, except for the ones at Republic City. Something's weird about this place. The spiritual energy is intense."

"What about Meelo and the others?" Lin asked.

"We got separated. Meelo scared Jiao and somehow we ended up in opposite directions."

If the kids were all split up then Lin knew she had to act. "I'm coming down."

"I think I should be able to connect to everyone. I can get us all together."

Lin sighed, "Well, if you need me then radio. Or spirit-project-y thing if you need help. I'll keep watch for now." Jinora said goodbye and the radio cut out.

Down below, Meelo found himself in a dark and eerie part of the swamp. He clutched onto a stick he'd found, keeping it pointed out like a sword to protect himself for what lurked all around. Poki seemed to pick up on his fear too, shuddering at the slightest sound while perched on his shoulder.

"I... have... to be... brave...," Meelo mumbled to himself. "I'm a man." His mantra only worked for a brief second until an animal call to his left sent shivers down his spine. He quickly dashed behind a tree with his lemur, burying his head into his hands.

"Meelo!"

The young airbender screamed when hearing his name. Though he quickly realised it was a familiar voice. "Jinora?!" He looked up tentatively, though somewhat relived when he saw the blueish form of Jinora's spirit projection, "It's you!"

"Everyone got separated. Do you know how to get back to the spot we landed?"

"Y-Yeah. I do!" Meelo replied quickly. Another animal sound caused him to tremble. "I'm not scared!"

Jinora could see her younger brother was struggling. She wanted to check on Ikki too, but first she'd have to guide Meelo to her physical body. "Listen, it's okay to be scared sometimes. Even dad does. Being brave doesn't mean ignoring fear."

"I have no fear."

"It's okay to rely on others Here, I'll help you get back to where my body is. Then we'll find Ikki together," Jinora's spirit held her hand out.

Meelo couldn't quite bring himself to admit that he did in fact need help, though he slowly nodded and followed Jinora's spirit projection. Poki chittered happily as the three of them marched back through the swamp, relieved to have been rescued.

Over on the other side of their landing point, Ikki walked along with her sugar glider and Jiao in tow. Unlike her brother, she was actually enjoying the expedition. Of course, she wanted to get back to her siblings and check if they were alright, but if they wanted to leave without really searching the swamp for Korra then she would take this opportunity to look for the Avatar herself.

Unfortunately, the sugar glider and Jiao weren't exactly getting along. Ikki rubbed Jiao's head as she walked next to her, while the sugar glider sat perched on the airbender's shoulder. The two animal companions would occasionally glare at each other, or in Jiao's case more of a head tilt, before letting out low growls and hisses at each other.

"Ah, isn't this nice?" Ikki swept her arms out. "Just the three of us! Maybe we should just continue searching the swamp ourselves huh?" She had once run away while her family were on vacation at the Southern Air Temple and befriended a group of bison calves. Spending time with animals came naturally to the young airbender.

Jiao and the sugar glider nuzzled against Ikki as she spoke, though quickly went back to hissing and growling. Ikki scrunched up her face, "That's enough guys! We're a team, and that means we have to stick together, even if we fight sometimes, okay?" Her face dropped as she said this, and Ikki stopped in her tracks. She had been talking about her new animal friends, but in reality, it also applied to her siblings.

A flash of blue appeared next to them, startling Ikki and the animals for a moment. "Ikki!" Jinora's spirit projection said, "We need to get back together. Are you all right?"

Ikki paused before replying, "I'm fine. In fact, we're great, aren't we?" She turned back to the sugar glider and shirshu, who went from hissing at each other to adoringly cuddling with Ikki when she had her eyes on them. "See? We can keep searching for Korra on our own and meet up with you later."

"Ikki wait!" Jinora sighed, watching her sister walk off. Why did her younger siblings have to be like this?

"It's okay Jinora. I want to stay and search the swamp and you two want to go back. Jiao will know how to get back when it gets dark."

"Ugh," Jinora grumbled. Ikki ignored her, continuing along the roots of the swamp trees.

Thankfully, since she was in spirit form Jinora could just reappear and keep up with Ikki. Which she did, giving her sister a fright, "Jinora!"

"It's dangerous out here. Something is off about the swamp."

Ikki put her hands on her hips, "Yeah, I told you! It's because the swamp wants us here to find Korra."

"That's not it," Jinora replied. "We need to stick together."

"You guys have been leaving me out of everything and telling me off whenever I try and help! I'm going to do this myself." Ikki stormed off once more, not giving Jinora a chance to respond.

As she watched her sister take off, Jinora felt an exasperation set in. Perhaps a different approach was necessary.

"Look, Ikki," Jinora caught up, scaring her sister accidentally again as she reappeared. "Meelo won't admit it, but he was pretty scared on his own. I need help getting us through the swamp. We do need you."

Ikki paused as she let the words sink in. This whole time she'd been feeling like her siblings didn't even need her, but maybe that wasn't the case after all. "Well... okay. But can we still check out the swamp?"

Jinora smiled, "Yeah. But let's do it together."

Thankfully, the trip back to Jinora's physical body was quicker than expected. Jiao and the sugar glider behaved themselves for the most part, with Ikki only needing to intervene a couple of times. As they hopped along the last line of roots and rock islands, Meelo, Poki, and Pepper came into view.

"There you are!" Meelo folded his arms, huffing to himself. "It took you long enough." Poki copied his companion and folded his winged arms as well.

"Meelo," Jinora chided.

Her younger brother scoffed, "Well, I... am glad you're back Ikki."

Ikki smiled, "Okay then. What shall we do now?"

"We still have about an hour of sunlight left," Jinora suggested. "So let's keep searching until then. Together."

The other two smiled in response, following their older sister into the trees.

The banyan tree stood in all its glory basking in the last golden sun rays of the day. Korra had seen the tree a couple of times since being here, but never had it looked so majestic as it did today. And maybe it would also hold the key to getting one step further in her recovery.

They passed a small clearing where some of the roots and trees were broken, still healing after the battle here a couple weeks back. Korra recalled that day, where the so-called 'Earth Empire' had showed up, threatening the tribe and the swamp. She smiled, remembering that brief rush as she had entered the Avatar state only for a moment.

"When I first ventured out, I stopped at a few different places," Toph broke the silence, bringing Korra back to reality. "But it was here under the Banyan tree where I sought enlightenment. I learned how to connect to my daughters' energy and hear their voices through the vines."

Korra looked up in awe as she listened. Was it really possible to gain such an ability?

"If you're feeling disconnected, then maybe this will help you reconnect to those in your life you care about. Those who you've been too afraid to see again," she stopped once they reached the top of the tree roots, waiting for Korra to catch up. "I would've suggested it earlier but you were way too twisted and bogged-down for any enlightenment. But now," she pointed a finger into Korra's breastbone, "now, you got the stuff. I've seen you deal with all that crap in your past and try and move on. It won't be the end of your journey, but maybe this will help you get back."

It was almost surreal getting that kind of praise from Toph. Korra stammered a bit before smiling, "Uh... thanks." Her attention turned to the roots beneath her feet. There was something... different about this place. Familiar, and yet so different and foreign at the same time. If being disconnected was part of the problem, then reconnecting to the swamp was part of the solution.

Korra leant down and pressed a hand into the tree. Her breathing steadied, and she closed her eyes, searching for any form of connection she could find. She felt a presence leave her mind, almost like a light travelling in a single beam along the roots and vines in the swamp. Until, an image manifested.

"It's them!" Korra gasped. "I... can't believe it!"

Toph smiled, "You saw something, or, someone?"

Korra nodded. The image she'd seen was a clear as day. "It was the airbender kids. Jinora, Ikki, and Meelo. With their bison... and a shirshu?" She couldn't understand all the details, but let it slide as excitement took hold. "Is that what it was like for you?"

"Well, I didn't have a giant trail of light snake halfway across the swamp when I meditated, but yeah, more or less."

Korra blinked, "Wait, that light was... real?"

"I put it down to Avatar stuff," Toph replied.

A short distance away, Jinora paused as she felt something manifest nearby. A spiritual presence of some kind was connecting with her, and she grinned with excitement as she knew who it was. "Guys!"

"What is it?" Ikki turned around.

"It's... it's Korra! I know where she is!"

Seeing the bison and airbender kids sail towards her was like a dream for Korra. All this time she'd been reclusive, keeping herself away from those she cared about because she thought she needed to. Tears of joy and sorrow snaked their way down her cheeks.

Jinora and her siblings were too eager to wait for Pepper to land. They each took to the skies with their wingsuits, and their animal companions in tow. As soon as Jinora landed she leapt towards Korra and held her. It was something else, feeling this affection after so long.

"I can't believe it's really you," Jinora said, her words muffled against Korra.

"I could say the same thing," Korra chuckled, hugging all three of the airbender kids together.

Ikki pulled away, looking up at Korra with tearful eyes, "We missed you so much!"

Something sprang up inside as Korra heard Ikki's words, almost like a truth that she'd known all this time. Maybe she wasn't sure how the world needed her, but there ''were'' people who needed her regardless. "I've missed you all too. How... how did you find me all the way out here?"

As if on cue, Jiao sprang up from beneath the tree vines. She seemed to pick up on the change in atmosphere, and thankfully didn't lash out and paralyse Korra. But even the shirshu seemed content that this week long search had finally come to an end.

Korra looked stunned at the sight, "You even had a shirshu?!"

"Yeah! Her name is Jiao," Ikki stroked the animal's head. "Chief Beifong brought her along to help. And Jinora tried sensing your spiritual energy."

"You hear that Toph? Lin's here too."

At the mention of her daughter's name, Toph simply folded her arms and blew the hair out of her face. There was obviously more to her emotions under the surface, but perhaps she'd been caught off-guard.

The airbender kids looked over with wide eyes. "Wait. Are you really Toph?" Jinora asked.

"Of course she is! She's old and blind!" Meelo replied, without much tactfulness.

"Oh, I like this one," Toph grinned. She shuffled over to the three of them, "I knew your grandfather, Aang. Bit of a Twinkle-Toes, but he was alright."

Now that the surrealness had worn off, Korra wondered just why the kids had been out here, "So were you guys nearby or something?"

Jinora exchanged a glance with her sister, "Have you heard about Kuvira? And the Earth Empire?"

"Yeah, I thought Kuvira was out there helping the Earth Kingdom, but then these soldiers just showed up at the swamp claiming to be part of an 'Earth Empire' and demanding to take the spirit vines."

"They wanted the spirit vines?" Jinora pondered.

Ikki piped up, "Kuvira has been taking over all these cities across the Earth Kingdom! And I heard from the soldiers that captured me that the last stop is Zaofu! We have to go help. You have to go stop her!"

"Finally! Some Avatar butt-kicking action!" Meelo cheered, with Poki chirping along.

It was all overwhelming for Korra. She'd met Kuvira before, she'd even saved her father's life at Laghima's peak. This whole time she'd been creating this picture of Kuvira in her head, like the poster she once saw, of this strong and powerful woman saving the world. Korra shook her head, "I... I don't think I can help. I'm not healed yet." Her eyes drifted downwards, "I'm not the Avatar I used to be."

The airbenders looked downcast, "But what else can we do?" Jinora mused.

"I...," Korra sighed. "Okay. I'll try. But I have to try and get this poison out. It's why I haven't been feeling back to normal yet."

"Poison? You mean what Zaheer used?" Ikki asked.

Just mentioning his name sent a shiver through Korra, "Yeah. Suyin removed most of it but there's still some left. I couldn't let Toph remove it before but maybe now...." Korra turned to the old earthbender, "Toph?"

"I'm not bending it out of you this time. You gotta do this on yourself," she smiled. "But we'll be with you."

Determination kept Korra's nerves at bay as they trekked back to the hollow. Moments later when she stood before a firepit, ready to remove the poison, Korra found the resolve to try. Korra steadied her breathing. Shifted her legs into the horse stance. Connected herself to the earth, a sturdy foundation.

Outside the hollow, the swampbenders had gathered around. Ut made sure they were giving the Avatar enough space, but also wanted Korra to know they were with her. They would face this hurdle together, as a tribe. There were still doubts in Korra's mind about whether she really could do this. But as Ut had said, the universe did call in the most unexpected ways. If three airbending kids, a bison, and a shirshu all coming to find her weren't ''unexpected'' enough, then nothing else would be.

"Close your eyes. Clear your mind."

Toph's words brought Korra back into the present. She breathed in deeply once more.

"And don't freak out like last time!"

Korra grunted in response.

"Feel the metal inside you. Let it go."

Slowly, Korra performed spiral motions with her arms, searching for anything. She'd been carrying around this poison for so long without sensing it. Finding exactly where it was would be a challenge. But the thought of everyone around her, the state of the world, how close she was to regaining part of her former self – it was all fuel to the fire that flickered inside.

There. Korra could sense it. Tiny specks inside, like miniscule icicles stuck deep within. She didn't know exactly where they were, but now that she had a hold of them, it was time to set her body free.

With the next arm motion, Korra felt the specks move. It was painful, though not excruciating, almost like her body was finally ready to let it go. It had been waiting a long time. Another motion and the metal had started to seep out her skin, barely visible, but Korra could feel it. Part of her mind tried to resist it. It replayed images of her previous battles, her pain and despair, trying to prevent her from going further. But Korra grunted through it all.

Finally, Korra could feel the metal remnants release from her arms. She continued her steady breathing, floating the poison over towards Toph, who encased it in rock.

"Well done, Korra."

Korra opened her eyes. She couldn't believe it at first, but when she moved her arms and held them up to her face, she felt like a weight had been lifted. "I... feel so much lighter. I don't think I could've done that when I first got here."

"That's because you've changed," Ut's voice came from behind. She'd already started making her way into the hollow. "You've grown as a person, healed your spiritual self. And now, your body was ready to heal too."

A smile formed on Korra's face. She was exhausted, but filled with incredible joy. This here, finally, felt like a real step in recovery that she hadn't had for a long time. "Thank you so much," she turned first to Ut and then to Toph. "If you don't mind, I'd like to give you a hug now."

"Oh ok, but only this once," Toph conceded. She wrapped one arm around the Avatar. Once she was free, Toph narrowed her brows, "Ok, now that that's over you lot can all go home." She waved an arm in the direction of the tribesmen all gathered outside.

Ut laughed in response, almost like she was used to the old earthbender's grouchiness, "Y'know Toph, maybe the universe will call to you one day as well?"

"Hmph. If the universe wants me to leave my peace and quiet here then it will have to be more of a yell than a call."

"Lin's waiting in an airship, you sure you don't want to come?" Korra asked.

Toph didn't respond at first, though grunted quietly. "Give her my regards. I need some sleep after all this."

Korra hoped that one day they would reconcile, but perhaps this was all she could do for now. She turned back to Ut, "What will you do now if those soldiers come back? I feel bad for leaving you all."

"Do not fret, Korra. Our place is here in the swamp, and we will look after it until we return to the earth. But it seems like your destiny is leading you elsewhere," she smiled warmly. "It was an honour meeting you, Avatar Korra," Ut bowed.

Korra bowed in turn, though felt Ut wrap her motherly arms around her. Unlike Toph, Ut very much enjoyed physical touch. Korra savoured the embrace a moment more, before pulling away. It was time to leave.

Thankfully the airship wasn't too far, the skies had already darkened with the night star-laden sky. Korra joined the airbenders on Pepper's saddle, waving goodbye to the Foggy Swamp. It had been her home for several months now, her place of solitude to recover. It was all still a little surreal saying goodbye to it all, but with the lightness in her bones and freedom from the poison, it felt like just maybe the universe had indeed called to her.

"Wait! Where's Jiao?" Ikki blurted out.

Jinora turned around, "I saw her take off just before we did. She's probably heading back to the airship now."

Shirshu toxin was meant to wear off in a couple hours for most people. However, Hanbao could only just move his arm enough to prop his body up.

Night had already fallen, and the swamp had come alive with all manner of creatures lurking in the darkness. The poor officer shuddered at every sound. He didn't dare call out for help in case one of those creatures heard, though he only wished that someone would come back for him soon. They wouldn't have forgotten about him, surely?

A large shape approached through the fog, and Hanbao's fear only intensified. He let out a yelp," Argh... wait... Jiao?"

The sight of his shirshu didn't ease his fear at all, though at least it seemed Jiao wasn't here to paralyse him again. Instead, she snorted, flicking Hanbao's limp body onto her shoulders and walking away.

"Does... this mean you do care?"

A snarl was all Hanbao got in response. He didn't press his luck any further.

Despite having her hollow all to herself, Toph still couldn't sleep. She'd tried everything from shifting positions, to herbal tea. Nothing was helping. Perhaps it from all the excitement from a couple hours ago when Korra was last here?

No, it was more than that.

Toph sat upright, rubbing her head. "Damn Twinkle Toes," she mumbled.

Within a few minutes, Toph had packed a rucksack with all her essentials. As she stood in the doorway of her hollow, she brushed her hand over the entrance, giving it one last feel before she walked outside, heading away from the swamp after being here for so long.

Chapter Text

The worst part about betrayal wasn't the act itself. No, for Suyin, it was the fact that she saw this coming yet refused to accept it. She was like an ostrich horse with its head stuck in the sand while a rockslide cascaded towards it. And now, she and all of Zaofu, were about to be buried.

The matriarch of Zaofu kept her gaze on the floor, as if somehow the panels of the monorail cabin would give her some kind of solution. Her sons were all silent too. Only her husband broke the silence as he hurried back into their cabin, taking a seat next to Suyin, "I'm sure President Raiko has already called the United Forces. I also called Fire Lord Izumi, spirits, even Tenzin and Chief Tonraq. We'll get help."

"You can call whoever you want to but they won't make it here in time," Suyin replied coldly. Their monorail grinded to a halt in the central city.

"Dear," Baatar Sr. took a hold of his wife's shoulder, trying his best to bring any comfort he could. He didn't know what to say. If, there even was anything to say. But all he wanted Suyin to know was that she wasn't alone in feeling like this. Baatar Jr. was his son too, Kuvira had lived under his roof as well, and the deep hurt and betrayal his wife felt was one shared by both of them.

But what Baatar Sr. didn't share, was Suyin's feelings of regret, and frustration. She had been so blinded in wanting to see the good in Kuvira, so desperate to repair their damaged relationship, that she'd ignored or explained away Kuvira's actions and what was happening right in front of her. Suyin gave a soft smile, but nothing more, as she stood and exited the monorail.

Suyin and her family were greeted by guards as they entered city spire. It was the tallest building in Zaofu, and the only one protruding above the dome, giving the highest rooms a view of the army approaching. It looked like Kuvira had brought her entire army with the amount of soldiers, tanks, airships, and mech suits out there, though it was likely she had more scattered over the kingdom.

"Captain," Suyin greeted. "What's happening so far?"

"Ma'am, we've sealed all the domes. The farmlands have been evacuated, and we have enough resources to last a couple months in the event of a siege."

"We won't have a month with that army out there. Where are our guests? Have they managed to flee back to Republic City?"

Captain Hong-Li shook his head, "No. Unfortunately, the Earth Empire's airships have cut off the air space around Zaofu. There's no way our airships can get them out just yet."

Suyin grunted. It seemed like they were out of good news.

Once in the meeting room, Suyin held her arms out as Opal embraced her. Her daughter had only arrived recently after travelling the Earth Kingdom. They both smiled, only briefly, before Suyin turned to the others. President Raiko was already on the phone, looking out at the scene below and shouting something angrily into the receiver. Mako and Wu looked up as the Beifongs entered.

"I thought Kuvira was meant to come here for peace talks?!" Wu complained. "She was supposed to be giving the Earth Kingdom back."

Mako looked genuinely surprised that Wu had called it the Earth Kingdom instead of kingdom, though he quickly turned back to Suyin, "What should we do? The airships have cut off any way out through the skies."

Suyin turned back to the captain, "What about the mountain pass?"

"Mountain pass?" Mako asked.

Hong-Li nodded, "It goes through the mountains behind the Beifong estate. We sent guards there and it appears to be empty."

"Then we should get the prince and the president out of here as soon as we can," Mako suggested.

"Kuvira was once captain of the guard and knows about the tunnels too," Suyin replied. "She must know we'll try and escape that way and have something planned. Still, if it's clear now then maybe it's worth the risk. What do you think, Prince Wu?"

The prince paused for a moment, glancing at Suyin and then to Mako. "Trust me, there's a part of me – a large part – that is terrified and wants to leave. But... this has to stop. I want to stay and do what I can to get the Earth Kingdom back."

"I've called General Iroh; he's preparing a battalion as we speak," Raiko put the phone down. "Though it will take some time to get here."

"I was just saying to Prince Wu that we have a chance to get you both out. There's a mountain pass behind the estate," Suyin suggested.

Raiko exhaled, "Well, we came here for negotiations. Perhaps we should at least talk before leaving. There's no way she'd keep me a prisoner of war, being the President of Republic City."

Suyin nodded, although at this point, she wasn't sure what Kuvira's limits were in getting what she wanted. The four of them stood by the glass windows overlooking the valley, watching as the empire had already started pitching encampments and setting up barricades.

"Ugh... can you pass the thing, Zhu Li?" Varrick strained as he tightened another bolt. Zhu Li wordlessly fetched the 'thing' Varrick was referring to, which happened to be a larger spanner. He swapped the tool out and managed to tighten another bolt.

There was a large jolt as the maglev train hit a rough patch of track. "Spirit-vine crammin' hog monkeys!" Varrick cursed, dropping all his tools. "Why did Kuvira make us work on a train?! Our lab was perfectly fine back in Ba Sing Se."

Zhu Li raised an eyebrow, "Sir, I believe Kuvira said she was concerned about our lack of progress on the spirit vine project."

"Lack of progress?!"

"Well sir, you have been working on 'other projects' while Kuvira has been away, which she thought were not as important."

Varrick scoffed, "Magnetised hand-shoes are a winner, I'm telling you!" Zhu Li didn't reply. Instead, she grabbed a video camera and set up the tripod. He sighed, "Well, let's get this next test-run done I suppose. Ahem," Varrick readied himself. "Zhu Li, is this thing even on?"

"We're rolling sir."

"Okay! I am Varrick of Varrick Industries International, and this is spirit vine experiment 3-02. As I mentioned previously, we were tasked with creating a clean energy source to power new technologies in the Earth Empire. In the first experiments we demonstrated how these spirit vines give off an energy signature unlike anything I've ever seen before, and they retain a physical form despite being a spirit. However, to harness this energy, we must first convert the 'spiritual energy' into electrical. And to do so, I will use this," Varrick motioned to a set of machines behind him, taking up about half the width of the cabin.

"Zhu Li! Pass the thing."

His assistant handed him a canister, which Varrick nearly dropped. While grunting and puffing, he managed to place it lengthwise into a holder and the metal pieces clicked into place.

"In this stasis pod is a sample of spirit vine, weighing approximately two 'Zhu Lis'. I have postulated that this spiritual energy is unstable in 'typical material world conditions', and so, this machine should stabilise the energy and allow for conversion into an electrical battery, using a little-known phenomenon I like to call the 'Varri-Effect'!"

At this point the machine had started humming quietly, and the vines began to glow an ominous violet hue. It felt as though a great power lay dormant within the spirit vines, one too incomprehensible to truly understand. Varrick was willing to try.

"It's registering five 'Varrick's' of power! No – wait – seven! Hold on... is that going above our highest calibration?!"

The glow intensified until it could hold back no more. The glass of the capsule cracked, along with several bulbs and circuits. Forks of purple lashed out and struck nearby canisters and machine parts, nearly striking Zhu Li as she ducked out the way.

Varrick's eyes widened at the scene unfolding, "Zhu Li! Shut it down! There's too many Varricks!"

"I'm trying, sir!" Zhu Li replied, though the lever didn't seem to budge. When she did get it work, the machine kept running. "Uh..."

The battery above the machine cracked open, unleashing a powerful explosion shooting straight out the back of the cabin and blasting the wall into the distance. Thankfully Varrick and Zhu Li weren't hit, and they were the last train car, so no one behind them got hurt.

Varrick yelped as the train rocked, and Zhu Li tumbled towards the opening. As she cried out, Varrick managed to grab a hold of her hands as she dangled in the air, while the rushing train tracks beneath blurred together and threatened to claim her life.

"Erh!" Varrick strained. "You're too heavy! Y'know, you could stand to lose a few 'Zhu Lis' Zhu Li!"

"I believe you're just too weak sir. Pull harder!"

Eventually, Varrick mustered enough strength to yank Zhu Li back inside the cabin. The train also grinded to a halt, and the pair collided and rolled along the floor.

As Zhu Li rubbed her head, she blushed, realising she was laying on top of her boss. It was strange, but she noticed just how blue Varrick's eyes were, how the thin whisps of his moustache were so satisfyingly shaped. She must have suffered a concussion, surely. Why else would she be noticing such details now? "Sir... you saved me."

In Zhu Li's eyes, Varrick seemed to return a similar expression. "Of course I did Zhu Li," he leant closer, "because who else is going to help me clean up all this mess? Grab a broom!"

Any romantic feelings left the cabin as quickly as the blast had. Zhu Li grumbled, and took to her feet in search of a broom.

The door burst open, with Kuvira followed by several soldiers and Baatar. "What happened? Were we attacked?"

"No, we were spirit-vined!" Varrick waved his arms about.

Baatar exchanged a glance with Kuvira, "What do you mean?"

"I mean that the explosion nearly blew us up! Look what it did to the train cabin! We were only trying to convert the spiritual energy into an electrical battery, but we created something else."

"Like an explosive?" Baatar asked.

"No... worse. Like... an explosive that nearly threw us as far as the cabin door was! I think I need to put this project to rest before it ends up killing anyone else, and more importantly, me." Varrick pulled a lever that switched off the power to the other stasis pods. Whatever this 'spiritual energy' was, it was clear that he was in over his head.

Kuvira glared threateningly, "No, you can't. Do you realise what this could mean? This energy could change everything for the Earth Empire and give us the upper hand."

"I ''do'' know what it could mean. I signed up to create clean renewable energy, not a... a... spirit canon! Imagine what could happen if it ended up in the wrong hands?"

"Since when did that concern you?" Baatar raised an eyebrow.

Varrick chuckled, "I know right?! Normally I'd look at a project like this and be like 'look at all the yuans I could make!' But recently, I've been getting these strange voices inside my head. Ones that are telling me to... be concerned with other people's well-being."

Zhu Li glanced up from sweeping the floor, "I believe that voice is your conscience, sir."

"Is it? I thought I'd just had some bad cactus juice. Anyhow, I can't continue on this project anymore knowing how dangerous it – hey!"

Varrick felt the metal plates on his uniform constrict and pull him up into the air. He clasped at them while his legs flailed, helpless as he floated out the hole in the train cabin. Zhu Li stood by unable to do anything as she watched Kuvira twist her arms. "Now the voices in my head are telling me I should let you drop. Should I listen to mine?"

"Ugh!" Varrick squirmed, looking down below. The train had stopped moving, but the tracks were high above a chasm. A fall would certainly end him. "Wait! No! Don't listen! What do head-voices know? They're liars! I'll work on the project!"

Kuvira glared at Varrick a moment longer, before throwing him back inside the train. "That's what I thought," she said quietly, stepping over Varrick and making her way back into the train. "Let's get moving again! We need to arrive in Zaofu."

Zhu Li ran over to Varrick, helping him off the ground. "What are we going to do?"

Varrick rubbed his head, staring blankly at the spirit vine capsules all around him. "I think we've gotten in way over our heads. Not just with the vines, but with Kuvira too."

Lin rubbed her head through her hands, sighing deeply. "Was it really her? My mother?"

Korra nodded slowly, "Yeah. She helped me get back on my feet. Though, she was a little abrasive about it."

"She was like a grumpier version of you!" Meelo chimed in.

At first, the young airbender thought Lin would scold him, but she smirked. "That's her alright. So, she's been in the Foggy Swamp all these years?" She stared blankly out the airship window, not smiling, though not frowning either.

"I did talk to her a bit. About things. Though I didn't want to meddle," Korra said.

Now Korra really thought Lin would scold someone when she glared back, but after a pause, she just sighed, "Well kid, I guess I have you and your 'meddling' to thank for helping me reconnect with Su. Still, me and my mother are a different kettle of ray fish." She stood up and checked the helm of the airship, before turning back, "The main thing is we found you Korra. Now we can head back to Republic City."

Korra shifted slightly, "Actually... I was thinking I should head to Zaofu."

"Zaofu?"

"Yeah," Korra nodded. "Jinora told me all about Kuvira and what's been happening, and Ikki found out Zaofu is their next target. Kuvira's forces have also been raiding the swamp while I was there, trying to take the spirit vines and messing the place up."

Jinora looked deeply troubled by Korra's news, "What do they want with the spirits?"

"I don't know, but if there's some kind of spiritual disturbance being caused by the Earth Empire on top of the political mess, then that sounds like a job for the Avatar."

Lin grunted, "Well, we may be too late to reach Zaofu. On the radio reports said there's a blockade around the entire city. Won't be getting in with this metal can," she clunked her plated forearm against the airship wall. Her expression turned grim, "Though I'm worried about Zaofu too."

"Are you sure you're up to it? You only just got the last of the poison out," Jinora asked.

"I have to try," Korra replied. "I know I'm not back where I used to be, but I'm definitely a lot better than where I was. And I'm not going to fight or anything, just to be there and try and figure out how I can help."

Meelo looked disappointed, "What?! There won't be an Avatar fight?"

Korra laughed, "No, there won't be. I know Kuvira seems way out of whack, but she's still reasonable, surely? She was captain of the guard, and she saved my father while taking down the Red Lotus. She isn't like others I've faced before. Maybe just being there will help. It might give people hope."

It certainly was risky, though Korra's words had started to persuade the others. Lin sighed, "Well, if you think you can manage it then go for it. Maybe it will do a lot of good having you there. But there's still the problem of the blockade."

"We could take Jinora's bison?" Ikki piped up. "We'll be a lot smaller, plus Pepper might like the fresh air again?"

Jinora nodded, "We'll create some cloud cover and sneak in."

"I still don't like the thought of leaving you kids behind. I did make a promise to your father. I'll wait near the border while you four go in. Just in case anything happens."

Korra smiled, "Sounds like a plan."

After a short journey, the airship reached the state border. Korra could just make out Earth Empire airships hovering in the distance around the rocky hills. Once Pepper's saddle was loaded up, Lin opened the exit hatch. "It is great to have you back," Lin smiled while placing a hand on Korra's shoulder. "And be careful."

"I will," Korra smiled in return.

Once on the bison, Jinora steered Pepper low along the ground, before swerving high into the air. Lin watched for a moment, worried and anxious for their safety, but also filled with hope with Korra's return.

Something nagged in the back of her mind though, a small problem that had been lingering the whole way here. Lin's eyes widened as she realised what, or who it was, "Oh spirits. Where's Hanbao?"

Even with the spirit-vine mishap so far, Kuvira felt a confidence inside. She didn't believe in fate or destiny, but returning to the place where it all began would almost make her do so. Zaofu was the last state yet to be amalgamated into her empire. Though it would also be their toughest challenge yet.

"It feels a bit strange returning," Baatar mumbled beside her.

Kuvira nodded, "It will be difficult to get Zaofu to join. Suyin's proud of her shining city. But, we have some tools in our arsenal."

Baatar frowned, "You mean Bolin? Do you really think we can trust him?"

"Things have been rocky between Bolin and the Beifongs, but even more so with us. Having him there might ease the tensions. Suyin was training him in lavabending these past few years. And, there's Opal too."

Mentioning his sister sent a pang through Baatar's chest. But he had to be strong. He had to prove to himself, to his father, that he was more. A better version of himself than when he was cooped up inside those domes.

A soldier knocked on the door, and Kuvira called out to enter. "Kuvira sir, Bolin is here as requested."

"Excellent."

Bolin made his way into the cabin, giving a salute, "Kuvira."

"Bolin, thank you for joining us."

Kuvira didn't say anything further, instead, pacing to the other side of the room. It put Bolin on edge. "Am... I in trouble?"

"No, not at all," Kuvira replied. "The opposite. I need you for a special task."

"Oh. Do you want me to get the rest of my team?"

"That won't be necessary. This is one I need only you for."

This was certainly unexpected. Bolin had risen a few ranks since being in the Earth Empire, though having a special mission was on another level. "Of course."

Kuvira nodded, "Great. I need you to accompany Baatar and I when we go to negotiations with Suyin."

Bolin lurched forwards, "Uh... Suyin? As in, Suyin, a Beifong, happens to be my girlfriend's Mom, who I may or may not be having relationship issues with. Possibly. Is that the Suyin?"

"Bolin," Kuvira's tone changed only slightly, despite Bolin's babbling being rather irritating. "I know things between you and Opal have been tense. But there is even more tension between myself and Suyin. I think having you there may help the negotiations go more smoothly. From what I understand, your brother Mako may be there with the prince."

"Uh... I dunno," Bolin fidgeted.

"You want Zaofu to join the Earth Empire, don't you?"

"Well yeah of course."

"But Suyin may not want to sign any agreement if she isn't thinking clearly, no?" Kuvira responded.

Bolin paused, unsure of how to respond. Maybe he just needed to find that inner confidence that he had when Kuvira made him a team leader. At first he wasn't sure he was up to it, but he had proven himself with that too. "Well... I can tell them all the wonderful things we've been doing? Maybe that will help?"

Kuvira smiled softly, "That would be good. I know you'll be able to help."

"Awesome!" Bolin cheered, though quickly regained his composure.

"Great. Because we're here now," Kuvira flicked her hands and the metal shutters scrolled up. Bolin's face turned to shock, partly from realising they were already in Zaofu, but also at the sheer size of their forces outside. All along the green fields were hundreds of rows of soldiers, tanks, mecha suits, and airships sailing high above. He'd never seen so many Earth Empire troops in one place.

"Um... isn't this army going to send the wrong message?"

Kuvira turned back to Bolin, "They're here to project strength, and prosperity. But we'll be heading in to promote peace."

Bolin took in a gulp of air, trying to calm himself before exiting the maglev train with the others. Before him stood the tall metal lotus domes of Zaofu.

Everyone had been expecting the phone to ring, but it still sent a jolt through them all when it did. Captain Hong-Li answered, looking towards Suyin and mouthing the name on everyone's mind. They were here. Suyin breathed deeply, and nodded.

It didn't take long for them to reach the meeting room. When Suyin first saw her son Baatar and Kuvira appear in the doorway, something inside her froze. Kuvira led the way in. "Suyin."

The matriarch of Zaofu didn't respond. She simply glared with saddened eyes at first, between Kuvira, Baatar, and then noticing Bolin trailing nervously behind. But any sympathy she once had had been snuffed out, replaced only by a deep anger. "I invited you here to talk," she said at last.

"Suyin, that's what we're here to do."

"YOU BROUGHT AN ARMY!" Suyin bellowed so loud that the sound reverberated off the walls. She breathed in deeply, calming herself, even just a little bit, "I believed in you. I stood up for you, even when everyone else thought you were in this for yourself! I tried to see the good in your intentions and look where it got me. How... how could you do this?!"

Kuvira looked almost puzzled at the statement, "I brought the army here to show you how much we have accomplished. I wanted you to see all that we have achieved since setting out from Zaofu."

"What kind of fool do you take me for?!"

"We are incredibly grateful to Zaofu. You were the only ones who came with us to reclaim Ba Sing Se. I swear, I have no intentions of hurting anyone. We only want peace."

Suyin couldn't bear to look at Kuvira. She simply turned away, letting out a stifled sob.

Baatar decided to speak up next, "The Earth Empire has taken the place of the old Earth Kingdom. Don't you want to be a part of that? This is all our nation should be!"

His father Baatar Sr. stared at his son. He hadn't seen him in so long, but now, it was like he was someone else. "Son, you know that we are a people of peace. Zaofu is your home. Please reconsider all of this. You don't have to listen to Kuvira."

Now Baatar's anger flared, much like his mother's had, "And what would you have me do instead?! Come back and hide inside these shiny metal domes? Live in your shadow?! I have become the best I can be, pushed myself to my highest potential, and we have done so much good for the Earth Empire! Isn't that the Zaofu way?"

Opal folded her arms, "You know who else sounded like that? Fire Lord Ozai, before he tried burning down the world."

"How dare you?!" Baatar spat. "You and you 'enlightened Air Nation' ways know nothing of how the world really works!"

"Well I know what I've seen! How you and your 'empire' are taking innocent people from their homes, stripping the earth of its resources, and forcing people into your army! I wouldn't call any of that 'good'."

The tension had only intensified since arriving here. Now was as good an opportunity as any to try and intervene, Bolin thought. "Hey, Opal –"

"No," she replied bluntly. "You've chosen your side."

Bolin looked hurt, "There shouldn't be sides. Don't we all want the same thing? For the Earth Kingdom to be better, and safer? We've done so much for the people and we want you to be a part of that."

Suyin didn't even bother looking at Bolin when she responded, "You know, it's a pretty low blow to try and use Bolin to convince me. I won't give up Zaofu."

"Low blow?" Kuvira snorted, "I brought Bolin here because I thought maybe you'd listen to him instead of Baatar or I. For whatever reason - I don't know, maybe pride? – You refuse to consider what's best for Zaofu and the rest of the nation just because it's coming from my mouth!"

"So now you insult my character as well as threaten me? I did try and listen to you! I tried reaching out to you at the coronation. I visited you in Ba Sing Se! I could have helped you with the Dai Li, or even the Earth Kingdom throne! We could have talked about this here, today, but no! You decide to surround my city and point your benders and tanks our way before we've even talked about agreements!"

Surprisingly, Prince Wu decided to speak up next. He stood up from his chair, mustering up whatever courage he had, "Kuvira! This has to stop! No one is saying that we aren't grateful for what you did in stopping the barbarian threat, but you promised you would hand back the Earth Kingdom. Forcing the states to join you is just... just...wrong!"

Kuvira stared at Prince Wu as if she'd noticed a hapless spider fly caught in its own web. "I'm sorry, Wu, but your voice is not relevant here. I suggest you stop talking for your own good."

"Hey! Don't go threatening him!" Mako jumped to his defence.

"Oh Mako, are you really going to defend him? He's done nothing useful for the Earth Kingdom in his whole life!" Bolin fired back.

"Well Bo, are you going to defend Kuvira? A crazed dictator who forces everyone to bow to her?!"

Kuvira looked infuriated at the shots fired back, though thankfully, Bolin intervened again, "You haven't seen what I have, bro. You remember grandma's neighbourhood in Ba Sing Se? It's doing so much better now! The city is starting to get back its life again, thanks to what we've been doing! How can you say that you'd rather have some snotty-nosed, rich bozo for a leader?"

"Well, you haven't seen what I have, Bolin!" Opal retorted. "I've seen what happens after you all leave. Villagers are forced to work slave labour. Entire towns are relocated to make way for military bases. We have airbenders all over the globe telling us the same thing. All Kuvira wants is whatever she can take to keep making her army stronger."

Bolin let out a frustrated grumble, "Look, I don't know what you think you saw, but I know what I've seen too."

"Bolin is right," Kuvira said. "And if you can't see what an opportunity this is, then you will leave us no choice."

Suyin let out a spiteful chuckle as she shook her head, "I can't believe you would threaten us. Zaofu will never yield! The other world leaders won't stand for it either!"

"And why should I treat Zaofu any differently? What makes you so special?" Kuvira yelled. "For years, you have all hid inside your platinum domes, hording your riches, while others in the nation starve and struggle! It's time for that to change. Zaofu should do its part to rebuild our nation."

Kuvira set the documents on the table. They'd only been here for minutes yet the entire time had been spent yelling and bickering, not even discussing one iota of a trade agreement. Part of her had expected this. Though something bothered her more than all the animosity witnessed so far. She looked to the back of the room, "I've noticed you've been silent this whole time, Mr President."

All eyes turned to Raiko, who sat at the head of the table with a watchful gaze. For the first time since being there he shifted, resting his arms down and breathing in deeply. "Spirits, what a mess this is," he broke the silence. "There are mothers and sons arguing, family friends torn apart, brothers and sisters, girlfriends and boyfriends. You all have a very personal stake in what's happening. Very emotional." The others in the room glanced between each other with confused expressions, unsure where Raiko was going with this. "But if you're all done squabbling like a pack of howling hog monkeys, I'd like to speak with Kuvira. Alone."

There was even more confusion than before. "President Raiko? Are we not going to have the negotiations together?" Suyin asked.

"Everyone here is too emotionally invested, so it's up to me to be the voice of reason," Raiko said. Suyin looked offended at his remarks. "Besides, I think Kuvira will be interested to hear what I have to say."

"Fine," Kuvira answered. She hadn't cared much for Raiko's pep-talks or letters he had sent previously. Whatever he was pulling now would be no different, but better to get it over with.

Reluctantly, the others started making their way for the door. Mako led Wu out, giving a look towards Bolin before leaving. Suyin didn't glance at anyone, still overcome with all her swirling emotions. She kept her gaze low and filed out with Baatar Sr. and Opal. Baatar didn't want to leave Kuvira, and stayed until she gave a nod of reassurance. He gave Raiko a cold stare before joining Bolin in the foyer.

Raiko waited until the doors clunked shut, and then for a moment longer, before he finally addressed Kuvira, "I guess there's no point in dragging this out further so I'll get to the point. I know about the Dai Li. I know about Hou-Ting. And I know you're working with them."

If Kuvira was shaken by Raiko's allegations, she didn't show it. Her eyes remained like cold steel as they stared back. Eventually, she allowed a smirk to show on her face, "If you wanted me alone to dish out unfounded allegations then you're wasting your time. I may as well leave with the others."

"I had an investigation done. Eye-witness account from inside the palace. Served food and tea right to the old wolf bat's office." Raiko waved his hand, "Don't bother trying to snuff them out; they're safe back in Republic City. But I know. Everything."

"I certainly doubt that sir."

There was an unsettling silence that filled the air. It was like two sabre-tooth moose lions eyeing each other up before charging, except this battle was fought with carefully chosen words and reading the others' expressions. It was always like this with the two of them. Raiko smiled, "You know, to be honest, I haven't always disliked you. In fact, when you stepped up to lead the Earth Kingdom Allied Forces, I was glad. I never saw you as any great leader or anything, but you knew how to organise troops effectively."

Kuvira furrowed her brows, "Are you going to start telling me how you don't think I'm leader material again?"

"I'll get to that later," Raiko replied.

At the end of the day, Raiko could spit all the venom he wanted, but she was the one with the army outside. Kuvira smirked, deciding she'd let the president have his moment.

"But the one redeemable quality I saw in you, was that you were smart," Raiko said. He laughed, "I mean, I have to commend you for how you handled the coronation. If it's true that the Dai Li and Hou-Ting really did abduct you, then I think you played your tiles well. Revealing that the old wolf bat somehow survived the palace fire would rally many in the Earth Kingdom behind her. For whatever reason, some of the upper classes in the north worship Hou-Ting. But, you also couldn't let the throne slip from your grasp, could you? So revealing the Dai Li and the supposed Red Lotus threats kept you in power for longer without putting it at risk. That was smart. And let's not forget the announcement of the Earth Empire either," Raiko continued. "You made it sound like it was merely a free-to-join organisation to better help the Earth Kingdom states, even though the word 'empire' should have been a red flag for anyone. And now here you are, on the cusp of annexing the last free state on the continent. Very smart, I have to say."

By now Kuvira's patience was waning. "Do you have a point to all this, Mr President?"

Raiko pushed his glasses up, "I do. You see, despite the fact that I absolutely hate your very existence, I used to find that one redeemable quality in you. Your intelligence. So how in Raava's holy light did you think it was a smart idea to hop into bed with a viper rat like Hou-Ting?"

"You still haven't given proof," Kuvira mumbled.

"Before I became president, I worked in foreign policy," Raiko ignored Kuvira's comment and continued. "Hou-Ting was an absolute menace to deal with. Every other week she would threaten the United Republic's border, always pushing the law and flexing her frail muscles. She only had the Dai Li back then; most of the army and common people hated her. But now, you've given her the one united continent she could never get. Do you even comprehend what kind of ostrich horse shit you've thrown the world into right now?!"

Kuivra didn't bother responding. She continued gazing out the windows, looking down at the silver plating on her tanks, soldiers, and forces down below. How dare Raiko come at her with all of this? She was the one who saved the Earth Kingdom, not him.

Raiko wasn't finished just yet. His anger simmered for a moment, bubbling under the surface of his words, "You know what I think happened? I think you realised that you weren't as good as you thought you were at this game. You went into this thinking that people would adore you, that you deserved it, for all the work you had done. You thought that the other leaders should give everything they could to help you. Only that wasn't the case, was it? You realised that I already had trade deals lined up with Omashu, Gaoling, Chin, and plenty other states. And as you started failing in your little quest to steal the Earth Kingdom from Wu, you turned the only person you had left. You abandoned your one redeemable quality - your intelligence - and decided to work with Hou-Ting against all reason in an effort of self-preservation!"

"Shut up!" Kuvira yelled, turning back to Raiko. She'd heard enough now. "You don't know anything!"

"Oh really?! Can you honestly tell me that I'm wrong?"

Her fists clenched, Kuvira paused as she couldn't get a reply out. But she couldn't tolerate anymore of Raiko's hypocrisy. "Honesty? You want to talk about honesty? Then why don't you be honest about why you're so desperate to have Wu on the throne?"

Silence filled the air for a moment. Raiko smirked, "Fine. Pai sho tiles on the table then," he inhaled deeply, "You've been right about me. I want Wu on the throne because I want access to the Earth Kingdom."

Kuvira laughed spitefully, "Of course. I knew it."

"But did you ever wonder why?"

"Because you're just as selfish and entitled as you say I am?"

Raiko's face grew serious, "It's because the Republic City is in shambles. The varri-vision adverts are all crap. We aren't some thriving metropolis boasting a spirit wilds tourism industry. Our city is shot. Infrastructure is going bust. Some suburbs had to be abandoned and hardly any new businesses are starting up. The Earth Kingdom, on the other hand, is a sea of untapped - albeit mismanaged - resources and potential. Republic City needs that to survive."

"So you're another conqueror looking to take what you can," Kuvira spat. "Just like the Fire Nation was during the Hundred Year War."

"This is different!" Raiko fired back. "Have we not done our part in ending wars, fighting the Equalists and whatever Unalaq became? Republic City is the most important city on this whole spirit-damned world! Every nation relies on us, and yet the United Republic has been struggling for years now! You can't fault me for putting my city first."

Kuvira sneered, "Yet you fault me for doing the same."

"But it's not the same. You haven't thought about what's best for the Earth Kingdom. Many of the states would've had the chance to leave the monarchy under Wu and be independent. You've prevented that from happening!"

"Oh, so it's fine for them to leave and abandon the other states less fortunate than them?!" Kuvira thought back to Omashu. "How is that fair?"

"Fair or not, you've made the problem a whole lot worse by signing your life away to the next dictator this world didn't need!"

"Governor Hou-Ting knows her place!" Kuvira blurted out. She didn't mean to let it slip, but now that it was out she couldn't hide it any longer.

Raiko's eyes widened, though he soon began laughing, "Governor?! Governor?! She would rather have her mind scrambled by her Dai Li and die than have that as her title! Like I said, I once thought you were intelligent, but I see you've slipped into this child-like narcissism in thinking you're somehow in control of everything and everyone. You've doomed us all."

"This is going nowhere," Kuvira replied. She straightened the papers on the desk, giving the president a cold stare, "You're simply puffing out your feathers to try and intimidate me. I don't care, Raiko. I have an army waiting outside if Suyin chooses not to sign. So, if there's nothing else, I'll take my leave."

As Kuvira neared the exit, Raiko spoke up, "There is, something else." Kuvira turned around as the president continued, "I have a proposal."

Kuvira scoffed, "This should be good."

"Believe me, it is taking every once of me to not reconsider throwing away my dignity in making this offer, but unlike you, I understand how grave this situation is," Raiko explained. He inhaled deeply, giving him time to prepare his words, "You... were under duress. That's what you will say in your interview. Hou-Ting and the Dai Li forced you to work with them, until we saved you and your fiancé from her evil clutches and arrested Hou-Ting."

Kuvira shook her head, "You can't be serious."

"I am," Raiko shot back with a serious gaze. "You and Baatar will give a public apology, renounce any claim to the Earth Kingdom, and ask for forgiveness in an international court. The judge and jury will hear your tear-filled confession and grant partial immunity – all staged of course – and your punishment will be minimal because of your remorse and your vow to serve however the United Republic needs. From then on, you can do what you want. Write a memoir. Throw yourself into the ocean. I don't care." He could see Kuvira wasn't buying it at all. Raiko grunted, "I don't care much about Zaofu. But I care about what taking it will mean for Hou-Ting. You'd be giving her power she has never had, and the world will suffer for it. I care about ending this before she gets the chance, and I'm willing to sacrifice my own dignity and lie for you to do it."

"Oh, the depths you will sink to get what you want," Kuvira jeered.

Raiko narrowed his eyes, "You have no idea."

There was a pause as Kuvira didn't reply immediately. She lifted her head, locking her grey-green eyes with Raiko's and staring down the president, "I don't accept. Tell Suyin to sign, and if she doesn't give an answer in forty-eight hours, we will march in and take it by force."

Fury etched into Raiko's face. There was a part of him that really thought Kuvira would take his offer. It was a fool's hope. He scoffed, "You wouldn't dare attack while I'm here! It would start an international war!"

Kuvira turned back, "Thinking that you're so important that I wouldn't lift a finger against Zaofu with you here? Now that's childish narcissism." She said nothing more, turning her back to Raiko and flinging the doors open.

The foyer was deathly quiet. Baatar stood on one side of the room next to Bolin, while Suyin and the others stood as far away as they could. The air was thick with an uneasy presence. Kuvira's entrance managed to cut through it, giving them all something to focus on besides their ruminating tensions.

Baatar slid a hand over Kuvira's arm as he greeted her. "How did it go?" His concerned green eyes connected with Kuvira's.

"About as well as you'd think," Kuvira turned away. She inhaled sharply, and approached Suyin. The matriarch of Zaofu didn't look up, still wiping the occasional tear as she stared into the floor. "Suyin. You have forty-eight hours to reconsider the proposal. I'll be waiting outside for your answer."

Suyin still didn't look up. "Get out," she muttered in a hot whisper.

Kuvira grunted. It was time to leave.

As the three of them left, Raiko finally made his way out of the meeting room. "Kuvira's as stubborn as ever. Spirits," Raiko sighed.

"What was that back there?" Suyin replied. She wasn't particularly happy with Raiko's actions either. "Why did you need to speak to Kuvira? I'm the one who tried putting together these peace talks."

Raiko wasn't in the mood. He exhaled, "Look, I had to speak with her alone and that's that. Still didn't get through to her anyway."

"So what do we do now? Should we try get the president out and Prince Wu?" Baatar Sr. broke the tension.

Suyin sighed. She tried to say something, but couldn't put the words together. Everything was still a fuzzy blur from all the anger and hurt that she felt. Her husband tried soothing her by wrapping his arms around her. "I don't know," Suyin mumbled. She exhaled deeply, "If negotiations have truly failed then we could wait for the United Forces to arrive. If Kuvira's giving us two days' notice then we could take all the time we need. But as a precaution we could get Prince Wu and the president out too."

"Suyin, Ma'am," Captain Hong-Li addressed her. "The outside grounds are under tight surveillance from the soldiers. To get to the mountain pass behind your estate, we'd probably have to tunnel underground undetected. And then tunnel a different route alongside the pass in case Kuvira's got it covered too."

"What are you saying?" Suyin replied.

Hong-Li gulped, "I think it might take some time to do that. Even with earthbenders. We've organised a team to carve out the tunnels, but at the moment the patrols above ground are pretty frequent. We were thinking of starting at night."

Suyin nodded, "We have a lot of people to evacuate. Try and start today if you can."

"So that means... we're trapped in here? Like elephant rats?" Wu trembled.

"Well, Zaofu is one of the best cities for withstanding a siege," Suyin smirked. Her face remained downcast, "But if we can't think of something soon then we may not be able to outlast them."

She looked at each of them near her, her family, Raiko, Wu, the captain. These were the people that had all hoped today's negotiations would have put an end to this Earth Empire nightmare. Suyin only regretted being so foolish and naïve. She'd thought that Kuvira had been running towards this cliff, falling closer and closer to the edge and it was up to Suyin to try and save her and bring her back. These peace talks were meant to be just that. But it turned out that Kuvira had already jumped long before this. All Suyin could do now was wonder how in spirits' name she'd missed all the signs?

In the hallway leading to the elevator, Kuvira led the three of them along. There wasn't much point staying here any longer. Suyin and Raiko weren't going to budge, though they would, in time, Kuvira was sure.

Bolin stopped as he heard footsteps from behind and his name being called. He turned around, seeing Mako run towards him. "Mako?"

"Bolin," he caught his breath, "look, this needs to stop, okay?" He caught a glimpse from Baatar and Kuvira behind his brother, "Can I talk to Bo alone, please?"

Kuvira glared at the firebender, waiting a good few seconds before replying, "Be back on the train in ten."

"Oh... okay," Bolin responded. Once the hallway was clear, Bolin turned back to his brother, "Mako, what's this about? I really need to get back and pretty sure I already know how you feel. You said as much. In the meeting room. Like, five minutes ago."

Mako sighed, "Look, I know that you just wanted to go out there and find your own way, but you have to be honest about what Kuvira is doing."

Bolin tutted, "Not this again Mako."

"Bolin I mean it. I've always had to get you out of these stupid situations, so listen to me."

Mako's words lit an anger inside Bolin. "Mako, I don't need you to keep treating me like an 'idiot kid brother' alright! I'm not some helpless deer dog puppy that needs protecting!"

"Well stop acting like an idiot kid brother and maybe I'd treat you differently!"

"Stop acting like this is all easy, it's not! It's... it's... complicated," Bolin sighed. "Yeah, maybe some of like, a little bit, of some of the things Kuvira has said are... tough. But you keep ignoring everything good that we've done! You keep pretending like, that Wu is somehow better for the Earth Kingdom. And let me tell you, he's not!"

Mako grunted, "It doesn't matter what good you've done when your leader is storming Zaofu with an army outside! Wake up Bolin! Please, just let me help you this time."

By this point, Bolin had had enough. It was the same thing he'd been told most of his life, and he was tired. "Mako! No! I don't need you to keep taking care of me. You don't need to keep acting like a parent. Our parents are gone, in case you forgot! So stop trying to be them!"

As soon as the words left his mouth, Bolin instantly regretted it. He'd never said anything like this before. Mako too looked completely shocked. His eyes grew saddened, something Bolin had rarely seen.

"I...," Bolin mumbled, sighing deeply. "I need to go. Please just let me take care of myself."

Mako watched as his brother turned and started making his way to the elevator. Eventually he called out, and then again, though Bolin didn't respond. He gave a quick glimpse as the elevator doors were closing, and then turned his gaze to the floor, while Mako just stood and stared blankly at the metal doors for a moment.

Chapter Text

The grey slop slid off a metal ladle with a squelching sound. "Whatever Stew? Again?" Akito asked, eyeing the unappetising meal as it slid around his metal tray.

The lunch soldier shrugged, "Looks like it is today. But once this whole Zaofu business is over we'll be feasting for sure!"

Akito grinned at the thought. He made his way over to Bolin, setting his tray down and greeting his team leader. Bolin didn't make much of a response. He hadn't touched his stew either; it had been sitting idle for so long that the oil had begun to separate from the rest of it, forming a greasy, sheeny layer on top. Akito had never thought Whatever Stew could look any worse until now.

The mech pilot forced a spoonful of stew down, following up with most of the water in his cup. "Hey Team Leader, have you seen Gombo or the others?"

"Oh what?" Bolin snapped back to reality. "No, no I haven't. I only just got back in."

"Oh yeah, that's right!" Akito smiled. "How did your 'special mission' go!" Bolin's face grew downcast, and he grunted softly while turning away. Akito frowned, "You can talk about it if you want?"

Akito often bordered on being too nosey, but his concern was always endearing. Bolin smiled briefly, then decided to open up, "I... got into a fight with Mako. Said things I shouldn't have. I just, you know, was frustrated at him not listening to me. Like, ever. He always thinks he's right and he's the one always saving me. It kinda makes me feel like I'm just... I dunno."

"I'm sure he'll come around," Akito reassured. "Once Zaofu becomes part of the Earth Empire and we get the nation on its feet again, he'll see that we're doing the right thing."

Bolin gave a short nod, and silence filled the table once more. He didn't know exactly how to formulate what he was feeling, which for an over-talker like Bolin was strange. He took another minute to try and articulate his next words, "Hey, Akito. Do you... do you feel like we really are doing the right thing?"

Akito looked surprised at the suggestion. "What do you mean?"

"With Zaofu. Like, I dunno. It just seems like we're causing way more trouble than actually helping you know?"

"Well, do you think Zaofu should just continue to ignore the needs of the other states?"

Bolin shook his head, "No, of course not."

"And do you think Zaofu and the Earth Empire would be better off if they joined?"

"Yeah."

"Then we are doing the right thing," Akito concluded. He took another spoonful of stew.

Things didn't seem that clear to Bolin anymore. He tried elaborating further, "I... I get that. I do. But I don't think that marching on Zaofu is y'know, a good thing to do either. It just... feels like things have really changed. What happened to the old days where we'd be chasing down some bad guys, or giving out supplies to hungry people. But now it's like... like –"

"Like we're soldiers," Akito finished.

"Yeah!" Bolin agreed.

Akito furrowed his brows, "But that's who we are, Bolin."

"I know. But – "

"Then what's the problem?" Akito shot back.

Bolin couldn't answer. He'd never seen Akito without a grin on his face. Somehow, this conversation was upsetting him. "Nevermind," Bolin muttered.

After a few seconds Akito sighed, "Bolin – Team Leader – I get those feelings sometimes too," Akito said.

"You do?" Bolin's eyes lit up. "What do you do to like, deal with it?"

"I just think of all the good things we've done. Of all the people we've helped," Akito smiled, but his eyes were uneasy. "I tell myself that things will go back to that once we're done here. We are doing the right thing. I ''have'' to believe it." Akito looked down at the tray, "I don't have a life outside of this. I have to believe it's all been worth it."

Bolin couldn't help but feel for Akito. His whole identity seemed to be tied up with being a solider in the Earth Empire. But Bolin felt differently. He stared towards Zaofu, examining the city spire above the middle dome. It was a stupid thought, but he wondered if Opal could see him from there. Or Mako? Or Suyin? How had it come to this? With him on this side and them on the other? Something was wrong, very wrong. He'd noticed it start to chip away after the desert mission, but now, it seemed like a problem he couldn't just ignore like Akito was.

Bolin stood up from his table, "I have to go talk to Kuvira."

"Talk to... Kuvira? Wait, Bolin?" Aktio watched as Bolin took off, leaving his unfinished stew.

Kuvira's meeting room was a short distance from the maglev train. The metal octahedron was arranged with the other portable rooms behind the bulk of the forces. Nerves got the better of Bolin, who stood by the door for a minute before making up his mind. To talk. That's all he wanted to do. Nothing drastic, nothing was made up in his mind yet. He just wanted to sort out whatever it was he was feeling.

After knocking on the door, Bolin was led in by a soldier. He saw Kuvira at a table, and instantly froze when he saw three of the first commanders there as well. And Guan, who somehow managed to worm his way into the higher up's meetings despite being a second commander.

"Bolin," Kuvira greeted. "Do you have anything to report?"

"Uh... Kuvira... sir," Bolin mumbled. "I... uh... kinda hoped I could maybe possibly potentially have a... uh... talk. About things. You know, just... things. Nothing too serious no no, of course."

Kuvira's expression remained unchanged. "Is there something you want to say?"

Bolin gulped. He wasn't expecting to have an audience. "Well, the thing is, I was... hoping to speak alone. Not in a bad way or anything, just y'know. Like..."

This was getting difficult for Kuvira's patience. "Bolin, if there's something you need to say then do so now. I don't have the time for this. Our soldiers have just run into the United Forces on the border and First Commander Cheng is preventing them from advancing. I need to prepare a counter strategy so please, whatever this is, can you get on with it?"

It was now or never. "Kuvira, sir, I just... was thinking about some of the things said during the negotiations."

Kuvira relaxed a little and walked over to Bolin. "Did you have some ideas on how to get through to Su?"

"Well... not exactly. It was more what Opal was saying. About the villagers being forced into slave labour. Or being made to relocate. Are we... is that what the Earth Empire has been doing?"

There was an uneasy silence as Kuvira stared into Bolin's eyes. They were cold and emotionless. "Rumours spread easily. I wouldn't trouble your mind over it."

"Oh, Opal you say? Opal Beifong?" First Commander Weilan spoke up. "First Commander Cheng said she came by Ga-Eul a while ago. She must've mistaken something she saw there."

Kuvira shot the new First Commander an icy glare for only learning about this now. Weilan was the new replacement after Hu stepped down as First Commander of Central Division. He could thank Guan's scathing report of the desert mission for that.

"It's more than that," Bolin continued. "I just... don't you feel like this is going too far? With the army and all? Maybe we should just, I dunno, leave Zaofu and then we can celebrate uniting the empire. Ooh, we could have the party at Ba Sing Se! I'm sure Varrick could whip up some fireworks to launch from the walls? Yeah! That would be way better than Zaofu –"

"Are you saying that you no longer believe in our mission?" Kuvira stared down Bolin, stepping closer and closer, as Bolin inched backwards.

"No... no... of course not!"

"And your loyalty? Are you no longer loyal to the Earth Empire?"

Bolin gulped, "Sure! Of course I am!"

"I'm thinking maybe this mission was too much for you to handle. That maybe your personal feelings for Opal are getting in the way of your duty?" Kuvira said. Bolin shook his head vigorously. "I think perhaps some supervision is in order. Unless you can convince me that you haven't wavered."

"Of course I haven't wavered! I... I truly believe in everything we've done!" Bolin breathed in, trying to ease his trembling. "I just had concerns, but nothing that would sway my loyalties! I see that now."

Kuvira narrowed her eyes. She couldn't tell if Bolin was just acting loyal or if he truly was. Either way, she had bigger koi fish to fry. She turned back to meeting room, keeping her hands behind her back, "I think that a performance review will be in order after Zaofu. But until then, I suggest you only disturb me when you have a solution to getting through to Suyin."

"Of course, Kuvira sir!" Bolin saluted, and quickly left the meeting room.

The metal doors slammed with a clunk, though Bolin barely noticed the sound. He couldn't breathe in the outdoor air fast enough, gulping it in as if he'd been drowning in a deep sea. He may as well have been drowning. But as Bolin managed to calm himself, he felt like he finally saw things clearer.

He'd made a big mistake. Now, he had to try and fix it.

The flight into Zaofu had gone smoother than expected. Korra, Ikki, and Meelo, swirled the clouds around them, obscuring them from the airships. Jinora had taken Pepper up high into the clouds, above the airships and hopefully, unnoticed by the Earth Empire.

Occasionally, Korra caught glimpses of the army below. She'd never seen anything like it. Zaofu had always seemed like this untouchable, remote, silver jewel in the southern Earth Kingdom, so far removed from national politics that it would never come up on anyone's radar. Yet now, there were rows and rows of soldiers waiting to bust the domes in. Korra only hoped she wasn't too late.

As Jinora descended, Korra and Ikki let go of the swirling mist. A giant cloud funnel descending to the ground wouldn't exactly look natural, and possibly give them away. Instead, Jinora tried swooping down behind the Beifong Estate, as the dome was closest to the mountains and least visible to the soldiers.

Back in City Spire, Suyin sat in an office room alone. She hadn't been back to the estate since the monorails connecting the domes were patrolled by Earth Empire soldiers, so her and her family had been holed up in the skyscraper. Thankfully her chef had also evacuated the estate and had prepared food and drink for all of them on the top floor. Though it was a nice gesture, all the kalenutscos in the world couldn't ease her worries.

"Suyin, Ma'am," a guard opened the door.

Suyin snapped back into reality, sliding her glass along the table, "What it is?"

"You have a visitor."

Suyin looked perplexed at the news, though followed the guard out into the foyer.

Once in the hallway, Suyin could see young airbenders in robes. Tenzin's kids. Standing with a woman in a green singlet top with dark green pants. Although her hair was shorter, Suyin knew she'd seen her before. Her eyes widened.

"Hi, Su."

"Korra? Korra!" Suyin ran over and hugged the Avatar tightly. "I can't believe it! I... we all thought you were in trouble!"

Korra pulled away, "Yeah, I had to take some time to recover."

Suyin beamed as her mind raced, "How... how did you get into Zaofu? Where have you been all this time?"

"Jinora, Ikki, and Meelo came looking for me. With Lin too, though she couldn't get through the blockade."

"It was our family mission!" Meelo piped up.

Korra smiled and continued, "I've been in the Foggy Swamp for a few months now. Actually, when I first went there I ran into Toph. She helped train me and get the rest of the metal poison out. It had been in me this whole time."

Suyin smiled fondly, "Mom's still out there huh?" She looked back to Korra, "We've missed you. I'm so glad you're alright."

"Well, that sounds like quite a tale," Raiko noticed the commotion and walked over.

"Mr President," Korra cupped her hands together and bowed. Raiko returned the gesture.

"Avatar, it is good to have you back. Though while you were gallivanting around the Foggy Swamp, Kuvira managed to rampage all over the Earth Kingdom."

Korra frowned. Raiko was terse on a good day, let alone a day with an army breathing down his neck ready to storm the city. She wouldn't let his comments dampen her mood. "I know. We were going to head back to Republic City, but I wanted to come here after hearing what was happening."

"Korra's run into the Earth Empire before," Jinora said. She looked to the Avatar as she elaborated, "She said the soldiers have been going into the Foggy Swamp to harvest vines from the Banyan Tree. It's upsetting the spiritual balance there."

"Well, we have more pressing issues than some 'vines'," Raiko replied. Jinora didn't take too kindly to his dismissal. "We were meant to be having peace talks to negotiate handing the throne back to Prince Wu, though Kuvira showed up with her forces and refuses to relinquish power. Her new 'empire' is apparently the 'future of the Earth Kingdom'." Raiko fumed, shaking his head while looking back to the window, as if somehow the situation outside had changed in the last hour.

Korra looked between both Suyin and Raiko, "Yeah, Jinora and Ikki filled me in. What can I do to help?"

"Well, I don't know? Maybe take Kuvira's bending away? Knock her out? Go into the Avatar state and throw her far away? Any of those should be no problem for you, Avatar," Raiko replied, throwing his arms in around.

Now the president was starting to grate Korra's nerves, "I just got here so no need to get angry with me, sir," she frowned. She turned back to Suyin, "Besides, I've met Kuvira before and she seems like someone who can be reasoned with. Maybe I could try talking to her?"

"Pah!" Raiko threw his hands in the air and walked to the windows.

Suyin sighed, "Korra, me of all people wants to see the good in Kuvira. She... was like a daughter to me long ago. Now, she is my daughter-in-law." Her face grew downcast, filled with deep sadness and regret, "But I don't think she can be reasoned with anymore. I'm not suggesting you follow any of Raiko's advice," she glared in his direction, "but I'm also not sure that talking will get us anywhere either."

Korra exhaled. She didn't want to admit it, but the thought of trying to enter the Avatar State still scared her. It was a great power that granted her the knowledge and strength of her past lives, but she'd lost her connection to her past lives when she fought Unalaq. And since her fight with Zaheer, she'd barely been able to use the Avatar state without collapsing. She had removed the poison, so that was a start at least, but it wasn't a guarantee that she could swing back into action.

"I don't think fighting is always the answer," Suyin continued. "But we can't stay locked up here forever either. Kuvira will march on us and we have to be prepared. But," she placed a hand gingerly on Korra's shoulder, "I am so glad to have you back. We really did miss you."

Korra smiled. She sighed, "Maybe... maybe knowing the Avatar is back will change Kuvira's mind? Make her think twice before marching on in?" Korra suggested. "I'm not saying that talking to her will fix everything, but maybe it will at least calm things down?"

Suyin didn't reply at first. Instead, she smiled warmly, "You have changed Korra. In these three years you've really grown; I can see that already. I give you permission to be my envoy for Zaofu."

Korra looked back to Suyin, "I'll try be back as soon as I can."

Suyin smiled, "Thank you, Korra."

"You three stay here in the tower," Korra looked towards the airbender kids. "I won't be long."

"Aww... but I don't want to miss the Avatar fight!" Meelo protested.

It was almost funny the first time he said it, though Korra found it harder to laugh this time. The thought of fighting a tough opponent like Kuvira wasn't one she wanted to entertain. She shook her head while smirking, then made her way into the hallway.

Korra took a left and started towards the elevator. As she neared the metal doors, she could hear a muffled voice from inside as the elevator reached her level. Whoever it was, they were rather chatty.

As the doors opened, Korra could see two men inside; one in emerald green and gold, doing the talking, and the other in a green-grey prison outfit.

"... and so I that's why I bought two pairs of the cufflinks. Y'know, I am so glad that the shops in the central dome are still operating. Shopping really takes your mind off this 'siege' business you reckon?"

"Wu, they weren't 'operating' they were trying to pack up and prepare to evacuate, until you told them you had to buy new cufflinks."

"Ah well, I don't really see the difference."

As the pair stepped out the elevator, Korra's eyes widened. "Mako?"

Mako stopped in his tracks, like a fox antelope stuck in a satomobile headlight. He stared at the woman before him, in complete disbelief, as he slowly realised who it was. "Wait... Korra?!"

Korra grinned as she ran over and hugged him. Neither of them said a word, simply enjoying each other's embrace. It had been so long since they'd seen each other, and Mako still didn't believe it was really happening.

"Oh! I can't believe it! It's the Avatar!" Wu blurted out. No one paid him any attention.

"Korra... is it really you? What are doing here?"

Korra chuckled, "It's a long story. I'll fill you in on the details later, but I've been spending time in the Foggy Swamp. Then Jinora and the kids found me and we came here as soon as I could."

"The Foggy Swamp!" Mako slammed a fist into his open palm. "Of course! The search parties focused on the western coast. And the Air Nation didn't have any contacts in the swamp, so no wonder we couldn't find you!"

She couldn't help but laugh, seeing Mako and his 'detective brain' always working, even now. "Well, I'm here now. I'm sorry for taking so long to return."

"No," Mako shook his head, tears welling up in his eyes, "no it's all good. I'm just glad you're safe."

Korra smiled warmly. As she studied Mako's attire again, she raised an eyebrow, "Though I nearly didn't recognise you in that prison outfit. What crime did you do?" She joked.

Wu's face was aghast, "I've told people many times! This uniform is the latest from Ba Sing Se!"

"Yeah...," Mako grimaced.

"Uh, Mako?" Wu tapped his bodyguard obnoxiously. "Aren't you forgetting something?"

"Oh, yeah. Korra, this is Prince Wu. I've been working as his bodyguard for the past few months. Hence the prison uniform."

Korra laughed, while Wu cut Mako an icy glare. He quickly turned back to the Avatar, putting on his most dashing smile he could muster, "Korra, Avatar Korra, it is truly an honour to meet you." He took a hold of Korra's hand and kissed it.

"Nice... to meet you too," Korra wiped her hand on her pants. "So, you're the prince?"

Wu scoffed, "Well, the 'prince' part is currently being debated. I'm sure you've seen the army out there and all?"

"Yeah. I'm actually on my way to speak with Kuvira on Suyin's behalf," Korra started towards the elevator again, "I should probably get going, but we need to have a proper catch up."

Mako smiled, "Yeah –"

"I would love to get to know each other!" Wu blurted out.

Korra winced at the suggestion, but gave a wave to Mako as she stepped inside the elevator. The two of them watched each other as the doors closed.

"I think I really hit it off with her, don't you Mako?" Wu leant on Mako's shoulder.

Mako didn't even hear what Wu said, he just continued watching the silver doors as if Korra were still there.

Bolin's mind was running a million miles a minute. Questions, doubts, fears, all swirled inside as he marched to the maglev train. He had to focus on one thing at a time, and that was, telling his teammates he was defecting. Then, finding Varrick and convincing him and Zhu Li to defect too.

But was that such a good idea to tell his teammates? Akito wouldn't understand. As fond as he was of their mech pilot, maybe he shouldn't say anything to him? But maybe the other three would understand?

The door to his cabin was already open. Thankfully there were soldiers conversing and milling about outside, and no one was there checking entry into the train. It was a short walk through a train cabin and into the next when Bolin reached their sleeping quarters. Though when he got there, he noticed three of the beds were empty; only his and Akito's looked lived in. Bolin quickly stuffed whatever belongings he had into a satchel, and started walking towards the next cabin.

As he made his way to the door however, he noticed three figures ahead in plain green maintenance gear. He recognised the messy hair of the man closest to him. "Baraz?"

The firebender stopped in his tracks, as did the other two. Slowly, he turned around, "Hey... Bolin."

"Why are you guys in maintenance gear? And those bags...," Bolin's eyes widened. "Wait! You three are leaving too? And you didn't say anything?!"

"Don't take it personally kid," Gombo stepped forward. He was also in maintenance gear but as expected, he had ripped the sleeves of the top. "We had a good thing going for a while, but this whole 'siege' thing ain't really what we're about. It's not like we've known each other that long anyway."

Bolin looked hurt at the suggestion, "What... I mean –"

"What Gombo ''meant'' to say," Baraz cut the man a glare, "was that ''despite'' being a team and working together and all that, we can't really stay anymore. What the Earth Empire is doing... it's not really something we agree with."

Gombo tutted, "We've been waiting to leaving for a while now. Since the desert mission. Figured with all the eyes on the silver city we could make a break for it."

Ahnah furrowed her brows, "Wait Bolin, what did you mean by 'leaving too'?"

"Well," Bolin inhaled sharply, "I'm... thinking of leaving the Earth Empire." He said the last part quietly, just in case anyone else was on the train.

The three of them looked between each other, surprised at what they were hearing. Ahnah replied first, "What? Really?"

"Yeah."

"We all thought you and Kuvira were tight. With all the extra missions and stuff," Baraz said.

Bolin looked a bit troubled at the thought, "Well, yeah, I wanted to believe in what we were doing. And I still do, in some of it at least. But this Zaofu mission just doesn't feel right. And it turns out that the Earth Empire have been forcing states to join and treating citizens terribly just to keep our army running. I can't stay any longer either."

"Well," Gombo clapped, "if you're leaving too then we don't need to worry then aye? Let's just go our separate ways. Good luck to ya kid."

The other two stayed put while Bolin called out, "Wait! Don't... don't you want to leave together? I mean, the Earth Empire thing might be all over but... we're still a team right?"

Gombo grunted, "As I said, don't take it personally. Us three have just been together longer. Not sure where we'll go, but probably not in the Earth Kingdom right now."

"But what about putting a stop to all this? We can still find a way to help?"

"I dunno Bolin," Ahnah replied. "The 'team' thing and helping out was nice, really, but I think the best thing is just to lay low until something is sorted out."

Bolin looked to Baraz, "What about you? You said that you wanted to use your bending for good for a change? Shouldn't we try and help the Earth Kingdom now that it's in trouble?"

Baraz gazed off to the side. He sighed deeply, "I did – still do – but...," he trailed off. "Bolin, you're different to us. You've been friends with the Avatar. Saved the world and stopped bad guys, for real. Us three? We're barbarians, through and through. Outlaws. We tried the whole 'on the side of the law' thing and it turns out, just like Gombo thought it would, that it was all just a sham. I'm not saying we'll return to that previous life – if we even could now – but I think us three need to stick together, wherever we go."

Bolin glanced between the three of them. He had to share his thoughts, even if it was futile. "Look, if you three want to go off alone then I won't stop you. But you aren't just 'outlaws'; you're also my teammates. And that hasn't changed. When I decided to leave, I knew I'd come back here to try and get you guys out too. Despite everything wrong with the Earth Empire – and yeah, there is a ''lot'' wrong with it – getting to know you guys and working together... it was something special. It actually felt like when I was working with Team Avatar." He smiled fondly, "You're not that different from them either. In your own way."

All three of them look between themselves. It was hard to deny what Bolin was saying. As much as they'd tried to just cut and run, Baraz and Ahnah had to admit that they'd grown fond of their adventures and missions together. Even Gombo, though far more distant and reserved, couldn't dismiss Bolin's words.

A voice came from behind the four of them, "Well, if we really are a team then why haven't I been told about this?"

Everyone turned to see Akito standing there. His face was bitter with hurt and anger. "Akito," Bolin mumbled, his eyes shocked but guilty.

"You were all just going to leave without saying anything?"

"I tried talking to you this morning," Bolin replied.

"But you didn't say anything about ''defecting'' from the army, only that you had concerns!"

Gombo grunted, "Like I said to Bolin, don't take it personally. Yeah we did some missions together, but it ain't the same as what us three have. We don't really know you."

Akito laughed spitefully. He shook his head, "Don't know you huh?" He looked at each of them as he spoke, "Gombo; you worked for a nasty baker as a kid. But you loved his red bean bao. It's one of your favourite foods. You never knew your parents, and you snore loudly."

"What?" Gombo looked slightly annoyed at the accusation. Baraz shrugged, eliciting a glare from Gombo.

"And Ahnah; you once tried making stewed sea prunes, though according to Baraz it tasted like old boots. Your Five Flavour Soup was a lot better though. You also don't know your parents, but had a sister who you were close with until she left for the North Pole after being adopted by a family. You tried to visit but since becoming an outlaw it made travel difficult. Your favourite animal is a badgermole and you once saw one in an earthbending tournament and tried taking it home with you." He turned to Baraz, "And you, Baraz. You don't like spicy food even though you have Fire Nation heritage. You grew up in a northern town that specialised in sweet and savoury dishes; your favourite is sticky rice with possum chicken and local herbs that you can't buy in many places. You wanted to join the Earth Empire because you wanted to use your bending to help people, not just to hurt them, and you made the kids smile with your fire tricks in Ba Sing Se. You're also conflicted about how you feel about Ahnah."

Baraz turned bright red, "What?! I never told you that last part!" He coughed loudly, "Not... that it's true. Necessarily."

"I inferred the last bit," Akito replied. "And Bolin. You grew up on the streets of Republic City after your parents were killed. You've worked as a pro bender which helped refine your earthbending, and as a mover star. You enjoy noodles of just about any kind, and miss your girlfriend Opal a lot." Akito sighed, "I care about all of you. Maybe you don't feel the same way, but I can't just ignore that you all wanted to leave without me."

"It's not that we wanted to," Bolin replied. "I just didn't think you'd want to. I was going to write a letter but I can't find my crayon pack –"

"Why would you want to leave? Have you forgotten everything we've done to help the Earth Kingdom?"

Baraz stepped forward, "Akito, I do care about you. I do man. At first, I didn't think I'd enjoy your company. I tend to be I dunno... not as enthusiastic or upbeat as you are. But that day you offered me that cup of morning brew, I guess... I saw something different." He placed a hand on Akito's shoulder, who had started tearing up. "And yeah, I should've said something. But the thing is that we just knew we had to get out. I haven't – we haven't – forgotten about all the good we've done. But this. With Zaofu? It's too far. We can't just be a part of something that goes against what we stood for in the first place."

"It isn't just that," Gombo chimed in. "The folks from HQ in Ba Sing Se are being tight lipped about it, but rumour has it Kuvira made a deal with the Dai Li and now they work for her," he grunted. "I dunno why or what she did, but being aligned with 'em. It ain't something I can go along with. Those Emerald Shadows took so many of us, well before Ba Sing Se fell. Something is very wrong if Kuvira has them in her pocket."

Akito shook his head, "But those are just rumours, surely?! And even if it were true, then what if they're good Dai Li?"

"Bah," Gombo waved his hand in the air.

"I also learnt that our troops have been exploiting cities and villages after we leave. Opal was right... and I didn't want to believe her," Bolin said.

"You don't understand! Without this... without the Earth Empire, I have nothing!"

Ahnah leant forward, "I'm sure that isn't true Akito –"

"Yes, it is," Akito teared up even more, sniffing to try and keep it in. "Before... before this, I was meant to become a physician. I had trained and everything but... my grandma... she needed help and I was the only one there and... I froze," he shook his head. "My father disowned me. Said I was nothing but a snivelling coward. I ran, and I took up engineering. Joining Kuvira... it was the first time I really felt like I was making a difference. Like I was actually helping people, like I'd always wanted to. I can't accept that it's all been for nothing! I can't just leave when I have nothing and no one to go back to outside of this!"

All of them, even Gombo, looked upset at Akito's story. For all the facts and stories Akito had remembered about all of them, none of them knew this much about Akito. "It wasn't all for nothing," Bolin said. "I wanted to prove to my brother that I didn't need him and could make decisions on my own. That's why I didn't want to accept it at first. But I had to be honest with myself," he walked over and placed a hand on Akito's shoulder. "And you do have something outside of this; you have me. You have us. And I promise, I'm going to get you all out. Our bond as a team, it still stands, even without the Earth Empire."

Akito said nothing. He let out a soft sob, and wiped his eyes.

"I'm glad we could have this chat, but we gotta think about leaving," Ahnah said. "We were going to head through the forests to the north. Make our way to the United Republic."

"If you leave now you'll get caught," Akito replied. "They're patrolling all sides of Zaofu. You'll have to blend in and sneak out."

Bolin frowned, "Well, that will be a bit tricky now that I'm on Kuvira's watchlist."

"My patrol starts in a couple hours. At sunset," Akito replied. "No one will think twice about you three patrolling with me, and Bolin, you can hide in another mech suit."

"I'll have to go tell Varrick too."

Ahnah raised an eyebrow, "The science guy?"

"Yeah. It's a long story, but I can't leave without him either. Let's meet at the mech bay in two hours then," Bolin replied. He turned back to Akito, "So will you be coming with us?"

Akito paused, and then exhaled. "Ahnah... I'd really like to try your sea prunes. I think Baraz is too harsh."

Ahnah smiled, "I'll rewrite the recipe just for you."

"Okay, this is good. We can do this," Bolin said.

Chapter Text

"I can't believe Kuvira is keeping me in here locked up like a prisoner!" Varrick wailed while hunched over the railing of the upper floor. Him and Zhu Li had been confined to the lab cabin until further notice. "I'm not feeling well! I think... I think I'm running out of air!"

Zhu Li poured herself some tea, "The air flow is sufficient sir."

Varrick was too busy checking his pulse to hear what his assistant said. He looked back to her with panicked eyes, "Zhu Li! Hold your breath!"

"I'm not holding my breath sir."

"Great! Now we're both going to die!" Varrick waved his hands in the air.

"Psst! Varrick!"

Varrick looked up at hearing his name. "Zhu Li... now the head voices are back! Ah great this is going from bad to rock bottom!"

"The ceiling, sir."

"Psst! Varrick! It's me!" the voice repeated.

Varrick looked up to the roof of the train. "Oh Bolin! Boy am I glad to see you. I thought I was losing my mind with the head voices again! Wait, where did that hatch come from? Never mind the hatch, I have something important to tell you!"

Bolin looked down from the roof, "Well, I have something important to tell you!" He jumped and landed on the floor.

Varrick grabbed Bolin's collar as he did the same, "Kuvira's crazy!" they said in unison.

"Wait, how did you find out?" Varrick asked.

"Well... this whole army at Zaofu thing is like, pretty terrible right? When I suggested we call it off she threatened me. Oh, and she might be working with the Dai Li too after all!"

"Oh yeah, the Dai Li are totally in cahoots with Kuvira. I was there in Ba Sing Se. And Hou-Ting," Varrick replied.

Bolin's eyes nearly popped out of his head, "What?! Hou-Ting?! You mean, the old queen of the Earth Kingdom who died in the palace fire?! And you knew all this time?!"

Varrick chuckled while both of them still held onto each other, "Well yeah, I thought it was kinda neat how she somehow faked her own death. I dunno."

"But then how did you find out Kuvira's crazy?!"

Now Varrick's eyes grew fearful again, "Well... she threatened to throw me out of the train when I refused to keep working on the spirit vine project! There were way too many 'Varricks' of power and the system blew up. We nearly died in a purple explosion of death!"

Bolin didn't understand much of what Varrick said. "Wow... that sounds... kinda serious."

"We have to get out of here. But I've been locked in here for the whole day!"

"We have a plan," Bolin replied. "My teammates want out too. We're heading to the mech bay soon and will sneak out with Akito's patrol!"

Varrick pulled away, "Good enough for me. Zhu Li! Do the thing!"

In a flash, Zhu Li leapt up the hatch and onto the roof. She hung her arms down, grabbing onto Varrick's and pulling him up. Bolin made his own way out.

The sun had already begun to set by the time Korra reached the Earth Empire camp. The orange and yellow glows caught on all the metal of the troops, giving them a fiery and ethereal look to them. Korra didn't have her glider anymore, so the walk had taken about an hour. But it had given her plenty of time to think about everything and what she'd say.

The soldiers at the front were suspicious as she approached. Korra raised her hands calmly as one of them yelled from their hastily-constructed earth wall, "State your business! Who are you?!"

"I'm... Korra," she replied. "The Avatar."

Both soldiers looked perplexed, but it slowly started to sink in. "What do you want?"

"I'm here to talk, that's all. With Kuvira."

She waited another minute or so before the soldier atop the wall nodded and let her through. Of course, Korra could've just earthbent the wall apart, but that wouldn't have helped her case for coming in peace. Once the walls parted, Korra stepped through.

Most of the forces she'd seen waiting outside Zaofu earlier had packed up for the day. There were metal sleeping quarters arranged across the field, though much of the luscious green grass had been trampled into the dirt. There were plenty of patrol groups marching about, with people on foot and those new mech suits Korra had first seen in the swamp.

A short distance away, there stood a larger metal meeting room. Korra watched as a woman walk out, her arms posed behind her and her head upright. Her dark hair was neatly tied into two braids tucked into a band at the back, and her dark green eyes looked directly at her with a cold and unwavering stare. She'd only met Kuvira a couple times, about three years ago, but the way she carried herself now seemed rather different. Those posters she'd seen really did capture Kuvira's strong persona.

Kuvira marched over, as another man – who Korra realised was Baatar Jr. – followed behind. Kuvira gave the Avatar a look up and down, as if to check if it really were her, before speaking, "Avatar Korra. It really is you. We were all so worried when we learnt of your disappearance."

"It's good to see you again too," Korra cupped her hands together and bowed. Kuvira didn't return the gesture. "I've been sent by Suyin to talk."

A soft grunt left Kuvira's lips, "We already went to the negotiations. Your presence here is unnecessary."

Although she'd said her words with a neutral and flat tone, Korra couldn't help but feel like there was an underlying resentment festering beneath them. "But things aren't alright; there's a lot of scared and angry people inside Zaofu. Can you not just take your army elsewhere and come back and negotiate?"

"I think we both know that isn't going to happen."

Korra sighed, "Is Bolin here? I was hoping to talk to him and hear his side."

"I'll go have a look for him," Baatar replied. He gestured to one of the soldiers and sent him running off towards the maglev train.

"Look," Korra inhaled sharply, "I know that you have been helping the Earth Kingdom and all that, but this move here in Zaofu? It's causing a lot of tension and something bad is just waiting to happen. Is there really no way that you can't just stand down and let things cool off for a bit?"

"Avatar Korra, while you were gone, the Earth Kingdom descended into chaos. We needed someone to bring stability in a world without the Avatar. And we did; I stepped up. I was tasked with bringing peace to a fractured Earth Kingdom and uniting our nation, and that's exactly what I've done. You can't come to me as I'm on the verge of completing that mission and tell me to stop."

If Kuvira knew how to tap into Korra's guilt, it was working. Being reminded of the fact that she'd been gone for three years and out of action sent a pang through Korra's chest. Her eyes turned to the ground.

Kuvira could see she'd struck something inside Korra. "Why should we treat Zaofu any differently to the other states? They've all joined. And wouldn't we be a far greater nation if we all worked together? That sounds like something an Avatar would agree to."

"Well... yes, of course. But I just think the way you've gone about it all is making everyone uneasy. I haven't been back that long but that much I can tell."

"Korra, I know what Suyin can be like. She thinks that being part of the Earth Empire will be signing over her precious Zaofu. But it won't. I have no intention of removing her or anyone for that matter. It's mostly a trade agreement so we can better help the other Earth Kingdom states that have been most affected by the barbarian attacks. Suyin and Baatar Sr. built Zaofu themselves; they're not thinking clearly because they're protective over their city. But I can assure you, I have only the best intentions for being here."

Korra could see that Kuvira's anger or resentment had somewhat settled down. But things still didn't sit right with her, "But then why bring your entire army and threaten to march in on them if that's why you're here?"

Kuvira chuckled, "Korra, I've been doing this for three years now I know what I'm doing." Her face grew more serious, "The army isn't here to provoke but to reinforce what we stand for. Our strength, unity, and progress. To show Zaofu all the Earth Empire can do. Besides, their meeting council have been corrupted by those with ill-intentions. I hoped this army would have shaken some sense into them but it seems the viper rats still remain."

"Who do you mean?" Korra asked.

"Mainly the president, and Prince Wu," Kuvira narrowed her eyes. "I doubt you've also had a good impression of them. Wu simply wants the throne as his play toy, while Raiko is rather untrustworthy."

Korra didn't say anything in reply. She'd certainly had her run-ins with Raiko, and Wu seemed like a rather annoying person to be negotiating with. It still didn't justify this show of force though.

"Well," Kuvira relaxed her arms, "it seems Avatar that you agree with what I've said. You've mentioned that you understand why Zaofu should be a part of the Earth Empire, and you've also implied that you agree with my assessment of those at the negotiating table. So if we are on the same page, then I should be getting back to business."

"Hold on," Korra replied. She couldn't help but feel like she was being played by Kuvira. "I might be able to see some of your point of view, but it doesn't change the fact that this army needs to go."

Now Korra could see a change in Kuvira's emotions. Just a hint of white hot anger flared in her pupils, not enough to provoke an outburst, but it was there nonetheless. Kuvira exhaled sharply, "I suppose you are right Korra, in that cooler heads will prevail. Tell you what, I'll extend the deadline by another day, and I'll have some of the troops pull back to the edge of the state. Maybe that will help ease some of the tension."

Korra smiled, "Thank you."

"And Korra. Try to talk some sense into Suyin. Zaofu cannot suffer because of her stubbornness or misinformed ideas about what we'll do or not do to her city. Please get her to reconsider."

"I'll tell her what we talked about," Korra nodded slowly.

As the Avatar walked off, Kuvira's expression dropped, and any politeness vanished from her face. She'd predicted multitudes of outcomes and prepared for nearly every scenario, but this, the Avatar returning here and now of all places, was something she had not catered for.

"Sir!" the soldier returned. "I couldn't find Bolin. His quarters are empty."

Baatar furrowed his brows, "Then where is he?"

It had been a couple hours since Korra had left to meet Kuvira. The upper floors of City Spire were eerily quiet, with everyone simply waiting to see what would happen next. Suyin was busy in an office talking with the Zaofu Guard, while Raiko was still making calls.

In the foyer Opal sat with her brothers and the other airbenders. She hadn't seen Korra yet, though Jinora and the others had filled her in on their journey across the Earth Kingdom. Things did seem bleak, but at least finding the Avatar again would give them something.

She could see her brother Huan was trembling. His eyes were glued to the floor, as if he were in constant worry that the building would collapse. "Hey," she touched his shoulder.

Huan took a while to respond. He gave a half smile in response.

"So... I heard that you had finalised your art school papers," Opal smiled.

Her brother mumbled something incoherent before clearing his throat, "Yeah."

"That's cool," Opal replied. There was an uneasy silence that followed. "Do you know what you'll be studying yet exactly?"

"Opal," Huan stared at her. "Is this really a good time?"

Opal looked down, "Sorry, I just... saw you were on edge. I mean, we all are, but I just wanted to help distract."

Despite being a couple years older, Opal had always tried to look out for Huan. After a long pause Huan sighed, "Qinchao Academy. Named after the old state down south." He smiled, "National Art Academy has a big name and lots of people, but their art doesn't have... soul. QA's not a bad school either, but their stuff is more what I'm into."

"Sounds fun."

Huan's smile faded, "If we get out of Zaofu that is."

"Hey," Opal held her brother's hand, "We will." She turned back to the foyer, noticing Ikki and Meelo also staring into space. "Hey, do you two know that my brother Huan is really into art. Like, really good."

Huan looked embarrassed, but neither of the airbenders noticed it. "Oh wow that's cool!" Ikki replied.

"Yeah," Opal continued, "he's going to start art school soon." She looked down the hall to the elevator, "I think there's that art studio a couple floors down. The one where that weekly class used to be held. Do you want Huan to teach you?"

Now her poor brother had gone from embarrassed to Fire Nation-bright-red. "Yeeesss!" Ikki cheered. "That would be awesome! We could paint rainbows, and sunshines, and clouds, and animals!"

"I'm already a bit of a natural," Meelo grinned, "but I'm bored so anything will do."

Opal looked back to Huan, smiling as she waited for him to say something. Huan cleared his throat again, "I'm... not sure what they have down there. But... we can go check it out."

The three of them started towards the elevator, with Ikki explaining the rest of her ideas in great detail.

"That was kind of you," Jinora smiled.

"I just wanted Huan to take his mind of things. He gets anxious enough as it is." She turned to her other brothers, "Do you two want to go with them?"

Wing and Wei were brooding in the corner of the room by the window. Something had got them down. Wei shook his head while Wing looked to Opal, "No, we're fine."

"Alright," Opal replied.

In the office next to them, Raiko was busy on a phone call to General Iroh. He sighed deeply, rubbing his temples with his free hand. "How many troops are there?"

"Not sure. But enough to keep us at bay. Nothing has gone down yet, but I wouldn't say there's peace in the air."

"But how did Kuvira manage to organise that many troops? There's an entire army out here, and she apparently also has one blocking you from coming here too?" Raiko asked. He still couldn't believe it. General Iroh and the United Forces hadn't even left the United Republic yet since Kuvira's soldiers had blocked off the shortest route. He was busy organising naval units, but it would take far longer.

"I heard reports that the Earth Empire had been building their military bases near the border. I guess now we know why."

Raiko exhaled sharply. "So how long will it take to reach Zaofu?"

"If we can get together an air fleet it could take –"

There was static and a strange humming sound on the line. "Hello? General Iroh?" Raiko's eyes widened, "Hello?!"

Suyin came in through the doorway, "Communications have been jammed. Probably Kuvira."

"What?!" Raiko stared in disbelief for a moment before sinking into a chair. "I was just on the phone to General Iroh. Kuvira has soldiers at the border and is preventing them from getting here." He sighed, "Is there a secure line? Any way to get back in touch?"

"My guard are working on it," she replied.

The bell from the elevator rang, catching all their attention. "Korra's back," Suyin said.

She walked out with Raiko into the foyer, watching as the Avatar exited the elevator. She didn't look particularly pleased. "How did it go Korra?"

"She won't stand down. But she did extend the deadline by a day," Korra replied. "I tried to get her to send the army away and at least ease tensions, but she wouldn't budge."

Suyin should have known that Kuvira wouldn't negotiate, but somehow, she'd held onto hope that she would. "That gives us a little more time."

"To do what, exactly?" Raiko cut in. "I can't get through to General Iroh. No one can get through to help us. We don't have any options left."

"I did all I could sir," Korra defended. "And it at least helped keep Kuvira at bay for a little longer." She sighed, wondering if she really believed that last part.

"Korra!"

The Avatar turned around and saw Opal in the hallway. "Hey," she replied, giving her a hug.

"I'm so glad you're here and you're safe," Opal pulled away. "Did you talk to Kuvira?"

"Yeah. She's going to wait another day before moving in, but she wouldn't stand down."

Opal grunted, "Figures."

Korra continued, "I also tried to speak to Bolin. Just to talk some sense into him. But he was busy apparently."

The airbender didn't reply at first. She was still angry at her boyfriend, and couldn't understand that after all this he was still working for Kuvira. "I don't have a lot to say to Bolin at the moment anyway."

There was a stillness that filled the room. Korra looked over to Suyin, "How did it get like this? With Kuvira?"

Suyin took her time answering, breathing in and exhaling deeply, "After the fall of Hou-Ting, Kuvira felt like we weren't doing enough to help. Zaofu did reach out to the surrounding states and provide aid, but we didn't want to form an armed militia and retake states overrun by the barbarian clans. I didn't want to, I mean."

"Well, it looks like that would have been better than what we have now," Raiko muttered under his breath.

"Hindsight," Suyin glared at Raiko. She continued explaining things to Korra, "While I see I should've been more active in the early days, I didn't want to be interim leader of the Earth Kingdom. I felt I'd be seen as nothing but a conqueror, as someone working hard to maintain a monarchy that many states didn't agree with. I wanted to help, but not like that. I guess Kuvira felt like she couldn't talk to me about it." Suyin gazed off out the window. She'd thought Kuvira had become distant after the coronation, but maybe it had really been much earlier than that. "Kuvira left with many of the Zaofu Guard, Baatar Jr, our workforce, and anyone who agreed with her ideals. We didn't talk for a long time. Not really, until the final mission to retake Ba Sing Se that is. I felt like things had improved, like we could all understand each other a bit more."

Korra nodded along, "So the coronation. Kuvira didn't step down?"

Raiko decided to cut in, "No, she claimed that the Dai Li attacked her and there were Red Lotus operatives helping the barbarian clans, giving her a reason to stay on for Wu's safety. Only she kept inching closer and closer to taking over the entire kingdom."

"She didn't want to hand power back to the old monarchy," Suyin reiterated. "I think she felt like it would all be for nothing. That after bringing peace to the fractured Earth Kingdom, things would just go back to the way they were before. But she took things too far. She started forcing states to join by strong-arming them. I don't know if how much of what she's doing now is because she truly cares about the Earth Kingdom or if she just wants to prove she can control it. And while I still care about Kuvira and my son Baatar, I stand by what I said this morning: she can't be reasoned with anymore."

Korra exhaled. It was starting to become clearer how everything had changed since she'd been away. Korra had painted this picture of Kuvira in her head as if she was the replacement Avatar that Korra wished she could be, but maybe it wasn't completely like that. "I wish I knew what more to do."

"Well, I think we can all agree the negotiations have failed," Raiko replied. He straightened his glasses, "So I would suggest going on the offensive. If you can arrest Kuvira maybe some of her army will defect too."

"We can't," Suyin said. "We'd have the whole army on top of Zaofu in a heartbeat."

"So? We have the Avatar now. I don't think an army should be that much trouble."

Korra shot Raiko a glare, "When I said I could help I didn't mean throw an entire army at me."

"I've seen you fight a thirty-story giant being of darkness. Just go into the Avatar state and send them flying back," Raiko waved his arm around. "I thought you'd said you had recovered in the Foggy Swamp?"

"Yeah but you're making it sound like it's easy!"

"Are you saying you can't use the Avatar State to fight back?"

Korra shook her head, "No, of course not. I...," she froze, thinking back to all the times she'd tried using it since getting sick. Every time she'd collapsed and passed out, and even started seeing that ghost appear when she did. Korra exhaled sharply, "I'm not going to fight an entire army, even if I could defeat them all. There has to be a better way."

Raiko grunted angrily, "Well, we've been trying to come up with ideas all day and I don't think we've gotten very far."

"President Raiko, that's enough," Suyin cut in bluntly. Raiko looked slightly shocked Suyin would speak to him like that, but she wasn't holding back, "Korra has just returned to us after being out of action for three years. Don't pressure her into becoming your war machine."

There was a long pause as Raiko sighed, and rubbed his eyes. "You're right. I apologise Avatar Korra."

"Look, I think we're all just anxious about everything," Korra smoothed it over. "But we have another day to plan. Maybe we'll be able to get through to General Iroh or someone else?"

"The sun's set now," Opal chimed in. "Korra, I can show you to a room if you like?"

Korra smiled, "That would be great."

As the pair walked off, Suyin turned back to Raiko. Her eyes had a hint of frustration in them, "Maybe go easier on Korra."

"I'm just being realistic," Raiko defended.

Suyin breathed out, "I'll let you know if the guard manage to set up a secure line." She dipped her head slightly, and began making her way back to her makeshift office. Raiko simply leaned back in his chair, watching the last rays of light disappear behind the mountain line.

In the corner of the foyer, Wing and Wei both stared out the window. They'd been here the whole time, watching Kuvira's forces below.

Akito had been right about the blending in; no one batted an eyelid when he marched out with three others in mech suits. Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah still had their maintenance uniforms, but it was easy to explain by telling them it was merely a field test for the mechs and they'd be needed out in the forests. It had been a tense walk over, but thankfully they'd now reached the treeline at the top of the northern foothills.

The silver domes were now a good distance from them, as were the soldiers. Bolin flicked his visor up and surveyed the area. It would take a bit to walk back to Zaofu, but they had a shot if they left now. "Okay. I say we circle back around through the forests and enter Zaofu from the Beifong Estate, the dome farthest away. There doesn't seem to be as many soldiers patrolling that area."

"What? Are you crazy!" Varrick also flipped his mech's visor. "Zaofu is doomed!"

"I have to get back to Opal! We have to go back and warn Su and stop the soldiers form storming in!"

"We also have to warn the world of this superweapon Kuvira wants to build out of the spirit vine research! We can help by getting out of here and sprinting back to Republic City pronto!"

Bolin pondered for a moment. "Well, that does make sense," he replied. "Maybe we can split up?"

Baraz spoke up, "I don't think splitting up is a good idea right now man. We've probably drawn attention to ourselves by now. Could be troops looking for us."

"Then what should we do?" Bolin asked.

While the others talked back and forth, Akito could make out the faintest sound coming from ahead. "Guys," he said. There was no response. "Guys!"

"What?"

"Do you hear that?" The sound grew louder, and Akito knew exactly what it was. "Visors down! Now!"

Just as Akito had thought, the sound belonged to a mech suit marching through the forest. He couldn't mistake the heavy metallic clunks for anything else. On the distant hill before them, a green and black mech emerged from the trees. It stopped in its tracks, probably because it spotted them, though proceeded to wave an arm their direction.

"Ahoy!"

The mech came bounding down the hill, though Akito and the others stayed put. They couldn't exactly run now or they'd blow their cover.

Once the mech was closer, Akito lifted his visor. "First Commander Minsheng."

"Ahoy there Lad! I'm glad I ran into you young Akito," the voice replied from inside. Akito had recognised the First Commander's mech with its distinctive black pattern over the green plating, though it was confirmed when the mech visor lifted, revealing Minsheng's greying beard and hair.

"We're just out on a test run. New mech suits," Akito laughed nervously.

"Well, I'm afraid I'll have to borrow you. We have some fugitives to find."

"Fugitives?" Akito tried to sound surprised.

Minsheng nodded, "Yes. Chief Science officer Varrick and his assistant Zhu Li. Oh and Corporal Bolin, your squad captain."

Akito's eyes widened, "No way?! Bolin? I don't believe it."

"Do you have any idea where he went?"

"Can't say I do. Sorry sir."

"Well, we best be off then. Come along."

Akito paused, "But sir, these mech suits still need proper testing. We haven't calibrated all their functions yet, nor completed a comprehensive safety test."

Minsheng chuckled heartily, "Ah Akito, always one to complete his duties rigorously and competently! That's why I admire you young man. But alas, we haven't time to spare. We'll cover more ground together. This way!"

"Alright," Akito sighed. "Let's... follow."

Thankfully the others had their visors shut, so Bolin's terrified expression was hidden for now.

The next ten minutes were excruciatingly tense. The air was saturated with the group's fear of being caught, wondering every second if Minsheng would click and figure out who they were. Thankfully, he was a bit of a talker like Akito, and the two had been conversing the whole time as if they were the only ones there.

"... And that's how I ended up in Southern Command, ha ha."

"That's a pretty neat story sir."

"Y'know," Minsheng turned to Akito. Both of them had their visors up. "If you ever wanted to transfer to Southern Division I'd be happy to have you. I know scouting soldiers from other divisions is generally frowned upon, but you really are a top-notch mech pilot."

"You're too kind sir."

"No, I mean it," Minsheng sighed. He stopped after noticing Gombo, "You there. I hope you won't be using that bisento on the mech suits? It's a rather large weapon for a maintenance worker."

Gombo managed to keep his cool after being singled out. The others, not so much, but thankfully Minsheng didn't notice. "Uh... yeah. It's for emergency use only. Can cut through platinum."

"I hope it's for emergency only. Mech suits aren't cheap," Minsheng turned back and continued up the hillside. "So, who are your new recruit friends in the mech suits, Akito?"

"Ah... well...," Akito fumbled. "This is Bo – I mean... uh... um... Boil. And Rick. And Stew."

Minsheng raised an eyebrow.

"They're from a small town. Way up north."

"Well, the more the merrier. We're going to need more troops after this battle."

Everyone breathed a sigh of relief. Akito wasn't the best at improvising names, but at least it kept them covered for now.

Minsheng thankfully had moved on, "But do consider the transfer option, Akito. I'd love to have you working alongside our division. And if you're anything like the other transfer Guan then I'm sure you'll do well too. He... is rather ambitious I must admit."

At the mention of Guan's name, Ahnah couldn't help but roll her eyes.

"Ah, speaking of. Look over there!" Minsheng drew the attention before them. "Second Commander Guan! Ahoy!"

Bolin and the others felt their stomachs drop. They'd been so close to getting out of Zaofu and now their chances were growing thinner by the second. Still, Bolin tried calming himself. Guan had no reason to suspect Akito and the other team members. As long as they kept their visors down, maybe they'd be alright.

To make things worse, the group noticed a black mech suit walk over from the crest of the hill. The visor lifted, and it turned out to be Baatar. "Second Commander Guan. Any news?"

The metalbender shook his head, "Haven't found anything yet sir."

Baatar turned his attention to Akito's group, "How about you, First Commander Minsheng?"

"Nope, I've covered the ground to the east and haven't seen any sign of them sir."

"It will be nightfall soon. We have to catch them or they'll be much harder to find," Baatar replied.

"Indeed," Guan replied. He turned back to a couple of subordinates and ordered them in different directions. Minsheng and the others in mech suits obscured Gombo Baraz, and Ahnah, though Guan could just make out the non-bender's metal bisento. He furrowed his brows, stepping to the side so he could get a closer view, "Why are you three in maintenance gear?"

Minsheng answered first, "They're maintenance workers helping Akito test these new mech suits. Don't worry; the bisento is for emergencies only I'm told."

Guan ignored Minsheng and pressed further, "Any particular reason why?"

All eyes turned to the trio. Thankfully, they remained calm as Ahnah replied, "Our uniforms were damaged. Changed into these while coming out here for the tests."

Guan then looked over at the mech suits, "And who are these three with Akito?"

Again, Minsheng answered, "They're new recruits. Officers... Boil, Rick, and Stew I believe. From a small town I'm told."

"Who's in the mech suits?" Guan repeated, this time, a little more sternly.

"I said it's –"

"With all due respect First Commander Minsheng, please shut up."

The First Commander was speechless that Guan would talk like that to him like that. Minsheng said nothing to Guan however, instead locking eyes with Akito. With his visor still up, Akito felt Baatar and Guan's eyes hover over him. His blood ran cold.

"Akito?" Minsheng said, his eyes pleading for an answer.

Akito closed his eyes slowly, "I'm sorry sir."

It happened before anyone could react. Akito's visor shut tight. His mech arm lunged forwards and the pistons whirred, pushing Minsheng's mech away. The old commander let out a gruff cry as he tumbled into a tree.

"It's them! In the mech suits!" Guan snarled. He readied his metal coils and lashed out in their direction.

"Guess we're doing this the hard way!" Bolin said. He went to block Guan's cables, though a fork of electricity stunned his mech suit.

Baatar's black-plated mech held its arm out, smoke wafting from the shock charger. "I'll take Bolin! You two, get the others!" He ordered the other two mechs with him.

Bolin readied himself for another barrage of attacks. He'd piloted a mech a few times so knew the basics, but it was nothing compared to a non-bender like Baatar who relied on the machine in every battle. Baatar shot a cable around a fallen tree trunk and flung it forwards, smashing into Bolin's mech and sending him rolling away from the others. Thankfully, he recovered quickly. He flicked his other arm up to unleash a heavy jet of flame that smothered the air in front, sweeping it across in an arc. It was easy to dodge for Baatar, who used a cable to pull him and his mech out of the way, and then landed a punch into Bolin's side.

In front of them, Akito tried tackling one of the other mechs. He flung the suit overhead and slammed them into a boulder, with the pilot crying out from the impact. He noticed Minsheng getting up from his fall and braced himself for his next move. He was as skilled as mech pilots could come, but Minsheng was also renowned for his ability.

Guan unleashed a barrage of rocks at the bending trio on foot, backed up by another mech that fired electrical bolts their way. The blue forks crackled against Ahnah's water defence, while Gombo and Baraz kept the metalbender at bay.

After he flung another boulder, Guan smirked spitefully, "I always knew you threw were absolute trash! I never understood why Kuvira took a chance on you! But I'm glad I'll get this chance to finally put you down myself."

Gombo swiped through the boulder, heaving as he caught his breath. He charged in for the offensive, swinging his bisento with wild and powerful strikes as the air rang with a metallic whirl.

After dodging each attack, Guan slid backwards and propelled himself over Gombo, kicking up a hunk of earth as he flipped. He landed, dragging the earth on top of Gombo. The non-bender smashed the boulder with an outstretched fist. Guan narrowed his eyes, "I should've driven a metal spear through you when we were in Ba Sing Se!"

Gombo wiped his mouth with an elbow, "Finally, we agree on somethin' you metal prick. Feel the same way about you." He unleashed a furious cry as he slashed at Guan.

To the other side of the battlefield, Zhu Li was holding her own against two mech suits. She was surprisingly good at fighting them off, landing her punches and kicks with expert precision, as if she'd practiced a lot. Varrick was not. His mech suit visor flicked open and shut repeatedly as he fumbled the controls from the inside. "What idiot invented these?!"

Zhu Li grunted as she took a blow from the mech suit, "That would be you, sir."

"Huh. I must've been on a cactus juice trip or something," Varrick replied. He managed to roll his suit to the side but still couldn't get it to function properly. Suddenly, the electricity generator charged up. His mech unleashed a bolt of blue that struck the two mech suits, and Zhu Li's, knocking them all down. "I think I've got this now!"

"Sir, you are making this very difficult," Zhu Li grumbled from inside her fallen mech suit.

"Less lecturing more saving my butt!" Varrick replied.

Zhu Li sighed, taking to her feet and lunging at one of the mechs.

Although Bolin had gotten a few hits in, he wasn't a match for Baatar. His mech suit had already lost the flamethrower after Baatar smashed it with a boulder he threw. He'd struck Baatar's suit a couple times with electricity and well-timed punches, but the generator was out of juice.

Baatar grunted as he took another punch to the head. He launched a cable out that wrapped around Bolin's mech suit, and though he struggled, Bolin he couldn't break free. Now was Baatar's chance. He leapt into the air, mech arm whizzing with electricity, and he lunged for Bolin.

Bolin knew this punch would break open the mech, so there was only one thing he could do. Right at the last second, Bolin ejected himself from the mech suit and rolled along the earth. He wasn't hurt, and quickly got into a fighting stance, though his mech hadn't fared well just as he had thought. Although without a mech suit, Bolin wasn't defenceless. Now he had his bending.

First Commander Minsheng had recovered and fought back against Akito. The first commander was a one-man army once inside a mech suit, expertly timing his punches and thrown projectiles with precision. He hadn't even tapped into his flamethrower or electricity generator reserves yet, and still, Akito was working hard to keep up.

Minsheng swung another fist right into Akito's shoulder, pushing him back into a boulder. "Akito... I can't believe this?! You are – were – a top mech pilot. Why would you give in to treachery?"

The only sounds over Akito's mech speakers were his panting as he took to his feet once more. He aimed a lightning bolt at Minsheng's mech, the air crackling with static as it whizzed through the air. Minsheng was quick, but even he couldn't outmanoeuvre it. The fork struck his shoulder, sending a brief jolt through the suit before fizzing out.

"Akito!" Minsheng called out. "If you've gotten into some kind of trouble then let me help!" He grunted as he moved his mech back into a fighting stance, still feeling the effects of the electricity. Akito didn't reply to his offer. "Well... if you refuse to accept my help, then I must treat you the same way I'd treat any other defector. Anyone who would tarnish the name of our Great Uniter or the Earth Empire will suffer a wrath worse than Koh's Realm!"

Something snapped in Akito's heart as he heard Minsheng. He wanted to reply. He wanted to explain himself. He wanted to pour out everything to Minsheng, to tell him that he ''did'' believe in the Earth Empire and the work that they'd done, but that he was confused. His loyalty was stretched between his country and his teammates. His forehead creased as his eyes grey watery. To hear someone like Minsheng say all this, someone whom Akito held in such high esteem, was the hardest part of it all. He wanted to answer back, but his lips simply wouldn't move. All he could do was switch into fighting mode, holding up a defence position while Minsheng slammed waves of punches his way.

The fight between those out of mech suits had grown tense as well. Guan and the other metalbender were doing a good job of holding the three of them back, despite being outnumbered. Baraz threw a series of fireballs at the other metalbender, who countered with an earth wall. With a stomp he sent his barrier forwards, forcing Baraz to flame-jump over it just in time.

Gombo's bisento clanged against Guan's makeshift shield. His defence crinkled back into a sharpened spear as he lunged forwards and scraped Gombo's side. As the non-bender pulled away, he gave another swing to force Guan back. From the other side, Ahnah had lined up a water disc that she flung his way. Between Gombo's distraction and Ahnah's swiftness, Guan barely managed to dodge the waterbender's attack. As Ahnah smirked at him, Guan realised he hadn't completely dodged the attack; some of the fibres from his moustache fluttered in the air in front. Guan patted his facial hair, at first shocked and then furious. His erected two massive boulders and threw them at each opponent, using the cover to get the jump on Ahnah and keep her on the defensive.

"Woah!" Varrick yelped as he was thrown from his mech suit. His opponent had managed to pry open the plates leaving him exposed, and then shoved the suit to the ground. Varrick rolled along the earth, crying out each time his body thumped into the ground.

Zhu Li was quick to protect him though. She sent her grapple cables into the ground and pulled, kicking one mech suit away. As she recovered, she managed to punch the other mech, and then planted another kick into the mech's arm, smashing the flamethrower against a tree.

While she was certainly holding her own, Zhu Li wouldn't be able to last against both mech suits forever. Thankfully, the other mech pilots had their attention turned to Zhu Li and not Varrick sprawled on the ground, giving him a chance to escape. He started crawling away, yelling and panting as he kept low and made his way through the trees.

His frantic crying out did catch the attention of the two mech pilots eventually. They turned away from Zhu Li, one of them firing a cable and the other running towards Varrick. "Ahhh!" Varrick covered his head and ducked as the cable whipped around a tree.

Before the mechs could strike, Zhu Li blasted one of them with the flamethrower and shocked the other with electricity. While both mechs were stunned, Zhu Li roundhouse kicked one mech and uppercut the other.

"That was a good distraction sir."

"Yeah... heh... distraction," Varrick awkwardly glanced to the side.

Now outside of his mech, Bolin dipped and ducked under Baatar's strikes. He slid along the earth to create some distance, then, whizzed a disc out from the earth. It clunked against Baatar's mech, but he only stumbled back slightly. Bolin launched another, though this time, focussed on the centre of the disc. It melted into boiling hot lava, and Bolin shaped it into a glaive as he flung it at Baatar. There was a small blast as Bolin's disc hit the flamethrower.

Baatar recovered, but found his equipment was no longer functional. "I don't need flames to stop you, traitor!" he called out. His other arm lunged forwards, surging a blue fork of lightning across the forest floor. Bolin yelped as he narrowly missed its path. He slid down a ravine and stumbled back onto his feet. With a stomp, Bolin kicked up a pillar or earth, and with another lunge forwards he directed a molten hunk of earth towards Baatar. The blast smashed into a tree and sent flaming embers everywhere. Baatar had to shield his mech from the impact, giving Bolin a chance to find higher ground again.

Once up top, Bolin heaved a rockslide and launched it at Baatar. He managed to evade however, firing two cables into the trees and pulling himself above it. While still in the air, Baatar fired another bolt of electricity at Bolin, who only just managed to block it with an earth barrier.

"Y'know, Mako's lightning is way faster than this!" Bolin called out. He punched forward his wall, smacking it into the mech and giving him a chance to fight back. Bolin grunted as he upheaved a tall tree by shifting the earth beneath it. Baatar didn't have a chance to dodge as it collapsed on top of him.

With Baatar down, Bolin turned his attention to Zhu Li. He leapt from the top of a gorge and slammed into the earth below, melting a trail of lava that swirled towards the two mechs attacking them. Zhu Li saw the onslaught and jumped backwards, forcing the two mechs to move in close. They realised too late that Zhu Li had set them up. The magma sizzled against the mech armour, and the pilots cried out as they escaped and leapt onto solid ground. Bolin exhaled deeply and cooled the lava into earth, encasing the two mechs suits.

There was a crash on the rock ledge above as Baraz toppled over. It wasn't a long fall, though he braced the impact by shooting flames from his arm.

"How are you guys doing?" Bolin asked, helping his teammate up.

Baraz wiped an elbow across his face, "About as well as you'd expect."

"Over there!" Zhu Li's voice came from inside her mech suit. She was pointing to a line of mech suits and soldiers charging up the hill to their location. They even had a ground tank trudging up behind them as well.

"Spirits," Baraz muttered.

Gombo and Ahnah continued fighting Guan on the ledge, though with a quick stomp of his foot, Guan sent the entire formation crumbling beneath them. While the metalbender jumped back to safety, Ahnah and Gombo slid down towards the others.

The last of their group was pushed back soon enough; Akito cried out as Minsheng pried open his mech suit and tossed him out. Bolin quickly stood in between the two of them, giving Akito time to get back on his feet.

Now, the seven of them stood in a circle facing outwards. They were tired, injured, and all of them bar one had lost their mech suits. It slowly dawned on Bolin, and the others, that maybe this wasn't their day. They weren't going to make it out of Zaofu.

"Stand down!" First Commander Minsheng bellowed from inside his suit.

Gombo didn't let his bisento down, keeping it up along his arm. Ahnah and Baraz maintained their stances too.

Bolin looked over to Varrick, both of them sharing a grim expression. They could hear the reinforcements coming towards them. It was over.

Akito was the first to raise his arms. He dropped the electrified glove he was holding, and with a pained and remorseful look he tossed it aside. "I surrender."

Though something was wrong. His body felt cold, yet a warmth spread quickly from his chest. Akito stumbled, and looked down at his body. His face turned white. There was a metal shard protruding from inside.

The pain hit like an avalanche. Akito half cried half gasped as he sunk to his knees. He hadn't even heard the attack. Time slowed as he felt the warm red liquid seep over his hands and onto the ground. He spluttered blood over himself, before his arms went limp and he collapsed.

Everyone stared in horror. Bolin cried out and tried running over, but metal cables lashed around him. The others were also apprehended. While he thrashed about, Gombo searched those around him to see who had attacked. There was only one metalbender with his fist outstretched: Guan.

A black-plated mech suit came bounding over. Baatar had been too late. "What's... going on?!"

"Arrest Bolin, Varrick, and Zhu Li! The others can share in Akito's fate," Guan called out.

Ahnah stared back with widened eyes, "Please! Let me treat his wounds! We've already stood down!"

Guan sneered from his position on the ledge, "You've been given enough chances and you corrupted Akito. This is your fault."

"You bastard! You spawn of Koh!" Ahnah conitnued

"I gave an order!" Guan yelled out.

Minsheng was too stunned to act. Seeing his favourite pupil on the ground was too much.

"GUAN!"

All heads turned to Baatar, who had emerged from the forest. "Stand down now!"

Guan glared back at Baatar. He wanted to finish this, but he wouldn't defy Baatar. He relaxed his form.

Baatar looked over to the waterbender, "Help him."

Ahnah nodded, sprinting over as fast as she could. The others were kept in their cables, still thrashing about.

"He had stood down," Bolin stared through glassy eyes. He turned back to Guan, "He had stood... down."

"He was holding a weapon!"

"No...," Bolin mumbled, keeping his disbelieving eyes on Akito's body.

"Enough!" Baatar interrupted them. "How is he doing?"

Ahnah swirled the water around, the glowing blue reflecting off those around. She whispered something to herself, then, a more audible 'come on' was heard. "Please...," she croaked. Time crawled as the others waited and watched. Eventually the glow dissipated, though Akito remained motionless. With tear-filled eyes Ahnah looked back, shaking her head slowly.

A sob escaped Bolin's mouth. Baraz felt his eyes grow warm. Even Gombo couldn't look at the grisly scene; he turned away, closing his eyes and exhaling deeply.

"Take the others into custody," Guan instructed. After a slight hesitation, the soldiers obeyed.

While Gombo and Baraz continued to fight their restraints, Bolin had frozen in shock and grief. He simply stared at the reddened ground as he and his comrades were dragged away.

Akito had been rushed to the infirmary, but there was nothing that could be done. Bolin and the others were all bound in platinum shackles and forced on their knees in Kuvira's meeting shelter. The light rain on the roof gave off a metallic sound as they sat there in silence, with guards all around.

Eventually, Kuvira walked in with Baatar, Minsheng, and Guan all following. It was hard for Bolin to even look at Guan now without feeling a deep anger rising up inside. The others felt the same, and glared at their old teammate with the fury of Sozin's Comet.

Kuvira took a moment to pause in front of them before addressing the group, "I regret to inform that Akito did not respond to treatment. He has passed."

The room was deathly silent. Everyone was still in shock or too bitter to respond with even a stifled sob. Gombo looked up, "Y'know that your shiny pet there is the reason he's dead right?"

Guan stepped forward, "Shut it!"

"Enough!" Kuvira raised her hand. "I've heard the reports of what happened. Second Commander Guan will be taking a leave of absence following the incident –"

"Do you think we care about a 'leave of absence'?" Baraz replied.

Kuvira narrowed her eyes, stepping closer to the firebender, "May I remind you that you are a defector. You all are traitors to the Earth Empire. I gave you all second chances. You three," she gestured to Gombo, Ahnah, and Baraz, "were barabrians high up in Qiang's order. And yet, I spared you. I found you a new purpose, a way to help and give back to your nation. And this is what you choose to do with it?!" Kuvira wasn't finished. She stepped closer towards the other three, "And Bolin. You came to me directionless and needing a purpose to motivate you. Is that not what I gave? And Varrick. I gave you a chance at greatness. A chance to change the world with ground-breaking discoveries."

After pacing around to the other side of the room, Kuvira turned back. "You three will be joining your former comrades in a re-education camp," Kuvira signalled to Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah. "I'm sure your old friends will be able to show you around. Bolin and Zhu Li, you will be sent our camp for the most severe dissenters. And you," she stood above Varrick, her gaze forcing him to cower, "will continue working on the spirit vine project. Under constant, and heavily armed, supervision. I will need your spirit vine weapon more than ever once we're done in Zaofu, and you will finish it for me."

Something flashed in Zhu Li's eyes as she heard Kuvira's words. As the Great Uniter turned her back to them, Zhu Li spoke up, "Please! Have mercy!" She went from kneeling to bowing prostrate on the floor.

Kuvira glanced back over her shoulder, "Why would I do that?"

"Because the only mistake I made... was trusting in the wrong genius."

Varrick and Bolin exchanged a confused glance. "Zhu Li?" Varrick said.

"When I was working for Varrick, I was blindly devoted to him. I looked past all the times he ordered me around, ridiculed me, or only thought of himself, because I thought he was the greatest genius in the world." She looked up at Kuvira, "But now, since I've been working with yourself and Baatar, I realise that I was wrong. Varrick... is just a fool. You both outshine him in every way, and I want nothing more than to devote myself to a cause greater than me, to an intellect greater than Varrick's."

"Hey come on! I'm right here!" Varrick grumbled.

"Please, if you give me another chance, I can continue the spirit vine project and let it shine to its fullest potential."

Kuvira stared as she considered Zhu Li's proposal. "Fine. I will give you another chance. I hope that by the time the rest of you return, you'll take a page out of Zhu Li's book," Kuvira strode over to her desk, her arms poised behind, "Put the others on the next train."

Soldiers grabbed them and hoisted the other up, dragging them out into the darkened skies. Bolin continued watching until Zhu Li and Kuvira disappeared from view.

Chapter Text

It was cold and windy on the darkened cliffside. A lone soldier wandered along, flashlight in hand, high above the rest of his comrades below.

Something stirred in the shrubs nearby. He froze. Tensions were already high between the Earth Empire and Zaofu, and he had been instructed to keep a vigilant eye on anything suspicious. He breathed a sigh of relief as a small hedgehog bat squeaked back at him, taking off into the air far away.

A flash of silver whizzed past. The soldier's cries were muffled by a thin sheet of metal, and a cable dragged him off his feet and into the bushes. After a short pause, two more cables shot up and hooked around the tall branches of a tree. The cables belonged to two young men in dark green and back outfits, their faces obscured and clothes blending in with the landscape.

"You sure about this bro?" Wei asked his twin brother. He knew there were a lot of soldiers out there, but seeing them this much closer than from City Spire made them look far larger in number.

Wing pulled his mask down, "Don't chicken possum out on me now Wei."

"I'm not! It's just... is this really going to make a difference?"

"Of course," Wing narrowed his eyes, staring down at the troops below. "If we can kidnap Kuvira, the army will be all disorganised."

Wei exhaled, "They do have other commanders though."

Wing turned back, "Yeah, but Kuvira's the one keeping them all in line. You remember what she was like back in Zaofu? Always bossing us around, forcing us to climb up that hill when we went out past dark. Without her they'll be lost. And hopefully some of them will leave her stupid army once they aren't being forced to stay."

It was still a gamble. But Wei could see where his brother was coming from. "I guess we have to do something. Korra said Kuvira won't back down."

"Exactly," Wei replied. "You remember what Mom showed you?"

Wei nodded, "Yeah. If we get closer I can do it."

"Good. Now, let's go save Zaofu."

There were a fair number of troops out and about even at this hour. Wing and Wei were careful to stay out their line of sight, and avoid the massive spotlights that shone over the perimeter.

The pair came to a line of metal tents arranged across the fields. The largest one had to be Kuvira's residence. Wei breathed in the cool night air, and slowed his breathing. He stomped into the ground powerfully, not to shape the earth with his bending, but to sense the vibrations travelling back. It was his mother's skill, passed down from Toph, who used this very method to 'see'.

"Well?" Wing asked his twin brother.

Wei opened his eyes, "She's not in there. I... don't sense Kuvira in any of the tents."

"Spirits," Wei replied. He exhaled sharply, turning the other way. He stopped, noticing the maglev train still had some lights on in the cabins. "Unless she's not sleeping?"

Although many of the higher ups had gone to bed, Kuvira couldn't sleep just yet. It had been a trying evening so far with the betrayal of Varrick and Bolin, and the death of a defector by the hands of her second commander. She sat in the office of the train, scanning the trade agreement over and over. There had to be something more she could do.

"I've set up a bed in the other room," Baatar walked into the office. He was far less alert than his fiancé. His eyes were weary and glazed over.

Kuvira didn't look up from her work, "I can walk back to the tent. I just need a few more minutes."

"Kuvira. It's past midnight."

She glanced over to the clock, just to see for herself. It really was that late. Kuvira exhaled, "What do you think about amending section 22 b?"

Baatar looked confused, "What was that part again?"

"On trade responsibilities to the north. Perhaps there's a way I could rephrase what's in here to make it more palatable for Zaofu."

It was far too late in the evening to be thinking about all this in Baatar's view. He scoffed, "Yeah, and why not throw in a hundred hippo cows and paid vacations to Ember Island."

Kuvira wasn't impressed, "Baatar. We need a way to break through to the leaders."

"You know my mother just about as well as I do," Baatar replied, a hint of frustration creeping in voice. "She hired my father to design Zaofu, and later he proposed to her. Zaofu is her precious platinum jewel and there is nothing that anyone can do to get her to give it up," Baatar waved his hand in the air. "We're not even taking it over like they keep suggesting we are. All we want is for them to join the Earth Empire and pay their fair share. If my mother is going to interpret something benign like that as an act of war then nothing will get through to her."

Kuvira sighed. She rubbed her temples while setting her papers down. Perhaps it was getting too late. "Okay. I'll get some sleep."

Baatar felt a little bad about dismissing Kuvira's questions, though he was happy she was finally agreeing to rest. He smiled warmly, reaching over from his chair and slipping his hand over hers, "We're almost there."

"I know," Kuvira returned a soft smile. "We've been waiting for this so long. All our sacrifices, the risks we've taken to unite the empire – it's all led to this moment. I just want to make sure we succeed."

"Then we can finally take a break. Have our wedding."

Kuvira held up Baatar's hand and gently kissed it, savouring his warmth and the scent of his skin. She finally stood up from her desk, and the pair embraced.

It was only a small vibration, but Kuvira felt it too late. Her eyes widened, "Baatar –"

A man in dark green leapt from the roof. Kuvira felt her hands shackled by a metal pair of cuffs, while another figure shoved her to the floor.

"Kuvira!" Baatar cried out. He quickly dodged as a cable struck out.

Kuvira tried to break free, but the cuffs were platinum. "Baatar! There's two of them!"

Whoever was attacking them, they obviously weren't expecting Baatar to be able to defend himself in a fight. Despite the pair being metalbenders, Baatar managed to evade both of their attacks, and socked one of them in the jaw. He kicked the other in the stomach, and the pair swapped places. In the confined space of the train cabin it made it harder for them to metalbend larger attacks Baatar's way.

Still, Baatar couldn't hold out forever. After missing his last punch, the attacker leapt onto the roof and shot a cable around his arm. He yanked it up, and then kicked part of the roof panelling down onto Baatar. His head throbbed and a small trickle of red snaked down his temple, though it wasn't a bad injury. Still, it stunned him enough to allow the other metalbender to wrap his body in another cable. He was stuck.

"Whoever you are, you won't get away with this!" Baatar yelled from the floor.

The attackers said nothing. They walked over and started dragging Baatar.

With their backs turned, Kuvira knew she had a chance. Her arms were bound, but she managed to hop onto her feet and kick a piece of metal their way. One of the attackers yelped as he was hit in the back, while the other spun around and held his arms out. As he lashed a cable out, Kuvira managed to somersault forwards under it and gut-punch the young man. He spat up saliva and bile, and Kuvira kneed him in the chest. He lay on the floor, as did the other attacker.

With her fingers, Kuvira flicked a small piece of metal into the keyhole of the handcuffs, freeing herself. She immediately pulled down the masks of her attackers. "You two," she said.

Baatar watched with widened eyes, "Wing? Wei? What is this? Why are you two attacking us?!"

Kuvira wasn't even fazed by the revelations. She simply narrowed her eyes, glaring down at them, "So, Suyin sends her envoy to lull me into a false sense of security, then sends her assassins to end me in the dead of night."

"Mom didn't send us!" Wing replied. He heaved in air as he got up into a sitting position, "She still cares about you Baatar, and even you Kuvira. But we don't. I hate you and everything you've done to hurt the Earth Kingdom and Mom."

"We're not assassins either!" Wei chimed in. "But we thought if we could kidnap you these brainwashed soldiers would have no one to force them to stay."

"Is that so," Kuvira readied herself in a fighting stance. The plates of metal from her uniform came off and sharpened into claws. "If you two are old enough to plan this all on your own, then you're also old enough to face the consequences."

Wing and Wei looked up at Kuvira. Their determined and scornful expressions melted as the slightest bit of fear creeped in.

"Kuvira, wait," Baatar shuffled forwards, still on the ground and tied up. "Don't hurt them."

Kuvira didn't turn around. She kept her gaze on the twins, boring straight through them with her green-grey eyes. "Why should I let these assassins off the hook?"

"I already told you! We weren't here to assassinate you, we were trying to kidnap –"

"And that's better how?" Kuvira replied. The metal claws hovered in the air like talons of a beast ready to lunge.

"Kuvira, they're... we don't want to create further tensions," Baatar said.

There was an uneasy silence as Kuvira contemplated her options. Eventually she relaxed, exhaling sharply and letting the metal sheets clang onto the floor. She opened her eyes again. During the scuffle, the papers from the trade agreement were scattered around the room. She eyed up one of the pages, "I think this will actually work in our favour Baatar."

Baatar looked confused, "What do you mean?"

Kuvira turned back to him, "I wanted a way to ensure our victory over Zaofu. A way to speed things along." She glanced back to the twins, her mouth curving upwards into a slight smile, "And I think this attack will prove to be most useful in achieving that goal."

Sleeping in a real bed was almost magical for Korra. It wasn't really a bed, more like an office couch with pillows and a blanket, but it still was far more comforting than lying on patches of moss and dried leaves as she'd been doing for the past few months.

Nonetheless, Korra had still gotten up early, unable to get back to sleep with everything going on. She sat by a window on the upper floors of City Spire, watching the first rays of sunlight peek over the mountains and into the valley.

She heard footsteps from behind. It was Mako, "Hey."

"Morning," he replied. He was carrying a jade-coloured teapot, "Ginseng?"

Korra smiled, "No thanks."

Mako set the pot on a side table, pouring himself a glass.

"Is that straight ginseng?" Korra raised an eyebrow.

"Helps me get through a day with Wu," Mako replied, his expression serious. He smirked after a few seconds. Sighing to himself, Mako took the other seat by the window. "Wu needs his 'beauty sleep' so he doesn't normally get up this early."

Korra chuckled. She turned back to Mako, "So how did you end up being Wu's bodyguard anyway?"

Mako half-grunted-half-smirked, taking a sip of his tea and setting it down. "Things were... chaotic after we realised you were gone. We didn't know if it were the so-called Red Lotus group who had kidnapped you again, or something else. Raiko felt like Prince Wu needed further protection and asked for me specifically."

"I'm sorry about disappearing like that," Korra replied. She felt like she'd be saying that quite a lot in the next few weeks, though she really did mean it.

Mako shook his head, "It's alright. It sounds like you really needed that time away. I'm just glad you're alright."

Korra smiled, "Thanks Mako." He wasn't the type to hold grudges. Korra's face grew more concerned, "Do you think it was really the Red Lotus?"

"I dunno," Mako replied. "I sure hope not. We have enough on our plates as it is."

"Not wrong there."

Mako continued, "We busted their base at a hydro power plant dam a while back. Turns out they'd been siphoning off power for some machine. Ilah and I managed to get the schematics, and it might be something related to Future Industries. I haven't heard back from Asami on that."

"Sounds pretty serious," Korra replied. She eyed up the tea pot, "Maybe I will have some." She poured herself a cup, though pulled a face as she took a sip, "Wow. That's strong."

"Told you, it gets me through a day with Wu."

Korra winced as the flavour saturated her mouth. She flicked her wrist, condensing some of the steam drifting out of the pot into water, and added the liquid into her cup. Hopefully the diluted tea would taste a bit better.

There was a pause as Korra thought about what Mako had said before. She turned back to him with a raised eyebrow, "Ilah?"

"Oh," Mako shifted uncomfortably, "she's just the Crown Princess. Of the Fire Nation. Fire Lord Izumi's daughter."

"Oh?" Korra smiled.

Mako frowned, "What?"

"Nothing."

Mako clicked his tongue and rolled his eyes.

"I didn't say anything!"

"You didn't need to," Mako retorted. After a lengthy pause he sighed. "I don't know about her. One minute she can't seem bothered with me, and the next it's like... we really have a connection. But... it has been nice. Being around her."

Korra smiled warmly, "Well, I'm glad. Whatever it is you have."

"Thanks," Mako said. "So... did you shack up with any swampbenders?"

Korra nearly spat her tea from laughing, "Mako! No, of course not!"

"Too bad," he smirked.

A pleasant silence filled the air between them. Korra thought back to all her adventures with the others. They'd had moments like this, with banter and laughter. It wasn't always fun though, especially with her and Asami both dating Mako at different times. But after facing doom together several times over, it was clear they had a bond that couldn't be broken.

It saddened Korra that things weren't so rosy right now. She exhaled, " I guess I was a bit naïve."

Mako looked up, "About what?"

"About us. Our team," she looked out the window. "I thought that once I'd get better I'd come back and the four of us would go out and work together again. But now... Bolin and you aren't on good terms."

"You can't blame yourself for that. If anything, I should have done more," Mako looked down.

"You can't blame yourself either Mako."

Mako sighed, "He's still my little brother. Maybe I could've said things differently, or I don't know."

Korra placed a hand on Mako's shoulder, "He's old enough to make his own decisions. Even if he makes bad ones."

"I know. I guess... I still can't help but feel responsible."

"Things can go back," Korra replied. "I want us all to be together again. One way or another."

Mako smiled, "Yeah. That would be nice." He finished off the last of his tea. "I think Asami misses you a lot."

Korra felt her face grow warm, "Yeah?"

"Don't... tell her I told you this. I haven't said anything to her yet. But... I've been worried about her lately."

"How do you mean?"

Mako sighed, "I guess... it's just after you left, she became kinda recluse. Did a lot for the city though, really got stuck into her work. But she stopped seeing others as much. Stopped attending her own company's events even. Bolin had joined Kuvira early on, and then when I left for the Fire Nation it seemed she was even more isolated. Maybe she just needed something to keep her busy."

A warm pain welled up in Korra's chest. Her mind pictured Asami alone in some dark office block, night after night. If she felt guilty before about leaving, now she felt even worse.

Mako's eyes widened, "Oh sorry, I uh... didn't mean it like that."

Korra straightened up, "Oh... no I get it."

"I know she'll be happy you're alright. That's what matters."

"Just gotta sort out this stuff with Zaofu first right?" Korra scoffed.

Mako smirked, "Yeah. I suppose so."

There was a static sound as the speakers in the hallway switched on, "Good morning, citizens of Zaofu."

Mako and Korra looked at each other. "Is that Kuvira?" the Avatar asked.

"She must have been allowed to broadcast over the intercom," Mako replied.

The voice continued, "Yesterday, Suyin Beifong sent her envoy Avatar Korra to negotiate. I agreed to extend the deadline for negotiations by a day. I want to inform you that the deal is off. Last night, Wing and Wei Beifong attempted to attack myself and Baatar while we were unaware. Their assassination attempt did not succeed."

Another voice could be heard in the background, "We weren't trying to assassinate you! I already said – oof!" the background voice stopped.

In the other room, Suyin listened with a horrified look etched into her face. Her tea cup clattered on the floor when she heard the unmistakeable sound of her twins being held captive.

"Rest assured, I will not take revenge against the peaceful citizens of Zaofu. But this latest development has convinced me that we cannot wait any longer while rogue citizens attack my people in our sleep."

Opal burst out of her makeshift bedroom. She called down the hallway, "Wing? Wei?!" She walked briskly to their bedroom, running the last stretch, before noticing their door was open. The beds were empty. Her younger brothers really had gone out in the night.

"My forces will be moving on the city in half an hour, unless your remaining representatives meet me outside and offer their unconditional surrender, where they agree to sign our trade agreement and join the Earth Empire. That is all."

Mako looked back to Korra, "I need to go get Wu. I'll meet you in the foyer with the others."

"Okay."

After making his way into another hallway, Mako knocked loudly on Wu's door, "Wu! You need to get up!"

He could her a muffled groan from inside, "Yeah, yeah. I'm nearly dressed." After a few more seconds the door creaked open, and a groggy Wu slinked outside. "If Kuvira's going to take my kingdom can she at least let me get my beauty rest? I'm going to have bags for days!"

"C'mon, let's go," Mako said.

In an adjacent hallway, Opal found her father exiting his room, "Dad."

"Opal," Baatar Sr. turned and hugged his daughter.

"I... checked their rooms. Wing and Wei... they really went. I had no idea they were planning anything."

"It'll be okay. Your mother will think of something," he replied.

Raiko was already awake and was the first to meet up with Suyin, "What did your sons do?"

Suyin narrowed her eyes, "I don't know. I had no idea." She exhaled, closing her eyes and placing a hand on her forehead. She didn't want Raiko to see she was losing it.

When Baatar Sr. entered, Suyin teared up and reached for him. The pair embraced, Suyin burying herself into her husband's arms. Everything was moving so fast. Suyin reached out and held Opal's hand too, and then touched Huan as he walked over.

When Suyin pulled away, she saw Korra, Mako, and Wu arrive as well. Jinora and her siblings walked in soon after. All eyes were looking to her for guidance.

"Suyin," Raiko repeated.

The Matriarch of Zaofu exhaled deeply. "Captain Hong-Li," she turned to the guard, "how are the tunnels?"

"All ready, Ma'am," Hong-Li replied.

Suyin breathed in, "Start evacuating civilians."

"Yes Ma'am."

"It's going to take longer than half an hour to get everyone out," Raiko said.

Suyin nodded, "That's why I'll go to Kuvira to keep her busy. Everyone else should leave through the tunnels."

"We can't leave you Mom," Opal replied.

"Sweetie," Suyin stroked Opal's shoulder, "I can't leave without your brothers. I'll try and bargain with Kuvira to free them."

"Is there really nothing else we can do? Are we going to... give up?" Wu asked.

Suyin let the silence fill the air. She stared at all the designs and furnishings in the room. Each one was chosen and designed by her and Baatar Sr. Zaofu was her dream. Her mark to put on the world. She closed her eyes, "Zaofu is just an empty city without it's people," she replied. "If we leave it empty it will take some time for Kuvira to get it up and running again. If she's going to take my city, we can at least slow her down."

"I'm coming too Mom," Opal said, a defiant look in her eyes.

"Opal –"

"I have to. You can't face Kuvira alone."

Jinora stepped forward, "We can take Pepper. That way if things go bad we can escape quickly."

"I'll join you too," Korra said. "I know I wasn't able to change Kuvira's mind, but I meant what I said. I want to help however I can."

Suyin wanted to tell them all to stay behind, to keep safe while she went out alone. But she knew she couldn't do this alone. She smiled, and then turned to Mako, "Can you get the president out? And Prince Wu and the others?"

Mako nodded, "I'll keep them safe."

Jinora turned to her younger siblings, "You two should go with them as well."

"Really?" Meelo protested.

"Yes. They'll need some support down there too."

"We can do that," Ikki replied.

Suyin took one final glance around the room, "Okay. I guess we'd better be going then." She hugged Baatar Sr. again, and kissed him goodbye.

"Just promise me you'll make it back," Baatar Sr. said.

Suyin nodded, and then reluctantly let his hand go. He smiled with tears in his eyes, taking Huan's arm and guiding them out with the others.

"Be safe. And good luck," Mako said to Korra.

"You too."

After the others left, Suyin looked down at the army below them. "Right," she said, exhaling sharply. "Let's get to your bison Jinora."

"Ugh...," Bolin groaned as he woke from an awkward sleeping position. His hands and legs were bound, with a cable tying him and Varrick to a pole inside a metal tent. "Can't say that was the best sleep ever."

Varrick grunted. "Y'know, Zhu Li used to click my back into place after a bad sleep."

Bolin looked confused as to why Varrick would be thinking about that, but decided not to ask. The door was open, and several guards stood outside. Judging from the light it was still early morning. "Do you have any ideas Varrick? With that big brain of yours?" Bolin whispered, careful not to attract the soldiers.

"Huh?"

"Ideas?" Bolin repeated.

"I dunno kid," Varrick responded. He didn't elaborate further.

Bolin stared out the tent, though something caught his attention. He recognised three people in pale green prison outfits being led past his tent. "Hey! Where are you taking them!" he called out. "Baraz! Ahnah!"

"Shut it, would you?!" a soldier called out from the door.

His comrade halted the other prisoners, peering inside and seeing the pair tied up. "Eager to join them, are we?"

"Just... tell me where you're taking them. They're my teammates."

The soldier grunted, "They'll be heading to Xiao Long base. Not the worst of the worst, but pretty brutal. Kuvira wants them to relearn how to be 'productive members of our nation'. To be honest, I don't think this rugged lot will be out any time soon!" he cackled while shaking Baraz back and forth.

The firebender glared angrily, before spitting on the ground at the soldier's feet. He didn't take too kindly to it. The soldier gut-punched Baraz, who hunched over from the blow.

"Leave him alone!" Bolin cried out.

The soldier did leave Baraz alone, though Bolin knew it was unlikely due to his protests. He eyed up the pair inside the tent, "You two will be on your way soon enough. Baatar wants to personally oversee your trip. Make sure the brains is doing his work properly, ain't that right Varrick?"

Varrick said nothing at the mention of his name. He simply stared at the ground.

"Anyway, we better get this lot going," the soldier said. He shoved Ahnah forwards, and then the other two.

"I'll come get you I promise!" Bolin called out, watching his teammates move towards the train.

Ahnah managed to look back his way, though her face didn't show any emotion. She gave a slight acknowledgement before being led inside."

Bolin was determined to get out of here. This couldn't be the end. He had to get his team back, and he had to return to Opal and hope she'd forgive him. But he had no idea how he could do all that. All he could do was wait and listen, hoping that an opportunity would present itself.

"Everyone, please file out in an orderly fashion!"

"Please remain calm!"

"One light crystal per household!"

The Zaofu Guard stood atop raised platforms as citizens walked through the street. Children clutched onto their parents. Belongings haphazardly strung over people's shoulders. Luminescent green crystals were handed out to groups to light the way in the tunnels. Despite the tense and fearful atmosphere, at least things were going smoothly.

Raiko already had his two bodyguards in navy blue, but several other Zaofu guards escorted him near the front of the group. Mako and Wu were also priority evacuees, though the prince was holding up the line.

"I... can't decide Mako!"

The firebender sighed, placing a hand over his face, "Wu, we can't take all this luggage!"

"But which set of shirts should I leave behind? Or... maybe I don't need this fourth top hat? Oh I don't know!" He whined.

"Look, take one bag you can carry and that's all!" Mako's exasperation turned to annoyance.

Wu rolled his eyes, "Fine. But can you carry some other bags too please?"

"No."

"Aw," Wu moaned.

Mako sighed, "Okay. But only one. And a light one."

Wu's smile returned. He handed Mako what felt like a bag of bricks. It was several pairs of designer shoes. "You're the best Mako!"

As the line started moving again, Mako watched as the soldiers descended into a darkened cavern near the side of the dome. It led eastward through the mountains, more or less parallel with the actual mountain pass on the surface. Mako gave one last look back towards the City Spire, wishing Korra and the others luck before entering the tunnel.

Above ground, Jinora had taken to the skies with Pepper and the others. There was a slight cool breeze and beaming sun. A perfect day save for the rows and rows of soldiers below them. Jinora landed them a good distance away, touching down on the fields still damp from the morning dew. Kuvira was standing there at the front of her army, like a proud and bold statue, with her arms posed behind her and head raised as if the ground beneath her were trivial. Though behind her strong exterior there was a fury. Especially when seeing the Avatar hop off the bison and join the other three.

Suyin led the others forwards. She tried to be brave, to be immoveable, but seeing her two sons up ahead stuck in metal cage restraints, with nothing but their heads showing, sent a pang of fear through her body. Her motherly instincts kicked into gear.

The four of them stopped when they were close enough to Kuvira. The Great Uniter took a moment to eye them all up, "You're here to offer your surrender?"

"Please release Wing and Wei," Suyin answered. "Then we can talk about whatever agreement you have."

Kuvira narrowed her eyes, "Your sons committed a crime against the Earth Empire."

"This isn't about the empire anymore! Not when you take my sons! Now let them go!"

"Or what? You'll run and hide inside your shiny domes while we pelt Zaofu from the outside? No. You don't have the upper hand here Su. I'm the one who gave you and your citizens a generous offer to join my empire. You're the ones who refused, pretended to be reasonable by sending the Avatar to negotiate, and then turn around and dispatch your assassins to attack me in my sleep!"

Suyin wanted to scream. To cry. But all she could manage was a sob. Her sons were watching her, fear in their eyes. And she couldn't do anything. Her anger burned like a roaring inferno, though the shock of everything happening held her back. "Please...," Suyin uttered.

She paused, feeling a hand touch her shoulder. It was Korra.

"I won't let you fight Kuvira," Korra said. She stepped forwards in between the two of them.

Seeing the Avatar come closer sent a rage coursing through Kuvira's body. "And what do you want, Avatar?"

Korra balled her hands into fists, speaking as boldly as she could, "Kuvira, I get it. Wing and Wei attacked you. But you pushed them that far. I told you that having your army outside would cause tension, but you didn't listen to me. You're as much to blame for their actions as they are!"

Kuvira's eyes grew hot with anger, "And why would I listen to you? You're not relevant here. This is Earth Kingdom business."

"I'm the Avatar. It's my job to bring balance and help people," Korra answered. "Whatever agreement you come to with Zaofu can still happen. But release Suyin's kids. That's all I'm asking."

"You're supposed to bring balance? Don't make me laugh!" Kuvira scoffed. "Where were you the past three years? Where were you when the Earth Kingdom descended into chaos?"

Korra tried answering, but the only sound that left her lips was a muffled stutter.

"See, I was the one who stepped up. I saved the Earth Kingdom. You have no business being here interfering with Earth Kingdom politics. Zaofu cannot continue to hoard its riches while other cities in the Earth Empire suffer. I'm here to redistribute those resources fairly. Now, if you aren't going to surrender then I will march into the city right now and take what it mine."

"Look, you may have saved the Earth Kingdom and helped them out when I couldn't, but now you're nothing more than a bully and a tyrant!" Korra shot back. "I can't just let you take the city."

Kuvira sneered, "The only way you're going to stop me from reaching Zaofu is if you do so physically. Now, what is it going to be?"

"I guess I don't have a choice then. I'm not letting you through."

Kuvira didn't reply. She stared at the Avatar, a hot exhale leaving her nostrils. "Fine," she said. She turned back to her soldiers, "The world has chosen their 'champion'. After abandoning the world for three long years, the other leaders have gone scrambling back to their precious Avatar. But you, you know what it's like to be in suffering. To be alone. To feel neglected. We learnt to live without an Avatar. I was your champion. And today, I will be your champion again." There were cheers in the crowd of troops as Kuvira said this.

"Avatar Korra," Kuvira turned back. "Let's settle this, one champion to another." She smiled arrogantly, "If you beat me, I will release Wing and Wei. But if I succeed and prove that my voice is the only one that matters in the Earth Empire, then I want you banished from the Earth Empire and gone for good. Do you agree?"

Korra exhaled. She turned to Suyin. She was in so much anguish right now. Opal too was furious. Korra sighed, "Fine. I agree."

Jinora turned to her, "Korra, are you sure you can take her? You've only just recovered?"

"I can fight her," Suyin replied. "I'm upset, but Kuvira has gone too far. I can defend my city."

"No, it's fine," Korra shook her head. "If you see an opening Su, take it. Go get your sons."

"But can you beat her on your own?" Opal asked.

Korra thought of all the citizens still in Zaofu. Mako, Raiko, Wu. She had to do this for them. "It isn't about winning or losing; we just need to buy time for the others to leave." She smirked, "But I have a lot of pent-up frustration from these past few years. I'm not going down easily."

Suyin placed a hand on Korra's shoulder, "Kuvira has a unique fighting style. Don't let your guard down. Go into the Avatar state and stop her."

A worry filled Korra's mind at Su's words, but she shook it off. "Okay."

Suyin, Opal, and Jinora moved back to stand with the bison. The soldiers also cleared some space behind Kuvira. Both of them took several steps forwards, eyeing each other up like two sabre-tooth moose lions ready to charge.

"I know you're a little rusty Korra," Kuvira grinned. "But I'm not going to let you off the hook now. You've chosen to interfere where you aren't needed nor wanted. I won't hold back." She positioned her legs in a strong stance, her arms ready to lunge.

"Enough talk!" Korra retorted. She opted for a boxing-like stance, her fists hovering over her chest and body lower to the ground. Kuvira was an earthbender, and so Korra figured she'd probably wait for her to make the first move and keep a defensive position. If that was the case, Korra would come out the gates swinging with a series of fire jabs –

The first boulder came crashing into Korra's view. She rolled to the side. A second closely followed, and Korra jumped over it. She barely had time to figure out what happened. Kuvira's arms had shifted, and a crater was there in the ground in front of her from where the boulders came from.

Korra pressed her hands together and burst forth a mighty fire jet. It collided with a rock wall Kuvira brought up. Korra then leapt over and kept the stream going, only to find Kuvira had moved from behind the wall. From the right, Korra felt something cold and metallic hook around her arms, and her fire jet ceased. A second metal sliver swept her off her legs, and then Kuvira stomped up a pillar that smacked into Korra's stomach. She bounced off to the side.

The soldiers behind their leader cheered. Zhu Li stood next to Baatar at the front, giving a modest clap.

"I didn't expect it to be this easy," Kuvira taunted. She bounced on her feet, readying herself while she waited for Korra to get back up.

"Don't let her get to you!" Opal called out.

Korra grunted, pushing herself up onto her feet. She'd thought that expert earthbenders were more defensive, waiting and listening to their opponent's movements before attacking. But Kuvira was like a lightning bolt striking a tree from above. Her moves so fluid and quick, yet powerful and unwavering.

The ground shook as Kuvira stomped up another boulder. This one she threw forwards, her fists punching out in front. Korra kicked a flame crescent and blasted it into dust. She kicked again, and again, shooting out fire at all different levels. Kuvria twisted around the first, slid along the ground to dodge the second, then raised a wall to block the third. None of them connected.

Korra stomped a line of rock pillars at Kuvira, though she was already too slow; the Great Uniter had jumped over the attack and flicked a metal band across Korra's eyes. Two rock pillars slammed into Korra's body, one to the chin and another into her side.

"Oof!" Korra cried out, feeling the wind knocked out of her as she crashed into the muddy grass. She threw the metal blindfold off and grunted angrily. In her mouth she could taste blood and bile, with specks of dirt she quickly spat out. If that last attack hadn't broken a rib, it had sure come close.

The Avatar slowed her breathing, readying herself once more. She had Kuvira pegged all wrong. She had thought because her attacks were so fast that she wasn't fighting like a traditional earthbender, slower and more defensive, reading her opponent's attacks. But no, Kuvira was waiting and reading Korra's attacks; she was just that quick with her reaction times. Korra had to match her. She remembered what Toph had said during their duels, about overthinking and becoming slower because of it. Korra tried shutting out her thoughts and fears, instead, trying to feel her chi connect to the elements within and around her.

Korra went on the offensive again, though this time, was much more fluid with her movements. She punched forward several fire jabs, then finished with a roundhouse kick. The trio of flames scorched past Kuvira as she weaved around each one. As Korra's attack continued, she swept a leg low and smothered the earth in front with flames. The attack caught Kuvira off guard and she stumbled, but quickly recovered. A gale blasted into Kuvira's shoulder, and she lost her balance again.

Although it looked like she had Kuvira on the ropes, she still hadn't landed a decent hit. Kuvira dipped and ducked under several wind blasts and fire balls, and only one of Korra's earth attacks came close to hitting her. Korra shot up a line of pillars, missing Kuvira. She then closed the gap and jumped onto the earth pillars, pushing off and kicking an air jet as she sailed above the ground. Kuvira pivoted, then punched up a boulder that smacked Korra in the side. Before Korra could recover, Kuvra flung a metal band around her arm and cartwheeled Korra onto the ground.

The Avatar landed with a heavy thud. Korra groaned as she took longer to get back on her feet, heaving in and out as she struggled up. Although she was bruised and out of breath, this fight was hardly finished.

Water trickled out a small gap in the tunnel roof. Mako heard Wu stop and cry out in disgust as it dropped on his head, though the firebender still tugged him along. They had little time to spare. Being near the front of the group, Mako could see what lay ahead. In the dim, greenish light from the crystals, the tunnel continued in a straight line into darkness, with the occasional crystal formation along the way.

"How far does this go?" Raiko asked the captain.

Hong-Li turned back, "We're about two thirds of the way there. It isn't too far to the state border and the nearest town."

Even with the light source it was hard to see everything around them. Wu nearly tripped a couple times, though thankfully Mako was there to catch his fall.

As the Zaofu guard continued on, Hong-Li furrowed his brow. "Huh," he said, looking around at the tunnel opening up before him. "I don't remember this part?"

"It's a tunnel. Doesn't all look the same?" another guard replied.

"We didn't make it this wide though," Hong-Li said. "Let's chuck a flare out."

The other guard lit one of the flares and tossed it into the cavern. The red glow revealed the other side where the tunnel narrowed again. But that wasn't all. Shapes moved along the ceiling and walls.

Hong-Li's eyes widened, "We're not alone."

"Is it an animal?" one of the other guards asked.
While the Zaofu soldiers took their time inching into the cavern, Raiko felt a knot in his stomach. "I... I think I know...," his thoughts trailed off. He turned to the nearest Zaofu guard, "We need to turn back. Now."

Mako looked at the president, "Mr President sir, what is it?"

"We have to get out of the tunnel. It's a trap!" he said, more panicked this time.

Hong-Li looked back to the president, though in an instant, his body lurched forwards. He dug his feet into the earth, stopping himself from being dragged away. "Get back!"

Small chucks of earth whizzed past Raiko and latched onto a civilian. Her cries were muffled as she was dragged through the air, her arms outstretched and flailing around. A pair of robed figures dropped from the ceiling, and together, they subdued another Zaofu guard.

Even though the light was limited, Mako couldn't mistake the pair's wide-brimmed pointed hats. "It's the Dai Li! Run!"

The crowd behind him screamed and panicked. At first those further back were confused, though with the screams of people ahead and sounds of bending earth, the others soon understood enough of what was happening.

Wu ducked as something struck the rock wall behind him. Mako leapt into action, creating a fire pinwheel that blocked several strikes. Hong-Li had managed to free himself, and fought off one of the Dai Li agents. "Ikki! Meelo! Start helping the others back!"

The two airbender kids fended off several rocks with air blasts, before grabbing onto Baatar Sr. and Huan and pulling them away. Raiko was already sprinting out, trying to push past the other civilians with his bodyguards clearing a path. Wu cowered behind Mako, and his yelps and screams echoed around.

"Get them out of here!" Hong-Li called back. "We'll hold them off!"

Mako grunted as he blasted a Dai Li agent back with a fire jet. He didn't want to leave them. Spirits knew how many agents there were. But his job was to keep the prince safe. He gritted his teeth, hooking an arm around Wu and taking off back through the tunnel.

He could hear the sounds of fighting for a short while after he left. But eventually, there was a silence that followed. Mako ran even faster.

Korra was out of breath and out of energy. But she pushed on. The pair had traded sides, with Korra now standing closer to the jeering soldiers behind and Kuvira opposite her. She'd gotten a few hits in, evidenced by the couple of scorch marks on Kuvira's uniform, but Korra looked like she'd taken far more of a beating.

Still, she knew she had to hold out at least a little longer. They hadn't been fighting for that long, and the others needed time to get out. And her own ego wanted her to at least get a good hit in before cutting and running.

Both of the benders charged again with a flurry of strikes. Rocks were launched, fire balls thrown, a wave of air swept at Kuvira, and metal shards flung with a high-pitched scraping sound. Korra defended against the attacks, planting her feet into the ground to block the first lot with a wall, and then spiralling into the air with a flame kick to avoid the last attacks. She saw an opening and went for a gust, though her arm stopped short as another metal band clung to her and threw her backwards. Korra landed on the ground.

Korra bounced onto her feet. If Kuvira's game was to humiliate Korra to make herself seem like the superior 'champion', or whatever she had called the both of them, then it was working. Each time Korra went down, Kuvira waited for her to get back up. She was toying with Korra. And Korra knew she needed to stop playing into her game.

She shuffled her feet in from a wider stance to a lighter one, brought her elbows up, and kept her hands open and facing Kuvira. This time, she didn't attack first. She simply waiting, her blue eyes connecting with Kuvira's green ones.

Kuvira seemed to understand what Korra was doing. "Fine," she smirked. With a powerful stomp she kicked up a trio of boulders and flung each one with precise kicks and punches. Korra felt the air change as each attack approached, and pivoted with quick spiral movements to avoid each one. Kuvira narrowed her eyes. She tried flinging multiple shards at Korra with lightning speed. Korra felt one graze her forearm, but managed to deflect the rest with a gale.

With a powerful earth-leap, Kuvira closed the distance between them. Korra swept her body out the way, avoiding a rock crashing in front of her. Each attack Kuvira threw, Korra pivoted away.

Once there was distance between them again, Kuvira upheaved a massive hunk of rock and flipped it towards Korra. She pivoted again. Kuvira didn't show it, but frustration was setting in.

But Korra wasn't simply evading Kuvira's attacks; the whole time she'd been pivoting and spinning, Korra had been generating wind currents around her. With a final twirl, Korra stretched an open palm forwards and unleashed a howling tempest at Kuvira.

"Ugh!" Kuvira gritted her teeth and dug her feet into the earth, but it wasn't enough. The vortex picked her up and swept her body across the fields. Korra wasn't finished however; the ground beneath her was rather saturated, and with a flowing motion she drew a ring of water around her from the earth. She shifted her weight back and then lunged forwards, her outstretched hand lashing a water whip right across Kuvira's face. As Kuvira recovered, she felt one of her braids come loose. If she'd been trying to conceal any rage or fury, then it wasn't working. Kuvira's face contorted. She exhaled sharply, before her cold, metal-like expression returned. The arm bands around her bicep slid down to form a blade, and she pushed forwards.

Korra tried to evade Kuvira's strikes. Her sword was fast, slashing the air with precision and speed. The edges of Korra's arms were cut as she continued to step backwards. She readied a fireball but Kuvira swatted her arm away. The pair traded empty blows until Kuvira's blade cut Korra's sides. She yelped and kicked a flame jet down to push her away from the close quarters fight.

She didn't get very far. Kuvira's blade morphed into a cable, and as her hand stretched forwards it wrapped around Korra's ankle and yanked her. Kuvira stomped up a rock pillar just in time for Korra to smack headfirst into it. She sunk to the ground, shaking and struggling to get up.

"That's it," Baatar mumbled to himself, his hand clenched into a fist. He always knew his fiancé was far tougher than the Avatar. And now, she was proving it to their whole army.

The other three watched from Korra's side, worried and praying Korra could get up again. "Don't give up!" Jinora called out.

"Keep going Korra!" Suyin chimed in.

Korra managed to spring back on her feet. She rolled out the way as a line of pillars shot forth, and then erected a thick block to defend against Kuvira's projectiles. She lunged her foot forwards, heaving the massive boulder at Kuvira. The Great Uniter caught it with her own earthbending. The two of them groaned as they fought for control over the earth block, each gritting their teeth as the hunk of stone hovered in the air. Eventually, Kuvira swept her arms across and the stone crumbled to pieces. Korra fell backwards, panting heavily.

"Is this really the best you've got?" Kuvira taunted. "You claim to be a champion of the world yet here you are, stuck on the ground in the mud."

"We have to help her!" Opal stepped forwards. She was angry enough as it was, and had no problem throwing her own punches at Kuvira.

Korra managed to move to a crouching position on all fours, "No, I can handle it!" she called back. Once again she stood to her feet.

Kuvira grinned, her eyes hungry like an armadillo tiger's ready to feast.

Korra formed an ice dagger from the watery ground and shot it forwards. Her surprise attack with water had worked the first time, though this time Kuvira was ready. She sliced the ice projectile in half with a metal shard. Kuvira followed by stomping a massive stone up, heaving it in the air. Korra shot forth several pillars to block it, shattering it into dust. In the cloud of dust and debris, Korra felt something tug on her ankle again. The band of metal yanked her upside down and flung her on her back. Korra wailed.

More shards were flung her way. Korra swatted them with a gust, and then swept an air current at Kuvira. She sidestepped with ease. Korra's movements were getting slower. Just as she shot forth a fire jet, Kuvira managed to twist the earth underneath her and throw her off balance, before planting a jumping kick right into Korra's chest. The blow sent her tumbling and rolling along the ground.

"She's not going to win," Opal said.

"Use the Avatar State!" Suyin called out.

Korra stayed on the ground longer than she had thus far. She moaned, pushing herself onto all fours with her face to the ground, her shorter hair still obscuring her expression. She'd given it her best, but now she needed the last lotus tile up her sleeve.

After focusing on her breathing, steadying her inhales and exhales as her mind grew calm, Korra felt a sensation course through her bones. When she opened her eyes they glowed a brilliant white, and new energy filled her limbs.

Kuvira was already flying through the air towards her. Korra rolled onto her back and thrust her palms forwards. The air blasts shot Kuvira back.

"Argh," Kuvira grunted, landing on her feet. The Avatar was like a different warrior once in the Avatar State. She quickly readied another stone projectile, though Korra was already charging forwards. The Avatar pushed along the ground with a gust of air, then raised her open palm once more. The blast was stronger than Korra's previous tempest, and flung Kuvira's body like a peddle skimming along a lake's surface. Korra then drew the water from the ground beneath her again, shooting a small torrent forwards and sweeping Kuvira into the air. She tried to raise a pillar to break herself free, but Korra clenched her fist, freezing the water into a tower of ice. It shattered into pieces, leaving Kuvira coughing and spluttering on all fours.

Now that she had the upper hand, it was time to finish it. Korra spun herself an air funnel and floated high into the air. She raised several massive hunks of stone and hovered them alongside her. She could see Kuvira sprawled on the ground, her head was hung over, her black hair completely undone. Though as she lifted her head, a sinking fear gripped Korra's chest. It wasn't Kuvira's face that she saw, but her own. It was the ghost. The spirit ghost that she'd thought she'd left behind.

"Argh!" Korra yelped. Her eyes returned to normal. The massive rock hovering above dropped to the ground. Korra managed to brace herself somewhat as her air funnel dissipated, but she still tumbled onto the ground from her fall. Her mind filled with searing pain and a fogginess that threatened to make her pass out. She fought back, trying to stay awake, trying to stop herself from seeing that spirit-damned ghost that had been haunting her all this time ever since she was poisoned. But as she watched Kuvira slowly get up, all she could see was the ghost with glowing eyes.

Suyin watched with anxious eyes, "Korra! What's happening?"

"I don't understand," Jinora said. "We got all the poison out. There shouldn't be anything blocking her chi pathways."

"Should we step in?" Opal turned to her mother.

Suyin exchanged a worried glance. She looked to her sons up ahead, then turned back, "If things go bad, step in and keep Kuvira busy."

Opal also looked ahead, and seemed to understand what Suyin was planning.

Korra had only just pushed herself up into a sitting position. She breathed in and out, but her breaths were shallow, and pained. There was nothing left in the tank.

Kuvira had started walking over, looking down at Korra with disdain. "I always knew you were weak. An over-glorified fool worshiped by the masses. The Earth Empire doesn't need you anymore, Avatar. I am the only saviour they need."

As Kuvira readied two more metal slivers, Korra pushed up once again. Before she could even start bending an element, the metal bands clamped around Korra's wrists, pulling her high into the air. Korra dangled there, barely able to keep her eyes open. She felt the air rush underneath, and Korra slammed into the ground with a heavy thud. She was propped upright again as the earth encased around her, exposing her head and shoulders but keeping the rest of her trapped.

Kuvira strode over calmly, limping slightly as the pain from their duel stated to set in. She flicked off several more pieces of metal, though these she sharpened into talons. "Once you die, the new Avatar will be reborn into the Earth Empire. I think it's time the cycle begins anew."

Opal and Jinora exchanged looks. It was time.

Kuvira turned to see a massive blast of air coming her way. She was too late. It smacked her off her feet and sent her tumbling back to the front lines. The two airbenders sprinted over to Korra's trapped form. Jinora was already whipping up the beginnings of a tornado, sweeping it around Korra when they arrived.

Once on her feet again, Kuvira shot back a furious glare. "The deal is off!" Kuvira shouted back. "It's time to take Zaofu! Attack!"

Soldiers cheered as they stomped forwards. Tanks whirred into action, and mech suits joined those on foot. The airships didn't bother with those still in front, flying directly to the metal domes instead.

Opal and Jinora kept the air funnel raging around them. Soldiers tried launching rocks into it, though it swung them around and off to the sides. It was holding them back for now, but they wouldn't be able to keep it up. Pepper seemed to understand what was going on. She slammed her broad tail against the ground, sending troops and a ground tank toppling over.

Kuvira watched as the airbenders managed to keep her forces at bay. Several foot soldiers were swept into the vortex, with metalbenders flying out cables to catch them and bring them back. Even the mech suits had to dig their feet into the ground just to stand upright, but they were advancing at least. Kuvira turned back to the earthbenders, "Raise a wall!" she commanded. She joined them in stomping up a massive wall, adding to it with each motion.

Out of the corner of her eye, Kuvira saw something silver flash by. Suyin was skirting around the air vortex, whipping out her cables and taking out several soldiers. She was making a beeline for her sons.

Suyin launched herself onto a mech suit, slicing open the cockpit with makeshift blades on her forearms. She slammed a palm into the man's forehead, knocking him out cold. She leapt forwards but a rock missile struck her shoulder and sent her tumbling to the ground. She quickly got back on her feet, looking over and seeing Kuvira standing there with an outstretched fist.

This was meant to be the final step in uniting the Earth Empire. Kuvira wasn't going to let anyone take that away from her, not the Avatar, nor Suyin. She threw another boulder at Suyin, though her movements were slower after her fight with Korra. Suyin rolled out the way. She could see her sons just in front of her. Both of them watched their mother sprinting closer, dashing around soldiers and tanks with quick steps.

"I'm coming for you!" Suyin cried out. Though she felt a cable wrap around her waist. The mech suit yanked her backwards through the air, and Suyin came crashing down. Her head hit the ground first. Her world spun as she tried to get up.

Thankfully, Pepper had made her way over to Suyin's position. She roared as she bashed a mech suit with her horns, then slammed another tail strike into a line of incoming soldiers.

By this stage, Korra had just managed to wake up. She punched herself out of the earth encasing her, stumbling as she stood upright. Her heart sank when she saw all that was happening. She had lost. She mustered up every bit of energy she had left, spinning in her own air currents to keep the tornado going.

Opal could see the battle unfolding to the side. She could see her mother on the ground. Her brothers were just there, stuck inside their metal prisons. Even if they could get to them, it would take time to break them out. Tears formed in Opal's eyes. She had to make an impossible decision.

The Earth Empire soldiers were starting to make that choice for her; their wall was now the size of a three-storey apartment block. Jinora and Opal's tornado wouldn't be able to shred it. The soldiers inched their barricade forwards, and the two airbenders could feel their defence start to dissipate. Opal looked to Jinora and nodded, and then turned back to Korra and did the same. The two of them let go of the air vortex and sprinted away, jumping up and opening their wingsuits with a gust of air. Korra punched into the ground and send an earth wave to topple down the wall in front of them.

Opal sailed over and landed by her mother, while Jinora hopped on Pepper's head by the reigns. "Wing! Wei!" Opal cried out. There were less soldiers between them than she though. There was still a chance.

"Get Mom out of here!" Wing yelled back. "We'll be fine!"

"I can't leave you!"

"Opal! You have to!"

A whimper left Opal's mouth. She could see her brothers were putting on a brave face. Wing smiled, though his eyes were unsettled and fearful. Opal sucked in her breath, wrapping their mother's arm around her and hoisting her up. "I'll come back for you! I promise!"

Opal pushed back another wave of soldiers, then propelled herself and Suyin onto the saddle. Pepper ran along the ground for a stretch, giving Korra a chance to grab onto Opal's outstretched hand. Cables were fired from mech suits and earth discs shot from the tanks, but Jinora managed to get them into the air. Once there was some distance between them, Suyin finally came to. She sat up, rubbing her aching head, before her eyes went wide. She looked at Opal, then around those of them in the saddle, before realising they were high in the air. Once the dots connected, tears welled in her eyes. She scrambled for the side of the saddle, a wail leaving her lips as she watched her youngest sons shrink from view. She broke down, a sobbing mess, as Opal wrapped her arms around her tightly.

Although their goal was to keep Kuvira occupied while the others escaped, when Korra saw the Beifongs break down crying next to her, she couldn't help but feel like it was all her fault.

Chapter Text

The monorail entrance slammed shut as Pepper dove inside the central dome. The guards had mentioned something about not being able to escape, though Korra hadn't fully believed until now. She stood with the others returning next to the base of City Spire. Everywhere around them were terrified and startled citizens, some screaming and yelling. Some calling out names of people they couldn't find. It was a nightmare.

At the tunnel entrance, Korra saw Mako emerge with the prince and the president. The trio collapsed, panting heavily as they sunk to the ground. Suyin ran over and grabbed hold of her husband. Baatar Sr.'s eyes drew dark as he noticed the twins weren't with them. He held Suyin close while she sobbed, and then wrapped his arm around Opal too.

Jinora embraced her two siblings, who looked shaken after their ordeal. Korra ran over and helped Mako up, "What happened?! The guards said you were attacked in the tunnels?"

Mako didn't answer. His eyes were angry. He marched over and stood right in front of the president, "You knew! You knew that it was the Dai Li!"

Raiko's eyes went wide, "Step aside you insolent cur!"

His bodyguard smacked Mako in the stomach. He stumbled back, but didn't back down, "When we noticed something in the cave you knew we had to turn back! How did you know about the Dai Li?! Have you been sabotaging Zaofu!"

"Are you insane?!"

"You spoke to her alone at the negotiations!"

All eyes were glued to the president. Raiko paused, trying to think of some way out of this. He shook his head, "Kuvira made a deal with the Dai Li. One that I am most certainly not a part of."

Korra looked shocked, "A deal with the Dai Li? You just encountered them in the tunnels right?"

Raiko nodded. "I had an investigation done in the Earth Kingdom. After the coronation," he exhaled deeply. "She managed to strike a deal with them. That's how she managed to unite the last of the Earth Kingdom states." A spiteful chuckle left his mouth, "I had deals lined up with all of them. King Renshu. Regent Baozhai. All the states were onboard with reinstating Wu. Yet they all backed out and went dark. It was her. Kuvira. And her new Dai Li. She knew about the mountain pass and made sure we couldn't leave." His eyes sunk to the floor, "She played me. She played all of us."

"So the attacks were a lie?" Mako asked.

"I don't think so. I think she just realised no one wanted to follow her and join her idiotic empire. So she forced them," Raiko shook his head. "It isn't just the Dai Li either; it's Hou-Ting. She's somehow survived all this time. My sources saw her directly."

Everyone was confused and stunned by this revelation. The former Earth Monarch was said to have died by Zaheer's hand when Ba Sing Se fell, though her body had never been found, thought to have burned away with part of the Royal Palace.

"And why didn't you tell us this?!" Suyin shouted. She was angry. Furious and heartbroken at leaving her sons behind. And now, her ally had been lying to her all this time.

"Oh please!" Raiko waved his hands angrily, "You can't fault me for keeping my Pai Sho tiles close to my chest! I couldn't trust any of you! You were all obsessed with finding the Avatar – which, may I remind you, was never in danger – and you, Suyin, refused to see Kuvira without your rose-tinted glasses! I warned you she was a lying, conniving, spawn of Koh, but you believed every word she said and gave excuse after excuse for her actions!"

Suyin looked ready to sock the president in the mouth. Her hands clenched and her breath was hot as it left her nostrils. Thankfully, Korra stepped in between them, "Look! We can talk about this after we're safe! Now, how are we going to get everyone out in time?!"

No one knew what to say exactly. Eyes drifted to the ground, or between each other. Eventually, Jinora spoke up, "We can't all make it out."

Korra's heart sank when she heard those words. She knew when they narrowly escaped the front lines that this would be the case, but she'd hoped somehow there was a way.

Jinora continued, "I don't think I can fly Pepper back and forth."

There was a loud thud against the dome roof high above. The airships had already started bombing them. "Not with all the airships!" Ikki replied.

"And we won't be able to open the domes. Not with them above us," Mako said.

Baatar Sr. paused, thinking through their options. "We don't have to open the domes fully," he reached for a pen in his jacket and then grabbed a fallen brochure on the ground. There was a blank side he scribbled on, "The domes are normally opened automatically, but we can also manually open each one individually. There's an interior pulley system. We can open just the top of the lotus petal, creating an opening large enough for the bison but small enough to stop airships from getting in. They also won't be expecting it."

"We'll only be able to get one trip out though," Jinora replied. "Once they see us leave there's no way we'll be able to come back."

Mako crouched down to look at the drawing, "I thought the domes are made of platinum? How will you get inside them?"

"They are. Mostly. But there's an unrefined iron panel at the base of each petal. In case of emergencies. That's why I'll need you, son," Baatar Sr. turned to Huan.

Huan had been in his own anxiety-induced daze. "What?!"

Baatar Sr. gently squeezed his son's shoulder, "Huan. I'll need you to pry open the metal panel on the lotus petal. Once we find the cable, the winch will be a few feet away. It's also under a bendable metal panel." He straightened his glasses, "Once exposed we'll be able to manually pull the top of the dome down. But I'll need the right spanner to fit. There's one in my work building to the north. I suggest we head there anyway since the tunnel with the Dai Li is to the east, and Kuvira's soldiers coming in from the West."

There was another loud clang against the dome roof. Everyone ducked for cover.

Suyin heard the screams of civilians nearby. She walked over to them, "Please! Everyone get inside! Hide out, and if you're discovered, then surrender quietly!"

A few of the citizens were in disbelief. Their leader was telling them to give up.

"If you have a plan, then I suggest we get to it," Raiko blurted out.

"Right," Baatar Sr. stood upright. "It won't take long to collect the tools. Huan, you come with me."

Suyin walked back to her family. She took Opal's hands, "Opal. I want you to go with Huan and look after him."

"Mom...," Opal's eyes were wide and teary. "What about you?"

"Oh, sweetie," Suyin choked on her words. "I can't leave your brothers. Wing and Wei need me."

"But I need you too!" Opal whimpered.

Suyin brought her daughter in close. She held her tightly, wishing to any spirit that would listen to keep her daughter safe. She didn't want to stop, but eventually pulled away. She looked over to her husband, "You can go too if you want."

"Dear," Baatar Sr. shook his head. "You need me. And I won't leave you."

Suyin couldn't hold back tears as she took hold of her husband again.

Jinora turned to her younger siblings, "Stay close to Pepper. It might be a bumpy ride, so I want you two to be near."

"We got it," Meelo replied.

"We'll get you out Prince Wu. And you Mr President," Mako looked to both of them, even managing to dispel his anger for a moment towards Raiko.

Raiko stared back, nodding slowly. He glanced over to Suyin and sighed, "Suyin," he walked over. "I know we haven't always gotten along. But I promise you, I will do everything to get Zaofu back. I won't let you be stuck here."

Suyin smiled weakly. "Just please stop her. Kuvira can't keep doing this." The pair cupped their hands and bowed.

This was all feeling surreal for Korra. Her emotions had been changing like a swirling river. The happiness and joy of reuniting with everyone yesterday, to the fierce determination when facing Kuvira. It was all now replaced by a sinking dread that she'd let all of this happen. "I'm sorry," Korra uttered. "I'm sorry for all of this."

"Korra," Suyin shook her head. She felt her own guilt, about not being able to protect her children, not being able to save her people. She felt just as bad as Korra did, but she didn't think for one second that any of it was Korra's fault. She walked over, gingerly placing a hand on Korra's shoulder. "Here," she said, unstrapping the metal spools around her waist.

Korra shook her head, "No, Su, I can't –"

"It's a Zaofu tradition," Suyin replied. She fastened the belt around Korra's waist. "A metalbender teacher to give their student a set of metal cables." She smiled warmly, even with her eyes filled with tears, "I guess I never got the chance earlier, with Zaheer and the Red Lotus interrupting our training. But I want you to have them."

Korra's eyes were glassy and filled with deep sorrow and regret. "I wish... I wish I could've beaten her. I wish I could've saved you all."

Suyin wiped the tears from Korra's cheek. "Korra, it's alright. This might feel like a loss, but it wasn't. You stood up to Kuvira. You showed her that she isn't as powerful as she thinks she is. And the world has its Avatar back," she smiled. "That's a win in my book. I know that you'll be able to face her."

Korra couldn't stop herself from sobbing. Suyin pulled her in, holding her close.

After another few seconds, Suyin pulled away. She could see many of her people had gathered around them. She cleared her throat and stepped forwards, "As your leader, I am deeply sorry that I couldn't protect us today. But there's no need to risk your lives further. The Earth Empire wants Zaofu to join them. If you cooperate and give yourselves up, then you will be spared harm."

"What about you Suyin Beifong?" a woman called out. She held onto her child, but her eyes were also worried for Suyin's fate.

Suyin smiled, "I'm going to do everything I can to make sure the Avatar escapes. She will return, and she will stop Kuvira. She free all of us from this."

"We can help," a man stepped forwards. "We can hold the soldiers up. Give you a chance to get out."

"Please, don't risk yourselves – "

"If there's a chance we can fight back, then I'll take it," the man continued. A few others around him chimed in.

Suyin looked on, a mix of pride and worry at her people risking their lives.

Any further conversation was cut short as a tank rolled over the crest of a hill. "They're here!" a guard shouted.

Green earth discs were flung into the crowd. Several mechs and foot soldiers appeared from the edges of the courtyard, trapping civilians in their tracks. Some tried to fight back, but were quickly apprehended.

Suyin froze as she watched the horror unfold. Her own people, being struck down and rounded up like cattle as the Earth Empire swarmed in. She felt her husband take her hand and pull her down the street, snapping her back to reality. Although she felt distraught and outraged at what was happening, Suyin snuffed her feelings away deep inside. She had to do this one thing to make it all worth it. She had to get the others out.

Baatar Sr. led the way with Suyin, along with several Zaofu Guard, and Opal and Huan close behind. Jinora and her siblings were next as they ran alongside Pepper. Wu had been hoisted onto the bison's saddle, and crouched in a ball as low as he could. Behind them was Raiko with his two bodyguards running behind, and Korra and Mako bringing up the rear. Every so often one of the Zaofu guards would peel away and keep the incoming soldiers busy.

"It's another couple blocks!" Baatar Sr. called out to the others. His work building was near the edge of the dome, which would make collecting his things and reaching their escape point a lot faster.

Near the tunnel entrance, a few Dai Li agents slid their way inside the dome. They started picking off stragglers, apprehending guards and civilians alike and whisking them away into the shadows.

Kuvira and her troops had busted in through the monorail entrance. She managed to walk along, though Baatar walked beside to help her when her injured body would give out. "Hand me a radio!" she barked out. Baatar repeated the order to a soldier, who quickly fetched Kuvira what she wanted, "First Commander Yasuko," Kuvira spoke into the receiver. "Keep the airships near all the exits! The Avatar will surely try to escape!"

"Roger Kuvira Sir!"

Whatever Suyin and her defeated allies were planning, Kuvira would put a stop to it. This was her day. She had been victorious against the Avatar and proven herself. Nothing would stop her from taking Zaofu.

The silver and clay coloured building was another block ahead. Baatar Sr. continued sprinting over, though a large rock wall blocked his path.

"Stay behind me!" Suyin called out. She sliced part of the wall off and launched it forwards, smashing into the turret of a tank. The foot soldiers were already tussling with her Zaofu Guard, but the tank had other turrets. A metal disc whizzed out and sliced another section of the wall, and nearly Baatar Sr.'s head if Huan hadn't helped them both duck in time. As another disc was launched, Suyin slid underneath, narrowly missing the bladed part, before scissor kicking up a pillar and toppling the vehicle over.

On the other side of the wall, Opal pivoted around several metalbenders all lashing out their cables. She spun around, directing a powerful current that swept the soldiers into a wall. One of them got back up, and Opal slammed a palm into his jaw, feeling the bone give way. She was angry. Furious. This was her home, her family, and these soldiers had no right to be doing this. She flung another soldier's body high into the air, smashing into an awning before falling back to the ground.

At the back, Mako and Korra worked together to block a fire jet of a mech suit. While Korra continued to match with her own fire, Mako dove to the side, and zapped the suit with a sizzling bolt of electricity. Stunned, the mech suit took a step back. Pepper delivered the final blow, snorting and charging forwards. She thrust her horns upward, throwing the mech suit a good few metres away.

While still crouched in the bison's saddle, Wu looked up and saw soldiers dropping from the roof. With the airships above them, they must have entered through the top floors of City Spire. "Up there!" the prince yelled.

Korra and Mako watched the soldiers drop down on cables, hooking onto nearby buildings and flinging themselves through the air. She readied an air blast and swept it upwards, and then shot forward a ball of fire. Her attacks smacked into one woman, who cried out as her cable pulled her head-first into a building. The other man landed right in front of Mako. The firebender kicked flame crescents at the metalbender, who dipped and ducked out the way. Finally, one of Mako's kicks connected, singeing his uniform and sending him stumbling backwards.

In the courtyard adjacent to them, several lines of mech suits approached. Jinora and her siblings ducked out of the way of their electricity bolts and flamethrowers. "We're being cut off!" Jinora called out to the others.

"Circle back around!" one of the Zaofu Guards called back. She swept a hunk of stone into one of the mechs, "There's less soldiers on the next block. We'll make sure Baatar and the others get to the dome."

"Should we be splitting up?" Mako asked. He dodged a cable fired his way, and then blasted the mech suit back onto the ground.

The Zaofu Guard dodged an attack, then turned to Mako, "We can thin out their forces if we separate!"

She did have a point. Baatar Sr. and those at the front of the group hadn't moved forwards, leaving them all open to attacks and incoming troops from across the courtyard. If their group made a break for it and took several soldiers with them, it would make it easier for the other group to push forwards.

"Alright," Jinora replied. She and her siblings made for one of the narrower side streets. Ikki and Meelo blasted a funnel of air to clear the way from a couple metalbenders, while Jinora led Pepper through the opening. Raiko stumbled after them, helped up by one of his bodyguards, while Mako and Korra deflected the last of the attacks before joining them.

Kuvira and Baatar stood on the steps of City Spire entrance, watching their troops battle the Zaofu Guard. With their sheer numbers, apprehending them was easy. The Avatar and her group seemed to be heading north. Baatar furrowed his brows, "Their escape tunnel is to the east. Why are they not heading that way?"

"Probably because we concentrated soldiers there," Kuvira answered. "They'll circle back once our men follow them. But we'll keep it guarded."

"Hmm," Baatar mused. He thought back to all his time helping his father with his architecture projects. There was no way to open the domes without exposing themselves to the airships, so he was sure Korra wouldn't try to escape that way. Unless there was a way to open part of the dome.

"They're going to escape through the dome!" Baatar's eyes went wide. "There's a manual way to open them. Now that we have the controls they can't automatically open them. But if they reach one side and open the panels up, they'll be able to operate the winch themselves."

Kuvira only understood part of what Baatar was saying, but enough to realised they had a problem on their hands. "We have to reach them first!" She signalled to a group of mech suits and soldiers, joining them with Baatar as they pressed forwards.

The inside of Baatar Sr.'s work building was still rather intact. Several desks were toppled and papers strewn across the floor, but other than that, it was easy enough to find what he needed. The spanner was as tall as one of his thighs, with a particular grip that fit only the winches themselves. He picked it up, along with a box of assorted tools, before marching back into the foyer where Suyin and Opal were holding out.

"I've got everything!" Baatar Sr. called out. Huan took hold of one of the boxes, his hands still shaking from the anxiety.

The Zaofu Guard outside were doing a good job of holding the tanks and soldiers back, and only a couple of troops had made it into the foyer. Opal pushed forward an air blast into one soldier, and Suyin kicked another in the gut before planting a pillar into his side. He groaned while collapsing on the floor.

On the other side of the block, the airbender kids cleared a path to the dome. Pepper tried following, but a several cables shot out and wrapped around her six legs. She groaned deeply and thrashed, but couldn't break free.

While Jinora went back to free her bison, Wu peered over the edge of the saddle. He ducked as a hunk of earth aimed at Jinora was deflected his way. While sprawled on the saddle base, he saw his bag of designer shoes in the corner. "Okay, fine!" he rolled his eyes. The bag was far too heavy for him to throw, but once up on the saddle edge, he managed to tip the bag over. It crashed onto a soldier's head, with the poor man collapsing in a pile of gold-studded elegant footwear.

Jinora took out the last metalbender, and now Pepper was free to move again. She bounded forwards to join Ikki and Meelo up ahead.

The airbenders and Pepper neared a bridge, though several tanks came rolling over from the side. The sky bison roared and charged at one, but the rest of the reinforcements were proving too difficult for them to handle.

"Guys! Look out!" Jinora called out. She pivoted twice, then swept a gale howling across the street. None of the tanks were knocked over, but the wind was great enough to keep them from moving.

Korra could see everything unfolding. "I need to go help them out!" she said to Mako next to her. The Avatar sprinted over some debris, then outstretched her arms. She felt a power manifest inside, and her eyes began to glow brilliant white. Korra drew a massive torrent of water from under the bridge, swirling it through the air and right over the tanks. She brought her arms together while leaning forwards, and froze the tanks in their tracks.

As she relaxed again, Korra felt her mind grow hazy and dizzy. She managed to keep standing though. And she didn't see any ghosts this time. Maybe this was as much Avatar State she could do right now. Ikki ran over and helped Korra continue.

While Korra and the others had cleared a path forwards, Mako was struggling to keep the soldiers off their tail. The Zaofu Guards with them were already engaged with several soldiers down the street, though a line of earthbenders still pursued them. Mako dodged several earth projectiles, and then blocked one with a ball of flame. He propelled himself onto the side of the building, running along for a stretch while punching out some quick jabs. He landed, roundhouse kicked a soldier, and then finished off the other two. With the coast clear, Mako rejoined the president.

Raiko looked back down the street, noticing another row of soldiers charging straight for them. His bodyguards looked back. Raiko gave a short nod, and they returned the gesture.

Mako could only hear his own footsteps, and turned back. He saw Raiko's bodyguards were staying behind. "What are they doing?"

"Their job," Raiko replied bluntly. "Now finish doing yours!"

As the pair continued running, Mako looked back and watched the two bodyguards take on the line of soldiers. They were putting up a valiant effort, but they wouldn't last long.

Once over the bridge, Korra's group only had to run a short distance to reach the dome. Suyin's group approached from the other side, and the remaining Zaofu Guard set up barriers and defences to keep the soldiers at bay.

Baatar Sr. and Huan ran over to the metal plating, "It's somewhere here son."

"Okay," Huan gulped. He wasn't much of a fighter, but he was still a metalbender. He reached forwards and tried moving the panel in front. It didn't budge. With a worried look he turned back to his father, "Dad, it won't move!"

"Keep trying son. You can do it. One of these panels should come off."

Huan continued to feel over the plating. There were probably markings somewhere, but with the reduced light from the closed dome it was harder to see finer details. He noticed a tug on one of the plates, and then pressed again. The panel dented in. "Here!" Huan exclaimed. He then yanked the entire panel off, and as Baatar Sr. had said, a thick cable was underneath.

"Great!" Baatar Sr. said. He then lined himself against the cable, took a few paces back towards the city centre, and then stopped. "Now here should be the winch."

Huan followed, and began peeling back the larger panel on the ground. It was more refined than the previous one, and took a bit more effort to remove. Though once he did, Huan sighed.

Baatar Sr. quickly got to work. He jumped into the hole, pulling out a screwdriver and began working on the winch.

"What are you doing now?" Raiko hovered over.

"Well," Baatar Sr. grunted as he removed a bolt, "we might be able to open the dome manually, but if Kuvira's made it to the control room then she can just close it as soon as we do. I'm removing the wiring from the winch so she can't do that."

"How's it coming?" Suyin called back.

Baatar Sr. popped his head up, "Need a minute."

Suyin narrowed her eyes, "That's about all we have."

The streets above were flooded with marching troops. All the remaining Zaofu Guard had pulled back to their position. There were a couple of choke points with the bridge and canal, but it wouldn't be much of an advantage when they were this badly outnumbered.

"Fire!" a Zaofu Guard cried out. From behind their defences, several guards hurled rocks and boulders. Some worked together to upheave a massive slab of stone, stomping it high into the air above the Earth Empire troops.

The earthbending soldiers at the front created a cover to block the incoming projectiles. They returned fire with metal discs from the ground tanks, lightning bolts from the mechs, and their own rock missiles. They even had some of the waterbending division in their ranks, who had already started to thaw out the tanks Korra froze.

On the other side, rows of mech suits marched towards them. Suyin flung several attacks there way, and quickly ducked as a mech shot a cable out into her barrier.

Jinora, Ikki, Meelo, and Opal all worked together to start a massive wind funnel. As it roared down the street and into the soldiers, Korra managed to add her own currents in too. Some of those on foot got caught up and spun around, but the others managed to rise a massive slab out of the earth. As it rose higher and higher, the funnel simply bounced off their defence. The wall grinded forwards, and with it, the rows and rows of troops ready to take them down.

"Ugh... got it!" Baatar Sr. said as he pried the last of the electrical components off the winch. He hopped out of the gap, and then picked up the large spanner. He locked it into place and turned back to Raiko, "Maybe a hand would be good, Mr President?"

Raiko shifted his glasses and rolled up his sleeves. He stood on one side of the spanner and Baatar Sr. on the other. Together, their efforts started unwinding the winch.

As Korra continued to throw fire punches at the soldiers, she felt a bright light cast its glow down from the roof. Shielding her eyes, she turned back to take a look. The smallest part of the platinum dome had begun to open, letting in the midday sun. "Guys! Look!" she directed Mako's attention to the opening.

The Zaofu Guard next to them also saw it, "Start pulling back. We'll hold them off!"

Korra nodded. She and Mako burst forth a final raging inferno, blasting a ground tank's tread to pieces. The lopsided vehicle grinded to a halt.

Kuvira and Baatar had made it much closer to the battle unfolding. "They've already opened it!" Baatar said, pointing to the small ray of light shining down from the ceiling.

"First Commander Minsheng. Take your squad up and try to stop them opening the dome!" Kuvira ordered.

Minsheng nodded, shutting his mech visor, and charging forwards.

Kuvira also readied her armour. Baatar looked over, "What are you doing?"

"I'm not going to let them ruin this day for us," Kuvira narrowed her eyes. "This is our day. A day for the Earth Empire."

"You've just been fighting the Avatar."

"And she lost," Kuvira shot back. "Make sure things run smoothly from here." With that, Kuvira marched alongside her forces, picking up pace and making a beeline for the forces holding out.

The winch clanked as the pair continued to work. "I can handle it from here. Get to the bison sir!" Baatar Sr. called out. Raiko nodded, and made his way over, keeping his head low to avoid incoming attacks.

Wu was already in the saddle. While Korra and Mako continued throwing attacks at the soldiers, Jinora helped Huan onto the bison. Ikki and Meelo flew into the saddle as well, and their animal companions joined them inside.

Korra readied herself, and then punched down an earth wave into the front lines. She then darted back, while Mako kicked a jet at the soldiers. They quickly made it to Pepper just as Jinora helped the president onto the saddle.

Opal was still with her mother. The pair hid behind a barricade while the mech suits continued their assault. "Opal! You have to go!"

"Mom, I can't leave you!" Opal replied. She pushed forth a gale that swept a mech off its feet.

"Sweetheart," Suyin leant in close, pulling her daughter in. "Please."

The airbender's eyes grew warm. A pang of deep sorrow manifested inside, threatening to swallow her whole right on the battlefield. She breathed in, accepting this fate. "Mom... I love you. I promise I'll come back for you."

Suyin smiled warmly. "I love you too. I'll be okay."

And with that, Suyin went back to throwing boulders into the mech suits. Opal made a dash for the bison, dodging a metal disc on the way. She took Korra's outstretched hand and climbed on.

With everyone on board, Jinora turned back to the group, "It's going to be a steep flight! So make sure you hold on!"

"Oh...," Wu grumbled. Heights were one of his many fears.

"Yip-yip Pepper!"

The bison murmured a low sound, and then slammed her tail into the earth. There were several earth and metal discs thrown their way, and everyone who could did their best to deflect and block the incoming fire.

Suyin watched from behind the barricade, a tearful smile forming on her face. Everything was going wrong, but maybe, this would work out.

She looked up as her earth wall split in two. After jumping to her feet, she saw a metalbender with their arm outstretched. It was Kuvira. The pair of them eyed each other up for a moment.

"Suyin."

"Kuvira."

"I suppose this fight was inevitable," Kuvira said.

Suyin laughed spitefully, "It wasn't. You chose to go down this path. And I'm not going to let you get to my kids or the Avatar."

Kuvira said nothing in reply. She simply smirked. With a quick motion she stomped a slab of earth at Suyin. The Matriarch of Zaofu blocked it with ease, before spin-kicking a line of pillars at Kuvira. It connected, though only just. Kuvira slid backwards and readied her stance again.

In the skies above, Jinora looked up at the opening. "Okay!" she tugged on the reins, and Pepper began speeding upwards vertically.

"WAAAAAAAHGH!" Wu cried out. Mako held onto his arm, while the prince clutched the side of the saddle with his other.

Korra held the president in, while Opal helped Huan cling on. Ikki and Meelo had their sugar glider and lemur tucked away in their wingsuits, and gripped the edge of the saddle near the base.

The wind rushed past, threatening to rip them off and drop them to the ground far below. But Jinora knew they had to be fast. They'd nearly reached the opening, and would be out in a matter of seconds.

There was a flash across the battlefield. Something silver shot past all the Zaofu Guards and straight into the base of the dome. Baatar Sr. felt the air rush above him, and ducked into the gap with the winch. He peered out, and his blood went cold. A metal shard had been fired right into the exposed cable on the dome petal.

"Perfect shot," First Commander Minsheng lowered his mech arm. His prototype suit was equipped with a blade launcher. "I would consider that a successful test," he said to his comrades.

Baatar Sr. frantically pulled on the winch again, but he knew it was useless. The cable was cut further up, and he had no way of reconnecting them. Still, he sprinted over and tried tugging on the frayed cable to keep the lotus petal open.

In the skies, Jinora watched as the outside light suddenly faded. The top of the dome slammed shut. "Woah!" she cried out, sharply steering Pepper to the side. The others on the saddle screamed out as they flung about, still managing to hold on.

"What happened?!" Mako called out. "He looked up and saw the dome was now closed.

"We have to land!" Jinora called back. Discs and projectiles were coming in from all over. Landing meant giving up on their escape route, but they had no choice at this point.

Suyin's face turned to shock as she saw what had happened. She wanted to run over and do something, check if her husband and the others were alright, but Kuvira had her occupied. She yelled while launching out a series of quick jabs at Kuvira. The stones she raised whizzed past, and Kuvira threw another attack back at Suyin. The pair continued trading blows, neither one landing a hit.

Pepper touched down, while the benders in the back continued to block enemy fire. Opal leapt down next to the winch, "Dad! What happened?"

"Oh...," Baatar Sr. looked frantic as he pulled out several tools, "Opal. The cable was cut in two. The winch won't work!" He breathed in deeply, "I can try and patch it up. Maybe it will hold long enough for you to try again."

Opal stared at the exposed cable in the wall. A metal shard protruded out where the it had been.

In the corner of his eye, Huan saw a metal spool on the ground. He looked back at the frayed cable, then took a deep breath, and hopped off the saddle.

"But how long will it take?" Opal asked her father.

"I... don't know. I have some tools here, but nothing to patch up the cables. Maybe one of the metalbenders can help?"

"They're fighting off the soldiers," Opal replied.

Before they could say anything further, a metal cable wrapped around the frayed one inside the wall. Huan reached forwards and clenched his hand, straining and groaning under the pressure.

"Huan?" Baatar Sr. said. "You need to get back on the bison!"

"Dad... a little help?" Huan strained.

Baatar Sr. and Opal watched as the frayed cable was dragged a little bit closer to them. Huan's efforts were starting to reopen the dome. His father joined in, gripping the cord and pulling with everything he had in him.

"Get to the bison!" Huan turned to his sister. "It's okay. I'll stay with Mom and Dad and the twins."

It was cruel. Opal was now the only one in her family to be escaping. "Not you too..."

"Do it!" Huan yelled. He buckled, before digging his feet into the earth and metalbending the cable even closer. Now, a beam of light had appeared on the ceiling once again. He turned back to Opal and smiled, "I'll be fine. Please, get out of here."

Opal couldn't hold back the tears. She could see her older brother's anxiety all over his face. And yet, he was choosing to stay behind for her sake. She shook her head, unable to see properly with the tears welling up. Eventually, Korra reached down from the saddle and helped her up. "I'll come back for you!" Opal called down. "I promise!"

Huan gave a final smile before turning back to the task at hand. Their father too beamed, relieved that at least one of his kids was able to escape. But they weren't out of the woods yet. The pair continued tugging on the cable, holding it steady while the bison started floating in the air.

"Not this again!" Wu whined. He gripped the side of the saddle even tighter this time.

Another rock was thrown Kuvira's way, but she punched through it. Before she could launch another counterattack though, she stopped in her tracks. Somehow, the dome had reopened, and the bison was already flying up to reach it. Her eyes turned vicious, and a snarl escaped her mouth. Suyin saw this and looked back, feeling a joy fill her chest. Now, all she had to do was keep Kuvira stalled. And she had a lot of resentment and anger to tap into for that.

Rounds of projectiles were once again hurled at the bison, though Jinora weaved back and forth away from them. Down below, Minsheng frantically prepared another strike on the cable. By now, the last of the Zaofu Guards had set up defences in front of it, blocking all incoming fire.

"Almost... there...," Huan gritted his teeth, digging deep as the bison speed through the last stretch.

Pepper gave one last push with her tail, and then passed through the gap. On the ground, Huan and Baatar Sr. fell backwards as they let go, panting heavily.

The outside light was blinding at first, though Jinora could see they weren't in the clear yet. Several airships hovered around. Their loading bays already open with canons and metalbenders taking aim.

"They've made it outside! Fire!" First Commander Yasuko ordered her troops.

Green discs and metal spears were launched from all directions. Mako and Korra blasted as many away as they could, while the airbenders swept a sphere around the bison as Pepper charged ahead.

"We really can't catch a break huh?" Korra turned to Mako.

Mako grunted, blocking another earth disc as it shattered into dust. "Aim for the engines!"

Together, the pair fired a searing comet of flame, smashing into several propellers of one airship. It started to drift to the other side, throwing the benders inside off balance.

Opal took to the air and flew into one of the loading bays. The stunned soldiers barely had any time to react as Opal spun and pirouetted in all directions, sending gales and gusts into them. She leapt out, and glided back to Pepper while the soldiers were left reeling.

Although the projectiles hadn't stopped, there was now enough distance between them and the airships. While the last few were swatted away, Jinora kept them speeding ahead, leaving the shining city behind them.

Kuvira was furious. She'd had the Avatar and the president in her grasp, and yet, they had escaped by the skin of their teeth.

The Zaofu Guard were just about apprehended now, with only a handful more hiding behind their defences. But she and Suyin weren't about to end their duel just yet. For Kuvira, it wasn't about winning or losing. They'd clearly won. But she had to prove to herself that she was superior to Suyin. It was as if she wanted to prove and reassure herself that she, not Suyin, had been right all along.

Suyin wasn't about to back down either. She could see the soldiers start to gather around them. Any chance of escape had faded as quickly as the opening outside, but it also wasn't about winning or escaping for Suyin.

After a pause, their fighting resumed. Stones were upheaved and tossed. Flickers of metal shot across. Suyin and Kuvira were both light on their feet, dodging most of the other's attacks, yet threw powerful and grounded strikes that would surely knock down a skilled bender if they hit.

Grunting out loud, Suyin dug deep and lifted a series of boulders, punching each one like a comet. Kuvira pivoted and ducked, launching a line of pillars back. Once her projectiles were used up, Suyin leapt over the pillars and propelled herself from them, striking the ground at Kuvira's feet with a punch. Fissures opened up, forcing Kuvira back. She quickly recovered and got in close, swinging punches and kicks at Suyin. But the Matriarch of Zaofu was also skilled in close quarters combat. She dodged Kuvira's punch, and then scissor kicked her in the shoulder. With a quick uppercut she sent a slab into Kuvira's thigh, toppling her forwards.

"Oof!" Kuvira exhaled as she was hit. She rolled forwards and quickly flung back a cluster of rocks. Suyin deflected them though her forearm was struck. She pulled back, and stomped up a wall that she slid across the ground. Kuvira stood firm and punched through it, collecting the fragments and launching them back with both fists outstretched.

Their duel had led them back to the bridge right before the dome wall. In the corner, Baatar Sr. and Huan watched with worry etched into their faces, before a group of soldiers apprehended them. Baatar Sr. struggled against the soldiers, not because he was being arrested, but because he couldn't bear to look away from his wife.

Suyin noticed her family being arrested. She paused, panting heavily. Across from her, Kuvira did the same, probably wondering if Suyin would surrender. Neither of them said a word. They'd spent the past few months trading words and now the time for talking was over.

But Suyin's fight in her was far from over. She knew it was futile. But she had to fight back.

Suyin leapt into the air and spun with her leg out, kicking up a whirlwind of stone fragments from the earth. Kuvira sidestepped them all, countering with metal bands aimed to snag one of Suyin's limbs. They all missed. Suyin was quicker on her feet than Kuvira, especially after her fight with the Avatar wearing her out. Kuvira then crouched and forced up a massive slab of stone from under Suyin. She was forced to jump as the ground shifted beneath her.

After landing and rolling to the side, Suyin pivoted and punched forwards. A single pillar flew out and smashed just in front of Kuvira as she leapt back. While Kuvira prepared another boulder, Suyin slid forward and caught her off guard. Dizziness swelled in Kuvira's head as Suyin backhanded her. She managed to jump away, though Suyin was hot on her tail. Metal slices peeled off her armour as she tried to force Suyin back, but she was like a shirshu honing in on her prey. Each attack and stone defence Kuvira would raise, Suyin either leapt around or broke through. Once the distance was closed, Suyin finished with a massive rock wave that toppled Kuvira over, throwing her into the side of a building.

It still wasn't enough to knock Kuvira out, but it was clear Suyin had the upper hand.

Kuvira spat to the side. Her usually cold and calm exterior has crumbled away into one of rage. Her blood boiled like a vat of lava. Her breathing grew heavier and deeper, almost like the bellows of a dragon. She couldn't lose to Suyin. Not the Suyin who was a coward hiding inside these domes while the Earth Kingdom suffered. In Kuvira's eyes, Suyin represented everything wrong with the world and its leaders.

But she was far too worn out to put up much of a fight. Still, she readied her stance, keeping her shaking arms out in front, hands balled into fists, and legs digging deep to the ground.

To her surprise, Suyin didn't share her same expression. She was angry, that much was clear, but her eyes were softer. It was like she was disappointed. It hurt far more than any blow she'd landed on Kuvira.

"It didn't have to be like this," Suyin broke the silence. "But you crossed a line. I was willing to listen to you, to help you, but you turned into a worse dictator than Hou-Ting was." She scoffed, "And you've gone to such great lengths to keep power for yourself, even aligning with that same dictator."

"You know nothing!" Kuvira replied.

Suyin shook her head, lamenting everything that was happening. By now, rows and rows of soldiers stood around them in a circle. Suyin readied herself once more.

Kuvira was the first to start attacking again. She punched forward a rock with a quick strike. Suyin blocked, though just as she was about to fire back, a chain caught on her arm.

"Argh!" Suyin gasped as the chain yanked her back onto the ground.

"Suyin!" Baatar Sr. called out.

Suyin struggled, but another chain was quickly clamped around her other arm. They were platinum.

Kuvira looked up, and her eyes turned to pure rage. Second Commander Guan walked proudly with his arms behind his back, with two Dai Li agents either side. His moustache curled upwards as he smiled, "Good. This waste of time is now finished."

"Guan!" Kuvira yelled. "You have no right interfering with my business!"

Guan didn't reply out loud from where he was. He looked at the soldiers all gathered around them. Instead, he walked over to Kuvira, "Grand Commander Kuvira, I believe this fight is pointless. We have won. Suyin has lost. Continuing is a waste of time and energy. We have more pressing matters to attend to, wouldn't you agree?"

Kuvira seethed for a moment longer, though eventually, managed to compose herself. Guan's constant pushing of the boundaries was something that needed working on indeed, but he did have a point. Kuvira had let her anger and bitterness take over when fighting Suyin. "Very well," she replied quietly. She then turned her attention to the soldiers, "Round up all the civilians and have them meet outside City Spire steps."

The Dai Li propped Suyin on her feet. She looked over at Kuvira, their eyes locking for a brief moment.

"And have Suyin kept inside the City Spire for now. With her other two sons in restraints," Kuvira ordered.

At her command, the Dai Li began dragging Suyin away. She didn't even struggle all that much. She only kept her gaze on the dome above, thankful that at least one of her children had made it out.

There was rubble and destruction everywhere. Buildings had been dented in. Tank tread marks over the grass. What had once been a pristine shining jewel in the south, had been left looking like a warzone.

Citizens dressed in greens and silver metals all stood in rows beneath the City Spire steps. The highest ranking generals were all gathered at the top, with Wing, Wei, and now Suyin, all trapped in metal restraints. Suyin could hardly bear to look at her people below, feeling like a failure of a leader who couldn't protect her city.

"Now it is time to pledge your loyalty to me, and the Earth Empire," Kuvira spoke boldly over the crowd. She searched each one of their faces, looking for any sign of disloyalty. Behind her, Earth Empire flags had already been hung from the City Spire.

Kuvira continued, "Anyone who proclaims loyalty to me will be treated fairly and equally as full citizens of the Earth Empire. Those that do not, will be imprisoned, like Suyin Beifong and her sons."

"Bow to your Great Uniter!" Baatar joined in. Behind him, Zhu Li and the other First Commanders all dipped their heads.

There were a few hushed murmurs through the crowd. Most simply looked up with fear and shock. Kuvira had been one of their own, and now, was threatening and intimidating them into doing what she wanted. But their leader Suyin was also up there. No one wanted to end up like her.

The people beneath Kuvira all started dropping to their knees, dipping their heads so low they nearly touched the ground. All bowed except for two. Baatar Sr. stared back, trying to make eye contact with his wife. Huan stood next to him, shaking, but refusing to yield. All eyes were glued to them, and to Baatar as he marched down to his family.

"Bow! Bow to Kuvira!"

His father looked away.

"What's wrong with you?! Kuvira has saved the Earth Kingdom! She deserves your respect and admiration!"

Baatar Sr. looked back to his son. His face was a mix of sadness and anger, all composed into a deep disappointment. "Son," he said, "you used to be my pride and joy. But now I am so disappointed in you for doing this. What went wrong?"

Baatar growled. "How dare you!" he said. "Lock them up as well!"

Several soldiers whisked them away, while the other citizens remained prostrate. They could hear what was happening, but none dared to look up.

"Now, rise, citizens of the Earth Empire!" As Kuvira commanded, the remaining Zaofu citizens all stood to their feet. "And with Zaofu now a part of the Earth Empire, I can declare that the Earth Empire is fully united!"

Soldiers cheered and clapped at the announcement. A faint chanting started, and then grew into a loud bout of praise across the soldiers. "All hail the Great Uniter!"

Kuvira stood at the top of the stairs, absorbing all their admiration. Baatar had made his way back, and locked hands with Kuvira. She smiled at him. They had finally done it. The mission that many doubted they could achieve. All the roadblocks, hurdles, and risks they had taken, had all led to this moment. And Kuvira couldn't have been more elated.

It had been a few hours since the group had fled Zaofu. Pepper rested behind some shrubs, while the others all tried to lay low in the trees.

Jinora sat in a meditative position. Eventually, she opened her eyes, "They're on their way," she said to the group.

After another hour or so, Korra watched as a black and grey airship hovered over skies. It flew low to the ground, and as it got closer, she could make out the RCPD logo on the side. Lin Beifong's ship.

Another shape appeared a short distance in the other direction. Jinora smiled as the bison made its way closer, hovering low to the ground.

Lefty gave a short rumbling sound as he landed. Kai glided down from the bison's head, feeling relief as he saw Jinora in the tree line. He ran over and held her close. "I'm sorry I wasn't there sooner," he said. "Maybe if Lefty and I had been there we could've helped more people out –"

"It's alright Kai," Jinora replied, her words muffled as she buried her face into his chest. "There's not much we could've done."

As the airship landed, Opal teared up at seeing her aunt Lin step out. Lin wasn't one to show a lot of emotion, but even she couldn't hold back a stifled sob as she hugged her niece.

"I'm sorry," Opal said, choking up on her words, "I'm sorry I couldn't save them. Any of them... my whole family..." Opal couldn't finish another sentence, her swirling emotions too much to bear.

Lin squeezed her tighter. "It's not your fault," she reassured. "We'll get my sister and your family out. I promise."

Even the animal companions seemed to pick up on the sombre and sorrowful atmosphere. Jiao scurried out of the airship and nuzzled Ikki. She gave a quick snarl at Ikki's sugar glider, before pressing her face against Ikki's. "Kiki and I are glad to see you," Ikki said.

The sugar glider chittered at hearing her new name, and snuggled against Ikki's neck.

Eventually, Lin pulled away, "We should get going," she said. She turned to Raiko and Wu, "You two are still on Kuvira's 'Most Wanted' list."

"I spoke with General Iroh before the lines were cut," Raiko said. "Kuvira had troops positioned right at the border when the attack went down."

"Then we'll go around. It will take longer, but when we're near the blockade we'll go over the ocean and end up back in Republic City."

Raiko nodded. Lin started leading the others into the airship. Jinora and Kai kissed briefly, before mounting their bison and taking to the air.

As the airship engines whirred, Korra continued staring out at the setting sun. Just a few kilometres away was Zaofu. A city she couldn't save.

"C'mon Korra," Mako said. He placed a hand on her shoulder. He didn't exactly know what else to say. He wanted to reassure her, tell her it wasn't her fault. But even if he did, would she believe it?"

Korra simply nodded. She gave a faint smile before joining the others on the airship.

Candles flickered all along a set of stone steps, creating a series of shapes dancing on the walls. The path wasn't far below the manor, but secret enough to keep prying eyes away.

As she led the way, Daiyu twirled her daggers around, occasionally clanging against the stone walls. She'd spent time in the United Republic regrouping after their failed plans in the Fire Nation, though, like her two brothers, she'd been summoned back by the Grand Lotus.

"Please stop that, Daiyu," Sota complained. He shifted his glasses. "I'm trying to think about what I'll say to Father." The three of them weren't biologically related, but had all been adopted as children by the Grand Lotus.

Daiyu stopped. "So am I."

Yatsu laughed, "I've already prepared a solemn yet hopeful tale of my efforts in Ba Sing Se. A beautiful yet mournful song, that speaks of the futility of human existence –"

"We don't care," the other two said in unison.

Yatsu huffed to himself. The truth was, he was just as on edge as the other two. The Grand Lotus had charged them each with leading different missions as their ultimate plan came together. And none of them had been successful.

The door was right in front of Daiyu. She breathed in, and opened it.

Inside, the room was lit with many candles on all sides. Natural light flowed in from an opening near the roof. There was a stand where incense burnt, giving the room a calming aroma as the trio entered. The Grand Lotus was in a meditative position, with his back turned.

"Grand Lotus," Daiyu kneeled. The other two followed suit.

The Grand Lotus remained as he was, "You can call me 'Father'. I've been over this." He paused, "Unless, there is a reason you may want to be so formal?"

Daiyu shifted uncomfortably, "You summoned for us. I assumed it was to do with our... recent missions."

"I did summon for you," the Grand Lotus answered. "Which is not normal for one in our organisation to do. We have always been a free brother, sister, and siblinghood, allowing members to act in the world as they please so long as they uphold our principles. But the times have changed." His head turned back ever so slightly, his long grey hair in a top knot bobbing lightly, "But if you are using a formal address for me, then I can only assume you wish to curry favour? Why is this?"

He was as perceptive as ever. The truth was a number of their group called the man 'Grand Lotus', though he'd never held his three children to that standard. Daiyu cleared her throat, "I want to apologise. For my failures. We... all do."

"Is that right?"

The other two nodded in unison, giving a soft grunt in reply.

"Tell me, what are these 'failures' you are concerned about?"

Daiyu was the first to speak, "I led a group with myself, Hui-Ying, Yingtai, and Ren. We were meant to destabilise the Fire Nation monarchy. Historically, they have committed heinous acts against the common people. They embody everything that our clan abhor. But... we were discovered. We were forced to flee, and lay low in the United Republic."

"I see. And you, Sota? Were you with Daiyu as well?"

"Yes," Sota cleared his throat. "I was."

"Working on the device, no doubt?"

Sota nodded, "Yes. We were working out of a hydro plant. Had it good for a while. It gave us a lot of energy to work with, but I still couldn't get the machine to function. It's... it's like a step above anything I've ever worked with. Even being alongside Mr Sato's apprentice who worked with him during the Equalist days couldn't prepare me for the complexity of this machine."

The Grand Lotus breathed in slowly, and exhaled. "That device is important."

"I... am aware," Sota replied. He regretted being so bold in answering back.

Thankfully, the Grand Lotus moved on. He continued sitting with his back to them, as if he were conversing and meditating at the same time. "And Yatsu, what is it you failed to achieve?"

For all his talk of having a 'grand poem' for any occasion, Yatsu couldn't say anything. He froze, taking his time to rethink his words. "Grand Lotus," he eventually said, "it was my duty and honour to help the common people retake their nation in the Earth Kingdom. Ju and I were deemed worthy for the task. But alas, just as the grass grows and dies in a single breath, our efforts did not yield fruit."

"Indeed. I have heard about the Great Uniter and her empire."

Yatsu gulped, "Yes, she is the antithesis of all we stand for. From humble beginnings she came, but sucked into the ways of the elite she became. Qiang the Conqueror could not hold on to Ba Sing Se even with our help, and then Kuvira managed to claim the entire nation as her own."

"Hmm," the Grand Lotus pondered. He continued his slow breathing, all while the three of them waiting nervously. "You three have been honest and forthcoming. That is virtuous. But you needn't worry about failing. What you consider failures, are actually events predestined by fate, so that we may set the stage for our act to follow."

Daiyu and Sota had forgotten how much their father was just like Yatsu. Still, it seemed as though their worries had been for naught. "What do you mean, father?" Daiyu asked.

Finally, the Grand Lotus turned to face them. His eyes were a deep purple, otherworldly, as if the spirits had touched them. "Your brother Zaheer gave the world a message, and the world did not listen."

"Zaheer failed," Daiyu said quietly.

The Grand Lotus frowned, "Do not dishonour your family. Zaheer and his comrades paid dearly. I still regret not being able to help them while they were stuck in prison. And alas, since then we have not had the number to be able to free your brother. But we will. Soon, in fact."

"We're going to Republic City?" Sota asked.

"You will be," the Grand Lotus answered. " I still have some loose ends to tie up here in the Fire Nation. But as I said, the world has not listened to our message. And so, we have reached a crescendo in our path forwards. The Great Calamity is on the horizon. Everything that we have tried to do was to prepare humanity for this. And I believe that the Earth Empire will be the means by which this tragedy will come to pass."

The three of them kneeling exchanged glances. The Great Calamity was always some far off event, a vision which Xai Bau and the Grand Lotus had once shared, the reason their very organisation was founded. But according to the Grand Lotus, things were already in motion. This was their last chance to stop it.

"And Raava now knows of this too. She has seen what I have seen."

"But... how is that possible?" Daiyu spoke up.

"Visions from the Spirit World do not exist in our plane of time and space. Recently my memory of the vision changed. I saw the current incarnation, Korra, watching the Great Calamity unfold on Republic City. She is now aware, whether she understands her vision or not I do not know. But it means we must act with greater haste than before."

The Avatar was a servant of Raava. A human prison, the Grand Lotus had taught them. Only with the great spirits of order and chaos free to battle, unshackled by the physical flesh of a human host, would the world truly be free.

"Carry out your work in Republic City. We need to announce to the world that we are here to set them free," the Grand Lotus stood up. "And, we need some other pieces to the puzzle. Go forth, and I will contact you my children with further instruction."

Daiyu, Yatsu, and Sota all rose as well, bowing their heads to their father. It had been a tough few months, watching their failures grow by the day, but now it was time to continue their work. The world needed to be set free from the oppressive rulers and figureheads that humanity continued to idolise. And Daiyu was more than ready to see that happen.

Chapter Text

It took Korra and the others a week to make it back to the United Republic. The journey had been spent drifting through the wilderness as much as possible, lest they encountered any Earth Empire soldiers. Korra watched atop Kai's bison, the two of them on scouting duty while the other bison and the airship trailed behind.

Below them, the border came into view. Korra only knew it was because the ground was torn up from tank treads and mecha suit footprints. General Iroh had stood against the Earth Empire here, neither side instigating a battle, thank the spirits. But the defeat at Zaofu still clouded any small victories found here. It surprised Korra just how far the tracks extended. If Kuvira had this many troops to spare at the border, and her entire force she brought to Zaofu, then any chance of matching their army seemed bleak.

It was only after another hour of flying, as they reached Republic City, that Korra started to perk up. Butterflies fluttered in her stomach as the nervousness and anxiousness about being back manifested. The last time she got this close to the city she'd seen that ghost haunting her. It had seemed she were free of the apparition, that was, until her battle with Kuvira. Korra could still see the blank-eyed glare of the ghost in her mind. She shuddered, quickly expelling the thought. She didn't dare look down into the waves of Yue bay in case the ghost was back. But it was impossible to ignore the giant statue of Avatar Aang, watching over the city like a real protector. Korra sunk back into the saddle.

The airship landed on Air Temple Island, leaving a small patch clear for the two bison to descend. Jinora's bison Pepper was at the front, and the three airbender kids quickly leapt off and ran over to their parents. The relief on their faces at seeing their kids back was clear as they hugged them. The president hurried off the airship as the gangplank extended, and a team of servants and personnel fluffed about, checking if he was alright. He waved them away, straightening out his jacket.

Prince Wu also had a contingent of servants coddling him. Mako was sure Grand Secretariat Gun would put his back out if he kept bowing as low as he was, profusely apologising for not being there. Surprisingly, Wu didn't scold him. The last to exit the airship were Opal and Lin Beifong. The pair were far more solemn than the others. Lin managed a half-smile at Tenzin as she disembarked, with the airbending master giving a sympathetic smile in return.

After the others had all exchanged greetings and hugs, all eyes turned to Korra. To them, she looked rather different. Korra had to remember that she had cut her hair shorter and was wearing green clothes. Trust Tenzin to be a stickler for tradition; Korra wasn't surprised he was still sporting his traditional monk robes rather than the new wingsuits many airbenders wore. Tenzin smiled, a genuine look of warmth and relief spreading across his face. He walked over, the pair bowed out of respect, before Tenzin and Korra wrapped their arms around each other tightly.

"Well, aren't you a sight for sore eyes!" Bumi chuckled. Unlike his brother, Bumi had adopted a wingsuit, though his middle-aged body looked rather crammed into it. He also had a sash around his form which hid it somewhat. Korra smiled as they gave each other a hug, Bumi patting her back as he laughed.

As the laughter and smiles died down, Korra glanced past the others gathered before her and froze. Her parents. They must have sailed here from the south as soon as they heard that she had been found. Korra choked up. She wanted to speak, but something powerful caught her tongue. Instead, her parents made the first move. Her mother rushed over and held Korra, stroking her daughter's hair, smiling with tear-filled eyes. She pulled her in close. She felt the strong embrace of her father as he wrapped himself around the two of them. Even Tonraq sniffled as his eyes grew watery.

Another pang filled Korra's chest as the three of them pulled away, revealing another loved one she'd left behind. Her best friend. Korra tearfully smiled. Naga was waiting a short distance away, but unlike every other time she'd see her, the polar bear dog didn't come bounding over. She let out a sorrowful whine, looking at Korra with uneasiness.

Korra felt something crush her spirit in that moment. She'd left Naga behind. Her animal guide, one of the closest and most sacred bonds an Avatar could have. But she didn't sense that Naga was angry or hurt by her, no. Instead, it felt like Naga had somehow absorbed all of Korra's sorrow, frustration, and despair, and was reflecting it back. Sharing in her grief.

"C'mere girl," Korra whispered.

Naga plodded over, and her companion instincts took over and she nuzzled her partner affectionately. She continued to whine a sorrowful tone.

Korra couldn't help but weep into Naga's fur, "I'll never leave you behind again. I've missed you."

All around, the group looked on, touched by the scene unfolding. Their Avatar had returned. Korra was safe and sound. Even with the loss at Zaofu, somehow seeing the Avatar back felt like just maybe there was a way out of this mess.

Opal too managed to smile, but she couldn't hold it for long. As happy as she was for Korra, it all reminded her of her own family still trapped in Zaofu. Kuvira was well and truly in a world of her own. Who knew what she could be capable of.

"Mr President," Opal turned to Raiko. "What should we do about Zaofu now that we're back?"

It seemed a few others had also heard Opal's question. All faces turned to Raiko. "I promise you, Opal, we will not let what happened stand. We will get your family back as soon as we can," he reassured. His attendants nodded along sympathetically. "She has made herself an enemy of the United Republic of Nations, and, of the world. Even if Hou-Ting is the one using her, it doesn't excuse her actions."

Tenzin shared a confused glance, "Hou-Ting? You mean the former Earth Queen?" Bumi and many of the others gathered also looked perplexed, while Grand Secretariat Gun shuddered upon hearing the name.

Raiko breathed in deeply, "We should hold a briefing. Is City Hall available now?"

"Of course sir, but... do you need to rest first?" an attendant asked.

"No, I can rest once everyone is up to date. I suggest the prince head back though."

Fire Lord Izumi responded, "We have refreshments and a medical team there waiting for Prince Wu."

"I can be there too," Korra chimed in.

"Perhaps you should get some rest too," Raiko replied. It came off as genuine, but somehow, Korra couldn't help it was an underhanded comment. She did fail to beat Kuvira after all.

Korra stuttered. She didn't know what to say next.

"Stay with us sweetie," Tonraq reassured. "That business can wait. We're just glad to have you back."

Raiko straightened his jacket again, "I'll see the rest of you in an hour." He started making his way towards the docks, with several boats parked and waiting to take the new arrivals back to shore.

Korra watched the others depart, letting her gaze hover over the boat until it left port.

Kuvira had forgotten what Zaofu sunrises were like, being away all this time. She watched the city from the steps of City Spire, seeing the silver skyscrapers catching the morning rays in their reflection. It looked as though the metal city were covered in dancing flames.

"It's nice, isn't it?" Kuvira leant on Baatar's shoulder.

Baatar grunted, "Once you've seen one sunset you've seen them all."

"Well, today is a special day anyway," Kuvira pulled away. She turned to her fiancé, both of them now facing each other and staring into each other's eyes. "We've finally done it. Everything we set out to achieve."

Even Baatar couldn't help but grin fondly at this. He leant in and kissed Kuvira, their touch sending warmth through his body. He smiled, pulling away, "Well, we haven't done everything yet."

Kuvira flicked her eyebrows, smirking as she looked away. He was right, of course. "Yes. We can start planning our wedding." Kuvira was the one to initiate a kiss again, this one far less playful and more deeper and longing in nature. They had both been waiting so long. All the trials, mishaps, risks they took. It was all worth it.

"Ah, young love. What a time to celebrate!"

The pair quickly pulled away. Kuvira screwed her face up as she instantly recognised the voice. "Governor," she said, not even turning to look at Hou-Ting. Baatar looked furious at the former Earth Queen's presence. Kuvira exhaled, "You must have finished all your duties in Ba Sing Se to be here?"

Hou-Ting bowed graciously, her fingernails catching the light much like the buildings, "There is always more work to be done of course, but I only thought it fitting to congratulate you both in person for your victory in Zaofu."

"It wasn't necessary. At all," Baatar replied coldly.

Hou-Ting didn't take too kindly to his words. She narrowed her eyes. "Well, this is a big occasion is it not? The Earth Kingdom has nearly been united. I think if there were ever a time to visit in person it would be now."

Baatar and Kuvira glanced to each other. What was Hou-Ting getting at?

Before they could question Hou-Ting further, a soldier arrived, "Baatar sir. The train is ready to depart."

"Tch...," Baatar let out a long groan. Why did his time with Kuvira always have to be interrupted by meddling governors and soldiers asking for things? Still, his duties were important. He kissed Kuvira on the cheek, "I best be off. I'll make sure Varrick shares everything I need him to before we get to the camp." He didn't bother saying goodbye to Hou-Ting; all the governor got as a cold stare before Baatar followed the soldier away. He looked back to Kuvira fondly, smiling as he turned back.

Kuvira was already boring a hole into Hou-Ting with her stare. It was one thing to interrupt a tender moment, but another when that interruption came from a slithering viper rat that couldn't mind her own business. Kuvira kept up her gaze as she spoke, "What did you mean by nearly united?"

"Well," Hou-Ting shifted, "I only mean it as plainly as I said it. After the victory in Zaofu, the Earth Kingdom is nearly united. It is still an impressive victory of course, Great Uniter."

"Nearly, would imply that we have not united all the states into the Earth Empire. Which states are yet to join? If you are referring to Kyoshi Island then there is no need. They don't actually qualify as a sovereign state after the borders have been redrawn."

Hou-Ting waved her hand away, dismissing the idea. "Kyoshi Island is irrelevant to Earth Kingdom politics. No, what I mean is of course, to correct a great injustice that has haunted the Earth Kingdom long during my reign." She looked Kuvira dead in the eye, like a predator waiting to strike, "The United Republic of Nations is rightfully our land."

Kuvira continued staring at Hou-Ting. So, this was what she was after. The United Republic. Many knew of the border tensions between the two nations while Hou-Ting was the Earth Queen. Kuvira assumed this would come up at some point while working with her. She let out a sharp exhale, "It isn't on the table right now. The United Republic's roots go back nearly a century. It has been its own sovereign nation for quite some time."

"But can you not see how this is an act of injustice that must be corrected? For years, the Earth Kingdom has been made to look weak and incompetent for not keeping our lands intact." Hou-Ting motioned towards the entrance to City Spire, "May I sit for a moment and share some of my proposal?"

One way to satiate a viper rat was to feed it a morsal every now and again, lest it lash out against its handler. Kuvira exhaled, "Fine." She led them both inside.

The timing was not at all ideal; being escorted in platinum shackles on the way to the door was none other than Suyin Beifong. She looked up first at Kuvira, and then noticed the former Earth Queen standing behind. "Governor, I hear it is?" Suyin smirked. "How the mighty have fallen."

At the mention of her name, Hou-Ting snaked around the side to face the matriarch of Zaofu, "Suyin. What a pity I wasn't able to visit your beautiful city until now."

"You visiting is a tarnish on the shining metal clan," Suyin spat her words. "But one that can be removed easily enough."

"In shackles?" Hou-Ting laughed.

Kuvira wasn't buying into their bickering. "Suyin. You'll be joining your family is a secure prison. Some time in there might help you realign your priorities."

Suyin narrowed her eyes. "I'm sure it will, Great Uniter," she replied coldly.

The soldiers tugged Suyin along. Kuvira didn't want to watch anymore. What was done was done. Now, it was time to look to the future.

Hou-Ting found herself a seat on an embroidered couch in the foyer. She was already beckoning a staff member over to order some tea. Kuvira sat on the opposite side of the arrangement, far less comfortably than her counterpart.

"So," Kuvira began, "what did you have in mind?"

Hou-Ting kept her hands on her lap, taking the time to articulate her next words, "The United Republic of Nations. It remains a sign of the Earth Empire's incompetence. I believe that reclaiming the territory under our rightful jurisdiction would benefit our image, as well as correct the wrongdoings of the past." Kuvira said nothing at first, prompting Hou-Ting to continue, "How can we proclaim to be a united nation when our own annexed territories remain our neighbours? Surely you must see what I have long seen?"

"I understand your point, Governor Hou-Ting, but the United Republic simply isn't a priority," Kuvira answered. "We have much bigger concerns, such as strengthening our nation in case of counterattack. I doubt the other world leaders will accept my empire. They're probably plotting away for a way to oust me."

"All the more reason to go on the offensive and prove your strength."

"No," Kuvira replied. "We should be fortifying our border, not contesting it. Peace will come in time, but only when we can keep what is rightfully ours."

Hou-Ting exhaled, "Borders can be redrawn. They are simply fickle lines which countless leaders have fought over. They can be corrected in the interest of fairness."

"I believe the dust should settle first before we try anything like contest the border."

Another exhale left Hou-Ting's mouth. She wasn't going to give up. "Kuvira, I don't believe that you fully appreciate the magnitude of this injustice. You were not born into a time when these territories were still occupied by the Fire Nation. Many in our nation were. For them, this would mean a great deal."

Kuvira glared at Hou-Ting, "I do not need to be patronised, Governor; I know my nation's history.

Hou-Ting softened her composure, dipping her head in a bow, "I apologise, I meant no disrespect. I only intended to address this point."

"It's been duly noted."

"I only say this because I believe pursuing it would help garner support for your rule of course. The older generations like myself who still feel the righteous indignation at the former Avatar and Fire Lord to allow this to happen would be forever grateful for your efforts."

Kuvira glanced to the side of the room. Hou-Ting had a point. She knew deep down that not everyone in the Earth Empire were on board with their new nation. That's why they had the rehabilitation camps in the first place. But would taking back the United Republic change this? "And what would I do?" she asked. "March my forces into Republic City? I cannot commit to an all-out war with the United Republic of Nations, and the rest of the world for that matter. Waiting and bolstering our defences is the most logical thing to do."

"Oh, I agree," Hou-Ting nodded. "A war would not be advisable. But, should the opportunity present itself, I believe a more tactful approach would be worth considering."

Somehow, Kuvira felt that she were being persuaded into something she didn't actually believe in. Truth be told, the United Republic had never really been on her or Baatar's agenda.

"And of course," Hou-Ting continued, "I would be happy to offer my services as an experienced diplomat. All for the furthering the Earth Empire."

And there it was. Kuvira had dangled a morsal in front of her, and now the viper rat was trying to snatch the whole carcass from her hands.

Kuvira stood to her feet, "It isn't a priority right now. I'm sure Ba Sing Se will need you. The next train back shouldn't be far away."

Hou-Ting remained seated, but shifted slowly into a more upright position. "Oh, I was actually hoping to stay in Zaofu for some time. Occasionally, it pays for a governor to step outside their jurisdiction to make contact with other cities and states. There are plenty of new investors now in Zaofu who may be interested in setting up in Ba Sing Se."

To Kuvira, it seemed stepping outside her jurisdiction was all Hou-Ting ever did. Kuvira kept her eyes narrowed, but gave a slight courteous nod before turning and marching out.

Varrick had found himself in the most disturbing of dreams. His cookie jar had been completely emptied. The hot towels in the bathroom were all missing. There was no one there to clean the waxy build-up between his toes, or scrub the callouses off his feet. His mind spiralled into oblivion, a swirling mess of uncertainty and despair...

"Zhu Li!" Varrick burst his eyes open. Sweat dripped off his forehead and onto a cold, metal floor beneath. It took a moment to remember what had happened. Where he was. "She's... really gone."

Bolin stirred in the corner. It was only the two of them in the cell.

"Up and at 'em Varrick!" Baatar called out, marching into view on the other side of the bars. Two soldiers accompanied him, standing tall and strong as if to intimidate the prisoners.

With this much noise, Bolin finally rose from his slumber. He blinked a couple times, recognising Baatar through the bars. "Where... where are my teammates!" he managed to croak.

"They're already at the southern Omashu rehabilitation camp. But you'll be going to yours soon enough. I suggest you get your rest. As for you," he glared at Varrick, "Kuvira wants the spirit-vine project up and running by the time we arrive. I'm here to supervise and make sure that happens."

"Well, normally I start my day with Zhu Li bringing me a cup of tea," Varrick answered.

Baatar furrowed his brows, "You'll get your tea once you start working. Now, come along." At his instruction, the soldiers opened the door to the cell.

"Well... actually...," Varrick mumbled, "I'm only really productive for fifteen minutes a day. Usually in the afternoon, around four –"

"You start now."

Before Varrick could stall any further, a soldier gut-punched him into the wall. Varrick coughed and straightened himself. He knew the next blow would be much more painful. "I... I still need an assistant. I mean, without Zhu Li I'm helpless!"

"Ugh...," Baatar groaned. They were wasting time. "You'll have one of the guards. Now, do you want to keep testing my patience? Or are you going to come along?"

"You sure you want to?" He glanced between the two soldiers, "Last time I worked on this stuff, it blew open a whole in the train cart! Wouldn't want to be around those spirit vines again, that's for sure! Unless you don't mind losing your hands! That energy could melt through anything. I wouldn't want to assist me if I were you!" He looked towards Bolin, "On the other hand, Bolin is quite used to that kind of danger, being a friend of the Avatar and all. He'd make a perfect assistant!"

The soldier looked rather disturbed at the threat of losing his hands. Bolin did too, "Varrick!" the lavabender called out, "Why would you agree to help them! And I like my hands too thank you!"

"Enough!" Baatar said. "Fine. Bring Bolin. Whatever gets this show on the road faster. This way."

After a short walk, Baatar led the group into another train cart at the back. "We built you another lab after the first was wrecked. I want you to explain everything you've been working on."

Bolin had seldom visited the lab while travelling around the Earth Kingdom, and certainly not in more recent times when the spirit vine project had taken off. The walls were lined with capsules, sealing away withering vines that seemed to crumple from the confinement. "Woah...," Bolin stammered.

"It's impressive, isn't it?" Baatar smiled proudly, seeming to forget he was talking with prisoners of the Earth Empire.

"That's... well... I guess it's sort of impressive, in like a 'yeah we just cut up some spirit into pieces and stored its body in glass jars' kinda way. Yeah."

Baatar frowned at Bolin's comments, "I wouldn't expect someone as simple-minded as you to understand the implications of this. Now," he began walking over to the work desk, "We managed to recover your old notes, though they are a little... illegible."

Varrick laughed, "Well, a massive explosion would do that to them wouldn't it?"

"I wasn't talking about the scorch marks," Baatar said. He turned to a page in one of the folders, "It seemed like there were some carefully transcribed notes here, though scribbles have been graffitied over top."

"Graffitied?" Varrick replied. He snatched the folder to see what Baatar was talking about, "These are just my notes over top of... Zhu Li's."

"Notes? I'd hardly call them that," Baatar scoffed. "Your wild ramblings have completely smothered anything of substance that your former assistant recorded. All the way through it's just you writing your own name and Zhu Li's. This is why I want you to help me understand your work."

Varrick furrowed his brows, "What are you talking about?"

Baatar found his own frustration building up, "On the page here! It says, 'A sample weighing approximately two Zhu Li's.'"

"That's a unit of measurement! Same with 'Varricks'.'

"Ugh!" Baatar rubbed his face. "Enough of this garbage. Start showing me everything I need to know. And no 'Varricks' or 'Zhu Lis' please; we have proper scientific annotation for a reason."

"Where's the fun in that," Varrick mumbled. He sighed deeply, walking over to the machine in the middle of the room. "Zhu Li didn't have a problem with it."

"Zhu Li isn't here anymore, so perhaps she did."

Varrick paused. He couldn't think of a witty reply as he usually would. Somehow, the mention of Zhu Li leaving him stung more than he cared to admit. He folded his arms, "Well, I still can't work on this technology. You hired me to create a renewable energy source to power our new machines. I can't just build superweapons for crazy dictators!"

Baatar was obviously agitated that Varrick would describe his fiancé as a 'crazed dictator'. He grunted, "It ''isn't'' the project that you signed up for. It's better. We surveyed the wreckage from your 'test'. Did you know that the back of the carriage was flung over eight hundred metres away? It cut clean through the side of a rock formation before impaling the earth." Baatar grinned, "No metal bender on the planet could throw a hunk of metal that far. Think about what kind of advantage that would give us? It's exactly the edge we need when the world leaders start coming to try and march all over our nation."

"And why should you get that kind of weapon huh?" Varrick asked. "What makes the 'Earth Empire' so special that they need it and the United Republic don't? I'm telling you, all this will do is make the United Republic develop their own weapon to counter yours."

Baatar narrowed his eyes, "Then we better be the first to create a weapon. Before anyone else can. Now, let's stop wasting time and get started. Or do the guards need to give you a 'helping hand'?"

At his command, the two soldiers shuffled forwards, giving off a menacing presence behind the two prisoners. Varrick gulped, and then sighed. "Okay, well, this here is what I designed to harness spiritual energy from the vines," Varrick pointed to the machine in front of him. "Do you want me to go over the theory behind spiritual energy?"

"Go on."

Bolin sat quietly in the corner while the two of them poured over the machine and the notes. Despite the occasional bickering and arguing over the formatting of the notes, it seemed strange that they were both becoming more and more engrossed with their work. Science and discovery could do that with like-minded people, Bolin figured. He didn't understand much of it at all, especially the theory Varrick rattled off about discovering 'spiritual energy' and how to harness it. Time seemed to slow as they continued.

After a while, Varrick had started taking apart compartments and rewiring the electricals. He turned back to Bolin, "Hey kid, hand me the thing."

Bolin snapped back into reality, "The what?"

"The thing!" Varrick repeated. He grumbled angrily, soon after standing up to grab a pair of pliers from the desk, "Zhu Li always knew what 'thing' I needed."

"Okay, I'm not Zhu Li, so pretend that I have no idea what's going on," Bolin replied. "And secondly, why are you even helping them! I don't want to build a superweapon! Or lose my hands!"

"Quiet! You're here to help, not talk," Baatar said to Bolin. "And you," he knelt next to Varrick as he worked, "I want you to talk me through what you're doing. Everything."

Varrick didn't appreciate being hovered over. He nudged Baatar away, "Y'know, every genius needs a little space to work. Is that too much to ask for?" Baatar grunted and stood a few feet back. "As I was saying before, the problem with spiritual energy is that no one really knew if it existed. I mean, look at the floaty weird-looking spirits we see in Republic City? Are they even alive? In the same way other animals are? I don't know that's for sure."

"But the vines are unique? Isn't that what you've said?"

"You're learning already Baatar," Varrick said. Baatar didn't look too pleased at being patronized, so he quickly continued, "The vines give off a... force, or presence. It measures on our radiation detectors, but it isn't radiation itself. It's almost like a life force. It took a lot of experimentation, but I found that with the right amount tinkering, this energy can be harnessed and converted into electrical energy. And doesn't give off emissions like our coal does. Ain't that neat!"

Bolin piped up, "Clean energy! That sounds great! Why don't we do that instead?"

"Stop talking," Baatar interrupted. "Varrick knows as much as I that once a discovery has been made, it is our duty as scientists to pursue that. Wherever it leads."

"How would you know?" Varrick chuckled, "You couldn't discover a wolfbat if it was making a nest in your butt!"

Bolin snickered, "Oooh..."

Baatar grunted, and folded his arms. "You're immature," he frowned. "And wrong; wolfbats don't build nests."

Varrick frowned, "Well, you got me there 'Dr Science'." He sighed, and took to his feet, "You'll never know how it feels to give birth to genius, and have it ripped away by fools! And be betrayed by the one closest to you! Zhu Li..." he mumbled.

"Are you done with your ramblings?" Baatar's patience had worn thin. "Or do the guards need to step in?"

"Woah, okay, okay...," Varrick held his hands up. He grinned, flicking the pliers around in his hands. His attention turned to the capsule holder on the machine.

As he continued working, Baatar caught Bolin grimacing. "You weren't with us in the early days, were you Bolin?" The lavabender looked up as Baatar addressed him, "If you'd seen what we endured... well, you wouldn't be so quick to judge."

Bolin folded his arms, "I did see enough, you know. And nothing I saw meant that making this superweapon okay!"

Baatar ignored Bolin's comment, speaking into the air as much as he was Bolin, "The monarchy only really had a strong presence in the north. And yet chaos and attacks started happening everywhere, even in the southern states, though far less severe than in Ba Sing Se," Baatar continued. "Before the clans united under Qiang, there were plenty of skirmishes and battles all over the continent. Even state leaders picked up their old grudges and border disputes were happening all the time. If we hadn't had united the Earth Empire like we had, then that would have continued. We lost a lot of people," Baatar said solemnly. "With this weapon, we won't ever have to be that powerless again."

Bolin didn't reply. He doubted Baatar would have listened anyway.

"But, you'll be learning all this soon enough in the rehabilitation camp. Perhaps some time there will help you rethink your values."

"Oh yeah? Well, do the Dai Li have a role in that? Y'know, the guys with the pointy hats who brainwash people into thinking what they want?" Bolin replied.

Baatar glared back, "No. They do not. And there is no brainwashing going on the Earth Empire." He cleared his throat, "So, Varrick, what are you working on now."

Varrick had been tinkering away in the background, and Baatar had missed some of what he was doing. The inventor grinned while replying, "Well, part of the process is to figure out how much electricity to use on the vines. Too little and it doesn't generate energy. Too much, and... well, we explode the cabin again. So today, I'm going to try something a little different."

"Good."

As Varrick continued to work, Bolin saw him wink when Baatar's back was turned. He screwed his face up, not knowing what on earth Varrick was planning.

The table before Korra had quite the spread of delicious dishes and treats. It was only late afternoon, but Pema had insisted on preparing food for the weary travellers returning. Korra and her parents sat in a room to themselves, while Tenzin's family were next door.

Though while the food was amazing, the atmosphere was rather tense. Korra could feel her parents were uneasy. Of course, they were ecstatic to have their daughter back safe and sound. And it wasn't her looking different either; while her hair was shorter, she had changed back into her Water Tribe outfit with the blue tank top, long navy sleeves, and fur draped around her baggy pants. No, it was something else. Korra could see it. The elaborate spread of food. Her parents asking if she were okay or if she needed anything every few seconds. The silence that engulfed the room as they watched her eat, checking if everything was good enough.

"Are you still hungry? Pema and I made a lot of food. There's more if you'd like?" Senna smiled.

Korra felt something sink in her stomach. She shook her head softly, taking another spoonful of soup. She decided to say something. "Mom, Dad. It's... okay."

Her parents glanced between each other. "What do you mean sweetie?" Tonraq asked.

A deep sigh left Korra's lips as she shifted, "I'm okay. Everything is okay." Her parents still didn't quite get what she was referring to. "You've both been constantly checking in with me, asking me if I'm okay or need anything more."

Senna looked concerned, "We... we just want to make sure everything is better."

"Mom... it isn't your fault that I left. Nor yours Dad. You both don't have to keep trying so hard."

Tonraq spoke up, "We don't think that at all –"

"It's okay," Korra replied. Truth be told it wasn't okay. Korra still felt guilt over how she'd up and left and never been honest with her worrying parents. It was only hitting her now, after seeing how her parents were acting, realising just how much it had affected them. "I shouldn't have lied about where I was. I... I had a lot going through my head, and I needed to be alone."

"We understand Korra," Senna answered for both of them. "And we're not mad. We're just... so happy to have you again," she started tearing up a little, and softly placed a hand over Korra's.

"Mom...," Korra smiled. Next to her, Naga also joined in and whirred a high note as she nuzzled into Korra's side. Out of all the ways she's imagined this reunion going, this was by far one of the better ones.

Tonraq returned to his meal, "So, you mentioned before that you'd spent some time with Toph in the Foggy Swamp. What was that like?"

Korra smirked, "About as cranky as you'd imagine she'd be." The other two laughed softly. "But it was nice. Really nice. I think Toph and I started to get on by the end of it. And I spent a lot of time with the Foggy Swamp Tribe too."

"Well, it made a difference because you're looking so much better now," Senna beamed.

Korra half-smiled, but turned her gaze down to the table. She knew that she was a lot better than when her parents last saw her, but still, her mother's compliment felt a little undeserved. Only a week ago Korra was laying face-first in the mud while Kuvira had bested her. She still couldn't shake the apparition from haunting her and reappearing whenever she tried using the Avatar State.

Her mother seemed to pick up on Korra's mood, "Honey, it's not your fault what happened at Zaofu. Kuvira's been gearing up for war all this time."

"I know," Korra replied. "But still... I'm supposed to be the Avatar."

Tonraq chimed in, "That doesn't mean you can always beat everyone –"

"Aang was twelve when he defeated the Fire Lord. Twelve. I'm twenty-one, and I can't even beat Kuvira," she sighed. "I know that the swamp helped me. Toph and the training, getting the rest of the poison out... it helped. Really, it did. But after searching for that whole year, and finally ending up in the Foggy Swamp. I just... I dunno. Thought that it would mean more. But I'm still not where I should be. Where I need to be. Where the world needs me to be. I thought I'd be coming back because the world needed me, but I don't know if it even does. Not when I can't save them."

"Oh sweetie," Senna reached forwards and held Korra's hands again. It was breaking her heart seeing her daughter like this again. "We needed you. And we are so filled with joy that you're back here."

It was touching, hearing her mother say this. Even in her frustration, Korra couldn't help but smile, even if only for a fleeting moment.

"Please, don't give into despair. You can find a way through this."

"Mom...," Korra choked up. She had forgotten how her parents had been there in the beginning. Korra had refused to even see Master Katara for weeks, convinced that nothing could help her get better. It felt so long ago, but it was still fresh in her parents' minds.

Korra swallowed. "I won't. I promise."

Senna smiled warmly, and Tonraq reached over and took Korra's other hand.

Varrick had been at it for a couple hours. A few more parts had been added to his setup, and a vine canister loaded into place in the centre. Bolin had taken to standing to the sides, fiddling with a lone screwdriver he'd found.

"I can't seem to understand your setup," Baatar pondered. He squinted at the exposed circuits. "I can see that you have the current interacting with the vines in this chamber, but... the energy. Won't it simply go back into the vine rather than be harnessed?"

"It's all in the notes," Varrick replied, a slight exasperation creeping into his voice.

Baatar didn't move, "And what's that piece of equipment you're working with now?"

Varrick stopped what he was doing and looked up, staring at Baatar while exhaling deeply. He said nothing.

"Tch," Baatar muttered, eventually walking over to the pile of scribbly notes on the desk.

While his back was turned, Varrick slipped something into the exposed portion of the machine, and quickly adjusted some of the cables. "Hand me the screw-turn thingy Bolin!"

Bolin looked up from his mindless fidgeting and grumbled quietly. "I can't believe you're helping them!"

"Funny story about spirit energy, actually," Varrick shared his thoughts out loud. Baatar had returned from the notes, not that they were legible anyway. "I first came up with the idea for harnessing spiritual energy when I saw that Vaatu attacking Republic City. The beam he manifested... it was like something else! I thought, 'Hey, this could be the future of clean energy!'" he turned back to Bolin, "Trust me kid; I know what I'm doing."

Bolin let Varrick snatch the screwdriver, still unsure what Varrick was meaning.

"I still can't figure out your setup from the notes," Baatar said flatly. "Can you explain what you're doing now?"

"I think we're ready for a demonstration," Varrick grinned. He stood to his feet, "That oughta do it!" There was silence, the machine sitting dormant. He frowned. He tapped the glass of the capsule lightly, but still, there was nothing. "Alright, stand back!" Varrick said. He lifted his leg and kicked the machine several times, before finally, it turned on.

Though it wasn't just the capsule that glowed an ominous purple; all throughout the cabin, the dormant spirit vine capsules sitting on the shelves whirred into action. The purple light radiated out with a soft but powerful hum.

Baatar looked around, confused at what he was seeing. A ticking began to fill the air, and the glow from each capsule pulsating slowly. "What is that clicking sound?"

"It's the timer," Varrick replied.

Baatar narrowed his eyes, "The timer for what?"

"For the bomb of course."

Bolin looked panicked, "Bomb?! What bomb?!"

"The bomb that's going to go off in five minutes, blowing up this entire train, and all the spirit vines with it," Varrick said. He smirked at Baatar, "Y'know, I've been known to build timers a little fast, so you'd better think about getting off while you can. Bolin and I are ready to go down with the ship – or train in this case – but you seem like you have a lot to live for."

"No no no no no!" Bolin yanked Varrick by the collar and shook him back and forth, "I'm not ready to go down with the ship or the train! Varrick!"

Despite everything said so far, Baatar wasn't convinced. He stared back at Varrick with a cold look, "You're bluffing."

Varrick chuckled, "Stick around for five minutes and find out who's bluffing. You'll be sorry you left me Zhu Li!" he cried out into the air. "When they write the history books, your name will become synonymous with 'betrayal'! People will say, 'hey, what happened to that guy?' And they'll say, 'Oh? Didn't you hear? He ''Varricked'' himself because some guy ''Zhu Li'd'' him!'"

"Enough!" Baatar interrupted Varrick's ramblings. "What makes you think we'd let you go through with this? You don't get to quit. You work for Kuvira, and she wants you to see this through. Guards!"

The guards on either side of the train started moving slowly towards Varrick. He quickly glanced at both of them and yanked something from his pocket. "If you try and drag me away then I'll blow it up immediately!" He pointed a small device towards Baatar. It was a detonator.

Baatar raised an eyebrow, "Why do you have a timer, and a remote?"

"Well," Varrick began, "first I built the timer. But then I thought, you could just drag me off the train. So I built the remote. But then I thought, do I need the timer? Because now I've got a remote in my hand... whatever! The point is that you're getting off this train, and we're staying on it!"

Even with all of Varrick's threatening, Baatar couldn't bring himself to step into the next cabin. "You can't be serious," he mumbled to himself. "This work... you would really destroy all of it?! You would doom the Earth Empire by obliterating the one advantage we need to keep our nation strong?!"

"I've made myself clear."

Baatar seethed, his anger bubbling over. He was helpless. Varrick was crazy, and he had no idea what he was capable of. There would be another way, but it would cost them time. "Suit yourself," Baatar spat. He turned and made his way to the next train cabin, the guards following him out quickly.

Once the last of the personnel had left, Varrick pointed the door, "Okay Bolin, do the thing!"

Bolin looked unsure, "Um... what?"

Varrick sighed, "Unhook the train cars! C'mon! That was an easy one."

As Bolin started reaching for the lever, Baatar stared from the opening in the next cabin, "You're insane."

"You knew that when you hired me," Varrick replied.

The doors shut, and the train slowly pulled away. Their half of the train started slowing along the tracks, while Baatar's sped away into the distance.

"Phew!" Bolin exclaimed. "Okay. That was a good bluff man. Baatar really bought it."

Varrick looked confused, "Bluff? I was serious. I can't switch it off."

Something sank in Bolin's gut, "What?!"

Smiling, Varrick chuckled to himself, "Oh well. We had a pretty good run didn't we?"

"Run? I like running! I still want to run! Now help me turn it off!"

Bolin scurried around the machine, trying to figure out a way to shut the glowing capsule down. He may as well have been staring at a blank wall.

"I'll see you on the other side, Zhu Li," Varrick spoke to an invisible space.

Clearly, Varrick had lost it. Bolin knew he had to get them off. His eyes darted across the room, looking for anything that might help. The train was still running along the track, but had slowed down. Perhaps they could jump off? He dashed towards an emergency exit latch on the floor, quickly peering out and hopping back up.

Varrick was still muttering something when he felt something strike his cheek. "Ow!"

Bolin's hand stung, but he had to slap some sense into Varrick. "Look man, you're the one who's always trying to save your own skin. Are you trying to tell me you're really ready to blow yourself up?"

Truth sunk in as the pain subsided. Varrick looked to the remote in his hand, "You're... right! Self-preservation is my greatest personality trait. What am I doing?!"

Varrick looked back and forth between the machine and the timer, but the glowing and whirring of the vines was only intensifying. "Too late!" Bolin interrupted. He grabbed Varrick by the arm and yanked them through the manhole, quickly carving out a tunnel for them to drop into the earth.

The pair only had a few seconds before they felt the bomb go off. Even deep underground, everything shook like the spirits were raining brimstone onto the earth. After the last of the shockwaves subsided, Bolin pushed his way out.

"Ah ha!" Varrick cheered, rolling out onto the surface. "You did the thing Bolin!"

Bolin panted heavily, offering only an irritated grunt in response. Saving them had really tested his earthbending reflexes.

"Here I was, all down about Zhu Li, ready to go down with the train. But then, you snapped some sense into me!" Varrick laughed. "I mean, I can't die? Imagine a Varrick Industries without ''Varrick''? What a terrible world that would be!"

"I cannot believe Zhu Li worked with you for as long as she did."

Varrick sighed. "Well, now that the Earth Empire thinks we're dead, how about we go start a new life? I've always wanted to change my identity, live as another person? Ooh ooh, we could go live in the Fire Nation! That would be pretty neat! We could start a travelling circus! With myself as the lead of course. You could be an animal hand –"

"Varrick, we're going to the rehabilitation camps."

Varrick's face dropped, "What? Why?"

Bolin grunted, forcing his aching body into a sitting position, "Because, in case you forgot, they took my teammates! And others from Zaofu! We're not going to just leave them!"

"But I'm a new man now Bolin! The world is my oyster clam!"

"Then be a new man and do something useful! Like, saving other people or something!" Bolin huffed. "I'm going. And I'll need your help. So get up."

Varrick groaned, but eventually relented. They would be going back into the fray to help save Bolin's team from the clutches of the Earth Empire. Right after he caught his breath.

The explosion was incredible. The train had nearly been shaken off its tracks, even this far away. Baatar continued looking through the telescope, searching for any sign of the pair. But the smoke clouded everything.

"He really was crazy," one of the soldiers remarked. "Hard to believe Varrick would go out like that."

"It is hard to believe," Baatar replied. He pulled away from the looking glass, "Send word to all the nearest border patrols. Put out wanted posters for Bolin and Varrick."

"Wanted posters?" the soldier quizzed. "No one could survive that blast?"

Baatar grunted, "If anyone could it would be Varrick. Send the word out." The soldier nodded and left. "And get us back to Zaofu."

Chapter Text

Surprisingly, it didn't take that much effort nor time to get into the reeducation camp. Although their uniforms were tattered and dirty from surviving the explosion, they were still Earth Empire uniforms after all. It was also lucky that Bolin's teammates had been sent to the Omashu camp just outside the city proper, since it was in the Southern Division after all, and Bolin and Varrick had seldom visited. But even with all these factors leaning their way, it would take a massive stroke of luck and genius to find a way to free Bolin's teammates.

While it had been easy enough to infiltrate, finding the right holding cells was another issue entirely. The Omashu 'Rehabilitation Centre' had to be the largest of the camps and held the majority of defectors. It was surely Hou-Ting's idea to put the largest reeducation camp right near the doorstep of her long-time rival King Renshu of Omashu. But the maze of tunnels and unfamiliar surroundings were proving to be difficult, and costing time.

Varrick tutted, leaning against a cold, metal wall. "Kid, I'm telling you. This is going to take forever. And in case you forgot, we don't have forever in here." While slightly irritated, he made sure to keep his voice down.

Bolin only flinched a little. He wasn't stopping. "Varrick, just keep reading through the folder."

"Already have," Varrick tossed the documents onto a desk. Thankfully, the office staff had been out on dinner break. "Couldn't see 'Goomba' anywhere."

"His name is ''Gombo''," Bolin frowned.

"I know," Varrick waved his hand. "Look, it's a big place. Finding three inmates is going to be like finding a needle in a haystack. And for the record, I have found one of those."

As much as he didn't want to admit it, Varrick had a point. There were at least several hundred inmates here in the prison. Bolin started to feel hopelessness creep in, until a thought struck him. He looked back to Varrick, "Maybe we don't need to find their cells?"

"Oh man, that afterparty," a soldier cackled to his comrade. "I mean, I knew taking over Zaofu would be a big deal, but spirits... the fireworks? Stunning."

The other soldier laughed, "I don't think I've partied that hard since graduation."

They stopped as another pair of men in uniform approached, though their attire looked dreadful. Rips in the sleeves and pants, dirt smudged over them in splotches. Even singe marks burnt into the once pristine emerald outfits.

"Hey-ho lads," one of them greeted. The curls of his moustache were frizzy and out of shape. "I think there's been an exhaust leak in this hallway."

The two soldiers looked at each other, and then back to the other pair, "I haven't seen anything."

The one with the moustache leant over to a set of pipes along the wall and grabbed a valve, "Well, now there is!"

Steam shot out right in their faces. While dazed and confused, the larger soldier leapt onto them took both of them down. Their vision went black.

Bolin got up, "Well, that's them taken care of. Now what?"

"C'mon, this way."

Inside the next room, Bolin watched Varrick eye up several of the massive pipes. "Are you sure you can start a fire? And why can't we just set off the alarms like I said?"

"No one would evacuate prisoners for just an alarm! We need a real fire. That will send them fleeing like startled cat deer," Varrick replied. "And of course, I know how to start a big enough fire. How do you think I got expelled from school?" Varrick glared at Bolin as if he took offense at his doubts. "Now, stand back and watch."

It didn't take Varrick long to prepare. As he twisted open various valves across the room, all Bolin could hear was the faint hiss as colourless gas filled the room. Their door was the only exit, bar for the ventilation shaft which Varrick has sealed shut. The whole room was a bomb in the making.

Varrick wiped his forehead as he jogged back to Bolin, "Righty-O, it's ready. Just need to set a fuse." He started making a line of powdered blasting jelly into the hallway.

"And you're sure that there's no one else nearby?" Bolin asked.

"Probably not."

"Varrick!"

"Okay, I'm sure that there isn't relax," Varrick waved his free hand. "I checked the log books while in the office. Only those two you knocked out cold."

"Okay, that's great. No one needs to get hurt. Just a massive, gas-explosion, y'know, not dangerous at all," Bolin mumbled. He had managed to cart off the knocked-out soldiers into a truck and told the delivery driver to head to Omashu, making sure the driver was unaware of the unconscious soldiers in the back. No one else knew what they were doing, but they soon would.

Once in the hallway, Varrick struck a match and dropped it onto the trail. The powdered blasting jelly lit up as a small flame travelled along towards the power room.

"So, what now?" Bolin asked.

Varrick gripped his partner's arm, "We high-tail it of course!" He sprinted off down the hallway, with Bolin quickly following.

The two of them only made it a short distance before the tremor hit. The rattling shook the walls and floor, like a thunderous volcano going off. Bolin would never doubt Varrick's ability again.

Inside the control tower, the prison staff gripped onto rails as the whole building shook. Eventually it subsided, though blaring syrens soon replaced the rumbling. "What was that?!" the warden turned to those in the room.

"Look sir!" a soldier pointed out the window.

The warden's eyes went wide, "Get fire crew to the power room immediately!"

"And the camp attendees sir? There are some inside."

The warden grumbled, "Into the courtyard. With plenty of supervision."

"Right away sir."

As smoke bellowed into the sky and flames engulfed half the complex, a sea of pale green uniforms flowed out from the main building. The prisoners lined up in rows along the dry earth. Despite being warned not to, many of them turned back to watch the scene unfold.

Bolin and Varrick nearly tumbled out into the outdoors, though quickly regained their composure. They didn't have long at all, but hopefully long enough to make sure Bolin's teammates were in the main crowd of prisoners. Instead of taking their time trying to find them, this fire was their means of getting all the prisoners out at once. The only thing standing between them and their freedom was the massive platinum gates surrounding the courtyard. But now, it was also Bolin and Varrick's means of freedom too.

Trying to recompose himself, Bolin marched through the lines of prisoners. It was hard to tell them all apart; the pale, grey-green outfits made them all look identical. He started eyeing up every slim male with messy hair, or looking for anyone with Water Tribe hair loops. That had to be pretty uncommon here.

"There!" Bolin's eyes locked onto a pair ahead of him, the man and woman looking like a match. He strolled over quickly with Varrick trailing behind. "There you are!"

Baraz turned to the soldier slowly, but then his eyes widened as he recognised who it was. "Uh..." Ahnah too turned in disbelief.

Bolin realised there were other guards nearby, "Yes, inmate, I... uh... wanted to check in and make sure you weren't playing up again. Yeah." His eyes quickly darted to a pair of soldiers marching past. Thankfully, their attention was drawn elsewhere.

"You came for us," Ahnah mumbled, quiet enough to not be heard.

"There's still that massive gate blocking our exit," Bolin whispered back.

Varrick stepped forward, "I think I have an idea for that. You go find your other friend. I'm going to talk to the warden."

Bolin didn't have a chance to object; Varrick was already scurrying off. Though he realised what Varrick had meant, "Wait," he turned to both Baraz and Ahnah, "Where's Gombo?"

"Hmm," Baraz grunted. He looked to Ahnah and then back to Bolin.

"What?"

"Gombo uh... decided he didn't like how one of the guards was talking to him. Lashed out."

Ahnah spoke next, "He got placed in high security."

Trust Gombo to lose his cool. Now it was going to be even tougher to get them all out. Still, with the fire and gas leak, everyone would have to be outside. He just needed a way to get Gombo under his guard.

"Ah, there you are!" Varrick called out.

Baraz and Ahnah shuddered as the warden marched over behind Varrick. His greying hair was shaved short, and a menacing scar ran along the side of his head.

"Uh, hey," Bolin replied.

"So," the Warden spoke, "Your comrade here told me what happened. Can you corroborate his story?"

Bolin gulped. "Uh... yeah... yes, I was there. Whatever he said is true. Yeah."

The Warden eyed Bolin up and down, "Considering the sorry state of your uniform, I'm inclined to agree. You were both in the power room when the explosion happened." He turned to Varrick, "So, Chu, how far did you say we need to evacuate?"

"Well, that depends if you want lung cancer or not," Varrick laughed. The Warden stood still, like an emotionless statue. "Um," Varrick coughed, "A few miles. Just to be safe."

"Hmm," the Warden mused. He then walked to the front of the prisoners, "I've been informed that there is a gas leak, and the fumes are toxic. I've been advised that we need to evacuate and clear some distance." He narrowed his eyes, "We will be leaving. And should anyone try anything, you better believe that I will not hesitate to chain you to the building and test whether the fumes really are that bad. Am I clear?" The silence among the prisoners and soldiers gave the answer. "Start moving out!"

There was a heavy clunk as the gates started to open. "So... are the fumes really toxic?" Baraz looked at Varrick.

"Apart from smoke inhalation? Probably not," Varrick chuckled quietly to himself. "So, when we get a chance, the four us split gotcha?"

"One problem. We're missing someone," Bolin said.

Varrick frowned, "Oh that's right. Gambo."

"Gombo," Bolin replied. "And apparently he's under extra supervision."

Ahnah scoffed, "I thought your last plan was just a hasty job, but turns out, you don't really plan at all do you Bolin?"

"Look," Bolin replied, "I'm here because I knew I had to try. We'll think of something."

Ahnah didn't exactly look reassured, though Bolin couldn't entirely blame her. It was his plan that they followed when trying to leave Zaofu, and he still couldn't bring himself to dwell on what happened there with Akito. But this time was different. He wouldn't fail again.

The group of prisoners were escorted out the main gates, following the dusty road ahead. When the warden mentioned they'd be heavily guarded he wasn't kidding; dozens of foot soldiers marched either side, and several mecha suits clunked along too.

"So," Baraz whispered to Bolin, "what's your big plan?"

"Well... uh..."

"Great," Ahnah muttered.

Bolin was feeling the pressure now. And losing the confidence of his teammates wasn't helping. He tried remembering what Suyin had taught him, about noticing his surroundings, using neutral jing as a means to gather information and plan ahead. But thinking of Suyin just hurt too much. It reminded him of Opal.

A few rows ahead, Bolin could just make out the shaved head of Gombo. Just like the others had mentioned, he was under strict supervision, with four soldiers on either side. There had to be a way to get Gombo away from them.

Breathe Bolin calmed himself. He had to wait and observe. Use this time to think ahead and plan.

"Give me your hands," Bolin whispered to Baraz. Bolin quickly whipped up a tiny lava shuriken and sliced through the platinum cuffs, looking over his shoulder at the other soldiers. "Pretend like your still cuffed. When there's enough of us and we reach a good spot, we'll fight back."

Baraz nodded subtly. "Gotcha"

Bolin did the same for Ahnah, and then moved onto some of the prisoners next to them. Although confused at first, they managed to catch the briefest glimpse of what Bolin had done for Ahnah and Baraz. Varrick motioned a 'zip-lip' movement to keep them quiet.

While Varrick stayed with the others, Bolin started inching past the rows of prisoners towards Gombo. On the way he freed several more prisoners, who seemed to get the gist of what was happening. Still, he couldn't quite make a move on Gombo just yet. They'd have no chance of getting away if they couldn't find somewhere to run and hide.

Bolin smiled as he noticed the greenery not too far ahead. And, they were about to start marching through a wide gorge. A lava slide wouldn't be a bad distraction.

Just as a plan was coming together, the Warden held up a hand to stop everyone. He spun around, "This is far enough." His eyes darted between the prisoners. Was he watching for their posture? Or movements that would give away some of them had been uncuffed? Bolin knew he had to act. He stumbled forward and intentionally fell into Gombo, knocking them both over.

"Ugh! Sorry... I'm really sorry," the lavabender mumbled. While the ground he managed to cut through Gombo's shackles just in time before the soldiers hoisted them both up.

Gombo had a moment of surprise at seeing Bolin, though his cold and daunting expression soon returned.

"Watch yourself!" one of the soldiers chided Bolin. "This one here is a dangerous brute. Not very clever, but –"

The punch sent the soldier out cold. He stumbled, before collapsing onto the earth.

"Wait! Gombo!" Bolin said. They were too far from the treeline.

"I ain't waiting no more," Gombo replied. Before the other soldier could react, he threw the man into the rock wall of the gorge.

The Warden's eyes lit up like a raging fire, "Stop this at once! Guards!"

It was now or never. Bolin swept his hands forward and brought down a wave of molten rock and spiralled it over some of the mech suits. After cooling the earth, the mechs were stuck for the time being.

All of the prisoners fought back, even those who hadn't had their cuffs removed. Soldiers and prisoners traded blows, some being knocked down into the earth, while others making a beeline for the forest. The Warden tried knocking a few prisoners back, though fled once a group of earthbenders started flinging boulders his way.

Baraz and Ahnah followed Gombo towards the trees, with Varrick not far behind. Bolin tried to free as many of the prisoners as he could, but soldiers were subduing them just as quickly.

"Yo kid! Let's get outta here!" Varrick called out.

Bolin hesitated, though started running to the others. Behind him, he could still here the struggling and cries of prisoners he couldn't help.

The earthbenders among the group formed a massive slab for everyone to hop onto, and quickly took off towards the treeline.

It was dark when the group finally stopped running. The malnourishment of the camp had taken a toll on most of the prisoners, some of whom keeled over from exhaustion. Still, they were thankful to be out of the Warden's clutches for now.

There was a small stream nearby, and everyone took advantage of the water. They'd boil some more later, but for now, hydration was all that mattered. After everyone had caught their breath, Bolin made his way over to Gombo, "Y'know, you should have waited. We could've saved more of the prisoners."

Gombo said nothing more than a grunt, ignoring Bolin altogether. He threw some water over his face and walked back to his two comrades.

Bolin turned to the rest of the prisoners, "So, I know we just got away but we have to think about our next step. There's a port town nearby, but we'll have to cross the border wall. But, I have an idea for that –"

"Shut up."

Bolin looked to Gombo, shocked at his outburst. "What?"

"You heard me," Gombo said. "I ain't listening to anything you say. And neither should you lot."

"Um... Y'know, I think the words you're looking for are 'thanks Bolin for saving us!', which by the way, you haven't even said yet!"

Gombo scoffed, "I would've found a way out. We didn't need you."

Bolin was angry now, "Yeah? Really? In maximum security?!'

"I could've done it! I got us three out of worse situations before! So don't come here giving us your 'plans' or whatnot because I ain't interested."

"What's your problem?"

Gombo sucked in a gulp of air, "You! You're my problem!"

Bolin didn't understand what was going on, "What?"

"It was your plan that failed in Zaofu and got us thrown in prison to begin with! And now you expect us to just follow you into another one or your terrible ideas?"

"I didn't have to come back for you y'know!" Bolin retorted. He couldn't believe what was happening right now. "But I did! Because I care about you guys. You're my teammates!"

"And Akito is dead!"

Silence descended like a thick blanket of snow. Bolin froze, and Gombo let his words sink in. He had tried pushing it out of his mind to focus on the task at hand, but Bolin stood like a cat deer frozen in place, unable to respond.

"He was your responsibility. And your plan got him killed," Gombo shook his head. "We were fine without you. Us three could've left Zaofu easily. Yet you insisted on tagging along, and Akito as well. And now the kid's gone."

"You... you can't blame me for that," Bolin mumbled. He wasn't sure if it was more for himself or for Gombo.

Gombo grunted, "I was Qiang's right-hand man for years. I led plenty of expeditions and missions. My men were my responsibility." He walked forwards to Bolin, "Caring isn't enough. You gotta be a true leader, and Bolin, you are not. You don't have what it takes. We may have spent time under you as Central, but we all know that division was as quiet as a camelephant graveyard! If we had been in the real thick of things, you would've got us all killed sooner because you ain't leader material. Now," he turned to the other prisoners, "you lot can either follow this bright-eyed naïve kid here and hope to the spirits that he'll get you across the border, or, you can take your chances with me." He looked back at Bolin, his dark eyes boring straight into his, "But don't you dare tag along with us."

There was so much Bolin wanted to say, so much he could've said to defend himself. But he couldn't. He'd lost his spark. Any shred of confidence he had was snuffed out. Because in the pit of his stomach, he knew Gombo had a point. Akito was his teammate, and he got him killed.

"Bo," he heard Baraz speak up. Gombo had already marched off. "Thank you for saving us."

Bolin nodded slowly, "So you'll stay?"

Baraz gave an uneasy look towards Ahnah. The waterbender stepped forwards, "Bolin, like Baraz said, we're grateful you came back for us. And Gombo was way too harsh with you. But... he still had a point. We're gonna stick with him."

"Don't take it as personally, please," Baraz said. "Us three have been together a long time. We'll get through."

"Best of luck getting over the border," Ahanah said.

All Bolin could do was nod and give a half smile as the other two joined Gombo. Unsurprisingly, the other prisoners followed suit and left the clearing. Only he and Varrick remained.

Korra had forgotten how pristine and colourful Air Temple Island sunrises were. She'd gone to bed early after dinner with her parents. Now, she spent her downtime playing with Naga, lifting small slabs of earth from the ground for her to pounce on.

Her expression changed as she saw Opal meandering down the path. Korra could imagine she was feeling frustrated at this whole situation. "Hey, how are you doing?" Korra said as Opal reached her.

Opal exhaled, keeping her arms wrapped around herself, "I'm just... so angry. My family are trapped in Zaofu and no one seems to care."

"Opal," Korra replied, "we do care. Su was my metalbending teacher too. We're going to do everything we can to get them back."

"Everything?" Opal questioned, her voice raising a little. "Then why aren't we on a bison heading straight for Zaofu right now?"

Korra sighed, "Things have just... been a lot. Since Zaofu. I just saw my parents after three years –"

"Yeah, must be nice to see your parents while mine are probably being tortured right now!"

"Hey!" Korra shot back, "In case you forgot, I wasn't even allowed to go to the debriefing meeting yesterday so I have no idea what's being planned. If I keep getting shoved to the sidelines then how am I supposed to help anyway?"

Their arguing had caught the attention of Jinora, who was walking back from an early morning meditation, "Hey, what's going on?"

"It's alright," Korra answered. "Just... a little tired with everything going on."

Opal folded her arms, "It's not just tiring; it's excruciating knowing that my family are stuck somewhere and I can't reach them. Why can't we just go on a rescue mission and bust them out?"

Jinora knew that emotions were running high right now. After the loss at Zaofu, and leaving most of the Beifongs behind, everyone was feeling the crushing defeat on their shoulders. "We did talk about it at the meeting yesterday. Going in like that might just aggravate Kuvira more. We'll have to organise a negotiation."

"We can't wait that long!" Opal pleaded. "You guys don't know Kuvira like I do. She... she just doesn't know when to stop. She'll keep pushing and pushing until something awful happens. Something awful has already happened! Let's just go there and fight back."

"Opal, 'fighting back' isn't the airbender way," Jinora said. "We make an oath on non-aggression. To only use force as a last resort."

While Jinora had meant well, her words only fuelled the flames of frustration in Opal, "Non-aggression?! Kuvira stampeded over Zaofu! Snatched up my family right in front of me! And you're saying that I can't go and save them?!"

"Opal that's not what I meant. What I'm saying is we need to be careful about when and how we try and get them back –"

"No Jinora!" Opal fumed. "If it were your family or your parents Korra you'd be the first to jump on that bison and charge in there. You guys got to return home to your families; I didn't. And neither of you seem to be bothered trying to understand that." She pushed past both of them and stormed off.

"Opal. Wait!" Korra called out.

Jinora sunk her shoulders, "I was trying to help but... I dunno."

Korra shook her head, "Let's just give her some space."

Opal hadn't felt so angry and helpless in a long time. Maybe ever. It wasn't just Korra and Jinora and what they said specifically, but everything. Everyone seemed so blasé about what was happening in Zaofu. She couldn't be around anyone right now.

As she marched around a corner, Opal yelped as she landed straight into Tenzin. His handful of scrolls fell to the floor, though thankfully, the airbending master grabbed Opal before she could fall too. "Woah there," Tenzin said. "Are you alright?"

"Sorry! I'm... so sorry," Opal replied. But she couldn't hold it in. Her tears started to well in her eyes, and she quickly tried to wipe them away.

She felt Tenzin place his hand on her shoulder, "Opal, I can't imagine what you're feeling right now. If you ever need to talk, then don't hesitate to ask."

After the words sunk in, Opal let out another wave of tears. This time, she couldn't hold back. Tenzin wrapped his arms around her as she cried into his robes.

"I... I just...," she sniffled. "I just feel so helpless. So, so angry! And I can't control my emotions. I don't know how to."

"Your mother was a dear friend of mine; we grew up together before she was sent away. I want to go and rescue her as much as you do."

Opal looked up at Tenzin, "But you can't? Just like everyone else seems to think."

Tenzin gave a sympathetic look, "Knowing something doesn't make it easier to accept."

Opal nodded slowly. She sighed, "Like... I get it. I do. If Raiko charged in there now then Kuvira and Hou-Ting could retaliate. But... they're my family. They're trapped with Kuvira. And Jinora kept saying how airbenders are meant to be 'non-aggressive', but how will that help my family!" Opal regretted what she'd just mentioned, "Oh – sorry, I didn't mean to say that about Jinora."

Tenzin chuckled lightly, "My daughter is a model Air Nomad. Knows every oath and tenet and could probably recite them backwards." His expression grew more serious, "No one is saying we can't go and rescue them," Tenzin replied. "But we have to wait for the right time to strike."

"Neutral Jing," Opal mumbled. She'd been hearing a lot about it after her mother had started teaching Bolin. "I just... how can I stop breaking down over it? I want to help. I want to think clearly. But all I can see are images in my head of them being tortured and there's nothing I can do!"

"Hmm," Tenzin pondered. There had to be something he could do to help. He couldn't exactly march into Zaofu himself, but perhaps there was something he could share with Opal that would help. As he continued thinking, he noticed a scroll under his arm. "Would you like to learn a new airbending technique?"

Opal was confused at first. Was this meant to be simply a distraction? Or something that could actually help? "Um... okay?"

"Good. Follow me."

The pair walked through the halls of the temple, following the interior path into the gardens. "After I witnessed Unalaq's spirit cleansing technique, I tasked the Air Acolytes with investigating whether a similar technique might exist in the Air Nomad archives."

"But I thought the spirit cleansing came from the healing side of waterbending?"

"That is true," Tenzin answered. "But given how the early Air Nomads had such a close relationship with the spirits, it seemed likely that they would also have their own way of communing with them."

The pair stopped in a quiet and tranquil part of the gardens, "So did they have a technique for that?"

"Not exactly. But they did have one for communing with the bison," Tenzin answered. He looked out over the oceans of Yue Bay as he spoke, "Before the Air Nomads formed bonds with the sky bison, they would simply follow their migratory routes across the world. The bison were untamed, and would sometimes be more hostile than those that were later domesticated. The other day, an acolyte found this poem in the Eastern Air Temple that describes the Air Nomads 'singing' to calm troubled bison. But the mountain spirits heard their voices and adored them. And thus, the Air Nomads would also sing melodies for them too." Tenzin turned to face Opal, "It seems this practice was lost when the Air Nomads settled down in the temples, and the sky bison became our companions."

Opal managed a faint smile, "It sounds... beautiful."

"Indeed," Tenzin nodded. "But I believe that perhaps the Air Nation can revive this tradition, to commune with the spirits. In this way, it isn't so dissimilar to the waterbending technique after all."

All around them in the quiet of the garden, floating spirits manifested of all shapes, sizes and colours. Some had recognisable animal-like qualities, like wings, ears, and tails, while others looked completely alien. All of them curious, silently watching the two airbenders.

"The technique isn't simply about singing," Tenzin added. He unfolded an ancient-looking scroll on the outdoor table, "But it involves projecting one's voice to create a reverberating echo. One that could have travelled across mountain ranges." He cleared his throat, and then rose his arms into the air, with one straight forwards and the other on an angle behind.

Tenzin took another couple breaths, and then sang a low G note. Already it resonated, holding true, and never going sharp or flat. With his arms he generated a soft air current in a circle around the garden, still holding the note for long stretches before breathing in again. Slowly, the air current seemed to pick up his sound. As the note travelled all around, Tenzin shifted into a B note, and then a D, and finally, a higher G, creating a G major chord. Each air current carried a different note, meaning none of them ever faded away and instead maintained a beautiful, melodic chord.

"Woah," Opal remarked. Even outside the air current she could hear how beautiful and soulful the song was.

But inside the current, something interesting was happening to the spirits. It was almost like they were in a trance. But in a good way. Like the sound and perfect frequencies were somehow pleasing to them. As confirmation of this, when Tenzin lowered the current and bowed, the spirits bowed in response, and some even chittered and squeaked before flying off again. It was like Tenzin had been communicating in some unseen language, a communion of human and spirit.

Opal smiled, "That was incredible. I didn't realise you had a good singing voice."

Tenzin chuckled, "Oh, I don't really. But I can only imagine how choirs of ancient Air Nomads would've sounded." He rolled the scroll back up. "This technique requires one to be at peace within themselves. Because even the slightest troubling emotion or thought can cause the notes one produces to shift and fall out of key. And I don't know if the sky bison or spirits would enjoy that much." Tenzin rested a hand on Opal's shoulder, "Would you like me to teach you?"

"Well," Opal laughed, "I mean no disrespect, but as I said earlier... I'm not exactly in a stable emotional way." She added with a saddened look. "It was a nice thought though."

Tenzin smiled, "Have I ever told you that I wasn't always a patient person?"

"Um... no. I don't think so."

"I'm sure Kya or Bumi would say I'm still not," Tenzin chuckled. His eyes grew distant as he reminisced, "There was so much that I wanted to do, so much to achieve. I found waiting for it intolerable. Frustrating, even. And so one day, I told my father about it. I told him how I needed a way to find more patience, and that so much in life was frustrating me because of how slowly it was going. Do you know what he said to me?"

Opal looked intrigued, "What did he tell you?"

Tenzin laughed again, "That sometimes when we need something, life will challenge us as a means of finding that thing," he explained. "What I wanted was patience, and so, I was being given plenty of situations that would test my patience." Tenzin watched as Opal nodded along, "You told me before how you couldn't control your emotions. That you were worrying and seeing images in your head of your family suffering at Kuvira's hands. Well, this technique requires you to have a calm state of mind. It's the perfect tool to help you ''learn'' how to be calm in the face of great difficulty. Just like I had to learn patience through frustrating circumstances, maybe this will help you learn something as well."

By now Opal had felt her eyes grow warm again, the smallest of tears running down her cheeks. Tenzin had a point. She was frustrated, even lashing out at others, because she couldn't control what was inside. And that wasn't unreasonable given the situation. But maybe... maybe she could find a way to be at peace with these emotions while she waited for a chance to save her family. Opal smiled, "Yeah. I think I'd like to learn how to do it."

Tenzin smiled fondly, "I'm glad. So, let's look over this scroll again, shall we?"

The pair looked over each form, practicing the technique through the morning.

Early morning brought with it a chorus of bird calls and wildlife. Though Bolin tried to block it all out. He sat cross-legged on a raised mound, trying to ease his mind and meditate. It wasn't working. His thoughts were like a ping-pong ball going back forth between his teammates, Opal, his failings, Mako, Kuvira, and nothing he could do was keeping his still.

Varrick had been awake for a short time and couldn't help but notice Bolin's facials as he tried to focus. "You okay there kid? If you need to use the bathroom there's a great bush over there –"

"No Varrick, I don't need a bathroom thank you very much. Just trying to do my neutral jing-ing. So if you don't mind," Bolin opened one eye.

"Oh no problem, you keep jing-ing away," Varrick held his hands up. "But just so you know, that Gamblo and the others have left for the wall."

Bolin exhaled. "Ugh. I can't do this."

Varrick cackled, "Don't worry I can't do jing-ing either."

"It's not that its...," Bolin let his thoughts trail off. To be honest, he didn't quite know how to finish the sentence. It was everything. He was angry at himself for falling for Kuvira's lies, but angry that Opal couldn't admit that they did still do good for the Earth Kingdom. But he was worried about their future. He still felt sick about Akito, hurt at what Gombo had said, but also guilty because he did feel bad about what happened. Bolin continued to sit in silence, unable to articulate everything in his head.

"Listen," Varrick began, "do you know why I hired you to be a mover star, Bolin?"

Bolin couldn't see how it was relevant. Still, he had nothing better to dwell on, "Because I was a great actor."

"Well, okay I guess." Bolin frowned and Varrick stumbled over his words, "B-but what I mean is, that's not the main reason I hired you. It's because you were inspirational," Varrick waved a hand across an imaginary horizon. "You had this... this positive energy that could inspire anyone. Like nothing I'd ever seen before."

"I guess," Bolin mumbled.

"And who could know whether things would've turned out differently? I don't! I could spend time wondering whether Zhu Li might've stayed. But I don't do regrets, and you shouldn't either," Varrick continued. "We still have to get back to Republic City and warn everyone about Kuvira's superweapon. Get back to the people who care about you. So you can't let those losers on your team get you down. Get back that Bolin-positive-fight-till-you-drop spirit that I hired you for in the first place!"

Bolin breathed in and exhaled, "You're right. I can't give up just yet."

After collecting himself, Bolin marched east, towards the border wall and beyond it, their means of returning home.

By the time Bolin and Varrick had reached the border checkpoint, their fears had been confirmed; Gombo and the others had been stopped. After their escape from the re-education camp Bolin knew security would be ramped up. "They got them," he said to Varrick.

"Pah! Let's leave those ditchers," Varrick said. "They didn't want us there so they can figure it out on their own!"

Bolin sighed, "Varrick... I dunno if I can."

"Bolin?" Varrick turned to him, "We risked our butts for them by breaking into the camp remember? And Glomba threw it in our faces!"

"Gombo."

"It doesn't matter," Varrick threw a hand in the air. "We use them as a distraction. Then, we can save them again by telling the others about Kuvira and taking her down."

Varrick did have a point. After everything, maybe it was better for Bolin to just leave them.

No. He knew in his heart that he couldn't

"Varrick. I have an idea," Bolin said. Without elaborating further, he took off out the treeline and down to the checkpoint.

"Ugh, kid," Varrick sighed. He followed Bolin.

As Bolin got closer, he could make out how many soldiers there were. Two mecha suits stood atop the wall, and two metalbenders protected the door. If he could talk his way through the doors, then perhaps they could make a run for it once on the other side.

"Hey there!" Bolin called out the soldiers. He only caught a short glimpse of Gombo's glare before looking back to their captors.

The soldier in charge looked curious and then puzzled as he watched Bolin sprint over, with Varrick trailing behind. "Comrades."

"I'm... so... glad," Bolin kept up the fake panting, even holding up a finger as he caught his breath, "that... you caught them. Phew!" He wiped an arm across his forehead. "We've been chasing these fugitives all night! The sneaky, little, slippery eel rays got the better of us. Well, thank you for capturing them again," he said as he started marching over.

"Woah woah, hold it there!" the soldier replied.

Bolin looked confused, "What? What's the problem? Did you not hear what happened at the Omashu training facility?"

"Yeah, we did," a different soldier stepped forward. "And we were told they may have had inside help. Where are your identification papers?"

"Well...," Bolin patted his pockets. "I mean, as you can see, we're a little worse for wear after all that chasing."

The soldier narrowed his eyes, "How convenient."

Varrick stepped forward, "Well, I know where mine are! I was too busy cramming them down a hog monkey's mouth as he tried to eat me! These pesky fugitives led us straight into a nest of 'em! That's why we look like we walked straight through a tornado! So yeah – sue me if you must – but that's why I don't have my papers bud!" With each line he pressed a finger into the soldier's chest to make his point.

The two soldiers exchanged a glance, and then looked back to the pair, "Alright. You can go inside the living quarters and freshen up. Get a new uniform to replace whatever rags you have left."

"Oh... well, actually," Bolin began. "We were told once we got the escapees to keep going with them to the port town up ahead."

"What?" one of the soldiers questioned. "The camp is back that way? Why would we take them to the port town? We have fewer troops stationed there?"

"Yeah, and the training facility is flooded with toxic gas!" Varrick replied. "I'm not heading back there any time soon. I like breathing!"

The soldier narrowed his eyes again, "Well, these ungrateful low-lives deserve to be sent back there. We'll be marching them back soon."

Baraz and Ahnah watched from on the ground. Their escape had been unsuccessful, but just because Bolin and Varrick had showed up it didn't mean they were saved just yet. These soldiers weren't giving in easily.

"The Warden ordered it," Bolin said.

"Really?" The soldier questioned. "We had no such communication from him."

"Orders before we were sent out," Bolin added. "Look, we can't just leave them here in the hot sun and sweltering heat right? I mean yeah, they're low-lives, but the whole point of the re-education camps is to reform and rebuild, right?" Bolin wrapped an arm uncomfortably around the soldier. "Kuvira wouldn't want to put them in harm's way, would she? She's all about rehabilitating our troubled citizens to become productive members of society."

The soldier peeled Bolin's arm off, "Fine. Open the gates!"

Bolin let out a sight of relief internally. The hard part had been done. Somehow, he and Varrick had actually pulled it off.

The prisoners, now in platinum cuffs, were all yanked to their feet. Bolin and Varrick led the way through the first door, and then, onto the other side of the wall, with Varrick even giving a wink and a wave to the staff inside.

However, when they reached the other side and started on their way, the soldiers kept following. Bolin frowned awkwardly. "Uh... what's the matter?"

The soldier seemed perplexed, "What do you mean? If these prisoners evaded you last time then we'll send reinforcements." He waved to the soldiers on the wall, and both mecha suits leapt down to join them. "We'll be under heavy guard all the way to the port town."

Bolin had been wrong about 'the hard part'; getting rid of these extra soldiers was going to be challenging.

"I just got these fliers from the warden," a young soldier entered the staff room. "Man, you should read what these guys did!"

"Yeah?" Another soldier replied.

The younger man cackled, "First, they blew up a train. Then, they broke into the Omashu Rehabilitation Facility and escaped with some of the prisoners! Can you believe it?"

"It's almost like you're admiring them," his superior officer said from behind.

Both the soldiers yelped and then hung their heads in shame, "Uh... no sir... it was just... us studying the enemy! Yeah."

"Give it here."

He handed the superior soldier one of the fliers. His eyes went wide, and then rage filled his body. In mere seconds he was at the door, "Stop them! They're fugitives of the Earth Empire!" he cried out. These fliers had Bolin and Varrick's faces on them.

The pair gave each other a worried glance before sprinting forwards. But it was too late; the mecha suits blocked their means of escape, while the earth and metalbenders stood their ground, ready to apprehend them.

"I am not going back to prison," Baraz mumbled to himself. He swiftly kicked up a fire ball into the nearest earthbender. His arms were bound, but his kicks were powerful enough.

It seemed it would come down to a brawl. Bolin heated a peddle and cut through Ahnah's cuffs, and then Baraz's, before turning to Gombo's. Just as he did, one of the mechs tried to slam into the lavabender. Bolin managed to evade just in time.

Some of the other prisoners managed to pry their cuffs off with pieces of metal, while others simply fought with their hands still bound. There was no way any of them wanted to go back to prison.

Ahnah found a soggy patch of earth nearby and drew water from it. Her overhead stream blocked an incoming rock, and then she sprayed the ground and formed a layer of ice. Baraz added several fire punches and kicks, nearly toppling a mech suit over. Though the pilot recovered and used the suit's leg pistons to crack through the slippery floor. It shot forth a lightning bolt in Ahnah's direction, before turning its flamethrower at Baraz. The firebender countered with his own flamethrower, and the pair contested as each of their flame jets burst into one another.

Bolin had managed to free another couple prisoners, but now he had his hands full. The other mech bellowed forth a roaring inferno, and Bolin had to hide behind a thick stone wall. As the flames lapped either side of the barrier, Varrick cried out and crawled away from danger.

Now the mech had reinforcements; three of the suits walked towards Bolin with their arms outstretched, producing jets of flame. Bolin tried hurling rocks at them, but they barely made a dent. With a grunt he managed to liquify the ground in front into searing magma, and then sent forth a lava wave. While two of the mechs stepped back, one thrust into the air and aimed a lightning bolt at Bolin. He cried out while rolling away, narrowly missing the crackling electricity.

Gombo socked a metalbender in the jaw, sending the man stumbling. He and the prisoners were duelling the foot soldiers. The metalbender Gombo was fighting tried to keep his distance, preferring to send massive projectiles at the man rather than get in close. But that worked to Gombo's advantage. After dodging another cascade of earth bricks, Gombo upper kicked the man's chest, sending him folding over backwards.

With all the fighting going on, Varrick kept himself hidden near the staff room. But he could see they were in a dire position. The foot soldiers would be easy enough to escape from until reinforcements arrived, but the mecha suits were proving tough to beat. Gombo had gone to help his two comrades with one of them, and Bolin was still getting pinned down by the other three. There had to be something he could do to even the playing field.

Varrick's mind raced as he ran back inside, looking around for anything that might be useful. It was just like at his brainstorming sessions where Zhu Li could help him hang upside down and let blood flow to his head. Under that kind of pressure, some of his best ideas were born. Though the battle outside was a different kind of pressure, Varrick hoped it would do the trick.

He ran into the hallway and noticed the power block. Probably for electrifying the wire on top. There had to be an exterior panel on the other side of the wall he could pry into.

"Hey! You can't be in here!"

A young soldier had noticed him. Varrick quickly shoved the poor kid into closet and wedged a broom in the door handle. Though he quickly opened it again. "Actually I might need this," Varrick said as he grabbed a screwdriver from inside the closet. He quickly shut and barred the door again, while the soldier inside pummelled the door.

After slinging some cable around his shoulder, Varrick traversed the battlefield and reached the panel he had in mind. Once the screws were off, he managed to pry open the exterior. "Aha! That should do it!" he cackled while attaching the cable. With the amount of voltage that would be pumping through his contraption, it would certainly short-circuit the tin can suits.

Still, he needed a way to project the electrical current. He looked above and saw the perfect conduit; the radio tower.

Bolin was directing a lava flow against a mech when he heard Varrick shouting his way. He quickly cooled the earth to encase the platinum suit, "Varrick! Kinda busy! What is it?"

"I need a way onto the roof!" He yelled back.

Without turning around, Bolin stomped an earth pillar underneath Varrick. Varrick screamed as he sailed through the air, landing right where he needed to. More or less.

"Could've made some earth stairs or something!" Varrick muttered. After connecting the cable to the radio tower, now he had to find a way down.

Thankfully, Ahnah noticed him up there. She slid up a water ramp and landed next to Varrick, "I guess you have something in mind to help?"

"I sure do! Just gotta get down!"

Ahnah nodded. She quickly formed a thin line of ice from the roof to the ground.

Varrick frowned, "I can't go down that! I hate slides!"

Ahnah rolled her eyes before shoving Varrick down.

Once on the ground, Varrick quickly pulled himself up and ran back inside. While there was a decent current emanating from the radio tower, he needed much more for his plan to work. In the power room he yanked the dials as far as they would go, spurring the machine into an over-powered sizzling state.

The radio tower emanated a powerful invisible force that struck all the mech suits in the vicinity. With a heavy clunk, each one of them shut down and toppled over. Everyone around, including the Earth Empire guards, stood shocked for a moment, before their battle resumed.

"Haha! Still got that Varrick touch!" Varrick said as he sprinted out the building.

Since he had been fighting the three mech suits himself, Bolin was out of the combat now. Varrick ran over and yanked his arm, "C'mon! Let's get out of here!"

As he turned to leave however, Bolin saw the others were still in danger. Even with the mechs down, there were still plenty of earth and metalbenders keeping them busy. Any minute now reinforcements would probably arrive. They didn't stand a chance.

"Varrick wait! We can't leave them!"

"What?" Varrick frowned, "They chose to leave you! We don't owe them anything!"

"Varrick," Bolin repeated. He spun around, determined to save his teammates, whether they wanted his help or not. Most of the soldiers were holed up just outside the gate. With a massive shove, Bolin sent a wave of magma sprawling over the land ahead. The terrified soldiers peeled back, yelping as the lava threatened to melt everything in its path. With the soldiers stuck, Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah, along with the other prisoners, fled behind Varrick and Bolin.

The soldiers had been right about the port town; there was little Earth Empire presence here. Some had probably been called back to Omashu or even the border at this point. They'd managed to find an old dock just outside the settlement, and an even older looking boat to escape on.

As the prisoners started filing in, Baraz and Ahnah stopped. "Bolin," the firebender began, "I... I'm really sorry about how everything went down."

"You didn't have to save us. Yet you did. Twice," Ahnah added.

"Three times if you count my electro-magnetic disturbance!" Varrick said.

Bolin glared at Varrick before turning back to the trio, "Look, I know things got pretty bad. But I couldn't just leave you. You may look back at our time as a team differently, but I still care about you all. And Gombo," Bolin addressed the man behind them. "You were right. About Akito," he said, turning his face down. "I miss him. And it was my job to get us all out of Zaofu, and I failed. I don't expect this to make up for it either, so I'm telling you now, you guys can go wherever you want. Varrick and I have to get back to Republic City, but I don't want you to feel like you have to come too."

Gombo said nothing at first. After some time, he let out a deep exhale, "Yeah, I was kinda a prick, wasn't I?" He snorted, "You really came through."

Hearing his words made Bolin tear up. He still carried the guilt of everything that was happening, but just for a moment, his burden felt a little lighter.

"I guess Republic City it is," Gombo said. "There's room for you both."

"Ugh... on that hunk of junk?" Varrick replied, eyeing up the boat. "No thank you. I'm actually allergic to drowning –"

"Get on the boat," Bolin pushed him forwards.

After the last of them hopped on board, the boat drifted out to sea.

Inside the platinum domes of Zaofu, Kuvira moulded a hunk of meteorite in her hands. "So, let me get this straight," she said. "Bolin and Varrick managed to escape, blow up a train with all of our spirit vine technology, break into a training facility, and then get past our border?"

"When you put it like that...," Baatar replied.

If Kuvira was angry, she didn't let it show. "I'll have to revise the leadership in the Southern Division," she said. "As for the experiments, Zhu Li, how would you like a promotion?"

"Of course," Zhu Li replied.

Baatar spoke up, "I think I can replicate Varrick's work. But we'll need more samples."

Kuvira put the meteorite down, "The Avatar is no longer in the Foggy Swamp. We can harvest the whole tree if we like."

Zhu Li coughed lightly, "Excuse me, Kuvira sir, but what is it that you would like me to work on?"

Kuvira smiled, "How would you like to help build the most powerful weapon the world has ever seen?"

"It would be my honour, Great Uniter," Zhu Li replied as she bowed.

Chapter Text

The ground floor of Yue Hotel was one of the most exquisite in all of Republic City. Despite its name coming from the bay, and in turn the Water Tribe moon spirit, the décor had little Water Tribe influences. The white marble walls were adorned with gold finishings, and crimson velvet curtains were opened to reveal intricate glass windows.

The party itself was also a spectacle to behold. An invite-only art gala with all the elites of the United Republic. The men were dressed in grand three-piece suits with all kinds of lavish adornments, while the women were draped in fine silk dresses with furs and luxury jewellery.

Food was served by polite wait staff, each of them tiptoeing around the guests as if they were great spirits themselves. They may as well have been with the wealth the each had accumulated.

And all of it made Sota sick to his stomach.

The nonbender stood at the front door, collecting signatures from all the dignitaries as they entered. Part of a security measure, he'd convinced the staff. None of them thought to question it. Security wasn't light, but it also wasn't as if an army were stationed in the building. When the opportunity presented itself, this party would come to a grinding halt.

"Ladies and gentlemen!" a large man in a gaudy suit tapped his wine flute. "I would like to thank you all for coming here to this exquisite event tonight. I know that times have been challenging, with the war in the Earth Kingdom depriving many of our businesses of imported goods. Life has been hard. But, being able to gather here as celebrate the exceptional works of artists across the United Republic is something that brings a spark of hope to my heart."

The crowd gave nods and a modest clap at the man's words.

"And so, tonight, I would like to begin our esteemed art auction with...," the man paused. Something was tickling his throat. He gave a light cough, "Excuse me –" though it soon progressed into a full-on coughing fit. He held a silk handkerchief up to his mouth, spitting up gunk with the slightest tinge of reddish pink. After a moment longer he collapsed on the ground.

The audience shrieked and gasped in horror. Some pointed to their champagne flutes and dumped the contents. Though their questions were soon answered as two women leapt down from the rafters. Both wearing gas masks.

"So, it's begun," Sota said, watching from the front entrance. "Go hide in the kitchen," he said to the terrified wait staff nearby.

"Hey! What's going on!' a guard outside yelled.

Sota slipped on an electrified glove and sent the guard toppling over. With his other hand he quickly donned a gas mask, and then barred the door shut. He also tucked the signatures away inside his coat. That was their sole purpose for being here.

One of the women sent a gust of wind backwards into the crowd to knock them over, her red, silk sleeves dancing in the breeze. "Hui-Ying?"

"Here Yingtai," the other woman behind her said. She carefully pulled out a cluster of rocks from her pockets, not touching them with her hands directly. With a clenched fist she crushed them into powder, using a good amount of strength to do so. Her girlfriend caught the powder in another gust of air and dispersed it into the crowd with a quick sweep.

As the guests cried out and gasped for air, they too toppled over and passed out as the powder set it.

Some of the guards had managed to cover their mouths and made a beeline for the airbending and earthbending pair. Before they could reach them though, Yatsu dropped from the upper floor. "'Tis a distressing sight, but I promise you, brother, I have no quarrel with you."

The guard said nothing as he lunged forwards. Yatsu pivoted and slammed the man's chest with an electrified glove.

"Stop playing around," Daiyu said after joining him.

"Nothing I said was untrue?" Yatsu retorted.

Another guard ran at them, and this time, Daiyu stepped forward. She pulled out her thick daggers and struck the guard's legs with the blunt side. He yelped and stepped back, careful to not breathe in too deeply. After reaching into his pocket he pulled out several kunai and flung them forwards.

With a swift motion, Daiyu flicked her wrists. Her thick daggers opened up into fans. Silver, with each pleat ending in a sharp blade. Like an eel swan shielding itself with its wings, Daiyu blocked the incoming kunai. With a swift kick she propelled forwards, and this time, did draw blood. The man clutched his gashed arm, giving Daiyu a chance to slice the fabric covering his mouth. Within seconds, he succumbed to the toxin.

The guards had been taken care of, and all the guests laying out cold on the floor. After Daiyu nodded at Yingtai, she gathered the rest of the toxic dust and blew it out one of the windows into the night air. Everyone removed their masks.

"Did you get what we need?" Daiyu looked over to Sota as he strolled over.

Sota pulled out the clipboard of signatures, "This is only one part of the equation."

"We have about twenty minutes before they start waking up," Hui-Ying said. "Less before the police show up."

Daiyu pulled out another folder, "Then let's get their identities quickly."

When it rained it certainly did pour. That's what Lin's mother had often said. And standing outside a crime scene just a couple days after arriving back from the defeat at Zaofu sure felt like it.

"And no one was killed?" Lin asked her officer again.

The woman nodded, "All the guests and the staff have been taken to hospital for treatment, but no casualties yet Ma'am."

Lin grunted. At least that was a silver lining.

A gentle roar of a bison came from above. Tenzin landed Oogie on the footpath outside. Just as he did, Lin saw Raiko and Fire Lord Izumi with their entourage arriving as well.

"That was perfect timing," Lin remarked as she walked over.

Raiko pushed his glasses up, "Us arriving maybe, but this attack is certainly not perfect timing."

"What do we know so far?" Tenzin asked.

"Well," Lin began, "the event was an art gala hosted by Republic City's most elite. Invite only. Gate-crashed by a group wearing masks and using an airborne toxin of some kind. Lab suggests it's mineral."

"And how come we're only hearing about it now? Didn't the art auction happen last night?"

Lin nodded, "Seems the guests were out cold for a while, and the staff hid inside the kitchen for hours."

"Do we know who did this?" Tenzin asked. "Was it Kuvira?"

"Not sure yet," Lin replied. They still had several witnesses to interview, plus most of the guests were still getting treated.

Izumi stepped forward, "I brought Mako with me to have a look. He was a valuable asset during our own investigations."

Raiko frowned, "Mako? Why aren't you with the prince?"

"As I said, he investigated the criminal group in my nation. If there's any connection to this attack then it'd be best if he sees the scene with his own eyes."

"If there's a criminal group then the prince is in danger!" Raiko said. He wasn't having a bar of it. "Wu is the key to ending the war in the Earth Kingdom! If anything were to happen to him –"

"He's currently with my security detail," Izumi interrupted. "And five minutes away couldn't hurt."

Raiko didn't reply. Instead, he quietly fumed while turning his attention elsewhere.

Now that he had the green light, Mako walked over with Ilah to one of the wait staff. The poor woman had a blanket wrapped around her, shivering. Probably not from the cold but the shock. "Hey," Ilah said, "I know it's still pretty raw, but can you maybe help us answer some questions?"

The young woman looked between the two of them, then nodded.

"Can you tell us anything that might help us identify who did it?" Mako asked.

"There... there were at least five of them. I don't know if there were anymore," she answered.

"What did they look like?"

She paused, trying to recall the scene, "They had masks on. Some had dark clothes. Another a bright red kimono. She was an airbender I think. One of them was. The other crushed the rocks. She had shorter hair I think. A sleeveless orange tunic. I can't remember anything else about those two."

Nothing she'd said so far rang any bells. Mako continued, "What about the others?"

The woman swallowed, "One of them was a wait staff like us. Short hair. Spectacles. Didn't talk much to him, but he insisted on collecting signatures at the front door. I only really got a look at the other woman. She was in dark clothes I think. But she had these silver fans."

Mako exchanged a glance with Ilah, "Fans?"

"Like Avatar Kyoshi's."

"But silver?" Ilah asked.

The woman nodded, "And they had blades in the end."

"Did they say anything about what they wanted? Or why they were there?" Mako asked.

"No," she shook her head. "They said nothing. It all just... happened so fast." The woman started tearing up, "Sorry..."

"It's alright," Ilah held her hand. "You've been a big help. We promise we'll do what we can."

Through tearful eyes the woman nodded.

Mako and Ilah stood up and made their way back.

"Anything?" Lin asked.

"Not really," Mako said. "No one sounded familiar. Wore similar clothes, but then, that doesn't mean it's the same group. We also don't know why they attacked yet."

Lin folded her arms, "About as much as I got when I talked with another witnesses."

From the left, everyone watched as a polar bear dog plodded over. Korra's animal guide. "Hey, I heard there was an attack on the radio and...," Korra's face dropped as she saw everyone gathered there. "and you all came here. Without telling me."

A look of guilt and pity formed on Tenzin's face, "Korra, it's just... we thought you still needed rest."

Korra looked down for a moment, "I... I get it."

Looking to change the subject, Fire Lord Izumi made her way over, "Avatar Korra, I don't believe we've properly met. My name is Fire Lord Izumi, and this is my daughter, Crown Princess Ilah."

"It's an honour to meet you," Korra bowed to each of them. "Mako's said good things about you both."

"Oh?" Ilah turned to Mako, who went bright red.

"Anyway," Mako shook it off, "we don't know who was behind this attack just yet."

Korra nodded, "Well, I can help if you need it."

A satomobile pulled up beside the group. Out stepped a man in a fine suit, with a rather troubled look on his face, "Chief Beifong. I was told I'd find you here when I stopped by your empty office."

Lin walked forwards, "And you are?"

"Li Ta, an attorney representing two clients who were involved in the attack. They're in a stable condition I'm told. But their bank balances are not."

"What do you mean?"

Li Ta inhaled deeply, "Early this morning, as soon as central bank opened, their entire savings were transferred into another account, and then multiple transactions were made." He pulled out some notes from his pocket, "Cash was given out to the slums, large 'donations' made to local shrines. And I hear from other attorneys that it's the same with their clients."

Lin placed a hand on her chin, "But who authorised the transactions that quickly?"

"Probably paid off bankers," Li Ta replied. "But I'm not a detective. My job is to get my clients' money back, and I can't do that without your help Chief Beifong."

"Tell the Fraud and Finance office that I sent you. They can give you hand while I'm here," Lin said.

Li Ta nodded quickly, before walking back to his satomobile.

"The signatures!" Mako said. "That's how they did it." Everyone looked his way so he explained, "The waitress said someone was at the door taking signatures. Maybe they forged them and paid off the bank staff to get access to their assets?"

"It's likely. Though one thing's for certain," Lin turned back to Raiko, "I don't think Kuvira or Hou-Ting are in the business of stealing from the rich and giving to the poor."

Raiko quietly exhaled, pondering everything they'd learned. She had a point. "It doesn't mean that this is connected to the crimes committed in the Fire Nation, nor is it the Red Lotus," he said. "At least... for now we can hope."

"Nonetheless," Izumi began, "I'll relay all this to Lord Zuko. If there's a connection then he'll figure it out."

All of this talk of Red Lotus, crimes, and money made Korra feel even lower than before. It didn't help that she'd been forgotten when everyone decided to come here, but now, she felt even more out of her depth.

While everyone began parting ways, Korra made her way over to Mako, "Hey."

Mako looked back, "Yeah?"

"I know things are a bit crazy with all this," Korra said. "But I was wondering if you'd like to come to lunch with Asami and I today? Kwong's Cuisine. I was going to come by the embassy but you're here now."

Mako smiled, "I mean, I'd love to. But I'm still doing my time," Mako smirked as he showed off his bodyguard uniform."

"Can't you take a day off from Wu?" Korra asked. She didn't particularly enjoy her first encounter with the prince when she saw him in Zaofu.

"I'll... see what I can do," Mako said. "But it will be nice. Having the three of us back together."

Korra smiled. After a quick goodbye, she hopped back on Naga and headed for Air Temple Island.

The restaurant boasted a welcoming mix of sounds and smells. A lively and bouncy song came from a live band in the corner, and tantalising aromas drifted into the waiting room.

Korra made her way in. It had been a long time since she'd been anywhere this fancy, with this kind of food. She certainly felt underdressed in her usual Water Tribe clothes. But Asami had told her not to worry since she knew the owners.

In the waiting room she saw Asami. She had a different outfit on, similar burgundy colour palette though, and her raven hair was styled differently with two braids on either side running down the back and ending in a ponytail. The look suited her. It looked more adult, reminding Korra just how much they'd grown up. How long she'd been gone. Mako had said in Zaofu that Asami had missed her, and somehow, that knowledge hurt more than she'd thought it would.

Would Asami be angry at her? Would she understand why she was gone so long? Korra could've spent the whole day just standing there watching her as she poured over a magazine on engines from what she could see on the cover.

"I hope you haven't been waiting long," Korra finally said.

To her relief, Asami beamed from ear-to-ear as she looked up. "Only three years," she smirked, giving Korra a warm hug. "I've missed you."

Korra choked up as she leant into Asami's neck, "I've missed you too."

She held on for a moment longer before pulling away. Asami gave her hair a look, "Loving your hair by the way."

"Thanks," Korra said. She felt her cheeks grow warm as something bubbled inside her chest. "You look... snazzy as always." Damn it Korra! Snazzy?!

Thankfully, Asami laughed politely. "C'mon. The table's this way."

The pair turned the corner and saw Mako in his grey-green outfit. "Hey, you're here before us?" Asami asked.

Mako was first happy to see the both of them, though his expression changed to an uneasy look. "Well... yeah... about that. I – we – had to come early to check if the kitchen had any allergens."

"We?" Asami and Korra looked at each other.

Their questions were soon answered as a skinny man in green and gold popped up from the booth, "Avatar Korra! Asami Sato! How lovely to see you two beautiful ladies here!"

"Prince Wu," Korra said. She glared at Mako who gave an awkward shrug in response.

Asami raised an eyebrow, "I thought this was a Team Avatar lunch?"

"But of course! You need me on your little Avatar crew!" the Prince said.

"We really don't," Korra mumbled.

Her words didn't go unheard by Wu, but he laughed them away, "Ah, Avatar, I always enjoy your feistiness! Now, how about you go into the Avatar State! I want to see your eyes glowing!"

"No."

"Aw, why not?"

Korra was slightly irritated now, "Because, the Avatar State is not some tool to mess around with. It's a power that flows from the collective wisdom and energy of all the past lives." She couldn't believe she was quoting Tenzin right now, but it seemed to shut the prince up. Still, it wasn't easy talking about 'past lives' when she still hadn't reconnected to them. Korra changed the subject, "Why don't we order some starters?"

The four of them sat around the table as drinks and appetisers were brought. Asami asked about the crime scene this morning since it had been all over the news, and Mako had already told her about his investigations in the Fire Nation. Korra didn't share exactly how she was feeling being left out all the time. Apparently she needed to 'rest up' and people thought she couldn't handle anything anymore. Though Korra sunk into her seat a little as she realised there was some truth to it. She did lose to Kuvira.

"The fans!" Mako blurted out, snapping Korra back to the present.

"Fans?" Asami asked.

Mako nodded, "One of the witnesses said an attacker wielded silver fans. Like the Kyoshi Warriors, but these had blades at the end. But," he held a finger out, "at the Red River Facility, Ilah and I encountered a woman using weirdly thick daggers. What if those daggers fold out into fans? It could be the same person."

"Sounds like it could be," Korra replied.

"I should tell Ilah. After lunch of course," Mako said. Korra chuckled, and Mako furrowed his brow, "What?"

Korra shook her head, "You're doing detective work while we're supposed to be having lunch. Some things never change."

Mako laughed awkwardly. "I'm sorry."

"No, it's fine," Korra said. "But I want to know what has changed in your lives. What's been going on? It's been three years so I have a lot to be filled in on."

Wu set his glass down, "Mako has been working for me. As my bodyguard," he wore a chuffed grin while he spoke. "An honour for any hardworking citizen."

No one paid Wu any attention. Asami spoke up next, "Work has been pretty busy. Republic City needed a lot of tech and redesigning to work around the Spirit Wilds."

"Yeah, it does look a little different," Korra added. "Larger, and expanding."

"Asami did create the monorail network," Mako said.

"It wasn't just me," Asami said. "And what about you Korra? When you said that you couldn't go into the Avatar State I was worried. Have things improved?"

Korra thought back to Zaofu. She wanted to reassure Asami and tell her how much she'd recovered and grown, but it was hard to feel like she had after that defeat. "I dunno," Korra replied. "My time away really did help. And being with the Foggy Swamp Tribe also gave me a lot to work on. But I'm not sure about the Avatar State right now."

Mako wore a confused frown through Korra's explanation, "Wait, when did you tell Asami about your Avatar State?"

Korra said nothing. She glances awkwardly to Asami, who also remained silent.

"What's up with you two?"

Finally, Korra replied, "I... I wrote back to Asami. While I was in the South Pole." She could see Mako's face drop, "I told her not to tell anyone so don't blame her."

Mako folded his arms, "Okay."

"It's not that I didn't like you and Bolin's letters," Korra explained. "It's just... I dunno. I didn't really know what to say."

"Well, a 'hello how are you?' would've been nice."

"I know," Korra said. "I'm sorry. But I'm here now."

Despite trying to patch things up, the air was tense and filled with simmering emotions. Mako slunk back into the chair a little, arms still folded, and gazed off towards nothing in particular.

"Well, I um... I went to see my father," Asami said. She didn't exactly want to talk about it, but someone needed to change the subject.

"Really?" Korra said. "Are you sure that's a good idea?"

Asami sighed, "I know. It's hard for me to ever trust him. And until recently I was just... so angry I couldn't even think about him. He's been writing me letters for a while now and I didn't open any of them." She thought back to the moment she had tossed those letters across the desk in the visitor hall. "But it did help with the investigation. He told me about the device Mako was looking for."

"Did Hiroshi know anything about it?" Mako perked up.

"Yeah. I passed it on to Lord Zuko." Asami made an awkward frown, "I didn't get round to telling you Mako. With your new assignment and what happened in Zaofu."

Mako folded his arms. "I guess neither of you really want me involved," he mumbled quietly, though the others managed to hear him.

"Well, I have been keeping Mako very busy," Wu chimed in.

"So what is this device all about?" Korra asked.

Asami ignored Wu and turned to Korra, "My father says he designed it during the early days of the Equalist movement, before Amon had arrived. Apparently it was meant to be able to... remove someone's bending." She paused for a moment, "He said he never built it. And that he has never been involved with the Red Lotus. So if they do have it, then maybe someone stole the designs."

"I dunno," Korra mused.

Asami looked confused, "About what?"

"Your father," Korra answered. "I mean, if he was willing to join the Equalists then it isn't much of a stretch to join the Red Lotus."

"They're completely different," Asami replied.

"All I'm saying is that you shouldn't trust Hiroshi with everything he says. He could just be lying to get back a relationship with you."

Asami felt an anger inside, "Korra, do you not think I know what my father is like? Do you not think I can still tell when he is being genuine and when he isn't? I've known him my whole life." She nearly bumped her drink over, "You don't get to come back after being gone for three years and tell me what I should or shouldn't do. The main reason I went to see him was for you anyway."

Although a little shocked at her outburst, Korra felt a pang of regret inside, "I'm... sorry Asami."

She could see Asami also felt guilty, "No, Korra, I shouldn't have reacted like that." Asami exhaled deeply and rubbed her forehead. "I guess it still brings up a lot of emotion in me."

All three turned when Wu started slurping the last of his drink rather noisily. He finished with a sigh, "Well, as exciting all this drama has been, I believe it's time to relieve my royal bladder." After hopping to his feet, he clicked at Mako, "C'mon."

Mako still had his arms folded, "No."

"Uh... what?"

"You don't need me to watch you pee every time you need to empty your 'royal bladder'. You can go by yourself this time."

Wu sunk his head low, "Okay." After mumbling something incoherent, the prince slunk off to the bathrooms alone.

Silence engulfed the table. Korra couldn't help but wish Wu were back here, which she'd never thought she'd say. But with Mako brooding and her and Asami feeling bad about their spat, their reunion was going rather poorly.

Peeing by himself wasn't actually that bad. But Wu would never tell Mako that. After he was done, Wu stared in the mirror for a good minute or so before a staff member joined him in the room.

"Care to freshen up sir? A sprit of cologne?"

"Make it a double buddy!" Wu replied. He closed his eyes and held his arms out.

"Of course sir," the staff member replied. Though as he lifted the perfume towards Wu, he covered his mouth with a towel.

A red mist came out from the bottle.

"Ugh! Ack!" Wu coughed and spluttered from the perfume. It certainly wasn't cologne. "Wu... down!" the prince uttered as he fell to the floor. His vision went black.

The food had started arriving at the table, which at least made the situation less awkward. There didn't have to be any talking while they were eating. But still, Korra felt frustrated with how their lunch had gone. She had to try something.

"Mako," Korra said. "I'm sorry I didn't write to you. I should've. And Bolin. I... don't know why I didn't. But I want you to know that I wish I had."

Mako finished his mouthful. "At the end of the day I'm just glad that you're back here. When you were gone, we were all so worried," he said, remembering back to that night after the Summit dinner. "With the possible Red Lotus attacks I was investigating and the device connected to Hiroshi, it was all just scary. I thought maybe you'd been taken by them again." He sighed, "So whatever happened before, I'm just glad you're alright now."

Korra smiled warmly, "Thanks. I really appreciate it." After another mouthful of food Korra continued, "I mean, it's not like I had a manual on 'How to Get a Debilitating Illness and Recover' or anything. Maybe would've given me some pointers." She chuckled.

The other two smirked as well. Mako smiled, "Well, you'd probably have enough experience to write your own one now."

"Yeah!" Korra laughed.

There was another pause before Asami spoke next, "You know, I guess after three years apart, it was always going to take some adjusting to get back together. But I'm glad we are." Her smile faded as she realised she'd forgotten someone, "Well... most of us I mean."

Asami was referring to Bolin of course. The four of them had been 'Team Avatar' when they all met in Republic City those years ago. "We'll help him," Korra reassured Mako. "He'll have to realise what Kuvira's doing is wrong sooner or later."

"Yeah," Mako nodded. It was hard, not being able to protect his younger brother and keep him from making bad decisions. But maybe he just had to trust that wherever he was, he'd eventually make his way back.

Another dish was brought to the table. "I think that's everything we ordered," Korra said. She looked to the empty seat next to her, "So, how long does it take for Wu to empty his 'royal bladder'?"

Mako waved his hand, "We can stop calling it that you know," he laughed. Though his face grew a bit more serious, "I'll go check on him." He got up and made his way to the bathrooms.

"Wu?" Mako called out once inside. He heard nothing. "C'mon, the food's getting cold, are you in here?" Still no reply. He started knocking and opening the cubicles. It seemed he was alone.

Asami and Korra waited outside the bathrooms. Something didn't feel right. Korra looked to her left and saw the staff loading laundry into the trucks. "I'll just be a minute," Korra said.

She made her way outside to the loading bay. "Excuse me," she called to one of the staff, "have you seen Prince Wu around here by any chance?"

The man shook his head politely, "I'm sorry Miss, but we have not." He tipped his lot of laundry bags into the truck.

Just as he did, a head popped out from between the bags. "I'm... in... laundry," Wu mumbled. He was dosed up with something.

Korra's eyes widened and she lunged at the staff. Though he caught her off-guard and launched a wall underneath her, slamming the Avatar into the roof with a thud. The man sprinted to the front of the vehicle and took off.

Asami and Mako had heard the commotion and ran over. "They have Wu!" Korra said as she was helped up by Asami. "I'm gonna go after them. Grab the car!"

As Asami and Mako ran back, Korra sprinted out the loading bay. She could just see the white metal truck ahead, though she wouldn't be able to reach it for long. As the truck screeched around the corner, Korra brought up a line of pillars in the road. They crashed underneath the truck, hauling it in the air, but it managed to land and keep driving.

Another tire screech came from behind. This time, it was Asami. "Get in!"

"It's the white truck up ahead!" Korra pointed as she leapt inside the vehicle.

Asami swerved her satomobile around others on the road, getting occasional honks from angry drivers. Thankfully the roads weren't too busy. The truck up ahead swerved into a side street. Just as Asami made the same turn, a massive stone wall shot up. Korra reached forwards and managed to break through it, but the truck was too far ahead.

"We can cut them off on the other side," Asami said. She shifted the gears into reverse, then then floored it once they were back on the main road.

They sped through another intersection, and then atop an overpass. "There!" Mako yelled once he saw the truck. Asami had been right about cutting them off.

"I'm on it!" Korra called out. She leapt from the satomobile and landed on top of the truck below them. She held on for a moment, and then ripped open the metal roof with a clench of her fingers. The driver realised what was happening and looked up. Panicking, he picked up speed. But Korra was already inside. With a gust she flung the driver back, and quickly braked the vehicle to a grinding halt.

The truck stopped just short of crashing into a spirit vine. As Korra yanked the man out from the truck, Asami and Mako arrived. "Wu's not here," Korra said. "It was just this guy."

"They must've swapped vehicles when we lost them down the side street," Asami said.

Mako grabbed the man's collar and threw him against the metal truck, "Tell us where the prince is!" The man said nothing, and Mako examined him closer, "Wait... I know this guy. Low-level thug. Part of the Red Monsoons."

"Give me a little more credit than that – oof!" Mako slammed him against the truck again.

Asami had her glove on and gently picked up a perfume bottle, "Is this like the one used at the party last night?" Korra sealed it in an air funnel and brought it over.

"It was a gift from some new friends I made. Real keen to get their hands on the prince. I was happy to oblige," he coughed as Mako slammed him a third time.

"Where is he!" Mako yelled.

"They wouldn't tell me!"

Mako grunted, "How convenient! You lying viper rat! Tell us where Wu is!"

The man shook his head, "It's true! I'm just a 'low-level thug' as you said. All I had to do was bring the prince to the side street and drive off. That's all I know I swear!"

Mako wanted to rough the guy up more, but he'd only be doing so to vent his anger and frustration. Thankfully a cop car had pulled up. "Take this guy in. He's involved in a kidnapping accident," Mako informed. "And tell Chief Beifong that Prince Wu is missing. Put out an all-points bulletin. Hurry!"

The young cop nodded and quickly handcuffed the driver.

Mako exhaled sharply, "The one time I don't watch him pee!" he said, burying his face into his hands.

"He could be anywhere by now," Asami added. "Do you know where they might take him?"

"No," Mako answered. "I don't. I have no idea where he could be."

This was bad. There were thousands of satomobiles in the city, and they had no leads on where Wu was being taken. Korra grunted as she took a few steps. She had to think of something. Next to her was the spirit vine that she nearly crashed into, and there were a collection of floating spirits all hovering nearby, almost like they could sense their strife. Korra's eyes widened, "The vines!" she said.

Asami and Mako turned to her, "What?" Mako asked.

"While in the swamp, I was able to connect to Jinora's energy using the spirit vines. If these are like the vines in the Foggy Swamp, then maybe I can do the same." She closed her eyes while placing a hand on the vine. She breathed in, and out, calming herself. A tingling presented in her palm, and a slight goldish glow emanated from the spot where she connected. Her spirit was searching for Wu.

There was a slight pull in one direction, but it was lost. She kept waiting, searching, but couldn't find anything.

"What do you see?" Asami asked.

Korra shook her head, "I... felt something for a moment. But then it was gone."

"Great," Mako mumbled. Asami gave him a glare and he sighed, "I just... I just thought it would work."

"So did I," Korra said. She pulled away from the vine.

Asami looked to Korra, "You felt something for a moment though. What does that mean?"

"I don't know. When I saw Jinora it was clear. She was right there in the swamp, battling the vines. This wasn't anything like that."

"Does it mean... that Wu is...," Mako didn't finish his sentence. He couldn't

"We can't give up," Asami said. She wasn't about to give in to despair. "Wait," she said, "What if... what if you can only connect to people when they're near the spirit vines? You said Jinora was fighting them off. Maybe Wu brushed past the vines for a second and that's what you felt."

Mako exhaled, "We're in Republic City. There're vines everywhere!"

Korra nodded, "Not everywhere though." Her eyes widened, "Not all the way out in Yue Bay."

"Aang Memorial Island!" Asami said. "If they were going to Air Temple Island then they'd be spotted immediately, and that's the only other main island out there."

"We have to get in touch with Lin. Get the RCPD out there," Mako said. "We have to get him back."

Chapter Text

Wu's head was still groggy. He could feel something cold and metal behind him. Clunking footsteps. When he eventually came to, he realised what was happening.

He had been kidnapped.

His eyes flew open, wide with terror. He tried calling out but his mouth was gagged. All the wriggling in the world couldn't free his hands, which were stuck behind his back. His chest heaved in and out quickly as panic set in.

"Prince Wu," a voice said.

Wu froze. His eyes only just peeked up towards the figure. It was a woman. She was in dark black and grey clothes, a stealthy looking attire, with a few crimson elements and dark silver armour. She had several knives strapped to her hips, arms, and thighs.

"My name is Daiyu. I imagine this must be quite an ordeal for you."

A cold fever ran through Wu's body. It was like he was dreaming. Or in another world entirely. He shut his eyes wishing it all away.

Daiyu understood what was going on, "I know you're scared. But just because you are here, it doesn't mean you have to die today."

Have to die. Those words set Wu off into an uncontrollable sob.

"Way to go Daiyu," Sota scoffed.

Daiyu turned to the other nonbender, "What? I was trying to calm him down?"

"Did a great job of that."

"Enough," Yatsu stepped in. "Perhaps I can calm the young prince's nerves?"

Hui-Ying smirked, "Yeah, put him to sleep with one of your poems while you're at it."

Yatsu cut her a glare, but said nothing. "It is true that one cannot choose where and when they are born. You did not choose to be born into the Hou-Ting Dynasty, just as I did not choose to be born into poverty in the Fire Nation," Yatsu said. "But alas, because of your position in this unsavoury society, you are the instrument for us to right the wrongs of this tragic world."

Somehow, Wu had calmed down. If only slightly.

Daiyu walked over, "You can ask us about it if you want."

Once she removed his gag, Prince Wu coughed a little and groaned. He turned his eyes to Daiyu, "So... can I please use the bathroom?"

Daiyu's face dropped, "What?"

"I really, really need to go," Wu explained. "You kidnapped me just before I was going! My royal bladder can't hold on this long please!"

"There's nowhere to go up here I'm afraid," Daiyu answered.

Now that Wu had calmed down, he started noticing his surroundings. They were in a circular, metal room. Some kind of dome. With a greenish tinge to it. It was dark, with only a small amount of light coming from a lantern and a hole in the roof.

He looked back to Daiyu, "Is this because I'm a prince? Please let me go!" he begged. "I don't know if you've heard but it's not like a have a lot of wealth. Kuvira stole my whole country, and my throne! So if you want something go ask her, not me!"

"One born into gold only thinks in gold," Yatsu said out loud. "We don't want money."

Wu looked shocked. And worried. If he couldn't argue his way out of this then he wasn't sure how he'd get out. Mako had to on his trail, surely he would save him? "What do you want with me then? I can't help you! Just let me go."

"But you can," Daiyu said. "And you don't have to do anything. Just wait here. Then, when we get what we want, you can go."

Wu stammered, "R-really? I-is... that all?"

"Sure. Do you think you can do that? Or are you going to be a problem?"

Wu nodded emphatically, "I'll be good, I promise! Just don't hurt me please! I'll... I'll even hold my royal bladder in so I won't have to go to the bathroom."

Daiyu smiled, "Perfect." She opened a hatch to the side, revealing the bright outside light. Wind roared into the tiny cabin. "Because we need to hang you outside from the statue."

At first Wu didn't understand. But then he remembered how Daiyu had said 'up' here. "Oh no no no no no! You said nothing about –"

A gag muffled Wu's cries. He felt metal shackles clamp around his wrists and ankles.

"Let's make sure they get a good view," Daiyu said.

There were jet skis buzzing over the waves like hovering hummingbirds under the midday sun. Airships in the skies looking down. Police gathered along one the docks of Yue Bay. Everyone ready to act should they need to.

When Korra and the others arrived they'd hoped Lin could organise a massive rescue, but they hadn't expected this. Mako had called the chief on the way to explain what was going on, and she'd pulled out every stop to find the prince. It also helped having the United Forces in Republic City too; their warships were stationed all over the bay, with General Iroh commanding them from his flagship. One way or another, they were going to rescue Wu.

After parking their satomobile, Asami, Korra, and Mako, jogged along the promenade to where a tent had been set up. Korra saw her parents had brought Naga and Pabu, who ran up to the group to greet them. "Any more news?" Korra asked her father while petting Naga.

"No sightings yet," Tonraq replied.

As they got closer, Mako felt his stomach sink, "Oh... it's Raiko." Truth was he hadn't even considered what Raiko would say for losing Wu until now. His thoughts had been devoted to finding the prince.

"We'll talk after this," Raiko said as Mako approached. He didn't look up from the maps on the desk.

"Right... sir."

Fire Lord Izumi was also there with several guards. Ilah ran up to the group, "Mako. Are you alright?"

Mako smiled, "We're fine, but it's just Wu. We have to get him back."

"Do you know who took him?" Fire Lord Izumi asked.

"Yeah," Mako nodded. "I think it's the same group we encountered at the Red River Facility." Ilah looked confused so he explained, "The woman with the thick daggers. Do you remember her? I think she may be the same person who attacked at the party yesterday."

Ilah pondered the idea, "Yeah. Those weapons were strange. Maybe they fold out into fans like the waitress saw?"

"And they paid off some local thugs to kidnap Wu. That's who we ran into after the restaurant. Just like they paid off local gangs in the Fire Nation."

Lin nodded along while listening to all of it. "And you think he might be out at sea?"

Korra stepped forwards, "I couldn't sense Wu's energy – well, only for a brief moment – and so we figured he might be somewhere where there aren't many spirit vines. Otherwise I could've connected to him."

"So it's a hunch," Raiko sighed. "A hunch from an Avatar."

"You got any better ideas?" Korra replied. She wasn't in the mood for Raiko, president or not.

Raiko scoffed, but didn't reply.

A policewoman charged through the tent, "Chief Beifong! We have a sighting on the prince!"

Everyone's heads turned. She handed the binoculars to Lin and pointed in the direction they saw him. "Oh Raava on high..."

"What?" Raiko asked.

Lin put the binoculars down, "He's chained to the Avatar Aang statue."

Everyone ran to the edge of the promenade. Even without binoculars, most of them could see chains stretched across the Avatar Aang Statue's head, with a person in the middle of them.

"Damn it!" Mako yelled the side. Ilah tried comforting him with a hand around his shoulder.

"All eyes on Aang Memorial Island! Start circling it!" Lin ordered into the radio. At her command, the ships, airships, and other personnel started enclosing the island.

A United Forces soldier this time ran up a dock from an incoming boat, "Chief Beifong!" he caught his breath, "There's an unoccupied row boat drifting this way. Someone on the island is directing it here. What should we do?"

"A boat being directed?" Ilah mused. "Could be that massive waterbender we ran into?"

Tenzin landed with a gust as he flicked his glider wings back inside, "I managed to get a look. I think there's a radio inside?"

"Could be an explosive too," Lin replied. She looked to the soldier, "Bring it in. But get the bomb squad on it first."

The man saluted before running back to his boat.

Lin turned to Mako, "How many of them are there that you know of from the Fire Nation investigations?"

"Well... Ilah and I only encountered the two of them. But from the party last night, it seems they have at least five."

"Five," Lin mused. She scoffed, "If it really is them, then four was enough to nearly take down the entire world. We have sightings of at least three on the island."

Korra stepped forward, "But there's nowhere they can escape. We can box them in."

Raiko shifted his glasses, "The priority is Prince Wu. If some of them get away, then so be it. He's the key to us solving the mess in the Earth Kingdom, let's not forget."

It was no secret now that Raiko was desperate to have Wu on the throne for his own reasons. But still, letting this group go seemed like a bad idea, even if they had to prioritise Wu first.

"I have airbenders bringing in cloud cover into the bay. Jinora and Kai will be able to swoop down and rescue Wu. But we'll need to draw their attention first," Tenzin said.

"Let's just see what they have to say first," Raiko replied. He looked to Lin, "How long till the radio is here?"

"Should be another five minutes."

The tent fell into silence, with everyone dwelling on their own thoughts. Eventually, Lin brought the radio over and placed it on a desk by Raiko. All eyes fell to the president. He paused, and then picked up the receiver. "This is President Raiko of the United Republic of Nations."

Static crackled, and then eventually, a voice echoed through the speaker.

"Mr President. I wasn't sure if you'd take my call."

Raiko scoffed, "Well, it's safe to say you have my attention. Now, I'm ordering you to release the prince safely. We have the island surrounded and there's nowhere for you to go."

"Well, you are organised. But I'm afraid I myself am not in Republic City right now."

After quickly hitting the mute button, Raiko turned to the policewoman, "Tap the call. Now." After the woman attached several wires and chucked on a headset, Raiko unmuted the receiver, "So, who am I speaking with then? Are you part of the Red Lotus?"

"The Red Lotus is just an idea. Anyone can take on the name, so long as their ideals fit within the philosophy of our order."

"Then let me rephrase: Do you have any connection to the previous Red Lotus members whom we dealt with? Zaheer?"

There was a slight pause, "Zaheer was one of us. As were P'Li, Ming-Hua, and Ghazan."

"So, I suppose you'd like to trade for your friend Zaheer then?" Raiko said.

"No, in fact, I do not. What happened to my son was regrettable, and tragic, but it was destiny."

Korra looked to Asami and mouthed the word 'son'. This was certainly a development.

"You see, unlike your governments and organisations, or the corrupted White Lotus for that matter, we do not dictate exactly how our members should act in every step. Zaheer and his followers were allowed to pursue their plans so long as they fit in line with our philosophy. It is sad that they did not come to fruition, but fate always finds a way."

"So if you are the Red Lotus, then who am I speaking with?"

"You can call me Grand Lotus."

Korra felt a shiver go down her spine. She'd grown up with the White Lotus all around her, and she knew that there were only a few who held the 'Grand Lotus' title in their order. If the Red Lotus were mirroring the White Lotus in their usage of the title, then this man on the phone was possibly the highest ranking member in their group.

Raiko spoke into the receiver again, "So if you don't want us to free Zaheer, then what is it that you want? I assume kidnapping Wu was so you could exchange him for something?"

"Not a something, but a someone. We want Hiroshi Sato."

Asami held in a gasp as she heard her father's name. And she knew why; it was the device they had.

"Well, I'm not in the business with negotiating with terrorists. If you release the prince safely then we could arrange a meeting. But even then, I'm not going to hand anyone over to you."

"That's a shame. But see, the young prince is not just a bargaining chip; it's also a test. You see, this world is headed towards a great catastrophe. Our complacency, our insistence to worship figureheads who lord their power and status over others, are things that will lead to our destruction. If you're there Avatar Korra then I know you've seen what I had seen. A vision of a Great Calamity in Republic City, but one that affects the whole world. A war between the Spirit World and the material. It was that vision that Xai Bau and I shared and prompted us to start the Red Lotus."

"In the swamp," Korra whispered to Asami. Her eyes widened as she remembered. "I saw a man in my vision watching the same thing I was."

The Grand Lotus continued, "That is why it does not matter whether you decide to exchange Hiroshi or not. The prince is also a test. If you exchange with us, we get Hiroshi. If you don't, then the world will lose another figurehead and be closer to gaining true freedom. Wu has no strengths, not value, only his birth which gave him unfathomable power. That is exactly what will lead to humanity's downfall."

Raiko didn't know how to respond. If the Red Lotus weren't that desperate then why set this up? Just to prove a point? There had to be a way to bargain his way out of this.

"But I think our time is nearly up; you are tracing this call I assume, and I'm not ready to emerge out of the shadows yet. I'll give you an hour to decide. Give Hiroshi Sato to my brethren, or watch the prince fall to his death. Whatever happens, happens. Destiny will continue on."

"Wait –" Raiko was cut off before he could say anything more. He placed the receiver down. "Did you get anything?" he turned to the policewoman.

"Somewhere west of here. That's the best I could do sorry," she removed her headset. "Another minute we could've had a more exact location."

Raiko didn't reply. He removed his glasses and rubbed the bridge of his nose.

"We can't trade with them," Korra said. "And not just because it's Asami's father; last time I tried to exchange myself for the airbenders Zaheer tricked me. We can't trust they'll follow through."

"Then what can we do?" Raiko slammed a hand onto the desk.

The tent fell silent. No one had any ideas right now. They couldn't just move in since that would risk Wu's safety. They needed some kind of distraction so the airbenders could move in. But they couldn't risk giving them Hiroshi after their last exchange at the Northern Air Temple.

Silence continued, until Bumi's face lit up. "Oh I know! We do what I did back in the Mo Ce Sea! When I was patrolling Whale Tail Island!"

"Bumi...," Tenzin chided. His brother's ideas were often the most outlandish and unfathomable.

"No, I'm serious," he turned to Tenzin.

Raiko sighed, "What did you have in mind?"

"We do make the exchange," Bumi said. "But we give 'em a taste of their own medicine."

All eyes fell on Bumi, wondering what kind of weird idea the crazy airbending uncle would come up with for this mission.

"When I came up with this idea I didn't think I'd be the one in disguise."

Bumi, Tenzin, and Tonraq drifted along the waves off Yue Bay. Tonraq kept the boat steady, while Tenzin stood next to his brother at the front. Bumi was no longer in his ill-fitting wingsuit but now dressed in rags, with metal shackles binding his hands, and long white and grey hair stuck to his head and chin.

He was their 'Zaheer'.

"We had to pick an airbender. In case they try and ask for proof," Tenzin said.

"I'm still not sure they'll go for it," Tonraq said. He pushed the boat ahead another stretch with his waterbending, "They did say they wanted Hiroshi."

"That's the whole point of my Whale Tail Island story!" Bumi defended. "We gave those pirates something they didn't know they wanted."

Tonraq raised an eyebrow, "Which for the pirates was... crotchet classes?"

Bumi waved his hand, "It's the idea that matters."

As they started to close the distance, Tenzin pushed his brother down to his knees. "Zaheer is much shorter remember."

"Alright, alright," Bumi said. He started scratching his chin. The glued-on hair was awful. "This beard is so itchy though!"

"Opal's bison has allergies, so that might be why."

Bumi's eyes went wild, "You made me a fake wig and beard from bison hair?!"

"It's all we could get in time!" Tenzin said. "Look, just keep it up for a while longer. We just have to stall long enough for Korra and the airbenders to get into place."

While Bumi grumbled, Tonraq slowed their boat down as they were close to Avatar Aang Island. They had to keep a good distance away to keep up the illusion.

Back on the shore, Raiko and Izumi kept their gaze towards the bay. "Are you there yet?" Raiko spoke into the radio.

"Yes Mr President. We're close now." Tenzin replied.

"Alright." Raiko sighed, "Better get this over with."

Izumi nodded, picking up her own radio, "Avatar Korra. It's time. Start making your way in."

On Air Temple Island, Korra placed the radio onto Naga's saddle. "Let's get going." She hoped onto Naga's back, Along with Asami, Ilah, and then Mako holding on behind. It was a little squashy, but it was the best they could do.

Pabu clambered his way around Mako. "Are you sure it's safe for him?" Ilah turned around to Mako.

"Oh, so you do care about Pabu now huh?" Mako grinned.

Ilah blushed, though she looked rather annoyed, "Of course I do."

Mako smiled, "Here, you can hold him then. I don't think he'd leave Naga's side even if he had to."

Ilah took a hold of the small fire ferret, who chittered away happily.

"Alight, everyone hold on," Korra said. She looked up to Opal on her bison Juicy, who now had several shorter patches on his fur, "Help Jinora and Kai if you can. We'll try keep the Red Lotus busy."

"On it. Be careful," Opal replied.

"You too."

Korra led Naga forwards into the water. As they got deeper, she crafted a bubble around them, holding it steady as they made their way underwater. Naga kicked along and propelled them towards Avatar Aang Island.

"Huh," Yingtai lay on her back on the grass, watching the skies. "That cloud looks like a poodle pony. Don't you think?"

Ren grunted, "That's the fifth cloud you've said looks like a poodle pony."

The airbender laughed, "And that one looks like an angry Daiyu!"

"Let's focus," Ren replied.

"You know what I mean, right Ju?"

The hulking earthbender didn't say anything. He sat still as a statue, almost as still as the copper Avatar Aang one above him.

Ren narrowed his eyes, "There's a boat up ahead. Get the others."

Tenzin could just make out a group standing on the island. About three he noticed, two large, muscular men, and one woman in bright red. They were soon joined by some others. "We have Zaheer to exchange for Prince Wu!" Tenzin bellowed. He let gusts of wind carry his voice the distance.

It took a few seconds for his voice to travel.

"Oh cool, an airbender carrying his voice," Yingtai remarked. "I'm gonna try that too," she said, brushing her auburn hair out the way and clearing her throat, "We asked for Hiroshi Sato you stupid hog monkeys!" she chuckled, before seeing her girlfriend glaring at her. "What?"

Tenzin sighed as he got the reply message. "We cannot give you Hiroshi. But we want to trade Zaheer. We know he means a lot to you," he replied. He tried calming the nerves in his stomach, but this idea of Bumi's was the only one they had. He looked up and saw the clouds starting to hover above the island. Hopefully Jinora, Kai, and Opal were right in place above them.

On the island, Daiyu narrowed her eyes as they got the response. She said nothing, and stormed off into the building.

"What should we do?" Hui-Ying called out to their group leader, but she continued in silence.

"Wait a minute, I'll talk to her," Sota said. He followed after Daiyu.

Once inside, he found Daiyu leaning against a wall with her arms folded. She said nothing. Sota sighed, "Look, I know how you feel."

Daiyu turned back slightly, "Do you know what I'm feeling?"

"Yes, I do," Sota insisted. "It's Zaheer, isn't it?" He waited for a reply, but only got silence. Sota continued, "It's why you're always pushing us to do better than he did. It's why you're always comparing yourself to him. I... know the three of us fight a lot, but... I'm here to tell you that I get it."

Nothing more than a grunt left Daiyu's lips. She kept her back to him.

Sota ran a hand through his short hair, "Zaheer was a nonbending orphan like the rest of us. Much older, but the same. And yet, Father loved him more. And the spirits loved him more by giving him airbending and leaving us as we are." He let out a spiteful smirk, "I do get it, Daiyu. Even though he's one of us, he's had much more going for him than you or I have. But you know what Father would say at a time like this. We need Hiroshi to finish our device, but we could also do with Zaheer."

Daiyu maintained her silence. It seemed it would linger forever, until she finally opened her mouth, "A man wanders the desert looking for water, but he finds an apple peach orchard instead. Does he pass it by to find an oasis? Or –"

"Or take the bountiful fruit in front of him?" Sota finished. He smiled. As much as their father – and their brother Yatsu's – constant poems annoyed then, at times they were rather applicable.

"Well," Daiyu let out a small sigh. She said nothing more as she walked back out, with Sota following.

Once outside, everyone looked back to Daiyu. She had only her eyes showing, with her crimson cloth covering her neck and mouth and dark fringe concealing her forehead. But everyone could see her eyes, which we calculating, and determined.

"We need to confirm that it really is Zaheer. Then, we make the trade."

"I thought we wanted the Sato guy?" Hui-Ying said.

Daiyu nodded, "Yes. But we shouldn't pass up this chance to get Zaheer. He is in a maximum security prison after all."

Sota reached for a pair of binoculars, "I'll have a look." He scanned the horizon, and made eye contact with the boat. The airbending master Tenzin was there at the front, and the Chief of the Southern Water Tribe keeping the boat steady. In the front, he saw a man in shackles with long thick hair. "It looks like him," Sato said. "His hair has gone pretty white though."

"Time makes even the strongest yield, with markers of its collective inevitable destiny etched into our being," Yatsu added.

Hui-Ying rolled her eyes, "Does everything need a poem?"

"The real question is, why shouldn't something have a poem? Not, does it need one?"

"Ugh," Hui-Ying facepalmed.

Sota looked back to Daiyu, waiting for her next move. She didn't want to rush into anything right now. "Get them a bit closer first, and ask him to airbend." Yingtai relayed the message, and the boat started inching closer.

Sota watched as the chained man in the boat let a gust into the air. "Definitely an airbender."

"Alright," Daiyu said. "Tell them when they dock we'll start letting Wu down. But not a moment before." Things seemed too good to be true. And that made Daiyu uneasy.

Sitting by the edge of the water, Ren had submerged himself up to his neck. His eyes were closed, as if he were deep in a trance. "Daiyu," he said in a deep voice. "I'm getting some vibrations coming from the east."

"Well, I don't need sonar to tell you there's boats out there," Hui-Ying said. Yingtai gave her a look as if to say, 'stop being so grumpy'.

"Not boats," Ren continued. "Underwater."

"Our getaway?" Daiyu asked.

Sota shook his head, "It's something else."

Daiyu scanned the horizon towards the east. Air Temple Island was that way, but not much else. The other side of Republic City perhaps? Something in the ocean? It could be anything, but Ren's water sense wasn't something to be ignored.

Air Temple Island.

Daiyu spun forwards. The boat was much closer now, and without the binoculars, she could see the three men in the row boat. "Tell Zaheer to hover in the air."

That would do it. There were plenty of airbenders in Republic City, but only one she knew had gained that ability. That would settle it.

Yingtai relayed the message. The three in the boat paused. There was no movement. Daiyu narrowed her eyes.

"Daiyu! It's closer!" Ren yelled.

There was still nothing from the boat. Daiyu turned to Yingtai, "Drop him. "

The airbender nodded, sprinting along the path and launching up onto the Aang statue's knee.

Daiyu looked back to the others, "We fight and then run!"

Just as she said this, a massive wave surged forward from the boat. Behind them, Ren's face turned to shock as a polar bear dog leapt out from the water. A wave swept onto the island from behind as well.

The Avatar and her companions.

"Get in!" Ren yelled. He formed a protective water shell as the waves collided over them. The torrent lasted a few seconds before washing away, and Ren let his shell down. Now, they were ready to fight for their lives.

Naga let everyone hop off her back, save for Pabu, who clung to the polar bear dog's saddle. Korra called out to the others, "The airbenders are going after Wu so we have to keep these guys busy!" She started with a flame jet, though a man with a sword managed to slice it in half. "Wha... what?"

"Not everything is as it seems," Yatsu said. He lunged is sword forward, and a bolt of electricity shot forth from his electrified glove.

Mako was quick to step in and catch the bolt, redirecting it into the sky where it crackled. His lessons in the Fire Nation had certainly paid off.

Out of the corner of her eye, Ilah saw a woman with a topknot running to a door leading inside the statue. She narrowed her eyes, and then shot forth a fire ball. It crashed right in front of the woman before she could make it inside.

She turned back, staring down her opponent. "Crown Princess," Hui-Ying said, cold and emotionless, yet full of resentment at the same time.

Ilah said nothing, but readied her fists. She punched forward several flares, though her opponent used the earth to shift between each one. Once closer, Hui-Ying punched up a boulder into Ilah's side, sending her back a few steps.

"Sota! I'll get you to the sub!" Daiyu shouted over the noise. Her brother nodded, donning an electrified glove just in case. As they ran between the statue's legs, The Avatar and her friend the Sato heiress blocked their path. Their polar bear dog also prowled behind them.

"This ends here," Korra said boldly. Asami fitted her own electrified glove on.

"Ju!" Daiyu called out. The massive earthbender was the tallest and largest of all their group. "Hold back the beast."

Ju silently nodded, readying his metal prosthetic arm.

Korra began the duel with a series of fire strikes, each aimed at the trio. Daiyu ducked around each one and lunged at Asami. She was quick, probably one of the swiftest opponents Asami had faced, but Asami managed to block Daiyu's knife as it struck the metal of her glove.

Blue electricity crackled as Asami went for a counter, but Daiyu leapt away. Sota took her place, slicing through the air with his own trail of electricity. The two ducked around each other and struck out with their gloves, neither quite landing a hit.

Korra blocked an attack from Daiyu with a wall. She stomped the creation forwards, hoping to catch Daiyu off-guard, though she was quick. On the other side of the path, Naga was busy gnawing on Ju's arm, though she whimpered as she was pushed back.

Continuing her onslaught, Korra lashed out a wave of ocean water at the pair to stun them, and then several fireballs. Only now did Daiyu fan out her weapons, and the fire blasts sizzled against them. She charged forwards again, swiping at Korra from all sides, while Korra kept her airbending up to avoid the strikes.

Meanwhile, Ju formed a cable from his arm and tried to snag Naga, though the polar bear dog caught it in her teeth and threw the man into the ocean. It seemed he wasn't the strongest one on the island.

"Ugh! This beard! And hair!" Bumi complained. He tried sending out gusts in an effort to stop the waterbender on the island.

"Bumi! Keep focused!" Tenzin yelled back. He jumped off the boat and into the air, sending powerful gales at the man. Ren's octopus form was impeccable, and none of them broke through.

Tonraq stepped to the front of the boat. "Watch out!" he called out. With an outstretched arm, he froze a path towards the island. Tonraq grabbed two water tendrils and skated along to close the distance. Ren blocked the path with one of his octopus tentacles, though Tonraq still broke through.

Meanwhile on the statue, Yingtai propelled herself up the different nooks and crannies leading to the top. She landed alongside the chained prince. "Sorry kid, but time's up," she said.

Wu screamed into his mouth gag. He almost passed out, until he saw Yingtai fly from the statue's head and land into the staff.

"Oof!" Yingtai coughed as the air left her body. She recovered and managed to stand perched on the Aang statue's arm.

Her attackers were two other airbenders; Kai and Jinora. The pair had changed into wingsuits. "Let's stop her!" Kai yelled.

Yingtai ducked as Kai swept several gales her way. She didn't have a wingsuit nor a glider, but managed to ride her own currents to different points on the statue. Again she tried lunging at Wu's chains, but Jinora cut her off this time. Yingtai clambered up to the top of the statue's head.

Kai stopped when he saw the airbender start laughing. He grimaced, "What's your deal?"

"Oh," Yingtai laughed again, "I just thought how you're not so bad an airbender. Too bad you're on the other side."

"Hey!" Jinora called out from the staff. "Stop hitting on my boyfriend."

Yingtai rolled her eyes, "Oh honey, believe me, this runt ain't my type. Like, at all. But if you both insist on trying your best, I suppose I'll have to too." Something clinked in her sleeves. She then sent gales out in either direction, towards Kai on one of the statue's arms and Jinora on the staff.

But these weren't ordinary gusts; something shot past and gashed Kai's wingsuit. "Ugh! Not again...," Kai lamented. His wingsuit had been cut through. But by air?

Jinora also dived away from the blast, though she managed to see just what it was. The airbender girl had used her bending to fling kunai knives at them. It was powerful enough to crack through the metal of the statue. "Watch out for her kunai!" Jinora called to Kai.

This time, Yingtai revealed three in each hand. She thrust them out, slicing the air and nearly through each of them. While they were dodging her attacks, she kicked upwards until she was level with Wu. With one kunai in hand, she flung the knife straight at the prince. A gust knocked it off course and it struck the statue beside Wu's head, who shrieked in terror at the close call.

"Hmph," Yingtai cussed. She pushed back onto the statue's shoulder, and then blocked another barrage of gales from the pair. Once more she tried lunging at the prince's chains, and this time, she managed to slice through one holding his arm. Wu's muffled cries intensified as he started sliding to one side. Eventually, his body slipped off the statue's face, leaving the petrified prince dangling by one chain around his wrist.

Satisfied with her work, Yingtai went for the final strike, until she saw a massive shape come from her left. A bison tail smacked a gust into her, sending her body spiralling into the statue with a clang.

Opal guided her bison under the flailing prince, while Kai hovered down with half his suit still working, and started picking the lock on the last handcuff. "We got you Wu," Opal tried to calm the prince down, though nothing could help him settle at this point.

After another round of trading blows, Daiyu paused and took note of their surroundings. The police and United Forces were all closing in, and the prince was being rescued by airbenders on a bison. "Sota!" Daiyu called out.

Sota was busy duelling Asami. He looked to his side as Daiyu sidestepped Korra and took a swipe at the Sato heiress. The blow took her off guard, but not enough to make contact. Though now Sota took the chance to sprint to the side of the island.

"Ugh," Asami grunted as she blocked another strike from Daiyu. She lunged at the fan wielder and managed to send a jolt through one of her armour pieces, but Daiyu managed to evade quick enough before it left a lasting shock.

Korra punched another fire jet just as Daiyu landed, knocking her off balance as she ducked. She then planted a kick under Daiyu's stomach, knocking the wind out of her and sending her rolling along the ground a stretch. Daiyu managed to jump back on her feet, and threw one of her closed fans straight at Korra. It barely missed, leaving a gash along her shoulder before striking the foot of the statue.

Now Daiyu had her back to the ocean and Korra facing her. But she wasn't alone; Ju clambered up the island and leapt onto the footpath.

"Ju. Sota is in the sub. We need to get out of here."

The hulking man nodded. He breathed in deeply, and then stomped the earth.

Korra readied herself for a pillar or boulder to be launched, but neither arrived. Instead, the entire island started violently shaking.

Yatsu perked his head up while Mako stumbled around, "Time to go I guess." He quickly darted away.

On the other side of the island, Ren swept himself up on a wave and sailed towards Sota.

Hui-Ying managed to pick her girlfriend up, hoisting the two of them onto their getaway craft.

Daiyu took a moment to retrieve her fan, and then kicked the Avatar while she tried to steady herself.

After everyone was at the submarine, Ju let down his attack. He was silent through it all, but his veins pulsated, his body heaved in and out with each breath. It was amazing that the statue didn't come crashing down with that force. But it had bought them enough time.

Naga was the first to lunge at him again, but Ju was better prepared. He stomped up a pillar into the poor creature's belly, knocking her back with a hurt whimper. Korra felt a fury burn inside. She yelled while smashing a wave of pillars at Ju. He managed to block against them all with a stomp. As he clambered into their submarine, Korra rose the ocean up and froze their craft in place. Ren was still on board though, and he managed to let them down easy enough with a flick of his wrists. The hatch shut, and the Red Lotus sunk back into the ocean.

Korra panted. She was angry. Though as she turned around, she saw Opal land her bison with the prince safely on board.

"We saved Wu," Asami placed her arm around Korra's side. "We won."

"Yeah," Korra sighed. Naga also limped over and nuzzled her. Perhaps that was good enough for now.

There was a basin at the police station which had become Korra's first aid kit. She moved the glowing water around Naga's side, watching as it eased her best friend's pain. She could never forgive anyone that hurt Naga. Even if during a fight.

Pabu ran along Korra's arm and started chittering rapidly. He outstretched his paw which had been gashed.

"I'll get to you too Pabu, don't worry," she patted the friendly fire ferret tenderly with her free hand.

Everyone waited outside the interview rooms while Wu gave his testimony to Chief Beifong. Physically he was unhurt, apart from some bruises. But emotionally, the prince looked a wreck. Hanging several stories high and nearly falling to one's death would do that.

Mako sat next to Ilah, with Fire Lord Izumi nearby. He kept his head down. His own guilt was tearing him up inside.

"You know," Ilah tried to distract him, "that guy with the sword we met. Wasn't there a report of someone like that during the battle of Ba Sing Se?"

"Yeah," Mako nodded. "It came from Kuvira, so we weren't sure whether we could trust it. But I do remember now they encountered a large earthbender with a metal arm, and a swordsman who used firebending."

Izumi pushed her glasses back, "So they were helping Qiang too. Just like at the Red River Facility. Giving local criminals the power to do what they want."

Any further conversation was cut short as footsteps approached. Mako looked up reluctantly, knowing that it was Raiko. After making eye contact, the president stopped for a moment. "Although I doubt it can happen, what I hope is that you can be banned from the force indefinitely for your incompetence."

Mako's face sunk. Banned from the police? Being a detective was his life.

"I don't think that's legal in your country," Izumi said.

Raiko looked rather irritated at the Fire Lord's interjection. "I said it's what I would like. Do you realise how bad your blunder was, Mako? If you can't even take care of one prince then why should anyone put their lives in your hands?"

"I'm sorry sir," Mako replied. He couldn't think of anything else to say.

Izumi stepped in again, "He did manage to help save the prince, Mr President. Without Mako and his friends things could've been much worse."

"Perhaps worry about the politics in your own country first, with all due respect," Raiko spat back. Though in the end, he could see Izumi wouldn't let him rip into the young man like he wanted to. A hot exhale left his lips, "Don't let it happen again. Protect the prince with your life. Understand?"

"Of course sir," Mako dipped his head.

Raiko nodded, "So new accommodation will be found for Prince Wu I gather? We do have plenty of safe houses."

"Actually, Mr President," Asami spoke up, "I asked Wu if he'd like to stay at my estate. It's out of the city a bit, so probably not on anyone's radar. Though close enough to get to in an emergency. Plus we have security on the premises too."

"Well, that would be ideal," Raiko replied. "We'll convene tomorrow morning about what to do next. I have to talk with the councillors this evening." He gave a short nod and headed towards the interview rooms. Perhaps he wanted to check in on Wu himself.

As the president left with his bodyguards, Mako mouthed a 'thank you' to Izumi and a short bow. Izumi smiled.

After another five minutes, Wu emerged own the hallway. Raiko gave him a pat on the back and shook his hand, before leaving.

"Wu!" Mako called out. He ran over and stopped in front of him, "Look, I'm so sorry -"

"It's alright, Mako," Wu held his hand up. His eyes were tired. "It's not your fault."

"I should've protected you. As your bodyguard I was meant to."

Lin stepped forwards, "What matters is you all saved the prince. Thank you. I couldn't have done it without you."

"What's going to happen now? With the Red Lotus?" Korra asked the chief.

"We'll convene tomorrow," Lin said. "Let's just give the prince some time to recover."

Korra nodded, "We can give you a lift if you like?" she pointed to Naga, who was feeling better after the healing session.

"I've had the staff set up another guest room in my estate if you'd like Wu?" Asami offered.

Izumi stepped forwards, "And we can station Yuyan with Asami's security. You'll be safe there."

Everyone looked concerned for the prince. Wu gave a half smile, "Thank you. That would be nice."

City Spire now served as Kuvira's new office. It was much nicer than the old palace of Ba Sing Se, with its décor and atmosphere that Ba Sing Se was lacking. While it was getting late, there was still much to be done. Kuvira had a stack of papers on her desk that really couldn't wait until morning.

"Still hard at work I see," Hou-Ting's voice echoed as she approached.

Still a pain in my side, Kuvira thought to herself. She put down her pen and inhaled sharply, "Governor Hou-Ting. You're still in Zaofu?"

Hou-Ting tried not to let Kuvira's tone get to her, but it was difficult. "I come bearing great news. Favourable news, I might rephrase."

Whatever Hou-Ting was on about, Kuvira honestly wasn't that interested. But, she decided to placate and indulge the governor. "What do you have?"

"News, from our intelligence officers," Hou-Ting began. "In Republic City."

"Go on."

Hou-Ting paused, taking her time to response. "Remember how I brought up the idea of correcting the grave wrong committed against our nation by taking back our stolen lands? And, we agreed that such an endeavour would need the right... circumstances?"

Kuvira was rather tired of Hou-Ting dancing around the issue. "Ask what it is you want to ask, governor. It's been a long day."

"Hmph," Hou-Ting scoffed. But she quickly regained composure, "Our reports tell us that the terrorist group the Red Lotus kidnapped my great nephew. He's been rescued, but with the increased attacks in the United Republic it seems they are getting overwhelmed."

"And how is that the Earth Empire's problem?" Kuvira asked bluntly.

Hou-Ting waved her hand, as if she were dismissing Kuvira's attitude. "Not our problem, but our opportunity. The one which we've been waiting for."

So that was what Hou-Ting wanted. She wanted to make a move on the United Republic of Nations.

"This is why you asked for my help, Great Uniter," Hou-Ting began. "To get the other world leaders to see your greatness and listen to you. So let me help you correct this injustice and give you the most powerful lands in the world." She elaborated, "If we can offer our assistance to the United Republic of Nations, perhaps that could be our 'diplomatic' opportunity to begin taking back our land. You and I are in agreement in that we cannot simply have our army march in there," Hou-Ting's eyes gleamed as she continued, "but if we can slowly chip away at Raiko's resolve, then we can get what is rightfully the Earth Kingdom's."

This wasn't exactly what her and Baatar had planned, but gaining the United Republic of Nations had an appeal to it. Not only were they prosperous – despite what Raiko tried selling her in Zaofu – but snatching it away from the president made Kuvira feel rather vindicated.

It was a gamble, but Kuvira had made these calculated risks all this time. And they'd paid off.

Slowly, Kuvira looked back at Hou-Ting, a small smile forming on her lips. "Alright," she said at last. "Let's expand our nation."

Chapter Text

The waves were rhythmic and melodic as they crashed against the shore. Here in the quiet of nature and spirits, it was the one place Daiyu didn't mind in Republic City. She sat with her knees against her chest, quietly watching the ocean swell.

It had been three days since their capture of Prince Wu. It hadn't gone as they planned. Either they had hoped for Hiroshi Sato – or later Zaheer – to be released into their hands, or the prince would be dead. None of which had happened.

Footsteps approached from behind. "He's on the line."

Daiyu took to her feet. She gave Sota a cold look before walking back to their hideout.

The broken two-story farmhouse had been someone's home once. Now it was a tangled jungle of vines, with spirits occasionally flittering in and out. Daiyu walked past some of the others resting or eating in their camp, and into a room at the back. A room with their radio.

"He's on speaker," Yatsu informed. The three of them sat around the device.

"You mission was not successful?"

Daiyu exhaled. Of course their master would know somehow. She spoke low as she dipped her head, "It wasn't. The prince breathes, and Hiroshi is still in their hands."

There was a pause on the other end. Then a long exhale, "That is regrettable. Sota, is there any more progress on the device?"

"No, sir, I've hit a wall," he adjusted his glasses.

"So we need Hiroshi Sato to complete our work then."

Sota was silent for a moment. "I... I cannot complete it myself."

The Grand Lotus paused. "I still have some loose ends to fix in the Fire Nation so I cannot be with you at this time. If you can't free Sato, then find a way to get to his knowledge. In the meantime, continue to fan the flames of rebellion in the common people. They need to be liberated, and will surely take our side in light of the Earth Empire and all they have done."

"It will be done," Daiyu replied.

"Do not despair, children. I will be with you shortly. And the spirits have given us this path. Though it may be hard, we cannot lose faith."

The radio cut out.

"Well," Yatsu was the first to speak. "We have a task of insurmountable difficulty ahead."

"What do you mean?" Daiyu shot him a look.

"To get to Sato. How will we pull that off? The mountain llamapacca climbs the steepest of cliffs because it is designed thus, but the moose lion can only watch."

Sota grumbled, "We don't need a poem."

"But you get my point, no?"

Daiyu stood to her feet, "We do. Of course this is going to be difficult. But we cannot give up. We all know how broken and wretched this world is. It needs saving. And only we can."

The other two slowly nodded. This was why Daiyu was their leader. She had a fierce determination, unwavering conviction. And maybe that's all they would need to free the world from its shackles.

Wu had barely slept a couple hours. If one could call it that. A knock at the door woke him up from whatever state he was in, saying that breakfast was ready.

The Sato estate was familiar in design to his home in the Earth Kingdom. The colour palette was different with the beige and white marble theme, but it still reminded him of home.

"There you are handsome prince!" Grandma Yin greeted. She dipped her head so low Wu thought she'd put her back out.

"Morning," Wu replied. No one had told him that Mako's grandma was obsessed with the royal family. Her one possession she had left Ba Sing Se with was a framed picture of Hou-Ting in her prime. She had even fainted when Wu first arrived after being told he was Hou-Ting's great nephew.

Mako and Bolin's other family members weren't so receptive. "Hmm," Mako's cousin Tu greeted, barely, as Wu sat at the table. Their family had been staying at the Sato estate ever since Ba Sing Se fell.

Grandma Yin came strolling over, "I put extra possum chicken in your jook Prince Wu!" She gingerly planted a kiss on the prince's cheek as she set the delicious smelling breakfast down at his place.

"He doesn't need it," Tu grumbled.

"Watch your tongue in front of the prince Tu!" Yin shot back.

Tu folded his arms, "I thought you would've realised by now that the royals are a bunch of whacks. And Hou-Ting is alive apparently."

That was true. Wu hadn't even given much thought to his late great aunt not being 'late' anymore. It's not like they had the closest relationship, but she was still family.

"Tu, show some respect to your grandmother," Chow scolded. "And Prince Wu has been through a lot, royal or not, so be kind to him as well."

"I could've taken them on if I were chained up there..."

"Tu!"

"Okay, I'm sorry," Tu finally conceded. He ate the last of his possum chicken-less jook in silence.

Chow ate another mouthful before addressing Wu, "So... did you sleep a bit better last night?"

"Uh... kinda I guess," Wu mumbled.

Chow gave a soft smile before attending to his meal. He looked over to Yin, "Mother, come rest and eat some food yourself."

"I can't! Prince Wu might still be hungry," Grandma Yin explained.

"It's fine, I'm quite full," Wu said. "But it's very delicious, thank you."

Grandma Yin beamed from the compliments, "Wow, what lovely manners!" She glared at Tu, "You could learn something from such a dignified royal."

Tu waved his hand away and shook his head.

"So...," Wu began. "How come you didn't move back to Ba Sing Se after Kuvira reclaimed it?"

"Oh I wanted to dear," Grandma Yin answered. "But they wouldn't let me," she looked over at Chow.

"Mother, we couldn't. There were still the problems with the Dai Li and Red Lotus. And Kuvira. Look at what she's become now?"

Grandma Yin shook her head, "Oh, Kuvira isn't as good a leader as true royal. Certainly."

Some of the others at the table had finished and stood to clear their plates. Wu looked back to Grandma Yin, "Why do you like the royal family so much?"

"Why not?" Grandma Yin's eyes lit up, "They are so gracious, and dignified. I remember getting to see Her Majesty Hou-Ting's palanquin when I was a young woman. Oh! How regal and elegant she looked! And everyone would talk about the lavish and exclusive parties she held! I always wished I could go." Yin reminisced. "And she was a woman on the throne! She made so many of us proud."

Wu turned back to his jook. It was weird. If he'd been here a week ago he would've lapped up all the affection and praise. But something just didn't feel right. It felt... empty, and undeserved.

"Sorry I slept in," Mako said as he walked down the hall and into the dining room.

"Mako!" Grandma Yin scolded. "You should've been here to be with the prince! You have a sacred and important duty to protect him!"

"I know, I know," Mako said. Although he'd been spared Raiko's wrath at the police station, his Grandma Yin spared no expense in telling Mako just how much he'd failed.

Mako sat next to Wu, "So, are you feeling up to the meeting at midday?"

Wu nodded slowly, "Yeah. I think I should be fine."

"Raiko said it was an important world leader's meeting. Even the Chieftains of the Northern Water Tribe will be on radio."

Grandma Yin waved a hand, "Don't overwhelm the prince! Let him eat his jook in peace!"

"Okay," Mako replied. His grandma set a bowl in front of him. "Thanks for breakfast."

She smiled, and then made her way over to Wu, "If there's anything else you need then please ask."

"Of course," Wu replied. He gave a half smile before turning to his plate.

It was hard to believe that about four years ago, Korra was here trying to learn airbending. It had seemed like such an impossible challenge. Now on the raised stone platform, Korra swirled a current around her form, keeping her elbows in and hands upright.

"I remember you teaching me this in Zaofu. My first time airbending with a master."

Korra spun around to see Opal standing there. She smiled, "Yeah, I remember. I still find it hard to believe that after all the trouble I had with it, I was teaching someone else airbending."

Opal laughed. She walked down the steps and stood with Korra. "Hey... um," Opal paused, "I just wanted to say I'm sorry for my outburst the other day."

"Oh no, it's alright," Korra replied. "Jinora and I probably weren't being that understanding. We are going to get your family back.,I promise."

"Thank you," Opal smiled. "How about we airbend together?"

Korra nodded, "Of course."

The pair spun a shared air current around them, and then split off into their own. Each of them moved with grace yet precision, the air following their moves as they became one with it. Going through the motions here wasn't about combat or fighting, but rather, feeling the currents and finding themselves in a meditative state. With everything going on, it was a little reprieve.

"Hey... is that Jinora?" Opal looked to the horizon.

Korra joined her, "Yeah."

Both of them watched as Jinora glided in and landed in front of them. "Guys, Ryu hasn't returned from the morning tour," she said, clipping her wingsuit back in. "I'm worried.

"It's Ryu. He's probably taken them to the mall or something," Korra laughed.

"I don't know," Jinora said. "It's been a while now. And I felt this weird disturbance in the Spirit Wilds. Maybe we should check on them?"

"I don't have anywhere else to be," Opal said.

The three of them set off for the Spirit Wilds. Opal had changed into her own wingsuit, while Korra borrowed a glider from the temple. After a short flight, the trio made it to heart of the vines in the city.

There were Spirit Wilds interspersed across town, but the largest cluster had become a tourist attraction. So long as the spirits weren't too disturbed, the attraction had brought people from across the world before Kuvira's takeover. The Air Nation had become caretakers of the wilds and raised money and awareness by taking people through them on tours.

"We should've run into them by now," Jinora said. She pressed her palm to a trunk of the spirit vine.

"Are you sure you felt something?" Opal asked. "Maybe you just had some bad food for breakfast?"

Jinora shook her head, "This was definitely something off." She sighed, "Korra, can't you feel how strange the energy is here?"

"No," she replied, a tinge of sadness in her voice. Korra eyed up one of the vines, "Maybe I can try something." She had sensed Wu's energy when he was kidnapped, so perhaps she could try connecting to the vines to see what was going on? She closed her eyes, then pressed a palm against the vine. Her breathing steadied, and she cleared her mind, allowing whatever it was out there to connect to her. It started off as a blurred image, but she started seeing a vision. "It's... the Foggy Swamp," she said, recognising the Banyan Grove Tree. But it was being destroyed. The grinding sounds of chainsaws rang in her ears. The whirring of mechs as they marched over the tree.

Opal watched as Korra gasped and pulled away. She placed a hand around her, "What is it?"

"It's... the Earth Empire. They were tearing up the Banyan Grove Tree in the Foggy Swamp," Korra answered. "Ut is there... and the Foggy Swamp Tribe." She hoped they were alright, or had made it away safely.

"That must be causing a disturbance in these Spirit Wilds," Jinora said. "Maybe Ryu's tour group is in trouble."

Opal shook her head, "But why is she taking vines? What could she need them for?"

"The Earth Empire raided the swamp a few times while I was there. The tree must've been important to something they're up to," Korra answered. "We have to tell Tenzin and Lin. People need to know something is up."

"And maybe it will finally convince everyone we have to take Kuvira down now," Opal added.

Jinora nodded, "I'll stay here and look for Ryu. You guys head back."

The president was in a meeting, apparently. But Korra told the City Hall receptionist it was urgent. Whatever Kuvira was doing to the spirit vines, it was upsetting their own Spirit Wilds. She and Opal had to tell them.

"Mr President, I'm sorry to interrupt but –" Korra stopped as she opened the doors and saw who was gathered. Raiko was at one end of the table, with Wu sitting next to him and Mako standing by. Tenzin was on the other side, Fire Lord Izumi and Crown Princess Ilah, and even her dad Chief Tonraq. There was also a radio speaker set up. Possibly her cousins, the Chieftains of the Northern Water Tribe, since they were the only ones missing. "What's going on?" Korra asked.

Raiko stood up, "Avatar Korra, you shouldn't be here. This is a closed meeting."

"With all the world leaders? Then don't you think the ''Avatar'' should've been invited? What are you even discussing?"

"Raiko invited us here to discuss the state of affairs. Between the Red Lotus and the Earth Empire we have to come up with a plan," Izumi replied.

Tenzin looked sympathetically at Korra, "We just though perhaps we'd called you back into action too soon."

"I don't want her here," Raiko said. "This isn't going to be an easy conversation to have today."

"Well, I can take it," Korra said defiantly. "And besides, we have a situation. Kuvira has been taking spirit vines from the swamp and it's affecting our own Spirit Wilds. One tour group hasn't returned yet."

Tenzin looked to Lin, "This could be serious."

Lin motioned to one of the other officers, "Get a squad together and put out a bulletin. Set up a perimeter around the Spirit Wilds."

"Please," Raiko said. "This isn't going to take long. Can we finish this meeting before we adjourn?"

All eyes turned to Raiko. Eventually, several at the table gave a nod.

"That depends if I have to leave or not?" Korra said.

Raiko narrowed his eyes, "Suit yourself." He cleared his throat, "As I was saying, this Red Lotus threat is standing in the way of us fixing the mess in the Earth Kingdom. I believe it should take priority for the time being."

Opal felt her heart sink. That meant Raiko probably wouldn't change his mind about rescuing her family in Zaofu.

"However, last time the Red Lotus surfaced they held the world in their grasp. We need a different strategy this time."

"And how do you know that Kuvira and Hou-Ting won't attack while we are distracted?" Lin asked.

"Because," Raiko looked across the table, hesitant with his words, "I was contacted by Hou-Ting. And... I've invited them here today to discuss this."

No one was quite prepared for what Raiko had just said. The president signalled to his guards who opened the side doors. Korra stared in disbelief as a squad of Earth Empire soldiers marched in, and following them, was the Great Uniter herself. She glared at Korra, sending shivers down her spine. Not so long ago they had duelled outside Zaofu, where Korra had ultimately lost.

But behind her was another woman. Older, in a black gown with gold trim and long emerald sleeves. She had long green fingernails, though missing the royal finger jewels she once wore. It took Korra a moment before she realised that this was Hou-Ting.

"Great... aunt," Wu stammered. He'd been to Hou-Ting's funeral. Yet here she was, as alive as ever.

Lin slammed a fist into the table, "Mr President. What is this?!"

Raiko held his hand out, "Please, I know this is difficult, but I did warn everyone. This is why I didn't want the Avatar here."

"It's not the Avatar you have to worry about," Lin replied.

Tonraq stood up from his seat as well, "I don't accept this either. After everything that's happened in the Earth Kingdom, why should we let them sit with us at the same table?"

"Remember I saved your life, Chief Tonraq," Kuvira said coldly. "You and the Avatar should be thankful for that."

"That doesn't mean I'll sit idly by while you rampage over the Earth Kingdom!"

"Enough!" Raiko slammed his own hands down onto the table. He let the silence linger, adjusting his glasses before speaking, "May I remind everyone what this is about? The Red Lotus. The same terrorist organisation that nearly destroyed our entire world. We know that this time there are more of them, and they are working on some kind of device that Raava knows what it will be used for. Can we all put aside our personal feelings for one spirit-damned second?"

Lin folded her arms and grunted. She couldn't let it go. Not while her sister and her family were being held prisoner by them. But still, she couldn't argue with the president. Tonraq returned to his seat as well.

"However," Raiko looked to Hou-Ting, "do not mistake my hospitality for friendliness. You are an enemy of the United Republic of Nations. You and your shiny pet Kuvira. So whatever it is you told me you had to say, it'd be best to get on with it." He motioned towards the empty chair at the other head of the table.

Hou-Ting nodded, "Of course." She took the free seat, while Kuvira stood next to her. "And thank you for agreeing to hold this meeting. I imagine your hospitality is hard to come by," the former queen added. Kuvira was far less receptive to the president after being called a 'shiny pet', but she let the insult slide off as she stood there, bold and proud, as always.

"The Earth Empire has a vested interest in catching the Red Lotus. I haven't forgotten what Zaheer did to me personally," as if on cue, Hou-Ting started coughing. She waved a hand to the nearest soldier who pulled out a handkerchief. "Excuse me," she said quietly. She regained her composure before continuing, "We have reports that two Red Lotus sentries infiltrated or helped establish Qiang during his brief time occupying Ba Sing Se. We are not yet sure if any others have infiltrated our ranks."

Raiko shifted his glasses, "So what is it you're proposing?"

"A truce," Hou-Ting replied. "A temporary one. Whatever arrangements there are to be had in resolving our territorial conflict can be done after this has been resolved."

"Territorial conflict?" Korra spoke up. "Is that what you're calling it?"

Hou-Ting glanced over at the Avatar as if she were a small insect, "Our mission to reunite and take control of our Kingdom was one of paramount importance. The very future of our nation depended on it."

"And what of our allies trapped in Zaofu?" Raiko said. He knew it was a big issue for many in the room.

"As I said. Negotiations for their release will happen once the Red Lotus threat has been quashed," Hou-Ting replied. "There's no point in wasting resources in warring with each other, only to be weak enough for the terrorist group to usurp both of us this time. I already had a close call with that low-life Zaheer, and I won't let his allies threaten our nation again."

Before anyone could say anything more, the main doors burst open again.

Raiko cursed, "Why are security letting everyone in? This is a closed meeting!"

Two men in ripped up green clothes led the way, with another three behind them. "Guys!" the first one yelled. "Great! You're all here."

Korra, Mako, and Opal all looked shocked, "Bolin?" they said in unison.

Raiko screwed up is face. "What are ''you'' doing here? Guards! Arrest Bolin and Varrick, and whoever the other three are!"

Kuvira stepped forward from the table, "Soldiers! Arrest them! They're traitors to the Earth Empire and will answer for their crimes!"

Raiko shot a glance to Kuvira. Traitors? He looked back to his own guards, "Men! Keep these five under our protection. I hereby grant them amnesty in the United Republic of Nations."

"Mr President you can't do that," Kuvira turned back. Anger rose in her voice, "Bolin and Varrick were employees in the Earth Empire. As were Bolin's teammates here Gombo, Baraz, and Ahnah. They ''will'' face justice for their crimes against the Earth Empire."

"And under international law, we as a sovereign nation are granting them safe harbour," Raiko retorted.

Bolin was still being restrained by Raiko's guard when he looked to Varrick, "So, uh... are we getting arrested or not?"

"Don't ask that! Just let them argue!" Varrick replied.

Hou-Ting flicked her hand their way, "These traitors will be sent to our retraining facilities, where they will face the consequences for their actions. Do not stand in the way of us as a sovereign nation dealing with criminals how we see fit."

"We have top secret information for you!" Bolin called out. "Please!"

Raiko stared down Hou-Ting, "They're staying with us. Or any deal is off the table, and you can either leave this city on your own accord or be thrown out."

Hou-Ting narrowed her eyes. But she eventually exhaled and flicked her hand at the soldiers, "Fine. Let them be."

"Governor," Kuvira leant in. "I don't agree."

"We're here to negotiate for more important matters. And the president is not giving us a choice."

Bolin stepped forward, "Anyway, we came to tell you that Kuvira is making this... this thing that's like, super dangerous... and..."

"She had me work on spirit vine technology. It was meant to be for clean energy, but she's trying to create a super weapon out of it! She had me cut up pieces of vine spirit, put them into canisters, and make batteries out of them! And let me tell you, they can blow apart a train cabin!" Varrick filled in the gaps.

"And let me guess," Korra spoke up, "she's harvesting spirit vines from the Foggy Swamp to do it?"

Varrick grinned, "Yeah! How'd you know?"

"Because that's what's causing the problems with our own Spirit Wilds," Korra said. "Look, you have to stop what you're doing Kuvira. Messing with the spirits isn't something this world can afford."

Kuvira glared at the Avatar, "The Foggy Swamp is under my jurisdiction and it is there to benefit the Earth Empire in whatever way I see fit. You have no business telling me how to run my nation."

"Raiko," Korra pleaded, "don't sit and break bread with these two while they're doing this! You have to call the meeting off."

"That's enough!" Raiko yelled. He exhaled, and sat back down in his chair. "We came here to talk about the Red Lotus. Let's just finish as soon as we can and get back on track. I don't care what the Earth Empire does with their own land. What I care about is stopping the Red Lotus as soon as possible now," he pointed his gaze back to the governor, "I imagine that part of this truce is going to come with conditions. What are they?"

Hou-Ting kept her eyes on the president, "But of course. Obviously, the truce will involve maintaining the borders for now. We will not move any of our army across them, nor should the United Forces nor the allied nations do the same. But in addition," she inhaled sharply, "I would like the opportunity to present our case on unification of the Earth Empire to you once the Red Lotus are no more."

"And by unification, you mean the United Republic is dissolved?"

"The United Republic isn't a real nation; it rests on Earth Kingdom soil." Hou-Ting said. "I want the chance to negotiate for it back. Not a certainty, but a chance. That's part of our truce agreements."

Izumi had been quiet so far, but turned towards Hou-Ting as she spoke up, "I don't think that's a fair proposition. The United Republic has been a sovereign nation for nearly a hundred years."

"What your father and Avatar Aang did was take what was not theirs," Hou-Ting shot back. "And we seek to undo it. You of all people should be working to rectify the atrocities that your nation committed unto the world."

The Fire Lord shifted her glasses, a slight anger creeping into her voice, "I have spent my entire time as Fire Lord doing just that. Of course there is nothing that can fully make up for the horrors of the Hundred Year War, but ripping apart mixed families and destroying the integrated cultures of those living in the United Republic was not something my father nor Avatar Aang were willing to do. And I will not support it either."

"I agree with the Fire Lord on this," Raiko said. "So even if we do give you some kind of platform to share your 'negotiations', I will never accept handing over the United Republic."

"I think you'll find I can be rather persuasive." Hou-Ting exhaled, "But I understand. All I'm asking for is a chance to raise our case and bring it to the negotiating table once the Red Lotus terrorists have been apprehended. We would also like Zaheer to be transferred into Earth Empire custody. His crimes were against myself after all."

"I don't care where he rots, only that he never gets out," Raiko said.

Hou-Ting nodded. "So, Mr President, what would your terms of our truce be?"

The president exhaled deeply, "When the Red Lotus are apprehended, I would like to negotiate for the release of anyone who does not wish to remain in the Earth Empire. Including the Beifong family being detained in Zaofu."

"That is a tall order," Hou-Ting replied. "We cannot just let all our citizens go."

"We've heard of the human rights abuses you've been committing," Tenzin joined in. "And we want to provide people a way out."

Kuvira scoffed, "And all they'll see is a shiny city over the border and just leave. Our nation needs to be rebuilt after the years of turmoil we've endured. Our citizens have a responsibility to stay and help."

"It's on our agenda should we head to negotiations," Raiko said. "And obviously protecting the sovereignty of the United Republic of Nations is as well, which as we've heard, will be something neither side will budge on. But, we can agree to a temporary ceasefire while we deal with the Red Lotus threat. Do you accept these terms?"

Hou-Ting eyed up the president. "Let us hash out whatever terms we want over negotiations once the Red Lotus have been stopped. We will listen to your case, just as you will listen to ours. For now, I believe the Red Lotus have done enough already and must be stopped. They nearly killed one of my last remaining family members I have, after all."

Wu hadn't been listening intently, but as he heard Hou-Ting's words, he looked towards her. "Uh..."

"I'm sorry that I couldn't do enough to protect you," Hou-Ting said. She looked genuinely upset, "But this truce will help make sure that I can in the future." She turned her eyes back to Raiko, "So, do we have a deal then?"

Raiko inhaled sharply, "I'll take some time to consider it and have an answer by the end of the week. In the meantime, I hereby grant you and Kuvira, plus a small security detail, safe harbour. But only in the Earth Kingdom Embassy and in a direct route to the border. Any straying outside will be seen by General Iroh and the United Forces as breaking our agreement, and they will have every right to arrest you. Is that clear?"

"How efficient," Hou-Ting said. "Of course. I accept."

"And no Dai Li. In your security detail, or personal assistants, or anywhere. If we see even one then any deal is off, and you'll all be arrested and imprisoned indefinitely. I'm not taking any chances."

Hou-Ting smiled, "But of course Mr President. And don't worry; you won't see any of my agents at all."

"Well then," Raiko stood from his chair. "That should conclude today's meeting. We have a lot to discuss and work through."

Kuvira and Hou-Ting also readied to leave, "Let us know as soon as you're ready to decide. And as I said, this Red Lotus threat is one that I truly believe we must join forces over. We cannot fight a war on two fronts. Whatever disagreements we may have, I believe it is in our best interests to work together on this one." She gave a polite bow and turned to the door, with her soldiers following. Kuvira gave a cold stare at Korra before following them out.

There was a silence that filled the room. So much had been said. The former Earth Queen who many thought was dead, and the Great Uniter who had just trampled all over the Earth Kingdom and forced everyone to join. And yet, they were supposed to call a truce? Korra couldn't see how it would be possible.

Finally, Raiko spoke up, "I know that was difficult. But I believe we have to consider all options."

"You can't be serious," Korra replied. "We just told you about the superweapon they're creating? And they still have Suyin and her family!"

"We have no guarantees that they'll adhere to any truce either," Lin replied. She was fuming on the inside.

Raiko was also angry. Irritation had crept into his demeaner as he replied, "Then what would you have me do? Hou-Ting and I disagree on a lot, but when she said we couldn't fight a war on two fronts she was dead right." He sighed, "I don't like the idea of a truce either. But the Red Lotus are still at large."

"We've made great progress in uncovering them," Fire Lord Izumi spoke up. "The investigations are still ongoing in the Royal Palace."

"Then keep going and find a way to take them down," Raiko replied, feeling exasperated. "Get rid of the Red Lotus by the end of the week and then we won't have to talk truces at all. But our forces are stretched thin enough already between defending the border from Hou-Ting and searching for the Red Lotus. From my position, we cannot keep doing both for long or we'll lose both wars."

No one had a good rebuttal, or anything else to say. Many were still in shock and processing the revelations thrown on all of them. So instead, Raiko adjourned the meeting.

A cool breeze hit the group as they filed out from City Hall, though it did little to calm anyone's frustration about the meeting they just witnessed.

"I can't believe it," Korra said. She fumed while walking down the rest of the steps. "After everything we told Raiko about the spirit vines and the super weapons, he still wants to make a truce with Kuvira and Hou-Ting?"

"I can't believe we rushed back just to get turned down like that," Varrick added.

Lin eyed him up, "Well, he did grant you amnesty."

Varrick waved a hand, "I guess that's a lot for him considering he nearly banished me from the United Republic."

"It is troubling that Raiko would even consider a truce," Fire Lord Izumi began. "Though it does beg the question of what we can do to stop the Red Lotus in a weeks' time. Lord Zuko is following up with all the leads he can and my soldiers are still searching alongside the Untied Forces for the group in Republic City."

Korra huffed, "Still, we can't trust the Earth Empire to honour a truce. Kuvira was bad enough but Hou-Ting is even worse. And they probably don't even care about the Red Lotus! They just want a way to squeeze themselves in and take the United Republic." She looked to Bolin, "Though, I am glad you came back Bolin. It's been a while."

Bolin smiled, "Yeah... and I just wanted to say that I'm so, so, so, sorry for what I did. I didn't want to admit that I was wrong because y'know, Mako you're always telling me what to do and all that stuff. But you were right. I should've listened."

"Bo," Mako put a hand on his shoulder, "I know it was hard. And I don't blame you. I'm proud of you. When you left to go join the Kuvira and save the Earth Kingdom, I was proud of you. You chose that all on your own. And... you were right too. The good that you did in helping people isn't erased just because Kuvira's done all this."

"Don't beat yourself up too much," Korra added.

"Aw, guys! I have missed you!" Bolin hugged Mako and Korra together. Though Bolin's face softened as he saw Opal. "Hey, I'm sorry too."

Opal didn't look in Bolin's eyes. She kept her gaze on the ground, "I'm glad you're okay Bolin. Excuse me."

"Opal wait –"

"I'll talk to her," Lin stood in front of Bolin.

Opal stood to the side of the group. As glad as she was for Bolin's safety, everything was feeling wrong right now. She felt Lin wrap an arm around her, "Aunt Lin. I just."

"I know."

"I hate that my family is being used by Raiko as some... some bargaining chip! He wants to 'negotiate' for their freedom after all this? What... what if mom isn't even alive –"

"Stop," Lin said. "Don't think the worst."

A tear snaked down Opal's cheek as she looked to the side. Her family were still stuck in Zaofu, and she couldn't do anything, and now it seemed Raiko wouldn't either.

"I'm not giving up on saving them," Lin said. "But it will have to be off the books. A family mission. But we'll do it together."

Opal managed a half smile. "When?"

"I don't know. As much as I hate to admit it, Raiko isn't entirely wrong. This Red Lotus thing could blow up in our faces while we duke it out with the Earth Empire. But we'll find a time. We will."

"Okay," Opal nodded slowly. It wasn't much of a reassurance, but it was something.

Lin made her way over to the others again, with Opal following behind, "I guess we better get to resolving this spirit wilds problem."

"Indeed," Tenzin stroked his beard.

A flash of blue appeared in front of them.

"Hel-"

"Help-"

"Is that... Jinora?" Korra asked.

The blue apparition finally manifested. It was indeed Jinora.

"Guys! The spirit vines got to me too! They have Ryu's tour group!"

Tenzin's body went cold, "Jinora! Where are you!"

"Help! Please –"

The spirit projection vanished, and Tenzin reached out into the air, "Jinora!" He turned to Lin, "We have to hurry!"

"I've cordoned off the main spirit wilds. We have officers stopping anyone else from going in."

"I'm going into the wilds," Tenzin said. "I have to find her."

Korra stepped forwards, "I'm coming too. I can connect to her energy and hopefully find where she is."

"Count us... in," Bolin panted. "Maybe... after a rest. Since we ran all that way."

Lin frowned, "You five should sit this out. I'll have someone take you to the station for debriefing."

"Mako?" Korra turned to the firebender.

"Uh... I would but... I gotta stay with Wu."

"It's okay," Wu answered.

Mako raised an eyebrow, "Are... you sure?"

Wu nodded, "Yeah. I'll be fine."

"Ilah and I will watch over the prince," Fire Lord Izumi offered.

Tenzin called on his bison. Oogie swept down and landed in front of the group, "Good, let's get there as soon as we can."

The eerie and other-worldly atmosphere of the wilds filled the air around the four of them. There weren't many spirits around, which was strange, though the air was still buzzing with an ethereal energy. Water trickled down a nearby vine, dripping into a small pool which echoed like a drum in the silence of the wilds. Tenzin held a lantern in front, with Opal behind him, and Korra and Mako using their flames for light.

"Can you sense anything Korra?" Tenzin asked. She could hear the worry and anxiety in his voice.

Korra shook her head, resting a palm on the nearest vine. "Something's blocking her spiritual energy. It's there, but she must be in some kind of state where she can't communicate to us."

Tenzin exhaled, "Then perhaps we'd better split up."

"Are you sure?" Opal asked, "The Spirit Wilds are pretty unbalanced right now."

"We have to cover more ground. Korra and Mako, do you think you'll be fine searching without us?"

Korra nodded, "Let's do what we have to."

The pairs split off, going in different directions into the misty jungle of spirit vines.

It was strange that the wilds had become so still. When Korra had first entered this forest, it had been teeming with friendly spirits that had followed her around the whole way. Something was definitely up with this place. The only sounds now were their footsteps and the rustling of vines as they weaved their way through the jungle.

Neither Korra nor Mako tried calling out to Jinora. If the vines were attacking people, then going in as quietly as possible seemed the best way to go.

The pair continued down the street, seeing what used to be a market courtyard. There were still signs up of the old shops and vendors that had been entangled in the vines during Korra's battle with Unalaq. Yet somehow, it felt as though nature were simply reclaiming a part of the earth for itself.

But now, that part of nature had snatched up Jinora and others.

Mako scanned over to the next block and saw something. He nudged Korra, "Look. It's a light."

"Where... oh," Korra noticed it too. It was a greenish yellow light, not like a campfire or anything else, but something strange. They had to check it out.

Quietly, the pair made their way over to the source. It was coming from inside an old stone building, probably part of the original town before Republic City was founded. There were some planks barring up the entrance, likely to keep people out when this place were still part of the city. The green light emanated through the gaps.

Mako formed a small fire dagger and sliced through the wood. It crumpled away, revealing a square stone entranceway. Korra led the way in. She stopped as she saw a tangled mass of vines surrounding a collection of translucent capsules. Capsules that were emitting the strange green light.

"What are they?" Mako asked.

Korra ran her hand along one of the surfaces, "They're...," her eyes widened, "the missing people!" she said in a hushed whisper. "Jinora's in there. And there's Ryu."

"So the vines did take their tour group," Mako said. He reformed his fire dagger, "Let's get them out."

"No," Korra stopped him. They couldn't provoke the vines. Not after everything that was happening. Not only that, but the way that the human prisoners had been contained in these pods was similar to how Varrick had described the 'spirit batteries'; pieces of the vine spirit Tengwan encased in shells. The spirit was hurting. "The vines lashed out because they think they're under attack from us. But it's the Earth Empire."

Mako relaxed, "Then what do you suggest?"

Korra exhaled sharply, "I'm going to try communicate with it."

She took a step back, directly in front of the capsules. "Tengwan, great vine spirit!"

There was a rustle as one of the vines shifted.

"Please, release these people. They didn't hurt you. I know who did; I was in the swamp. Ut told me all about you. I'm sorry the Earth Empire has been hurting you. But please, don't take it out on innocent citizens here."

The vines shifted more, though eventually stopped. Then there was silence.

"I don't think this Tengwan is in a listening mood," Mako said.

"Well, I can try something else," Korra replied. She breathed in deeply, then exhaled, picturing her uncle Unalaq's technique. The greenish ground water rose up in a spiral around the capsules as Korra directed it. Her waterbending form here was more like a dance, almost like an offering to the spirit she was communing with. The water spirals danced around the capsules, and slowly, began to glow gold.

Korra held her arms out, trying to connect to the spirit. But she couldn't. After a while she let her arms drop, as her spirits did too. "I can't do it."

"Korra," Mako leant a hand on her shoulder, "I've seen you do incredible things. You can do this."

"But I can't!" Korra snapped. She sighed, "No one thinks I can do anything anymore! Ever since I lost to Kuvira, everyone's been shutting me out."

Mako's face softened, "Korra, I couldn't be happier that you're back. Screw what the others say; I needed you back. Asami needed you back. Bolin does now too."

Korra let his words sink in. This whole time since being back she'd felt on the outs. First being left out of the meeting when she returned, then not knowing about the attack at Yue Hotel, and then today's meeting where they hadn't even considered her. It was all just a crushing reminder of a truth she'd thought she'd moved past.

Still, she couldn't give up just yet. Korra mustered up enough willpower and breathed in sharply, "I guess I can try connect to the Spirit World. Their souls are separated from their bodies, and maybe I can find them on the other side."

"I'll watch over you."

After finding a more-or-less comfortable seating position on the stone floor, Korra started to meditate. She pressed her fists together, kept her feet cross-legged but tucked above the ground, and slowed her breathing. In, and out. She felt her mind become free from the earth around her, and when she opened her eyes, she was no longer in the material world.

However, as Korra took in her surroundings, she realised she wasn't in the Spirit World either.

"You can't fight me and the poison!"

Korra's blood went cold. "Zaheer?!" She was atop a small plateau, with a massive drop into a bottomless canyon either side. Above in the air was a man in grey robes, floating like some other-worldly being. She tried to firebend at him, but felt pains course through her body. "No... I...," she stammered, "I got the poison out!"

"You'll never get it out. And you'll never be free. You'll never be the Avatar you once were."

An air funnel slowly encased Korra's body, inching closer and closer to her head. She thrashed about but couldn't break free. It was happening again. This vision, the ghostly spirit haunting her. She wasn't free. She couldn't break free. Korra screamed and cried till her lungs burned, but nothing could stop it. Her world went black.

Korra's eyes fluttered ever so slightly. She started to come to. Someone was holding her up, and it felt like Mako. But she couldn't hear anything except the rushing of wind. And... singing?

"Where... where am I?" Korra said. Though she couldn't hear her own voice over the noise.

Finally, Korra was able to open her eyes. There were powerful gusts circling around the vine capsules in front of her. Though they each carried a musical note. A voice. Korra tilted her head and saw Tenzin and Opal performing the airbending move. Both of them created air currents that picked up whatever notes they were singing. Together they created an enchanting melody, one that seemed to be calming the spirit vines.

Once she could put weight on her feet again, Mako helped Korra move to the back of the room and out of the air gusts. The pair watched in awe as the wind circled around and around, the notes of the melody changing every so often. After a while, the capsules started to open, releasing tiny specks of green dust as the trapped citizens were freed. Tenzin and Opal lowered their hands and exhaled, finishing their melody.

"That was... beautiful," Korra said.

Tenzin ran over to one of the pods, "Jinora! Jinora! I'm here baby girl."

Jinora stirred, eventually pushing herself into an upright position. "Hi Dad. You saved us."

"Korra and Mako found where you were," Tenzin said. He looked back to Korra with tears in his eyes, "Thank you."

Korra managed a weak nod. Though in truth, she felt nearly as low as she had before. It was the same as back then, when she were stuck in her chair, watching Jinora get her airbending tattoos and the Air Nation pledging to bring balance to the world. She wasn't needed as an Avatar then, and she certainly wasn't needed now.

"C'mon," Mako helped Korra onto her feet. "Let's get the others out."

"Okay," Korra said.

Everyone breathed a sigh of relief as the missing tourists returned. Lin smiled as she saw Tenzin leading the way with Jinora in his arms, followed by Opal, Mako, and Korra helping the others.

"Yeah... so... um... I'm sorry Mom and Dad about... you know," Ryu said in front of Tenzin and his parents. "I should've kept the tour group safe you know. Master Tenzin."

"It wasn't your fault Ryu," Tenzin reassured. "The Foggy Swamp is under attack and it affected our own Spirit Wilds."

Ryu shrugged, "Oh. Okay."

"What do you mean Ryu?" His mother grinned wildly, "That was the BEST tour I've ever had in a lifetime! We got to see the spirits up close! And we got to experience having our souls trapped in the Spirit World! What a tour!"

His father stepped forward, "I'd pay double for a tour like that next time! So interactive!"

"I've never paid for an out-of-body-experience before! Thank you for taking care of our son and putting on this incredible tourist attraction!"

Tenzin furrowed his brows, "Erm... okay."

While Lin helped the tourists into satomobiles headed for the hospital, Korra found herself watching from the sidelines. She sighed deeply.

"What is it?" Opal asked.

Korra shook her head, "I... it doesn't matter. Everyone got out safely so..."

Opal smiled fondly and placed a hand on Korra's shoulder, while the Avatar continued to stare into nothing.

Chapter Text

There had been an attack in the Spirit Wilds yesterday. That's all Kuvira had heard. Under Raiko's conditions, the Earth Empire were only allowed in the embassy and in a direct path in and out the city to the border. Already it had stirred up some protests. Small for now, but enough that Kuvira could see them while on the top floor office of the Earth Embassy. From here they looked like tiny spider ants milling about where they weren't relevant.

She didn't care about the spirit vine attack either. The Earth Empire needed those spirit vines and the spirits would just have to live with it. But something else from yesterday was very relevant and pressing. And that was Hou-Ting.

A soldier appeared in the doorway, and Kuvira gave a small nod. In walked the former Earth Queen, now the Governor of Ba Sing Se, in her black and gold tunic with emerald-green sleeves. "You asked for me, Kuvira sir?"

"I did," Kuvira replied. She stood tall and proud, with her arms posed behind her back. "It's about yesterday. The negotiations."

"Ah, yes," Hou-Ting said. "I believe Raiko will accept our truce. We did paint a very compelling picture of why we need it."

Kuvira narrowed her eyes, "You painted a compelling picture."

Hou-Ting paused. She could sense hostility in Kuvira's voice, "I don't believe you've summoned me simply to congratulate my efforts, have you?"

"No, I haven't," Kuvira said bluntly. "I summoned you here to remind you of your position, Governor Hou-Ting."

The words would always sting for Hou-Ting. She inhaled sharply, "I don't understand what the issue is then?"

"The issue, is that during the negotiations you took authority. You made it look like you were the head of the Earth Empire. Let me be clear; it may have been your idea to take back the United Republic of Nations when I wasn't as interested, but it was because ''I'' said so that it's happening."

"You know," Hou-Ting smirked ever so slightly, "the only leaders who summon their subordinates to assert their power are those afraid of losing it."

Kuvira showed a flare of anger spread across her face, "Is that a challenge, Governor?"

Hou-Ting waved her hand away, "No, of course not. I only want to reassure you that you needn't worry. I showed authority because we had to during the negotiations. If I had come across as weak then they wouldn't have thought we were serious. But you did ask me to handle the negotiations, and that, I did."

There was a tense silence as Kuvira continued gazing into Hou-Ting's mind. "That's all I needed."

"Good. Then, if you don't mind, I have to get to drafting the paperwork," Hou-Ting made her way to the door.

"And Hou-Ting," Kuvira called out.

"Yes?"

The Great Uniter narrowed her eyes, "Don't ever joke about taking power from me again."

Hou-Ting chortled, "Joke? I would never. I have said many times before that I am committed to the cause." Her face grew more serious, "As you can imagine, it is hard for an old queen like myself to admit that I failed where you succeeded. But you did, and I am thankful that you saved the Earth Kingdom. You have nothing to fear from me, I assure you."

Kuvira nodded slightly, and Hou-Ting bowed her head before leaving. It couldn't have come soon enough. Kuvira was convinced more now than ever that working with the former Earth Queen was dangerous. But all viper rats could be tamed and subdued, no matter how many sweet words they slipped off their tongues to bide their time. And Kuvira would subdue and then discard Hou-Ting. Right after she'd done her job and scored the United Republic for her.

There was a cool ocean breeze as Korra followed Tenzin along the docks. Pelican gulls squawked overhead, searching for whatever fish or morsal they could find. The boats were all lined up in the water, while some had already left in the earlier hours of the morning. Korra's boat she was looking for was still there, a deep navy blue, Water Tribe ship with patterns along the hull.

"Thanks for letting me come along Tenzin," Korra said. She sounded a little despondent in her voice.

Tenzin smiled, "Of course, Avatar Korra." His face grew more concerned, "I... I've taken what you said to heart. About not being included and people losing their faith in you. That's why I made sure to invite you here to this meeting."

Korra smiled weakly. She appreciated it, really she did, but after yesterday's failure in the Spirit Wilds on top of all the others, she wouldn't blame people for losing faith in the Avatar.

"Your parents are heading back too, aren't they?"

"Yeah, I'll see them off as well," Korra replied.

Once the gangplank descended, Water Tribesmen started filing out. Not many were coming to Republic City, but plenty more wanted to go the other way and get out of the United Republic and the feud with the Earth Empire. Two of the disembarking passengers made their way over to the pair. Tenzin's sister Kya was one of them, a waterbender with dark grey hair. And the other Korra recognised after a moment.

"Master Pukku," Korra greeted.

The old man smiled. "You've grown up pretty fast," he said. "And I'm glad you're alright."

"It's good to see you too," Korra replied. Pukku was a Grand Lotus of the Order of the White Lotus, and had been one of the first to find out that Korra was the next Avatar. He and his two associates had arrived at Korra's house to see her as a young child bend three of the elements at once.

But Korra was also here to see her parents off. She watched as Naga carried them both over to them, with Pabu clinging onto the saddle of course. "Master Pukku, Kya," Tonraq greeted as he hopped off the polar bear dog. "I'm glad we got to see each other, even if only for a moment before we head back."

"I'm sure they'll be glad to have you back home," Kya said. "I'm here to take care of my little brother." She nudged Tenzin.

Tenzin rolled his eyes, "I'm not 'little' anymore. In fact, I've always been taller than you."

"Not in my eyes," Kya teased.

"So, you all packed?" Korra turned to her mother.

Senna smiled fondly, "Yeah." She held Korra tightly, "Stay safe okay. I'm always worrying over you."

"Mom..."

"I mean it," Senna said as she pulled away. She brushed a lock of Korra's hair aside, "I am so proud of you and how far you've come. Don't forget that."

Korra teared up as well, "I'll miss you."

"We won't be gone long sweetie," Tonraq wrapped an arm around Korra. "Raiko wants us to support the United Forces with General Iroh. Just in case things start to get out of hand."

"So we should be back in a few weeks," Senna said.

Naga gave Tonraq a nuzzle before he lifted their luggage again. "We love you Korra."

Korra watched as her parents made their way onto the ship, and she leant into Naga's fur as she saw them wave goodbye. It had been nice having them here, and a part of her wished they would stay. But Raiko was right about one thing; this war could get worse. And they would need her father's help and the tribes when that would happen.

"How about we head to the Fire Nation Embassy?" Tenzin suggested. "It's better protected with Fire Lord Izumi's security. She tells me they have some rooms prepared."

Pukku nodded, "That would be nice." Several other White Lotus members picked up his luggage as he followed the others.

"We've been compiling lists of possible suspects," Pukku informed. He set a stack of papers on the desk.

Korra and Tenzin eyed them up, while Crown Princess Ilah and Fire Lord Izumi arrived. "Any possible leads?" Korra asked.

Pukku sighed, "Many White Lotus members leave and rejoin. We aren't as exclusive as the organisation used to be. But the top page is a list of those who left on... bad terms. More or less."

"And you think one of them could be the Grand Lotus of the Red Lotus?" Korra asked.

"Truth be told I have no idea, though we know that Xai Bau formed the group while he was still a member of the White Lotus. Perhaps he also had other friends see the vision he did."

Korra's interest perked up, "Vision?"

Pukku exhaled deeply, "Yes. Xai Bau was convinced he had seen a vision. The destruction of the world. Both worlds, I should say. He believed the only way to save it was to dismantle the current order, including releasing the great spirit Vaatu from his prison." His eyes grew distant as he dwelled on past memories, "I was only a young member at the time, but I remember the great debates Xai Bau would have with the other high-ranking leaders. Neither could change each other's minds, but many in their audience did. He left the group, and so did a few others. Not many, however, and we thought that was the end of it. Until we learnt of what Zaheer told you, Avatar Korra."

"That's right," Korra said. She had talked to Zaheer in the Spirit World once, and he'd said something about Xai Bau forming the Red Lotus.

"I never wanted to admit it, but Zaheer did have a point," Pukku said. He looked upset and deeply saddened. "The Order of the White Lotus did lose our path. But we only wanted to protect you, Korra. That was Aang's decree. Yet, in our pursuit to protect you, we lost sight of the world." He shuffled in is chair, making eye contact with Korra, "I promise you that we will do more this time. We could have helped more during the Red Lotus' attack led by Zaheer, but this time, we will do whatever it takes to subdue them. The Red Lotus was born from our mistakes."

Tenzin cleared his throat, "You cannot blame yourselves for their choices. You may have changed your direction as an organisation, but you didn't decide to become terrorists."

"But it would've helped if we hadn't lost sight of what we were meant to be," Pukku said.

Korra could sense the sincerity in Master Pukku's voice. He had once been a stern and bold man, unwavering, especially when Korra would beg him to advance in her lessons or leave the compound she grew up in. But time and recent events had softened him. Still, there was something Korra was wondering.

"You're wondering if Xai Bau's vision is true, aren't you?" Pukku asked.

"Uh... well, yeah," Korra said, slightly taken off guard. She looked down, "I saw something while in the Foggy Swamp, and this Grand Lotus seemed to know what it was."

Pukku nodded, "Many may share a vision, but everyone has their own perspectives. One may say it is the end of the world, but another, the point at which we save the world. You may have shared the same vision, but ultimately what comes to pass is up to you. And the rest of us."

Korra certainly hoped that whatever she saw wasn't actually going to happen. The destruction of Republic City, and possibly the world? But with the way things were going, Korra couldn't help but feel like they were inching ever so closer to that future. Something had to change. They needed a win.

"I can help look over the files too," Kya offered.

Fire Lord Izumi chimed in, "And if there's anything else I can do please do let me know. I can be a second pair of eyes on any files you have as well?"

Kya smiled, "That would be great."

Pukku nodded, "Thank you. We don't have the numbers like we used to. But I promise we are ready to do what we must."

"Thank you, for all your help," Tenzin said.

Kya stayed with Master Pukku and the others, while Korra and Tenzin left the embassy. Oogie was ready to pick Tenzin up, while Korra left with Naga and Pabu happily chittering on her shoulder. It didn't take long for them to get to Air Temple Island.

Though as Korra and Tenzin disembarked, the airbending master noticed Korra was rather quiet. He cleared his throat, "Is everything alright?"

Korra nodded, "Yeah. Well...," she paused. "Actually, I guess I haven't been feeling the best. With everything going on it just feels like we keep losing. Like, I keep failing."

"Korra, you have done more in your time as the Avatar than other past Avatars have in their entire lives. You have much to be proud of. I am proud of you."

It was nice to hear the encouragement, though Korra needed more than that. She needed a solution. Something to help her with the next step of her recovery, if such a thing was possible. "I just keep thinking back to that firebending duel I had when you visited me. I thought I had done so much better but... I was still struggling."

Tenzin placed a hand on Korra's shoulder, "And I saw how much you had endured. How far you had come."

As Korra's mind drifted back to that day, she remembered something Tenzin had said, "Hey, do you remember after the duel?"

"Yes, I do."

"And you said to me that you had a technique that might have helped in regaining control of the Avatar State," Korra said. "I didn't wait around till your next visit. But maybe it's something I could try now?"

Tenzin stroked his goatee while he thought back. "Ah, that's right," he said. "I'm not sure if it is much help, but I remember my father telling me he mastered the Avatar State by opening his chakras."

Korra raised an eyebrow, "Chakras?"

"Well," Tenzin chuckled, "my father had the same reaction. And he still managed to find a way to use the Avatar State even after it became blocked, so it's hard to know if it will help or not."

Another opportunity was presenting itself. It could just be another let down, like so many of the other paths Korra had followed. But still, she remembered Ut's words about the universe calling. She had to try. "If there's a chance, I'll take it."

Tenzin was always ready for an impromptu lesson. Part of being an airbending master Korra supposed. Tenzin cleared his throat and began explaining, "Chakras are pools of energy in all of us. Seven, and they each deal with one aspect of life. They can be blocked by certain emotions, and opened by others. Working through opening them can help with spiritual growth and finding balance within oneself."

Korra nodded, "And you think this might've helped me back then?"

"It was something I considered. I had planned to work through the process with you when we first began airbending training but you found a way to gain access to the Avatar State without it, which some Avatars have also done."

That was true. Korra had first used the Avatar State after the Equalist Revolution, when Amon had taken her bending. "But still, maybe some of my chakras are blocked now. Maybe that's why I still can't use the Avatar State for long without hallucinating and passing out."

"You make a good point," Tenzin said. He elaborated, "The emotions that the first four chakras deal with are survival, pleasure, willpower, and love. Some of the most key human emotions. These are the element chakras, earth, water, fire, and air. But they can be blocked by other negative emotions just as prominent as the ones they harbour, like fear, guilt, shame, and grief." The airbending master looked inquisitively at Korra, "Do any of these emotions resonate with you?"

Fear. Guilt. Shame. Grief. All of them could be descriptive of Korra's experience the past three years. "What about the other three?"

Tenzin nodded, "The sound chakra deals with truth, but is blocked by lies. The light chakra is the pool where insight is found, but illusion may cloud one's judgement. And the thought chakra is where pure cosmic energy manifests in a person's spirit, though earthly tethers can keep one grounded. Or at least, that's how Aang described it to me."

"I've had that before," Korra thought back. "When I connected to Raava during my battle with Unalaq. Pure cosmic energy."

"Then you've certainly opened them before," Tenzin replied. The master looked out over the ocean swell, pondering. Although his father's teacher had made it seem so rigid and set, in that one must open all the chakras and in the correct order, Aang had always maintained that there was a level on mystery and intrigue around the Avatar State and how to open the chakras. "Perhaps instead of going through the proper process of opening them, maybe it would be best to meditate on which ones feel blocked right now. Maybe some resonate more than others? Meditate on which of these are blocking you right now. Which emotions feel overwhelming, or stopping you from progressing. Maybe it will help you work through this block. But Korra," Tenzin held her shoulder, "I don't want you to be hard on yourself. Korra, you've been through so much, and gotten so far. Do this as a growth exercise for you, not because you feel you have to."

Korra smiled, "I'll try." But the truth was Korra did feel like she had to. Yet, if this was a spiritual exercise, then she would have to follow her teacher's advice. "Thank you Tenzin."

"Of course," Tenzin smiled.

Despite being the middle of spring, the Fire Nation was as warm as ever. Zhong had set up a couple fans in the office for himself and Lord Zuko, though it only added a small bit of relief from the heat. The former Fire Lord seemed to be immune to the heat, though Zhong hailed from the north of the Fire Nation where it was far more temperate.

The heat only fuelled Zhong's frustrations. He'd been reading through folder after folder of papers, trying to find anything that might be helpful. The most they'd got was an identity for two of the Red Lotus members Izumi mentioned; Daiyu, the abandoned daughter of a disgraced Kyoshi Warrior who got busted for small-time crime in one of the outer cities in the Fire Nation. And Sota, an engineer. There was a third child adopted at the same time as Daiyu and Sota, but no records left of who the adopter was, nor who among their personnel allowed the Red River Facility to be commandeered.

"That would explain why the Grand Lotus didn't rescue Zaheer and the others sixteen years ago," Zhong said. He looked at Zuko, "These three would've only been young, maybe even infants. He would've had to care for them instead."

Lord Zuko nodded, "Though he could've helped Zaheer now? He's been incarcerated for the past three years."

Zhong grunted, "I guess." He sighed deeply, "I hope Izumi is okay."

"She has her security detail with her. And she's capable of fighting back herself," Zuko chuckled. "As you know already being married to her."

"Only as much as the one who raised her," Zhong added.

Zuko smirked. They were both tired. Between the reports coming from Republic City, the Earth Empire, and how slow their investigation was going, it all felt insurmountable at times. As he scanned a page, Zuko narrowed his eyes, "Hold on...," he mumbled to himself as he read along, "one of Izumi's ministers is leaving. Handed in his resignation and everything."

Zhong raised an eyebrow, "That's rather normal."

"He's a long-serving throne room minister."

Now Zhong's attention was grabbed. Throne room ministers tended to stay on till retirement, and at the very least wouldn't resign without speaking with his wife first. "Which minister?"

Zuko flipped the page around, "Ozhor. What is his role? Besides being present in meetings?"

"His portfolio has always been transport. Helped get the gondola system widespread across the nation. Investments in satomobile companies," Zhong answered.

"Not power infrastructure?"

"No, that was...," Zhong paused. "He did used to work alongside the previous minister of energy." He shook his head, "But that's a big hunch. Why would he help the Red Lotus use the Red River hydro dam?"

Zuko narrowed his eyes, "Perhaps he didn't know who he was working for?"

Zhong pondered for a moment, and then stood up to collect another folder. He flicked through another lot of pages until he found one he wanted, "His... manor was sold recently. He hasn't just left his job; he's looking to relocate."

"Well, we can always ask him ourselves."

Unfortunately, the house sale had gone on much longer than Ozhor has intended. But now it was done. His family had been shipped off to a different Fire Nation city on the outskirts. Ozhor had told them he would be joining them soon, but now he was here in the airfield, starting up a private air balloon, on his way to the United Republic instead.

"It's a bit dark for flying, isn't it?"

The round minister spun around, his eyes wide in shock, "Uh... Lord Zuko! You startled me!" He quickly bowed low.

Zuko walked a few paces ahead and then stopped, "How about you tell me why you're packing up and leaving all of a sudden?"

"A change of pace," Ozhor said quickly. "Republic City is far more suitable for my talents."

"Is it now?" Zuko said. "You know what else is in Republic City? The Red Lotus."

Ozhor started sweating bullets, though he went on the defensive, "What are you insinuating? I will not stand for slander!"

"See, it would be slander, except after we looked at your previous portfolio, and saw that you were leaving the country, we also went through your office."

"You had no right –"

"And we found documents signing off on the Red River Facility's staff change," Zuko said. He eyed up the minister, "You got the Red Lotus in so they could work on their device."

Ozhor stuttered, watching several soldiers and Yuyan archers surround him.

"I think we'd best have a little chat, don't you?"

It was past midnight, but Zhong had been up anyway. He hurried along the palace hallway to the holding cells.

Inside, a glaring light reflected off the gold finishings on the red walls. And the minister in question was there, handcuffed to the table, looking defeated yet anxious as he vacantly stared at the table in front of him.

"Sorry I'm late," Zhong said as he entered the room. He took a seat next to Zuko.

"We haven't started yet," Zuko said. He stared at Ozhor like he was looking into his soul. "I think you have some explaining to do. When did the Red Lotus contact you?"

Ozhor breathed in deeply, "I... I didn't know they were the Red Lotus."

"Answer the question," Zuko pressed.

"Uh... about half a year ago."

Zuko nodded.

Ozhor leant forwards, "I swear I didn't know it was them!"

"That doesn't make treachery any better," Zhong added. "Fire Lord Izumi trusted you in her throne room. And this is how you repay her?"

A look of disdain formed on Ozhor's face, "Repay? Why should I have to repay anyone who only got where they were through birthright?"

"You share a lot more in common with the Red Lotus than you think," Zuko said. "What did they offer you? Money should be nothing special for someone like you."

"It wasn't money," Ozhor sighed, "it was what the woman believed in. She said that she wanted to dismantle the monarchy. And I agreed. I saw my name in the headlines... the first Fire Nation President."

Zhong leaned forward, "And you've also been stirring up resentment in our nation? Towards the Fire Lord?"

Ozhor nodded, "Of course. It's always been an unfair system."

"Yet you're not so different," Zuko said. "I've since learned that you were born into wealth, did exceptionally well at the Royal Fire Academy for Boys, completed further education which was all paid for by parents. And during your time as minister for transport, you forcibly relocated dozens of poorer families just so you could have your gondola system built over top of them. It's only come to light now how you paid them off – not a generous amount either – so your project could be in the spotlight. If you think of it that way, I don't think the Red Lotus would've had you as a president or an ally."

Hearing it said like that lit a fire of anger inside Ozhor. But it was soon snuffed out, replaced by regret. The minister inhaled, "I didn't know it was the Red Lotus. If I had... then perhaps I wouldn't have supported them."

Zuko narrowed his eyes, "To be honest, I don't care about your reasons. You're going to prison for conspiracy, treachery, and bribery among other charges. But I want to know more about the Red Lotus. That's what I care about. Did you meet in person? How many individuals did you meet with? Did anyone by the title 'Grand Lotus' ever contact you?"

Ozhor shook his head, "I've said all I know. I never met in person, only over radio. It was one woman. I was told to stay away from the facility so I did. After being tracked down by that mangey shirshu, the woman told me to leave. She'd thought I'd failed them. But it wasn't fair! I did everything for them and then they leave me out to dry? Tell me to sell my home and leave the nation? The nerve!"

Zuko and Zhong exchanged glances. It was hard to know whether Ozhor was being honest. Maybe he did know more? But perhaps that was as much as they could get out of him for now.

"We'll be back with more questions," Zhong said. He stood with Zuko, and both of them left the room.

Once the door was shut, Zuko stopped in his tracks, "It doesn't seem like he knows anything about the Grand Lotus."

Zhong sighed, "At least we've solved the Red River facility situation. We know how it happened and who it was."

"But we're still a step behind," Zuko replied. "I'll tell Izumi the news at least."

The sounds of bird calls and lemurs squeaking filled the air as Korra walked along the path. She found a quiet spot off the track, amongst the foliage and overlooking the ocean. A large, round stone served as a seat as she got into a meditative position.

"Okay chakras," Korra said out loud.

Her breathing steadied. In and out. She cleared her mind, allowing it to become one with nature.

And then, after a while, Korra started dwelling on everything Tenzin had said.

The earth chakra. The one that deals with survival and is blocked by fear. Or the water one, which was blocked by guilt. The fire chakra dealt with shame. Korra had definitely felt these things earlier. Maybe it was one of them? No. She had felt guilt about leaving for so long, but had made up with everyone. Her parents, Asami, Mako, and everyone else all forgave her and understood why she did it. Korra did feel ashamed at how she was performing as an Avatar, for getting beaten by Kuvria, for all the losses she kept accumulating. But it wasn't blocking her willpower; that's why she was sitting here, thinking about chakras, trying to set things right and do all she could to get better.

Maybe the cosmic energy one? The thought chakra? Korra didn't fully understand what 'earthly tethers' and 'cosmic energy' meant exactly. Perhaps it would become clearer once others were unblocked.

There was the light chakra and the sound chakra, dealing with insight and truth. But were there lies and illusions stopping her from going into the Avatar State? Korra meditated on this, but nothing resonated with her.

The air chakra was the last, dealing with love and being blocked by grief. There was much grief in Korra's life, grief in the years she'd lost, her abandoned dreams and hopes, her former self that felt so far away from where she was right now. But she was still surrounded by people who loved her. People who cared for her. And she was incredibly grateful for that.

After another round of steady breathing, Korra sighed and opened her eyes. The endless blue expanse stretched out before her, and she sat watching the waves crashing gently against the rocky cliffs. She had to try again.

Korra closed her eyes, sat in the lotus position, and continued meditating. She let her mind dwell on each of the locations of her chakras, moving in a line down her body.

And then it hit her. It was fear. The earth chakra.

Toph's words in the swamp echoed through her mind. She'd told her she was scared of getting hurt again. Scared of failing. Scared of never getting better. It was driving so much of how she was feeling. And it wasn't just any spirit that was haunting her; it was a projection of herself when she was facing Zaheer, poisoned, and chained up. She was still suffering from that trauma all this time.

It still felt like there was more to it than that. Maybe the thought chakra was also blocked? But at least out of all of them, the earth chakra resonated with everything she was feeling. Fear. And now she had to find a way to unblock it.

"You're a hard Avatar to find when you want to be."

Korra spun around once hearing the voice. It was Asami.

"Oh... sorry I didn't mean to interrupt meditation."

"It's alright," Korra said. "I... think I had a breakthrough."

Asami smiled, "I guess then it's time for a lunch break?" She held a basket of egg custard tarts up.

Korra nodded, and shifted along the stone to make room for Asami.

"So, what was this breakthrough?" Asami asked.

"I think I know which of my chakras is blocked. Or at least, the most blocked right now."

Asami raised an eyebrow, "Uh... yeah. I've never heard of chakras."

"Well, they're these spiritual pools of energy that... you know what, I don't even think I fully understand them," Korra laughed. "But I think I may have found a way to work towards unlocking the Avatar State again."

"That's great news."

Korra smiled. It was great news. Maybe this would get her one step closer towards her recovery. "So what have you been up to today?"

Asami smirked, "Nothing quite as exciting as unlocking chakras."

"I doubt that."

"Well, I did have a meeting with President Raiko and Varrick. Now that he's back he wants us to work together."

Korra furrowed her brow, "Are you sure that's a good idea? I mean, Varrick escaped Kuvira sure, but he's still... Varrick."

Asami grinned, "Oh, I don't think he'll double cross me this time. I twisted his arm to get him to play nice."

"Do you mean like metaphorically 'twisted his arm' or literally?"

There was a pause. Asami gave Korra a teasing look.

Korra laughed, "Okay, well I'm sure you have nothing to worry about."

The pair continued talking in between eating their egg custard. It was nice, having a break from all the inward soul-searching. It was funny how their friendship seemed to know no bounds. Time didn't change them, nor distance. And after everything that had happened, Korra truly felt like she could count on Asami, and she on her.

"This has been nice, Korra," Asami said. "I know the world is... well, messed up and there's heaps going on. But I appreciate this time with you. And you being back."

"You have to head off?"

She nodded, "Yeah. I said I'd be back in the factory. Ten minutes ago."

"I mean, I could fly you there on my glider?" Korra joked.

"It will be fine," Asami laughed. "I'll see you again soon."

"Thanks for stopping by Asami," Korra beamed.

Asami made her way back to the path, and Korra watched the whole way. The wind caught her raven black hair and ruffled her burgundy and grey outfit. But as Korra continued to watch, she felt something in the back of her mind. The thought chakra was about cosmic energy, and was blocked by earthly tethers. Maybe it wasn't just fear that was blocking her path, but refusing to let go of what kept her attached.

She shook the thought away. The earth chakra was certainly blocked, and that was enough to work on for now. And there was one thing she could still do to open it again. Face her fears.

Zhong and Zuko had hit the books again to try and find out whatever else they could. Their team had found information on several other members in the Red Lotus group. No names just yet, but at least it was a start. With the number of members heralding from the Fire Nation, it seemed likely that this 'Grand Lotus' was hiding here, or at least, had been in the Fire Nation for quite some a while. It was time to press the minister further to see if he knew anything.

"One of them was a prisoner at the Boiling Rock," Zhong read out loud. "Ren. Originally from the Water Tribe."

Zuko nodded, "He must've been that waterbender in Izumi's report. The one who uses the octopus form with great precision."

"Ozhor must know something more. If not about the Red Lotus, then maybe details of this device they're working on," Zhong said. "According to your information from Asami Sato, it was intended to remove a person's bending by using spiritual energy. What could they be planning?"

"We'll get as much as we can from the minister," Zuko replied.

The pair turned another corner, and then made their way over to the interrogation room. Though they were greeted with several guards arguing in the hallway. Upon Zuko and Zhong's arrival they all saluted.

"What's the matter?" Zuko asked.

"Um... something has happened. To the prisoner."

"Move aside," Zuko ordered. He marched in and saw Ozhor sitting in his chair. "What do you mean?" he said while turning back to the soldiers.

One of them swallowed, "Minister Ozhor?" he called out.

To Zuko and Zhong's surprise, the minister said nothing. In fact, his eyes weren't even moving.

"What...," Zuko said. He waved a hand in front of Ozhor, and then shook him roughly by the shoulder.

Zhong stood in the doorway with widened eyes, "It's... like he's in a trance."

"He's breathing," a soldier said. "And everything looked normal. But he's unresponsive."

Zuko slammed a fist onto the table, "How did this happen?!"

One of the soldiers looked angrily at another, "He was meant to be guarding the cell. But he was off making a call!"

The other defending himself, "No – I mean, I was – but I was assured there would be someone there!"

"So was the room unoccupied at any point?" Zhong asked calmly.

"Erm... possibly," the more senior soldier replied.

Zuko stood up, "You should be fired for what you did. Both of you."

The pair hung their heads in shame. "I... accept responsibility," the senior soldier replied.

Zhong shook his head, "This door is the only way in or out, save for the air events, which no one would fit through. And you locked to doors did you not?"

"Of course!" the younger soldier replied.

"Then how did they get in?" Zhong asked.

Zuko exhaled deeply, "Perhaps they used a spiritual technique to project themselves here then. If there was no way they could enter physically." He stroked his beard, and then turned to the soldiers, "Send for the palace physician and shaman. They may be able to find a way to snap him out of it." He said nothing more and walked to the hallway.

Zhong followed Lord Zuko until he stopped. "Zuko," Zhong said, "we have one of the best shamans across the nation. And we can contact other spiritual consultants across the nations."

"I'm afraid I've never seen anything quite like this," Zuko said. "But there is someone I can contact." He turned back to Zhong, "I'll be leaving with Druk to meet someone. It could be a few days, maybe more. Will you be able to hold things together here?"

"I'll try," Zhong said.

"No. You have to," Zuko said. "The Red Lotus are making moves in Republic City. And this, with Ozhor, is them tying up loose ends. They're getting ready."

Zhong nodded, more emboldened this time, "Leave things here to me. I can take care of it."

"Good," Zuko replied. Nothing really was good about this, but maybe all wasn't lost.

Tenzin had spent the most of the day with Master Pukku and Kya. As the sun began to set, he flew Oogie above the ocean swell on his way to Air Temple Island.

After landing his bison, Kya jumped off the saddle alongside him. Though Korra was waiting for him, "Avatar Korra." He smiled.

"Tenzin, I've been thinking about what you said earlier today."

"Ah yes, about chakras."

Kya raised an eyebrow, "You taught Korra that chakra stuff dad used to go on about?"

Tenzin looked slightly annoyed, "Of course. Korra needed a way to help her use the Avatar State again."

"Did he get you to drink the onion and banana juice?" Kya laughed.

Korra looked confused, "Onion and banana juice?"

"No, and it's not important," Tenzin said.

"Anyway, I think I've figured out which of my chakras has reblocked. Or at least one of them," Korra said. "The earth chakra. The one that deals with fear." She looked down, "Toph first brought it up in the Foggy Swamp, but... I think I've been using fear to hide behind. Fear of failing. Fear of getting hurt again. Fear of never getting back to who I was. And I need to deal with that fear."

Tenzin smiled fondly and sympathetically. He placed a hand on Korra's shoulder, "Korra, you are very wise. Looking inward is no easy task."

"I've... also thought of a way to maybe deal with this fear," Korra said.

"That's wonderful. What did you have in mind?"

Korra shifted uncomfortably for a moment, but then, she strengthened her resolve and spoke boldly, "I want to go see Zaheer."

Chapter Text

"Alright, go left!" Mako called out. He was dressed in red boxing gear.

"Ugh!" Wu cried out as he swung a punch. It didn't connect as Mako ducked. "Why do you keep ducking?!"

Mako smirked, "If you're in a real fight then your opponent won't let you hit them. My turn." He made a quick jab and landed into Wu's shoulder.

"Ow!" the prince yelped as he fell on the floor. "Who's idea was it to learn boxing anyway?"

"Mine," Mako said as he extended a gloved hand to help Wu up, "but it was you who wanted to learn how to defend yourself." Wu had asked Mako, which had been rather surprising in fact. Though some firebending moves made for excellent attacks even for nonbenders which is was why Mako had chosen boxing for Wu to learn them.

There was a brisk shuffling as someone made their way into the living room, "Mako! What do you think you're doing?!" Grandma Yin cried out. She scurried over to the prince, "You can't be so rough with Prince Wu!"

"It's okay Grandma Yin," Wu said.

Yin's eyes lit up at being called 'grandma'. "Oh Wu you are a true beacon of dignity and gracefulness." She turned to Mako, "Also, there's a call for you."

"Oh," Mako said. He didn't know who it was but walked through to the phone.

"And a courier came by with this," Yin handed Wu a green and gold envelope. "It looks so regal. I wonder who it could be?"

Wu studied the envelope. It had been sealed with a golden badgermole, the royal crest. He doubted that Grand Secretariat Gun would be posting him letters from his living quarters in the estate, which meant only one other likely person. "It's... my great aunt."

Yin early fainted at the news, "Oh spirits! What an honour! I can't tell you how happy I was to learn that Her Majesty Hou-Ting was still alive!"

After opening the letter, Wu scanned the page. "She... wants to meet with me. At the Earth Embassy."

While Yin started aahing and oohing and spinning around the room, Wu stared blankly at the page. His great aunt wanted to see him. She was the only blood he had left. But after everything that was going on in the Earth Kingdom, what could she possibly want? After all, she had sided with Kuvira, the person he was at war with. Still, there was only one way to find out what she wanted.

"Oh hey," Mako said as he ran back into the room. "That was Korra on the phone."

Wu quickly stashed the envelope into his boxing glove on the ground, "Oh?"

"She um... she's going to see someone. Someone dangerous. Asked if I wanted to come but..."

"It's alright. You should be there."

Mako looked genuinely surprised, "Are... are you sure? I mean, I am your bodyguard and after everything that's happened I can't just leave you."

Wu smiled, "The Yuyan are here too, and extra security from the United Forces. I'll be fine."

"... okay," Mako replied, still unsure what was happening. "Ah crap. My uniform is still at the dry cleaners."

"You don't have to wear it," Wu said.

Now things were strange. Wu not caring if Mako wasn't wearing his prison-looking outfit? "Okay, is everything alright Wu? I know you've been going through a lot and all."

Wu laughed, "Mako, it's just a uniform. I guess... after everything I just have different priorities now."

Mako looked sympathetically at Wu. "Okay, well, I promise I won't be too long!" he said while halfway out the doorway. "I'll be back soon!"

"Okay," Wu nodded. When he heard the front door slam shut, he pulled out the envelope again. He looked at the letter, staring at it while thinking of what to do.

Deep in the mountains outside Republic City, Korra stood in front of a massive stone entranceway. This place must've been an ancient temple or gathering place long before the United Republic formed. Now, it was a prison. Zaheer's prison.

Oogie sat near a river snaking around the hills, happily munching away on grass, oblivious to what was going to happen. Tenzin on the other hand, had worry etched into his face. "Korra, are you sure about this?"

Kya shook her head, "Tenzin, let Korra decide how to deal with this. Trust her."

"I get you're concerned," Korra said. "But you said I had to deal with this fear, and for that, I need to see him. If I see him locked up in chains, maybe... maybe I'll finally realise that he's not a threat anymore."

Another bison flew overhead, landing near the path inside the mountain. It was Mako; he'd hitched a ride with another Air Nomad. "Korra... are you really going to see him?" he asked while disembarking.

"Yeah, I need to."

Mako closed his eyes and exhaled, "Okay. What do you need me to do?"

"Just... be there. Waiting outside," Korra said. "I have to face him alone, but if I know I have friends outside it might make it easier."

Kya wrapped an arm around Korra, "Of course."

"We'll be here," Tenzin reassured.

Korra gave a last glance to the three of them. She turned towards the stone entrance, watching the massive doors opening with a deep rumbling sound. The White Lotus sentries gave a nod as Korra stepped into the chamber.

The cave had been carved into the mountain, with designs and patterns leading the way further inside. Korra jumped as the doors closed behind. Green crystals lit the way down a pathway straight ahead, until Korra reached another pair of sentries and an elevator.

"This way Avatar."

Korra nodded.

While in the elevator, Korra's nerves started to sink in even more. Sweat ran down her neck, and her legs felt like they would give way. She didn't know if it were really Zaheer causing all this anxiety or if it was her being anxious about being anxious, but either way, being confined in the small elevator wasn't helping.

She felt a hand on her shoulder, "The entire prison is surrounded by refined metal hidden in the rock," a sentry explained. Obviously Korra's anxiety wasn't going unnoticed. "No metalbender can break in, nor can the prisoner escape. He's in platinum shackles."

Korra breathed in deeply, and then exhaled.

After descending several stories deep underground, Korra walked over to the final barrier. Two metalbenders grabbed hold of massive chains, pulling them downwards and opening the door.

"Go inside and we'll shut the outer door. Then, the door to the prison will open. Knock when you want to return."

This was it. Korra paused, and then took a step forwards. Then another. She had to do this. She had to get back to who she was. She heard the door clunk behind her, and the light disappeared as it shut completely. As the next door started opening, a green glow slowly seeped into the chamber as the final door opened.

And there he was. Straight ahead of her was the man who had done all this to her. The man who had caused all this pain and suffering in her life. Sent her on this path of recovery that hadn't even ended three years later.

Zaheer.

Korra froze for a moment. The room ahead was large, with decorative stone designs running along the high roof. There was a metal plate surrounded by four green lanterns, giving off enough light to illuminate the middle of the room. Attached to the plate were four chains, each bound to Zaheer's arms and legs. Though the airbender wasn't flat on the ground; instead, he floated like some ghost or spirit, in a lotus position meditating, his eyes shut.

Floating. The airbending technique of flight. It sent a rush of memories through Korra's head. Zaheer flying around, sweeping her off the plateau. Getting caught in his air funnel. Having the air pulled from her lungs.

No.

No more.

This was it.

Somehow, Korra's foot took a step forward. Then the other. She pushed through the fear and found herself planted right in front of the metal plate. Zaheer was still a good few metres away. But close enough that she could see his long hair had started greying a little more in the front.

And then, she heard his voice.

"You must be desperate if you've come to see me."

His voice didn't phase Korra for some reason. Maybe she truly had found her resolve? She narrowed her eyes, staring at him with a boldness she found deep inside, "I came here to tell you that you have no hold over me any longer. I'm no longer afraid of you."

Finally, Zaheer opened his eyes. He started down at Korra, studying her. In an instant, he flew forwards and cried out. Korra yelped and jumped backwards, though Zaheer couldn't reach her. He started cackling, "You still seem pretty scared to me, Avatar."

Maybe this was a mistake. Maybe she wasn't ready to face Zaheer yet. Korra took a step backwards, and then another, inching herself away from the floating man.

"I know why you're here, Avatar; you can't go into the Spirit World."

He was right; when Korra tried to meditate into the Spirit World she'd been thrown back into her previous memories of their fight. Instead, Tenzin and Opal had managed to get everyone out of the spirit vines. "How... how did you know?"

Zaheer floated higher into the air, "I spend a lot of time in the Spirit World. The Avatar's presence hasn't been felt for many years."

So he knew about her failings. Perhaps he also knew about this block in her chakras, her failings to use the Avatar State to its fullest. She'd come all this way to see Zaheer and now she had no idea what to say or ask. Maybe she just had to let it all out. Korra felt her eyes grow warm, "Why?" she croaked. "Why did you have to poison me?" She wiped away her tears. She wouldn't give him any victory. "Everything that has gone wrong in my life has been because of you! You... you tried to kill me! You poisoned me! And now I'm not the Avatar I used to be!"

"The world lives in chaos. No one can control what happens to them, but only, how they respond."

"Yeah, keep telling yourself that so you don't have to take the blame!"

Zaheer opened his eyes, "I do take responsibility. I wanted to end the Avatar cycle."

"But why?!" Korra yelled. "Why did you have to do it? All you did was throw my life into this... this... downward spiral that I can't seem to get out of no matter how hard I try."

"You know my convictions," Zaheer said bluntly.

Korra felt an anger burn inside, "Convictions?! Your convictions were nonsense! You thought that by taking out the Earth Queen you'd be saving the Earth Kingdom, but all it did was create a vacuum which is now occupied by Kuvira! An even worse dictator. Oh yeah, and guess what? Hou-Ting isn't even dead! She aligned herself with Kuvira and they've swallowed up the entire nation! What good were your convictions if everything you worked towards failed! You... you poisoned me for nothing...," Korra let out a sob.

She expected some comeback, some deep, intellectual answer. But she got none. Instead, she saw Zaheer looked deeply saddened at everything she said. "You're right. It was for nothing," Zaheer replied as he closed his eyes. "I lost my closest friends, Ming-Hua and Ghazan. I lost... the woman I loved. And it didn't change anything."

Korra almost felt sorry for him. His face was contorted with grief, maybe even guilt. "So you're not working with this latest batch of Red Lotus members? The woman with silver bladed fans? Or any of the others? The one who calls himself 'Grand Lotus'?

"Daiyu," Zaheer said. "She and her siblings were barely toddlers last I saw them. And the Grand Lotus helped make me who I was," he added. "But I haven't felt his presence in the Spirit World either. He's closed himself off to me."

"Who are they? And what is this device they're working on supposed to do?"

Zaheer narrowed his eyes, "I don't know. But I wouldn't sell them out either. I've already been questioned by the White Lotus and I won't be answering your questions either, Avatar."

Korra scoffed, turning away from Zaheer. Not only had she not dealt with her fear, but she also couldn't get any information out of Zaheer. This visit was a waste of time. "I thought seeing you would put all of this away. But maybe it's time that I accepted... that I'll never be the same."

"Neither of us are the same," Zaheer answered. "I lost my friends, I no longer believe in the goals of the organisation that raised me. I gained the power of flight, but now, I'm stuck in chains, tethered to the ground." He spun back around to Korra, "You want to get back to the Avatar you were before, but that person can never come back. Too much has happened."

"Then what am I even doing here?" Korra said. She shook her head, a hint of desperation creeping in her voice. "I don't know what I'm doing anymore. Nothing I do is working. And if I can't get back to where I was, then how will I ever fix this?"

"Chaos cannot be controlled. That is the lie the old you held onto," Zaheer said.

Korra was angrier now, "That's my job as the Avatar; to prevent chaos and bring balance! And I can't do it unless I get over this block!"

Zaheer didn't say anymore. He stared off to the side of the rocky chamber, pondering something. "Maybe I can help with that."

"What?" Korra nearly laughed.

"I want Kuvira and Hou-Ting to be stopped. And you need to heal from this spiritual block," Zaheer looked Korra dead in the eyes. "So let me guide you into the Spirit World."

"No way," Korra blurted out. "There's no way I can trust you. And didn't you throw your ally Aiwei into some trance?"

"Aiwei had become a liability," Zaheer answered. "And you don't have a choice. You wouldn't be here if you had any other options."

Korra didn't want to admit it, but Zaheer did have a point. Nothing else she had tried had worked. And this spiritual block could be the key to getting herself back on track. Maybe not the same as she once was, but maybe enough to be able to use the Avatar State again. To be able to connect to Raava again. But with everything Zaheer had done to her, how could she trust him? Korra sighed deeply. She had no choice. "Alright. I'll give it a go."

"Okay," Zaheer said. He kept himself hovering in the air, while Korra copied his meditative position on the ground. "Let your mind be still. Focus first on your surroundings."

Korra breathed in, and then out. In, and out.

"Then follow my voice. Clear your mind."

Again, Korra steadied her breathing. She felt her mind start to drift away. Though it didn't go far. Her thoughts kept pulling her back into the present, to the material world. "I... I can't. It's not working."

She heard Zaheer's calm voice echo into the room. Though to Korra, it was still terrifying. "Breathe. Relax."

"It's a bit hard to, after you know, everything you've done to me," Korra snapped.

"Accept what has happened. If you can't make peace with the past then you won't be free from fear in the present."

She breathed in deeply, and then exhaled, repeating the same pattern until her mind felt the slightest bit of ease again. She had meditated into the Spirit World before, and she had to try do it again.

This time, she felt her spirit drift away. But when she opened her eyes, once again, she was in her memories. On top of the plateau. With Zaheer looking down at her from the sky.

"No...," Korra wailed.

"Let it play out."

She spun around looking for Zaheer's voice; it wasn't coming from the Zaheer in front of her, but elsewhere. That must be the ''real'' Zaheer she was meditating with.

"It's already happened. Let it play out."

"I... can't. It's too painful."

"You have to."

Korra winced. She felt the air funnel constrict around her body. She felt herself gasping for air. In a flash she was falling, falling through the sky, headed straight for the base of the canyon.

But Korra didn't hit the ground; it broke away as she neared it. She peeked her eyes open just a smidgen, looking around at where she was. The pieces of earth reformed into spirits. Spirits. Korra's eyes fully opened. She was in the Spirit World.

Her form floated down gently onto a soft patch of grass. Strange plants were all around, green and giant seedlike foliage that sprouted every so often across the field. To her right was a forest with blue and purple ferns leading the way. The unfamiliar and ethereal sounds of all kinds of beings drifted through the air. She was back.

And standing in front of her was the man who had helped her. Zaheer smiled, "Welcome back, Avatar."